*nix Documentation Project
·  Home
 +   man pages
·  Linux HOWTOs
·  FreeBSD Tips
·  *niX Forums

  man pages->IRIX man pages              
Title
Content
Arch
Section
 
 Tk/3dborder(3) -- draw borders with three-dimensional appearance
    Tcl_Interp *interp (in) Interpreter to use for error reporting. Tk_Window tkwin (in) Token for window (for all | procedures except Tk_Get3DBorder, | must be the window for which the | border was allocated). Tk_Uid colorName (in) Textual description of color corresponding to background (flat areas). Illuminated edges will be brighter than this and shadowed edges will be darker than this. Drawable drawable (in) X token for window or pixmap; indicates where graphics are to be drawn. Must either be ...
 a64l(3c) -- convert between long integer and base-64 ASCII string
    These functions are used to maintain numbers stored in base-64 ASCII characters. This is a notation by which long integers can be represented by up to six characters; each character represents a ``digit'' in a radix-64 notation. The characters used to represent ``digits'' are . for 0, / for 1, 0 through 9 for 2-11, A through Z for 12-37, and a through z for 38-63. a64l takes a pointer to a null-terminated base-64 representation and returns a corresponding long value. If the string pointed to...
 ABIinfo(3c) -- query system environment for features
    ABIinfo queries whether a particular MIPS ABI feature indicated by selector is available on the target system, and if so, which version. A return value of -1 indicates that the feature represented by the selector is not present. A valid return value indicates that the feature is present, and the value indicates the version of MIPS Processor ABI Conformance Guide in which that version of the feature is documented. The return values and their meanings are listed in the <...
 abilock(3x) -- ABI mutual exclusion primitives
    These routines provide a simple, standard interface to base level mutual exclusion primitives. They are found in the library ``libmutex.so'', and is loaded if the option ``-lmutex'' is used with cc(1) or ld(1). The parameter lck must point to memory shared by all processes wishing to acquire or test the lock. The contents of the structure abilock_t are as follows: typedef struct { unsigned int abi_lock; } abilock_t; The function init_lock must be called on a lock befo...
 f90/abort(3) -- terminate Fortran program
    abort terminates the program which calls it, closing all open files truncated to the current position of the file pointer. The abort usually results in a core dump.
 ftn/abort(3) -- terminate Fortran program
    abort terminates the program which calls it, closing all open files truncated to the current position of the file pointer. The abort usually results in a core dump.
 abort(3c) -- generate an abnormal termination signal
    abort first closes all open files, stdio(3S) streams, directory streams and message catalogue descriptors, if possible, then causes the signal SIGABRT to be sent to the calling process.
 f90/abs(3) -- FORTRAN absolute value
    abs is the family of absolute value functions. iabs returns the integer absolute value of its integer argument. It accepts either integer*2 or integer*4 arguments and the result is the same type. dabs returns the double-precision absolute value of its double-precision argument. qabs returns the real*16 absolute value of its real*16 argument. cabs returns the complex absolute value of its complex argument. zabs returns the double-complex absolute value of its double-complex argument. cqabs return...
 ftn/abs(3) -- FORTRAN absolute value
    abs is the family of absolute value functions. iabs returns the integer absolute value of its integer argument. It accepts either integer*2 or integer*4 arguments and the result is the same type. dabs returns the double-precision absolute value of its double-precision argument. qabs returns the real*16 absolute value of its real*16 argument. cabs returns the complex absolute value of its complex argument. zabs returns the double-complex absolute value of its double-complex argument. cqabs return...
 abs(3c) -- return integer absolute value
    abs and labs return the absolute value of their int or long int operand.
 standard/acbuf(3) -- operate on the accumulation buffer
    op expects one of six symbolic constants: AC_CLEAR: The red, green, blue, and alpha accumulation buffer contents are all set to value (rounded to the nearest integer). value is clamped to the range of the accumulation buffer. AC_ACCUMULATE: Pixels are taken from the current readsource bank (front, back, or zbuffer). If this buffer has color component resolutions of other than 8 bits, the components are rescaled to the range [0,255]. Then the red, green, blue, and alpha components are each scaled...
 accept(3n) -- accept a connection on a socket
    The argument s is a socket that has been created with socket and bound to an address with bind, and that is listening for connections after a call to listen. accept extracts the first connection on the queue of pending connections, creates a new socket with the properties of s, and allocates a new file descriptor, ns, for the socket. If no pending connections are present on the queue and the socket is not marked as non-blocking, <...
 f90/achar(3) -- Returns the character in a specified position of the ASCII collating sequence
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 acl_copy_ext(3c) -- copy ACL from system to user space or from user to system space
    acl_copy_ext sets *bufp to *aclp if the arguments are valid. acl_copy_int allocates a struct acl and copies the struct acl pointed to by *bufp into it, if the arguments are valid. The storage should be freed by calling acl_free(3c) when no longer needed. In the POSIX specifications, the internal form of an ACL may be different from the external form, hence the need for these functions. In IRIX, both forms are the same....
 acl_delete_def_file(3c) -- delete the default ACL for a named directory
    Deletes the default ACL associated with the directory specified in path. The effective UID of the process must match the owner of the directory or the process must have appropriate privilege to delete the default ACL from path_p. If capabilities are not enabled, only the superuser can delete the default ACL from a directory not owned by the effective UID. If _POSIX_CAP is in effect, then the appropriate capability shall include CAP_FOWNER. In addition, if _POSIX_MAC is in effect, then the proces...
 acl_dup(3c) -- make a copy of an ACL
    Returns a pointer to an allocated ACL that is a copy of the ACL supplied as an argument.
 acl_free(3c) -- free allocated memory
    Free memory allocated by ACL interface calls. This routine is present for POSIX compliance, it is simply a wrapper for free(3c).
 acl_from_text(3c) -- convert a POSIX ACL string to a struct acl or a struct acl to a POSIX ACL string
    These routines convert strings defined by the POSIX P1003.1e specifications (see chacl(1) acl(4)) to/from struct acl, which is the internal format for an Access Control List (see acl(4)).
 acl_get_fd(3c) -- get or set the ACL associated with an open file
    acl_get_fd returns a pointer to an allocated struct acl associated with the open file referred to by fd. If _POSIX_MAC is in effect, then the process must have MAC read access to the object. acl_set_fd sets the ACL for the open file referred to by fd from the struct acl pointed to by aclp. The effective UID of the process must match the owner of the object or the process must have appropriate privilege to set the access ACL on the object. If _POSIX_CAP is in effect, then the appropriate capabili...
 acl_get_file(3c) -- get or set the ACL for a pathname
    acl_get_file returns a pointer to an allocated struct acl associated with the pathname pointed to by path. type determines whether the default ACL (type == ACL_TYPE_DEFAULT) or access ACL (type == ACL_TYPE_ACCESS) is returned. The default ACL is available only for directories. If there is no default ACL associated with the specified directory, an ACL containing zero entries is returned. If _POSIX_MAC is in effect, then the process must have MAC read access to the object. acl_set_file sets the AC...
 acl_size(3c) -- return the size of an ACL
    Returns the size of an ACL pointed to by aclp. In IRIX ACLs are all a fixed size, but the POSIX specifications allow for the possibility of variable sized structures.
 acl_valid(3c) -- validate an ACL
    Check that the format of an ACL is valid. First, aclp must be non null. The three required entries (ACL_USER_OBJ, ACL_GROUP_OBJ, and ACL_OTHER) must exist exactly once in the ACL. If the ACL contains any ACL_USER, ACL_GROUP, or any implementation-defined entries in the file group class, then one ACL_MASK entry is required. The ACL may contain at most one ACL_MASK entry. The qualifier field must be unique among all entries of the same type....
 ftn/acos(3) -- trigonometric functions and their inverses
    The single-precision and long double-precision routines listed above are only available in the standard math library, -lm, and in -lmx. sin, cos and tan return trigonometric functions of radian arguments x for double data types. fsin, fcos and ftan, and their ANSI-named counterparts sinf, cosf and tanf return trigonometric functions of radian TRIG(3M) TRIG(3M) arguments x for float data types. sinl, cosl and tanl do the same for long double data types. The asin routines return the arc sine in th...
 standard/acsize(3) -- specify the number of bitplanes per color component in the accumulation buffer
    planes specifies the number of bitplanes to be reserved for each color component in the accumulation buffer. Accepted values are 0 (default) and 16.
 Tcl/adderrinfo(3) -- record information about errors
    Tcl_Interp *interp (in) Interpreter in which to record information. char *message (in) Identifying string to record in errorInfo variable. char *element (in) String to record as one element of errorCode variable. Last element argument must be NULL.
 addsev(3c) -- define additional severities
    The function addsev defines additional severities for use in subsequent calls to pfmt or lfmt. addsev associates an integer value int_val in the range [5-255] with a character string. It overwrites any previous string association between int_val and string. If int_val is ORed with the flags passed to subsequent calls to pfmt or lfmt, string will be used as the severity. Passing a N.ULL string removes the severity...
 addseverity(3c) -- build a list of severity levels for an application for use with fmtmsg
    The addseverity function builds a list of severity levels for an application to be used with the message formatting facility, fmtmsg. severity is an integer value indicating the seriousness of the condition, and string is a pointer to a string describing the condition (string is not limited to a specific size). If addseverity is called with an integer value that has not been previously defined, the function adds ...
 standard/addtopup(3) -- adds items to an existing pop-up menu
    pup expects the menu identifier of the menu to which you want to add. The menu identifier is the returned function value of the menu creation call to either newpup or defpup functions. str expects a pointer to the text that you want to add as a menu item. In addition, you have the option of pairing an "item type" flag with each menu item. There are seven menu item type flags: %t marks item text as the menu title string. %F invokes a routine for every selection from this menu except those marke...
 f90/adjustl(3) -- Adjusts a character string to the left
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/adjustr(3) -- Adjusts a character string to the right
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 audiofile/AFclosefile(3d) -- close an audio file, update file header if file was opened for write access.
    file is the AFfilehandle structure for the audio file you want to close. This structure is the returned value of the afOpenFile(3dm) call.
 audiofile/AFfreefilesetup(3d) -- deallocates an AFfilesetup structure
    setup is an AFfilesetup structure, previously created by a call to afNewFileSetup(3dm).
 audiofile/AFgetaeschanneldata(3d) -- get/set AES channel status information in an AFfilehandle structure for an audio track
    file expects an AFfilehandle structure, previously created by a call to afOpenFile(3dm). track expects an integer which identifies the audio track in the file. Since all currently supported file formats allow at most one audio track per file, the constant value AF_DEFAULT_TRACK should always be used for this argument for now. buf is a data buffer used to pass the 24 bytes of AES channel status data to afSetAESChannelData(), or to obtain the 24 bytes of AES channel status data from afGetAESChanne...
 audiofile/AFgetchannels(3d) -- get the number of interleaved track / virtual channels from an AFfilehandle structure for an audio track
    file is an AFfilehandle structure, previously created by a call to afOpenFile(3dm). track is an integer which identifies the audio track in the file. Since all currently supported file formats allow at most one audio track per file, the constant value AF_DEFAULT_TRACK should always be used for this argument.
 audiofile/AFgetcompression(3d) -- get the compression type and parameters for an audio track from an AFfilehandle structure
    file expects an AFfilehandle structure, previously created by a call to afOpenFile(3dm). trackid is an integer which identifies an audio track in the file. Since all currently supported file formats allow at most one audio track per file, the value AF_DEFAULT_TRACK should always be used for this argument for now. compression is a pointer to an integer which will be filled in with the symbolic constant indicating which compression scheme used for the specified audio track. pvlist is an AUpvlist s...
 audiofile/AFgetfd(3d) -- get the Unix file descriptor for the file associated with an AFfilehandle structure
    file is an AFfilehandle structure for the audio file whose file descriptor you wish to obtain. This structure is the returned value of an afOpenFile(3dm) call.
 audiofile/afGetFormatParams(3d) -- get the audio data format in an AFfilehandle for a specified audio track via dmParams
    file is an AFfilehandle structure, previously created by a call to afOpenFile(3dm) or afOpenFD(3dm). track is an integer which identifies an audio track in handle. Since all currently supported file formats contain only one audio track, the value AF_DEFAULT_TRACK should used here for now. params a DMparams list, previously created by a call to dmParamsCreate(3dm).
 audiofile/AFgetframecnt(3d) -- get the total sample frame count / data bytes / data offset for a specified audio track from an AFfilehandle s
    file is an AFfilehandle structure, previously created by a call to afOpenFile(3dm). track is an integer which identifies an audio track in file. Since all currently supported file formats contain exactly one audio track per file, the constant AF_DEFAULT_TRACK should always be used here.
 audiofile/afGetFrameSize(3d) -- get the track / virtual frame size in bytes for a specified audio track from an AFfilehandle structure
    file is an AFfilehandle structure, previously created by a call to afOpenFile(3dm). track is an integer which identifies an audio track in file. extend3to4 is a integer boolean value (i.e., 0 or 1) indicating whether the routine should extend the value of the frame size for 24-bit uncompressed data out to 32 bits. Since all currently supported file formats contain exactly one audio track per file, the constant AF_DEFAULT_TRACK should always be used here for now....
 audiofile/AFgetinstids(3d) -- get a list of instrument configurations from an AFfilehandle
    file expects an AFfilehandle structure, created when an audio file was opened by a call to afOpenFile(3dm). instids an array of integer locations used to return a list of (unique) positive instrument ID's which can be used to reference the sampler configurations in a file. For an AIFF/AIFF-C file, this array will return the ID AF_DEFAULT_INST if there is an instrument chunk. If you pass a null instids array to afGetInstIDs(), it simply returns the number of sampler configurations stored in the ...
 audiofile/AFgetinstparamlong(3d) -- get / set a parameter list / long parameter value for an instrument configuration in an AFfilehandle structure
    file is an AFfilehandle structure, previously created by a call to afOpenFile(3dm). instid is a positive integer which identifies an instrument configuration in the file. Since the number of supported inst chunks varies with file format, applications should always retrieve this value via afGetInstIDs(3dm). pvlist is an AUpvlist structure, previously created by a call to AUpvnew(3dm) nparams is an integer value specifying the number of {parameter, value} item pairs (containing the instrument para...
 audiofile/AFgetloopids(3d) -- get a number and list of loop ID's for an instrument configuration
    file expects an AFfilehandle structure, created when an audio file is opened by a call to afOpenFile(3dm) or its equivalent. instid is an integer which identifies a chunk of instrument parameters contained in file. Since the number of supported inst chunks varies with file format, applications should always retrieve this value via afGetInstIDs(3dm). loopids is an array of integer locations used to return a list of (unique) positive loop id's for the given instrument chunk. If loopids is a null ...
 audiofile/AFgetloopstart(3d) -- get the start/end markers, play mode, and track from an AFfilehandle structure for a specified loop.
    file is an AFfilehandle structure, previously created by a call to afOpenFile(3dm). instid is a positive integer value which identifies an instrument configuration in file. Since the number of supported inst chunks varies with file format, applications should always retrieve this value via afGetInstIDs(3dm). loopid is a positive integer value which identifies a loop structure in an instrument parameter chunk. You obtain loopid's by calling afGetInstParamLong(3dm) for AIFF and AIFF-C formats, or...
 audiofile/afGetLoopStartFrame(3d) -- get the start/end frame and loop count from an AFfilehandle structure for a specified loop.
    file is an AFfilehandle structure, previously created by a call to afOpenFile(3dm). instid is a positive integer value which identifies an instrument configuration in file. instid should be an element from an array of IDs retrieved via a call to afGetInstIDs(3dm). loopid is a positive integer value which identifies a loop structure in an instrument parameter chunk. You obtain loopid's by calling afGetLoopIDs(3dm)....
 audiofile/AFgetmarkids(3d) -- get the number and list of marker ID's for an audio track
    file is an AFfilehandle structure, created when an audio file was opened by a call to afOpenFile(3dm). trackid is an integer which identifies an audio track contained in file. All currently supported file formats contain exactly one track, so always use the constant value AF_DEFAULT_TRACK for now. markids is an array of integer locations used to return a list of unique positive marker id's which can be used to reference the marker structures for track....
 audiofile/AFgetmarkname(3d) -- get the name or comment string for a given marker id in an audio track
    file is an AFfilehandle structure, previously created by a call to afOpenFile(3dm). trackid is a positive integer value which identifies an audio track in file. All currently supported file formats allow exactly one audio track per file, so the value AF_DEFAULT_TRACK should always be used here for now. markid is a positive integer value which identifies a marker structure in the audio track given by trackid. You obtain marker ID's by calling afGetMarkIDs(3dm). You can call afInitMarkIDs(3dm) to...
 audiofile/AFgetmarkpos(3d) -- get/set the position of a marker in an audio track
    file is an AFfilehandle structure, previously created by a call to afOpenFile(3dm). trackid expects a positive integer value which identifies an audio track in file. All currently supported file formats allow exactly one track per file, so the constant AF_DEFAULT_TRACK should always be used here for now. markid is a positive integer value which identifies a marker structure in the audio track given by trackid. You obtain marker ID's by calling afGetMarkIDs(3dm). You can call afInitMarkIDs(3dm) ...
 audiofile/AFgetmiscids(3d) -- get number and list of miscellaneous chunk ID's for a file, get the data type and size for a miscellaneous dat
    file is an AFfilehandle structure, created when an audio file was opened by a call to afOpenFile(3dm). miscids[] is an array of integer locations used to return a list of unique positive miscellaneous chunk ID's which can be used to reference the miscellaneous chunks in a file. chunkid is a miscellaneous chunk id from the miscids[] list returned by afGetMiscIDs().
 audiofile/afGetPCMMapping(3d) -- get the track / virtual PCM mapping values for a specified audio track from an AFfilehandle structure
    file is an AFfilehandle structure, previously created by a call to afOpenFile(3dm). track is an integer which identifies an audio track in file. Since all currently supported file formats contain exactly one audio track per file, the constant AF_DEFAULT_TRACK should always be used here for now. slope is a pointer to a double precision floating point value which specifies the amplitude scaling factor for the audio waveform associated with track intercept is a pointer to a double precision floatin...
 audiofile/AFgetrate(3d) -- get the track/virtual sample rate for a specified audio track from an AFfilehandle structure
    file is an AFfilehandle structure, previously created by a call to afOpenFile(3dm). track is an integer which identifies the audio track in the file. Since all currently supported file formats contain exactly 1 audio track per file, the value AF_DEFAULT_TRACK should always be used for this argument for now.
 audiofile/AFgetsampfmt(3d) -- get the track / virtual sample format or byte order for a specified audio track from an AFfilehandle structure
    file expects an AFfilehandle structure, previously created when an audio file was opened by a call to afOpenFile(3dm) or afOpenFD(3dm). track expects an integer which identifies the audio track in the file. Since all file formats currently supported by the audio file library allow at most one audio track per file, the value AF_DEFAULT_TRACK should always be used for this argument. sampfmt is a pointer to an integer location. The routine uses this location to return a symbolic integer constant de...
 audiofile/AFgettrackids(3d) -- get the list of track descriptor id's for the given AFfilehandle
    file expects an AFfilehandle structure, created when an audio file was opened by a call to afOpenFile(). trackids expects an array of integer locations used to return a list of (unique) positive track id's which can be used to reference the audio tracks in a file. If trackids is a null pointer, afGetTrackIDs() will simply return the number of tracks in the file. This value can be used to allocate a trackids array, which can in turn be passed back to afGetTrackIDs()....
 audiofile/AFidentifyfd(3d) -- retrieve the audio file format of a file descriptor / open AFfilehandle
    fd is a Unix file descriptor returned by a call to open(2) or its equivalent. filename is the full pathname of the file whose fd was passed as the first argument. implemented is a pointer to integer which will have its value set to 0 or 1 by afIdentifyNamedFD(). file is an AFfilehandle structure, previously created by a call to afOpenFile(3dm). vers is used to return a file format version number. The AIFF-C format includes a file chunk which contains a version number. AIFF does not contain a ver...
 audiofile/AFinitaeschanneldata(3d) -- set a flag in an AFfilesetup so that storage space for AES channel status data is reserved in / removed from a
    setup is an AFfilesetup structure, previously created by a call to afNewFileSetup(3dm). track is an integer identifier which identifies an audio track in setup. For now, the constant value AF_DEFAULT_TRACK should always be used for this argument. usedata is a flag indicating whether AES data will be stored in the file.
 audiofile/AFinitcompression(3d) -- configure the audio compression type and parameters in an AFfilesetup structure for an audio track
    setup is an AFfilesetup structure, previously created by a call to afNewFileSetup(3dm). track is a positive integer which identifies an audio track in a file configuration. Since all currently supported file formats contain one audio track per file, the constant value AF_DEFAULT_TRACK should always be used here. compression is a positive integer symbolic constant which indicates the type of audio compression for the audio track. pvlist is an AUpvlist structure, previously created by a call to AU...
 audiofile/afInitDataOffset(3d) -- initialize the audio data byte
    setup is an AFfilesetup structure, previously created by a call to afNewFileSetup(3dm). track is an integer which identifies an audio track in setup. Since all currently supported file formats contain only one audio track, the value AF_DEFAULT_TRACK should always be used here. offset is a positive value which specifies the offset in bytes for the audio data associated with track. The data type AFfileoffset is large enough to hold any data offset allowed by the filesystem. count is a positive val...
 audiofile/AFinitfilefmt(3d) -- initialize the audio file format type in an AFfilesetup structure
    setup is an AFfilesetup structure, previously created by a call to afNewFileSetup(3dm). filefmt is a symbolic integer constant which specifies an audio file format supported by the audio file library.
 audiofile/afInitFormatParams(3d) -- initialize the audio data format in an AFfilesetup for a specified audio track via dmParams
    setup is an AFfilesetup structure, previously created by a call to afNewFileSetup(3dm). track is an integer which identifies an audio track in setup. Since all currently supported file formats contain only one audio track, the value AF_DEFAULT_TRACK should be used here for now. params a DMparams list, previously created by a call to dmParamsCreate(3dm).
 audiofile/AFinitinstids(3d) -- specify a list of instrument parameter chunk identifiers to be stored in an AFfilesetup structure.
    setup is an AFfilesetup structure, previously created by a call to afNewFileSetup(3dm). instids is an array of positive integer ID's which are used to reference instrument configurations in a file after it is created by afOpenFile(3dm). ninsts is the number of instrument configurations requested in setup. For AIFF-C (AIFF), this number should be either 0 or 1. The various other file formats supported by the Audio File Library have different support different numbers of instrument configurations...
 audiofile/AFinitloopids(3d) -- initialize a list of loop ID's for a given instrument in an AFfilesetup structure
    setup expects an AFfilesetup structure, previously created by a call to afNewFileSetup(3dm). inst is an integer which identifies an instrument configuration to be included in a new file when the file is created. Of the currently supported audio file formats, only AIFF-C (AIFF) files contain instrument configurations, with a maximum of one per file. For this reason, the value AF_DEFAULT_INST should always be used for this argument for now. loopids is an array of unique positive integer values to ...
 audiofile/AFinitmarkids(3d) -- specify a list of marker ID's for a new audio file in an AFfilesetup structure
    setup is an AFfilesetup structure, previously created by a call to afNewFileSetup(3dm). trackid is an integer which specifies an audio track in the file configuration. Since all currently supported audio file formats contain exactly one audio track, the value AF_DEFAULT_TRACK should always be used here for now. markids is an array of unique positive integer values to be used as handles for the marker structures in a file which is opened with setup. You typically allocate four marker structures s...
 audiofile/AFinitmarkname(3d) -- initialize the name/comment for a specified marker in an AFfilesetup structure
    setup is an AFfilesetup structure, previously created by a call to afNewFileSetup(3dm). track is a positive integer value which specifies an audio track in a file configuration. Since all currently supported file formats contain exactly one audio track, the value AF_DEFAULT_TRACK should always be used here for now. markid a positive integer value which identifies a marker structure configured into track previously by afInitMarkIDs(3dm). namestr is a character string which will be written into th...
 audiofile/AFinitmiscids(3d) -- initialize the list of miscellaneous data chunk ID's in an AFfilesetup file configuration structure, initializ
    setup is an AFfilesetup structure, previously created by a call to afNewFileSetup(). miscids is an array of (unique) positive integer ID's which are used to reference miscellaneous data chunks in a new audio file after it is created by passing setup to afOpenFile(3dm). nmisc The total number of miscellaneous chunks in the file configuration. See the audio file format man pages aifc(4), next(4), wave(4), bicsf(4), and sounddesigner2(4) for formatspecific information. chunkid is one of the chunk ...
 audiofile/afInitPCMMapping(3d) -- configure the PCM mapping for an audio track in an AFfilesetup structure
    setup expects an AFfilesetup structure, previously created by a call to afNewFileSetup(3dm). track is an integer which identifies an audio track in setup. Since all currently supported file formats contain one audio track, the value AF_DEFAULT_TRACK should always be used here. slope is a positive double-precision floating point value which specifies an amplitude scaling factor for the waveform to be associated with track. intercept is a positive, negative, or zero double-precision floating point...
 audiofile/AFinitsampfmt(3d) -- initialize the audio data format in an AFfilesetup for a specified audio track
    setup is an AFfilesetup structure, previously created by a call to afNewFileSetup(3dm). track is an integer which identifies an audio track in setup. Since all currently supported file formats contain only one audio track, the value AF_DEFAULT_TRACK should always be used here. sampfmt an integer constant which denotes a sample format. sampwidth a positive integer value which specifies the number of bits in a sample data point. channels is a positive integer value which indicates the number of in...
 audiofile/AFinittrackids(3d) -- initialize the list of audio track identifiers in an AFfilesetup structure.
    setup is an AFfilesetup structure, previously created by a call to afNewFileSetup(3dm). trackids is an array of positive integer id's which are handles for audio tracks in a new file after it is opened with write access. Since all currently supported file formats contain only one audio track, the trackids array should always contain one ID, AF_DEFAULT_TRACK. ntracks The number of audio tracks in the file configuration. For all currently supported file formats, ntracks is always 1....
 audiofile/AFintro(3d) -- Introduction to the Silicon Graphics Audio File Library (AF)
    The Silicon Graphics Audio File Library (AF) provides a uniform programming interface to standard digital audio file formats. Thirteen audio file formats are currently supported by the library: Extended AIFF-C standard AIFF (older version) NeXT/Sun SND/AU WAVE (RIFF) Berkeley/IRCAM/CARL SoundFile MPEG1 audio bitstream Sound Designer II Audio Visual Research Amiga IFF/8SVX SampleVision VOC SoundFont2 Raw (headerless) Note that the library will continue to support additional file formats and data ...
 audiofile/AFnewfilesetup(3d) -- create and initialize an AFfilesetup structure
    An opaque AFfilesetup structure initialized to the default configuration for a new audio file opened with write access, or for opening a raw (headerless) audio file for read access.
 audiofile/AFopenfile(3d) -- allocate an AFfilehandle structure for an audio file identified by name / by a Unix file descriptor
    name A character string which names the audio file to be opened. fd A Unix file descriptor corresponding to an audio data file which has been previously returned by open(2) or its equivalent. mode This parameter identifies whether the file is to be opened for reading or writing audio sample data and header information. Acceptable values: "r" configures the file descriptor for read-only access "w" configures the file descriptor for write-only access The current library implementation causes e...
 audiofile/afQuery(3d) -- retrieve static parameters associated with the Audio File Library formats
    querytype is an integer value token representing the type of query being made. arg1,...arg4 are integer value tokens representing the query selectors and/or subtypes. The number of meaningful arguments to the afQuery routines varies with the querytype.
 audiofile/AFreadframes(3d) -- read sample frames from a specified audio track in an audio file
    file is the AFfilehandle structure for the audio file from which audio sample data will be read. This structure is usually the returned value of a call to afOpenFile(3dm). track is an integer which identifies an audio track in a file. Since all currently supported file formats allow at most one audio track per file, the value AF_DEFAULT_TRACK should always be used for this argument for now. samples is a pointer to a buffer into which you want to transfer the samples read from the audio file. Not...
 audiofile/AFreadmisc(3d) -- read from / write to / move logical read/write pointer for data in a miscellaneous chunk in an audio file
    file expects the AFfilehandle structure for the audio file from or to which you want to read or write data. This structure is returned by afOpenFile(3dm) call. miscid expects an integer which identifies the miscellaneous data chunk you want to read from or write to. buf expects a pointer to a buffer which will receive a copy of the miscellaneous data from the file, or which contains the data you want to transfer into the file. nbytes is the number of bytes of data you want to read from the file ...
 audiofile/afSaveFilePosition(3d) -- save and retrieve logical audio sample read pointer
    file is an AFfilehandle structure, previously returned by afOpenFile(3dm) or afOpenFD(3dm).
 audiofile/AFseekframe(3d) -- move logical file read pointer for a specified audio track to a desired sample frame location / retrieve curre
    file is an AFfilehandle structure, previously returned by afOpenFile(3dm), afOpenFD(3dm), or afOpenNamedFD(3dm). track is an integer which identifies an audio track within a file which is open for read access. Since all currently supported file formats contain one audio track per file, the constant value AF_DEFAULT_TRACK should always be used here for now. frameoffset is a sample frame location of type AFframecount with a value between 0 and the total number of sample frames in the track minus o...
 audiofile/afSetChannelMatrix(3d) -- set the channel mix matrix associated with a given track in an AFfilehandle
    file is an AFfilehandle structure, previously created by a call to afOpenFile(3dm) or its equivalent. track is an integer which identifies an audio track in handle. Since all currently supported file formats contain only one audio track, the value AF_DEFAULT_TRACK should always be used here for now. matrix is an array of double precision floating point values which specify the manner in which a channel conversion operation should take place. Because the values in this array will be copied into i...
 audiofile/afSetConversionParams(3d) -- set/get the parameters associated with format conversion for a specified audio track via dmParams
    file is an AFfilehandle structure, previously created by a call to afOpenFile(3dm) or its equivalent. track is an integer which identifies an audio track in file. Since all currently supported file formats contain only one audio track, the value AF_DEFAULT_TRACK should be used here for now. params a DMparams list, previously created by a call to dmParamsCreate(3dm).
 audiofile/AFseterrorhandler(3d) -- supply an alternate error reporting routine to the Audio File Library
    efunc is a pointer to an error handling routine which is declared as: void errorfunc(long, const char*)
 audiofile/AFsetloopstart(3d) -- set the start/end markers, play mode, and track in an AFfilehandle structure for a specified loop.
    setup is an AFfilehandle structure, previously created by a call to afOpenFile(3dm) or afOpenFD(3dm), which opened an audio file for write access. instid is a positive integer value which identifies a chunk of instrument parameters. Since the number of supported inst chunks varies with file format, applications should always retrieve this value via afGetInstIDs(3dm). loopid is a positive integer value which identifies a loop stored in the instrument configuration given by instid. markid is a pos...
 audiofile/afSetLoopStartFrame(3d) -- set the start/end frame and loop count from an AFfilehandle structure for a specified loop.
    file is an AFfilehandle structure, previously created by a call to afOpenFile(3dm). instid is a positive integer value which identifies an instrument configuration in file. instid should be an element from an array of IDs created via a call to afInitInstIDs(3dm). loopid is a positive integer value which identifies a loop structure in an instrument parameter chunk. You create loopid's by calling afInitLoopIDs(3dm)....
 audiofile/afSetTrackPCMMapping(3d) -- override the current PCM mapping values associated with a given track in an AFfilehandle
    file is an AFfilehandle structure, previously created by a call to afOpenFile(3dm) or its equivalent. track is an integer which identifies an audio track in handle. Since all currently supported file formats contain only one audio track, the value AF_DEFAULT_TRACK should always be used here for now. slope is a double precision floating point value which specifies an amplitude scaling factor for the waveform to be associated with track. intercept is a double precision floating point value indicat...
 audiofile/afSetVirtualFormatParams(3d) -- set/get the virtual audio data format in an AFfilehandle for a specified audio track via dmParams
    file is an AFfilehandle structure, previously created by a call to afOpenFile(3dm) or its equivalent. track is an integer which identifies an audio track in file. Since all currently supported file formats contain only one audio track, the value AF_DEFAULT_TRACK should be used here for now. params a DMparams list, previously created by a call to dmParamsCreate(3dm).
 audiofile/afSetVirtualSampleFormat(3d) -- set the virtual data format for a specified audio track
    Parameters for the virtual routines are identical to those for the equivalent afInit routines, except the first argument is an AFfilehandle structure rather than an AFfilesetup. file is an AFfilehandle structure, previously created by a call to afOpenFile(3dm) or its equivalent. track is an integer which identifies an audio track in handle. Since all currently supported file formats contain only one audio track, the value AF_DEFAULT_TRACK should always be used here. sampfmt an integer constant w...
 audiofile/AFsyncfile(3d) -- write out a consistent snapshot of an audio file without actually closing the file
    file is the AFfilehandle structure for the audio file you want to update. This structure is the returned value of the afOpenFile(3dm) call.
 Tk/after(3) -- Execute a command after a time delay
    This command is used to delay execution of the program or to execute a command in background after a delay. It has several forms, depending on the first argument to the command: after ms Ms must be an integer giving a time in milliseconds. The command sleeps for ms milliseconds and then returns. While the command is sleeping the application does not respond to X events or any other events. after ms ?script script script ...? In this form the command returns immediately, but it arranges for a Tcl...
 standard/afunction(3) -- specify alpha test function
    ref expects a reference value with which to compare source alpha at each pixel. This value should be in the range 0 through 255. func is a symbolic constant taken from the list below. It identifies the alpha comparison function: AF_NEVER, AF_LESS, AF_EQUAL, AF_LEQUAL, AF_GREATER, AF_NOTEQUAL, AF_GEQUAL, and AF_ALWAYS. AF_ALWAYS is the default.
 audiofile/AFwriteframes(3d) -- write audio sample frames to a specified track in an audio file
    file expects the AFfilehandle structure for the audio file to which audio sample data will be written. This structure is usually the returned value of a call to afOpenFile(3dm). track is an integer which identifies the audio track (chunk) in the file to be accessed. Since all currently supported file formats allow at most one audio track per file, the value AF_DEFAULT_TRACK should always be used for this argument for now. samples is a pointer to a buffer containing samples to be written to the a...
 ftn/aint(3) -- FORTRAN integer part intrinsic function
    aint returns the truncated value of its real argument in a real. dint returns the truncated value of its double-precision argument as a double-precision value. qint returns the truncated value of its real*16 argument as a real*16 value. iint returns the truncated value of its real*4 argument in a integer*2. jint returns the truncated value of its real*4 argument in a integer*4. iidint returns the truncated value of its real*8 argument in a integer*2. jidint returns the truncated value of its rea...
 aio_cancel(3) -- cancel an asynchronous I/O request
    The aio_cancel() function attempts to cancel one or more asynchronous I/O requests currently outstanding against file descriptor fildes. The aiocb argument points to the asynchronous I/O control block for a particular request to be canceled. If aiocbp is NULL, then all outstanding cancelable asynchronous I/O requests against fildes are canceled. The aio_cancel64() function is identical to aio_cancel() except that it takes an aiocb64_t * (see ). This structure allows for the specification ...
 aio_error(3) -- return error status of an asynchronous I/O operation
    The aio_error() function returns the error status associated with the aiocbp passed in. The error status for an asynchronous I/O operation is the errno value that would be set by the corresponding read(2) or write(2) or fsync(2) operation. If the operation has not yet completed, then the error status shall be equal to EINPROGRESS. The aio_error64() function is identical to aio_error() except that it takes an aiocb64_t * (see ). This structure allows for the specification of a file offset ...
 aio_fsync(3) -- asynchronously synchronize a file's in-memory state with that on the physical medium
    The aio_fsync() function asynchronously moves all modified data of a file indicated by the file descriptor aio_fildes member of the struct aiocb referenced by the aiocbp argument. The functions return when the operation is queued. If op is O_SYNC then all modified data and attributes are forced to the physical medium. If op is O_DSYNC then only ...
 aio_hold(3) -- Defer or resume reception of asynchronous I/O callbacks
    The aio_hold() function allows the calling process to defer or resume the reception of callback notification invocations. If the should_hold parameter is AIO_HOLD_CALLBACK, callbacks will be deferred. If the should_hold parameter is AIO_RELEASE_CALLBACKS then callbacks will be released. If the value is AIO_ISHELD_CALLBAC<...
 aio_init(3) -- asynchronous I/O initialization
    The use of this function has been discontinued. Please use aio_sgi_init(3) instead.
 aio_read(3) -- asynchronous I/O read
    The aio_read() function allows the calling process to read aiocbp- >aio_nbytes from the file associated with aiocbp->aio_fildes into the buffer pointed to by aiocbp->aio_buf (see read(2)). The function call returns when the read request has been initiated or, at a minimum, queued for the file or device. The aiocb->aio_sigevent defines how the calling process will be notified upon I/O completion. If sigev_notify is SIGEV_NONE, then no notification will be posted to the ...
 aio_return(3) -- return error status of an asynchronous I/O operation
    The aio_return() function returns the return status associated with the aiocbp passed in. The return status for an asynchronous I/O operation is the value that would be returned by the corresponding read(2) or write(2) or fsync(2) operation. If the error status for the operation is equal to EINPROGRESS, then the return status for the operation is undefined. The aio_return() function may be called exactly once to retrieve the return status of a given asynchronous operation; thereafter, if the sam...
 aio_sgi_init(3) -- asynchronous I/O initialization
    The optional aio_sgi_init() function allows the calling process to initialize the asynchronous I/O interface. If this function is not called, the asynchronous I/O interface is initialized the first time a call is made to aio_read(), aio_write() or lio_listio(). aio_sgi_init() takes an aioinit_t * as an argument. If this argument is NULL, default initialization values are used. Initialization of the interface includes starting up slave threads which are used to carry out I/O requests. This is sig...
 aio_suspend(3) -- wait for an asynchronous I/O request
    The aio_suspend() function shall suspend the calling thread until at least one of the asynchronous I/O operations referenced by the aiocbp argument has completed, until a signal interrupts the function, or if timeout is not NULL, until the time interval specified by timeout has passed. If any of the aiocb structures in the list correspond to the completed asynchronous I/O operations(i.e., the error status for the operation is not equal to EINPROGRESS, at the time of the call), the function shall...
 aio_write(3) -- asynchronous I/O write
    The aio_write() function allows the calling process to write aiocbp- >aio_nbytes from the file associated with aiocbp->aio_fildes into the buffer pointed to by aiocbp->aio_buf (see write(2)). The function call returns when the write request has been initiated or, at a minimum, queued for the file or device. The aiocb->aio_sigevent defines how the calling process will be notified upon I/O completion. If sigev_notify is SIGEV_NONE, then no notification will be posted ...
 ftn/alarm(3) -- execute a subroutine after a specified time
    This routine arranges for subroutine proc to be called after time seconds. If time is ``0'', the alarm is turned off and no routine will be called. The returned value will be the time remaining on the last alarm.
 audio/alCheckEvent(3d) -- Looks for an event in the event queue and retrieves it.
    eventq expects an ALeventQueue structure from which you want to retrieve audio events. src expects an int with the value of the resource that generated or posted the audio event. param expects an int with the value of the parameter for the audio event. event expects an ALevent structure previously initialized by alNewEvent(3dm).
 audio/alCloseEventQueue(3d) -- close an audio event queue
    queue expects the ALeventQueue handle for the audio event queue you want to close. This handle is the returned value of the alOpenEventQueue(3dm) call.
 audio/ALcloseport(3d) -- (obsolete) releases resources of an audio port
    port expects the ALport structure for the audio port you want to deallocate. This structure is the returned value of the ALopenport(3dm) call.
 audio/alClosePort(3d) -- close an audio port
    port expects the ALport structure for the audio port you want to close. This structure is the returned value of the alOpenPort(3dm) call.
 audio/alConnect(3d) -- connect two audio I/O resources
    source is the source resource. dest is the destination resource. props is a parameter/value list of desired properties for the connection (see alGetParams(3dm) for more information on parameter/value lists). nprops is the number of parameter/value pairs in the list props.
 audio/alDeselectEvents(3d) -- Deselect event queue from receiving events from a resource.
    eventq expects an ALeventQueue structure properly initialized by alOpenEventQueue(3dm). resource expects an int with the value of the resource you are interested in unregistering. params is an int pointer with a parameter list of the audio events you wish to unregister. nparams is an int with the total number of parameters of the list params.
 audio/alDiscardFrames(3d) -- discard audio from an audio port
    port is the audio port from which you want to discard samples. This is the returned value of an alOpenPort(3dm) call. framecount expects the number of sample frames that you wish to discard.
 audio/alDisconnect(3d) -- delete a connection between two audio I/O resources
    res expects the resource ID of the connection to be destroyed. This is the return value of a call to alConnect(3dm).
 audio/alFixedToDouble(3d) -- convert between AL fixed-point and
    d expects a double-precision value. f expects a 64-bit fixed-point value (long long).
 audio/alFlushEvents(3d) -- Flush all events in event queue
    eventq expects a valid ALeventQueue initialized by alOpenEventQueue(3dm).
 audio/ALfreeconfig(3d) -- (obsolete) deallocates an audio ALconfig structure
    config expects an ALconfig structure, the returned value of ALnewconfig(3dm) or ALgetconfig(3dm).
 audio/alFreeConfig(3d) -- deallocates an audio ALconfig structure
    config expects an ALconfig structure, the returned value of alNewConfig(3dm) or alGetConfig(3dm).
 audio/alFreeEvent(3d) -- deallocates an audio ALevent structure
    config expects an ALevent structure, the returned value of alNewEvent(3dm)
 audio/ALgetchannels(3d) -- (obsolete) get/set the channel setting in an audio ALconfig structure
    config expects an ALconfig structure, the returned value of ALnewconfig(3dm) or ALgetconfig(3dm). channels expects a long value indicating the number of samples per sampling interval. The currently valid values are: 1, 2, and 4.
 audio/alGetChannels(3d) -- get/set the channel setting in an audio ALconfig
    config expects an ALconfig structure, the returned value of alNewConfig(3dm) or alGetConfig(3dm). channels expects a int value indicating the number of samples per sample frame, i.e. the number of channels.
 audio/ALgetconfig(3d) -- (obsolete) get/set the ALconfig structure of an audio ALport structure
    port expects an ALport structure, the returned value of an ALopenport(3dm) call. config expects an ALconfig structure, the returned value of a call to ALnewconfig(3dm) or ALgetconfig(3dm).
 audio/alGetConfig(3d) -- get/set the ALconfig of an audio ALport
    port expects an ALport, the returned value of an alOpenPort(3dm) call. config expects an ALconfig, the returned value of a call to alNewConfig(3dm) or alGetConfig.
 audio/ALgetdefault(3d) -- (obsolete) returns the default value for an audio device state variable
    device expects a device. Currently there is only one device, AL_DEFAULT_DEVICE. parameter expects the symbolic constant for the device state variable for which you want the default value.
 audio/alGetDevice(3d) -- get/set the device setting in an audio ALconfig structure
    config expects an ALconfig structure, the returned value of a call to alNewConfig(3dm) or alGetConfig(3dm). device expects the integer resource ID of an audio device (see alResources(3dm)).
 audio/alGetErrorString(3d) -- get a string corresponding to an Audio Library error code
    error expects an error code as set by any Audio Library function.
 audio/alGetEventData(3d) -- gets data from certain events with non-scalar parameters.
    event expects an ALevent structure initialized by alNextEvent(3dm) or alCheckEvent(3dm).
 audio/alGetEventParam(3d) -- get parameter of audio event
    event expects an ALevent structure initialized by alNextEvent(3dm) or alCheckEvent(3dm).
 audio/alGetEventQueueFD(3d) -- get the file descriptor for an audio event queue
    eventq expects the ALeventQueue structure whose file descriptor you desire. This structure is the returned value of an alOpenEventQueue(3dm) call.
 audio/alGetEventResource(3d) -- Return audio resource that posted event
    event expects an ALevent structure initialized by alNextEvent(3dm) or alCheckEvent(3dm).
 audio/alGetEventSrcResource(3d) -- Return audio resource that generated event
    event expects an ALevent structure, after being updated by either alNextEvent(3dm) or alCheckEvent(3dm).
 audio/alGetEventUST(3d) -- get Unadjusted System Time of audio event
    event expects an ALevent structure initialized by alNextEvent(3dm) or alCheckEvent(3dm).
 audio/alGetEventValue(3d) -- get ALvalue of audio event
    event expects an ALevent structure initialized by alNextEvent(3dm) or alCheckEvent(3dm).
 audio/ALgetfd(3d) -- (obsolete) get the file descriptor for an audio port
    port expects the ALport structure whose file descriptor you desire. This structure is the returned value of an ALopenport(3dm) call.
 audio/alGetFD(3d) -- get the file descriptor for an audio port
    port expects the ALport structure whose file descriptor you desire. This structure is the returned value of an alOpenPort(3dm) call.
 audio/ALgetfillable(3d) -- (obsolete) report the number of unfilled sample locations in an audio port
    port expects the audio port you want to query. This structure is the returned value of the ALopenport(3dm) call.
 audio/alGetFillable(3d) -- report the number of unfilled sample frames in an audio port
    port expects the audio port you want to query. This structure is the returned value of the alOpenPort(3dm) call.
 audio/ALgetfilled(3d) -- (obsolete) return the number of filled sample locations in an audio port
    port expects the audio port you want to query. This structure is the returned value of an ALopenport(3dm) call.
 audio/alGetFilled(3d) -- return the number of filled sample frames in an audio port
    port expects the audio port you want to query. This structure is the returned value of an alOpenPort(3dm) call.
 audio/ALgetfillpoint(3d) -- (obsolete) control select() or poll() behavior of an audio port
    port expects an ALport structure. This structure is the returned value of an ALopenport(3dm) call. fillpoint expects a long value, the fillpoint, in samples.
 audio/alGetFillPoint(3d) -- get or set low- or high-water mark for an audio port
    port expects an ALport structure. This structure is the returned value of an alOpenPort(3dm) call. fillpoint expects a integer value, the fillpoint, in sample frames.
 audio/ALgetfloatmax(3d) -- (obsolete) get/set the maximum value of floating point sample data.
    config expects an ALconfig structure, the returned value of a call to ALnewconfig(3dm) or ALgetconfig(3dm). maximum_value expects an IEEE double precision floating point value which defines the range of the floating point data for the ALreadsamps(3dm) or ALwritesamps(3dm) functions.
 audio/alGetFloatMax(3d) -- get/set the maximum value of floating point sample data.
    config expects an ALconfig structure, the returned value of a call to alNewConfig(3dm) or alGetConfig(3dm). maximum_value expects an IEEE double precision floating point value which defines the range of the floating point data for the alReadFrames(3dm) or alWriteFrames(3dm) functions.
 audio/ALgetframenumber(3d) -- (obsolete) Get the absolute sample frame number associated with a port
    port expects the ALport structure for the audio port for which you wish to know the sample frame number. This structure is the returned value of the ALopenport(3dm) call. fnum expects a pointer to an unsigned 64-bit value which is to contain the resultant sample-frame number.
 audio/alGetFrameNumber(3d) -- Get the absolute sample frame number associated with a port
    port expects the ALport structure for the audio port for which you wish to know the sample frame number. This structure is the returned value of the alOpenPort(3dm) call. fnum expects a pointer to an unsigned 64-bit value which is to contain the resultant sample-frame number.
 audio/ALgetframetime(3d) -- (obsolete) Get the time at which a sample frame came in or will go out
    port expects the ALport structure for the audio port for which you wish to know the sample frame number. This structure is the returned value of the ALopenport(3dm) call. fnum expects a pointer to an unsigned 64-bit value which is to contain the resultant sample-frame number. time expects a pointer to an unsigned 64-bit value which is to contain the resultant sample-frame time, in nanoseconds.
 audio/alGetFrameTime(3d) -- Get the time at which a sample frame came in or will go out
    port expects the ALport structure for the audio port for which you wish to know the sample frame number. This structure is the returned value of the alOpenPort(3dm) call. fnum expects a pointer to an unsigned 64-bit value which is to contain the resultant sample-frame number. time expects a pointer to an unsigned 64-bit value which is to contain the resultant sample-frame time, in nanoseconds.
 audio/alGetLimiting(3d) -- request limiting for AL floating-point output
    config expects an ALconfig structure, the returned value of a call to alNewConfig(3dm) or alGetConfig(3dm). value expects a boolean value (0 or 1) indicating whether or not limiting is required on floating-point to integer data conversion for alWriteFrames(3dm) or alWriteBuffers(3dm).
 audio/ALgetminmax(3d) -- (obsolete) gets maximum and minimum values for an audio device state variable
    device expects the device to which the device state variable applies. Currently, there is only one device, AL_DEFAULT_DEVICE. param expects the device state variable for which you want to know the range. minparam expects a pointer to the variable into which ALgetminmax(3dm) can write the minimum value associated with param. maxparam expects a pointer to the variable into which ALgetminmax(3dm) can write the maximum value associated with param....
 audio/ALgetname(3d) -- (obsolete) returns a name for an audio device state variable
    device expects a device. Currently there is only one device, AL_DEFAULT_DEVICE. descriptor expects the descriptor (value of a symbolic constant) for the device state variable you want to identify.
 audio/alGetParamInfo(3d) -- get information about a parameter on a particular audio resource
    res is the audio resource (see alResources(3dm)) to which the given parameter applies. param is the parameter about which you desire information. pinfo is a pointer to an ALparamInfo structure allocated by the caller.
 audio/ALgetparams(3d) -- (obsolete) get/set the value of the specified audio device states
    device expects the device to which this command applies. Currently, there is only one device, AL_DEFAULT_DEVICE. PVbuffer expects an array of longs. The even elements of this array should each contain a device state variable that you choose to read or change. The subsequent odd elements are the current or new value of these variables. bufferlength expects the number of longs in the buffer pointed to by PVbuffer. This value must be even....
 audio/alGetParams(3d) -- get the values of audio resource parameters
    resource expects the resource from which you wish to get parameter values. pvs is an array of ALpv structures, each of which contains a single parameter and will contain the associated value upon return from alGetParams. npvs is the number of ALpv items in the array.
 audio/ALgetqueuesize(3d) -- (obsolete) get/set audio port buffer size information in an ALconfig structure
    config expects an ALconfig structure. This structure is the returned value of an ALnewconfig(3dm) or ALgetconfig(3dm) call. size expects the number of sample locations to use for the internal buffer of an audio port created by a subsequent ALopenport(3dm) call.
 audio/alGetQueueSize(3d) -- get/set audio port buffer size
    config expects an ALconfig structure. This structure is the returned value of an alNewConfig(3dm) or alGetConfig(3dm) call. size expects the number of sample frames to use for the internal buffer of an audio port created by a subsequent alOpenPort(3dm) call.
 audio/alGetResource(3d) -- get the resource associated with an audio port
    port expects the port whose audio resource you desire. This structure is the returned value of an alOpenPort(3dm) call.
 audio/alGetResourceByName(3d) -- find an audio resource by name
    start_res expects a resource at which the name search is to begin. Typically this is AL_SYSTEM, the top of the audio resource hierarchy. name is a character string describing the resource to be found. type is the type of the desired resource.
 audio/ALgetsampfmt(3d) -- (obsolete) get/set the sample format setting in an audio ALconfig structure
    config expects an ALconfig structure, the returned value of a call to ALnewconfig(3dm) or ALgetconfig(3dm). sampleformat expects a symbolic constant that identifies the format of an audio sample. There are three symbolic constants defined for this parameter.
 audio/alGetSampFmt(3d) -- get/set the sample format setting in an audio ALconfig structure
    config expects an ALconfig structure, the returned value of a call to alNewConfig(3dm) or alGetConfig(3dm). sampleformat expects a symbolic constant that identifies the format of an audio sample. There are three symbolic constants defined for this parameter.
 audio/ALgetstatus(3d) -- get information concerning the most recent error in the audio stream associated with a port.
    port expects the ALport to which this command applies. PVbuffer expects an array of longs. The even elements of this array should each contain an error variable that you choose to read. The subsequent odd elements are the current or new value of these variables. bufferlength expects the number of longs in the buffer pointed to by PVbuffer. This value must be even.
 audio/ALgetwidth(3d) -- (obsolete) get/set the sample width setting in an audio ALconfig structure
    config expects an ALconfig structure, the returned value of a call to ALnewconfig(3dm) or ALgetconfig(3dm). samplesize expects a symbolic constant that identifies the size of an audio sample. There are three symbolic constants defined for this parameter. AL_SAMPLE_8 indicates a one byte sample width in the range -128 to 127. AL_SAMPLE_16 indicates a two byte sample width in the range -32768 to 32767. AL_SAMPLE_24 indicates a 4 byte sample width in the range -8388608 to 8388607....
 audio/alGetWidth(3d) -- get/set the wordsize for integer audio data
    config expects an ALconfig structure, the returned value of a call to alNewConfig(3dm) or alGetConfig(3dm). samplesize expects a symbolic constant that identifies the size of an integer audio sample. There are three symbolic constants defined for this parameter. AL_SAMPLE_8 indicates a one byte (signed char) sample width in the range -128 to 127. AL_SAMPLE_16 indicates a 16-bit (short) sample width in the range -32768 to 32767. AL_SAMPLE_24 indicates a 32-bit (int) sample width in the range -838...
 audio/alIntro(3d) -- Introduction to the Silicon Graphics Audio Library (AL)
    The Silicon Graphics Audio Library (AL) provides a uniform, deviceindependent programming interface to real-time audio I/O on Silicon Graphics workstations. The AL was designed to enable multiple programs to share the audio resources of the workstation. Multiple programs may have input and output streams open concurrently, either sharing audio devices or using independent audio devices. The Audio Library provides four major capabilities: 1. input and output of digital audio data 2. control of th...
 audio/alIsSubtype(3d) -- indicate if one resource type is a subtype of another
    type is a resource type for which you want to see if subtype is a subtype. type can also be a resource, in which case alIsSubtype uses the type of the given resource. subtype is a resource type for which you want to see if type is a supertype. subtype can also be a resource, in which case alIsSubtype uses the type of the given resource.
 f90/all(3) -- Determines whether all values are true
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 standard/alloca(3) -- allocate dynamic space
    alloca returns a pointer to size bytes of uninitialized local stack space. Since the space is allocated using a built-in compiler function, the allocation is quite fast. If zero is passed as size, alloca returns a valid pointer (unlike some versions of malloc, which consider a zero size to be an error). The #include is required. Space allocated when a function foo calls alloca is freed automatically when foo returns. It is an error to call free with a pointer returned by alloca. Not a...
 f90/allocated(3) -- Returns the array allocation status
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 Tcl/allowexc(3) -- allow all exceptions in next script evaluation
    Tcl_Interp *interp (in) Interpreter in which script will be evaluated.
 audio/ALnewconfig(3d) -- create and initialize an audio ALconfig structure
    ALnewconfig is obsolete and is provided for backward compatibility. The preferred function is alNewConfig(3dm). Use ALnewconfig(3dm) to create and initialize an ALconfig structure. This structure is used to pass in configuration information when calling ALopenport(3dm) or ALsetconfig(3dm). To change the configuration information stored in an ALconfig structure, see the commands mentioned below in SEE ALSO. The default structure specifies a 100,000 sample stereo buffer, utilizing a 16-bit two's ...
 audio/alNewConfig(3d) -- create and initialize an audio ALconfig structure
    alNewConfig creates and initializes an ALconfig structure. An ALconfig structure specifies the audio data format and queue size to be used by an audio port. The functions alOpenPort(3dm) or alSetConfig(3dm) apply the properties specified in the ALconfig to a new or existing audio port, respectively. To change the properties given in an ALconfig structure, see the commands mentioned below in SEE ALSO. The default ALconfig specifies a 50,000 sample-frame stereo buffer, utilizing a 16-bit two's co...
 audio/alNewEvent(3d) -- create and initialize an audio ALevent structure
    alNewEvent creates and initializes an ALevent structure. An ALevent structure contains the event information of a particular audio system change. Events are retrieved from event queues through alNextEvent(3dm) and alCheckEvent(3dm). All events have an audio parameter associated with them. For example, an ALevent with an AL_RATE parameter means that an AL_RATE change occurred on an audio resource. Please refer to alParams(3dm) for more information. To access event information, use the following c...
 audio/alNextEvent(3d) -- Retrieves front most event from queue
    eventq expects a valid ALeventQueue structure from which you want to retrieve audio events. event expects an ALevent structure previously initialized by alNewEvent(3dm).
 f90/alog(3) -- FORTRAN natural logarithm intrinsic function
    alog returns the real natural logarithm of its real argument. dlog returns the double-precision natural logarithm of its double-precision argument. qlog returns the real*16 natural logarithm of its real*16 argument. The argument of alog, dlog, and qlog must be greater than zero. clog returns the complex logarithm of its complex argument. The argument of clog must not be (0.,0.). The range of the imaginary part of clog is: -pi < imaginary part <= pi. zlog returns the complex*16 logarithm of its c...
 audio/alOpenEventQueue(3d) -- open an audio event queue
    name An event queue name is a character string describing the event queue. Event queue names have a maximum length of 20 characters.
 audio/ALopenport(3d) -- (obsolete) open an audio port
    name A port name is an ASCII string which summarizes the usage of this port. It is intended for human consumption, similar to a window title. Port names have a maximum length of 20 characters. direction Use this parameter to identify whether the port is an input or an output port. Acceptable values are: "r" configures the port for reading (input). "w" configures the port for writing (output). config Expects the ALconfig structure returned by ALnewconfig(3dm). This structure contains informat...
 audio/alOpenPort(3d) -- open an audio port
    name A port name is a character string describing the port. It is intended for human consumption, similar to a window title. Port names have a maximum length of 20 characters. direction Specifies whether the port is for input or output. "r" specifies an input port. "w" specifies an output port. config Expects an ALconfig, as returned by alNewConfig(3dm) or alGetConfig(3dm). This structure describes the data format and queue size for the port. Passing a null (0) value for config yields a port...
 audio/alParams(3d) -- Audio Library parameters
    Parameters are retrieved or set using an ALpv structure. The most important two fields in the ALpv are: typedef union { int param; /* the parameter */ ALvalue value; /* the associated value */ [...] } ALpv; The ALvalue structure is a union of three types: typedef union { int i; /* 32-bit integer values */ long long ll; /* 64-bit integer and fixed-point values */ void* ptr; /* pointer values */ } ALvalue; The AL supports a small number of data types, each of which uses a specific field of the ALv...
 audio/alPendingEvents(3d) -- Get total number of event queued in event queue
    eventq expects a valid ALeventQueue initialized by alOpenEventQueue(3dm).
 audio/ALqueryparams(3d) -- (obsolete) get descriptor/description pairs for audio device state variables
    device expects a device. Currently, there is only one device, AL_DEFAULT_DEVICE. PVbuffer expects an array of longs into which ALqueryparams(3dm) can write descriptor/description pairs for each state variable associated with device. The even (0,2,4, ...) entries receive the descriptors. The odd entries (1,3,5, ...) receive the descriptions. These descriptions take on one of four values: +/-AL_RANGE_VALUE if this device state variable can assume a range of values, and the range has some meaning, ...
 audio/alQueryValues(3d) -- get the set of possible values for a parameter
    res expects the audio resource (see alResources(3dm)) for which you desire the information. param expects the parameter whose values you desire. Not all parameters support alQueryValues(3dm); see alParams(3dm) for which parameters apply. set expects an array of ALvalues large enough to hold the results. See alParams(3dm) and alSetParams(3dm) for more information on ALvalues. setsize is the number of ALvalues in set. quals expects an array of ALpv structs called qualifiers. These are used to filt...
 audio/alReadBuffers(3d) -- read flexibly interleaved or non-interleaved audio data from an audio port
    port is the audio input port from which you want to read samples. This is the returned value of an alOpenPort(3dm) call. bufs is an array of pointers to sample buffers, each element of which corresponds to a single channel of audio input. strides is an array of integers, one corresponding to each input channel. Each element indicates the number of interleaved channels you desire in the sample buffer for that channel. framecount is the number of sample frames that you want to read from the audio ...
 audio/alReadFrames(3d) -- read interleaved sample frames from an audio port
    port is the audio input port from which you want to read samples. This is the returned value of an alOpenPort(3dm) call. samples is the buffer into which you want to read the samples. framecount is the number of sample frames that you want to read from the audio port.
 audio/ALreadsamps(3d) -- (obsolete) read samples from an audio port
    port expects the ALport structure for the audio port from which you want to read samples. This structure is the returned value of the ALopenport(3dm) call. samples expects a pointer to a buffer into which you want to transfer the samples read from the audio port. samplecount expects the number of samples that you want to read from the audio port.
 audio/alResources(3d) -- Audio Library resources
    Each specific instance of a resource has a unique 32-bit integer identifier, or resource ID. Resource IDs are the "handles" by which an application refers to that resource when calling AL functions.
 audio/alSelectEvents(3d) -- Setup event queue to receive audio events.
    eventq expects an ALeventQueue structure properly initialized by alOpenEventQueue(3dm). resource expects a resource ID from which you desire events. params expects an int pointer with a list of parameters for which you desire events. nparams expects an int with the total number of parameters in the list params.
 audio/ALseterrorhandler(3d) -- (obsolete) establish an alternate audio error handling routine
    efunc expects a pointer to an error handling routine declared as void errorfunc(long, const char*, ...)
 audio/alSetErrorHandler(3d) -- establish an alternate audio error handling routine
    efunc expects a pointer to an error handling routine declared as void errorfunc(int, const char*, ...)
 audio/alSetParams(3d) -- set the values of audio resource parameters
    resource expects the resource on which you wish to set parameter values. pvs is an array of ALpv structures, each of which contains a single parameter and its desired value. npvs is the number of ALpv items in the array.
 audio/alWriteBuffers(3d) -- write flexibly interleaved or non-interleaved audio data to an audio port
    port is the audio output port to which you want to write samples. This is the returned value of an alOpenPort(3dm) call. bufs is an array of pointers to sample buffers, each element of which corresponds to a single channel of audio output. strides is an array of integers, one corresponding to each output channel. Each element indicates the number of interleaved channels in the buffer directed at that channel. framecount is the number of sample frames that you want to write to the audio port....
 audio/alWriteFrames(3d) -- write interleaved sample frames to an audio port
    port is the audio output port to which you want to write samples. This is the returned value of an alOpenPort(3dm) call. samples is the buffer containing the samples. framecount is the number of sample frames that you want to write to the audio port.
 audio/ALwritesamps(3d) -- (obsolete) write samples to an audio port
    port expects the ALport structure for the audio port to which you want to write samples. This structure is the returned value of the ALopenport(3dm) call. samples expects a pointer to a buffer from which you want to transfer the sound samples into the audio port. samplecount expects the number of samples that you want to write to the port.
 audio/alZeroFrames(3d) -- write zero-valued sample frames to an audio port
    port is the audio output port to which you want to write samples. This is the returned value of an alOpenPort(3dm) call. framecount is the number of sample frames that you want to write to the audio port.
 amalloc(3p) -- arbitrary arena main memory allocator
    The arena malloc package provides a main memory allocator based on the malloc(3X) memory allocator. This allocator has been extended so that an arbitrary memory space ("arena") may be set up as an area from which to malloc. Calls to the arena malloc package differ from calls to the standard malloc(3X) only in that an arena pointer must be supplied. This arena pointer is returned by a call to acreate. acreate sets up ...
 libblas/amax(3) -- BLAS Maximum index functions FORTRAN 77 SYNOPSIS integer function idamax( n, x, incx ) integer incx, n double
    idamax, isamax, izamax, and icamax, return the index of the maximum value of vector x. The vector x has length n and increment incx. For izamax and icamax , the norm of each value is taken as: Abs( Real( x(i) ) ) + Abs( Imag( x(i) ) )
 f90/and(3) -- FORTRAN bitwise boolean functions
    bool is the general name for the bit field manipulation intrinsic functions and subroutines from the FORTRAN Military Standard (MIL-STD1753). and, or and xor return the value of the binary operations on their arguments. not is a unary operator returning the one's complement of its argument. ior, iand, not, ieor - return the same results as and, or, not, and xor. lshift and rshift return the value of the first argument shifted left or right, respectively, the number of times specified by the sec...
 f90/any(3) -- Determines whether any values are true
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 perl5/AnyDBM_File(3) -- provide framework for multiple DBMs NDBM_File, DB_File, GDBM_File, SDBM_File, ODBM_File - various DBM implemen
    This module is a "pure virtual base class"--it has nothing of its own. It's just there to inherit from one of the various DBM packages. It prefers ndbm for compatibility reasons with Perl 4, then Berkeley DB (See the DB_File manpage), GDBM, SDBM (which is always there--it comes with Perl), and finally ODBM. This way old programs that used to use NDBM via dbmopen() can still do so, but new ones can reorder @ISA: BEGIN { @AnyDBM_File::ISA = qw(DB_File GDBM_File NDBM_File) } use AnyDBM_File; Hav...
 Tcl/append(3) -- Append to variable
    Append all of the value arguments to the current value of variable varName. If varName doesn't exist, it is given a value equal to the concatenation of all the value arguments. This command provides an efficient way to build up long variables incrementally. For example, ``append a $b'' is much more efficient than ``set a $a$b'' if $a is long.
 Tcl/appinit(3) -- perform application-specific initialization
    Tcl_Interp *interp (in) Interpreter for the application.
 standard/arc(3) -- draw a circular arc
    x expects the x coordinate of the center of the arc. The center of the arc is the center of the circle that would contain the arc. y expects the y coordinate of the center of the arc. The center of the arc is the center of the circle that would contain the arc. radius expects the length of the radius of the arc. The radius of the arc is the radius of the circle that would contain the arc. startang expects the measure of the start angle of the arc. The start angle of the arc is measured from the ...
 standard/arcf(3) -- draw a filled circular arc
    x expects the x coordinate of the center of the filled arc. The center of the filled arc is the center of the circle that would contain the arc. y expects the y coordinate of the center of the filled arc. The center of the filled arc is the center of the circle that would contain the arc. radius expects the length of the radius of the filled arc. The radius of the filled arc is the radius of the circle that would contain the filled arc. startang expects the measure (in tenths of a degree) of the...
 Tcl/array(3) -- Manipulate array variables
    This command performs one of several operations on the variable given by arrayName. Unless otherwise specified for individual commands below, arrayName must be the name of an existing array variable. The option argument determines what action is carried out by the command. The legal options (which may be abbreviated) are: array anymore arrayName searchId Returns 1 if there are any more elements left to be processed in an array search, 0 if all elements have already been returned. SearchId indica...
 ftn/asin(3) -- trigonometric functions and their inverses
    The single-precision and long double-precision routines listed above are only available in the standard math library, -lm, and in -lmx. sin, cos and tan return trigonometric functions of radian arguments x for double data types. fsin, fcos and ftan, and their ANSI-named counterparts sinf, cosf and tanf return trigonometric functions of radian TRIG(3M) TRIG(3M) arguments x for float data types. sinl, cosl and tanl do the same for long double data types. The asin routines return the arc sine in th...
 standard/asinh(3) -- inverse hyperbolic functions
    These functions compute the designated inverse hyperbolic functions for real arguments.
 f90/asnctl(3) -- Controls function of ASSIGN, ASNFILE, ASNUNIT, and ASNRM routines
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/asnqfile(3) -- Returns the assign options currently in effect for a file name or unit number
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 assert(3x) -- verify program assertion
    This macro is useful for putting diagnostics into programs. When it is executed, if expression is false (zero), assert prints Assertion failed: expression, file xyz, line nnn on the standard error output and aborts. In the error message, xyz is the name of the source file and nnn the source line number of the assert statement. The latter are respectively the values of the preprocessor macros __FILE__ and __LINE__. Compiling with the pre...
 f90/assign(3) -- Provides library interface to assign processing
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk and IRIX systems
 f90/associated(3) -- Returns the pointer association status
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 libblas/asum(3) -- BLAS level ONE L1 norm functions. FORTRAN 77 SYNOPSIS double precision dasum( n, x, incx ) integer incx, n dou
    dasum, sasum, scasum, and dzasum, compute the L1 norm of the vector x of length n and increment incx. asum <--- Sum( Abs( X(i) ) ) ) dasum and sasum asum <--- Sum( Abs(Real(X(i))) + Abs(Imag(X(i))) ) dzasum and scasum
 Tcl/async(3) -- handle asynchronous events
    Tcl_AsyncProc *proc (in) Procedure to invoke to handle an asynchronous event. ClientData clientData (in) One-word value to pass to proc. Tcl_AsyncHandler async (in) Token for asynchronous event handler. Tcl_Interp *interp (in) Tcl interpreter in which command was being evaluated when handler was invoked, or NULL if handler was invoked when there was no interpreter active. int code (in) Completion code from command that just completed in interp, or 0 if interp is NULL....
 ftn/atan(3) -- trigonometric functions and their inverses
    The single-precision and long double-precision routines listed above are only available in the standard math library, -lm, and in -lmx. sin, cos and tan return trigonometric functions of radian arguments x for double data types. fsin, fcos and ftan, and their ANSI-named counterparts sinf, cosf and tanf return trigonometric functions of radian TRIG(3M) TRIG(3M) arguments x for float data types. sinl, cosl and tanl do the same for long double data types. The asin routines return the arc sine in th...
 ftn/atan2(3) -- trigonometric functions and their inverses
    The single-precision and long double-precision routines listed above are only available in the standard math library, -lm, and in -lmx. sin, cos and tan return trigonometric functions of radian arguments x for double data types. fsin, fcos and ftan, and their ANSI-named counterparts sinf, cosf and tanf return trigonometric functions of radian Page 1 TRIG(3M) TRIG(3M) arguments x for float data types. sinl, cosl and tanl do the same for long double data types. The asin routines return the arc sin...
 atcheckpoint(3c) -- add checkpoint and restart (CPR) event handlers
    These functions are used to register event handlers for checkpoint and restart, and activate CPR signal handling. The atcheckpoint() routine adds the function func() to the list of functions to be called without arguments upon receipt of checkpoint; see ckpt_create(3). Similarly, the atrestart() routine registers the callback function func() for a restart event; see ckpt_restart(3). At checkpoint or restart time, registered functions are called in the same order as their registration. These func...
 atexit(3c) -- add program termination routine
    atexit adds the function func to a list of functions to be called without arguments on normal termination of the program. Normal termination occurs by either a call to the exit system call or a return from main. At most 32 functions may be registered by atexit; the functions will be called in the reverse order of their registration. For sproc processes, atexit is only called when the last member of the share group exit...
 atfork(3c) -- add fork pre and post interception routines
    atfork_child adds the function func to the end of a list of functions to be called without arguments on entry of a child process created by fork(2). atfork_child_prepend performs the same task, but it adds the function at the beginning of the list. At most 32 functions may be registered by atfork_child or atfork_child_pre...
 atsproc(3c) -- add sproc pre and post interception routines
    atsproc_child adds the function func to a list of functions to be called without arguments on entry of a child process created by sproc(2). At most 32 functions may be registered by atsproc_child; the functions will be called in the same order as their registration. atsproc_parent adds the function func to a list of functions to be called with two integer arguments after ...
 standard/attachcursor(3) -- attaches the cursor to two valuators
    vx expects the valuator device number for the device that controls the horizontal location of the cursor. By default, vx is MOUSEX. vy expects the valuator device number for the device that controls the vertical location of the cursor. By default, vy is MOUSEY.
 dmedia/AUchecklicense(3d) -- checks for a given audio compression license
    product is a constant symbol for the product license of interest. Currently defined licenses are: AU_LICENSE_AWARE_MULTIRATE_ENCODER AU_LICENSE_AWARE_MULTIRATE_DECODER errorval is a pointer to an integer which will be set only if the return value is AU_LICENSE_ERR. The value is the NetLS error which occurred. message is a pointer to a character pointer, which is changed to point to an informative string only if the return value is AU_LICENSE_ERR. The string will contain the NetLS error that occu...
 dmedia/AUpvnew(3d) -- Audio File parameter value list data type
    pvlist_ptr Pointer to an Audio File Library parameter/value list data type. pvlist An Audio File Library parameter value list data type as created by AUpvnew. numitems an integer representing the size to create a new AUpvlist. item a integer zero based index into an AUpvlist. The index should be non-negative and less than numitems-1. type a symbolic constant describing the type a parameter. Currently supported types are: AU_PVTYPE_LONG representing values which are long AU_PVTYPE_DOUBLE represen...
 perl5/AutoLoader(3) -- load subroutines only on demand
    The AutoLoader module works with the AutoSplit module and the __END__ token to defer the loading of some subroutines until they are used rather than loading them all at once. To use AutoLoader, the author of a module has to place the definitions of subroutines to be autoloaded after an __END__ token. (See the perldata manpage.) The AutoSplit module can then be run manually to extract the definitions into individual files auto/funcname.al. AutoLoader implements an AUTOLOAD subroutine. When an und...
 perl5/AutoSplit(3) -- split a package for autoloading
    This function will split up your program into files that the AutoLoader module can handle. It is used by both the standard perl libraries and by the MakeMaker utility, to automatically configure libraries for autoloading. The autosplit interface splits the specified file into a hierarchy rooted at the directory $dir. It creates directories as needed to reflect class hierarchy, and creates the file autosplit.ix. This file acts as both forward declaration of all package routines, and as timestamp ...
 perl5/autouse(3) -- postpone load of modules until a function is used
    If the module Module is already loaded, then the declaration use autouse 'Module' => qw(func1 func2($;$) Module::func3); is equivalent to use Module qw(func1 func2); if Module defines func2() with prototype ($;$), and func1() and func3() have no prototypes. (At least if Module uses Exporter's import, otherwise it is a fatal error.) If the module Module is not loaded yet, then the above declaration declares functions func1() and func2() in the current package, and declares a function Module::f...
 aux(3c) -- initialize auxiliary identification and authentication information
    The initauxgroup function provides the means for auxiliary identification and authentication (I&A). uname and gid are the name and group id of the user that is to be subject to auxiliary I&A. display is a handle to the output file stream where any messages (informative or error indicating) may be printed. display is NULL if there is no associated output stream. Usually, initau<...
 libblas/axpy(3) -- BLAS level ONE axpy subroutines FORTRAN 77 SYNOPSIS subroutine daxpy( n, a, x, incx, y, incy ) integer incx, i
    daxpy, saxpy, zaxpy, and caxpy compute a constant a times a vector x plus a vector y. The result overwrites the initial values of vector y. Page 1 _AXPY(3F) _AXPY(3F) Y <--- Y + a . X incx and incy specify the increment between two consecutive elements of respectively vector x and y.
 standard/backbuffer(3) -- enable and disable drawing to the back or front buffer
    b is either TRUE or FALSE. TRUE enables updating in the back/front bitplane buffer. FALSE disables updating in the back/front bitplane buffer.
 standard/backface(3) -- turns backfacing polygon removal on and off
    b expects either TRUE or FALSE. TRUE suppresses the display of backfacing filled polygons. FALSE allows the display of backfacing filled polygons.
 Tk/backgderr(3) -- report Tcl error that occurred in background processing
    Tcl_Interp *interp (in) Interpreter in which the error occurred.
 Tcl/backslash(3) -- parse a backslash sequence
    char *src (in) Pointer to a string starting with a backslash. int *countPtr (out) If countPtr isn't NULL, *countPtr gets filled in with number of characters in the backslash sequence, including the backslash character.
 complib/BAKVEC(3) -- EISPACK routine. This subroutine forms the eigenvectors of a NONSYMMETRIC TRIDIAGONAL matrix by back transform
    On INPUT NM must be set to the row dimension of two-dimensional array parameters as declared in the calling program dimension statement. N is the order of the matrix. T contains the nonsymmetric matrix. Its subdiagonal is stored in the last N-1 positions of the first column, its diagonal in the N positions of the second column, and its superdiagonal in the first N-1 positions of the third column. T(1,1) and T(N,3) are arbitrary. E contains the subdiagonal elements of the symmetric matrix in its ...
 complib/BALANC(3) -- EISPACK routine. This subroutine balances a REAL matrix and isolates eigenvalues whenever possible.
    On INPUT NM must be set to the row dimension of two-dimensional array parameters as declared in the calling program dimension statement. N is the order of the matrix. A contains the input matrix to be balanced. On OUTPUT A contains the balanced matrix. LOW and IGH are two integers such that A(I,J) is equal to zero if (1) I is greater than J and (2) J=1,...,LOW-1 or I=IGH+1,...,N. SCALE contains information determining the permutations and scaling factors used. Suppose that the principal submatri...
 complib/BALBAK(3) -- EISPACK rotuine. This subroutine forms the eigenvectors of a REAL GENERAL matrix by back transforming those of
    On INPUT NM must be set to the row dimension of two-dimensional array parameters as declared in the calling program dimension statement. N is the order of the matrix. LOW and IGH are integers determined by BALANC. SCALE contains information determining the permutations and scaling factors used by BALANC. M is the number of columns of Z to be back transformed. Z contains the real and imaginary parts of the eigen- vectors to be back transformed in its first M columns. On OUTPUT Z contains the real...
 complib/BANDR(3) -- EISPACK routine. This subroutine reduces a REAL SYMMETRIC BAND matrix to a symmetric tridiagonal matrix using
    On INPUT NM must be set to the row dimension of two-dimensional array parameters as declared in the calling program dimension statement. N is the order of the matrix. MB is the (half) band width of the matrix, defined as the number of adjacent diagonals, including the principal diagonal, required to specify the non-zero portion of the lower triangle of the matrix. A contains the lower triangle of the symmetric band input matrix stored as an N by MB array. Its lowest subdiagonal is stored in the ...
 complib/BANDV(3) -- EISPACK routine. This subroutine finds those eigenvectors of a REAL SYMMETRIC BAND matrix corresponding to spe
    On INPUT NM must be set to the row dimension of two-dimensional array parameters as declared in the calling program dimension statement. N is the order of the matrix. MBW is the number of columns of the array A used to store the band matrix. If the matrix is symmetric, MBW is its (half) band width, denoted MB and defined as the number of adjacent diagonals, including the principal diagonal, required to specify the non-zero portion of the lower triangle of the matrix. If the subroutine is being u...
 barrier(3p) -- barrier functions
    These routines provide a simple rendezvous mechanism for shared address processes. new_barrier takes a usptr_t as an argument to indicate the shared arena from which to allocate the barrier. The usptr_t is a previously allocated handle obtained through a call to usinit(3P). The barrier function takes a pointer to a previously allocated and initialized barrier structure (as returned by new_barrier) and the number of processes/sub-tasks to wait for. As each process enters the barrier, it spins (bu...
 perl5/base(3) -- Establish IS-A relationship with base class at compile time
    Roughly similar in effect to BEGIN { require Foo; require Bar; push @ISA, qw(Foo Bar); } This module was introduced with Perl 5.004_04.
 basename(3g) -- return the last element of a pathname
    Given a pointer to a null-terminated character string that contains a pathname, basename returns a pointer to the last element of path. Trailing ``/'' characters are deleted. If path or *path is zero, pointer to a static constant ``.'' is returned.
 standard/bbox2(3) -- culls and prunes to bounding box and minimum pixel radius
    xmin expects the width, in pixels, of the smallest displayable feature. ymin expects the height, in pixels, of the smallest displayable feature. x1 expects the x coordinate of a corner of the bounding box. y1 expects the y coordinate of a corner of the bounding box. x2 expects the x coordinate of a corner of the bounding box. The corner referenced by this parameter must be diagonally opposite the corner referenced by the x1 and y1 parameters. y2 expects the y coordinate of a corner of the boundi...
 Tk/bell(3) -- Ring a display's bell
    This command rings the bell on the display for window and returns an empty string. If the -displayof option is omitted, the display of the application's main window is used by default. The command uses the current bell-related settings for the display, which may be modified with programs such as xset. This command also resets the screen saver for the screen. Some screen savers will ignore this, but others will reset so that the screen becomes visible again....
 perl5/Benchmark(3) -- benchmark running times of code timethis - run a chunk of code several times timethese - run several chunks of
    The Benchmark module encapsulates a number of routines to help you figure out how long it takes to execute some code.
 standard/bessel(3) -- bessel functions
    j0 and j1 return Bessel functions of x of the first kind of orders zero and one, respectively. jn returns the Bessel function of x of the first kind of order n. j0l, j1l, and jnl are the long double versions of these functions. y0 and y1 return Bessel functions of x of the second kind of orders zero and one, respectively. yn returns the Bessel function of x of the second kind of order n. The value of x must be positive. y0l, y1l, and ynl are the long double versions of these functions....
 bgets(3g) -- read stream up to next delimiter
    bgets reads characters from stream into buffer until either count is exhausted or one of the characters in breakstring is encountered in the stream. The read data is terminated with a null byte ('\0') and a pointer to the trailing null is returned. If a breakstring character is encountered, the last non-null is the delimiter character that terminated the scan. Note that, except for the fact that the returned value points to the end of the read string rather than ...
 standard/bgnclosedline(3) -- delimit the vertices of a closed line
    none
 standard/bgncurve(3) -- delimit a NURBS curve definition
    none
 standard/bgnline(3) -- delimit the vertices of a line
    none
 standard/bgnpoint(3) -- delimit the interpretation of vertex routines as points
    none
 standard/bgnpolygon(3) -- delimit the vertices of a polygon
    none
 standard/bgnqstrip(3) -- delimit the vertices of a quadrilateral strip
    Vertices specified between bgnqstrip and endqstrip are used to define a strip of quadrilaterals. The graphics pipe maintains three vertex registers. The first, second, and third vertices are loaded into the registers, but no quadrilateral is drawn until the system executes the fourth vertex routine. Upon executing the fourth vertex routine, the system draws a quadrilateral through the vertices, then replaces the two oldest vertices with the third and fourth vertices. For each new pair of vertex ...
 standard/bgnsurface(3) -- delimit a NURBS surface definition
    none
 standard/bgntmesh(3) -- delimit the vertices of a triangle mesh
    none
 standard/bgntrim(3) -- delimit a NURBS surface trimming loop
    none
 Tk/bind(3) -- Arrange for X events to invoke Tcl scripts
    The bind command associates Tcl scripts with X events. If all three arguments are specified, bind will arrange for script (a Tcl script) to be evaluated whenever the event(s) given by sequence occur in the window(s) identified by tag. If script is prefixed with a ``+'', then it is appended to any existing binding for sequence; otherwise script replaces any existing binding. If script is an empty string then the current binding for sequence is destroyed, leaving sequence unbound. In all of the ...
 bind(3n) -- bind a name to a socket
    bind() assigns a name to an unnamed socket. When a socket is created with socket(3N), it exists in a name space (address family) but has no name assigned. bind() requests that the name pointed to by name be assigned to the socket.
 Tk/bindtable(3) -- invoke scripts in response to X events
    Tcl_Interp *interp (in) Interpreter to use when invoking bindings in binding table. Also used for returning results and errors from binding procedures. Tk_BindingTable bindingTable (in) Token for binding table; must have been returned by some previous call to Tk_CreateBindingTable. ClientData object (in) Identifies object with which binding is associated. char *eventString (in) String describing event sequence. char *script (in) Tcl script to invoke when binding triggers. int append (in) Non-zer...
 Tk/bindtags(3) -- Determine which bindings apply to a window, and order of evaluation
    When a binding is created with the bind command, it is associated either with a particular window such as .a.b.c, a class name such as Button, the keyword all, or any other string. All of these forms are called binding tags. Each window contains a list of binding tags that determine how events are processed for the window. When an event occurs in a window, it is applied to each of the window's tags in order: for each tag, the most specific binding that matches the given tag and event is execute...
 complib/BISECT(3) -- EISPACK routine. This subroutine finds those eigenvalues of a TRIDIAGONAL SYMMETRIC matrix which lie in a spec
    On INPUT N is the order of the matrix. EPS1 is an absolute error tolerance for the computed eigenvalues. If the input EPS1 is non-positive, it is reset for each submatrix to a default value, namely, minus the product of the relative machine precision and the 1-norm of the submatrix. D contains the diagonal elements of the input matrix. E contains the subdiagonal elements of the input matrix in its last N-1 positions. E(1) is arbitrary. E2 contains the squares of the corresponding elements of E. ...
 Tk/bitmap(3) -- Images that display two colors
    A bitmap is an image whose pixels can display either of two colors or be transparent. A bitmap image is defined by four things: a background color, a foreground color, and two bitmaps, called the source and the mask. Each of the bitmaps specifies 0/1 values for a rectangular array of pixels, and the two bitmaps must have the same dimensions. For pixels where the mask is zero, the image displays nothing, producing a transparent effect. For other pixels, the image displays the foreground color if ...
 f90/bit_size(3) -- Returns the number of bits in an integer in the bit manipulation model
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 standard/blankscreen(3) -- controls screen blanking
    b expects TRUE or FALSE. TRUE stops display and turns screen black. FALSE restores the display.
 standard/blanktime(3) -- sets the screen blanking timeout
    count expects the number of graphics timer events after which to blank the current screen. The frequency of graphics timer events is returned by the getgdesc inquiry GD_TIMERHZ.
 libblas/blas(3) -- Basic Linear Algebra Subprograms
    BLAS Level 1: .....function...... ....prefix,suffix..... rootname dot product s- d- c-u c-c z-u z-c -doty = a*x + y s- d- c- z- -axpy setup Givens rotation s- d- -rotg apply Givens rotation s- d- cs- zd- -rot copy x into y s- d- c- z- -copy swap x and y s- d- c- z- -swap Euclidean norm s- d- sc- dz- -nrm2 sum of absolute values s- d- sc- dz- -asum x = a*x s- d- cs- c- zd- z- -scal index of max abs value is- id- ic- iz- -amax BLAS Level 2: MV Matrix vector multiply R Rank one update to a matrix R...
 standard/blendcolor(3) -- specifies a constant color for blending
    red is a floating point value between 0 and 1 (default 1.0). green is a floating point value between 0 and 1 (default 1.0). blue is a floating point value between 0 and 1 (default 1.0). alpha is a floating point value between 0 and 1 (default 1.0).
 standard/blendfunction(3) -- computes a blended color value for a pixel
    sfactr is a symbolic constant taken from the list below. It identifies the blending factor by which to scale contribution from source pixel RGBA (red, green, blue, alpha) values. BF_ZERO 0 BF_ONE 1 BF_DC (destination RGBA)/255 BF_MDC 1 - (destination RGBA)/255 BF_SA (source alpha)/255 BF_MSA 1 - (source alpha)/255 BF_DA (destination alpha)/255 BF_MDA 1 - (destination alpha)/255 BF_MIN_SA_MDA min(BF_SA, BF_MDA) BF_CC (constant RGBA)/255 BF_MCC 1 - (constant RGBA)/255 BF_CA (constant alpha)/255 BF...
 perl5/blib(3) -- Use MakeMaker's uninstalled version of a package
    Looks for MakeMaker-like 'blib' directory structure starting in dir (or current directory) and working back up to five levels of '..'. Intended for use on command line with -M option as a way of testing arbitary scripts against an uninstalled version of a package. However it is possible to : use blib; or use blib '..'; etc. if you really must.
 standard/blink(3) -- changes a color map entry at a selectable rate
    rate expects the number of vertical retraces per blink. On the standard monitor, there are 60 vertical retraces per second. i expects an index into the current color map. The color defined at that index is the color that is blinked (alternated). red expects the red value of the alternate color that blinks against the color selected from the color map by the i parameter. green expects the green value of the alternate color that blinks against the color selected from the color map by the i paramet...
 standard/blkqread(3) -- reads multiple entries from the queue
    data expects a pointer to the buffer that is to receive the queue information. n expects the number of elements in the buffer. FUNCTION RETURN VALUE The returned value of the function is the number of 16 bit words of data actually read into the data buffer. Note that this number will be twice the number of complete queue entries read, because each queue entry consists of two 16 bit words.
 ftn/bool(3) -- FORTRAN bitwise boolean functions
    bool is the general name for the bit field manipulation intrinsic functions and subroutines from the FORTRAN Military Standard (MIL-STD1753). and, or and xor return the value of the binary operations on their arguments. not is a unary operator returning the one's complement of its argument. ior, iand, not, ieor - return the same results as and, or, not, and xor. lshift and rshift return the value of the first argument shifted left or right, respectively, the number of times specified by the sec...
 complib/BQR(3) -- EISPACK routine. This subroutine finds the eigenvalue of smallest (usually) magnitude of a REAL SYMMETRIC BAND
    On INPUT NM must be set to the row dimension of two-dimensional array parameters as declared in the calling program dimension statement. N is the order of the matrix. MB is the (half) band width of the matrix, defined as the number of adjacent diagonals, including the principal diagonal, required to specify the non-zero portion of the lower triangle of the matrix. A contains the lower triangle of the symmetric band input matrix stored as an N by MB array. Its lowest subdiagonal is stored in the ...
 Tcl/break(3) -- Abort looping command
    This command is typically invoked inside the body of a looping command such as for or foreach or while. It returns a TCL_BREAK code, which causes a break exception to occur. The exception causes the current script to be aborted out to the the innermost containing loop command, which then aborts its execution and returns normally. Break exceptions are also handled in a few other situations, such as the catch command, Tk event bindings, and the outermost scripts of procedure bodies....
 bsearch(3c) -- binary search a sorted table
    bsearch is a binary search routine generalized from Knuth (6.2.1) Algorithm B. It returns a pointer into a table (an array) indicating where a datum may be found or a null pointer if the datum cannot be found. The table must be previously sorted in increasing order according to a comparison function pointed to by compar. key points to a datum instance to be sought in the table. base points to the element at the base of the table. nel is the number of elements in the table. s...
 bstring(3c) -- bit and byte string operations
    The functions bcopy, bcmp, and bzero operate on variable length strings of bytes. They do not check for null bytes as the routines in string(3) do. bcopy copies length bytes from string src to the string dst. bcmp compares byte string b1 against byte string b2, returning zero if they are identical, non-zero otherwise. Both strings are assumed to be length bytes long. bzero and blkclr place length zero bytes in the string b. ffs finds the first bit set in the argument passed it and returns the in...
 f90/btest(3) -- FORTRAN bitwise boolean functions
    bool is the general name for the bit field manipulation intrinsic functions and subroutines from the FORTRAN Military Standard (MIL-STD1753). and, or and xor return the value of the binary operations on their arguments. not is a unary operator returning the one's complement of its argument. ior, iand, not, ieor - return the same results as and, or, not, and xor. lshift and rshift return the value of the first argument shifted left or right, respectively, the number of times specified by the sec...
 btree(3) -- btree database access method
    The routine dbopen is the library interface to database files. One of the supported file formats is btree files. The general description of the database access methods is in dbopen(3), this manual page describes only the btree specific information. The btree data structure is a sorted, balanced tree structure storing associated key/data pairs. The btree access method specific data structure provided to dbopen is defined in the include file as follows: typedef struct { u_long flags; u_int ...
 bufsplit(3g) -- split buffer into fields
    bufsplit examines the buffer, buf, and assigns values to the pointer array, a, so that the pointers point to the first n fields in buf that are delimited by tabs or new-lines. To change the characters used to separate fields, call bufsplit with buf pointing to the string of characters, and n and a set to zero. For example, to use ':', '.', and ',' as separators along with tab and newline: bufsplit ("...
 perl5/Bundle::CPAN(3) -- A bundle to play with all the other modules on CPAN
    MD5 Data::Dumper # Bundle::libnet may have problems to work without it Bundle::libnet Term::ReadKey Term::ReadLine::Perl # sorry, I'm discriminating the ::Gnu module CPAN::WAIT CPAN
 Tk/button(3) -- Create and manipulate button widgets
    activeBackground cursor highlightThicknesstakeFocus| activeForeground disabledForegroundimagetext | anchor font justify textVariable | background foreground padX underline | bitmap highlightColor padY wrapLength | borderWidth highlightBackground relief See the ``options'' manual entry for details on the standard options. WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS Name: command Class: Command Command-Line Switch:-command Specifies a Tcl command to associate with the button. This command is typically invoked when ...
 byteorder(3c) -- convert values between host and network byte order
    These routines convert 16 and 32 bit quantities between network byte order and host byte order. On machines such as the IRIS-4D series, these routines are defined as null macros in the include file . These routines are most often used in conjunction with Internet addresses and ports as returned by gethostbyname(3N) and getservent(3N).
 standard/c(3) -- sets the RGB (or RGBA) values for the current color vector
    cv For the c4 routines, this parameter expects a four element array containing RGBA (red, green, blue, and alpha) values. If you use the c3 routines, this parameter expects a three element array containing RGB values. Array components 0, 1, 2, and 3 are red, green, blue, and alpha, respectively. Floating point RGBA values range from 0.0 through 1.0. Integer RGBA values range from 0 through 255. Values that exceed the upper limit are clamped to it. Values that exceed the lower limit are not clamp...
 Tcl/calldel(3) -- Arrange for callback when interpreter is deleted
    Tcl_Interp *interp (in) Interpreter with which to associated callback. Tcl_InterpDeleteProc *proc (in) Procedure to call when interp is deleted. ClientData clientData (in) Arbitrary one-word value to pass to proc.
 standard/callfunc(3) -- calls a function from within an object
    fctn expects a pointer to a function. nargs expects the number of arguments, excluding itself, that the function pointed to by fctn is to be called with. arg1, arg2, ..., argn expect the arguments to the function pointed to by fctn.
 standard/callobj(3) -- draws an instance of an object
    obj expects the object identifier of the object that you want to draw.
 Tk/canvas(3) -- Create and manipulate canvas widgets
    background highlightThickness insertWidthtakeFocus | borderWidth insertBackground reliefxScrollCommand | cursor insertBorderWidth selectBackgroundyScrollCommand | highlightColor insertOffTime selectBorderWidth | highlightBackground insertOnTime selectForeground See the ``options'' manual entry for details on the standard options. WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS Name: closeEnough Class: CloseEnough Command-Line Switch:-closeenough Specifies a floating-point value indicating how close the mouse cursor m...
 Tk/canvpsy(3) -- utility procedures for generating Postscript for canvases
    Tk_Canvas canvas (in) A token that identifies a canvas widget for which Postscript is being generated. double canvasY (in) Y-coordinate in the space of the canvas. Tcl_Interp *interp (in/out) A Tcl interpreter; Postscript is appended to its result, or the result may be replaced with an error message. Pixmap bitmap (in) Bitmap to use for generating Postscript. int x (in) X-coordinate within bitmap of left edge of region to output. int y (in) Y-coordinate within bitmap of top edge of region to out...
 Tk/canvtkwin(3) -- utility procedures for canvas type managers
    Tk_Canvas canvas (in) A token that identifies a canvas widget. Tcl_Interp *interp (in/out) Interpreter to use for error reporting. char *string (in) Textual description of a canvas coordinate. double *doublePtr (out) Points to place to store a converted coordinate. double x (in) An x coordinate in the space of the canvas. double y (in) A y coordinate in the space of the canvas. short *drawableXPtr (out) Pointer to a location in which to store an x coordinate in the space of the drawable currentl...
 Tk/canvtxtinfo(3) -- additional information for managing text items in canvases
    Tk_Canvas canvas (in) A token that identifies a particular canvas widget.
 cap_acquire(3c) -- make permitted set capabilities effective or remove effective capabilities
    cap_acquire activates the capabilities from the permitted set of the process by making each of them active in the effective set for the process. cap_surrender sets the effective set to the capabilities specified in the cap argument, and deallocates this structure.
 cap_bind(3n) -- bind a privileged name to a socket
    cap_bind asserts appropriate privilege when assigning a name to a socket. This is necessary when a process wishes to bind an Internet Domain socket to a port whose numeric value is less than 1024, for example. If _POSIX_CAP is in effect, a process calling this function should have CAP_PRIV_PORT capability in the permitted vector of its capability set.
 cap_clear(3c) -- clear the fields of a capability
    Clears the effective, permitted and inherited capabilities of the capability structure pointed to by cap.
 cap_copy_ext(3c) -- copy capability from system to user space or from user to system space
    cap_copy_ext copies the capability from *cap to *bufp, if the arguments are valid. cap_copy_int allocates a cap_t and copies the cap_t pointed to by *bufp into it, if the arguments are valid. The storage should be freed by calling cap_free(3c) when no longer needed. In the POSIX specifications, the internal form of an capability may be different from the external form, hence the need for these functions. In IRIX, both forms are the same....
 cap_dup(3c) -- make a copy of a capability
    Returns a pointer to an allocated capability that is a copy of the capability supplied as an argument. The returned capability should be deallocated using cap_free(3c) when no longer needed.
 cap_envl(3c) -- ensure sufficient process privilege
    cap_envl and cap_envp ensure that the calling process will have sufficient privilege to perform actions requiring the specified capabilities. If the desired and current capability sets are different and if the desired capability set can be obtained because the process has the CAP_SETPCAP capability, then the capabilities in the desired will be acquired. cap_envl accepts a variable argument list of capability values, terminated by an argument of 0 (or CAP_NOT_A_CID). cap_envp accepts a counted ar...
 cap_free(3c) -- free allocated capability
    Free memory allocated by Capabilities interface calls. This routine is present for POSIX compliance, it is simply a wrapper for free(3c).
 cap_from_text(3c) -- convert a POSIX capabilities string to internal form, convert capabilities to a POSIX capabilities string, or
    These routines convert strings defined by the POSIX P1003.1e specifications (see chcap(1) capabilities(4)) to/from cap_t, which is the internal format for an capability set (see capability(4)).
 cap_get_fd(3c) -- get or set the capabilities for an open file
    cap_get_fd returns a pointer to an allocated cap_t associated with the open file referred to by fd. If there is no capability set associated with the file, cap_get_fd returns a NULL pointer and sets errno to ENOATTR. cap_set_fd sets the capabilities for the open file referred to by fd from the cap_t cap. For this function to succeed, the process calling it must have the CAP_SETFCAP capability enabled and either the effective user ID of the process must match the file owner or the calling process...
 cap_get_file(3c) -- get or set the capabilities for a pathname
    cap_get_file returns a pointer to an allocated cap_t associated with the pathname pointed to by path. If there is no capability set associated with the file, cap_get_file returns a NULL pointer and sets errno to ENOATTR. If _POSIX_MAC is in effect, then the process must have MAC read access to the object. cap_set_file sets the capabilities of the specified pathname. For this function to succeed, the process must have the CAP_SETFCAP capability enabled and either the effective user ID of the proc...
 cap_get_flag(3c) -- get or set the value of a capability flag in a capability
    cap_get_flag Extracts the current value of the specified capability flag (flag) of the capability cap from the capability set pointed to by cap_p and stores it in the location pointed to by value. cap_set_flag Sets the specified capability flag (flag) in each of the array of capabilities caps (which has ncaps elements)of the from the capability set pointed to by cap_p and from the location pointed to by value....
 cap_get_proc(3c) -- get or set process capabilities
    cap_get_proc returns a pointer to an allocated cap_t associated with the process. cap_set_proc sets the capabilities for the process from the cap_t cap. If any flag in cap is set for any capability not currently permitted for the calling process, the function fails, and the capability state of the process shall remain unchanged. cap_set_proc_flags sets the capability state flags for the process from the cap_value_t flags. If the value of flags is CAP_FLAG_PURE_RECALC capabilities will not be inh...
 cap_init(3c) -- allocate a capability stucture
    Allocates a capability and returns a pointer to it.
 cap_network_ioctl(3n) -- execute an I/O control operation with privilege
    cap_network_ioctl asserts appropriate privilege when executing an I/O control operation. If _POSIX_CAP is in effect, the appropriate privilege depends upon the request.
 cap_schedctl(3n) -- alter scheduling parameters
    cap_schedctl asserts appropriate privilege when altering the scheduling parameters of a process. If _POSIX_CAP is in effect, a process calling this function should have CAP_SCHED_MGT capability in the permitted vector of its capability set.
 cap_size(3c) -- return the size of an capability
    Returns the size of a capability pointed to by capp. In IRIX capabilities are all a fixed size, but the POSIX specifications allow for the possibility of variable sized structures.
 cap_socket(3n) -- create a socket with privilege
    cap_socket asserts appropriate privilege for the creation of sockets with privileged protocol types, like SOCK_RAW or SOCK_IGMP . If _POSIX_CAP is in effect, a process calling this function should have CAP_NETWORK_MGT capability in the permitted vector of its capability set.
 perl5/Carp(3) -- die of errors with stack backtrace
    The Carp routines are useful in your own modules because they act like die() or warn(), but report where the error was in the code they were called from. Thus if you have a routine Foo() that has a carp() in it, then the carp() will report the error as occurring where Foo() was called, not where carp() was called.
 c++/cartpol(3) -- functions for the C++ Complex Math Library
    The following functions are defined for complex, where: - d, m, and a are of type integer and - x and y are of type complex. d = abs(x) Returns the absolute value or magnitude of x. d = norm(x) Returns the square of the magnitude of x. It is faster than abs, but more likely to cause an overflow error. It is intended for comparison of magnitudes. d = arg(x) Returns the angle of x, ...
 Tcl/case(3) -- Evaluate one of several scripts, depending on a given value
    Note: the case command is obsolete and is supported only for backward compatibility. At some point in the future it may be removed entirely. You should use the switch command instead. The case command matches string against each of the patList arguments in order. Each patList argument is a list of one or more patterns. If any of these patterns matches string then case evaluates the following body argument by passing it recursively to the Tcl interpreter and returns the result of that evaluation....
 Tcl/catch(3) -- Evaluate script and trap exceptional returns
    The catch command may be used to prevent errors from aborting command interpretation. Catch calls the Tcl interpreter recursively to execute script, and always returns a TCL_OK code, regardless of any errors that might occur while executing script. The return value from catch is a decimal string giving the code returned by the Tcl interpreter after executing script. This will be 0 (TCL_OK) if there were no errors in script; otherwise it will have a non-zero value corresponding to one of the exce...
 catgetmsg(3c) -- Reads a message from a message catalog
    UNICOS systems IRIX systems
 catgets(3c) -- read a program message
    catgets attempts to read message msg_num, in set set_num, from the message catalogue identified by catd. catd is a catalogue descriptor returned from an earlier call to catopen. s points to a default message string which will be returned by catgets if the identified message catalogue is not currently available.
 catmsgfmt(3c) -- Formats an error message
    UNICOS systems IRIX systems
 catopen(3c) -- open/close a message catalogue
    catopen opens a message catalogue and returns a catalogue descriptor. name specifies the name of the message catalogue to be opened. If name contains a ``/'' then name specifies a pathname for the message catalogue. Otherwise, the environment variable NLSPATH is used. If NLSPATH does not exist in the environment, or if a message catalogue cannot be opened in any of the paths specified by NLSPATH, then the defau...
 complib/CBABK2(3) -- EISPACK routine. This subroutine forms the eigenvectors of a COMPLEX GENERAL matrix by back transforming those
    On INPUT NM must be set to the row dimension of two-dimensional array parameters as declared in the calling program dimension statement. N is the order of the matrix. LOW and IGH are integers determined by CBAL. SCALE contains information determining the permutations and scaling factors used by CBAL. M is the number of eigenvectors to be back transformed. ZR and ZI contain the real and imaginary parts, respectively, of the eigenvectors to be back transformed in their first M columns. On OUTPUT Z...
 complib/CBAL(3) -- EISPACK routine. This subroutine is a complex version of BALANCE.
    This subroutine balances a COMPLEX matrix and isolates eigenvalues whenever possible. On INPUT NM must be set to the row dimension of two-dimensional array parameters as declared in the calling program dimension statement. N is the order of the matrix. AR and AI contain the real and imaginary parts, respectively, of the complex matrix to be balanced. On OUTPUT AR and AI contain the real and imaginary parts, respectively, of the balanced matrix. LOW and IGH are two integers such that AR(I,J) and ...
 complib/cbdsqr(3) -- compute the singular value decomposition (SVD) of a real N-by-N (upper or lower) bidiagonal matrix B
    CBDSQR computes the singular value decomposition (SVD) of a real N-by-N (upper or lower) bidiagonal matrix B: B = Q * S * P' (P' denotes the transpose of P), where S is a diagonal matrix with non-negative diagonal elements (the singular values of B), and Q and P are orthogonal matrices. The routine computes S, and optionally computes U * Q, P' * VT, or Q' * C, for given complex input matrices U, VT, and C. See "Computing Small Singular Values of Bidiagonal Matrices With Guaranteed High Rela...
 complib/CCHDC(3) -- CCHDC computes the Cholesky decomposition of a positive definite matrix. A pivoting option allows the user to
    On Entry A COMPLEX(LDA,P). A contains the matrix whose decomposition is to be computed. Only the upper half of A need be stored. The lower part of The array A is not referenced. LDA INTEGER. LDA is the leading dimension of the array A. P INTEGER. P is the order of the matrix. WORK COMPLEX. WORK is a work array. JPVT INTEGER(P). JPVT contains integers that control the selection of the pivot elements, if pivoting has been requested. Each diagonal element A(K,K) is placed in one of three classes ac...
 complib/CCHDD(3) -- CCHDD downdates an augmented Cholesky decomposition or the triangular factor of an augmented QR decomposition.
    On Entry R COMPLEX(LDR,P), where LDR .GE. P. R contains the upper triangular matrix that is to be downdated. The part of R below the diagonal is not referenced. LDR INTEGER. LDR is the leading dimension of the array R. p INTEGER. P is the order of the matrix R. X COMPLEX(P). X contains the row vector that is to Page 1 CCHDD(3F) CCHDD(3F) be removed from R. X is not altered by CCHDD. Z COMPLEX(LDZ,NZ), where LDZ .GE. P. Z is an array of NZ P-vectors which are to be downdated along with R. LDZ INT...
 complib/CCHEX(3) -- CCHEX updates the Cholesky factorization A = CTRANS(R)*R of a positive definite matrix A of order P under diag
    On Entry R COMPLEX(LDR,P), where LDR .GE. P. R contains the upper triangular factor that is to be updated. Elements of R below the diagonal are not referenced. LDR INTEGER. LDR is the leading dimension of the array R. P INTEGER. P is the order of the matrix R. K INTEGER. K is the first column to be permuted. L INTEGER. L is the last column to be permuted. L must be strictly greater than K. Z COMPLEX(LDZ,NZ), where LDZ .GE. P. Z is an array of NZ P-vectors into which the transformation U is multi...
 complib/CCHUD(3) -- CCHUD updates an augmented Cholesky decomposition of the triangular part of an augmented QR decomposition. Spe
    On Entry R COMPLEX(LDR,P), where LDR .GE. P. R contains the upper triangular matrix that is to be updated. The part of R below the diagonal is not referenced. LDR INTEGER. LDR is the leading dimension of the array R. P INTEGER. P is the order of the matrix R. X COMPLEX(P). X contains the row to be added to R. X is not altered by CCHUD. Page 1 CCHUD(3F) CCHUD(3F) Z COMPLEX(LDZ,NZ), where LDZ .GE. P. Z is an array containing NZ P-vectors to be updated with R. LDZ INTEGER. LDZ is the leading dimens...
 Tcl/cd(3) -- Change working directory
    Change the current working directory to dirName, or to the home directory (as specified in the HOME environment variable) if dirName is not given. If dirName starts with a tilde, then tilde-expansion is done as described for Tcl_TildeSubst. Returns an empty string.
 audiocddat/CDaddcallback(3d) -- set a callback for the CD audio data parser
    cdp A pointer to the target CDPARSER. type The type of callback being set. CDDATATYPES is an enumerated type defined in cdaudio.h containing the following values: cd_audio, cd_pnum, cd_index, cd_ptime, cd_atime, cd_catalog, cd_ident, cd_control. func A pointer to the function to be called. arg A user supplied argument that is passed to the callback function.
 audiocddat/CDallowremoval(3d) -- unlock the CD-ROM drive eject button
    cd A pointer to the CDPLAYER structure representing the target CD-ROM drive.
 audiocddat/CDatomsf(3d) -- convert ASCII string to minutes, seconds, frames
    str A pointer to the ASCII string to be converted. m A pointer to the location to store the minutes value. s A pointer to the location to store the seconds value. f A pointer to the location to store the frame value.
 audiocddat/CDatotime(3d) -- convert ASCII string to timecode
    tc A pointer to the struct cdtimecode in which to place the result. s A pointer to the ASCII string to be converted. The string pointed at by s must be at least 11 bytes long not counting the terminating null.
 audiocddat/CDbestreadsize(3d) -- tells best num_frames value for CDreadda
    cd A pointer to the CDPLAYER structure representing the target CD-ROM drive.
 audiocddat/CDclose(3d) -- closes a CD-ROM device
    cd A pointer to the CDPLAYER structure representing the target CD-ROM drive.
 audiocddat/CDcreateparser(3d) -- creates a CD digital audio data parser
    Upon successful completion, CDcreateparser(3dm) returns a pointer to a CDPARSER, an opaque type defined in cdaudio.h. Otherwise a value of null (0) is returned.
 audiocddat/CDdeleteparser(3d) -- deletes a CD digital audio data parser
    cdp A pointer to the CDPARSER to be deleted.
 audiocddat/CDeject(3d) -- ejects the caddy from the CD-ROM drive
    cd A pointer to the CDPLAYER structure representing the target CD-ROM drive.
 audiocddat/CDframetomsf(3d) -- convert CD frame number to minutes, seconds, frame
    fr The frame number to be converted. m A pointer to the location to store the minutes value. s A pointer to the location to store the seconds value. f A pointer to the location to store the frame value.
 audiocddat/CDframetotc(3d) -- convert CD frame number to timecode
    fr The frame number to be converted. tc A pointer to the struct cdtimecode in which to place the result.
 audiocddat/CDgetstatus(3d) -- get current state of a CD-ROM drive
    cd A pointer to the CDPLAYER structure representing the target CDROM drive. status A pointer to the CDSTATUS structure to be filled in.
 audiocddat/CDgettrackinfo(3d) -- get information about a specified track on an audio CD
    cd A pointer to the CDPLAYER structure representing the target CDROM drive. track The number of the interesting track. info A pointer to the CDTRACKINFO structure to be filled in.
 audiocddat/CDintro(3d) -- Introduction to the Silicon Graphics CD Audio Library (CD)
    libcdaudio provides support for audio compact discs in the CD-ROM drive. The library has three sections: support for operating the CD-ROM drive as a player, support for locating and transferring digital audio data into computer memory, and support for parsing and understanding the content of that data. There is some overlap between the first two sections. libcdaudio controls the CD-ROM through the user level SCSI interface /dev/scsi using the facilities of dslib(3). Programs using libcdaudio mus...
 complib/CDIV(3) -- EISPACK auxiliary routine.
    Complex division, (cr,ci) = (ar,ai)/(br,bi) PPPPaaaaggggeeee 1111
 audiocddat/CDmsftoblock(3d) -- convert time to logical block number
    cd A pointer to the CDPLAYER structure representing the target CD-ROM drive. min,sec,frame The value to be converted in absolute time code.
 audiocddat/CDmsftoframe(3d) -- convert time to CD frame number
    min,sec,frame The value to be converted in absolute time code.
 audiocddat/CDopen(3d) -- opens a CD-ROM drive for audio use
    dev The name of the devscsi file associated with the CD-ROM device. E.g. /dev/scsi/sc0d4l0. If dev is NULL, then CDopen(3dm) will consult the hardware inventory table to locate a CD-ROM drive. direction A pointer to one of "r", "w", or "rw" indicating the direction of the I/O desired.
 audiocddat/CDparseframe(3d) -- parse a frame of CD digital audio data
    cdp A pointer to the target CDPARSER cdfp A pointer to the frame of CD digital audio data to be parsed.
 audiocddat/CDplay(3d) -- play an audio CD through CD-ROM audio jacks
    cd A pointer to the CDPLAYER structure representing the target CDROM drive. start The number of the track at which to start playing the CD. play If 0, play indicates that the CD will be set to an initial paused state by this function. CDtogglepause(3dm) can then be used to commence play.
 audiocddat/CDplayabs(3d) -- play an audio CD (beginning at a specified absolute time
    cd A pointer to the CDPLAYER structure representing the target CD-ROM drive. min,sec,frame The coordinates of the absolute time location at which to start playing the CD. play If 0, play indicates that the CD will be set to an initial paused state by this function. CDtogglepause(3dm) can then be used to commence play.
 audiocddat/CDplaytrack(3d) -- play a specified track from an audio CD through CD-ROM audio jacks
    cd A pointer to the CDPLAYER structure representing the target CDROM drive. start The number of the track at which to start playing the CD. play If 0, play indicates that the CD will be set to an initial paused state by this function. CDtogglepause can then be used to commence play.
 audiocddat/CDplaytrackabs(3d) -- play a track from an audio CD (beginning at a specified
    cd A pointer to the CDPLAYER structure representing the target CD-ROM drive. track The CD audio track to be played. min,sec,frame The coordinates of the absolute time location at which to start playing the CD. play If 0, play indicates that the CD will be set to an initial paused state by this function. CDtogglepause(3dm) can then be used to commence play.
 audiocddat/CDpreventremoval(3d) -- lock the CD-ROM drive eject button
    cd A pointer to the CDPLAYER structure representing the target CD-ROM drive.
 audiocddat/CDreadda(3d) -- read digital audio data from audio CD in CD-ROM
    cd A pointer to the CDPLAYER structure representing the target CD-ROM drive. buf A pointer to a buffer in which to put the data. numframe The number of frames of digital audio data to read.
 audiocddat/CDremovecallback(3d) -- remove a callback from the CD audio data parser
    cdp A pointer to the target CDPARSER. type The type of callback to remove. CDDATATYPES is an enumerated type defined in cdaudio.h containing the following values: cd_audio, cd_pnum, cd_index, cd_ptime, cd_atime, cd_catalog, cd_ident, cd_control.
 audiocddat/CDresetparser(3d) -- resets a CD digital audio data parser
    cdp A pointer to the CDPARSER to be reset.
 audiocddat/CDsbtoa(3d) -- convert six-bit country and owner codes to ASCII string
    s A pointer to a string to store the converted value. The string pointed at by s must be at least count bytes long not counting the terminating null. sb A pointer to an array of six-bit coded characters. count The number of six-bit characters in the sb array.
 audiocddat/CDseek(3d) -- set read pointer for CD-ROM to absolute time code location
    cd A pointer to the CDPLAYER structure representing the target CD-ROM drive. min,sec,frame The location in absolute time code to set the pointer to.
 audiocddat/CDseekblock(3d) -- set read pointer for CD-ROM to start of specified block
    cd A pointer to the CDPLAYER structure representing the target CDROM drive. block The logical block number to set the pointer to.
 audiocddat/CDseektrack(3d) -- set read pointer for CD-ROM to start of specified track
    cd A pointer to the CDPLAYER structure representing the target CDROM drive. track The track number the pointer is to be set to.
 audiocddat/CDstop(3d) -- stops play of an audio CD in CD-ROM drive
    cd A pointer to the CDPLAYER structure representing the target CD-ROM drive.
 audiocddat/CDtctoframe(3d) -- convert timecode to CD frame number
    tc A pointer to a struct cdtimecode structure representing the value to be converted to a frame number.
 audiocddat/CDtimetoa(3d) -- convert timecode to ASCII string
    s A pointer to a string to store the converted value. The string pointed at by s must be at least 8 bytes long not counting the terminating null. tc A pointer to the struct cdtimecode to be converted.
 audiocddat/CDtogglepause(3d) -- toggles a CD-ROM drive between pause and play
    cd A pointer to the CDPLAYER structure representing the target CD-ROM drive.
 f90/ceiling(3) -- Returns the least integer greater than or equal to its argument
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 complib/CFFT2(3) -- Calculate a complex-to-complex Fourier synthesis/analysis.
    
 complib/cfftm1d(3) -- Multiple 1D, complex-to-complex, Fast Fourier Transforms.
    cfftm1d and zfftm1d compute the complex Fourier transform of P complex sequences of N samples each. The k-th index F(k) of the Transform of an N sample sequence f(i) is equal to: F(k) = Sum ( W^(i*k) * f(i) ), for i =0, ..., (N-1) W = exp( (Sign*2*sqrt(-1)*PI) / N ) The Fourier transforms are computed in-place so the input sequence is overwritten by the Fourier transform output.
 complib/cfftm1di(3) -- initialize the coefficient array for complex-tocomplex Multiple 1D FFT modules.
    Initialize the coefficient array which is used in the Multiple 1D FFT modules. This array contains the different twiddle factors and the factorization of N into prime numbers. As the FFT modules cfftm1d or zfftm1d only read the coeff array, it may be reused as long as necessary once it has been initialized. In C, if ptr is NULL, cfftm1di or zfftm1di returns a pointer to an allocated buffer. CFFTM1DI should be used to initialize the coefficient array before any call to CFFTM1D ZFFTM1DI should be ...
 complib/CG(3) -- EISPACK routine. This subroutine calls the recommended sequence of subroutines from the eigensystem subroutine
    On INPUT NM must be set to the row dimension of the two-dimensional array parameters as declared in the calling program dimension statement. N is the order of the matrix A=(AR,AI). AR and AI contain the real and imaginary parts, respectively, of the complex general matrix. MATZ is an integer variable set equal to zero if only eigenvalues are desired. Otherwise it is set to any non-zero integer for both eigenvalues and eigenvectors. On OUTPUT WR and WI contain the real and imaginary parts, respec...
 complib/cgbbrd(3) -- reduce a complex general m-by-n band matrix A to real upper bidiagonal form B by a unitary transformation
    CGBBRD reduces a complex general m-by-n band matrix A to real upper bidiagonal form B by a unitary transformation: Q' * A * P = B. The routine computes B, and optionally forms Q or P', or computes Q'*C for a given matrix C.
 complib/CGBCO(3) -- CGBCO factors a complex band matrix by Gaussian elimination and estimates the condition of the matrix. If RCON
    On Entry ABD COMPLEX(LDA, N) contains the matrix in band storage. The columns of the matrix are stored in the columns of ABD and the diagonals of the matrix are stored in rows ML+1 through 2*ML+MU+1 of ABD . See the comments below for details. LDA INTEGER the leading dimension of the array ABD . LDA must be .GE. 2*ML + MU + 1 . N INTEGER the order of the original matrix. ML INTEGER number of diagonals below the main diagonal. 0 .LE. ML .LT. N . MU INTEGER number of diagonals above the main diago...
 complib/cgbcon(3) -- general band matrix A, in either the 1-norm or the infinity-norm,
    CGBCON estimates the reciprocal of the condition number of a complex general band matrix A, in either the 1-norm or the infinity-norm, using the LU factorization computed by CGBTRF. An estimate is obtained for norm(inv(A)), and the reciprocal of the condition number is computed as RCOND = 1 / ( norm(A) * norm(inv(A)) ).
 complib/CGBDI(3) -- CGBDI computes the determinant of a band matrix using the factors computed by CGBCO or CGBFA. If the inverse i
    On Entry ABD COMPLEX(LDA, N) the output from CGBCo or CGBFA. LDA INTEGER the leading dimension of the array ABD . N INTEGER the order of the original matrix. ML INTEGER number of diagonals below the main diagonal. MU INTEGER number of diagonals above the main diagonal. IPVT INTEGER(N) the pivot vector from CGBCO or CGBFA. On Return DET COMPLEX(2) determinant of original matrix. Determinant = DET(1) * 10.0**DET(2) with 1.0 .LE. CABS1(DET(1)) .LT. 10.0 or DET(1) = 0.0 . LINPACK. This version dated...
 complib/cgbequ(3) -- compute row and column scalings intended to equilibrate an Mby-N band matrix A and reduce its condition number
    CGBEQU computes row and column scalings intended to equilibrate an M-by-N band matrix A and reduce its condition number. R returns the row scale factors and C the column scale factors, chosen to try to make the largest element in each row and column of the matrix B with elements B(i,j)=R(i)*A(i,j)*C(j) have absolute value 1. R(i) and C(j) are restricted to be between SMLNUM = smallest safe number and BIGNUM = largest safe number. Use of these scaling factors is not guaranteed to reduce the condi...
 complib/CGBFA(3) -- CGBFA factors a complex band matrix by elimination. CGBFA is usually called by CGBCO, but it can be called dir
    On Entry ABD COMPLEX(LDA, N) contains the matrix in band storage. The columns of the matrix are stored in the columns of ABD and the diagonals of the matrix are stored in rows ML+1 through 2*ML+MU+1 of ABD . See the comments below for details. LDA INTEGER the leading dimension of the array ABD . LDA must be .GE. 2*ML + MU + 1 . N INTEGER the order of the original matrix. ML INTEGER number of diagonals below the main diagonal. 0 .LE. ML .LT. N . MU INTEGER number of diagonals above the main diago...
 complib/cgbrfs(3) -- improve the computed solution to a system of linear equations when the coefficient matrix is banded, and provi
    CGBRFS improves the computed solution to a system of linear equations when the coefficient matrix is banded, and provides error bounds and backward error estimates for the solution.
 complib/CGBSL(3) -- CGBSL solves the complex band system A * X = B or CTRANS(A) * X = B using the factors computed by CGBCO or CGB
    On Entry ABD COMPLEX(LDA, N) the output from CGBCo or CGBFA. LDA INTEGER the leading dimension of the array ABD . N INTEGER the order of the original matrix. ML INTEGER number of diagonals below the main diagonal. MU INTEGER number of diagonals above the main diagonal. IPVT INTEGER(N) the pivot vector from CGBCO or CGBFA. B COMPLEX(N) the right hand side vector. JOB INTEGER = 0 to solve A*X = B , = nonzero to solve CTRANS(A)*X = B , where CTRANS(A) is the conjugate transpose. On Return B the sol...
 complib/cgbsv(3) -- compute the solution to a complex system of linear equations A * X = B, where A is a band matrix of order N wi
    CGBSV computes the solution to a complex system of linear equations A * X = B, where A is a band matrix of order N with KL subdiagonals and KU superdiagonals, and X and B are N-by-NRHS matrices. The LU decomposition with partial pivoting and row interchanges is used to factor A as A = L * U, where L is a product of permutation and unit lower triangular matrices with KL subdiagonals, and U is upper triangular with KL+KU superdiagonals. The factored form of A is then used to solve the system of eq...
 complib/cgbsvx(3) -- system of linear equations A * X = B, A**T * X = B, or A**H * X = B,
    CGBSVX uses the LU factorization to compute the solution to a complex system of linear equations A * X = B, A**T * X = B, or A**H * X = B, where A is a band matrix of order N with KL subdiagonals and KU superdiagonals, and X and B are N-by-NRHS matrices. Error bounds on the solution and a condition estimate are also provided.
 complib/cgbtf2(3) -- compute an LU factorization of a complex m-by-n band matrix A using partial pivoting with row interchanges
    CGBTF2 computes an LU factorization of a complex m-by-n band matrix A using partial pivoting with row interchanges. This is the unblocked version of the algorithm, calling Level 2 BLAS.
 complib/cgbtrf(3) -- compute an LU factorization of a complex m-by-n band matrix A using partial pivoting with row interchanges
    CGBTRF computes an LU factorization of a complex m-by-n band matrix A using partial pivoting with row interchanges. This is the blocked version of the algorithm, calling Level 3 BLAS.
 complib/cgbtrs(3) -- solve a system of linear equations A * X = B, A**T * X = B, or A**H * X = B with a general band matrix A using
    CGBTRS solves a system of linear equations A * X = B, A**T * X = B, or A**H * X = B with a general band matrix A using the LU factorization computed by CGBTRF.
 complib/cgebak(3) -- form the right or left eigenvectors of a complex general matrix by backward transformation on the computed eig
    CGEBAK forms the right or left eigenvectors of a complex general matrix by backward transformation on the computed eigenvectors of the balanced matrix output by CGEBAL.
 complib/cgebal(3) -- balance a general complex matrix A
    CGEBAL balances a general complex matrix A. This involves, first, permuting A by a similarity transformation to isolate eigenvalues in the first 1 to ILO-1 and last IHI+1 to N elements on the diagonal; and second, applying a diagonal similarity transformation to rows and columns ILO to IHI to make the rows and columns as close in norm as possible. Both steps are optional. Balancing may reduce the 1-norm of the matrix, and improve the accuracy of the computed eigenvalues and/or eigenvectors....
 complib/cgebd2(3) -- reduce a complex general m by n matrix A to upper or lower real bidiagonal form B by a unitary transformation
    CGEBD2 reduces a complex general m by n matrix A to upper or lower real bidiagonal form B by a unitary transformation: Q' * A * P = B. If m >= n, B is upper bidiagonal; if m < n, B is lower bidiagonal.
 complib/cgebrd(3) -- reduce a general complex M-by-N matrix A to upper or lower bidiagonal form B by a unitary transformation
    CGEBRD reduces a general complex M-by-N matrix A to upper or lower bidiagonal form B by a unitary transformation: Q**H * A * P = B. If m >= n, B is upper bidiagonal; if m < n, B is lower bidiagonal.
 complib/CGECO(3) -- CGECO factors a complex matrix by Gaussian elimination and estimates the condition of the matrix. If RCOND is
    On Entry A COMPLEX(LDA, N) the matrix to be factored. LDA INTEGER the leading dimension of the array A . N INTEGER the order of the matrix A . On Return A an upper triangular matrix and the multipliers which were used to obtain it. The factorization can be written A = L*U where L is a product of permutation and unit lower triangular matrices and U is upper triangular. IPVT INTEGER(N) an integer vector of pivot indices. RCOND REAL an estimate of the reciprocal condition of A . For the system A*X ...
 complib/cgecon(3) -- complex matrix A, in either the 1-norm or the infinity-norm, using the LU factorization computed by CGETRF
    CGECON estimates the reciprocal of the condition number of a general complex matrix A, in either the 1-norm or the infinity-norm, using the LU factorization computed by CGETRF. An estimate is obtained for norm(inv(A)), and the reciprocal of the condition number is computed as RCOND = 1 / ( norm(A) * norm(inv(A)) ).
 complib/CGEDI(3) -- CGEDI computes the determinant and inverse of a matrix using the factors computed by CGECO or CGEFA.
    On Entry A COMPLEX(LDA, N) the output from CGECO or CGEFA. LDA INTEGER the leading dimension of the array A . N INTEGER the order of the matrix A . IPVT INTEGER(N) the pivot vector from CGECO or CGEFA. WORK COMPLEX(N) work vector. Contents destroyed. JOB INTEGER = 11 both determinant and inverse. = 01 inverse only. = 10 determinant only. On Return A inverse of original matrix if requested. Otherwise unchanged. DET COMPLEX(2) determinant of original matrix if requested. Otherwise not referenced. ...
 complib/cgeequ(3) -- compute row and column scalings intended to equilibrate an Mby-N matrix A and reduce its condition number
    CGEEQU computes row and column scalings intended to equilibrate an M-by-N matrix A and reduce its condition number. R returns the row scale factors and C the column scale factors, chosen to try to make the largest element in each row and column of the matrix B with elements B(i,j)=R(i)*A(i,j)*C(j) have absolute value 1. R(i) and C(j) are restricted to be between SMLNUM = smallest safe number and BIGNUM = largest safe number. Use of these scaling factors is not guaranteed to reduce the condition ...
 complib/cgees(3) -- compute for an N-by-N complex nonsymmetric matrix A, the eigenvalues, the Schur form T, and, optionally, the m
    CGEES computes for an N-by-N complex nonsymmetric matrix A, the eigenvalues, the Schur form T, and, optionally, the matrix of Schur vectors Z. This gives the Schur factorization A = Z*T*(Z**H). Optionally, it also orders the eigenvalues on the diagonal of the Schur form so that selected eigenvalues are at the top left. The leading columns of Z then form an orthonormal basis for the invariant subspace corresponding to the selected eigenvalues. A complex matrix is in Schur form if it is upper tria...
 complib/cgeesx(3) -- compute for an N-by-N complex nonsymmetric matrix A, the eigenvalues, the Schur form T, and, optionally, the m
    CGEESX computes for an N-by-N complex nonsymmetric matrix A, the eigenvalues, the Schur form T, and, optionally, the matrix of Schur vectors Z. This gives the Schur factorization A = Z*T*(Z**H). Optionally, it also orders the eigenvalues on the diagonal of the Schur form so that selected eigenvalues are at the top left; computes a reciprocal condition number for the average of the selected eigenvalues (RCONDE); and computes a reciprocal condition number for the right invariant subspace correspon...
 complib/cgeev(3) -- compute for an N-by-N complex nonsymmetric matrix A, the eigenvalues and, optionally, the left and/or right ei
    CGEEV computes for an N-by-N complex nonsymmetric matrix A, the eigenvalues and, optionally, the left and/or right eigenvectors. The right eigenvector v(j) of A satisfies A * v(j) = lambda(j) * v(j) where lambda(j) is its eigenvalue. The left eigenvector u(j) of A satisfies u(j)**H * A = lambda(j) * u(j)**H where u(j)**H denotes the conjugate transpose of u(j). The computed eigenvectors are normalized to have Euclidean norm equal to 1 and largest component real....
 complib/cgeevx(3) -- compute for an N-by-N complex nonsymmetric matrix A, the eigenvalues and, optionally, the left and/or right ei
    CGEEVX computes for an N-by-N complex nonsymmetric matrix A, the eigenvalues and, optionally, the left and/or right eigenvectors. Optionally also, it computes a balancing transformation to improve the conditioning of the eigenvalues and eigenvectors (ILO, IHI, SCALE, and ABNRM), reciprocal condition numbers for the eigenvalues (RCONDE), and reciprocal condition numbers for the right eigenvectors (RCONDV). The right eigenvector v(j) of A satisfies A * v(j) = lambda(j) * v(j) where lambda(j) is it...
 complib/CGEFA(3) -- CGEFA factors a complex matrix by Gaussian elimination. CGEFA is usually called by CGECO, but it can be called
    On Entry A COMPLEX(LDA, N) the matrix to be factored. LDA INTEGER the leading dimension of the array A . N INTEGER the order of the matrix A . On Return A an upper triangular matrix and the multipliers which were used to obtain it. The factorization can be written A = L*U where L is a product of permutation and unit lower triangular matrices and U is upper triangular. IPVT INTEGER(N) an integer vector of pivot indices. INFO INTEGER = 0 normal value. = K if U(K,K) .EQ. 0.0 . This is not an error ...
 complib/cgegs(3) -- compute for a pair of N-by-N complex nonsymmetric matrices A,
    SGEGS computes for a pair of N-by-N complex nonsymmetric matrices A, B: the generalized eigenvalues (alpha, beta), the complex Schur form (A, B), and optionally left and/or right Schur vectors (VSL and VSR). (If only the generalized eigenvalues are needed, use the driver CGEGV instead.) A generalized eigenvalue for a pair of matrices (A,B) is, roughly speaking, a scalar w or a ratio alpha/beta = w, such that A - w*B is singular. It is usually represented as the pair (alpha,beta), as there is a r...
 complib/cgegv(3) -- B, the generalized eigenvalues (alpha, beta), and optionally,
    CGEGV computes for a pair of N-by-N complex nonsymmetric matrices A and B, the generalized eigenvalues (alpha, beta), and optionally, the left and/or right generalized eigenvectors (VL and VR). A generalized eigenvalue for a pair of matrices (A,B) is, roughly speaking, a scalar w or a ratio alpha/beta = w, such that A - w*B is singular. It is usually represented as the pair (alpha,beta), as there is a reasonable interpretation for beta=0, and even for both being zero. A good beginning reference ...
 complib/cgehd2(3) -- reduce a complex general matrix A to upper Hessenberg form H by a unitary similarity transformation
    CGEHD2 reduces a complex general matrix A to upper Hessenberg form H by a unitary similarity transformation: Q' * A * Q = H .
 complib/cgehrd(3) -- reduce a complex general matrix A to upper Hessenberg form H by a unitary similarity transformation
    CGEHRD reduces a complex general matrix A to upper Hessenberg form H by a unitary similarity transformation: Q' * A * Q = H .
 complib/cgelq2(3) -- compute an LQ factorization of a complex m by n matrix A
    CGELQ2 computes an LQ factorization of a complex m by n matrix A: A = L * Q.
 complib/cgelqf(3) -- compute an LQ factorization of a complex M-by-N matrix A
    CGELQF computes an LQ factorization of a complex M-by-N matrix A: A = L * Q.
 complib/cgels(3) -- involving an M-by-N matrix A, or its conjugate-transpose, using a QR or LQ factorization of A
    CGELS solves overdetermined or underdetermined complex linear systems involving an M-by-N matrix A, or its conjugate-transpose, using a QR or LQ factorization of A. It is assumed that A has full rank. The following options are provided: 1. If TRANS = 'N' and m >= n: find the least squares solution of an overdetermined system, i.e., solve the least squares problem minimize || B - A*X ||. 2. If TRANS = 'N' and m < n: find the minimum norm solution of an underdetermined system A * X = B. 3. If ...
 complib/cgelss(3) -- compute the minimum norm solution to a complex linear least squares problem
    CGELSS computes the minimum norm solution to a complex linear least squares problem: Minimize 2-norm(| b - A*x |). using the singular value decomposition (SVD) of A. A is an M-by-N matrix which may be rank-deficient. Several right hand side vectors b and solution vectors x can be handled in a single call; they are stored as the columns of the M-by-NRHS right hand side matrix B and the N-by-NRHS solution matrix X. The effective rank of A is determined by treating as zero those singular values whi...
 complib/cgelsx(3) -- compute the minimum-norm solution to a complex linear least squares problem
    CGELSX computes the minimum-norm solution to a complex linear least squares problem: minimize || A * X - B || using a complete orthogonal factorization of A. A is an M-by-N matrix which may be rank-deficient. Several right hand side vectors b and solution vectors x can be handled in a single call; they are stored as the columns of the M-by-NRHS right hand side matrix B and the N-by-NRHS solution matrix X. The routine first computes a QR factorization with column pivoting: A * P = Q * [ R11 R12 ]...
 complib/cgeql2(3) -- compute a QL factorization of a complex m by n matrix A
    CGEQL2 computes a QL factorization of a complex m by n matrix A: A = Q * L.
 complib/cgeqlf(3) -- compute a QL factorization of a complex M-by-N matrix A
    CGEQLF computes a QL factorization of a complex M-by-N matrix A: A = Q * L.
 complib/cgeqpf(3) -- compute a QR factorization with column pivoting of a complex Mby-N matrix A
    CGEQPF computes a QR factorization with column pivoting of a complex Mby-N matrix A: A*P = Q*R.
 complib/cgeqr2(3) -- compute a QR factorization of a complex m by n matrix A
    CGEQR2 computes a QR factorization of a complex m by n matrix A: A = Q * R.
 complib/cgeqrf(3) -- compute a QR factorization of a complex M-by-N matrix A
    CGEQRF computes a QR factorization of a complex M-by-N matrix A: A = Q * R.
 complib/cgerfs(3) -- improve the computed solution to a system of linear equations and provides error bounds and backward error est
    CGERFS improves the computed solution to a system of linear equations and provides error bounds and backward error estimates for the solution.
 complib/cgerq2(3) -- compute an RQ factorization of a complex m by n matrix A
    CGERQ2 computes an RQ factorization of a complex m by n matrix A: A = R * Q.
 complib/cgerqf(3) -- compute an RQ factorization of a complex M-by-N matrix A
    CGERQF computes an RQ factorization of a complex M-by-N matrix A: A = R * Q.
 complib/CGESL(3) -- CGESL solves the complex system A * X = B or CTRANS(A) * X = B using the factors computed by CGECO or CGEFA.
    On Entry A COMPLEX(LDA, N) the output from CGECO or CGEFA. LDA INTEGER the leading dimension of the array A . N INTEGER the order of the matrix A . IPVT INTEGER(N) the pivot vector from CGECO or CGEFA. B COMPLEX(N) the right hand side vector. JOB INTEGER = 0 to solve A*X = B , = nonzero to solve CTRANS(A)*X = B where CTRANS(A) is the conjugate transpose. On Return B the solution vector X . Error Condition A division by zero will occur if the input factor contains a zero on the diagonal. Technica...
 complib/cgesv(3) -- X = B,
    CGESV computes the solution to a complex system of linear equations A * X = B, where A is an N-by-N matrix and X and B are N-by-NRHS matrices. The LU decomposition with partial pivoting and row interchanges is used to factor A as A = P * L * U, where P is a permutation matrix, L is unit lower triangular, and U is upper triangular. The factored form of A is then used to solve the system of equations A * X = B....
 complib/cgesvd(3) -- compute the singular value decomposition (SVD) of a complex Mby-N matrix A, optionally computing the left and/
    CGESVD computes the singular value decomposition (SVD) of a complex Mby-N matrix A, optionally computing the left and/or right singular vectors. The SVD is written A = U * SIGMA * conjugate-transpose(V) where SIGMA is an M-by-N matrix which is zero except for its min(m,n) diagonal elements, U is an M-by-M unitary matrix, and V is an N-by-N unitary matrix. The diagonal elements of SIGMA are the singular values of A; they are real and non-negative, and are returned in descending order. The first m...
 complib/cgesvx(3) -- system of linear equations A * X = B,
    CGESVX uses the LU factorization to compute the solution to a complex system of linear equations A * X = B, where A is an N-by-N matrix and X and B are N-by-NRHS matrices. Error bounds on the solution and a condition estimate are also provided.
 complib/cgetf2(3) -- compute an LU factorization of a general m-by-n matrix A using partial pivoting with row interchanges
    CGETF2 computes an LU factorization of a general m-by-n matrix A using partial pivoting with row interchanges. The factorization has the form A = P * L * U where P is a permutation matrix, L is lower triangular with unit diagonal elements (lower trapezoidal if m > n), and U is upper triangular (upper trapezoidal if m < n). This is the right-looking Level 2 BLAS version of the algorithm.
 complib/cgetrf(3) -- compute an LU factorization of a general M-by-N matrix A using partial pivoting with row interchanges
    CGETRF computes an LU factorization of a general M-by-N matrix A using partial pivoting with row interchanges. The factorization has the form A = P * L * U where P is a permutation matrix, L is lower triangular with unit diagonal elements (lower trapezoidal if m > n), and U is upper triangular (upper trapezoidal if m < n). This is the right-looking Level 3 BLAS version of the algorithm.
 complib/cgetri(3) -- compute the inverse of a matrix using the LU factorization computed by CGETRF
    CGETRI computes the inverse of a matrix using the LU factorization computed by CGETRF. This method inverts U and then computes inv(A) by solving the system inv(A)*L = inv(U) for inv(A).
 complib/cgetrs(3) -- A**H * X = B with a general N-by-N matrix A using the LU factorization computed by CGETRF
    CGETRS solves a system of linear equations A * X = B, A**T * X = B, or A**H * X = B with a general N-by-N matrix A using the LU factorization computed by CGETRF.
 complib/cggbak(3) -- form the right or left eigenvectors of a complex generalized eigenvalue problem A*x = lambda*B*x, by backward
    CGGBAK forms the right or left eigenvectors of a complex generalized eigenvalue problem A*x = lambda*B*x, by backward transformation on the computed eigenvectors of the balanced pair of matrices output by CGGBAL.
 complib/cggbal(3) -- balance a pair of general complex matrices (A,B)
    CGGBAL balances a pair of general complex matrices (A,B). This involves, first, permuting A and B by similarity transformations to isolate eigenvalues in the first 1 to ILO$-$1 and last IHI+1 to N elements on the diagonal; and second, applying a diagonal similarity transformation to rows and columns ILO to IHI to make the rows and columns as close in norm as possible. Both steps are optional. Balancing may reduce the 1-norm of the matrices, and improve the accuracy of the computed eigenvalues an...
 complib/cggglm(3) -- solve a general Gauss-Markov linear model (GLM) problem
    CGGGLM solves a general Gauss-Markov linear model (GLM) problem: minimize || y ||_2 subject to d = A*x + B*y x where A is an N-by-M matrix, B is an N-by-P matrix, and d is a given Nvector. It is assumed that M <= N <= M+P, and rank(A) = M and rank( A B ) = N. Under these assumptions, the constrained equation is always consistent, and there is a unique solution x and a minimal 2-norm solution y, which is obtained using a generalized QR factorization of A and B. In particular, if matrix B is squar...
 complib/cgghrd(3) -- reduce a pair of complex matrices (A,B) to generalized upper Hessenberg form using unitary transformations, wh
    CGGHRD reduces a pair of complex matrices (A,B) to generalized upper Hessenberg form using unitary transformations, where A is a general matrix and B is upper triangular: Q' * A * Z = H and Q' * B * Z = T, where H is upper Hessenberg, T is upper triangular, and Q and Z are unitary, and ' means conjugate transpose. The unitary matrices Q and Z are determined as products of Givens rotations. They may either be formed explicitly, or they may be postmultiplied into input matrices Q1 and Z1, so th...
 complib/cgglse(3) -- solve the linear equality-constrained least squares (LSE) problem
    CGGLSE solves the linear equality-constrained least squares (LSE) problem: minimize || c - A*x ||_2 subject to B*x = d where A is an M-by-N matrix, B is a P-by-N matrix, c is a given M-vector, and d is a given P-vector. It is assumed that P <= N <= M+P, and rank(B) = P and rank( ( A ) ) = N. ( ( B ) ) These conditions ensure that the LSE problem has a unique solution, which is obtained using a GRQ factorization of the matrices B and A....
 complib/cggqrf(3) -- an N-by-P matrix B
    CGGQRF computes a generalized QR factorization of an N-by-M matrix A and an N-by-P matrix B: A = Q*R, B = Q*T*Z, where Q is an N-by-N unitary matrix, Z is a P-by-P unitary matrix, and R and T assume one of the forms: if N >= M, R = ( R11 ) M , or if N < M, R = ( R11 R12 ) N, ( 0 ) N-M N M-N M where R11 is upper triangular, and if N <= P, T = ( 0 T12 ) N, or if N > P, T = ( T11 ) N-P, P-N N ( T21 ) P P where T12 or T21 is upper triangular. In particular, if B is square and nonsingular, the GQR fa...
 complib/cggrqf(3) -- a P-by-N matrix B
    CGGRQF computes a generalized RQ factorization of an M-by-N matrix A and a P-by-N matrix B: A = R*Q, B = Z*T*Q, where Q is an N-by-N unitary matrix, Z is a P-by-P unitary matrix, and R and T assume one of the forms: if M <= N, R = ( 0 R12 ) M, or if M > N, R = ( R11 ) M-N, N-M M ( R21 ) N N where R12 or R21 is upper triangular, and if P >= N, T = ( T11 ) N , or if P < N, T = ( T11 T12 ) P, ( 0 ) P-N P N-P N where T11 is upper triangular. In particular, if B is square and nonsingular, the GRQ fac...
 complib/cggsvd(3) -- an M-by-N complex matrix A and P-by-N complex matrix B
    CGGSVD computes the generalized singular value decomposition (GSVD) of an M-by-N complex matrix A and P-by-N complex matrix B: U'*A*Q = D1*( 0 R ), V'*B*Q = D2*( 0 R ) where U, V and Q are unitary matrices, and Z' means the conjugate transpose of Z. Let K+L = the effective numerical rank of the matrix (A',B')', then R is a (K+L)-by-(K+L) nonsingular upper triangular matrix, D1 and D2 are M-by-(K+L) and P-by-(K+L) "diagonal" matrices and of the following structures, respectively: If M-K-L...
 complib/cggsvp(3) -- U'*A*Q = K ( 0 A12 A13 ) if M-K-L >= 0
    CGGSVP computes unitary matrices U, V and Q such that L ( 0 0 A23 ) M-K-L ( 0 0 0 ) N-K-L K L = K ( 0 A12 A13 ) if M-K-L < 0; M-K ( 0 0 A23 ) N-K-L K L V'*B*Q = L ( 0 0 B13 ) P-L ( 0 0 0 ) where the K-by-K matrix A12 and L-by-L matrix B13 are nonsingular upper triangular; A23 is L-by-L upper triangular if M-K-L >= 0, otherwise A23 is (M-K)-by-L upper trapezoidal. K+L = the effective numerical rank of the (M+P)-by-N matrix (A',B')'. Z' denotes the conjugate transpose of Z. This decomposition...
 perl5/CGI(3) -- Simple Common Gateway Interface Class
    This perl library uses perl5 objects to make it easy to create Web fillout forms and parse their contents. This package defines CGI objects, entities that contain the values of the current query string and other state variables. Using a CGI object's methods, you can examine keywords and parameters passed to your script, and create forms whose initial values are taken from the current query (thereby preserving state information). The current version of CGI.pm is available at http://www.genome.wi...
 perl5/CGI::Apache(3) -- Make things work with CGI.pm against Perl-Apache API
    When using the Perl-Apache API, your applications are faster, but the enviroment is different than CGI. This module attempts to set-up that environment as best it can.
 perl5/CGI::Carp(3) -- CGI routines for writing to the HTTPD (or other) error log
    CGI scripts have a nasty habit of leaving warning messages in the error logs that are neither time stamped nor fully identified. Tracking down the script that caused the error is a pain. This fixes that. Replace the usual use Carp; with use CGI::Carp And the standard warn(), die (), croak(), confess() and carp() calls will automagically be replaced with functions that write out nicely timestamped messages to the HTTP server error log. For example: [Fri Nov 17 21:40:43 1995] test.pl: I'm confuse...
 perl5/CGI::Fast(3) -- CGI Interface for Fast CGI
    CGI::Fast is a subclass of the CGI object created by CGI.pm. It is specialized to work well with the Open Market FastCGI standard, which greatly speeds up CGI scripts by turning them into persistently running server processes. Scripts that perform time-consuming initialization processes, such as loading large modules or opening persistent database connections, will see large performance improvements. OTHER PIECES OF THE PUZZLE In order to use CGI::Fast you'll need a FastCGI-enabled Web server. ...
 perl5/CGI::Push(3) -- Simple Interface to Server Push
    CGI::Push is a subclass of the CGI object created by CGI.pm. It is specialized for server push operations, which allow you to create animated pages whose content changes at regular intervals. You provide CGI::Push with a pointer to a subroutine that will draw one page. Every time your subroutine is called, it generates a new page. The contents of the page will be transmitted to the browser in such a way that it will replace what was there beforehand. The technique will work with HTML pages as we...
 perl5/CGI::Switch(3) -- Try more than one constructors and return the first object available
    Per default the new() method tries to call new() in the three packages Apache::CGI, CGI::XA, and CGI. It returns the first CGI object it succeeds with. The import method allows you to set up the default order of the modules to be tested.
 complib/cgtcon(3) -- estimate the reciprocal of the condition number of a complex tridiagonal matrix A using the LU factorization a
    CGTCON estimates the reciprocal of the condition number of a complex tridiagonal matrix A using the LU factorization as computed by CGTTRF. An estimate is obtained for norm(inv(A)), and the reciprocal of the condition number is computed as RCOND = 1 / (ANORM * norm(inv(A))).
 complib/cgtrfs(3) -- improve the computed solution to a system of linear equations when the coefficient matrix is tridiagonal, and
    CGTRFS improves the computed solution to a system of linear equations when the coefficient matrix is tridiagonal, and provides error bounds and backward error estimates for the solution.
 complib/CGTSL(3) -- CGTSL given a general tridiagonal matrix and a right hand side will find the solution.
    On Entry N INTEGER is the order of the tridiagonal matrix. C COMPLEX(N) is the subdiagonal of the tridiagonal matrix. C(2) through C(N) should contain the subdiagonal. On output C is destroyed. D COMPLEX(N) is the diagonal of the tridiagonal matrix. On output D is destroyed. E COMPLEX(N) is the superdiagonal of the tridiagonal matrix. E(1) through E(N-1) should contain the superdiagonal. On output E is destroyed. B COMPLEX(N) is the right hand side vector. On Return B is the solution vector. INF...
 complib/cgtsv(3) -- solve the equation A*X = B,
    CGTSV solves the equation where A is an N-by-N tridiagonal matrix, by Gaussian elimination with partial pivoting. Note that the equation A'*X = B may be solved by interchanging the order of the arguments DU and DL.
 complib/cgtsvx(3) -- system of linear equations A * X = B, A**T * X = B, or A**H * X = B,
    CGTSVX uses the LU factorization to compute the solution to a complex system of linear equations A * X = B, A**T * X = B, or A**H * X = B, where A is a tridiagonal matrix of order N and X and B are N-by-NRHS matrices. Error bounds on the solution and a condition estimate are also provided.
 complib/cgttrf(3) -- compute an LU factorization of a complex tridiagonal matrix A using elimination with partial pivoting and row
    CGTTRF computes an LU factorization of a complex tridiagonal matrix A using elimination with partial pivoting and row interchanges. The factorization has the form A = L * U where L is a product of permutation and unit lower bidiagonal matrices and U is upper triangular with nonzeros in only the main diagonal and first two superdiagonals.
 complib/cgttrs(3) -- or A**H * X = B,
    CGTTRS solves one of the systems of equations A * X = B, A**T * X = B, or A**H * X = B, with a tridiagonal matrix A using the LU factorization computed by CGTTRF.
 complib/CH(3) -- EISPACK routine. This subroutine calls the recommended sequence of subroutines from the eigensystem subroutine
    On INPUT NM must be set to the row dimension of the two-dimensional array parameters as declared in the calling program dimension statement. N is the order of the matrix A=(AR,AI). AR and AI contain the real and imaginary parts, respectively, of the complex hermitian matrix. MATZ is an integer variable set equal to zero if only eigenvalues are desired. Otherwise it is set to any non-zero integer for both eigenvalues and eigenvectors. On OUTPUT W contains the eigenvalues in ascending order. ZR an...
 Xvc/chantab(3) -- Channel-to-monitor database
    chantab describes the monitor type that is connected to a server's video channel. The server uses this information with a description of the monitor in the moninfo database to determine whether the connected monitor has the capability to run given video formats. The format of each entry in the chantab file consists of the channel number and monitor type name separated by a space. Channel Designator The channel designator must be the first item on a line and is composed of three pieces: server.s...
 f90/char(3) -- explicit FORTRAN type conversion
    These functions perform conversion from one data type to another. The function int converts to integer from its integer, real*4, double precision, real*16, complex, double complex, or complex*32 argument. If the argument is real, integer, real*4, double precision, or real*16 int returns the integer whose magnitude is the largest integer that does not exceed the magnitude of the argument and whose sign is the same as the sign of the argument (i.e. truncation). For complex the above rule is applie...
 standard/charstr(3) -- draws a string of characters
    str expects a pointer to the memory containing a sequence of character id's. type expects one of the following symbolic constants defined in : STR_B Each character id is represented by a single unsigned byte. STR_2B Each character id is represented by two, consecutive unsigned bytes. STR_3B Each character id is represented by three, consecutive unsigned bytes. STR_4B Each character id is represented by four, consecutive unsigned bytes. STR_16 Each character id is represented by a 16-bi...
 complib/chbev(3) -- compute all the eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a complex Hermitian band matrix A
    CHBEV computes all the eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a complex Hermitian band matrix A.
 complib/chbevd(3) -- compute all the eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a complex Hermitian band matrix A
    CHBEVD computes all the eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a complex Hermitian band matrix A. If eigenvectors are desired, it uses a divide and conquer algorithm. The divide and conquer algorithm makes very mild assumptions about floating point arithmetic. It will work on machines with a guard digit in add/subtract, or on those binary machines without guard digits which subtract like the Cray X-MP, Cray Y-MP, Cray C-90, or Cray-2. It could conceivably fail on hexadecimal or decimal mac...
 complib/chbevx(3) -- compute selected eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a complex Hermitian band matrix A
    CHBEVX computes selected eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a complex Hermitian band matrix A. Eigenvalues and eigenvectors can be selected by specifying either a range of values or a range of indices for the desired eigenvalues.
 complib/chbgst(3) -- eigenproblem A*x = lambda*B*x to standard form C*y = lambda*y,
    CHBGST reduces a complex Hermitian-definite banded generalized eigenproblem A*x = lambda*B*x to standard form C*y = lambda*y, such that C has the same bandwidth as A. B must have been previously factorized as S**H*S by CPBSTF, using a split Cholesky factorization. A is overwritten by C = X**H*A*X, where X = S**(-1)*Q and Q is a unitary matrix chosen to preserve the bandwidth of A.
 complib/chbgv(3) -- a complex generalized Hermitian-definite banded eigenproblem, of the form A*x=(lambda)*B*x
    CHBGV computes all the eigenvalues, and optionally, the eigenvectors of a complex generalized Hermitian-definite banded eigenproblem, of the form A*x=(lambda)*B*x. Here A and B are assumed to be Hermitian and banded, and B is also positive definite.
 complib/chbtrd(3) -- reduce a complex Hermitian band matrix A to real symmetric tridiagonal form T by a unitary similarity transfor
    CHBTRD reduces a complex Hermitian band matrix A to real symmetric tridiagonal form T by a unitary similarity transformation: Q**H * A * Q = T.
 Tk/checkbutton(3) -- Create and manipulate checkbutton widgets
    activeBackground cursor highlightThickness takeFocus | activeForeground disabledForeground image text | anchor font justify textVariable | background foreground padX underline | bitmap highlightBackground padY wrapLength | borderWidth highlightColor relief See the ``options'' manual entry for details on the standard options. WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS Name: command Class: Command Command-Line Switch:-command Specifies a Tcl command to associate with the button. This command is typically invoked w...
 complib/checon(3) -- estimate the reciprocal of the condition number of a complex Hermitian matrix A using the factorization A = U*
    CHECON estimates the reciprocal of the condition number of a complex Hermitian matrix A using the factorization A = U*D*U**H or A = L*D*L**H computed by CHETRF. An estimate is obtained for norm(inv(A)), and the reciprocal of the condition number is computed as RCOND = 1 / (ANORM * norm(inv(A))).
 complib/cheev(3) -- compute all eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a complex Hermitian matrix A
    CHEEV computes all eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a complex Hermitian matrix A.
 complib/cheevd(3) -- compute all eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a complex Hermitian matrix A
    CHEEVD computes all eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a complex Hermitian matrix A. If eigenvectors are desired, it uses a divide and conquer algorithm. The divide and conquer algorithm makes very mild assumptions about floating point arithmetic. It will work on machines with a guard digit in add/subtract, or on those binary machines without guard digits which subtract like the Cray X-MP, Cray Y-MP, Cray C-90, or Cray-2. It could conceivably fail on hexadecimal or decimal machines wit...
 complib/cheevx(3) -- compute selected eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a complex Hermitian matrix A
    CHEEVX computes selected eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a complex Hermitian matrix A. Eigenvalues and eigenvectors can be selected by specifying either a range of values or a range of indices for the desired eigenvalues.
 complib/chegs2(3) -- reduce a complex Hermitian-definite generalized eigenproblem to standard form
    CHEGS2 reduces a complex Hermitian-definite generalized eigenproblem to standard form. If ITYPE = 1, the problem is A*x = lambda*B*x, and A is overwritten by inv(U')*A*inv(U) or inv(L)*A*inv(L') If ITYPE = 2 or 3, the problem is A*B*x = lambda*x or B*A*x = lambda*x, and A is overwritten by U*A*U` or L'*A*L. B must have been previously factorized as U'*U or L*L' by CPOTRF.
 complib/chegst(3) -- reduce a complex Hermitian-definite generalized eigenproblem to standard form
    CHEGST reduces a complex Hermitian-definite generalized eigenproblem to standard form. If ITYPE = 1, the problem is A*x = lambda*B*x, and A is overwritten by inv(U**H)*A*inv(U) or inv(L)*A*inv(L**H) If ITYPE = 2 or 3, the problem is A*B*x = lambda*x or B*A*x = lambda*x, and A is overwritten by U*A*U**H or L**H*A*L. B must have been previously factorized as U**H*U or L*L**H by CPOTRF.
 complib/chegv(3) -- a complex generalized Hermitian-definite eigenproblem, of the form A*x=(lambda)*B*x, A*Bx=(lambda)*x, or B*A*x
    CHEGV computes all the eigenvalues, and optionally, the eigenvectors of a complex generalized Hermitian-definite eigenproblem, of the form A*x=(lambda)*B*x, A*Bx=(lambda)*x, or B*A*x=(lambda)*x. Here A and B are assumed to be Hermitian and B is also positive definite.
 complib/cherfs(3) -- improve the computed solution to a system of linear equations when the coefficient matrix is Hermitian indefin
    CHERFS improves the computed solution to a system of linear equations when the coefficient matrix is Hermitian indefinite, and provides error bounds and backward error estimates for the solution.
 complib/chesv(3) -- X = B,
    CHESV computes the solution to a complex system of linear equations A * X = B, where A is an N-by-N Hermitian matrix and X and B are Nby-NRHS matrices. The diagonal pivoting method is used to factor A as A = U * D * U**H, if UPLO = 'U', or A = L * D * L**H, if UPLO = 'L', where U (or L) is a product of permutation and unit upper (lower) triangular matrices, and D is Hermitian and block diagonal with 1-by-1 and 2-by-2 diagonal blocks. The factored form of A is then used to solve the system of...
 complib/chesvx(3) -- to a complex system of linear equations A * X = B,
    CHESVX uses the diagonal pivoting factorization to compute the solution to a complex system of linear equations A * X = B, where A is an N-by-N Hermitian matrix and X and B are N-by-NRHS matrices. Error bounds on the solution and a condition estimate are also provided.
 complib/chetd2(3) -- reduce a complex Hermitian matrix A to real symmetric tridiagonal form T by a unitary similarity transformatio
    CHETD2 reduces a complex Hermitian matrix A to real symmetric tridiagonal form T by a unitary similarity transformation: Q' * A * Q = T.
 complib/chetf2(3) -- the Bunch-Kaufman diagonal pivoting method
    CHETF2 computes the factorization of a complex Hermitian matrix A using the Bunch-Kaufman diagonal pivoting method: A = U*D*U' or A = L*D*L' where U (or L) is a product of permutation and unit upper (lower) triangular matrices, U' is the conjugate transpose of U, and D is Hermitian and block diagonal with 1-by-1 and 2-by-2 diagonal blocks. This is the unblocked version of the algorithm, calling Level 2 BLAS....
 complib/chetrd(3) -- reduce a complex Hermitian matrix A to real symmetric tridiagonal form T by a unitary similarity transformatio
    CHETRD reduces a complex Hermitian matrix A to real symmetric tridiagonal form T by a unitary similarity transformation: Q**H * A * Q = T.
 complib/chetrf(3) -- the Bunch-Kaufman diagonal pivoting method
    CHETRF computes the factorization of a complex Hermitian matrix A using the Bunch-Kaufman diagonal pivoting method. The form of the factorization is A = U*D*U**H or A = L*D*L**H where U (or L) is a product of permutation and unit upper (lower) triangular matrices, and D is Hermitian and block diagonal with 1-by-1 and 2-by-2 diagonal blocks. This is the blocked version of the algorithm, calling Level 3 BLAS....
 complib/chetri(3) -- compute the inverse of a complex Hermitian indefinite matrix A using the factorization A = U*D*U**H or A = L*D
    CHETRI computes the inverse of a complex Hermitian indefinite matrix A using the factorization A = U*D*U**H or A = L*D*L**H computed by CHETRF.
 complib/chetrs(3) -- solve a system of linear equations A*X = B with a complex Hermitian matrix A using the factorization A = U*D*U
    CHETRS solves a system of linear equations A*X = B with a complex Hermitian matrix A using the factorization A = U*D*U**H or A = L*D*L**H computed by CHETRF.
 complib/chgeqz(3) -- w(i) B ) = 0 If JOB='S', then the pair (A,B) is simultaneously reduced to Schur form (i.e., A and B are both u
    CHGEQZ implements a single-shift version of the QZ method for finding the generalized eigenvalues w(i)=ALPHA(i)/BETA(i) of the equation A are then ALPHA(1),...,ALPHA(N), and of B are BETA(1),...,BETA(N). If JOB='S' and COMPQ and COMPZ are 'V' or 'I', then the unitary transformations used to reduce (A,B) are accumulated into the arrays Q and Z s.t.: Q(in) A(in) Z(in)* = Q(out) A(out) Z(out)* Q(in) B(in) Z(in)* = Q(out) B(out) Z(out)* Ref: C.B. Moler & G.W. Stewart, "An Algorithm for Genera...
 complib/CHICO(3) -- CHICO factors a complex Hermitian matrix by elimination with symmetric pivoting and estimates the condition of
    On Entry A COMPLEX(LDA, N) the Hermitian matrix to be factored. Only the diagonal and upper triangle are used. LDA INTEGER the leading dimension of the array A . N INTEGER the order of the matrix A . Output A a block diagonal matrix and the multipliers which were used to obtain it. The factorization can be written A = U*D*CTRANS(U) where U is a product of permutation and unit upper triangular matrices , CTRANS(U) is the conjugate transpose of U , and D is block diagonal with 1 by 1 and 2 by 2 bl...
 complib/CHIDI(3) -- CHIDI computes the determinant, inertia and inverse of a complex Hermitian matrix using the factors from CHIFA
    On Entry A COMPLEX(LDA,N) the output from CHIFA. LDA INTEGER the leading dimension of the array A. N INTEGER the order of the matrix A. KVPT INTEGER(N) the pivot vector from CHIFA. WORK COMPLEX(N) work vector. Contents destroyed. JOB INTEGER JOB has the decimal expansion ABC where if C .NE. 0, the inverse is computed, if B .NE. 0, the determinant is computed, if A .NE. 0, the inertia is computed. For example, JOB = 111 gives all three. On Return Variables not requested by JOB are not used. A con...
 complib/CHIFA(3) -- CHIFA factors a complex Hermitian matrix by elimination with symmetric pivoting. To solve A*X = B , follow CHI
    On Entry A COMPLEX(LDA,N) the Hermitian matrix to be factored. Only the diagonal and upper triangle are used. LDA INTEGER the leading dimension of the array A . N INTEGER the order of the matrix A . On Return A a block diagonal matrix and the multipliers which were used to obtain it. The factorization can be written A = U*D*CTRANS(U) where U is a product of permutation and unit upper triangular matrices , CTRANS(U) is the conjugate transpose of U , and D is block diagonal with 1 by 1 and 2 by 2 ...
 complib/CHISL(3) -- CHISL solves the complex Hermitian system A * X = B using the factors computed by CHIFA.
    On Entry A COMPLEX(LDA,N) the output from CHIFA. LDA INTEGER the leading dimension of the array A . N INTEGER the order of the matrix A . KVPT INTEGER(N) the pivot vector from CHIFA. B COMPLEX(N) the right hand side vector. On Return B the solution vector X . Error Condition A division by zero may occur if CHICO has set RCOND .EQ. 0.0 or CHIFA has set INFO .NE. 0 . To compute INVERSE(A) * C where C is a matrix with P columns CALL CHIFA(A,LDA,N,KVPT,INFO) IF (INFO .NE. 0) GO TO ... DO 10 J = 1, p...
 ftn/chmod(3) -- change mode of a file
    This function changes the filesystem mode of file name. Mode can be any specification recognized by chmod(1). Name must be a single pathname. The normal returned value is 0. Any other value will be a system error number.
 complib/CHPCO(3) -- CHPCO factors a complex Hermitian matrix stored in packed form by elimination with symmetric pivoting and esti
    On Entry AP COMPLEX (N*(N+1)/2) the packed form of a Hermitian matrix A . The columns of the upper triangle are stored sequentially in a one-dimensional array of length N*(N+1)/2 . See comments below for details. N INTEGER the order of the matrix A . Output AP a block diagonal matrix and the multipliers which were used to obtain it stored in packed form. The factorization can be written A = U*D*CTRANS(U) where U is a product of permutation and unit upper triangular matrices , CTRANS(U) is the co...
 complib/chpcon(3) -- estimate the reciprocal of the condition number of a complex Hermitian packed matrix A using the factorization
    CHPCON estimates the reciprocal of the condition number of a complex Hermitian packed matrix A using the factorization A = U*D*U**H or A = L*D*L**H computed by CHPTRF. An estimate is obtained for norm(inv(A)), and the reciprocal of the condition number is computed as RCOND = 1 / (ANORM * norm(inv(A))).
 complib/CHPDI(3) -- CHPDI computes the determinant, inertia and inverse of a complex Hermitian matrix using the factors from CHPFA
    On Entry AP COMPLEX (N*(N+1)/2) the output from CHPFA. N INTEGER the order of the matrix A. KVPT INTEGER(N) the pivot vector from CHPFA. WORK COMPLEX(N) work vector. Contents ignored. JOB INTEGER JOB has the decimal expansion ABC where if C .NE. 0, the inverse is computed, if B .NE. 0, the determinant is computed, if A .NE. 0, the inertia is computed. For example, JOB = 111 gives all three. On Return Variables not requested by JOB are not used. AP contains the upper triangle of the inverse of th...
 complib/chpev(3) -- compute all the eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a complex Hermitian matrix in packed storage
    CHPEV computes all the eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a complex Hermitian matrix in packed storage.
 complib/chpevd(3) -- compute all the eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a complex Hermitian matrix A in packed storage
    CHPEVD computes all the eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a complex Hermitian matrix A in packed storage. If eigenvectors are desired, it uses a divide and conquer algorithm. The divide and conquer algorithm makes very mild assumptions about floating point arithmetic. It will work on machines with a guard digit in add/subtract, or on those binary machines without guard digits which subtract like the Cray X-MP, Cray Y-MP, Cray C-90, or Cray-2. It could conceivably fail on hexadecimal o...
 complib/chpevx(3) -- compute selected eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a complex Hermitian matrix A in packed storage
    CHPEVX computes selected eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a complex Hermitian matrix A in packed storage. Eigenvalues/vectors can be selected by specifying either a range of values or a range of indices for the desired eigenvalues.
 complib/CHPFA(3) -- CHPFA factors a complex Hermitian matrix stored in packed form by elimination with symmetric pivoting. To solv
    On Entry AP COMPLEX (N*(N+1)/2) the packed form of a Hermitian matrix A . The columns of the upper triangle are stored sequentially in a one-dimensional array of length N*(N+1)/2 . See comments below for details. N INTEGER the order of the matrix A . Output AP A block diagonal matrix and the multipliers which were used to obtain it stored in packed form. The factorization can be written A = U*D*CTRANS(U) where U is a product of permutation and unit upper triangular matrices , CTRANS(U) is the co...
 complib/chpgst(3) -- reduce a complex Hermitian-definite generalized eigenproblem to standard form, using packed storage
    CHPGST reduces a complex Hermitian-definite generalized eigenproblem to standard form, using packed storage. If ITYPE = 1, the problem is A*x = lambda*B*x, and A is overwritten by inv(U**H)*A*inv(U) or inv(L)*A*inv(L**H) If ITYPE = 2 or 3, the problem is A*B*x = lambda*x or B*A*x = lambda*x, and A is overwritten by U*A*U**H or L**H*A*L. B must have been previously factorized as U**H*U or L*L**H by CPPTRF....
 complib/chpgv(3) -- a complex generalized Hermitian-definite eigenproblem, of the form A*x=(lambda)*B*x, A*Bx=(lambda)*x, or B*A*x
    CHPGV computes all the eigenvalues and, optionally, the eigenvectors of a complex generalized Hermitian-definite eigenproblem, of the form A*x=(lambda)*B*x, A*Bx=(lambda)*x, or B*A*x=(lambda)*x. Here A and B are assumed to be Hermitian, stored in packed format, and B is also positive definite.
 complib/chprfs(3) -- improve the computed solution to a system of linear equations when the coefficient matrix is Hermitian indefin
    CHPRFS improves the computed solution to a system of linear equations when the coefficient matrix is Hermitian indefinite and packed, and provides error bounds and backward error estimates for the solution.
 complib/CHPSL(3) -- CHISL solves the complex Hermitian system A * X = B using the factors computed by CHPFA.
    On Entry AP COMPLEX(N*(N+1)/2) the output from CHPFA. N INTEGER the order of the matrix A . KVPT INTEGER(N) the pivot vector from CHPFA. B COMPLEX(N) the right hand side vector. On Return B the solution vector X . Error Condition A division by zero may occur if CHPCO has set RCOND .EQ. 0.0 or CHPFA has set INFO .NE. 0 . To compute INVERSE(A) * C where C is a matrix with P columns CALL CHPFA(AP,N,KVPT,INFO) IF (INFO .NE. 0) GO TO ... DO 10 J = 1, P CALL CHPSL(AP,N,KVPT,C(1,J)) 10 CONTINUE LINPACK...
 complib/chpsv(3) -- X = B,
    CHPSV computes the solution to a complex system of linear equations A * X = B, where A is an N-by-N Hermitian matrix stored in packed format and X and B are N-by-NRHS matrices. The diagonal pivoting method is used to factor A as A = U * D * U**H, if UPLO = 'U', or A = L * D * L**H, if UPLO = 'L', where U (or L) is a product of permutation and unit upper (lower) triangular matrices, D is Hermitian and block diagonal with 1-by-1 and 2-by-2 diagonal blocks. The factored form of A is then used t...
 complib/chpsvx(3) -- and X and B are N-by-NRHS matrices
    CHPSVX uses the diagonal pivoting factorization A = U*D*U**H or A = L*D*L**H to compute the solution to a complex system of linear equations A * X = B, where A is an N-by-N Hermitian matrix stored in packed format and X and B are N-by-NRHS matrices. Error bounds on the solution and a condition estimate are also provided.
 complib/chptrd(3) -- reduce a complex Hermitian matrix A stored in packed form to real symmetric tridiagonal form T by a unitary si
    CHPTRD reduces a complex Hermitian matrix A stored in packed form to real symmetric tridiagonal form T by a unitary similarity transformation: Q**H * A * Q = T.
 complib/chptrf(3) -- using the Bunch-Kaufman diagonal pivoting method
    CHPTRF computes the factorization of a complex Hermitian packed matrix A using the Bunch-Kaufman diagonal pivoting method: A = U*D*U**H or A = L*D*L**H where U (or L) is a product of permutation and unit upper (lower) triangular matrices, and D is Hermitian and block diagonal with 1-by-1 and 2-by-2 diagonal blocks.
 complib/chptri(3) -- compute the inverse of a complex Hermitian indefinite matrix A in packed storage using the factorization A = U
    CHPTRI computes the inverse of a complex Hermitian indefinite matrix A in packed storage using the factorization A = U*D*U**H or A = L*D*L**H computed by CHPTRF.
 complib/chptrs(3) -- solve a system of linear equations A*X = B with a complex Hermitian matrix A stored in packed format using the
    CHPTRS solves a system of linear equations A*X = B with a complex Hermitian matrix A stored in packed format using the factorization A = U*D*U**H or A = L*D*L**H computed by CHPTRF.
 complib/chsein(3) -- use inverse iteration to find specified right and/or left eigenvectors of a complex upper Hessenberg matrix H
    CHSEIN uses inverse iteration to find specified right and/or left eigenvectors of a complex upper Hessenberg matrix H. The right eigenvector x and the left eigenvector y of the matrix H corresponding to an eigenvalue w are defined by: H * x = w * x, y**h * H = w * y**h where y**h denotes the conjugate transpose of the vector y.
 complib/chseqr(3) -- compute the eigenvalues of a complex upper Hessenberg matrix H, and, optionally, the matrices T and Z from the
    CHSEQR computes the eigenvalues of a complex upper Hessenberg matrix H, and, optionally, the matrices T and Z from the Schur decomposition H = Z T Z**H, where T is an upper triangular matrix (the Schur form), and Z is the unitary matrix of Schur vectors. Optionally Z may be postmultiplied into an input unitary matrix Q, so that this routine can give the Schur factorization of a matrix A which has been reduced to the Hessenberg form H by the unitary matrix Q: A = Q*H*Q**H = (QZ)*T*(QZ)**H....
 standard/chunksize(3) -- specifies minimum object size in memory
    chunk Expects the minimum memory size to allocate for an object. As you add objects to a display list, chunk is the unit size (in bytes) by which the memory allocated to the display list grows.
 complib/CINVIT(3) -- EISPACK routine. This subroutine finds those eigenvectors of A COMPLEX UPPER Hessenberg matrix corresponding t
    On INPUT NM must be set to the row dimension of two-dimensional array parameters as declared in the calling program dimension statement. N is the order of the matrix. AR and AI contain the real and imaginary parts, respectively, of the Hessenberg matrix. WR and WI contain the real and imaginary parts, respectively, of the eigenvalues of the matrix. The eigenvalues must be stored in a manner identical to that of subroutine COMLR, which recognizes possible splitting of the matrix. SELECT specifies...
 standard/circ(3) -- outlines a circle
    x expects the x coordinate of the center of the circle specified in world coordinates. y expects the y coordinate of the center of the circle specified in world coordinates. radius expects the length of the radius of the circle.
 standard/circf(3) -- draws a filled circle
    x expects the x coordinate of the center of the filled circle specified in world coordinates. y expects the y coordinate of the center of the filled circle specified in world coordinates. radius expects the length of the radius of the filled circle.
 ckpt_create(3) -- checkpoint and restart (CPR) library interfaces
    The functions provided here are used to issue checkpoint and restart (CPR) requests to a process or group of processes. The ckpt_setup, ckpt_create, ckpt_restart, and ckpt_remove routines are implemented according to the IEEE standard POSIX 1003.1m Draft 1, with minor modifications (described below). The ckpt_stat function is an IRIX extension. Silicon Graphics intends to follow the future development of POSIX 1003.1m draft standards and endeavor to be compliant. ckpt_setup This routine currentl...
 complib/clabrd(3) -- reduce the first NB rows and columns of a complex general m by n matrix A to upper or lower real bidiagonal fo
    CLABRD reduces the first NB rows and columns of a complex general m by n matrix A to upper or lower real bidiagonal form by a unitary transformation Q' * A * P, and returns the matrices X and Y which are needed to apply the transformation to the unreduced part of A. If m >= n, A is reduced to upper bidiagonal form; if m < n, to lower bidiagonal form. This is an auxiliary routine called by CGEBRD
 complib/clacgv(3) -- conjugate a complex vector of length N
    CLACGV conjugates a complex vector of length N.
 complib/clacon(3) -- estimate the 1-norm of a square, complex matrix A
    CLACON estimates the 1-norm of a square, complex matrix A. Reverse communication is used for evaluating matrix-vector products.
 complib/clacpy(3) -- copie all or part of a two-dimensional matrix A to another matrix B
    CLACPY copies all or part of a two-dimensional matrix A to another matrix B.
 complib/clacrm(3) -- perform a very simple matrix-matrix multiplication
    CLACRM performs a very simple matrix-matrix multiplication: C := A * B, where A is M by N and complex; B is N by N and real; C is M by N and complex.
 complib/clacrt(3) -- applie a plane rotation, where the cos and sin (C and S) are complex and the vectors CX and CY are complex
    CLACRT applies a plane rotation, where the cos and sin (C and S) are complex and the vectors CX and CY are complex.
 old-compression/clAddAlgorithm(3d) -- Add a video or audio compression algorithm to the Compression Library
    name A pointer to a string that contains the name of the algorithm. algType The type of the algorithm (CL_ALG_VIDEO or CL_ALG_AUDIO). maxHeaderSize The maximum size of the stream header for the specified algorithm. openCompressor A pointer to the function that opens a compressor for the new algorithm. The function must have the same arguments as clOpenCompressor. compress A pointer to the function that compresses for the new algorithm. The function must have the same arguments as clCompress. clo...
 old-compression/clAddParam(3d) -- Add a video or audio compression parameter to the Compression Library
    scheme The compression scheme that gets the added parameter. name A pointer to a string that contains the name of the parameter. paramType The type of the parameter (CL_ENUM_VALUE, CL_RANGE_VALUE, CL_FLOATING_ENUM_VALUE, or CL_FLOATING_RANGE_VALUE). min The minimum value the parameter can have. max The maximum value the parameter can have. initial The default value of the parameter. paramIDPtr A pointer to an int value that is to receive the new parameter identifier. paramID The parameter identi...
 complib/cladiv(3) -- := X / Y, where X and Y are complex
    CLADIV := X / Y, where X and Y are complex. The computation of X / Y will not overflow on an intermediary step unless the results overflows.
 complib/claed0(3) -- the divide and conquer method, CLAED0 computes all eigenvalues of a symmetric tridiagonal matrix which is one
    Using the divide and conquer method, CLAED0 computes all eigenvalues of a symmetric tridiagonal matrix which is one diagonal block of those from reducing a dense or band Hermitian matrix and corresponding eigenvectors of the dense or band matrix.
 complib/claed7(3) -- modification by a rank-one symmetric matrix
    CLAED7 computes the updated eigensystem of a diagonal matrix after modification by a rank-one symmetric matrix. This routine is used only for the eigenproblem which requires all eigenvalues and optionally eigenvectors of a dense or banded Hermitian matrix that has been reduced to tridiagonal form. T = Q(in) ( D(in) + RHO * Z*Z' ) Q'(in) = Q(out) * D(out) * Q'(out) where Z = Q'u, u is a vector of length N with ones in the CUTPNT and CUTPNT + 1 th elements and zeros elsewhere. The eigenvectors...
 complib/claed8(3) -- merge the two sets of eigenvalues together into a single sorted set
    CLAED8 merges the two sets of eigenvalues together into a single sorted set. Then it tries to deflate the size of the problem. There are two ways in which deflation can occur: when two or more eigenvalues are close together or if there is a tiny element in the Z vector. For each such occurrence the order of the related secular equation problem is reduced by one.
 complib/claein(3) -- use inverse iteration to find a right or left eigenvector corresponding to the eigenvalue W of a complex upper
    CLAEIN uses inverse iteration to find a right or left eigenvector corresponding to the eigenvalue W of a complex upper Hessenberg matrix H.
 complib/claesy(3) -- compute the eigendecomposition of a 2-by-2 symmetric matrix ( ( A, B );( B, C ) ) provided the norm of the mat
    CLAESY computes the eigendecomposition of a 2-by-2 symmetric matrix ( ( A, B );( B, C ) ) provided the norm of the matrix of eigenvectors is larger than some threshold value. RT1 is the eigenvalue of larger absolute value, and RT2 of smaller absolute value. If the eigenvectors are computed, then on return ( CS1, SN1 ) is the unit eigenvector for RT1, hence [ CS1 SN1 ] . [ A B ] . [ CS1 -SN1 ] = [ RT1 0 ] [ -SN1 CS1 ] [ B C ] [ SN1 CS1 ] [ 0 RT2 ]...
 complib/claev2(3) -- compute the eigendecomposition of a 2-by-2 Hermitian matrix [ A B ] [ CONJG(B) C ]
    CLAEV2 computes the eigendecomposition of a 2-by-2 Hermitian matrix [ A B ] [ CONJG(B) C ]. On return, RT1 is the eigenvalue of larger absolute value, RT2 is the eigenvalue of smaller absolute value, and (CS1,SN1) is the unit right eigenvector for RT1, giving the decomposition [ CS1 CONJG(SN1) ] [ A B ] [ CS1 -CONJG(SN1) ] = [ RT1 0 ] [- SN1 CS1 ] [ CONJG(B) C ] [ SN1 CS1 ] [ 0 RT2 ].
 complib/clags2(3) -- compute 2-by-2 unitary matrices U, V and Q, such that if ( UPPER ) then U'*A*Q = U'*( A1 A2 )*Q = ( x 0 ) ( 0
    CLAGS2 computes 2-by-2 unitary matrices U, V and Q, such that if ( UPPER ) then ( -CONJG(SNU) CSU ) ( -CONJG(SNV) CSV ) Q = ( CSQ SNQ ) ( -CONJG(SNQ) CSQ ) Z' denotes the conjugate transpose of Z. The rows of the transformed A and B are parallel. Moreover, if the input 2-by-2 matrix A is not zero, then the transformed (1,1) entry of A is not zero. If the input matrices A and B are both not zero, then the transformed (2,2) element of B is not zero, except when the first rows of input A and B are...
 complib/clagtm(3) -- perform a matrix-vector product of the form B := alpha * A * X + beta * B where A is a tridiagonal matrix of o
    CLAGTM performs a matrix-vector product of the form
 complib/clahef(3) -- using the Bunch-Kaufman diagonal pivoting method
    CLAHEF computes a partial factorization of a complex Hermitian matrix A using the Bunch-Kaufman diagonal pivoting method. The partial factorization has the form: A = ( I U12 ) ( A11 0 ) ( I 0 ) if UPLO = 'U', or: ( 0 U22 ) ( 0 D ) ( U12' U22' ) A = ( L11 0 ) ( D 0 ) ( L11' L21' ) if UPLO = 'L' ( L21 I ) ( 0 A22 ) ( 0 I ) where the order of D is at most NB. The actual order is returned in the argument KB, and is either NB or NB-1, or N if N <= NB. Note that U' denotes the conjugate trans...
 complib/clahqr(3) -- i an auxiliary routine called by CHSEQR to update the eigenvalues and Schur decomposition already computed by
    CLAHQR is an auxiliary routine called by CHSEQR to update the eigenvalues and Schur decomposition already computed by CHSEQR, by dealing with the Hessenberg submatrix in rows and columns ILO to IHI.
 complib/clahrd(3) -- matrix A so that elements below the k-th subdiagonal are zero
    CLAHRD reduces the first NB columns of a complex general n-by-(n-k+1) matrix A so that elements below the k-th subdiagonal are zero. The reduction is performed by a unitary similarity transformation Q' * A * Q. The routine returns the matrices V and T which determine Q as a block reflector I - V*T*V', and also the matrix Y = A * V * T. This is an auxiliary routine called by CGEHRD.
 complib/claic1(3) -- applie one step of incremental condition estimation in its simplest version
    CLAIC1 applies one step of incremental condition estimation in its simplest version: Let x, twonorm(x) = 1, be an approximate singular vector of an j-by-j lower triangular matrix L, such that twonorm(L*x) = sest Then CLAIC1 computes sestpr, s, c such that the vector [ s*x ] xhat = [ c ] is an approximate singular vector of [ L 0 ] Lhat = [ w' gamma ] in the sense that twonorm(Lhat*xhat) = sestpr. Depending on JOB, an estimate for the largest or smallest singular value is computed. Note that [s ...
 complib/clangb(3) -- return the value of the one norm, or the Frobenius norm, or the infinity norm, or the element of largest absol
    CLANGB returns the value of the one norm, or the Frobenius norm, or the infinity norm, or the element of largest absolute value of an n by n band matrix A, with kl sub-diagonals and ku super-diagonals.
 complib/clange(3) -- return the value of the one norm, or the Frobenius norm, or the infinity norm, or the element of largest absol
    CLANGE returns the value of the one norm, or the Frobenius norm, or the infinity norm, or the element of largest absolute value of a complex matrix A.
 complib/clangt(3) -- return the value of the one norm, or the Frobenius norm, or the infinity norm, or the element of largest absol
    CLANGT returns the value of the one norm, or the Frobenius norm, or the infinity norm, or the element of largest absolute value of a complex tridiagonal matrix A.
 complib/clanhb(3) -- return the value of the one norm, or the Frobenius norm, or the infinity norm, or the element of largest absol
    CLANHB returns the value of the one norm, or the Frobenius norm, or the infinity norm, or the element of largest absolute value of an n by n hermitian band matrix A, with k super-diagonals.
 complib/clanhe(3) -- return the value of the one norm, or the Frobenius norm, or the infinity norm, or the element of largest absol
    CLANHE returns the value of the one norm, or the Frobenius norm, or the infinity norm, or the element of largest absolute value of a complex hermitian matrix A.
 complib/clanhp(3) -- return the value of the one norm, or the Frobenius norm, or the infinity norm, or the element of largest absol
    CLANHP returns the value of the one norm, or the Frobenius norm, or the infinity norm, or the element of largest absolute value of a complex hermitian matrix A, supplied in packed form.
 complib/clanhs(3) -- return the value of the one norm, or the Frobenius norm, or the infinity norm, or the element of largest absol
    CLANHS returns the value of the one norm, or the Frobenius norm, or the infinity norm, or the element of largest absolute value of a Hessenberg matrix A.
 complib/clanht(3) -- return the value of the one norm, or the Frobenius norm, or the infinity norm, or the element of largest absol
    CLANHT returns the value of the one norm, or the Frobenius norm, or the infinity norm, or the element of largest absolute value of a complex Hermitian tridiagonal matrix A.
 complib/clansb(3) -- return the value of the one norm, or the Frobenius norm, or the infinity norm, or the element of largest absol
    CLANSB returns the value of the one norm, or the Frobenius norm, or the infinity norm, or the element of largest absolute value of an n by n symmetric band matrix A, with k super-diagonals.
 complib/clansp(3) -- return the value of the one norm, or the Frobenius norm, or the infinity norm, or the element of largest absol
    CLANSP returns the value of the one norm, or the Frobenius norm, or the infinity norm, or the element of largest absolute value of a complex symmetric matrix A, supplied in packed form.
 complib/clansy(3) -- return the value of the one norm, or the Frobenius norm, or the infinity norm, or the element of largest absol
    CLANSY returns the value of the one norm, or the Frobenius norm, or the infinity norm, or the element of largest absolute value of a complex symmetric matrix A.
 complib/clantb(3) -- return the value of the one norm, or the Frobenius norm, or the infinity norm, or the element of largest absol
    CLANTB returns the value of the one norm, or the Frobenius norm, or the infinity norm, or the element of largest absolute value of an n by n triangular band matrix A, with ( k + 1 ) diagonals.
 complib/clantp(3) -- return the value of the one norm, or the Frobenius norm, or the infinity norm, or the element of largest absol
    CLANTP returns the value of the one norm, or the Frobenius norm, or the infinity norm, or the element of largest absolute value of a triangular matrix A, supplied in packed form.
 complib/clantr(3) -- return the value of the one norm, or the Frobenius norm, or the infinity norm, or the element of largest absol
    CLANTR returns the value of the one norm, or the Frobenius norm, or the infinity norm, or the element of largest absolute value of a trapezoidal or triangular matrix A.
 complib/clapll(3) -- two column vectors X and Y, let A = ( X Y )
    Given two column vectors X and Y, let The subroutine first computes the QR factorization of A = Q*R, and then computes the SVD of the 2-by-2 upper triangular matrix R. The smaller singular value of R is returned in SSMIN, which is used as the measurement of the linear dependency of the vectors X and Y.
 complib/clapmt(3) -- rearrange the columns of the M by N matrix X as specified by the permutation K(1),K(2),...,K(N) of the integer
    CLAPMT rearranges the columns of the M by N matrix X as specified by the permutation K(1),K(2),...,K(N) of the integers 1,...,N. If FORWRD = .TRUE., forward permutation: X(*,K(J)) is moved X(*,J) for J = 1,2,...,N. If FORWRD = .FALSE., backward permutation: X(*,J) is moved to X(*,K(J)) for J = 1,2,...,N.
 complib/claqgb(3) -- equilibrate a general M by N band matrix A with KL subdiagonals and KU superdiagonals using the row and scalin
    CLAQGB equilibrates a general M by N band matrix A with KL subdiagonals and KU superdiagonals using the row and scaling factors in the vectors R and C.
 complib/claqge(3) -- equilibrate a general M by N matrix A using the row and scaling factors in the vectors R and C
    CLAQGE equilibrates a general M by N matrix A using the row and scaling factors in the vectors R and C.
 complib/claqhb(3) -- equilibrate a symmetric band matrix A using the scaling factors in the vector S
    CLAQHB equilibrates a symmetric band matrix A using the scaling factors in the vector S.
 complib/claqhe(3) -- equilibrate a Hermitian matrix A using the scaling factors in the vector S
    CLAQHE equilibrates a Hermitian matrix A using the scaling factors in the vector S.
 complib/claqhp(3) -- equilibrate a Hermitian matrix A using the scaling factors in the vector S
    CLAQHP equilibrates a Hermitian matrix A using the scaling factors in the vector S.
 complib/claqsb(3) -- equilibrate a symmetric band matrix A using the scaling factors in the vector S
    CLAQSB equilibrates a symmetric band matrix A using the scaling factors in the vector S.
 complib/claqsp(3) -- equilibrate a symmetric matrix A using the scaling factors in the vector S
    CLAQSP equilibrates a symmetric matrix A using the scaling factors in the vector S.
 complib/claqsy(3) -- equilibrate a symmetric matrix A using the scaling factors in the vector S
    CLAQSY equilibrates a symmetric matrix A using the scaling factors in the vector S.
 complib/clar2v(3) -- from both sides to a sequence of 2-by-2 complex Hermitian matrices,
    CLAR2V applies a vector of complex plane rotations with real cosines from both sides to a sequence of 2-by-2 complex Hermitian matrices, defined by the elements of the vectors x, y and z. For i = 1,2,...,n ( x(i) z(i) ) := ( conjg(z(i)) y(i) ) ( c(i) conjg(s(i)) ) ( x(i) z(i) ) ( c(i) -conjg(s(i)) ) ( -s(i) c(i) ) ( conjg(z(i)) y(i) ) ( s(i) c(i) )
 complib/clarf(3) -- applie a complex elementary reflector H to a complex M-by-N matrix C, from either the left or the right
    CLARF applies a complex elementary reflector H to a complex M-by-N matrix C, from either the left or the right. H is represented in the form H = I - tau * v * v' where tau is a complex scalar and v is a complex vector. If tau = 0, then H is taken to be the unit matrix. To apply H' (the conjugate transpose of H), supply conjg(tau) instead tau.
 complib/clarfb(3) -- complex M-by-N matrix C, from either the left or the right
    CLARFB applies a complex block reflector H or its transpose H' to a complex M-by-N matrix C, from either the left or the right.
 complib/clarfg(3) -- generate a complex elementary reflector H of order n, such that H' * ( alpha ) = ( beta ), H' * H = I
    CLARFG generates a complex elementary reflector H of order n, such that ( x ) ( 0 ) where alpha and beta are scalars, with beta real, and x is an (n-1)- element complex vector. H is represented in the form H = I - tau * ( 1 ) * ( 1 v' ) , ( v ) where tau is a complex scalar and v is a complex (n-1)-element vector. Note that H is not hermitian. If the elements of x are all zero and alpha is real, then tau = 0 and H is taken to be the unit matrix. Otherwise 1 <= real(tau) <= 2 and abs(tau-1) <= 1...
 complib/clarft(3) -- form the triangular factor T of a complex block reflector H of order n, which is defined as a product of k ele
    CLARFT forms the triangular factor T of a complex block reflector H of order n, which is defined as a product of k elementary reflectors. If DIRECT = 'F', H = H(1) H(2) . . . H(k) and T is upper triangular; If DIRECT = 'B', H = H(k) . . . H(2) H(1) and T is lower triangular. If STOREV = 'C', the vector which defines the elementary reflector H(i) is stored in the i-th column of the array V, and H = I - V * T * V' If STOREV = 'R', the vector which defines the elementary reflector H(i) is ...
 complib/clarfx(3) -- applie a complex elementary reflector H to a complex m by n matrix C, from either the left or the right
    CLARFX applies a complex elementary reflector H to a complex m by n matrix C, from either the left or the right. H is represented in the form H = I - tau * v * v' where tau is a complex scalar and v is a complex vector. If tau = 0, then H is taken to be the unit matrix This version uses inline code if H has order < 11.
 complib/clargv(3) -- generate a vector of complex plane rotations with real cosines, determined by elements of the complex vectors
    CLARGV generates a vector of complex plane rotations with real cosines, determined by elements of the complex vectors x and y. For i = 1,2,...,n ( c(i) s(i) ) ( x(i) ) = ( a(i) ) ( -conjg(s(i)) c(i) ) ( y(i) ) = ( 0 )
 complib/clarnv(3) -- return a vector of n random complex numbers from a uniform or normal distribution
    CLARNV returns a vector of n random complex numbers from a uniform or normal distribution.
 complib/clartg(3) -- generate a plane rotation so that [ CS SN ] [ F ] [ R ] [ __ ]
    CLARTG generates a plane rotation so that [ -SN CS ] [ G ] [ 0 ] This is a faster version of the BLAS1 routine CROTG, except for the following differences: F and G are unchanged on return. If G=0, then CS=1 and SN=0. If F=0 and (G .ne. 0), then CS=0 and SN=1 without doing any floating point operations.
 complib/clartv(3) -- applie a vector of complex plane rotations with real cosines to elements of the complex vectors x and y
    CLARTV applies a vector of complex plane rotations with real cosines to elements of the complex vectors x and y. For i = 1,2,...,n ( x(i) ) := ( c(i) s(i) ) ( x(i) ) ( y(i) ) ( -conjg(s(i)) c(i) ) ( y(i) )
 complib/clascl(3) -- multiplie the M by N complex matrix A by the real scalar CTO/CFROM
    CLASCL multiplies the M by N complex matrix A by the real scalar CTO/CFROM. This is done without over/underflow as long as the final result CTO*A(I,J)/CFROM does not over/underflow. TYPE specifies that A may be full, upper triangular, lower triangular, upper Hessenberg, or banded.
 complib/claset(3) -- initialize a 2-D array A to BETA on the diagonal and ALPHA on the offdiagonals
    CLASET initializes a 2-D array A to BETA on the diagonal and ALPHA on the offdiagonals.
 complib/clasr(3) -- where A is an m by n complex matrix and P is an orthogonal matrix,
    CLASR performs the transformation consisting of a sequence of plane rotations determined by the parameters PIVOT and DIRECT as follows ( z = m when SIDE = 'L' or 'l' and z = n when SIDE = 'R' or 'r' ): When DIRECT = 'F' or 'f' ( Forward sequence ) then P = P( z - 1 )*...*P( 2 )*P( 1 ), and when DIRECT = 'B' or 'b' ( Backward sequence ) then P = P( 1 )*P( 2 )*...*P( z - 1 ), where P( k ) is a plane rotation matrix for the following planes: when PIVOT = 'V' or 'v' ( Variable pi...
 perl5/Class::Struct(3) -- declare struct-like datatypes as Perl classes
    Class::Struct exports a single function, struct. Given a list of element names and types, and optionally a class name, struct creates a Perl 5 class that implements a "struct-like" data structure. The new class is given a constructor method, new, for creating struct objects. Page 1 Class::Struct(3) Class::Struct(3) Each element in the struct data has an accessor method, which is used to assign to the element and to fetch its value. The default accessor can be overridden by declaring a sub of t...
 complib/classq(3) -- )**2 +...+ x( n )**2 + ( scale**2 )*sumsq,
    CLASSQ returns the values scl and ssq such that where x( i ) = abs( X( 1 + ( i - 1 )*INCX ) ). The value of sumsq is assumed to be at least unity and the value of ssq will then satisfy 1.0 .le. ssq .le. ( sumsq + 2*n ). scale is assumed to be non-negative and scl returns the value scl = max( scale, abs( real( x( i ) ) ), abs( aimag( x( i ) ) ) ), i scale and sumsq must be supplied in SCALE and SUMSQ respectively. SCALE and SUMSQ are overwritten by scl and ssq respectively. The routine makes only...
 complib/claswp(3) -- perform a series of row interchanges on the matrix A
    CLASWP performs a series of row interchanges on the matrix A. One row interchange is initiated for each of rows K1 through K2 of A.
 complib/clasyf(3) -- using the Bunch-Kaufman diagonal pivoting method
    CLASYF computes a partial factorization of a complex symmetric matrix A using the Bunch-Kaufman diagonal pivoting method. The partial factorization has the form: A = ( I U12 ) ( A11 0 ) ( I 0 ) if UPLO = 'U', or: ( 0 U22 ) ( 0 D ) ( U12' U22' ) A = ( L11 0 ) ( D 0 ) ( L11' L21' ) if UPLO = 'L' ( L21 I ) ( 0 A22 ) ( 0 I ) where the order of D is at most NB. The actual order is returned in the argument KB, and is either NB or NB-1, or N if N <= NB. Note that U' denotes the transpose of U....
 complib/clatbs(3) -- s*b, or A**H * x = s*b,
    CLATBS solves one of the triangular systems with scaling to prevent overflow, where A is an upper or lower triangular band matrix. Here A' denotes the transpose of A, x and b are n-element vectors, and s is a scaling factor, usually less than or equal to 1, chosen so that the components of x will be less than the overflow threshold. If the unscaled problem will not cause overflow, the Level 2 BLAS routine CTBSV is called. If the matrix A is singular (A(j,j) = 0 for some j), then s is set to 0 a...
 complib/clatps(3) -- s*b, or A**H * x = s*b,
    CLATPS solves one of the triangular systems with scaling to prevent overflow, where A is an upper or lower triangular matrix stored in packed form. Here A**T denotes the transpose of A, A**H denotes the conjugate transpose of A, x and b are n-element vectors, and s is a scaling factor, usually less than or equal to 1, chosen so that the components of x will be less than the overflow threshold. If the unscaled problem will not cause overflow, the Level 2 BLAS routine CTPSV is called. If the matri...
 complib/clatrd(3) -- reduce NB rows and columns of a complex Hermitian matrix A to Hermitian tridiagonal form by a unitary similari
    CLATRD reduces NB rows and columns of a complex Hermitian matrix A to Hermitian tridiagonal form by a unitary similarity transformation Q' * A * Q, and returns the matrices V and W which are needed to apply the transformation to the unreduced part of A. If UPLO = 'U', CLATRD reduces the last NB rows and columns of a matrix, of which the upper triangle is supplied; if UPLO = 'L', CLATRD reduces the first NB rows and columns of a matrix, of which the lower triangle is supplied. This is an aux...
 complib/clatrs(3) -- s*b, or A**H * x = s*b,
    CLATRS solves one of the triangular systems with scaling to prevent overflow. Here A is an upper or lower triangular matrix, A**T denotes the transpose of A, A**H denotes the conjugate transpose of A, x and b are n-element vectors, and s is a scaling factor, usually less than or equal to 1, chosen so that the components of x will be less than the overflow threshold. If the unscaled problem will not cause overflow, the Level 2 BLAS routine CTRSV is called. If the matrix A is singular (A(j,j) = 0 ...
 complib/clatzm(3) -- applie a Householder matrix generated by CTZRQF to a matrix
    CLATZM applies a Householder matrix generated by CTZRQF to a matrix. Let P = I - tau*u*u', u = ( 1 ), ( v ) where v is an (m-1) vector if SIDE = 'L', or a (n-1) vector if SIDE = 'R'. If SIDE equals 'L', let C = [ C1 ] 1 [ C2 ] m-1 n Then C is overwritten by P*C. If SIDE equals 'R', let C = [ C1, C2 ] m 1 n-1 Then C is overwritten by C*P.
 complib/clauu2(3) -- compute the product U * U' or L' * L, where the triangular factor U or L is stored in the upper or lower trian
    CLAUU2 computes the product U * U' or L' * L, where the triangular factor U or L is stored in the upper or lower triangular part of the array A. If UPLO = 'U' or 'u' then the upper triangle of the result is stored, overwriting the factor U in A. If UPLO = 'L' or 'l' then the lower triangle of the result is stored, overwriting the factor L in A. This is the unblocked form of the algorithm, calling Level 2 BLAS....
 complib/clauum(3) -- compute the product U * U' or L' * L, where the triangular factor U or L is stored in the upper or lower trian
    CLAUUM computes the product U * U' or L' * L, where the triangular factor U or L is stored in the upper or lower triangular part of the array A. If UPLO = 'U' or 'u' then the upper triangle of the result is stored, overwriting the factor U in A. If UPLO = 'L' or 'l' then the lower triangle of the result is stored, overwriting the factor L in A. This is the blocked form of the algorithm, calling Level 3 BLAS....
 old-compression/clCompressImage(3d) -- Compress/Decompress a single image
    scheme The compression/decompression scheme to use. width The width of the image. height The height of the image. format The format of the original image to (de)compress : CL_FORMAT_BGR, CL_FORMAT_XBGR, CL_FORMAT_ABGR, CL_FORMAT_BGR332, CL_FORMAT_GRAYSCALE, CL_FORMAT_YCbCr, CL_FORMAT_YCbCr422, or CL_FORMAT_YCbCr422DC. compressionRatio The target compression ratio. The actual compression ratio depends on this value and the particular codec. A value of 0.0 indicates the default should be used. fra...
 old-compression/clCreateBuf(3d) -- Create and destroy implicit buffers, and find related handles.
    handle A handle to the compressor or decompressor. bufferType The type of buffer, either CL_BUF_FRAME or CL_BUF_COMPRESSED. blocks The number of blocks in the buffer. blockSize The size in bytes of each block. This must be equal to the frame size for CL_BUF_FRAME, and 1 for CL_BUF_COMPRESSED. bufferPtr1 A pointer to a pointer to the buffer space. If bufferPtr1 is NULL, clCreateBuf will allocate the blocks. If bufferPtr1 is not NULL and *bufferPtr1 is NULL, clCreateBuf will allocate the blocks an...
 standard/clear(3) -- clear all or part of a curses window
    The erase and werase routines copy blanks to every position in the window. The clear and wclear routines are like erase and werase, but they also call clearok, so that the screen is cleared completely on the next call to wrefresh for that window and repainted from scratch. The clrtobot and wclrtobot rout...
 standard/clearhitcode(3) -- sets the hitcode to zero
    none
 f90/clear_ieee_exception(3) -- Clears floating-point exception indicator
    UNICOS/mk and IRIX systems CRAY T90 systems that support IEEE floating-point arithmetic
 old-compression/clGetDefault(3d) -- Get the default value of a parameter
    handle A handle to a compressor or decompressor. paramID A parameter identifier.
 old-compression/clGetMinMax(3d) -- Get minimum and maximum values for a parameter
    handle A handle to a compressor or decompressor. paramID The parameter identifier. minPtr A pointer to an int where the minimum value will be written. maxPtr A pointer to an int where the maximum value will be written.
 old-compression/clGetName(3d) -- returns a name for a parameter
    handle A handle to a compressor or decompressor. paramID The parameter identifier.
 old-compression/clGetNextImageInfo(3d) -- Get information about a compressed image stream
    handle An open handle that is actively compressing or decompressing. info A pointer where a CLimageInfo structure is to be placed. sizeOfImageInfo The size of the CLimageInfo structure in bytes.
 old-compression/clGetParams(3d) -- get and set the value of the specified parameters.
    handle The handle to a compressor or decompressor. paramValueBuffer An array of ints containing parameter identifier/value pairs. The even elements of this array select the parameters to get or set. The odd elements are the current or new values of these parameters. bufferLength The number of ints in the buffer pointed to by paramValueBuffer. paramID An identifier of the parameter to get or set. value The new value of the parameter....
 old-compression/CLintro(3d) -- A library for working with compressed video and audio data
    The Compression Library provides an application programming interface for processing video and audio data using a variety of compression algorithms. Compression techniques are useful for extending the utility of system resources such as memory, disk space, and network bandwidth. Some application areas include publishing (presentations, documentation, training, archiving, and annotation), telecommunications (video/voice mail, phone, and conferencing), animation previewing (2D/3D graphics renderin...
 Tk/clipboard(3) -- Manage the clipboard
    Tcl_Interp *interp (in) Interpreter to use for reporting errors. Tk_Window tkwin (in) Window that determines which display's clipboard to manipulate. Atom target (in) Conversion type for this clipboard item; has same meaning as target argument to Tk_CreateSelHandler. Atom format (in) Representation to use when data is retrieved; has same meaning as format argument to Tk_CreateSelHandler. char *buffer (in) Null terminated string containing the data to be appended to the clipboard....
 standard/clipplane(3) -- specify a plane against which all geometry is clipped
    index expects an integer in the range 0 through 5, indicating which of the 6 clipping planes is being modified. mode expects one of three tokens: CP_DEFINE: use the plane equation passed in params to define a clipplane. The clipplane is neither enabled nor disabled. CP_ON: enable the (previously defined) clipplane. CP_OFF: disable the clipplane. (default) params expects an array of 4 floats that specify a plane equation. A plane equation is usually thought of as a 4-vector [A,B,C,D]. In this cas...
 standard/clkon(3) -- control keyboard click
    none
 f90/clock(3) -- Returns the current time
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 clock(3c) -- report CPU time used
    clock returns the amount of CPU time used since the first call to clock. The unit time of clock (microseconds) is indicated in the macro CLOCKS_PER_SEC found in the file . The time reported is the sum of the user and system times of the calling process and its terminated child processes for which it has executed wait(2), pclose(3S), or system(3S). The resolution of the clock is 10 milliseconds on IRIS workstations....
 old-compression/clOpenCompressor(3d) -- Compress a video or audio stream
    scheme The compression scheme to use. handlePtr A pointer to the returned handle of the compressor. Used by subsequent calls to identify the compressor. handle A handle to the compressor. numberOfFrames The number of frames to compress, which should be a multiple of CL_FRAMES_PER_CHUNK (usually 1 for video). numberOfFrames may also be specified as CL_CONTINUOUS_BLOCK or CL_CONTINUOUS_NONBLOCK. frameBuffer A pointer to the frame buffer to be compressed. A value of CL_EXTERNAL_DEVICE may be used w...
 old-compression/clOpenDecompressor(3d) -- Decompress a video or audio stream
    scheme The decompression scheme to use. handlePtr A pointer to the returned handle of the decompressor. Used by subsequent calls to identify the decompressor. handle A handle to the decompressor. numberOfFrames The number of frames to decompress, which should be a multiple of CL_FRAMES_PER_CHUNK (usually 1 for video). numberOfFrames may also be specified as CL_CONTINUOUS_BLOCK or CL_CONTINUOUS_NONBLOCK. compressedBufferSize The size of the data to be decompressed in bytes. Used with non-NULL com...
 old-compression/clOpenDemux(3d) -- Demultiplex into video and audio streams
    scheme The demultiplexing scheme to use. handlePtr A pointer to the returned handle of the demultiplexer. Used by subsequent calls to identify the demultiplexer. handle A handle to the demultiplexer. count The number of iterations to execute. The amount of processing done during each iteration is scheme and data dependent. count may also be specified as CL_CONTINUOUS_BLOCK or CL_CONTINUOUS_NONBLOCK....
 old-compression/clOpenMux(3d) -- Multiplex video and audio streams
    scheme The multiplexing scheme to use. handlePtr A pointer to the returned handle of the multiplexer. Used by subsequent calls to identify the multiplexer. handle A handle to the multiplexer. count The number of iterations to execute. The amount of processing done during each iteration is scheme and data dependent. count may also be specified as CL_CONTINUOUS_BLOCK or CL_CONTINUOUS_NONBLOCK.
 Tcl/close(3) -- Close an open file
    Closes the file given by fileId. FileId must be the return value from a previous invocation of the open command; after this command, it should not be used anymore. If fileId refers to a command pipeline instead of a file, then close waits for the children to complete. The normal result of this command is an empty string, but errors are returned if there are problems in closing the file or waiting for children to complete....
 standard/closeobj(3) -- closes an object definition
    none
 old-compression/clQueryAlgorithms(3d) -- Get a list of algorithms, find the identifier or name, or check for a license
    algType The algorithm type. Possible values are CL_ALG_VIDEO or CL_ALG_AUDIO. buffer An array of ints into which clQueryAlgorithms writes name/functionality pairs. bufferLength The number of ints in buffer. handle A handle to a compressor or decompressor. name The algorithm name. scheme The scheme identifier. functionality The functionality provided by the scheme. Possible values are CL_COMPRESSOR compression only CL_DECOMPRESSOR decompression only CL_CODEC compression and decompression message ...
 old-compression/clQueryFree(3d) -- Reading and writing data with implicit buffers
    bufferHdl A handle to a CL buffer. freeAmount The number of blocks of free space to wait for. If it is zero, then the current number of blocks of free space is returned without waiting. freeData A pointer to the returned pointer to the location of free space. freeWrap The number of blocks of free space that have wrapped to the beginning of the ring buffer. If it is greater than zero, then the total free space is in two segments. amountToAdd The number of blocks of free space that were written by...
 old-compression/clQueryParams(3d) -- Get a list of the parameters for a specified processing object, or the parameter identifier given the name
    handle A handle to a compressor or decompressor. paramValueBuffer An array of ints into which clQueryParams writes name/type pairs. bufferLength The number of ints in buffer. paramName The parameter name.
 old-compression/clQueryScheme(3d) -- Determine the scheme and read the stream header
    header A pointer to a buffer containing at least 16 bytes of the header. scheme The decompression scheme to use. handle A handle to the decompressor. headerSize The maximum size of the header in bytes. header A pointer to a buffer containing the header. clQueryScheme attempts to determine the appropriate decompression scheme from 16 bytes of the stream header. It can be called before clOpenDecompressor to determine which scheme to use. Once the scheme has been determined, the handle can be opene...
 Tk/clrselect(3) -- Deselect a selection
    Tk_Window tkwin (in) The selection will be cleared from the display containing this window. Atom selection(in) The name of selection to be cleared. |
 old-compression/clSetErrorHandler(3d) -- Select an alternate error handling routine
    efunc A pointer to an error handling routine declared as void ErrorFunc(CLhandle handle, int code, const char *format, ...)
 old-compression/cl_aware(3d) -- Aware Audio Schemes in the Compression Library
    This man page describes the Aware audio compression algorithms that are installed in the Compression Library (CL). Two Aware schemes are currently supported. 1. CL_MPEG1_AUDIO_AWARE The ISO/MPEG-audio standard algorithm with layers I and II. 2. CL_MULTIRATE_AWARE The Aware-proprietary MultiRate I lossless or low-distortion algorithm. Each scheme is accessed through the standard CL API, described in CLintro(3dm). Listed below are the parameters that may be used with these two codecs. Note that pa...
 compression/cl_cosmo(3d) -- Cosmo Compress JPEG Accelerator (in the Compression Library)
    Cosmo Compress is an optional hardware accelerator for JPEG image compression. The programming interface to Cosmo is via the standard Compression Library. For overviews of the JPEG standard and the CL API, see jpeg(4) and CLintro(3dm). Cosmo Compress implements a subset of the JPEG standard optimized for video originated images. This subset is baseline JPEG, interleaved YCrCb, 8-bits per component. Cosmo Compress is capable of compressing and decompressing to and from memory, or to and from a sp...
 old-compression/cl_jpeg(3d) -- JPEG schemes in the Compression Library
    The JPEG compression standard, jpeg(4), is supported in the Compression Library, CLintro(3dm), with two schemes 1. CL_JPEG_SOFTWARE software implementation 2. CL_JPEG_COSMO real-time hardware device Each scheme is accessed using the basic CL API and parameter set. This man page describes the additional, JPEG-specific, parameters that are common to both schemes. Note that there are two methods of controlling the quantization tables. An overall quality rating can be specified that will be used to ...
 old-compression/cl_mpeg1(3d) -- MPEG-1 schemes in the Compression Library
    The MPEG compression standard, mpeg(4), is supported in the Compression Library, CLintro(3dm), with two schemes 1. CL_MPEG1_VIDEO_SOFTWARE video compressor/decompressor 2. CL_MPEG1_AUDIO_SOFTWARE audio compressor/decompressor Each scheme is accessed using the basic CL API and parameter set. This man page describes the features supported by these schemes, as well as the general CL and MPEG-specific parameters that are relevant for their operation. The Compression Library also provides MPEG audio ...
 old-compression/cl_mvc2(3d) -- MVC2 scheme in the Compression Library
    The MVC2 (Motion Video Compressor 2) compression algorithm is implemented as one of the codecs in the Compression Library (CL). Its scheme identifier is CL_MVC2_SOFTWARE, and is accessible through the standard CL API. For an overview of the basic library calls and parameters, see CLintro(3dm). Compression involves a simple block coding heuristic based on various perceptual criteria. The amount of compression is guided by setting the following parameters. In each case, a higher threshold results ...
 old-compression/cl_mvc3(3d) -- MVC3 scheme in the Compression Library
    The MVC3 (Motion Video Compressor 3) compression algorithm is implemented as one of the codecs in the Compression Library (CL). Its scheme identifier is CL_MVC3_SOFTWARE, and is accessible through the standard CL API. For an overview of the basic library calls and parameters, see CLintro(3dm). This algorithm is based on a fast block transform technique. It uses one parameter in addition to the basic CL set....
 Tcl/cmdcmplt(3) -- Check for unmatched braces in a Tcl command
    char *cmd (in) Command string to test for completeness.
 Tcl/cmdwrite(3) -- Writing C language extensions to Tcl.
    The client data pointer provides a means for Tcl commands to have data associated with them that is not global to the C program nor included in the Tcl core. Client data is essential in a multi-interpreter environment (where a single program has created and is making use of multiple Tcl interpreters) for the C routines to maintain any permanent Page 5 Command Writing(3Tcl) Command Writing(3Tcl) data they need on a per-interpreter basis. Otherwise there would be reentrancy problems. Tcl solves th...
 standard/cmode(3) -- sets color map mode as the current mode.
    none
 standard/cmov(3) -- updates the current character position
    x expects the x location of the point (in world coordinates) to which you want to move the current character position. y expects the y location of the point (in world coordinates) to which you want to move the current character position. z expects the z location of the point (in world coordinates) to which you want to move the current character position. (This parameter not used by the 2-D subroutines.)...
 standard/color(3) -- sets the color index in the current draw mode
    c expects an index into the current color map.
 complib/COMBAK(3) -- EISPACK routine. This subroutine forms the eigenvectors of a COMPLEX GENERAL matrix by back transforming those
    On INPUT NM must be set to the row dimension of two-dimensional array parameters as declared in the calling program dimension statement. LOW and IGH are integers determined by the balancing subroutine CBAL. If CBAL has not been used, set LOW=1 and IGH equal to the order of the matrix. AR and AI contain the multipliers which were used in the reduction by COMHES in their lower triangles below the subdiagonal. INT contains information on the rows and columns interchanged in the reduction by COMHES....
 complib/COMHES(3) -- EISPACK routine. Given a COMPLEX GENERAL matrix, this subroutine reduces a submatrix situated in rows and colu
    On INPUT NM must be set to the row dimension of two-dimensional array parameters as declared in the calling program dimension statement. N is the order of the matrix. LOW and IGH ARE integers determined by the balancing subroutine CBAL. If CBAL has not been used, set LOW=1, IGH=N. AR and AI contain the real and imaginary parts, respectively, of the complex input matrix. On OUTPUT AR and AI contain the real and imaginary parts, respectively, of the Hessenberg matrix. The multipliers which were us...
 complib/COMLR(3) -- EISPACK routine. This subroutine finds the eigenvalues of a COMPLEX UPPER Hessenberg matrix by the modified LR
    On INPUT NM must be set to the row dimension of two-dimensional array parameters as declared in the calling program dimension statement. N is the order of the matrix. LOW and IGH are integers determined by the balancing subroutine CBAL. If CBAL has not been used, set LOW=1, IGH=N. HR and HI contain the real and imaginary parts, respectively, of the complex upper Hessenberg matrix. Their lower triangles below the subdiagonal contain the multipliers which were used in the reduction by COMHES, if p...
 complib/COMLR2(3) -- EISPACK routine. This subroutine finds the eigenvalues and eigenvectors of a COMPLEX UPPER Hessenberg matrix b
    On INPUT NM must be set to the row dimension of two-dimensional array parameters as declared in the calling program dimension statement. N is the order of the matrix. LOW and IGH are integers determined by the balancing subroutine CBAL. If CBAL has not been used, set LOW=1, IGH=N. INT contains information on the rows and columns interchanged in the reduction by COMHES, if performed. Only elements LOW through IGH are used. If the eigenvectors of the HESSEN- BERG matrix are desired, set INT(J)=J f...
 standard/compactify(3) -- compacts the memory storage of an object
    obj expects the object identifier for the object you want to compact.
 f90/compl(3) -- Computes complement
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 c++/complex(3) -- introduction to C++ complex mathematics library
    This section describes functions and operators found in the C++ Complex Mathematics Library, libcomplex.a. These functions are not automatically loaded by the C++ compiler, CC(1); however, the link editor searches this library under the -lcomplex option. Declarations for these functions may be found in the #include file <complex.h>. When compiling programs using the compl...
 complib/COMQR(3) -- EISPACK routine. This subroutine finds the eigenvalues of a COMPLEX upper Hessenberg matrix by the QR method.
    On INPUT NM must be set to the row dimension of two-dimensional array parameters as declared in the calling program dimension statement. N is the order of the matrix. LOW and IGH are integers determined by the balancing subroutine CBAL. If CBAL has not been used, set LOW=1, IGH=N. HR and HI contain the real and imaginary parts, respectively, of the complex upper Hessenberg matrix. Their lower triangles below the subdiagonal contain information about the unitary transformations used in the reduct...
 complib/COMQR2(3) -- EISPACK routine. This subroutine finds the eigenvalues and eigenvectors of a COMPLEX UPPER Hessenberg matrix b
    On INPUT NM must be set to the row dimension of two-dimensional array parameters as declared in the calling program dimension statement. N is the order of the matrix. LOW and IGH are integers determined by the balancing subroutine CBAL. If CBAL has not been used, set LOW=1, IGH=N. ORTR and ORTI contain information about the unitary trans- formations used in the reduction by CORTH, if performed. Only elements LOW through IGH are used. If the eigenvectors of the Hessenberg matrix are desired, set ...
 Tcl/concat(3) -- Join lists together
    This command treats each argument as a list and concatenates them into a single list. It also eliminates leading and trailing spaces in the arg's and adds a single separator space between arg's. It permits any number of arguments. For example, the command concat a b {c d e} {f {g h}} will return a b c d e f {g h} as its result. If no args are supplied, the result is an empty string. |
 standard/concave(3) -- allows the system to draw concave polygons
    b expects either TRUE or FALSE. TRUE tells the system to expect concave polygons. FALSE tells the system to expect no concave polygons. This is the default.
 perl5/Config(3) -- access Perl configuration information
    The Config module contains all the information that was available to the Configure program at Perl build time (over 900 values). Shell variables from the config.sh file (written by Configure) are stored in the readonly-variable %Config, indexed by their names. Values stored in config.sh as 'undef' are returned as undefined values. The perl exists function can be used to check if a named variable exists. myconfig() Returns a textual summary of the major perl configuration values. See also -V in...
 Tk/configwidg(3) -- process configuration options for widgets
    Tcl_Interp *interp (in) Interpreter to use for returning error messages. Tk_Window tkwin (in) Window used to represent widget (needed to set up X resources). Tk_ConfigSpec *specs (in) Pointer to table specifying legal configuration options for this widget. int argc (in) Number of arguments in argv. char **argv (in) Command-line options for configuring widget. char *widgRec (in/out) Points to widget record structure. Fields in this structure get modified by Tk_ConfigureWidget to hold configuratio...
 Tk/configwind(3) -- change window configuration or attributes
    Tk_Window tkwin (in) Token for window. unsigned int valueMask (in) OR-ed mask of values like CWX or CWBorderPixel, indicating which fields of *valuePtr or *attsPtr to use. XWindowChanges *valuePtr (in) Points to a structure containing new values for the configuration parameters selected by valueMask. Fields not selected by valueMask are ignored. Page 1 Tk_ConfigureWindow(3Tk) Tk_ConfigureWindow(3Tk) int x (in) New x-coordinate for tkwin's top left pixel (including border, if any) within tkwin'...
 confstr(3s) -- get configurable variables
    confstr copies information relating to the UNIX system on which the process is executing into the buffer pointed to by buf. len is the size of the buffer. The POSIX P1003.1 interface sysconf [see sysconf(2)] provides a similar class of configuration information, but returns an integer rather than a string. The commands available are: _CS_SYSNAME Copy into the array pointed to by buf the string that would be...
 f90/conjg(3) -- FORTRAN complex conjugate intrinsic function
    conjg returns the complex conjugate of its complex argument. dconjg returns the double-complex conjugate of its double-complex argument. qconjg returns the complex*32 conjugate of its complex*32 argument. Page 1 CONJG(3M) Last changed: 1-6-98
 ftn/conjg(3) -- FORTRAN complex conjugate intrinsic function
    conjg returns the complex conjugate of its complex argument. dconjg returns the double-complex conjugate of its double-complex argument. qconjg returns the complex*32 conjugate of its complex*32 argument. Page 1 CONJG(3M) Last changed: 1-6-98
 connect(3n) -- initiate a connection on a socket
    The parameter s is a socket. If it is of type SOCK_DGRAM, connect() specifies the peer with which the socket is to be associated; this address is the address to which datagrams are to be sent if a receiver is not explicitly designated; it is the only address from which datagrams are to be received. If the socket s is of type SOCK_STREAM, connect() attempts to make a connection to another socket. Th...
 perl5/constant(3) -- Perl pragma to declare constants
    This will declare a symbol to be a constant with the given scalar or list value. When you declare a constant such as PI using the method shown above, each machine your script runs upon can have as many digits of accuracy as it can use. Also, your program will be easier to read, more likely to be maintained (and maintained correctly), and far less likely to send a space probe to the wrong planet because nobody noticed the one equation in which you wrote 3.14195....
 Tcl/continue(3) -- Skip to the next iteration of a loop
    This command is typically invoked inside the body of a looping command such as for or foreach or while. It returns a TCL_CONTINUE code, which causes a continue exception to occur. The exception causes the current script to be aborted out to the the innermost containing loop command, which then continues with the next iteration of the loop. Catch exceptions are also handled in a few other situations, such as the catch command and the outermost scripts of procedure bodies....
 complib/conv(3) -- Convolution and Correlation Library
    For the C interface two types "complex" and "zomplex" have been defined as structures of two floating point variables ( re, im ). They are equivalent to the "complex" and "double complex" Fortran types. typedef struct { float re; float im; } complex; typedef struct { double re; double im; } zomplex; These types as well as the prototypes of the different functions for convolution and correlations are defined in the "/usr/include/conv.h" header file....
 conv(3c) -- translate characters
    toupper and tolower have as their domain the range of the function getc: all values represented in an unsigned char and the value of the macro EOF as defined in stdio.h. If the argument of toupper represents a lowercase letter, the result is the corresponding uppercase letter. If the argument of tolower represents an uppercase letter, t...
 standard/convolve(3) -- modify the operation of lrectwrite and rectcopy to convolve pixel data
    convop the convolution mode: general, separable or off border a token specifying the source for the input data border xksize the size of the kernel width in pixels in the x dimension yksize the size of the kernel width in pixels in the y dimension kernel an array of kernel elements bias a value usually between [-1.0,1.0] to be added to the result of the convolution.
 Tk/coordtowin(3) -- Find window containing a point
    int rootX (in) X-coordinate (in root window coordinates). int rootY (in) Y-coordinate (in root window coordinates). Tk_Window tkwin (in) Token for window that identifies application.
 libblas/copy(3) -- BLAS level ONE copy subroutines FORTRAN 77 SYNOPSIS subroutine dcopy( n, dx, incx, dy, incy ) integer incx, in
    dcopy, scopy, zcopy and ccopy copy a vector x, whose length is n to a vector y. incx and incy specify the increment between two consecutive elements of respectively vector x and y.
 copylist(3g) -- copy a file into memory
    copylist copies a list of items from a file into freshly allocated memory, replacing new-lines with null characters. It expects two arguments: a pointer filenm to the name of the file to be copied, and a pointer szptr to a variable where the size of the file will be stored. Upon success, copylist returns a pointer to the memory allocated. Otherwise it returns NULL if it has trouble finding the file, calling malloc, or ...
 complib/cor1d(3) -- 1D Correlation in the time domain. FORTRAN SPECIFICATION subroutine SCOR1D( f, incf, if0, nf, g, incg, ig0, ng
    SCOR1D, DCOR1D, CCOR1D and ZCOR1D compute a 1D correlation in the time domain : h(j) = Sum[ f(i) * g(i-j) ]
 complib/cor2d(3) -- 2D Correlation in the space domain. FORTRAN SPECIFICATION subroutine SCOR2D( f, incf, ldf, ifx0, n_fx, ify0, n
    SCOR2D, DCOR2D, CCOR2D and ZCOR2D compute a 2D correlation in the space domain: h(i,j) = Sum[ f(k,l) * g(i+k,j+l) ]
 complib/corm1d(3) -- N 1D convolutions in the time domain. FORTRAN SPECIFICATION subroutine SCORM1D( f, incf, ldf, ifx0, n_fx, ny,
    SCORM1D, DCORM1D, CCORM1D and DCORM1D compute N 1D convolutions in the time domain : h(i,j) = Sum[ f(k,j) * g(i-k) ] with j=1,...,N _CORM1D can be used instead of _COR2D when the 2D filter can be decomposed into the convolution of two 1D filters. For example: ------------------ ------------------ ------------------ | 0.25 -.50 0.25 | | 0. -.50 0. | | 0. 0. 0. | | -.50 1.00 -.50 | = | 0. 1.00 0. | (*) | -.50 1.00 -.50 | | 0.25 -.50 0.25 | | 0. -.50 0. | | 0. 0. 0. | |________________| |__________...
 complib/CORTB(3) -- EISPACK routine. This subroutine forms the eigenvectors of a COMPLEX GENERAL matrix by back transforming those
    On INPUT NM must be set to the row dimension of two-dimensional array parameters as declared in the calling program dimension statement. LOW and IGH are integers determined by the balancing subroutine CBAL. If CBAL has not been used, set LOW=1 and IGH equal to the order of the matrix. AR and AI contain information about the unitary transformations used in the reduction by CORTH in their strict lower triangles. ORTR and ORTI contain further information about the transformations used in the reduct...
 complib/CORTH(3) -- EISPACK routine. Given a COMPLEX GENERAL matrix, this subroutine reduces a submatrix situated in rows and colu
    On INPUT NM must be set to the row dimension of two-dimensional array parameters as declared in the calling program dimension statement. N is the order of the matrix. LOW and IGH are integers determined by the balancing subroutine CBAL. If CBAL has not been used, set LOW=1, IGH=N. AR and AI contain the real and imaginary parts, respectively, of the complex input matrix. On OUTPUT AR and AI contain the real and imaginary parts, respectively, of the Hessenberg matrix. Information about the unitary...
 f90/cos(3) -- trigonometric functions and their inverses
    The single-precision and long double-precision routines listed above are only available in the standard math library, -lm, and in -lmx. sin, cos and tan return trigonometric functions of radian arguments x for double data types. fsin, fcos and ftan, and their ANSI-named counterparts sinf, cosf and tanf return trigonometric functions of radian Page 1 TRIG(3M) TRIG(3M) arguments x for float data types. sinl, cosl and tanl do the same for long double data types. The asin routines return the arc sin...
 ftn/cos(3) -- trigonometric functions and their inverses
    The single-precision and long double-precision routines listed above are only available in the standard math library, -lm, and in -lmx. sin, cos and tan return trigonometric functions of radian arguments x for double data types. fsin, fcos and ftan, and their ANSI-named counterparts sinf, cosf and tanf return trigonometric functions of radian Page 1 TRIG(3M) TRIG(3M) arguments x for float data types. sinl, cosl and tanl do the same for long double data types. The asin routines return the arc sin...
 ftn/cosh(3) -- hyperbolic functions
    The long double and single-precision routines listed above are only available in the standard math library, -lm and in -lmx. These functions compute the designated hyperbolic functions for double, float, and long double arguments.
 f90/cot(3) -- Computes cotangent
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/count(3) -- Counts the number of true array elements
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 standard/cpack(3) -- specifies RGBA color with a single packed 32-bit integer
    pack expects a packed integer containing the RGBA (red, green, blue, alpha) values you want to assign as the current color. Expressed in hexadecimal, the format of the packed integer is 0xaabbggrr, where: aa is the alpha value, bb is the blue value, gg is the green value, and rr is the red value. RGBA component values range from 0 to 0xFF (255).
 perl5/CPAN(3) -- query, download and build perl modules from CPAN sites
    The CPAN module is designed to automate the make and install of perl modules and extensions. It includes some searching capabilities and knows how to use Net::FTP or LWP (or lynx or an external ftp client) to fetch the raw data from the net. Modules are fetched from one or more of the mirrored CPAN (Comprehensive Perl Archive Network) sites and unpacked in a dedicated directory. The CPAN module also supports the concept of named and versioned 'bundles' of modules. Bundles simplify the handling...
 perl5/CPAN::FirstTime(3) -- Utility for CPAN::Config file Initialization
    The init routine asks a few questions and writes a CPAN::Config file. Nothing special. PPPPaaaaggggeeee 1111
 perl5/CPAN::Nox(3) -- Wrapper around CPAN.pm without using any XS module
    This package has the same functionality as CPAN.pm, but tries to prevent the usage of compiled extensions during it's own execution. It's primary purpose is a rescue in case you upgraded perl and broke binary compatibility somehow.
 complib/CPBCO(3) -- CPBCO factors a complex Hermitian positive definite matrix stored in band form and estimates the condition of
    On Entry ABD COMPLEX(LDA, N) the matrix to be factored. The columns of the upper triangle are stored in the columns of ABD and the diagonals of the upper triangle are stored in the rows of ABD . See the comments below for details. LDA INTEGER the leading dimension of the array ABD . LDA must be .GE. M + 1 . N INTEGER the order of the matrix A . M INTEGER the number of diagonals above the main diagonal. 0 .LE. M .LT. N . On Return ABD an upper triangular matrix R , stored in band form, so that A ...
 complib/cpbcon(3) -- estimate the reciprocal of the condition number (in the 1-norm) of a complex Hermitian positive definite band
    CPBCON estimates the reciprocal of the condition number (in the 1-norm) of a complex Hermitian positive definite band matrix using the Cholesky factorization A = U**H*U or A = L*L**H computed by CPBTRF. An estimate is obtained for norm(inv(A)), and the reciprocal of the condition number is computed as RCOND = 1 / (ANORM * norm(inv(A))).
 complib/CPBDI(3) -- CPBDI computes the determinant of a complex Hermitian positive definite band matrix using the factors computed
    On Entry ABD COMPLEX(LDA, N) the output from CPBCO or CPBFA. LDA INTEGER the leading dimension of the array ABD . N INTEGER the order of the matrix A . M INTEGER the number of diagonals above the main diagonal. On Return DET REAL(2) determinant of original matrix in the form determinant = DET(1) * 10.0**DET(2) with 1.0 .LE. DET(1) .LT. 10.0 or DET(1) .EQ. 0.0 . LINPACK. This version dated 08/14/78 . Cleve Moler, University of New Mexico, Argonne National Lab. Subroutines and Functions Fortran RE...
 complib/cpbequ(3) -- compute row and column scalings intended to equilibrate a Hermitian positive definite band matrix A and reduce
    CPBEQU computes row and column scalings intended to equilibrate a Hermitian positive definite band matrix A and reduce its condition number (with respect to the two-norm). S contains the scale factors, S(i) = 1/sqrt(A(i,i)), chosen so that the scaled matrix B with elements B(i,j) = S(i)*A(i,j)*S(j) has ones on the diagonal. This choice of S puts the condition number of B within a factor N of the smallest possible condition number over all possible diagonal scalings....
 complib/CPBFA(3) -- CPBFA factors a complex Hermitian positive definite matrix stored in band form. CPBFA is usually called by CPB
    On Entry ABD COMPLEX(LDA, N) the matrix to be factored. The columns of the upper triangle are stored in the columns of ABD and the diagonals of the upper triangle are stored in the rows of ABD . See the comments below for details. LDA INTEGER the leading dimension of the array ABD . LDA must be .GE. M + 1 . N INTEGER the order of the matrix A . M INTEGER the number of diagonals above the main diagonal. 0 .LE. M .LT. N . On Return ABD an upper triangular matrix R , stored in band form, so that A ...
 complib/cpbrfs(3) -- when the coefficient matrix is Hermitian positive definite and banded, and provides error bounds and backward
    CPBRFS improves the computed solution to a system of linear equations when the coefficient matrix is Hermitian positive definite and banded, and provides error bounds and backward error estimates for the solution.
 complib/CPBSL(3) -- CPBSL solves the complex Hermitian positive definite band system A*X = B using the factors computed by CPBCO o
    On Entry ABD COMPLEX(LDA, N) the output from CPBCO or CPBFA. LDA INTEGER the leading dimension of the array ABD . N INTEGER the order of the matrix A . M INTEGER the number of diagonals above the main diagonal. B COMPLEX(N) the right hand side vector. On Return B the solution vector X . Error Condition A division by zero will occur if the input factor contains a zero on the diagonal. Technically this indicates singularity but it is usually caused by improper subroutine arguments. It will not occ...
 complib/cpbstf(3) -- compute a split Cholesky factorization of a complex Hermitian positive definite band matrix A
    CPBSTF computes a split Cholesky factorization of a complex Hermitian positive definite band matrix A. This routine is designed to be used in conjunction with CHBGST. The factorization has the form A = S**H*S where S is a band matrix of the same bandwidth as A and the following structure: S = ( U ) ( M L ) where U is upper triangular of order m = (n+kd)/2, and L is lower triangular of order n-m.
 complib/cpbsv(3) -- X = B,
    CPBSV computes the solution to a complex system of linear equations A * X = B, where A is an N-by-N Hermitian positive definite band matrix and X and B are N-by-NRHS matrices. The Cholesky decomposition is used to factor A as A = U**H * U, if UPLO = 'U', or A = L * L**H, if UPLO = 'L', where U is an upper triangular band matrix, and L is a lower triangular band matrix, with the same number of superdiagonals or subdiagonals as A. The factored form of A is then used to solve the system of equa...
 complib/cpbsvx(3) -- compute the solution to a complex system of linear equations A * X = B,
    CPBSVX uses the Cholesky factorization A = U**H*U or A = L*L**H to compute the solution to a complex system of linear equations A * X = B, where A is an N-by-N Hermitian positive definite band matrix and X and B are N-by-NRHS matrices. Error bounds on the solution and a condition estimate are also provided.
 complib/cpbtf2(3) -- compute the Cholesky factorization of a complex Hermitian positive definite band matrix A
    CPBTF2 computes the Cholesky factorization of a complex Hermitian positive definite band matrix A. The factorization has the form A = U' * U , if UPLO = 'U', or A = L * L', if UPLO = 'L', where U is an upper triangular matrix, U' is the conjugate transpose of U, and L is lower triangular. This is the unblocked version of the algorithm, calling Level 2 BLAS.
 complib/cpbtrf(3) -- compute the Cholesky factorization of a complex Hermitian positive definite band matrix A
    CPBTRF computes the Cholesky factorization of a complex Hermitian positive definite band matrix A. The factorization has the form A = U**H * U, if UPLO = 'U', or A = L * L**H, if UPLO = 'L', where U is an upper triangular matrix and L is lower triangular.
 complib/cpbtrs(3) -- solve a system of linear equations A*X = B with a Hermitian positive definite band matrix A using the Cholesky
    CPBTRS solves a system of linear equations A*X = B with a Hermitian positive definite band matrix A using the Cholesky factorization A = U**H*U or A = L*L**H computed by CPBTRF.
 c++/cplxerr(3) -- error-handling function for the C++ Complex Math Library
    In the following description of the complex error handling routine, - i is of type int and - x is of type c_exception. i = complex_error(x) Invoked by functions in the C++ Complex Mathematics Library when errors are detected. Users may define their own procedures for handling errors, by defining a function named complex_error in their programs. com...
 c++/cplxexp(3) -- exponential, logarithm, power, square root functions for the C++ complex library
    The following math functions are overloaded by the complex library, where: - x, y, and z are of type complex. z = exp(x) Returns ex. z = log(x) Returns the natural logarithm of x. z = pow(x, y) Returns xy. z = sqrt(x) Returns the square root of x, contained in the first or fourth quadrants of the complex plane....
 c++/cplxops(3) -- operators for the C++ complex math library
    The basic arithmetic operators, comparison operators, and assignment operators are overloaded for complex numbers. The operators have their conventional precedences. In the following descriptions for complex operators, - x, y, and z are of type complex. Arithmetic operators: z = x + y Returns a complex which is the arithmetic sum of complex numbers x and y. z = -x Returns a complex which is the arithm...
 c++/cplxtrig(3) -- trigonometric and hyperbolic functions for the C++ complex library
    The following trigonometric functions are defined for complex, where: - x and y are of type complex. y = sin(x) Returns the sine of x. y = cos(x) Returns the cosine of x. y = sinh(x) Returns the hyperbolic sine of x. y = cosh(x) Returns the hyperbolic cosine of x.
 complib/CPOCO(3) -- CPOCO factors a complex Hermitian positive definite matrix and estimates the condition of the matrix. If RCOND
    On Entry A COMPLEX(LDA, N) the Hermitian matrix to be factored. Only the diagonal and upper triangle are used. LDA INTEGER the leading dimension of the array A . N INTEGER the order of the matrix A . On Return A an upper triangular matrix R so that A = CTRANS(R)*R where CTRANS(R) is the conjugate transpose. The strict lower triangle is unaltered. If INFO .NE. 0 , the factorization is not complete. RCOND REAL an estimate of the reciprocal condition of A . For the system A*X = B , relative perturb...
 complib/cpocon(3) -- estimate the reciprocal of the condition number (in the 1-norm) of a complex Hermitian positive definite matri
    CPOCON estimates the reciprocal of the condition number (in the 1-norm) of a complex Hermitian positive definite matrix using the Cholesky factorization A = U**H*U or A = L*L**H computed by CPOTRF. An estimate is obtained for norm(inv(A)), and the reciprocal of the condition number is computed as RCOND = 1 / (ANORM * norm(inv(A))).
 complib/CPODI(3) -- CPODI computes the determinant and inverse of a certain complex Hermitian positive definite matrix (see below)
    On Entry A COMPLEX(LDA, N) the output A from CPOCO or CPOFA or the output X from CQRDC. LDA INTEGER the leading dimension of the array A . N INTEGER the order of the matrix A . JOB INTEGER = 11 both determinant and inverse. = 01 inverse only. = 10 determinant only. On Return A If CPOCO or CPOFA was used to factor A then CPODI produces the upper half of INVERSE(A) . If CQRDC was used to decompose X then CPODI produces the upper half of INVERSE(CTRANS(X)*X) where CTRANS(X) is the conjugate transpo...
 complib/cpoequ(3) -- compute row and column scalings intended to equilibrate a Hermitian positive definite matrix A and reduce its
    CPOEQU computes row and column scalings intended to equilibrate a Hermitian positive definite matrix A and reduce its condition number (with respect to the two-norm). S contains the scale factors, S(i) = 1/sqrt(A(i,i)), chosen so that the scaled matrix B with elements B(i,j) = S(i)*A(i,j)*S(j) has ones on the diagonal. This choice of S puts the condition number of B within a factor N of the smallest possible condition number over all possible diagonal scalings....
 complib/CPOFA(3) -- CPOFA factors a complex Hermitian positive definite matrix. CPOFA is usually called by CPOCO, but it can be ca
    On Entry A COMPLEX(LDA, N) the Hermitian matrix to be factored. Only the diagonal and upper triangle are used. LDA INTEGER the leading dimension of the array A . N INTEGER the order of the matrix A . On Return A an upper triangular matrix R so that A = CTRANS(R)*R where CTRANS(R) is the conjugate transpose. The strict lower triangle is unaltered. If INFO .NE. 0 , the factorization is not complete. INFO INTEGER = 0 for normal return. = K signals an error condition. The leading minor of order K is...
 complib/cporfs(3) -- when the coefficient matrix is Hermitian positive definite,
    CPORFS improves the computed solution to a system of linear equations when the coefficient matrix is Hermitian positive definite, and provides error bounds and backward error estimates for the solution.
 complib/CPOSL(3) -- CPOSL solves the COMPLEX Hermitian positive definite system A * X = B using the factors computed by CPOCO or C
    On Entry A COMPLEX(LDA, N) the output from CPOCO or CPOFA. LDA INTEGER the leading dimension of the array A . N INTEGER the order of the matrix A . B COMPLEX(N) the right hand side vector. On Return B the solution vector X . Error Condition A division by zero will occur if the input factor contains a zero on the diagonal. Technically this indicates singularity but it is usually caused by improper subroutine arguments. It will not occur if the subroutines are called correctly and INFO .EQ. 0 . To...
 complib/cposv(3) -- X = B,
    CPOSV computes the solution to a complex system of linear equations A * X = B, where A is an N-by-N Hermitian positive definite matrix and X and B are N-by-NRHS matrices. The Cholesky decomposition is used to factor A as A = U**H* U, if UPLO = 'U', or A = L * L**H, if UPLO = 'L', where U is an upper triangular matrix and L is a lower triangular matrix. The factored form of A is then used to solve the system of equations A * X = B....
 complib/cposvx(3) -- compute the solution to a complex system of linear equations A * X = B,
    CPOSVX uses the Cholesky factorization A = U**H*U or A = L*L**H to compute the solution to a complex system of linear equations A * X = B, where A is an N-by-N Hermitian positive definite matrix and X and B are N-by-NRHS matrices. Error bounds on the solution and a condition estimate are also provided.
 complib/cpotf2(3) -- compute the Cholesky factorization of a complex Hermitian positive definite matrix A
    CPOTF2 computes the Cholesky factorization of a complex Hermitian positive definite matrix A. The factorization has the form A = U' * U , if UPLO = 'U', or A = L * L', if UPLO = 'L', where U is an upper triangular matrix and L is lower triangular. This is the unblocked version of the algorithm, calling Level 2 BLAS.
 complib/cpotrf(3) -- compute the Cholesky factorization of a complex Hermitian positive definite matrix A
    CPOTRF computes the Cholesky factorization of a complex Hermitian positive definite matrix A. The factorization has the form A = U**H * U, if UPLO = 'U', or A = L * L**H, if UPLO = 'L', where U is an upper triangular matrix and L is lower triangular. This is the block version of the algorithm, calling Level 3 BLAS.
 complib/cpotri(3) -- compute the inverse of a complex Hermitian positive definite matrix A using the Cholesky factorization A = U**
    CPOTRI computes the inverse of a complex Hermitian positive definite matrix A using the Cholesky factorization A = U**H*U or A = L*L**H computed by CPOTRF.
 complib/cpotrs(3) -- solve a system of linear equations A*X = B with a Hermitian positive definite matrix A using the Cholesky fact
    CPOTRS solves a system of linear equations A*X = B with a Hermitian positive definite matrix A using the Cholesky factorization A = U**H*U or A = L*L**H computed by CPOTRF.
 complib/CPPCO(3) -- CPPCO factors a complex Hermitian positive definite matrix stored in packed form and estimates the condition o
    On Entry AP COMPLEX (N*(N+1)/2) the packed form of a Hermitian matrix A . The columns of the upper triangle are stored sequentially in a one-dimensional array of length N*(N+1)/2 . See comments below for details. N INTEGER the order of the matrix A . On Return AP an upper triangular matrix R , stored in packed form, so that A = CTRANS(R)*R . If INFO .NE. 0 , the factorization is not complete. RCOND REAL an estimate of the reciprocal condition of A . For the system A*X = B , relative perturbation...
 complib/cppcon(3) -- estimate the reciprocal of the condition number (in the 1-norm) of a complex Hermitian positive definite packe
    CPPCON estimates the reciprocal of the condition number (in the 1-norm) of a complex Hermitian positive definite packed matrix using the Cholesky factorization A = U**H*U or A = L*L**H computed by CPPTRF. An estimate is obtained for norm(inv(A)), and the reciprocal of the condition number is computed as RCOND = 1 / (ANORM * norm(inv(A))).
 complib/CPPDI(3) -- CPPDI computes the determinant and inverse of a complex Hermitian positive definite matrix using the factors c
    On Entry AP COMPLEX (N*(N+1)/2) the output from CPPCO or CPPFA. N INTEGER the order of the matrix A . JOB INTEGER = 11 both determinant and inverse. = 01 inverse only. = 10 determinant only. On Return AP the upper triangular half of the inverse . The strict lower triangle is unaltered. DET REAL(2) determinant of original matrix if requested. Otherwise not referenced. Determinant = DET(1) * 10.0**DET(2) with 1.0 .LE. DET(1) .LT. 10.0 or DET(1) .EQ. 0.0 . Error Condition A division by zero will oc...
 complib/cppequ(3) -- compute row and column scalings intended to equilibrate a Hermitian positive definite matrix A in packed stora
    CPPEQU computes row and column scalings intended to equilibrate a Hermitian positive definite matrix A in packed storage and reduce its condition number (with respect to the two-norm). S contains the scale factors, S(i)=1/sqrt(A(i,i)), chosen so that the scaled matrix B with elements B(i,j)=S(i)*A(i,j)*S(j) has ones on the diagonal. This choice of S puts the condition number of B within a factor N of the smallest possible condition number over all possible diagonal scalings....
 complib/CPPFA(3) -- CPPFA factors a complex Hermitian positive definite matrix stored in packed form. CPPFA is usually called by C
    On Entry AP COMPLEX (N*(N+1)/2) the packed form of a Hermitian matrix A . The columns of the upper triangle are stored sequentially in a one-dimensional array of length N*(N+1)/2 . See comments below for details. N INTEGER the order of the matrix A . On Return AP an upper triangular matrix R , stored in packed form, so that A = CTRANS(R)*R . INFO INTEGER = 0 for normal return. = K If the leading minor of order K is not positive definite. Packed Storage The following program segment will pack the...
 complib/cpprfs(3) -- when the coefficient matrix is Hermitian positive definite and packed, and provides error bounds and backward
    CPPRFS improves the computed solution to a system of linear equations when the coefficient matrix is Hermitian positive definite and packed, and provides error bounds and backward error estimates for the solution.
 complib/CPPSL(3) -- CPPSL solves the complex Hermitian positive definite system A * X = B using the factors computed by CPPCO or C
    On Entry AP COMPLEX (N*(N+1)/2) the output from CPPCO or CPPFA. N INTEGER the order of the matrix A . B COMPLEX(N) the right hand side vector. On Return B the solution vector X . Error Condition A division by zero will occur if the input factor contains a zero on the diagonal. Technically this indicates singularity but it is usually caused by improper subroutine arguments. It will not occur if the subroutines are called correctly and INFO .EQ. 0 . To compute INVERSE(A) * C where C is a matrix wi...
 complib/cppsv(3) -- X = B,
    CPPSV computes the solution to a complex system of linear equations A * X = B, where A is an N-by-N Hermitian positive definite matrix stored in packed format and X and B are N-by-NRHS matrices. The Cholesky decomposition is used to factor A as A = U**H* U, if UPLO = 'U', or A = L * L**H, if UPLO = 'L', where U is an upper triangular matrix and L is a lower triangular matrix. The factored form of A is then used to solve the system of equations A * X = B....
 complib/cppsvx(3) -- compute the solution to a complex system of linear equations A * X = B,
    CPPSVX uses the Cholesky factorization A = U**H*U or A = L*L**H to compute the solution to a complex system of linear equations A * X = B, where A is an N-by-N Hermitian positive definite matrix stored in packed format and X and B are N-by-NRHS matrices. Error bounds on the solution and a condition estimate are also provided.
 complib/cpptrf(3) -- compute the Cholesky factorization of a complex Hermitian positive definite matrix A stored in packed format
    CPPTRF computes the Cholesky factorization of a complex Hermitian positive definite matrix A stored in packed format. The factorization has the form A = U**H * U, if UPLO = 'U', or A = L * L**H, if UPLO = 'L', where U is an upper triangular matrix and L is lower triangular.
 complib/cpptri(3) -- compute the inverse of a complex Hermitian positive definite matrix A using the Cholesky factorization A = U**
    CPPTRI computes the inverse of a complex Hermitian positive definite matrix A using the Cholesky factorization A = U**H*U or A = L*L**H computed by CPPTRF.
 complib/cpptrs(3) -- solve a system of linear equations A*X = B with a Hermitian positive definite matrix A in packed storage using
    CPPTRS solves a system of linear equations A*X = B with a Hermitian positive definite matrix A in packed storage using the Cholesky factorization A = U**H*U or A = L*L**H computed by CPPTRF.
 complib/cprod1d(3) -- Compute the product of a 1D Fourier transform with a 1D filter.
    cprod1d and zprod1d compute the product of the Fourier transforms of a complex sequence of N samples with the Fourier transforms of a complex filter. Note, the product of the Fourier transforms of two sequences is equal to the Fourier transform of their convolution.
 complib/cprod2d(3) -- Compute the product of a 2D Fourier transforms with a 2D filter.
    cprod2d and zprod2d compute the product of the Fourier transforms of 2D complex sequence (size N1xN2) with the Fourier transform of 2D filter. Note, the product of the Fourier transforms of two sequences is equal to the Fourier transform of their convolution.
 complib/cprod3d(3) -- Compute the product of a 3D Fourier transforms with a 3D filter.
    cprod3d and zprod3d compute the product of the Fourier transforms of 3D complex sequence (size N1xN2xN3) with the Fourier transform of 3D filter. Note, the product of the Fourier transforms of two sequences is equal to the Fourier transform of their convolution.
 complib/cprodm1d(3) -- Compute the product of Multiple 1D Fourier transforms with Multiple 1D filters.
    cprodm1d and zprodm1d compute the product of the Fourier transforms of P complex sequences of N samples with the Fourier transforms of P complex filters. Note, the product of the Fourier transforms of two sequences is equal to the Fourier transform of their convolution.
 complib/cptcon(3) -- compute the reciprocal of the condition number (in the 1-norm) of a complex Hermitian positive definite tridia
    CPTCON computes the reciprocal of the condition number (in the 1-norm) of a complex Hermitian positive definite tridiagonal matrix using the factorization A = L*D*L**H or A = U**H*D*U computed by CPTTRF. Norm(inv(A)) is computed by a direct method, and the reciprocal of the condition number is computed as RCOND = 1 / (ANORM * norm(inv(A))).
 complib/cpteqr(3) -- compute all eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a symmetric positive definite tridiagonal matrix by f
    CPTEQR computes all eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a symmetric positive definite tridiagonal matrix by first factoring the matrix using SPTTRF and then calling CBDSQR to compute the singular values of the bidiagonal factor. This routine computes the eigenvalues of the positive definite tridiagonal matrix to high relative accuracy. This means that if the eigenvalues range over many orders of magnitude in size, then the small eigenvalues and corresponding eigenvectors will be compute...
 complib/cptrfs(3) -- improve the computed solution to a system of linear equations when the coefficient matrix is Hermitian positiv
    CPTRFS improves the computed solution to a system of linear equations when the coefficient matrix is Hermitian positive definite and tridiagonal, and provides error bounds and backward error estimates for the solution.
 complib/CPTSL(3) -- CPTSL given a positive definite tridiagonal matrix and a right hand side will find the solution.
    On Entry N INTEGER is the order of the tridiagonal matrix. D COMPLEX(N) is the diagonal of the tridiagonal matrix. On output D is destroyed. E COMPLEX(N) is the offdiagonal of the tridiagonal matrix. E(1) through E(N-1) should contain the offdiagonal. B COMPLEX(N) is the right hand side vector. On Return B contains the solution. LINPACK. This version dated 08/14/78 . Jack Dongarra, Argonne National Laboratory. No externals Fortran CONJG,MOD PPPPaaaaggggeeee 1111...
 complib/cptsv(3) -- and X and B are N-by-NRHS matrices
    CPTSV computes the solution to a complex system of linear equations A*X = B, where A is an N-by-N Hermitian positive definite tridiagonal matrix, and X and B are N-by-NRHS matrices. A is factored as A = L*D*L**H, and the factored form of A is then used to solve the system of equations.
 complib/cptsvx(3) -- Hermitian positive definite tridiagonal matrix and X and B are N-by-NRHS matrices
    CPTSVX uses the factorization A = L*D*L**H to compute the solution to a complex system of linear equations A*X = B, where A is an N-by-N Hermitian positive definite tridiagonal matrix and X and B are N-by-NRHS matrices. Error bounds on the solution and a condition estimate are also provided.
 complib/cpttrf(3) -- compute the factorization of a complex Hermitian positive definite tridiagonal matrix A
    CPTTRF computes the factorization of a complex Hermitian positive definite tridiagonal matrix A. If the subdiagonal elements of A are supplied in the array E, the factorization has the form A = L*D*L**H, where D is diagonal and L is unit lower bidiagonal; if the superdiagonal elements of A are supplied, it has the form A = U**H*D*U, where U is unit upper bidiagonal.
 complib/cpttrs(3) -- solve a system of linear equations A * X = B with a Hermitian positive definite tridiagonal matrix A using the
    CPTTRS solves a system of linear equations A * X = B with a Hermitian positive definite tridiagonal matrix A using the factorization A = U**H*D*U or A = L*D*L**H computed by CPTTRF.
 cpusetAllocQueueDef(3x) -- allocate a cpuset_QueueDef_t structure
    The cpusetAllocQueueDef function is used to allocate memory for a cpuset_QueueDef_t structure. This memory can then be released using the function cpusetFreeQueueDef(3x). The count argument indicates the number of CPUs that will be assigned to the cpuset definition structure. The cpuset_QueueDef_t structure is defined as follows: typedef struct { int flags; char *permfile; cpuset_CPUList_t *cpu; } cpuset_QueueDef_t; The flags member is used to specify various control options for the cpuset queue...
 cpusetAttach(3x) -- attach the current process to a cpuset
    The cpusetAttach function is used to attach the current process to the cpuset identified by qname. Every cpuset queue has a file that defines access permissions to the queue. The execute permissions for that file will determine if a process owned by a specific user can attach a process to the cpuset queue. The qname argument is the name of the cpuset to which the current process should be attached....
 cpusetAttachPID(3x) -- attach a specific process to a cpuset
    The cpusetAttachPID function is used to attach a specific process identified by its PID to the cpuset identified by qname. Every cpuset queue has a file that defines access permissions to the queue. The execute permissions for that file will determine if a process owned by a specific user can attach a process to the cpuset queue. The qname argument is the name of the cpuset to which the specified process should be attached....
 cpusetCreate(3x) -- create a cpuset
    The cpusetCreate function is used to create a cpuset queue. Only processes running root user ID are allowed to create cpuset queues. The qname argument is the name that will be assigned to the new cpuset. The name of the cpuset must be a three to eight character string. Queue names having one or two characters are reserved for use by IRIX. The qdef argument is a pointer to a cpuset_QueueDef_t structure (defined in ) that defines the attributes of the queue to be created. The memory for...
 cpusetDestroy(3x) -- destroy a cpuset
    The cpusetDestroy function is used to destroy the specified cpuset The qname argument is the name of the cpuset that will be destroyed. Only processes running with root user ID are allowed to destroy cpuset queues. A cpuset can only be destroyed if there are no threads currently attached to it.
 cpusetDetachAll(3x) -- detaches all threads from a cpuset
    The cpusetDetachAll function is used to detach all threads currently attached to the specified cpuset. Only a process running with root user ID can successfully execute cpusetDetachAll. The qname argument is the name of the cpuset that the operation will be performed upon.
 cpusetDetachPID(3x) -- detach a specific process from a cpuset
    The cpusetDetachPID function is used to detach a specific process identified by its PID from the cpuset identified by qname. Every cpuset queue has a file that defines access permissions to the queue. The execute permissions for that file will determine if a process owned by a specific user can detach a process from the cpuset queue. The qname argument is the name of the cpuset to which the specified process should be detached....
 cpusetFreeCPUList(3x) -- release memory used by a cpuset_CPUList_t structure
    The cpusetFreeCPUList function is used to release memory used by a cpuset_CPUList_t structure. This function releases all memory associated with the cpuset_CPUList_t structure. The cpu argument is the pointer to the cpuset_CPUList_t structure that will have it's memory released. This function should be used to release the memory allocated during a previous call to the function cpusetGetCPUList(3x)....
 cpusetFreeNameList(3x) -- release memory used by a cpuset_NameList_t structure
    The cpusetFreeNameList function is used to release memory used by a cpuset_NameList_t structure. This function releases all memory associated with the cpuset_NameList_t structure. The name argument is the pointer to the cpuset_NameList_t structure that will have it's memory released. This function should be used to release the memory allocated during a previous call to the function cpusetGetNameList(3x) or cpusetGetName(3x)....
 cpusetFreePIDList(3x) -- release memory used by a cpuset_PIDList_t structure
    The cpusetFreePIDList function is used to release memory used by a cpuset_PIDList_t structure. This function releases all memory associated with the cpuset_PIDList_t structure. The pid argument is the pointer to the cpuset_PIDList_t structure that will have it's memory released. This function should be used to release the memory allocated during a previous call to the function cpusetGetPIDList(3x)....
 cpusetFreeProperties(3x) -- release memory used by a cpuset_Properties_t structure
    The cpusetFreeProperties function is used to release memory used by a cpuset_Properties_t structure. This function releases all memory associated with the cpuset_Properties_t structure. The csp argument is the pointer to the cpuset_Properties_t structure that will have its memory released. This function should be used to release the memory allocated during a previous call to the function cpusetGetProperties(3x)....
 cpusetFreeQueueDef(3x) -- release memory used by a cpuset_QueueDef_t structure
    The cpusetFreeQueueDef function is used to release memory used by a cpuset_QueueDef_t structure. This function releases all memory associated with the cpuset_QueueDef_t structure. The qdef argument is the pointer to the cpuset_QueueDef_t structure that will have it's memory released. This function should be used to release the memory allocated during a previous call to the function cpusetAllocQueueDef(3x)....
 cpusetGetCPUCount(3x) -- obtain the number of CPUs configured on the system
    The cpusetGetCPUCount function returns the number of CPUs that are configured on the system.
 cpusetGetCPUList(3x) -- get the list of all CPUs assigned to a cpuset
    The cpusetGetCPUList function is used to obtain the list of the CPUs assigned to the specified cpuset. Only processes running with a user ID or group ID that has read access permissions on the permissions file can successfully execute this function. The qname argument is the name of the specified cpuset. The function returns a pointer to a structure of type cpuset_CPUList_t (defined in ). The function cpusetGetCPUList allocates the memory for the structure and the user is responsible f...
 cpusetGetName(3x) -- get the name of the cpuset to which a process is attached
    The cpusetGetName function is used to obtain the name of the cpuset to which the specified process has been attached. The pid argument specifies the process ID. Currently, the only valid value for pid is 0, which returns the name of the cpuset to which the current process is attached. The function returns a pointer to a structure of type cpuset_NameList_t (defined in ). The function cpusetGetName allocates the memory for the structure and all of its associated data. The user is respons...
 cpusetGetNameList(3x) -- get the list of names for all defined cpusets
    The cpusetGetNameList function is used to obtain a list of the names for all the cpusets on the system. The function returns a pointer to a structure of type cpuset_NameList_t (defined in ). The function cpusetGetNameList allocates the memory for the structure and all of its associated data. The user is responsible for freeing the memory using the function cpusetFreeNameList(3x). The cpuset_NameList_t structure is defined as follows: typedef struct { int count; char **list; int *status...
 cpusetGetPIDList(3x) -- get a list of all PIDs attached to a cpuset
    The cpusetGetPIDList function is used to obtain a list of the PIDs for all processes currently attached to the specified cpuset. Only processes with a user ID or group ID that has read permissions on the permissions file can successfully execute this function. The qname argument is the name of the cpuset to which the current process should be attached. The function returns a pointer to a structure of type cpuset_PIDList_t (defined in ). The function cpusetGetPIDList allocates the memor...
 cpusetGetProperties(3x) -- retrieve various properties associated with a cpuset
    The cpusetGetProperties function is used retrieve various properties identified by qname and returns a pointer to a cpuset_Properties_t structure. Every cpuset queue has a file that defines access permissions to the queue. The read permissions for that file will determine if a process owned by a specific user can retrieve the properties from the cpuset. The qname argument is the name of the cpuset to which the properties should be retrieved....
 complib/CQRDC(3) -- CQRDC uses Householder transformations to compute the QR
    On Entry X COMPLEX(LDX,P), where LDX .GE. N. X contains the matrix whose decomposition is to be computed. LDX INTEGER. LDX is the leading dimension of the array X. N INTEGER. N is the number of rows of the matrix X. P INTEGER. P is the number of columns of the matrix X. JVPT INTEGER(P). JVPT contains integers that control the selection of the pivot columns. The K-th column X(K) of X is placed in one of three classes according to the value of JVPT(K). If JVPT(K) .GT. 0, then X(K) is an initial co...
 complib/CQRSL(3) -- CQRSL applies the output of CQRDC to compute coordinate transformations, projections, and least squares soluti
    On Entry X COMPLEX(LDX,P). X contains the output of CQRDC. LDX INTEGER. LDX is the leading dimension of the array X. N INTEGER. N is the number of rows of the matrix XK. It must have the same value as N in CQRDC. K INTEGER. K is the number of columns of the matrix XK. K must not be greater than (N,P), where P is the same as in the calling sequence to CQRDC. QRAUX COMPLEX(P). QRAUX contains the auxiliary output from CQRDC. Y COMPLEX(N) Y contains an N-vector that is to be manipulated by CQRSL. JO...
 complib/CRFFT2(3) -- Calculate a complex-to-real Fourier synthesis/analysis.
    
 Tcl/crtcommand(3) -- implement new commands in C
    Tcl_Interp *interp (in) Interpreter in which to create new command. char *cmdName (in) Name of command. Tcl_CmdProc *proc (in) Implementation of new command: proc will be called whenever cmdName is invoked as a command. ClientData clientData (in) Arbitrary one-word value to pass to proc and deleteProc. Tcl_CmdDeleteProc *deleteProc (in) Procedure to call before cmdName is deleted from the interpreter; allows for command-specific cleanup. If NULL, then no procedure is called before the command is...
 Tk/crterrhdlr(3) -- handle X protocol errors
    Display *display (in) Display whose errors are to be handled. int error (in) Match only error events with this value in the error_code field. If -1, then match any error_code value. int request (in) Match only error events with this value in the request_code field. If -1, then match any request_code value. int minor (in) Match only error events with this value in the minor_code field. If -1, then match any minor_code value. Tk_ErrorProc *proc (in) Procedure to invoke whenever an error event is r...
 Tk/crtgenhdlr(3) -- associate procedure callback with all X events
    Tk_GenericProc *proc (in) Procedure to invoke whenever any X event occurs on any display. ClientData clientData (in) Arbitrary one-word value to pass to proc.
 Tk/crtimgtype(3) -- define new kind of image
    Tk_ImageType *typePtr (in) Structure that defines the new type of image.
 Tcl/crtinterp(3) -- create and delete Tcl command interpreters
    Tcl_Interp *interp (in) Token for interpreter to be destroyed.
 Tk/crtitemtype(3) -- define new kind of canvas item
    Tk_ItemType *typePtr (in) Structure that defines the new type of canvas item.
 Tk/crtmainwin(3) -- create or delete window
    Tcl_Interp *interp (out) Tcl interpreter to use for error reporting. If no error occurs, then *interp isn't modified. For Tk_CreateMainWindow, this interpreter is associated permanently with the created window, and Tk-related commands are bound into the interpreter. char *screenName (in) String name of screen on which to create window. Has the form displayName.screenNum, where displayName is the name of a display and screenNum is a screen number. If the dot and screenNum are omitted, the screen...
 Tcl/crtmathfnc(3) -- Define a new math function for expressions
    Tcl_Interp *interp (in) Interpreter in which new function will be defined. char *name (in) Name for new function. int numArgs (in) Number of arguments to new function; also gives size of argTypes array. Tcl_ValueType *argTypes (in) Points to an array giving the permissible types for each argument to function. Tcl_MathProc *proc (in) Procedure that implements the function. ClientData clientData (in) Arbitrary one-word value to pass to proc when it is invoked....
 Tk/crtphimgfmt(3) -- define new file format for photo images
    Tk_PhotoImageFormat *formatPtr (in) Structure that defines the new file format.
 Tcl/crtpipelin(3) -- create one or more child processes, with I/O redirection
    Tcl_Interp *interp (in) Interpreter to use for error reporting. int argc (in) Number of strings in argv array. char **argv (in) Array of strings describing command(s) and I/O redirection. Argv[argc] must be NULL. int **pidArrayPtr (out) The value at *pidArrayPtr is modified to hold a pointer to an array of process identifiers. The array is dynamically allocated and must be freed by the caller. int *inPipePtr (out) If this argument is NULL then standard input for the first command in the pipeline...
 Tk/crtselhdlr(3) -- arrange to handle requests for a selection
    Tk_Window tkwin (in) Window for which proc will provide selection information. Atom selection (in) The name of the selection for | which proc will provide | selection information. Atom target (in) Form in which proc can provide the selection (e.g. STRING or FILE_NAME). Corresponds to type arguments in selection commands. Tk_SelectionProc *proc (in) Procedure to invoke whenever the selection is owned by tkwin and the selection contents are requested in the format given by target. ClientData clien...
 Tcl/crttrace(3) -- arrange for command execution to be traced
    Tcl_Interp *interp (in) Interpreter containing command to be traced or untraced. int level (in) Only commands at or below this nesting level will be traced. 1 means top-level commands only, 2 means top-level commands or those that are invoked as immediate consequences of executing top-level commands (procedure bodies, bracketed commands, etc.) and so on. Tcl_CmdTraceProc *proc (in) Procedure to call for each command that's executed. See below for details on the calling sequence. ClientData clie...
 standard/crv(3) -- draws a curve
    points expects an array containing the four points that define the curve. The routine expects 3-D points (x, y, and z coordinates for each point).
 standard/crvn(3) -- draws a series of curve segments
    geom expects a matrix of 3-D points. n expects the number of points in the matrix referenced by geom.
 f90/cry2mips(3) -- Converts Fortran data types between Cray Fortran data types and MIPS IEEE Fortran data types
    UNICOS systems (except CRAY T90 systems that support IEEE arithmetic) IRIX systems
 crypt(3c) -- generate hashing encryption
    crypt is the password encryption function. It is based on a one way hashing encryption algorithm with variations intended (among other things) to frustrate use of hardware implementations of a key search. Key is the input string to encrypt, for instance, a user's typed password. Salt is a two-character string chosen from the set [a-zA-Z0- 9./]; this string is used to perturb the hashing algorithm in one of 4096 different ways, after which the password is used as the key to encrypt repeatedly a ...
 crypt(3x) -- password and file encryption functions
    des_crypt is the password encryption function. It is based on a one way hashing encryption algorithm with variations intended (among other things) to frustrate use of hardware implementations of a key search. Key is a user's typed password. Salt is a two-character string chosen from the set [a-zA-Z0-9./]; this string is used to perturb the hashing algorithm in one of 4096 different ways, after which the password is used as the key to encrypt repeatedly a constant string. The returned value poin...
 complib/cscal1d(3) -- scales a 1D real sequence.
    cscal1d and zscal1d scale a complex sequences of N samples. The Fourier Transforms are not normalized so the succession DirectInverse transform scales the input data by a factor equal to the size of the transform. cscal1d or zscal1d are used to scale back the result.
 complib/cscal2d(3) -- scales a 2D complex sequence.
    cscal2d and zscal2d scale a 2D complex sequence of size N1xN2. The Fourier Transforms are not normalized so the succession DirectInverse transform scales the input data by a factor equal to the size of the transform. So cscal2d or zscal2d may be used to scale back the result.
 complib/cscal3d(3) -- scales a 3D complex sequence.
    cscal3d and zscal3d scale a 3D complex sequence of size N1xN2xN3. The Fourier Transforms are not normalized so the succession DirectInverse transform scales the input data by a factor equal to the size of the transform. So cscal3d or zscal3d may be used to scale back the result.
 complib/cscalm1d(3) -- scales Multiple 1D complex sequences.
    cscalm1d and zscalm1d scale the P complex sequences of N samples each. The Fourier Transforms are not normalized so the succession DirectInverse transform scales the input data by a factor equal to the size of the transform. cscalm1d or zscalm1d are used to scale back the result.
 complib/csfft1du(3) -- 1D, Complex to Real, Inverse Fast Fourier Transforms.
    csfft1du and zdfft1du compute the real sequence of N samples, from its Fourier transform. The i-th index f(i) of a sequence with Fourier transform F(k) is equal to: f(i) = Sum ( W^(i*k) * F(k) ), for k =0, ..., (N-1) W = exp( (Sign*2*sqrt(-1)*PI) / N ) The Inverse Fourier transform is performed in-place, so the input Fourier transform is overwritten by the final sequence output. As the output sequence has real values, only the first half of the transform is needed. The (N-k)-th sample of the tra...
 complib/csfft2du(3) -- 2D, Complex-to-Real, Inverse Fast Fourier Transforms.
    csfft2du and zdfft2du compute in place the inverse Fourier transform of real 2D sequence of size N1 x N2. The value F{k,l} of the transform of the 2D sequence f{i,j} is equal to: F{k,l} = Sum ( W1^(i*k) * W2^(j*l) * f{i,j} ), for i =0,...,(N1-1), j=0,...,(n2-1) W1 = exp( (Sign*2*sqrt(-1)*PI) / N1 ) W2 = exp( (Sign*2*sqrt(-1)*PI) / N2 )
 complib/csfft3du(3) -- 3D, Complex to Real, Inverse Fast Fourier Transforms.
    csfft3du and zdfft3du compute in place the real 3D sequence of size N1 x N2 x N3 from its complex Fourier transform. The value F{j1,j2,j3} of the transform of the 3D sequence f{i1,i2,i3} is equal to: F{j1,j2,j3} = Sum( W1^(i1*j1)*W2^(i2*j2)*W3^(i3*j3)*f{i1,i2,i3} ), for i[123] =0,...,(N[123]-1) W[123] = exp( (Sign*2*sqrt(-1)*PI) / N[123] )
 complib/csfftm1du(3) -- Multiple 1D, Complex to Real, Inverse Fast Fourier Transforms.
    csfftm1du and zdfftm1du compute the P real sequences of N samples each, from their Fourier transform. The i-th index f(i) of a sequence of N samples, with Fourier transform F(k) is equal to: f(i) = Sum ( W^(i*k) * F(k) ), for k =0, ..., (N-1) W = exp( (Sign*2*sqrt(-1)*PI) / N ) The Inverse Fourier transforms are performed in-place, so the input Fourier transform is overwritten by the final sequence output. As the output sequences have real values, only the first half of the transform is needed. ...
 f90/cshift(3) -- Performs a circular shift on an array expression
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 complib/CSICO(3) -- CSICO factors a complex symmetric matrix by elimination with symmetric pivoting and estimates the condition of
    On Entry A COMPLEX(LDA, N) the symmetric matrix to be factored. Only the diagonal and upper triangle are used. LDA INTEGER the leading dimension of the array A . N INTEGER the order of the matrix A . On Return A a block diagonal matrix and the multipliers which were used to obtain it. The factorization can be written A = U*D*TRANS(U) where U is a product of permutation and unit upper triangular matrices , TRANS(U) is the transpose of U , and D is block diagonal with 1 by 1 and 2 by 2 blocks. KVP...
 complib/CSIDI(3) -- CSIDI computes the determinant and inverse of a complex symmetric matrix using the factors from CSIFA.
    On Entry A COMPLEX(LDA,N) the output from CSIFA. LDA INTEGER the leading dimension of the array A . N INTEGER the order of the matrix A . KVPT INTEGER(N) the pivot vector from CSIFA. WORK COMPLEX(N) work vector. Contents destroyed. JOB INTEGER JOB has the decimal expansion AB where If B .NE. 0, the inverse is computed, If A .NE. 0, the determinant is computed, For example, JOB = 11 gives both. On Return Variables not requested by JOB are not used. A contains the upper triangle of the inverse of ...
 complib/CSIFA(3) -- CSIFA factors a complex symmetric matrix by elimination with symmetric pivoting. To solve A*X = B , follow CSI
    On Entry A COMPLEX(LDA,N) the symmetric matrix to be factored. Only the diagonal and upper triangle are used. LDA INTEGER the leading dimension of the array A . N INTEGER the order of the matrix A . On Return A a block diagonal matrix and the multipliers which were used to obtain it. The factorization can be written A = U*D*TRANS(U) where U is a product of permutation and unit upper triangular matrices , TRANS(U) is the transpose of U , and D is block diagonal with 1 by 1 and 2 by 2 blocks. KVPT...
 complib/CSISL(3) -- CSISL solves the complex symmetric system A * X = B using the factors computed by CSIFA.
    On Entry A COMPLEX(LDA,N) the output from CSIFA. LDA INTEGER the leading dimension of the array A . N INTEGER the order of the matrix A . KVPT INTEGER(N) the pivot vector from CSIFA. B COMPLEX(N) the right hand side vector. On Return B the solution vector X . Error Condition A division by zero may occur if CSICO has set RCOND .EQ. 0.0 or CSIFA has set INFO .NE. 0 . To compute INVERSE(A) * C where C is a matrix with P columns CALL CSIFA(A,LDA,N,KVPT,INFO) If (INFO .NE. 0) GO TO ... DO 10 J = 1, P...
 f90/csmg(3) -- Performs a conditional scalar merge
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 complib/CSPCO(3) -- CSPCO factors a complex symmetric matrix stored in packed form by elimination with symmetric pivoting and esti
    On Entry AP COMPLEX (N*(N+1)/2) the packed form of a symmetric matrix A . The columns of the upper triangle are stored sequentially in a one-dimensional array of length N*(N+1)/2 . See comments below for details. N INTEGER the order of the matrix A . On Return AP a block diagonal matrix and the multipliers which were used to obtain it stored in packed form. The factorization can be written A = U*D*TRANS(U) where U is a product of permutation and unit upper triangular matrices , TRANS(U) is the t...
 complib/cspcon(3) -- estimate the reciprocal of the condition number (in the 1-norm) of a complex symmetric packed matrix A using t
    CSPCON estimates the reciprocal of the condition number (in the 1-norm) of a complex symmetric packed matrix A using the factorization A = U*D*U**T or A = L*D*L**T computed by CSPTRF. An estimate is obtained for norm(inv(A)), and the reciprocal of the condition number is computed as RCOND = 1 / (ANORM * norm(inv(A))).
 complib/CSPDI(3) -- CSPDI computes the determinant and inverse of a complex symmetric matrix using the factors from CSPFA, where t
    On Entry AP COMPLEX (N*(N+1)/2) the output from CSPFA. N INTEGER the order of the matrix A . KVPT INTEGER(N) the pivot vector from CSPFA. WORK COMPLEX(N) work vector. Contents ignored. JOB INTEGER JOB has the decimal expansion AB where if B .NE. 0, the inverse is computed, if A .NE. 0, the determinant is computed. For example, JOB = 11 gives both. On Return Variables not requested by JOB are not used. AP contains the upper triangle of the inverse of the original matrix, stored in packed form. Th...
 complib/CSPFA(3) -- CSPFA factors a complex symmetric matrix stored in packed form by elimination with symmetric pivoting. To solv
    On Entry AP COMPLEX (N*(N+1)/2) the packed form of a symmetric matrix A . The columns of the upper triangle are stored sequentially in a one-dimensional array of length N*(N+1)/2 . See comments below for details. N INTEGER the order of the matrix A . On Return AP a block diagonal matrix and the multipliers which were used to obtain it stored in packed form. The factorization can be written A = U*D*TRANS(U) where U is a product of permutation and unit upper triangular matrices , TRANS(U) is the t...
 complib/cspr(3) -- + A,
    CSPR performs the symmetric rank 1 operation where alpha is a complex scalar, x is an n element vector and A is an n by n symmetric matrix, supplied in packed form.
 complib/csprfs(3) -- improve the computed solution to a system of linear equations when the coefficient matrix is symmetric indefin
    CSPRFS improves the computed solution to a system of linear equations when the coefficient matrix is symmetric indefinite and packed, and provides error bounds and backward error estimates for the solution.
 complib/CSPSL(3) -- CSISL solves the complex symmetric system A * X = B using the factors computed by CSPFA.
    On Entry AP COMPLEX(N*(N+1)/2) the output from CSPFA. N INTEGER the order of the matrix A . KVPT INTEGER(N) the pivot vector from CSPFA. B COMPLEX(N) the right hand side vector. On Return B the solution vector X . Error Condition A division by zero may occur if CSPCO has set RCOND .EQ. 0.0 or CSPFA has set INFO .NE. 0 . To compute INVERSE(A) * C where C is a matrix with P columns CALL CSPFA(AP,N,KVPT,INFO) IF (INFO .NE. 0) GO TO ... DO 10 J = 1, P CALL CSPSL(AP,N,KVPT,C(1,J)) 10 CONTINUE LINPACK...
 complib/cspsv(3) -- X = B,
    CSPSV computes the solution to a complex system of linear equations A * X = B, where A is an N-by-N symmetric matrix stored in packed format and X and B are N-by-NRHS matrices. The diagonal pivoting method is used to factor A as A = U * D * U**T, if UPLO = 'U', or A = L * D * L**T, if UPLO = 'L', where U (or L) is a product of permutation and unit upper (lower) triangular matrices, D is symmetric and block diagonal with 1-by-1 and 2-by-2 diagonal blocks. The factored form of A is then used t...
 complib/cspsvx(3) -- and X and B are N-by-NRHS matrices
    CSPSVX uses the diagonal pivoting factorization A = U*D*U**T or A = L*D*L**T to compute the solution to a complex system of linear equations A * X = B, where A is an N-by-N symmetric matrix stored in packed format and X and B are N-by-NRHS matrices. Error bounds on the solution and a condition estimate are also provided.
 complib/csptrf(3) -- in packed format using the Bunch-Kaufman diagonal pivoting method
    CSPTRF computes the factorization of a complex symmetric matrix A stored in packed format using the Bunch-Kaufman diagonal pivoting method: A = U*D*U**T or A = L*D*L**T where U (or L) is a product of permutation and unit upper (lower) triangular matrices, and D is symmetric and block diagonal with 1-by-1 and 2-by-2 diagonal blocks.
 complib/csptri(3) -- compute the inverse of a complex symmetric indefinite matrix A in packed storage using the factorization A = U
    CSPTRI computes the inverse of a complex symmetric indefinite matrix A in packed storage using the factorization A = U*D*U**T or A = L*D*L**T computed by CSPTRF.
 complib/csptrs(3) -- solve a system of linear equations A*X = B with a complex symmetric matrix A stored in packed format using the
    CSPTRS solves a system of linear equations A*X = B with a complex symmetric matrix A stored in packed format using the factorization A = U*D*U**T or A = L*D*L**T computed by CSPTRF.
 complib/CSROOT(3) -- EISPACK auxiliary routine.
    (yr,yi) = complex sqrt(xr,xi) Branch chosen so that yr .ge. 0.0 and sign(yi) .eq. sign(xi). PPPPaaaaggggeeee 1111
 complib/CSROT(3) -- CSROT applies the complex Givens rotation (X) ( C S)(X) (Y) = (-S C)(Y) N times where for I = 0,...,N-1 X = CX
    Argument Description N (integer) number of elements in each vector CX (complex array) beginning of one vector INCX (integer) memory spacing of successive elements of vector CX CY (complex array) beginning of the other vector INCY (integer) memory spacing of successive elements of vector CY C (real) cosine term of the rotation S (real) sine term of the rotation. PPPPaaaaggggeeee 1111
 complib/csrscl(3) -- multiplie an n-element complex vector x by the real scalar 1/a
    CSRSCL multiplies an n-element complex vector x by the real scalar 1/a. This is done without overflow or underflow as long as the final result x/a does not overflow or underflow.
 complib/cstedc(3) -- compute all eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a symmetric tridiagonal matrix using the divide and c
    CSTEDC computes all eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a symmetric tridiagonal matrix using the divide and conquer method. The eigenvectors of a full or band complex Hermitian matrix can also be found if CHETRD or CHPTRD or CHBTRD has been used to reduce this matrix to tridiagonal form. This code makes very mild assumptions about floating point arithmetic. It will work on machines with a guard digit in add/subtract, or on those binary machines without guard digits which subtract like t...
 complib/cstein(3) -- compute the eigenvectors of a real symmetric tridiagonal matrix T corresponding to specified eigenvalues, usin
    CSTEIN computes the eigenvectors of a real symmetric tridiagonal matrix T corresponding to specified eigenvalues, using inverse iteration. The maximum number of iterations allowed for each eigenvector is specified by an internal parameter MAXITS (currently set to 5). Although the eigenvectors are real, they are stored in a complex array, which may be passed to CUNMTR or CUPMTR for back transformation to the eigenvectors of a complex Hermitian matrix which was reduced to tridiagonal form....
 complib/csteqr(3) -- compute all eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a symmetric tridiagonal matrix using the implicit QL
    CSTEQR computes all eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a symmetric tridiagonal matrix using the implicit QL or QR method. The eigenvectors of a full or band complex Hermitian matrix can also be found if CHETRD or CHPTRD or CHBTRD has been used to reduce this matrix to tridiagonal form.
 complib/CSVDC(3) -- CSVDC is a subroutine to reduce a complex NxP matrix X by unitary transformations U and V to diagonal form. Th
    On Entry X COMPLEX(LDX,P), where LDX .GE. N. X contains the matrix whose singular value decomposition is to be computed. X is destroyed by CSVDC. LDX INTEGER. LDX is the leading dimension of the array X. N INTEGER. N is the number of columns of the matrix X. P INTEGER. P is the number of rows of the matrix X. LDU INTEGER. LDU is the leading dimension of the array U (see below). LDV INTEGER. LDV is the leading dimension of the array V (see below). WORK COMPLEX(N). WORK is a scratch array. JOB INT...
 complib/csycon(3) -- estimate the reciprocal of the condition number (in the 1-norm) of a complex symmetric matrix A using the fact
    CSYCON estimates the reciprocal of the condition number (in the 1-norm) of a complex symmetric matrix A using the factorization A = U*D*U**T or A = L*D*L**T computed by CSYTRF. An estimate is obtained for norm(inv(A)), and the reciprocal of the condition number is computed as RCOND = 1 / (ANORM * norm(inv(A))).
 complib/csyr(3) -- perform the symmetric rank 1 operation A := alpha*x*( x' ) + A,
    CSYR performs the symmetric rank 1 operation where alpha is a complex scalar, x is an n element vector and A is an n by n symmetric matrix.
 complib/csyrfs(3) -- improve the computed solution to a system of linear equations when the coefficient matrix is symmetric indefin
    CSYRFS improves the computed solution to a system of linear equations when the coefficient matrix is symmetric indefinite, and provides error bounds and backward error estimates for the solution.
 complib/csysv(3) -- X = B,
    CSYSV computes the solution to a complex system of linear equations A * X = B, where A is an N-by-N symmetric matrix and X and B are Nby-NRHS matrices. The diagonal pivoting method is used to factor A as A = U * D * U**T, if UPLO = 'U', or A = L * D * L**T, if UPLO = 'L', where U (or L) is a product of permutation and unit upper (lower) triangular matrices, and D is symmetric and block diagonal with 1-by-1 and 2-by-2 diagonal blocks. The factored form of A is then used to solve the system of...
 complib/csysvx(3) -- to a complex system of linear equations A * X = B,
    CSYSVX uses the diagonal pivoting factorization to compute the solution to a complex system of linear equations A * X = B, where A is an N-by-N symmetric matrix and X and B are N-by-NRHS matrices. Error bounds on the solution and a condition estimate are also provided.
 complib/csytf2(3) -- the Bunch-Kaufman diagonal pivoting method
    CSYTF2 computes the factorization of a complex symmetric matrix A using the Bunch-Kaufman diagonal pivoting method: A = U*D*U' or A = L*D*L' where U (or L) is a product of permutation and unit upper (lower) triangular matrices, U' is the transpose of U, and D is symmetric and block diagonal with 1-by-1 and 2-by-2 diagonal blocks. This is the unblocked version of the algorithm, calling Level 2 BLAS....
 complib/csytrf(3) -- the Bunch-Kaufman diagonal pivoting method
    CSYTRF computes the factorization of a complex symmetric matrix A using the Bunch-Kaufman diagonal pivoting method. The form of the factorization is A = U*D*U**T or A = L*D*L**T where U (or L) is a product of permutation and unit upper (lower) triangular matrices, and D is symmetric and block diagonal with with 1- by-1 and 2-by-2 diagonal blocks. This is the blocked version of the algorithm, calling Level 3 BLAS....
 complib/csytri(3) -- compute the inverse of a complex symmetric indefinite matrix A using the factorization A = U*D*U**T or A = L*D
    CSYTRI computes the inverse of a complex symmetric indefinite matrix A using the factorization A = U*D*U**T or A = L*D*L**T computed by CSYTRF.
 complib/csytrs(3) -- solve a system of linear equations A*X = B with a complex symmetric matrix A using the factorization A = U*D*U
    CSYTRS solves a system of linear equations A*X = B with a complex symmetric matrix A using the factorization A = U*D*U**T or A = L*D*L**T computed by CSYTRF.
 complib/ctbcon(3) -- band matrix A, in either the 1-norm or the infinity-norm
    CTBCON estimates the reciprocal of the condition number of a triangular band matrix A, in either the 1-norm or the infinity-norm. The norm of A is computed and an estimate is obtained for norm(inv(A)), then the reciprocal of the condition number is computed as RCOND = 1 / ( norm(A) * norm(inv(A)) ).
 complib/ctbrfs(3) -- provide error bounds and backward error estimates for the solution to a system of linear equations with a tria
    CTBRFS provides error bounds and backward error estimates for the solution to a system of linear equations with a triangular band coefficient matrix. The solution matrix X must be computed by CTBTRS or some other means before entering this routine. CTBRFS does not do iterative refinement because doing so cannot improve the backward error.
 complib/ctbtrs(3) -- or A**H * X = B,
    CTBTRS solves a triangular system of the form where A is a triangular band matrix of order N, and B is an N-by-NRHS matrix. A check is made to verify that A is nonsingular.
 ctermid(3s) -- generate file name for terminal
    ctermid generates the path name of the controlling terminal for the current process, and stores it in a string. If s is a NULL pointer, the string is stored in an internal static area, the contents of which are overwritten at the next call to ctermid, and the address of which is returned. Otherwise, s is assumed to point to a character array of at least L_ctermid elements; the path name is placed in this array and the ...
 complib/ctgevc(3) -- compute some or all of the right and/or left generalized eigenvectors of a pair of complex upper triangular ma
    CTGEVC computes some or all of the right and/or left generalized eigenvectors of a pair of complex upper triangular matrices (A,B). The right generalized eigenvector x and the left generalized eigenvector y of (A,B) corresponding to a generalized eigenvalue w are defined by: (A - wB) * x = 0 and y**H * (A - wB) = 0 where y**H denotes the conjugate tranpose of y. If an eigenvalue w is determined by zero diagonal elements of both A and B, a unit vector is returned as the corresponding eigenvector....
 complib/ctgsja(3) -- compute the generalized singular value decomposition (GSVD) of two complex upper triangular (or trapezoidal) m
    CTGSJA computes the generalized singular value decomposition (GSVD) of two complex upper triangular (or trapezoidal) matrices A and B. On entry, it is assumed that matrices A and B have the following forms, which may be obtained by the preprocessing subroutine CGGSVP from a general M-by-N matrix A and P-by-N matrix B: N-K-L K L A = K ( 0 A12 A13 ) if M-K-L >= 0; L ( 0 0 A23 ) M-K-L ( 0 0 0 ) N-K-L K L A = K ( 0 A12 A13 ) if M-K-L < 0; M-K ( 0 0 A23 ) N-K-L K L B = L ( 0 0 B13 ) P-L ( 0 0 0 ) whe...
 ctime(3c) -- convert date and time to string
    ctime, ctime_r, localtime, localtime_r, gmtime, and gmtime_r accept arguments of type time_t, pointed to by clock, representing the time in seconds since 00:00:00 UTC, January 1, 1970. ctime and ctime_r return a pointer to a 26-character string as shown below. Time zone and daylight savings corrections are ...
 complib/ctpcon(3) -- triangular matrix A, in either the 1-norm or the infinity-norm
    CTPCON estimates the reciprocal of the condition number of a packed triangular matrix A, in either the 1-norm or the infinity-norm. The norm of A is computed and an estimate is obtained for norm(inv(A)), then the reciprocal of the condition number is computed as RCOND = 1 / ( norm(A) * norm(inv(A)) ).
 complib/ctprfs(3) -- provide error bounds and backward error estimates for the solution to a system of linear equations with a tria
    CTPRFS provides error bounds and backward error estimates for the solution to a system of linear equations with a triangular packed coefficient matrix. The solution matrix X must be computed by CTPTRS or some other means before entering this routine. CTPRFS does not do iterative refinement because doing so cannot improve the backward error.
 complib/ctptri(3) -- compute the inverse of a complex upper or lower triangular matrix A stored in packed format
    CTPTRI computes the inverse of a complex upper or lower triangular matrix A stored in packed format.
 complib/ctptrs(3) -- or A**H * X = B,
    CTPTRS solves a triangular system of the form where A is a triangular matrix of order N stored in packed format, and B is an N-by-NRHS matrix. A check is made to verify that A is nonsingular.
 complib/CTRCO(3) -- CTRCO estimates the condition of a complex triangular matrix.
    On Entry T COMPLEX(LDT,N) T contains the triangular matrix. The zero elements of the matrix are not referenced, and the corresponding elements of the array can be used to store other information. LDT INTEGER LDT is the leading dimension of the array T. N INTEGER N is the order of the system. JOB INTEGER = 0 T is lower triangular. = nonzero T is upper triangular. On Return RCOND REAL an estimate of the reciprocal condition of T . For the system T*X = B , relative perturbations in T and B of size ...
 complib/ctrcon(3) -- matrix A, in either the 1-norm or the infinity-norm
    CTRCON estimates the reciprocal of the condition number of a triangular matrix A, in either the 1-norm or the infinity-norm. The norm of A is computed and an estimate is obtained for norm(inv(A)), then the reciprocal of the condition number is computed as RCOND = 1 / ( norm(A) * norm(inv(A)) ).
 complib/CTRDI(3) -- CTRDI computes the determinant and inverse of a complex triangular matrix.
    On Entry T COMPLEX(LDT,N) T contains the triangular matrix. The zero elements of the matrix are not referenced, and the corresponding elements of the array can be used to store other information. LDT INTEGER LDT is the leading dimension of the array T. N INTEGER N is the order of the system. JOB INTEGER = 010 no det, inverse of lower triangular. = 011 no det, inverse of upper triangular. = 100 det, no inverse. = 110 det, inverse of lower triangular. = 111 det, inverse of upper triangular. On Ret...
 complib/ctrevc(3) -- compute some or all of the right and/or left eigenvectors of a complex upper triangular matrix T
    CTREVC computes some or all of the right and/or left eigenvectors of a complex upper triangular matrix T. The right eigenvector x and the left eigenvector y of T corresponding to an eigenvalue w are defined by: T*x = w*x, y'*T = w*y' where y' denotes the conjugate transpose of the vector y. If all eigenvectors are requested, the routine may either return the matrices X and/or Y of right or left eigenvectors of T, or the products Q*X and/or Q*Y, where Q is an input unitary matrix. If T was obt...
 complib/ctrexc(3) -- reorder the Schur factorization of a complex matrix A = Q*T*Q**H, so that the diagonal element of T with row i
    CTREXC reorders the Schur factorization of a complex matrix A = Q*T*Q**H, so that the diagonal element of T with row index IFST is moved to row ILST. The Schur form T is reordered by a unitary similarity transformation Z**H*T*Z, and optionally the matrix Q of Schur vectors is updated by postmultplying it with Z.
 complib/ctrrfs(3) -- provide error bounds and backward error estimates for the solution to a system of linear equations with a tria
    CTRRFS provides error bounds and backward error estimates for the solution to a system of linear equations with a triangular coefficient matrix. The solution matrix X must be computed by CTRTRS or some other means before entering this routine. CTRRFS does not do iterative refinement because doing so cannot improve the backward error.
 complib/ctrsen(3) -- reorder the Schur factorization of a complex matrix A = Q*T*Q**H, so that a selected cluster of eigenvalues ap
    CTRSEN reorders the Schur factorization of a complex matrix A = Q*T*Q**H, so that a selected cluster of eigenvalues appears in the leading positions on the diagonal of the upper triangular matrix T, and the leading columns of Q form an orthonormal basis of the corresponding right invariant subspace. Optionally the routine computes the reciprocal condition numbers of the cluster of eigenvalues and/or the invariant subspace....
 complib/CTRSL(3) -- CTRSL solves systems of the form T * X = B or CTRANS(T) * X = B where T is a triangular matrix of order N. Her
    On Entry T COMPLEX(LDT,N) T contains the matrix of the system. The zero elements of the matrix are not referenced, and the corresponding elements of the array can be used to store other information. LDT INTEGER LDT is the leading dimension of the array T. N INTEGER N is the order of the system. B COMPLEX(N). B contains the right hand side of the system. JOB INTEGER JOB specifies what kind of system is to be solved. If JOB is 00 solve T*X = B, T lower triangular, 01 solve T*X = B, T upper triangu...
 complib/ctrsna(3) -- estimate reciprocal condition numbers for specified eigenvalues and/or right eigenvectors of a complex upper t
    CTRSNA estimates reciprocal condition numbers for specified eigenvalues and/or right eigenvectors of a complex upper triangular matrix T (or of any matrix Q*T*Q**H with Q unitary).
 complib/ctrsyl(3) -- solve the complex Sylvester matrix equation
    CTRSYL solves the complex Sylvester matrix equation: op(A)*X + X*op(B) = scale*C or op(A)*X - X*op(B) = scale*C, where op(A) = A or A**H, and A and B are both upper triangular. A is Mby-M and B is N-by-N; the right hand side C and the solution X are M-byN; and scale is an output scale factor, set <= 1 to avoid overflow in X.
 complib/ctrti2(3) -- compute the inverse of a complex upper or lower triangular matrix
    CTRTI2 computes the inverse of a complex upper or lower triangular matrix. This is the Level 2 BLAS version of the algorithm.
 complib/ctrtri(3) -- compute the inverse of a complex upper or lower triangular matrix A
    CTRTRI computes the inverse of a complex upper or lower triangular matrix A. This is the Level 3 BLAS version of the algorithm.
 complib/ctrtrs(3) -- or A**H * X = B,
    CTRTRS solves a triangular system of the form where A is a triangular matrix of order N, and B is an N-by-NRHS matrix. A check is made to verify that A is nonsingular.
 ctype(3c) -- character handling
    These macros classify character-coded integer values. Each is a predicate returning non-zero for true, zero for false. The behavior of these macros, except for isascii, is affected by the current locale [see setlocale(3C)]. To modify the behavior, change the LC_TYPE category in setlocale, that is, setlocale (LC_CTYPE, newlocale). In the C locale, or in a...
 complib/ctzrqf(3) -- reduce the M-by-N ( M<=N ) complex upper trapezoidal matrix A to upper triangular form by means of unitary tra
    CTZRQF reduces the M-by-N ( M<=N ) complex upper trapezoidal matrix A to upper triangular form by means of unitary transformations. The upper trapezoidal matrix A is factored as A = ( R 0 ) * Z, where Z is an N-by-N unitary matrix and R is an M-by-M upper triangular matrix.
 complib/cung2l(3) -- generate an m by n complex matrix Q with orthonormal columns,
    CUNG2L generates an m by n complex matrix Q with orthonormal columns, which is defined as the last n columns of a product of k elementary reflectors of order m Q = H(k) . . . H(2) H(1) as returned by CGEQLF.
 complib/cung2r(3) -- generate an m by n complex matrix Q with orthonormal columns,
    CUNG2R generates an m by n complex matrix Q with orthonormal columns, which is defined as the first n columns of a product of k elementary reflectors of order m Q = H(1) H(2) . . . H(k) as returned by CGEQRF.
 complib/cungbr(3) -- generate one of the complex unitary matrices Q or P**H determined by CGEBRD when reducing a complex matrix A t
    CUNGBR generates one of the complex unitary matrices Q or P**H determined by CGEBRD when reducing a complex matrix A to bidiagonal form: A = Q * B * P**H. Q and P**H are defined as products of elementary reflectors H(i) or G(i) respectively. If VECT = 'Q', A is assumed to have been an M-by-K matrix, and Q is of order M: if m >= k, Q = H(1) H(2) . . . H(k) and CUNGBR returns the first n columns of Q, where m >= n >= k; if m < k, Q = H(1) H(2) . . . H(m-1) and CUNGBR returns Q as an M-by-M matri...
 complib/cunghr(3) -- product of IHI-ILO elementary reflectors of order N, as returned by CGEHRD
    CUNGHR generates a complex unitary matrix Q which is defined as the product of IHI-ILO elementary reflectors of order N, as returned by CGEHRD: Q = H(ilo) H(ilo+1) . . . H(ihi-1).
 complib/cungl2(3) -- generate an m-by-n complex matrix Q with orthonormal rows,
    CUNGL2 generates an m-by-n complex matrix Q with orthonormal rows, which is defined as the first m rows of a product of k elementary reflectors of order n Q = H(k)' . . . H(2)' H(1)' as returned by CGELQF.
 complib/cunglq(3) -- generate an M-by-N complex matrix Q with orthonormal rows,
    CUNGLQ generates an M-by-N complex matrix Q with orthonormal rows, which is defined as the first M rows of a product of K elementary reflectors of order N Q = H(k)' . . . H(2)' H(1)' as returned by CGELQF.
 complib/cungql(3) -- generate an M-by-N complex matrix Q with orthonormal columns,
    CUNGQL generates an M-by-N complex matrix Q with orthonormal columns, which is defined as the last N columns of a product of K elementary reflectors of order M Q = H(k) . . . H(2) H(1) as returned by CGEQLF.
 complib/cungqr(3) -- generate an M-by-N complex matrix Q with orthonormal columns,
    CUNGQR generates an M-by-N complex matrix Q with orthonormal columns, which is defined as the first N columns of a product of K elementary reflectors of order M Q = H(1) H(2) . . . H(k) as returned by CGEQRF.
 complib/cungr2(3) -- generate an m by n complex matrix Q with orthonormal rows,
    CUNGR2 generates an m by n complex matrix Q with orthonormal rows, which is defined as the last m rows of a product of k elementary reflectors of order n Q = H(1)' H(2)' . . . H(k)' as returned by CGERQF.
 complib/cungrq(3) -- generate an M-by-N complex matrix Q with orthonormal rows,
    CUNGRQ generates an M-by-N complex matrix Q with orthonormal rows, which is defined as the last M rows of a product of K elementary reflectors of order N Q = H(1)' H(2)' . . . H(k)' as returned by CGERQF.
 complib/cungtr(3) -- product of n-1 elementary reflectors of order N, as returned by CHETRD
    CUNGTR generates a complex unitary matrix Q which is defined as the product of n-1 elementary reflectors of order N, as returned by CHETRD: if UPLO = 'U', Q = H(n-1) . . . H(2) H(1), if UPLO = 'L', Q = H(1) H(2) . . . H(n-1).
 complib/cunm2l(3) -- overwrite the general complex m-by-n matrix C with Q * C if SIDE = 'L' and TRANS = 'N', or Q'* C if SIDE = 'L'
    CUNM2L overwrites the general complex m-by-n matrix C with where Q is a complex unitary matrix defined as the product of k elementary reflectors Q = H(k) . . . H(2) H(1) as returned by CGEQLF. Q is of order m if SIDE = 'L' and of order n if SIDE = 'R'.
 complib/cunm2r(3) -- overwrite the general complex m-by-n matrix C with Q * C if SIDE = 'L' and TRANS = 'N', or Q'* C if SIDE = 'L'
    CUNM2R overwrites the general complex m-by-n matrix C with where Q is a complex unitary matrix defined as the product of k elementary reflectors Q = H(1) H(2) . . . H(k) as returned by CGEQRF. Q is of order m if SIDE = 'L' and of order n if SIDE = 'R'.
 complib/cunmbr(3) -- VECT = 'Q', CUNMBR overwrites the general complex M-by-N matrix C with SIDE = 'L' SIDE = 'R' TRANS = 'N'
    If VECT = 'Q', CUNMBR overwrites the general complex M-by-N matrix C with SIDE = 'L' SIDE = 'R' TRANS = 'N': Q * C C * Q TRANS = 'C': Q**H * C C * Q**H If VECT = 'P', CUNMBR overwrites the general complex M-by-N matrix C with SIDE = 'L' SIDE = 'R' TRANS = 'N': P * C C * P TRANS = 'C': P**H * C C * P**H Here Q and P**H are the unitary matrices determined by CGEBRD when reducing a complex matrix A to bidiagonal form: A = Q * B * P**H. Q and P**H are defined as products of eleme...
 complib/cunmhr(3) -- overwrite the general complex M-by-N matrix C with SIDE = 'L' SIDE = 'R' TRANS = 'N'
    CUNMHR overwrites the general complex M-by-N matrix C with TRANS = 'C': Q**H * C C * Q**H where Q is a complex unitary matrix of order nq, with nq = m if SIDE = 'L' and nq = n if SIDE = 'R'. Q is defined as the product of IHI-ILO elementary reflectors, as returned by CGEHRD: Q = H(ilo) H(ilo+1) . . . H(ihi-1).
 complib/cunml2(3) -- overwrite the general complex m-by-n matrix C with Q * C if SIDE = 'L' and TRANS = 'N', or Q'* C if SIDE = 'L'
    CUNML2 overwrites the general complex m-by-n matrix C with where Q is a complex unitary matrix defined as the product of k elementary reflectors Q = H(k)' . . . H(2)' H(1)' as returned by CGELQF. Q is of order m if SIDE = 'L' and of order n if SIDE = 'R'.
 complib/cunmlq(3) -- overwrite the general complex M-by-N matrix C with SIDE = 'L' SIDE = 'R' TRANS = 'N'
    CUNMLQ overwrites the general complex M-by-N matrix C with TRANS = 'C': Q**H * C C * Q**H where Q is a complex unitary matrix defined as the product of k elementary reflectors Q = H(k)' . . . H(2)' H(1)' as returned by CGELQF. Q is of order M if SIDE = 'L' and of order N if SIDE = 'R'.
 complib/cunmql(3) -- overwrite the general complex M-by-N matrix C with SIDE = 'L' SIDE = 'R' TRANS = 'N'
    CUNMQL overwrites the general complex M-by-N matrix C with TRANS = 'C': Q**H * C C * Q**H where Q is a complex unitary matrix defined as the product of k elementary reflectors Q = H(k) . . . H(2) H(1) as returned by CGEQLF. Q is of order M if SIDE = 'L' and of order N if SIDE = 'R'.
 complib/cunmqr(3) -- overwrite the general complex M-by-N matrix C with SIDE = 'L' SIDE = 'R' TRANS = 'N'
    CUNMQR overwrites the general complex M-by-N matrix C with TRANS = 'C': Q**H * C C * Q**H where Q is a complex unitary matrix defined as the product of k elementary reflectors Q = H(1) H(2) . . . H(k) as returned by CGEQRF. Q is of order M if SIDE = 'L' and of order N if SIDE = 'R'.
 complib/cunmr2(3) -- overwrite the general complex m-by-n matrix C with Q * C if SIDE = 'L' and TRANS = 'N', or Q'* C if SIDE = 'L'
    CUNMR2 overwrites the general complex m-by-n matrix C with where Q is a complex unitary matrix defined as the product of k elementary reflectors Q = H(1)' H(2)' . . . H(k)' as returned by CGERQF. Q is of order m if SIDE = 'L' and of order n if SIDE = 'R'.
 complib/cunmrq(3) -- overwrite the general complex M-by-N matrix C with SIDE = 'L' SIDE = 'R' TRANS = 'N'
    CUNMRQ overwrites the general complex M-by-N matrix C with TRANS = 'C': Q**H * C C * Q**H where Q is a complex unitary matrix defined as the product of k elementary reflectors Q = H(1)' H(2)' . . . H(k)' as returned by CGERQF. Q is of order M if SIDE = 'L' and of order N if SIDE = 'R'.
 complib/cunmtr(3) -- overwrite the general complex M-by-N matrix C with SIDE = 'L' SIDE = 'R' TRANS = 'N'
    CUNMTR overwrites the general complex M-by-N matrix C with TRANS = 'C': Q**H * C C * Q**H where Q is a complex unitary matrix of order nq, with nq = m if SIDE = 'L' and nq = n if SIDE = 'R'. Q is defined as the product of nq-1 elementary reflectors, as returned by CHETRD: if UPLO = 'U', Q = H(nq-1) . . . H(2) H(1); if UPLO = 'L', Q = H(1) H(2) . . . H(nq-1).
 complib/cupgtr(3) -- product of n-1 elementary reflectors H(i) of order n, as returned by CHPTRD using packed storage
    CUPGTR generates a complex unitary matrix Q which is defined as the product of n-1 elementary reflectors H(i) of order n, as returned by CHPTRD using packed storage: if UPLO = 'U', Q = H(n-1) . . . H(2) H(1), if UPLO = 'L', Q = H(1) H(2) . . . H(n-1).
 complib/cupmtr(3) -- overwrite the general complex M-by-N matrix C with SIDE = 'L' SIDE = 'R' TRANS = 'N'
    CUPMTR overwrites the general complex M-by-N matrix C with TRANS = 'C': Q**H * C C * Q**H where Q is a complex unitary matrix of order nq, with nq = m if SIDE = 'L' and nq = n if SIDE = 'R'. Q is defined as the product of nq-1 elementary reflectors, as returned by CHPTRD using packed storage: if UPLO = 'U', Q = H(nq-1) . . . H(2) H(1); if UPLO = 'L', Q = H(1) H(2) . . . H(nq-1).
 standard/curorigin(3) -- sets the origin of a cursor
    n expects an index into the cursor table created by defcursor. xorign expects the x distance of the origin relative to the lower left corner of the cursor. yorign expects the y distance of the origin relative to the lower left corner of the cursor.
 curses(3x) -- CRT screen handling and optimization package
    The curses library routines give the user a terminal-independent method of updating character screens with reasonable optimization. A program using these routines must be compiled with the -lcurses option of cc. The curses package allows: overall screen, window and pad manipulation; output to windows and pads; reading terminal input; control over terminal and curses input and output options; environment query rou...
 standard/curson(3) -- control cursor visibility by window
    none
 standard/curstype(3) -- defines the type and/or size of cursor
    type expects one of five values that describe the cursor: C16X1: the default, a 16x16 bitmap cursor of no more than one color. C16X2: a 16x16 bitmap cursor of no more than three colors. C32X1: a 32x32 bitmap cursor of no more than one color. C32X2: a 32x32 bitmap cursor of no more than three colors. CCROSS: a cross-hair cursor.
 curs_addch(3x) -- add a character (with attributes) to a curses window and advance cursor
    The addch, waddch, mvaddch, and mvwaddch routines put the character ch into the window at the current cursor position of the window and advance the position of the window cursor. Their function is similar to that of putchar. At the right margin, an automatic newline is performed. At the bottom of the scrolling region, if scrollok is enabled, the scrolling region is scrolled ...
 curs_addchst(3x) -- add string of characters (and attributes) to a curses window
    All of these routines copy chstr directly into the window image structure starting at the current cursor position. The four routines with n as the last argument copy at most n elements, but no more than will fit on the line. If n=-1 then the whole string is copied, to the maximum number that fit on the line. The position of the window cursor is not advanced. These routines work faster than waddnstr because they merely copy chstr into the window image structure. O...
 curs_addstr(3x) -- add a string of characters to a curses window and advance cursor
    All of these routines write all the characters of the null-terminated character string str on the given window. The effect is similar to calling waddch once for each character in the string. The four routines with n as the last argument write at most n characters. If n is negative, then the entire string will be added.
 curs_addwch(3x) -- add a wchar_t character (with attributes) to a curses window and advance c
    The addwch, waddwch, mvaddwch, and mvwaddwch routines put the character wch, holding a wchar_t character, into the window at the current cursor position of the window and advance the position of the window cursor. Their function is similar to that of putwchar in the C multibyte library. At the right margin, an automatic newline is performed. At the bottom of the scr...
 curs_addwchs(3x) -- add string of wchar_t characters (and attributes) to a curses window
    All of these routines copy wchstr, which points to a string of wchar_t characters, directly into the window image structure starting at the current cursor position. The four routines with n as the last argument copy at most n elements, but no more than will fit on the line. If n=-1 then the whole string is copied, to the maximum number that fit on the line. The position of the window cursor is not advanced. These routines work faster than waddnws
 curs_addwstr(3x) -- add a string of wchar_t characters to a curses window and advance cursor
    All of these routines write all the characters of the null-terminated wchar_t character string str on the given window. The effect is similar to calling waddwch once for each wchar_t character in the string. The four routines with n as the last argument write at most n wchar_t characters. If n is negative, then the entire string will be added....
 curs_attr(3x) -- curses character and window attribute control routines
    All of these routines manipulate the current attributes of the named window. The current attributes of a window are applied to all characters that are written into the window with waddch, waddstr and wprintw. Attributes are a property of the character, and move with the character through any scrolling and insert/delete line/character operations. To the extent possible on the particular terminal, they are displayed as the graphic renditi...
 curs_beep(3x) -- curses bell and screen flash routines
    The beep and flash routines are used to signal the terminal user. The routine beep sounds the audible alarm on the terminal, if possible; if that is not possible, it flashes the screen (visible bell), if that is possible. The routine flash flashes the screen, and if that is not possible, sounds the audible signal. If neither signal is possible, nothing happens. Nearly all terminals have an audible signal (bell or beep), but only some can flas...
 curs_bkgd(3x) -- curses window background manipulation routines
    The bkgdset and wbkgdset routines manipulate the background of the named window. Background is a chtype consisting of any combination of attributes and a character. The attribute part of the background is combined (ORed) with all non-blank characters that are written into the window with waddch. Both the character and attribute parts of the background are combined with the blank characters. The background becomes a ...
 curs_border(3x) -- create curses borders, horizontal and vertical lines
    With the border, wborder and box routines, a border is drawn around the edges of the window. The argument ls is a character and attributes used for the left side of the border, rs - right side, ts - top side, bs - bottom side, tl - top left-hand corner, tr - top right-hand corner, bl - bottom left-hand corner, and br - bottom right-hand corner. If any of these arguments is zero, then the following default values (defined in curses...
 curs_clear(3x) -- clear all or part of a curses window
    The erase and werase routines copy blanks to every position in the window. The clear and wclear routines are like erase and werase, but they also call clearok, so that the screen is cleared completely on the next call to wrefresh for that window and repainted from scratch. The clrtobot and wclrtobot rout...
 curs_color(3x) -- curses color manipulation routines
    Overview curses provides routines that manipulate color on color alphanumeric terminals. To use these routines start_color must be called, usually right after initscr. Colors are always used in pairs (referred to as color-pairs). A color-pair consists of a foreground color (for characters) and a background color (for the field on which the characters are displayed). A programmer initializes a color-pair with the routine i...
 curs_delch(3x) -- delete character under cursor in a curses window
    With these routines the character under the cursor in the window is deleted; all characters to the right of the cursor on the same line are moved to the left one position and the last character on the line is filled with a blank. The cursor position does not change (after moving to y, x, if specified). (This does not imply use of the hardware delete character feature.)
 curs_delln(3x) -- delete and insert lines in a curses window
    With the deleteln and wdeleteln routines, the line under the cursor in the window is deleted; all lines below the current line are moved up one line. The bottom line of the window is cleared. The cursor position does not change. (This does not imply use of a hardware delete line feature.) With the insdelln and winsdelln routines, for positive n, insert n lines into the specified window above the...
 curs_getch(3x) -- get (or push back) characters from curses terminal keyboard
    The getch, wgetch, mvgetch, and mvwgetch routines read a character from the terminal associated with the window. In no-delay mode, if no input is waiting, the value ERR is returned. In delay mode, the program waits until the system passes text through to the program. Depending on the setting of cbreak, this is after one character (cbreak mode), or after the first newline (
 curs_getstr(3x) -- get character strings from curses terminal keyboard
    The effect of getstr is as though a series of calls to getch were made, until a newline and carriage return is received. The resulting value is placed in the area pointed to by the character pointer str. wgetnstr reads at most n characters, thus preventing a possible overflow of the input buffer. The user's erase and kill characters are interpreted, as well as any special keys (such as function keys, ``home'' key, ``clear'' key, and s...
 curs_getwch(3x) -- get (or push back) wchar_t characters from curses terminal keyboard
    The getwch, wgetwch, mvgetwch, and mvwgetwch routines read an EUC character from the terminal associated with the window, transform it into a wchar_t character, and return a wchar_t character. In no-delay mode, if no input is waiting, the value ERR is returned. In delay mode, the program waits until the system passes text through to the program. Depending on the ...
 curs_getwstr(3x) -- get wchar_t character strings from curses terminal keyboard
    The effect of getwstr is as though a series of calls to getwch were made, until a newline and carriage return is received. The resulting value is placed in the area pointed to by the wchar_t pointer str. getnwstr reads at most n wchar_t characters, thus preventing a possible overflow of the input buffer. The user's erase and kill characters are interpreted, as well as any special keys (such as fun...
 curs_getyx(3x) -- get curses cursor and window coordinates
    With the getyx macro, the cursor position of the window is placed in the two integer variables y and x. With the getparyx macro, if win is a subwindow, the beginning coordinates of the subwindow relative to the parent window are placed into two integer variables, y and x. Otherwise, -1 is placed into y and x. Like getyx, the getbegyx and getmaxyx macros store the current beginning coordina...
 curs_inch(3x) -- get a character and its attributes from a curses window
    These routines return the character, of type chtype, at the current position in the named window. If any attributes are set for that position, their values are OR-ed into the value returned. Constants defined in curses.h can be used with the & (logical AND) operator to extract the character or attributes alone.
 curs_inchstr(3x) -- get a string of characters (and attributes) from a curses window
    These routines return a string of type chtype, starting at the current cursor position in the named window and ending at the right margin of the window. The four functions with n as the last argument, return the string at most n characters long. Constants defined in curses.h can be used with the & (logical AND) operator to extract the character or the attribute alone from any position in the chstr [see curs_inch(3X)]....
 curs_initscr(3x) -- curses screen initialization and manipulation routines
    initscr is almost always the first routine that should be called (the exceptions are slk_init, filter, ripoffline, use_env and, for multipleterminal applications, newterm.) This determines the terminal type and initializes all curses data structures. initscr also causes the first call to refresh to clear the s...
 curs_inopts(3x) -- curses terminal input option control routines
    The cbreak and nocbreak routines put the terminal into and out of cbreak mode, respectively. In this mode, characters typed by the user are immediately available to the program, and erase/kill character-processing is not performed. When out of this mode, the tty driver buffers the typed characters until a newline or carriage return is typed. Interrupt and flow control characters are unaffected by this mode. Initially the terminal may or...
 curs_insch(3x) -- insert a character before the character under the cursor in a curses window
    These routines insert the character ch before the character under the cursor. All characters to the right of the cursor are moved one space to the right, with the possibility of the rightmost character on the line being lost. The cursor position does not change (after moving to y, x, if specified). (This does not imply use of the hardware insert character feature.)
 curs_insstr(3x) -- insert string before character under the cursor in a curses window
    These routines insert a character string (as many characters as will fit on the line) before the character under the cursor. All characters to the right of the cursor are moved to the right, with the possibility of the rightmost characters on the line being lost. The cursor position does not change (after moving to y, x, if specified). (This does not imply use of the hardware insert character feature.) The four routines with n as the last argument insert at most n characters. If n<=0, then the e...
 curs_instr(3x) -- get a string of characters from a curses window
    These routines return the string of characters in str starting at the current cursor position in the named window and ending at the right margin of the window. Attributes are stripped from the characters. The four functions with n as the last argument return the string at most n characters long.
 curs_inswch(3x) -- insert a wchar_t character before the character under the cursor in a curse
    These routines insert the character wch, holding a wchar_t character, before the character under the cursor. All characters to the right of the cursor are moved one space to the right, with the possibility of the rightmost character on the line being lost. The cursor position does not change (after moving to y, x, if specified). (This does not imply use of the hardware insert character feature.)...
 curs_inswstr(3x) -- insert wchar_t string before character under the cursor in a curses window
    These routines insert a wchar_t character string (as many wchar_t characters as will fit on the line) before the character under the cursor. All characters to the right of the cursor are moved to the right, with the possibility of the rightmost characters on the line being lost. The cursor position does not change (after moving to y, x, if specified). (This does not imply use of the hardware insert character feature.) The four routines with n as the last argum...
 curs_inwch(3x) -- get a wchar_t character and its attributes from a curses window
    These routines return the wchar_t character, of type chtype, at the current position in the named window. If any attributes are set for that position, their values are OR-ed into the value returned. Constants defined in <curses.h> can be used with the & (logical AND) operator to extract the character or attributes alone.
 curs_inwchs(3x) -- get a string of wchar_t characters (and attributes) from a curses window
    These routines return a string of type chtype, holding wchar_t characters, starting at the current cursor position in the named window and ending at the right margin of the window. The four functions with n as the last argument, return the string at most n wchar_t characters long. Constants defined in <curses.h> can be used with the & (logical AND) operator to extract the wchar_t character or...
 curs_inwstr(3x) -- get a string of wchar_t characters from a curses window
    These routines return the string of wchar_t characters in str starting at the current cursor position in the named window and ending at the right margin of the window. Attributes are stripped from the characters. The four functions with n as the last argument return the string at most n wchar_t characters long.
 curs_kernel(3x) -- low-level curses routines
    The following routines give low-level access to various curses functionality. Theses routines typically are used inside library routines. The def_prog_mode and def_shell_mode routines save the current terminal modes as the "program" (in curses) or "shell" (not in curses) state for use by the reset_prog_mode and reset_...
 curs_move(3x) -- move curses window cursor
    With these routines, the cursor associated with the window is moved to line y and column x. This routine does not move the physical cursor of the terminal until refresh is called. The position specified is relative to the upper left-hand corner of the window, which is (0,0).
 curs_outopts(3x) -- curses terminal output option control routines
    These routines set options that deal with output within curses. All options are initially FALSE, unless otherwise stated. It is not necessary to turn these options off before calling endwin. With the clearok routine, if enabled (bf is TRUE), the next call to wrefresh with this window will clear the screen completely and redraw the entire screen from scratch. This is useful when the content...
 curs_overlay(3x) -- overlap and manipulate overlapped curses windows
    The overlay and overwrite routines overlay srcwin on top of dstwin. scrwin and dstwin are not required to be the same size; only text where the two windows overlap is copied. The difference is that overlay is non-destructive (blanks are not copied) whereas overwrite is destructive. The copywin routine provides a finer granularity of control over the overlay an...
 curs_pad(3x) -- create and display curses pads
    The newpad routine creates and returns a pointer to a new pad data structure with the given number of lines, nlines, and columns, ncols. A pad is like a window, except that it is not necessarily associated with a viewable part of the screen. Automatic refreshes of pads (e.g., from scrolling or echoing of input) do not occur. It is not legal to call wrefresh with a pad as an argument; the routines prefresh or pnout
 curs_printw(3x) -- print formatted output in curses windows
    The printw, wprintw, mvprintw and mvwprintw routines are analogous to printf [see printf(3S)]. In effect, the string that would be output by printf is output instead as though waddstr were used on the given window. The vwprintw routine is analogous to vprintf [see vprintf...
 curs_refresh(3x) -- refresh curses windows and lines
    The refresh and wrefresh routines (or wnoutrefresh and doupdate) must be called to get any output on the terminal, as other routines merely manipulate data structures. The routine wrefresh copies the named window to the physical terminal screen, taking into account what is already there in order to do optimizations. The refresh routine is the same,...
 curs_scanw(3x) -- convert formatted input from a curses widow
    The scanw, wscanw and mvscanw routines correspond to scanf [see scanf(3S)]. The effect of these routines is as though wgetstr were called on the window, and the resulting line used as input for the scan. Fields which do not map to a variable in the fmt field are lost. The vwscanw routine is similar to vwprintw in that it performs a wsca...
 curs_scroll(3x) -- scroll a curses window
    With the scroll routine, the window is scrolled up one line. This involves moving the lines in the window data structure. As an optimization, if the scrolling region of the window is the entire screen, the physical screen is scrolled at the same time. With the scrl and wscrl routines, for positive n scroll the window up n lines (line i+n becomes i); otherwise scroll the window down n lines. This involves moving the lines in the window character image ...
 curs_scr_dmp(3x) -- read (write) a curses screen from (to) a file
    With the scr_dump routine, the current contents of the virtual screen are written to the file filename. With the scr_restore routine, the virtual screen is set to the contents of filename, which must have been written using scr_dump. The next call to doupdate restores the screen to the way it looked in the dump file. With the scr_init routine, the contents of filename are read in ...
 curs_slk(3x) -- curses soft label routines
    curses manipulates the set of soft function-key labels that exist on many terminals. For those terminals that do not have soft labels, curses takes over the bottom line of stdscr, reducing the size of stdscr and the variable LINES. curses standardizes on eight labels of up to eight characters each. To use soft labels, the slk_init routine must be called before in...
 curs_termatt(3x) -- curses environment query routines
    The baudrate routine returns the output speed of the terminal. The number returned is in bits per second, for example 9600, and is an integer. With the erasechar routine, the user's current erase character is returned. The has_ic routine is true if the terminal has insert- and deletecharacter capabilities. The has_il routine is true if the terminal has insert- and delete-line capabilities, or can simula...
 curs_termcap(3x) -- curses interfaces (emulated) to the termcap library
    These routines are included as a conversion aid for programs that use the termcap library. Their parameters are the same and the routines are emulated using the terminfo database. These routines are supported at Level 2 and should not be used in new applications. The tgetent routine looks up the termcap entry for name. The emulation ignores the buffer pointer bp. The tgetflag routine gets the boolean entry for id. The tgetnum rout...
 curs_termin(3x) -- curses interfaces to terminfo database
    These low-level routines must be called by programs that have to deal directly with the terminfo database to handle certain terminal capabilities, such as programming function keys. For all other functionality, curses routines are more suitable and their use is recommended. Initially, setupterm should be called. Note that setupterm is automatically called by initscr and ne
 curs_touch(3x) -- curses refresh control routines
    The touchwin and touchline routines throw away all optimization information about which parts of the window have been touched, by pretending that the entire window has been drawn on. This is sometimes necessary when using overlapping windows, since a change to one window affects the other window, but the records of which lines have been changed in the other window do not reflect the change. The routine touchline only p...
 curs_util(3x) -- miscellaneous curses utility routines
    The unctrl macro expands to a character string which is a printable representation of the character c. Control characters are displayed in the ^X notation. Printing characters are displayed as is. With the keyname routine, a character string corresponding to the key c is returned. The filter routine, if used, is called before initscr or newterm are called. It makes curses think...
 curs_window(3x) -- create curses windows
    The newwin routine creates and returns a pointer to a new window with the given number of lines, nlines, and columns, ncols. The upper left-hand corner of the window is at line begin_y, column begin_x. If either nlines or ncols is zero, they default to LINES - begin_y and COLS - begin_x. A new full-screen window is created by calling newwin(0,0,0,0). The delwin routine deletes the na...
 standard/curvebasis(3) -- selects a basis matrix used to draw curves
    basid expects the basis identifier of the basis matrix you want to use when drawing a curve. (You must have previously called defbasis to assign a basis identifier to a basis matrix.)
 standard/curveit(3) -- draws a curve segment
    iterationcount expects the number of times you want to iterate
 standard/curveprecision(3) -- sets number of line segments used to draw a curve segment
    nsegments expects the number of line segments to use when drawing a curve segment.
 cuserid(3s) -- get character login name of the user
    cuserid generates a character-string representation of the login name that the owner of the current process is logged in under. If s is a NULL pointer, this representation is generated in an internal static area, the address of which is returned. Otherwise, s is assumed to point to an array of at least L_cuserid characters; the representation is left in this array. The constant L_cuserid is defined in the st
 f90/cvmg(3) -- Conditional vector merge functions
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 perl5/Cwd(3) -- get pathname of current working directory
    The getcwd() function re-implements the getcw ) functions in Perl. The fastcwd() function looks the same as getcwd(), but runs faster. It's also more dangerous because it might conceivably chdir() you out of a directory that it can't chdir() you back into. If fastcwd encounters a problem it will return undef but will probably leave you in a different directory. For a measure of extra security, if everything appears to have worked, the fastcwd() function will check that it leaves you in the sam...
 standard/cyclemap(3) -- cycles between color maps at a specified rate
    duration expects the number of vertical traces before switching to the map named by nxtmap. map expects the number of the map to use before completing the number of vertical sweeps specified by duration. nxtmap expects the number of the map to use after completing the number of vertical sweeps specified by duration.
 standard/czclear(3) -- clears the color bitplanes and the z-buffer simultaneously
    cval expects the color to which you want to clear the color bitplanes. zval expects the depth value to which you want to clear the z-buffer.
 daemonize(3) -- make a process into a daemon
    The _daemonize function does the common work needed ``to put a function into the background,'' or to make it into a ``daemon.'' That generally includes forking a new process, closing most files, and releasing the controlling tty. If flags & _DF_NOFORK is 0, then a new process in a new session is started. Debugging is often easier with flags set to contain _DF_NOFORK. If flags & _DF_NOCHDIR is 0, then the current working directory is changed to /. Otherwise, the current working directory is u...
 datapipe(3x) -- 0datapipe: dpipeCreate, dpipeDestroy, dpipeTransfer, dpipeReset, dpipeFlush- data pipe operations.
    Data pipes are dynamic connections between two hardware devices that support peer-to-peer data transfers. These connections are created by an application to process a data stream from a source device to a sink device. The purpose is to have minimum system impact during I/O operations. dpipeCreate creates a data pipe between two file descriptors: src_fd is the source file descriptor, and sink_fd is the sink file descriptor. Either file descriptor can refer to a regular file, a special device file...
 f90/date(3) -- Returns the current date
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/date_and_time(3) -- Returns data on the real-time clock and date
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 complib/dbdsqr(3) -- compute the singular value decomposition (SVD) of a real N-by-N (upper or lower) bidiagonal matrix B
    DBDSQR computes the singular value decomposition (SVD) of a real N-by-N (upper or lower) bidiagonal matrix B: B = Q * S * P' (P' denotes the transpose of P), where S is a diagonal matrix with non-negative diagonal elements (the singular values of B), and Q and P are orthogonal matrices. The routine computes S, and optionally computes U * Q, P' * VT, or Q' * C, for given real input matrices U, VT, and C. See "Computing Small Singular Values of Bidiagonal Matrices With Guaranteed High Relativ...
 f90/dble(3) -- explicit FORTRAN type conversion
    These functions perform conversion from one data type to another. The function int converts to integer from its integer, real*4, double precision, real*16, complex, double complex, or complex*32 argument. If the argument is real, integer, real*4, double precision, or real*16 int returns the integer whose magnitude is the largest integer that does not exceed the magnitude of the argument and whose sign is the same as the sign of the argument (i.e. truncation). For complex the above rule is applie...
 dbm(3c) -- data base subroutines
    Note: the dbm library has been superseded by ndbm(3B), and is now implemented using ndbm. These functions maintain key/content pairs in a data base. The dbm functions will handle very large (a billion blocks) databases and will access a keyed item in one or two file system accesses. The dbm64 routines are identical to their dbm counterparts except that they can be used to operate on data bases larger than 2 Gigabytes. Page 1 DBM(3B) DBM(3B) Keys and contents are described by the datum typedef. A...
 dbopen(3) -- database access methods
    Dbopen is the library interface to database files. The supported file formats are btree, hashed and UNIX file oriented. The btree format is a representation of a sorted, balanced tree structure. The hashed format is an extensible, dynamic hashing scheme. The flat-file format is a byte stream file with fixed or variable length records. The formats and file format specific information are described in detail in their respective manual pages btree(3), hash(3) and recno(3). Dbopen opens file for rea...
 standard/dbtext(3) -- sets the dial and button box text display
    str expects a pointer to a text string of no more than eight characters: digits, spaces, and uppercase letters only.
 perl5/DB_File(3) -- Perl5 access to Berkeley DB version 1.x
    DB_File is a module which allows Perl programs to make use of the facilities provided by Berkeley DB version 1.x (if you have a newer version of DB, see the section on Using DB_File with Berkeley DB version 2). It is assumed that you have a copy of the Berkeley DB manual pages at hand when reading this documentation. The interface defined here mirrors the Berkeley DB interface closely. Berkeley DB is a C library which provides a consistent interface to a number of database formats. DB_File provi...
 complib/DCHDC(3) -- DCHDC computes the Cholesky decomposition of a positive definite matrix. A pivoting option allows the user to
    On Entry A DOUBLE PRECISION(LDA,P). A contains the matrix whose decomposition is to be computed. Only the upper half of A need be stored. The lower part of the array A is not referenced. LDA INTEGER. LDA is the leading dimension of the array A. P INTEGER. P is the order of the matrix. WORK DOUBLE PRECISION. WORK is a work array. JPVT INTEGER(P). JPVT contains integers that control the selection of the pivot elements, if pivoting has been requested. Each diagonal element A(K,K) is placed in one o...
 complib/DCHDD(3) -- DCHDD downdates an augmented Cholesky decomposition or the triangular factor of an augmented QR decomposition.
    On Entry R DOUBLE PRECISION(LDR,P), where LDR .GE. P. R contains the upper triangular matrix that is to be downdated. The part of R below the diagonal is not referenced. LDR INTEGER. LDR is the leading dimension of the array R. P INTEGER. P is the order of the matrix R. Page 1 DCHDD(3F) DCHDD(3F) X DOUBLE PRECISION(P). X contains the row vector that is to be removed from R. X is not altered by DCHDD. Z DOUBLE PRECISION(LDZ,N)Z), where LDZ .GE. P. Z is an array of NZ P-vectors which are to be dow...
 complib/DCHEX(3) -- DCHEX updates the Cholesky factorization A = TRANS(R)*R of a positive definite matrix A of order P under diago
    On Entry R DOUBLE PRECISION(LDR,P), where LDR .GE. P. R contains the upper triangular factor that is to be updated. Elements of R below the diagonal are not referenced. LDR INTEGER. LDR is the leading dimension of the array R. P INTEGER. P is the order of the matrix R. K INTEGER. K is the first column to be permuted. L INTEGER. L is the last column to be permuted. L must be strictly greater than K. Z DOUBLE PRECISION(LDZ,N)Z), where LDZ .GE. P. Z is an array of NZ P-vectors into which the transf...
 complib/DCHUD(3) -- DCHUD updates an augmented Cholesky decomposition of the triangular part of an augmented QR decomposition. Spe
    On Entry R DOUBLE PRECISION(LDR,P), where LDR .GE. P. R contains the upper triangular matrix that is to be updated. The part of R below the diagonal is not referenced. LDR INTEGER. LDR is the leading dimension of the array R. P INTEGER. P is the order of the matrix R. X DOUBLE PRECISION(P). X contains the row to be added to R. X is not altered by DCHUD. Page 1 DCHUD(3F) DCHUD(3F) Z DOUBLE PRECISION(LDZ,N)Z), where LDZ .GE. P. Z is an array containing NZ P-vectors to be updated with R. LDZ INTEGE...
 complib/ddisna(3) -- compute the reciprocal condition numbers for the eigenvectors of a real symmetric or complex Hermitian matrix
    DDISNA computes the reciprocal condition numbers for the eigenvectors of a real symmetric or complex Hermitian matrix or for the left or right singular vectors of a general m-by-n matrix. The reciprocal condition number is the 'gap' between the corresponding eigenvalue or singular value and the nearest other one. The bound on the error, measured by angle in radians, in the I-th computed vector is given by DLAMCH( 'E' ) * ( ANORM / SEP( I ) ) where ANORM = 2-norm(A) = max( abs( D(j) ) ). SEP(...
 standard/defbasis(3) -- defines a basis matrix
    id expects the basis matrix identifier you want to assign to the matrix at mat. mat expects the matrix to which you want to assign the basis matrix identifier, id.
 standard/defcursor(3) -- defines a cursor glyph
    n expects the constant you want to assign as a cursor name. By default, an arrow is defined as cursor 0 and cannot be redefined. curs expects the bitmap for the cursor you want to define. The bitmap can be 16x16 or 32x32 and either one or two layers deep. This parameter is ignored for cross-hair cursors.
 standard/deflfont(3) -- defines a raster font capable of accommodating large rasters
    n expects the value to use as the identifier for this raster font. The default font is a fixed-pitch ASCII font with a height of 15, width of 9, character values 0 through 127 defined, and is specified by a font identifier of 0. Font 0 cannot be redefined. nc expects the number of elements in the chars array. chars expects an array of character description structures of type Lfontchar. One structure is required for each character in the font. The Lfontchar structure is defined in as: t...
 standard/deflinestyle(3) -- defines a linestyle
    n expects the constant that you want to use as an identifier for the linestyle described by ls. This constant is used as an index into a table of linestyles. By default, index 0 contains the pattern 0xFFFF, which draws solid lines and cannot be redefined. ls expects a 16-bit pattern to use as a linestyle. This pattern is stored in the linestyle table at index n. You can define up to 65536 distinct linestyles....
 standard/defpattern(3) -- defines patterns
    n expects the constant that you want to use as an identifier for the pattern described by mask. This constant is used as an index into a table of patterns. By default, pattern 0 is a 16X16 solid pattern that cannot be changed. size expects the size of the pattern: 16, 32, or 64 for a 16x16-, 32x32-, or 64x64-bit pattern, respectively. mask expects an array of 16-bit integers that form the actual bit pattern. The system stores the pattern in a pattern table at index n. The pattern is described fr...
 standard/defpup(3) -- defines a menu
    str expects a pointer to the text that you want to add as a menu item. In addition, you have the option of pairing an ``item type'' flag with each menu item. There are seven menu item type flags: %t marks item text as the menu title string. %F invokes a routine for every selection from this menu except those marked with a %n. You must specify the invoked routine in the arg parameter. The value of the menu item is used as a parameter of the executed routine. Thus, if you select the third menu i...
 standard/defrasterfont(3) -- defines a raster font
    n expects the constant that you want to use as the identifier for this raster font. This constant is used as an index into a font table. The default font, 0, is a fixed-pitch font with a height of 15 and width of 9. Font 0 cannot be redefined. ht expects the maximum height (in pixels) for a character. nc expects the number of characters in this font. chars expects an array of character description structures of type Fontchar. The Fontchar structure is defined in as: typedef struct { un...
 Tk/deleteimg(3) -- Destroy an image.
    Tcl_Interp *interp (in) Interpreter for which the image was created. char *name (in) Name of the image.
 delmntent(3c) -- remove entry from mounted filesystem description file
    This routine removes entries from the mounted file system description file /etc/mtab. The filep argument is the description file, usually /etc/mtab. The mnt argument is a pointer to an object with the following structure containing the broken-out fields of a line in the filesystem description file, . The fields have meanings described in fstab(4). struct mntent { char *mnt_fsname; /* file system name */ char *mnt_dir; /* file system path prefix */ char *mnt_type; /* dbg, efs, nfs */ ch...
 standard/delobj(3) -- deletes an object
    obj expects the object identifier of the object that you want to delete.
 standard/deltag(3) -- deletes a tag from the current open object
    t expects the tag that you want to delete.
 c++/demangle(3) -- demangle C++ external names to a readable format
    dem and demangle are interfaces for user programs to ``demangle'' the mangled external names that C++ produces for functions, class members, etc.. A description of the C++ mangling scheme is provided on page 122 and following of the Annotated C++ Reference Manual. The simplest interface to the library is to call the demangle() function, as follows: int ret; char inbuf[1024]; char outbuf[MAXDBUF]; if ((ret = demangle(inbuf, outbuf)) < 0) { /* error! */ } The ...
 standard/depthcue(3) -- turns depth-cue mode on and off
    mode expects either TRUE or FALSE. TRUE turns depthcue mode on. FALSE turns depthcue mode off.
 Tk/destroy(3) -- Destroy one or more windows
    This command deletes the windows given by the window arguments, plus all of their descendants. If a window ``.'' is deleted then the entire application will be destroyed. The windows are destroyed in order, and if an error occurs in destroying a window the command aborts without destroying the remaining windows.
 Tcl/detachpids(3) -- manage child processes in background
    int numPids (in) Number of process ids contained in the array pointed to by pidPtr. int *pidPtr (in) Address of array containing numPids process ids.
 perl5/Devel::SelfStubber(3) -- generate stubs for a SelfLoading module
    Devel::SelfStubber prints the stubs you need to put in the module before the __DATA__ token (or you can get it to print the entire module with stubs correctly placed). The stubs ensure that if a method is called, it will get loaded. They are needed specifically for inherited autoloaded methods. This is best explained using the following example: Assume four classes, A,B,C & D. A is the root class, B is a subclass of A, C is a subclass of B, and D is another subclass of A. A / \ B D / C If D cal...
 complib/dgbbrd(3) -- reduce a real general m-by-n band matrix A to upper bidiagonal form B by an orthogonal transformation
    DGBBRD reduces a real general m-by-n band matrix A to upper bidiagonal form B by an orthogonal transformation: Q' * A * P = B. The routine computes B, and optionally forms Q or P', or computes Q'*C for a given matrix C.
 complib/DGBCO(3) -- DGBCO factors a double precision band matrix by Gaussian elimination and estimates the condition of the matrix
    On Entry ABD DOUBLE PRECISION(LDA, N) contains the matrix in band storage. The columns of the matrix are stored in the columns of ABD and the diagonals of the matrix are stored in rows ML+1 through 2*ML+MU+1 of ABD . See the comments below for details. LDA INTEGER the leading dimension of the array ABD . LDA must be .GE. 2*ML + MU + 1 . N INTEGER the order of the original matrix. ML INTEGER number of diagonals below the main diagonal. 0 .LE. ML .LT. N . MU INTEGER number of diagonals above the m...
 complib/dgbcon(3) -- general band matrix A, in either the 1-norm or the infinity-norm,
    DGBCON estimates the reciprocal of the condition number of a real general band matrix A, in either the 1-norm or the infinity-norm, using the LU factorization computed by DGBTRF. An estimate is obtained for norm(inv(A)), and the reciprocal of the condition number is computed as RCOND = 1 / ( norm(A) * norm(inv(A)) ).
 complib/DGBDI(3) -- DGBDI computes the determinant of a band matrix using the factors computed by DGBCO or DGBFA. If the inverse i
    On Entry ABD DOUBLE PRECISION(LDA, N) the output from DGBCO or DGBFA. LDA INTEGER the leading dimension of the array ABD . N INTEGER the order of the original matrix. ML INTEGER number of diagonals below the main diagonal. MU INTEGER number of diagonals above the main diagonal. IPVT INTEGER(N) the pivot vector from DGBCO or DGBFA. On Return DET DOUBLE PRECISION(2) determinant of original matrix. Determinant = DET(1) * 10.0**DET(2) with 1.0 .LE. DABS(DET(1)) .LT. 10.0 or DET(1) = 0.0 . LINPACK. T...
 complib/dgbequ(3) -- compute row and column scalings intended to equilibrate an Mby-N band matrix A and reduce its condition number
    DGBEQU computes row and column scalings intended to equilibrate an M-by-N band matrix A and reduce its condition number. R returns the row scale factors and C the column scale factors, chosen to try to make the largest element in each row and column of the matrix B with elements B(i,j)=R(i)*A(i,j)*C(j) have absolute value 1. R(i) and C(j) are restricted to be between SMLNUM = smallest safe number and BIGNUM = largest safe number. Use of these scaling factors is not guaranteed to reduce the condi...
 complib/DGBFA(3) -- DGBFA factors a double precision band matrix by elimination. DGBFA is usually called by DGBCO, but it can be c
    On Entry ABD DOUBLE PRECISION(LDA, N) contains the matrix in band storage. The columns of the matrix are stored in the columns of ABD and the diagonals of the matrix are stored in rows ML+1 through 2*ML+MU+1 of ABD . See the comments below for details. LDA INTEGER the leading dimension of the array ABD . LDA must be .GE. 2*ML + MU + 1 . N INTEGER the order of the original matrix. ML INTEGER number of diagonals below the main diagonal. 0 .LE. ML .LT. N . MU INTEGER number of diagonals above the m...
 complib/dgbrfs(3) -- improve the computed solution to a system of linear equations when the coefficient matrix is banded, and provi
    DGBRFS improves the computed solution to a system of linear equations when the coefficient matrix is banded, and provides error bounds and backward error estimates for the solution.
 complib/DGBSL(3) -- DGBSL solves the double precision band system A * X = B or TRANS(A) * X = B using the factors computed by DGBC
    On Entry ABD DOUBLE PRECISION(LDA, N) the output from DGBCO or DGBFA. LDA INTEGER the leading dimension of the array ABD . N INTEGER the order of the original matrix. ML INTEGER number of diagonals below the main diagonal. MU INTEGER number of diagonals above the main diagonal. IPVT INTEGER(N) the pivot vector from DGBCO or DGBFA. B DOUBLE PRECISION(N) the right hand side vector. JOB INTEGER = 0 to solve A*X = B , = nonzero to solve TRANS(A)*X = B , where TRANS(A) is the transpose. On Return B t...
 complib/dgbsv(3) -- compute the solution to a real system of linear equations A * X = B, where A is a band matrix of order N with
    DGBSV computes the solution to a real system of linear equations A * X = B, where A is a band matrix of order N with KL subdiagonals and KU superdiagonals, and X and B are N-by-NRHS matrices. The LU decomposition with partial pivoting and row interchanges is used to factor A as A = L * U, where L is a product of permutation and unit lower triangular matrices with KL subdiagonals, and U is upper triangular with KL+KU superdiagonals. The factored form of A is then used to solve the system of equat...
 complib/dgbsvx(3) -- system of linear equations A * X = B, A**T * X = B, or A**H * X = B,
    DGBSVX uses the LU factorization to compute the solution to a real system of linear equations A * X = B, A**T * X = B, or A**H * X = B, where A is a band matrix of order N with KL subdiagonals and KU superdiagonals, and X and B are N-by-NRHS matrices. Error bounds on the solution and a condition estimate are also provided.
 complib/dgbtf2(3) -- compute an LU factorization of a real m-by-n band matrix A using partial pivoting with row interchanges
    DGBTF2 computes an LU factorization of a real m-by-n band matrix A using partial pivoting with row interchanges. This is the unblocked version of the algorithm, calling Level 2 BLAS.
 complib/dgbtrf(3) -- compute an LU factorization of a real m-by-n band matrix A using partial pivoting with row interchanges
    DGBTRF computes an LU factorization of a real m-by-n band matrix A using partial pivoting with row interchanges. This is the blocked version of the algorithm, calling Level 3 BLAS.
 complib/dgbtrs(3) -- solve a system of linear equations A * X = B or A' * X = B with a general band matrix A using the LU factoriza
    DGBTRS solves a system of linear equations A * X = B or A' * X = B with a general band matrix A using the LU factorization computed by DGBTRF.
 complib/dgebak(3) -- form the right or left eigenvectors of a real general matrix by backward transformation on the computed eigenv
    DGEBAK forms the right or left eigenvectors of a real general matrix by backward transformation on the computed eigenvectors of the balanced matrix output by DGEBAL.
 complib/dgebal(3) -- balance a general real matrix A
    DGEBAL balances a general real matrix A. This involves, first, permuting A by a similarity transformation to isolate eigenvalues in the first 1 to ILO-1 and last IHI+1 to N elements on the diagonal; and second, applying a diagonal similarity transformation to rows and columns ILO to IHI to make the rows and columns as close in norm as possible. Both steps are optional. Balancing may reduce the 1-norm of the matrix, and improve the accuracy of the computed eigenvalues and/or eigenvectors....
 complib/dgebd2(3) -- reduce a real general m by n matrix A to upper or lower bidiagonal form B by an orthogonal transformation
    DGEBD2 reduces a real general m by n matrix A to upper or lower bidiagonal form B by an orthogonal transformation: Q' * A * P = B. If m >= n, B is upper bidiagonal; if m < n, B is lower bidiagonal.
 complib/dgebrd(3) -- reduce a general real M-by-N matrix A to upper or lower bidiagonal form B by an orthogonal transformation
    DGEBRD reduces a general real M-by-N matrix A to upper or lower bidiagonal form B by an orthogonal transformation: Q**T * A * P = B. If m >= n, B is upper bidiagonal; if m < n, B is lower bidiagonal.
 complib/DGECO(3) -- DGECO factors a double precision matrix by Gaussian elimination and estimates the condition of the matrix. If
    On Entry A DOUBLE PRECISION(LDA, N) the matrix to be factored. LDA INTEGER the leading dimension of the array A . N INTEGER the order of the matrix A . On Return A an upper triangular matrix and the multipliers which were used to obtain it. The factorization can be written A = L*U where L is a product of permutation and unit lower triangular matrices and U is upper triangular. IPVT INTEGER(N) an INTEGER vector of pivot indices. RCOND DOUBLE PRECISION an estimate of the reciprocal condition of A ...
 complib/dgecon(3) -- real matrix A, in either the 1-norm or the infinity-norm, using the LU factorization computed by DGETRF
    DGECON estimates the reciprocal of the condition number of a general real matrix A, in either the 1-norm or the infinity-norm, using the LU factorization computed by DGETRF. An estimate is obtained for norm(inv(A)), and the reciprocal of the condition number is computed as RCOND = 1 / ( norm(A) * norm(inv(A)) ).
 complib/DGEDI(3) -- DGEDI computes the determinant and inverse of a matrix using the factors computed by DGECO or DGEFA.
    On Entry A DOUBLE PRECISION(LDA, N) the output from DGECO or DGEFA. LDA INTEGER the leading dimension of the array A . N INTEGER the order of the matrix A . IPVT INTEGER(N) the pivot vector from DGECO or DGEFA. WORK DOUBLE PRECISION(N) work vector. Contents destroyed. JOB INTEGER = 11 both determinant and inverse. = 01 inverse only. = 10 determinant only. On Return A inverse of original matrix if requested. Otherwise unchanged. DET DOUBLE PRECISION(2) determinant of original matrix if requested....
 complib/dgeequ(3) -- compute row and column scalings intended to equilibrate an Mby-N matrix A and reduce its condition number
    DGEEQU computes row and column scalings intended to equilibrate an M-by-N matrix A and reduce its condition number. R returns the row scale factors and C the column scale factors, chosen to try to make the largest element in each row and column of the matrix B with elements B(i,j)=R(i)*A(i,j)*C(j) have absolute value 1. R(i) and C(j) are restricted to be between SMLNUM = smallest safe number and BIGNUM = largest safe number. Use of these scaling factors is not guaranteed to reduce the condition ...
 complib/dgees(3) -- compute for an N-by-N real nonsymmetric matrix A, the eigenvalues, the real Schur form T, and, optionally, the
    DGEES computes for an N-by-N real nonsymmetric matrix A, the eigenvalues, the real Schur form T, and, optionally, the matrix of Schur vectors Z. This gives the Schur factorization A = Z*T*(Z**T). Optionally, it also orders the eigenvalues on the diagonal of the real Schur form so that selected eigenvalues are at the top left. The leading columns of Z then form an orthonormal basis for the invariant subspace corresponding to the selected eigenvalues. A matrix is in real Schur form if it is upper ...
 complib/dgeesx(3) -- compute for an N-by-N real nonsymmetric matrix A, the eigenvalues, the real Schur form T, and, optionally, the
    DGEESX computes for an N-by-N real nonsymmetric matrix A, the eigenvalues, the real Schur form T, and, optionally, the matrix of Schur vectors Z. This gives the Schur factorization A = Z*T*(Z**T). Optionally, it also orders the eigenvalues on the diagonal of the real Schur form so that selected eigenvalues are at the top left; computes a reciprocal condition number for the average of the selected eigenvalues (RCONDE); and computes a reciprocal condition number for the right invariant subspace co...
 complib/dgeev(3) -- compute for an N-by-N real nonsymmetric matrix A, the eigenvalues and, optionally, the left and/or right eigen
    DGEEV computes for an N-by-N real nonsymmetric matrix A, the eigenvalues and, optionally, the left and/or right eigenvectors. The right eigenvector v(j) of A satisfies A * v(j) = lambda(j) * v(j) where lambda(j) is its eigenvalue. The left eigenvector u(j) of A satisfies u(j)**H * A = lambda(j) * u(j)**H where u(j)**H denotes the conjugate transpose of u(j). The computed eigenvectors are normalized to have Euclidean norm equal to 1 and largest component real....
 complib/dgeevx(3) -- compute for an N-by-N real nonsymmetric matrix A, the eigenvalues and, optionally, the left and/or right eigen
    DGEEVX computes for an N-by-N real nonsymmetric matrix A, the eigenvalues and, optionally, the left and/or right eigenvectors. Optionally also, it computes a balancing transformation to improve the conditioning of the eigenvalues and eigenvectors (ILO, IHI, SCALE, and ABNRM), reciprocal condition numbers for the eigenvalues (RCONDE), and reciprocal condition numbers for the right eigenvectors (RCONDV). The right eigenvector v(j) of A satisfies A * v(j) = lambda(j) * v(j) where lambda(j) is its e...
 complib/DGEFA(3) -- DGEFA factors a double precision matrix by Gaussian elimination. DGEFA is usually called by DGECO, but it can
    On Entry A DOUBLE PRECISION(LDA, N) the matrix to be factored. LDA INTEGER the leading dimension of the array A . N INTEGER the order of the matrix A . On Return A an upper triangular matrix and the multipliers which were used to obtain it. The factorization can be written A = L*U where L is a product of permutation and unit lower triangular matrices and U is upper triangular. IPVT INTEGER(N) an integer vector of pivot indices. INFO INTEGER = 0 normal value. = K if U(K,K) .EQ. 0.0 . This is not ...
 complib/dgegs(3) -- compute for a pair of N-by-N real nonsymmetric matrices A, B
    DGEGS computes for a pair of N-by-N real nonsymmetric matrices A, B: the generalized eigenvalues (alphar +/- alphai*i, beta), the real Schur form (A, B), and optionally left and/or right Schur vectors (VSL and VSR). (If only the generalized eigenvalues are needed, use the driver DGEGV instead.) A generalized eigenvalue for a pair of matrices (A,B) is, roughly speaking, a scalar w or a ratio alpha/beta = w, such that A - w*B is singular. It is usually represented as the pair (alpha,beta), as ther...
 complib/dgegv(3) -- the generalized eigenvalues (alphar +/- alphai*i, beta), and optionally, the left and/or right generalized eig
    DGEGV computes for a pair of n-by-n real nonsymmetric matrices A and B, the generalized eigenvalues (alphar +/- alphai*i, beta), and optionally, the left and/or right generalized eigenvectors (VL and VR). A generalized eigenvalue for a pair of matrices (A,B) is, roughly speaking, a scalar w or a ratio alpha/beta = w, such that A - w*B is singular. It is usually represented as the pair (alpha,beta), as there is a reasonable interpretation for beta=0, and even for both being zero. A good beginning...
 complib/dgehd2(3) -- reduce a real general matrix A to upper Hessenberg form H by an orthogonal similarity transformation
    DGEHD2 reduces a real general matrix A to upper Hessenberg form H by an orthogonal similarity transformation: Q' * A * Q = H .
 complib/dgehrd(3) -- reduce a real general matrix A to upper Hessenberg form H by an orthogonal similarity transformation
    DGEHRD reduces a real general matrix A to upper Hessenberg form H by an orthogonal similarity transformation: Q' * A * Q = H .
 complib/dgelq2(3) -- compute an LQ factorization of a real m by n matrix A
    DGELQ2 computes an LQ factorization of a real m by n matrix A: A = L * Q.
 complib/dgelqf(3) -- compute an LQ factorization of a real M-by-N matrix A
    DGELQF computes an LQ factorization of a real M-by-N matrix A: A = L * Q.
 complib/dgels(3) -- involving an M-by-N matrix A, or its transpose, using a QR or LQ factorization of A
    DGELS solves overdetermined or underdetermined real linear systems involving an M-by-N matrix A, or its transpose, using a QR or LQ factorization of A. It is assumed that A has full rank. The following options are provided: 1. If TRANS = 'N' and m >= n: find the least squares solution of an overdetermined system, i.e., solve the least squares problem minimize || B - A*X ||. 2. If TRANS = 'N' and m < n: find the minimum norm solution of an underdetermined system A * X = B. 3. If TRANS = 'T'...
 complib/dgelss(3) -- compute the minimum norm solution to a real linear least squares problem
    DGELSS computes the minimum norm solution to a real linear least squares problem: Minimize 2-norm(| b - A*x |). using the singular value decomposition (SVD) of A. A is an M-by-N matrix which may be rank-deficient. Several right hand side vectors b and solution vectors x can be handled in a single call; they are stored as the columns of the M-by-NRHS right hand side matrix B and the N-by-NRHS solution matrix X. The effective rank of A is determined by treating as zero those singular values which ...
 complib/dgelsx(3) -- compute the minimum-norm solution to a real linear least squares problem
    DGELSX computes the minimum-norm solution to a real linear least squares problem: minimize || A * X - B || using a complete orthogonal factorization of A. A is an M-by-N matrix which may be rank-deficient. Several right hand side vectors b and solution vectors x can be handled in a single call; they are stored as the columns of the M-by-NRHS right hand side matrix B and the N-by-NRHS solution matrix X. The routine first computes a QR factorization with column pivoting: A * P = Q * [ R11 R12 ] [ ...
 complib/dgeql2(3) -- compute a QL factorization of a real m by n matrix A
    DGEQL2 computes a QL factorization of a real m by n matrix A: A = Q * L.
 complib/dgeqlf(3) -- compute a QL factorization of a real M-by-N matrix A
    DGEQLF computes a QL factorization of a real M-by-N matrix A: A = Q * L.
 complib/dgeqpf(3) -- compute a QR factorization with column pivoting of a real M-by-N matrix A
    DGEQPF computes a QR factorization with column pivoting of a real M-by-N matrix A: A*P = Q*R.
 complib/dgeqr2(3) -- compute a QR factorization of a real m by n matrix A
    DGEQR2 computes a QR factorization of a real m by n matrix A: A = Q * R.
 complib/dgeqrf(3) -- compute a QR factorization of a real M-by-N matrix A
    DGEQRF computes a QR factorization of a real M-by-N matrix A: A = Q * R.
 complib/dgerfs(3) -- improve the computed solution to a system of linear equations and provides error bounds and backward error est
    DGERFS improves the computed solution to a system of linear equations and provides error bounds and backward error estimates for the solution.
 complib/dgerq2(3) -- compute an RQ factorization of a real m by n matrix A
    DGERQ2 computes an RQ factorization of a real m by n matrix A: A = R * Q.
 complib/dgerqf(3) -- compute an RQ factorization of a real M-by-N matrix A
    DGERQF computes an RQ factorization of a real M-by-N matrix A: A = R * Q.
 complib/DGESL(3) -- DGESL solves the double precision system A * X = B or TRANS(A) * X = B using the factors computed by DGECO or
    On Entry A DOUBLE PRECISION(LDA, N) the output from DGECO or DGEFA. LDA INTEGER the leading dimension of the array A . N INTEGER the order of the matrix A . IPVT INTEGER(N) the pivot vector from DGECO or DGEFA. B DOUBLE PRECISION(N) the right hand side vector. JOB INTEGER = 0 to solve A*X = B , = nonzero to solve TRANS(A)*X = B where TRANS(A) is the transpose. On Return B the solution vector X . Error Condition A division by zero will occur if the input factor contains a zero on the diagonal. Te...
 complib/dgesv(3) -- = B,
    DGESV computes the solution to a real system of linear equations A * X = B, where A is an N-by-N matrix and X and B are N-by-NRHS matrices. The LU decomposition with partial pivoting and row interchanges is used to factor A as A = P * L * U, where P is a permutation matrix, L is unit lower triangular, and U is upper triangular. The factored form of A is then used to solve the system of equations A * X = B....
 complib/dgesvd(3) -- compute the singular value decomposition (SVD) of a real M-by-N matrix A, optionally computing the left and/or
    DGESVD computes the singular value decomposition (SVD) of a real M-by-N matrix A, optionally computing the left and/or right singular vectors. The SVD is written A = U * SIGMA * transpose(V) where SIGMA is an M-by-N matrix which is zero except for its min(m,n) diagonal elements, U is an M-by-M orthogonal matrix, and V is an N-by-N orthogonal matrix. The diagonal elements of SIGMA are the singular values of A; they are real and non-negative, and are returned in descending order. The first min(m,n...
 complib/dgesvx(3) -- system of linear equations A * X = B,
    DGESVX uses the LU factorization to compute the solution to a real system of linear equations A * X = B, where A is an N-by-N matrix and X and B are N-by-NRHS matrices. Error bounds on the solution and a condition estimate are also provided.
 complib/dgetf2(3) -- compute an LU factorization of a general m-by-n matrix A using partial pivoting with row interchanges
    DGETF2 computes an LU factorization of a general m-by-n matrix A using partial pivoting with row interchanges. The factorization has the form A = P * L * U where P is a permutation matrix, L is lower triangular with unit diagonal elements (lower trapezoidal if m > n), and U is upper triangular (upper trapezoidal if m < n). This is the right-looking Level 2 BLAS version of the algorithm.
 complib/dgetrf(3) -- compute an LU factorization of a general M-by-N matrix A using partial pivoting with row interchanges
    DGETRF computes an LU factorization of a general M-by-N matrix A using partial pivoting with row interchanges. The factorization has the form A = P * L * U where P is a permutation matrix, L is lower triangular with unit diagonal elements (lower trapezoidal if m > n), and U is upper triangular (upper trapezoidal if m < n). This is the right-looking Level 3 BLAS version of the algorithm.
 complib/dgetri(3) -- compute the inverse of a matrix using the LU factorization computed by DGETRF
    DGETRI computes the inverse of a matrix using the LU factorization computed by DGETRF. This method inverts U and then computes inv(A) by solving the system inv(A)*L = inv(U) for inv(A).
 complib/dgetrs(3) -- a general N-by-N matrix A using the LU factorization computed by DGETRF
    DGETRS solves a system of linear equations A * X = B or A' * X = B with a general N-by-N matrix A using the LU factorization computed by DGETRF.
 complib/dggbak(3) -- form the right or left eigenvectors of a real generalized eigenvalue problem A*x = lambda*B*x, by backward tra
    DGGBAK forms the right or left eigenvectors of a real generalized eigenvalue problem A*x = lambda*B*x, by backward transformation on the computed eigenvectors of the balanced pair of matrices output by DGGBAL.
 complib/dggbal(3) -- balance a pair of general real matrices (A,B)
    DGGBAL balances a pair of general real matrices (A,B). This involves, first, permuting A and B by similarity transformations to isolate eigenvalues in the first 1 to ILO$-$1 and last IHI+1 to N elements on the diagonal; and second, applying a diagonal similarity transformation to rows and columns ILO to IHI to make the rows and columns as close in norm as possible. Both steps are optional. Balancing may reduce the 1-norm of the matrices, and improve the accuracy of the computed eigenvalues and/o...
 complib/dggglm(3) -- solve a general Gauss-Markov linear model (GLM) problem
    DGGGLM solves a general Gauss-Markov linear model (GLM) problem: minimize || y ||_2 subject to d = A*x + B*y x where A is an N-by-M matrix, B is an N-by-P matrix, and d is a given Nvector. It is assumed that M <= N <= M+P, and rank(A) = M and rank( A B ) = N. Under these assumptions, the constrained equation is always consistent, and there is a unique solution x and a minimal 2-norm solution y, which is obtained using a generalized QR factorization of A and B. In particular, if matrix B is squar...
 complib/dgghrd(3) -- reduce a pair of real matrices (A,B) to generalized upper Hessenberg form using orthogonal transformations, wh
    DGGHRD reduces a pair of real matrices (A,B) to generalized upper Hessenberg form using orthogonal transformations, where A is a general matrix and B is upper triangular: Q' * A * Z = H and Q' * B * Z = T, where H is upper Hessenberg, T is upper triangular, and Q and Z are orthogonal, and ' means transpose. The orthogonal matrices Q and Z are determined as products of Givens rotations. They may either be formed explicitly, or they may be postmultiplied into input matrices Q1 and Z1, so that Q...
 complib/dgglse(3) -- solve the linear equality-constrained least squares (LSE) problem
    DGGLSE solves the linear equality-constrained least squares (LSE) problem: minimize || c - A*x ||_2 subject to B*x = d where A is an M-by-N matrix, B is a P-by-N matrix, c is a given M-vector, and d is a given P-vector. It is assumed that P <= N <= M+P, and rank(B) = P and rank( ( A ) ) = N. ( ( B ) ) These conditions ensure that the LSE problem has a unique solution, which is obtained using a GRQ factorization of the matrices B and A....
 complib/dggqrf(3) -- an N-by-P matrix B
    DGGQRF computes a generalized QR factorization of an N-by-M matrix A and an N-by-P matrix B: A = Q*R, B = Q*T*Z, where Q is an N-by-N orthogonal matrix, Z is a P-by-P orthogonal matrix, and R and T assume one of the forms: if N >= M, R = ( R11 ) M , or if N < M, R = ( R11 R12 ) N, ( 0 ) N-M N M-N M where R11 is upper triangular, and if N <= P, T = ( 0 T12 ) N, or if N > P, T = ( T11 ) N-P, P-N N ( T21 ) P P where T12 or T21 is upper triangular. In particular, if B is square and nonsingular, the ...
 complib/dggrqf(3) -- a P-by-N matrix B
    DGGRQF computes a generalized RQ factorization of an M-by-N matrix A and a P-by-N matrix B: A = R*Q, B = Z*T*Q, where Q is an N-by-N orthogonal matrix, Z is a P-by-P orthogonal matrix, and R and T assume one of the forms: if M <= N, R = ( 0 R12 ) M, or if M > N, R = ( R11 ) M-N, N-M M ( R21 ) N N where R12 or R21 is upper triangular, and if P >= N, T = ( T11 ) N , or if P < N, T = ( T11 T12 ) P, ( 0 ) P-N P N-P N where T11 is upper triangular. In particular, if B is square and nonsingular, the G...
 complib/dggsvd(3) -- an M-by-N real matrix A and P-by-N real matrix B
    DGGSVD computes the generalized singular value decomposition (GSVD) of an M-by-N real matrix A and P-by-N real matrix B: U'*A*Q = D1*( 0 R ), V'*B*Q = D2*( 0 R ) where U, V and Q are orthogonal matrices, and Z' is the transpose of Z. Let K+L = the effective numerical rank of the matrix (A',B')', then R is a K+L-by-K+L nonsingular upper triangular matrix, D1 and D2 are M-by(K+L) and P-by-(K+L) "diagonal" matrices and of the following structures, respectively: If M-K-L >= 0, K L D1 = K ( I...
 complib/dggsvp(3) -- U'*A*Q = K ( 0 A12 A13 ) if M-K-L >= 0
    DGGSVP computes orthogonal matrices U, V and Q such that L ( 0 0 A23 ) M-K-L ( 0 0 0 ) N-K-L K L = K ( 0 A12 A13 ) if M-K-L < 0; M-K ( 0 0 A23 ) N-K-L K L V'*B*Q = L ( 0 0 B13 ) P-L ( 0 0 0 ) where the K-by-K matrix A12 and L-by-L matrix B13 are nonsingular upper triangular; A23 is L-by-L upper triangular if M-K-L >= 0, otherwise A23 is (M-K)-by-L upper trapezoidal. K+L = the effective numerical rank of the (M+P)-by-N matrix (A',B')'. Z' denotes the transpose of Z. This decomposition is the...
 standard/dglclose(3) -- closes the DGL server connection
    sid expects the identifier of the server you want to close. If sid is negative, then all graphics server connections are closed. Server identifiers are returned by dglopen.
 standard/dglopen(3) -- opens a Graphics Library connection to a graphics server
    svname expects a pointer to the name of the graphics server to which you want to open a connection. For a successful connection, the client host must have permission to connect to the graphics server. Authentication is accomplished via the same mechanisms as for X clients. See xhost(1) for further details. The svname parameter has the following syntax: [[username ]password@]hostname[:server[.screen]] where hostname is an internet host name recognized by gethostname(3N). server and screen are ign...
 complib/dgtcon(3) -- estimate the reciprocal of the condition number of a real tridiagonal matrix A using the LU factorization as c
    DGTCON estimates the reciprocal of the condition number of a real tridiagonal matrix A using the LU factorization as computed by DGTTRF. An estimate is obtained for norm(inv(A)), and the reciprocal of the condition number is computed as RCOND = 1 / (ANORM * norm(inv(A))).
 complib/dgtrfs(3) -- improve the computed solution to a system of linear equations when the coefficient matrix is tridiagonal, and
    DGTRFS improves the computed solution to a system of linear equations when the coefficient matrix is tridiagonal, and provides error bounds and backward error estimates for the solution.
 complib/DGTSL(3) -- DGTSL given a general tridiagonal matrix and a right hand side will find the solution.
    On Entry N INTEGER is the order of the tridiagonal matrix. C DOUBLE PRECISION(N) is the subdiagonal of the tridiagonal matrix. C(2) through C(N) should contain the subdiagonal. On output C is destroyed. D DOUBLE PRECISION(N) is the diagonal of the tridiagonal matrix. On output D is destroyed. E DOUBLE PRECISION(N) is the superdiagonal of the tridiagonal matrix. E(1) through E(N-1) should contain the superdiagonal. On output E is destroyed. B DOUBLE PRECISION(N) is the right hand side vector. On ...
 complib/dgtsv(3) -- solve the equation A*X = B,
    DGTSV solves the equation where A is an N-by-N tridiagonal matrix, by Gaussian elimination with partial pivoting. Note that the equation A'*X = B may be solved by interchanging the order of the arguments DU and DL.
 complib/dgtsvx(3) -- system of linear equations A * X = B or A**T * X = B,
    DGTSVX uses the LU factorization to compute the solution to a real system of linear equations A * X = B or A**T * X = B, where A is a tridiagonal matrix of order N and X and B are N-by-NRHS matrices. Error bounds on the solution and a condition estimate are also provided.
 complib/dgttrf(3) -- compute an LU factorization of a real tridiagonal matrix A using elimination with partial pivoting and row int
    DGTTRF computes an LU factorization of a real tridiagonal matrix A using elimination with partial pivoting and row interchanges. The factorization has the form A = L * U where L is a product of permutation and unit lower bidiagonal matrices and U is upper triangular with nonzeros in only the main diagonal and first two superdiagonals.
 complib/dgttrs(3) -- solve one of the systems of equations A*X = B or A'*X = B,
    DGTTRS solves one of the systems of equations A*X = B or A'*X = B, with a tridiagonal matrix A using the LU factorization computed by DGTTRF.
 complib/dhgeqz(3) -- w(i) B ) = 0 In addition, the pair A,B may be reduced to generalized Schur form
    DHGEQZ implements a single-/double-shift version of the QZ method for finding the generalized eigenvalues B is upper triangular, and A is block upper triangular, where the diagonal blocks are either 1-by-1 or 2-by-2, the 2-by-2 blocks having complex generalized eigenvalues (see the description of the argument JOB.) If JOB='S', then the pair (A,B) is simultaneously reduced to Schur form by applying one orthogonal tranformation (usually called Q) on the left and another (usually called Z) on the...
 complib/dhsein(3) -- use inverse iteration to find specified right and/or left eigenvectors of a real upper Hessenberg matrix H
    DHSEIN uses inverse iteration to find specified right and/or left eigenvectors of a real upper Hessenberg matrix H. The right eigenvector x and the left eigenvector y of the matrix H corresponding to an eigenvalue w are defined by: H * x = w * x, y**h * H = w * y**h where y**h denotes the conjugate transpose of the vector y.
 complib/dhseqr(3) -- compute the eigenvalues of a real upper Hessenberg matrix H and, optionally, the matrices T and Z from the Sch
    DHSEQR computes the eigenvalues of a real upper Hessenberg matrix H and, optionally, the matrices T and Z from the Schur decomposition H = Z T Z**T, where T is an upper quasi-triangular matrix (the Schur form), and Z is the orthogonal matrix of Schur vectors. Optionally Z may be postmultiplied into an input orthogonal matrix Q, so that this routine can give the Schur factorization of a matrix A which has been reduced to the Hessenberg form H by the orthogonal matrix Q: A = Q*H*Q**T = (QZ)*T*(QZ)...
 perl5/diagnostics(3) -- Perl compiler pragma to force verbose warning diagnostics splain - standalone program to do the same thing
    The diagnostics Pragma This module extends the terse diagnostics normally emitted by both the perl compiler and the perl interpeter, augmenting them with the more explicative and endearing descriptions found in the perldiag manpage. Like the other pragmata, it affects the compilation phase of your program rather than merely the execution phase. To use in your program as a pragma, merely invoke use diagnostics; at the start (or near the start) of your program. (Note that this does enable perl's ...
 dial(3c) -- establish an out-going terminal line connection
    dial returns a file-descriptor for a terminal line open for read/write. The argument to dial is a CALL structure (defined in the header file). When finished with the terminal line, the calling program must invoke undial to release the semaphore that has been set during the allocation of the terminal device. The definition of CALL in the header file is: typedef struct { struct termio *attr; /* pointer to termio attribute struct */ int baud; /* transmission data rate */ int speed...
 Tk/dialog(3) -- Create modal dialog and wait for response
    This procedure is part of the Tk script library. Its arguments describe a dialog box: window Name of top-level window to use for dialog. Any existing window by this name is destroyed. title Text to appear in the window manager's title bar for the dialog. text Message to appear in the top portion of the dialog box. bitmap If non-empty, specifies a bitmap to display in the top portion of the dialog, to the left of the text. If this is an empty string then no bitmap is displayed in the dialog. def...
 difftime(3c) -- compute difference between two calendar times
    difftime computes the difference between two calendar times: time1 - time0.
 f90/digits(3) -- Returns the number of significant digits
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 ftn/dim(3) -- FORTRAN positive difference intrinsic functions
    These functions return: arg1-arg2 if arg1 > arg2 0 if arg1 <= arg2 PPPPaaaaggggeeee 1111
 directory(3b) -- directory operations (4.3BSD)
    The inclusion of selects the 4.3BSD versions of these routines. For the System V versions, include . opendir opens the directory named by filename and associates a directory stream with it. opendir returns a pointer to be used to identify the directory stream in subsequent operations. The pointer NULL is returned if filename cannot be accessed, or if it cannot malloc(3) enough memory to hold the whole thing. readdir returns a pointer to the next directory entry. It returns ...
 directory(3c) -- directory operations
    The inclusion of selects the System V versions of these routines. For the 4.3BSD versions, include . The 64-bit interfaces are not present in the 4.3BSD versions. opendir opens the directory named by filename and associates a directory stream with it. opendir returns a pointer to be used to identify the directory stream in subsequent operations. The directory stream is positioned at the first entry. A null pointer is returned if filename cannot be acces...
 perl5/DirHandle(3) -- supply object methods for directory handles
    The DirHandle method provide an alternative interface to the opendir(), closedir(), readdir(), and rewinddir() functions. The only objective benefit to using DirHandle is that it avoids namespace pollution by creating globs to hold directory handles. PPPPaaaaggggeeee 1111
 dirname(3g) -- report the parent directory name of a file pathname
    Given a pointer to a null-terminated character string that contains a filesystem pathname, dirname returns a pointer to a static constant string that is the parent directory of that file. In doing this, it sometimes places a null byte in the pathname after the next to last element, so the content of path must be disposable. Trailing ``/'' characters in the path are not counted as part of the path. If path or *path is zero, a pointer to a static constant ``.'' is re...
 f90/disable_ieee_interrupt(3) -- Disables floating-point interrupt
    UNICOS/mk and IRIX systems CRAY T90 systems that support IEEE floating-point arithmetic
 standard/disasm(3) -- disassembler functions
    Three sets of register names which people might want to use: compiler: zero, at, v0, ... hardware: r0, r1, r2, ... assembler: $0, $at, $2,... dis_init, dis_init32, and dis_init64 functions initialize disassembler and set options for disassembly. "addr_format" and "value_format" specify in the style of "printf" the null-terminated formats for printing the address and value of the instruction. If nil, they default to "%#010x"; if they are the empty string, we omit to print these items. "r...
 standard/disassembler(3) -- disassemble a MIPS instruction and print the results
    Disassembler disassembles and prints a MIPS machine instruction on stdout. Iadr is the instruction address to be disassembled. Regstyle specifies how registers are named in the disassembly; if the value is 0, compiler names are used; otherwise, hardware names are used. The next four arguments are function pointers, most of which give the caller some flexibility in the appearance of the disassembly. The only function that MUST be provided is get_bytes. All other functions are optional. Get_bytes ...
 standard/displacepolygon(3) -- specifies a displacement for the z values of rendered polygons
    displacepolygon offsets the z values of rendered pixels for polygons. The term scalefactor*max(abs(dz/dx),abs(dz/dy)) is added to the z values of rendered pixels, where dz/dx and dz/dy are the slopes of the triangle in window coordinates. scalefactor is a signed float value. displacepolygon is effectively disabled by setting scalefactor to 0.0, which is the default. displacepolygon is recommended when rendering a z buffer that is later defined (see texdef) as a texture for generating shadows. It...
 standard/dither(3) -- controls the dithering of pixels
    mode expects one of two values: DT_OFF disables dithering. DT_ON enables dithering (default).
 div(3c) -- perform integer division
    div and ldiv compute the quotient and remainder resulting from the division of the integer dividend numer by the integer divisor denom. If the division is inexact, the quotient will be the nearest integer with less magnitude than the algebraic quotient (e.g., div(5/2) yields 2, and div(-5/2) yields -2). div operates on and returns int quantities. ldiv operates on and returns long int quantities. Unless the result cannot be represented, div and ldiv return the result in a structure (div_t for div...
 complib/dlabad(3) -- take as input the values computed by SLAMCH for underflow and overflow, and returns the square root of each of
    DLABAD takes as input the values computed by SLAMCH for underflow and overflow, and returns the square root of each of these values if the log of LARGE is sufficiently large. This subroutine is intended to identify machines with a large exponent range, such as the Crays, and redefine the underflow and overflow limits to be the square roots of the values computed by DLAMCH. This subroutine is needed because DLAMCH does not compensate for poor arithmetic in the upper half of the exponent range, as...
 complib/dlabrd(3) -- reduce the first NB rows and columns of a real general m by n matrix A to upper or lower bidiagonal form by an
    DLABRD reduces the first NB rows and columns of a real general m by n matrix A to upper or lower bidiagonal form by an orthogonal transformation Q' * A * P, and returns the matrices X and Y which are needed to apply the transformation to the unreduced part of A. If m >= n, A is reduced to upper bidiagonal form; if m < n, to lower bidiagonal form. This is an auxiliary routine called by DGEBRD
 complib/dlacon(3) -- estimate the 1-norm of a square, real matrix A
    DLACON estimates the 1-norm of a square, real matrix A. Reverse communication is used for evaluating matrix-vector products.
 complib/dlacpy(3) -- copie all or part of a two-dimensional matrix A to another matrix B
    DLACPY copies all or part of a two-dimensional matrix A to another matrix B.
 complib/dladiv(3) -- --------- c + i*d The algorithm is due to Robert L
    DLADIV performs complex division in real arithmetic in D. Knuth, The art of Computer Programming, Vol.2, p.195
 complib/dlae2(3) -- compute the eigenvalues of a 2-by-2 symmetric matrix [ A B ] [ B C ]
    DLAE2 computes the eigenvalues of a 2-by-2 symmetric matrix [ A B ] [ B C ]. On return, RT1 is the eigenvalue of larger absolute value, and RT2 is the eigenvalue of smaller absolute value.
 complib/dlaebz(3) -- contain the iteration loops which compute and use the function N(w), which is the count of eigenvalues of a sy
    DLAEBZ contains the iteration loops which compute and use the function N(w), which is the count of eigenvalues of a symmetric tridiagonal matrix T less than or equal to its argument w. It performs a choice of two types of loops: IJOB=1, followed by IJOB=2: It takes as input a list of intervals and returns a list of sufficiently small intervals whose union contains the same eigenvalues as the union of the original intervals. The input intervals are (AB(j,1),AB(j,2)], j=1,...,MINP. The output inte...
 complib/dlaed0(3) -- compute all eigenvalues and corresponding eigenvectors of a symmetric tridiagonal matrix using the divide and
    DLAED0 computes all eigenvalues and corresponding eigenvectors of a symmetric tridiagonal matrix using the divide and conquer method.
 complib/dlaed1(3) -- modification by a rank-one symmetric matrix
    DLAED1 computes the updated eigensystem of a diagonal matrix after modification by a rank-one symmetric matrix. This routine is used only for the eigenproblem which requires all eigenvalues and eigenvectors of a tridiagonal matrix. DLAED7 handles the case in which eigenvalues only or eigenvalues and eigenvectors of a full symmetric matrix (which was reduced to tridiagonal form) are desired. T = Q(in) ( D(in) + RHO * Z*Z' ) Q'(in) = Q(out) * D(out) * Q'(out) where Z = Q'u, u is a vector of le...
 complib/dlaed2(3) -- merge the two sets of eigenvalues together into a single sorted set
    DLAED2 merges the two sets of eigenvalues together into a single sorted set. Then it tries to deflate the size of the problem. There are two ways in which deflation can occur: when two or more eigenvalues are close together or if there is a tiny entry in the Z vector. For each such occurrence the order of the related secular equation problem is reduced by one.
 complib/dlaed3(3) -- find the roots of the secular equation, as defined by the values in D, W, and RHO, between KSTART and KSTOP
    DLAED3 finds the roots of the secular equation, as defined by the values in D, W, and RHO, between KSTART and KSTOP. It makes the appropriate calls to DLAED4 and then updates the eigenvectors by multiplying the matrix of eigenvectors of the pair of eigensystems being combined by the matrix of eigenvectors of the K-by-K system which is solved here. This code makes very mild assumptions about floating point arithmetic. It will work on machines with a guard digit in add/subtract, or on those binary...
 complib/dlaed4(3) -- rank-one modification to a diagonal matrix whose elements are given in the array d, and that D(i) < D(j) for i
    This subroutine computes the I-th updated eigenvalue of a symmetric rank-one modification to a diagonal matrix whose elements are given in the array d, and that no loss in generality. The rank-one modified system is thus diag( D ) + RHO * Z * Z_transpose. where we assume the Euclidean norm of Z is 1. The method consists of approximating the rational functions in the secular equation by simpler interpolating rational functions....
 complib/dlaed5(3) -- modification of a 2-by-2 diagonal matrix diag( D ) + RHO The diagonal elements in the array D are assumed to s
    This subroutine computes the I-th eigenvalue of a symmetric rank-one modification of a 2-by-2 diagonal matrix We also assume RHO > 0 and that the Euclidean norm of the vector Z is one.
 complib/dlaed6(3) -- d(2)-x d(3)-x It is assumed that if ORGATI = .true
    DLAED6 computes the positive or negative root (closest to the origin) of z(1) z(2) z(3) f(x) = rho + --------- + ---------- + --------- d(1)-x d(2)-x d(3)-x otherwise it is between d(1) and d(2) This routine will be called by DLAED4 when necessary. In most cases, the root sought is the smallest in magnitude, though it might not be in some extremely rare situations.
 complib/dlaed7(3) -- modification by a rank-one symmetric matrix
    DLAED7 computes the updated eigensystem of a diagonal matrix after modification by a rank-one symmetric matrix. This routine is used only for the eigenproblem which requires all eigenvalues and optionally eigenvectors of a dense symmetric matrix that has been reduced to tridiagonal form. DLAED1 handles the case in which all eigenvalues and eigenvectors of a symmetric tridiagonal matrix are desired. T = Q(in) ( D(in) + RHO * Z*Z' ) Q'(in) = Q(out) * D(out) * Q'(out) where Z = Q'u, u is a vect...
 complib/dlaed8(3) -- merge the two sets of eigenvalues together into a single sorted set
    DLAED8 merges the two sets of eigenvalues together into a single sorted set. Then it tries to deflate the size of the problem. There are two ways in which deflation can occur: when two or more eigenvalues are close together or if there is a tiny element in the Z vector. For each such occurrence the order of the related secular equation problem is reduced by one.
 complib/dlaed9(3) -- find the roots of the secular equation, as defined by the values in D, Z, and RHO, between KSTART and KSTOP
    DLAED9 finds the roots of the secular equation, as defined by the values in D, Z, and RHO, between KSTART and KSTOP. It makes the appropriate calls to DLAED4 and then stores the new matrix of eigenvectors for use in calculating the next level of Z vectors.
 complib/dlaeda(3) -- compute the Z vector corresponding to the merge step in the CURLVLth step of the merge process with TLVLS step
    DLAEDA computes the Z vector corresponding to the merge step in the CURLVLth step of the merge process with TLVLS steps for the CURPBMth problem.
 complib/dlaein(3) -- use inverse iteration to find a right or left eigenvector corresponding to the eigenvalue (WR,WI) of a real up
    DLAEIN uses inverse iteration to find a right or left eigenvector corresponding to the eigenvalue (WR,WI) of a real upper Hessenberg matrix H.
 complib/dlaev2(3) -- compute the eigendecomposition of a 2-by-2 symmetric matrix [ A B ] [ B C ]
    DLAEV2 computes the eigendecomposition of a 2-by-2 symmetric matrix [ A B ] [ B C ]. On return, RT1 is the eigenvalue of larger absolute value, RT2 is the eigenvalue of smaller absolute value, and (CS1,SN1) is the unit right eigenvector for RT1, giving the decomposition [ CS1 SN1 ] [ A B ] [ CS1 -SN1 ] = [ RT1 0 ] [-SN1 CS1 ] [ B C ] [ SN1 CS1 ] [ 0 RT2 ].
 complib/dlaexc(3) -- upper quasi-triangular matrix T by an orthogonal similarity transformation
    DLAEXC swaps adjacent diagonal blocks T11 and T22 of order 1 or 2 in an upper quasi-triangular matrix T by an orthogonal similarity transformation. T must be in Schur canonical form, that is, block upper triangular with 1-by-1 and 2-by-2 diagonal blocks; each 2-by-2 diagonal block has its diagonal elemnts equal and its off-diagonal elements of opposite sign.
 complib/dlag2(3) -- w B, with scaling as necessary to avoid over-/underflow
    DLAG2 computes the eigenvalues of a 2 x 2 generalized eigenvalue problem A - w B, with scaling as necessary to avoid over-/underflow. The scaling factor "s" results in a modified eigenvalue equation s A - w B where s is a non-negative scaling factor chosen so that w, w B, and s A do not overflow and, if possible, do not underflow, either.
 complib/dlags2(3) -- compute 2-by-2 orthogonal matrices U, V and Q, such that if ( UPPER ) then U'*A*Q = U'*( A1 A2 )*Q = ( x 0 ) (
    DLAGS2 computes 2-by-2 orthogonal matrices U, V and Q, such that if ( UPPER ) then
 complib/dlagtf(3) -- lambda*I = PLU,
    DLAGTF factorizes the matrix (T - lambda*I), where T is an n by n tridiagonal matrix and lambda is a scalar, as where P is a permutation matrix, L is a unit lower tridiagonal matrix with at most one non-zero sub-diagonal elements per column and U is an upper triangular matrix with at most two non-zero super-diagonal elements per column. The factorization is obtained by Gaussian elimination with partial pivoting and implicit row scaling. The parameter LAMBDA is included in the routine so that DLA...
 complib/dlagtm(3) -- perform a matrix-vector product of the form B := alpha * A * X + beta * B where A is a tridiagonal matrix of o
    DLAGTM performs a matrix-vector product of the form
 complib/dlagts(3) -- lambda*I)'*x = y,
    DLAGTS may be used to solve one of the systems of equations where T is an n by n tridiagonal matrix, for x, following the factorization of (T - lambda*I) as (T - lambda*I) = P*L*U , by routine DLAGTF. The choice of equation to be solved is controlled by the argument JOB, and in each case there is an option to perturb zero or very small diagonal elements of U, this option being intended for use in applications such as inverse iteration....
 complib/dlahqr(3) -- i an auxiliary routine called by DHSEQR to update the eigenvalues and Schur decomposition already computed by
    DLAHQR is an auxiliary routine called by DHSEQR to update the eigenvalues and Schur decomposition already computed by DHSEQR, by dealing with the Hessenberg submatrix in rows and columns ILO to IHI.
 complib/dlahrd(3) -- matrix A so that elements below the k-th subdiagonal are zero
    DLAHRD reduces the first NB columns of a real general n-by-(n-k+1) matrix A so that elements below the k-th subdiagonal are zero. The reduction is performed by an orthogonal similarity transformation Q' * A * Q. The routine returns the matrices V and T which determine Q as a block reflector I - V*T*V', and also the matrix Y = A * V * T. This is an auxiliary routine called by DGEHRD.
 complib/dlaic1(3) -- applie one step of incremental condition estimation in its simplest version
    DLAIC1 applies one step of incremental condition estimation in its simplest version: Let x, twonorm(x) = 1, be an approximate singular vector of an j-by-j lower triangular matrix L, such that twonorm(L*x) = sest Then DLAIC1 computes sestpr, s, c such that the vector [ s*x ] xhat = [ c ] is an approximate singular vector of [ L 0 ] Lhat = [ w' gamma ] in the sense that twonorm(Lhat*xhat) = sestpr. Depending on JOB, an estimate for the largest or smallest singular value is computed. Note that [s ...
 complib/dlaln2(3) -- w D) X = s B with possible scaling ("s") and perturbation of A
    DLALN2 solves a system of the form (ca A - w D ) X = s B or (ca A' - w D) X = s B with possible scaling ("s") and perturbation of A. (A' means A-transpose.) A is an NA x NA real matrix, ca is a real scalar, D is an NA x NA real diagonal matrix, w is a real or complex value, and X and B are NA x 1 matrices -- real if w is real, complex if w is complex. NA may be 1 or 2. If w is complex, X and B are represented as NA x 2 matrices, the first column of each being the real part and the second bei...
 complib/dlamch(3) -- determine double precision machine parameters
    DLAMCH determines double precision machine parameters.
 complib/dlamrg(3) -- will create a permutation list which will merge the elements of A (which is composed of two independently sort
    DLAMRG will create a permutation list which will merge the elements of A (which is composed of two independently sorted sets) into a single set which is sorted in ascending order.
 complib/dlangb(3) -- return the value of the one norm, or the Frobenius norm, or the infinity norm, or the element of largest absol
    DLANGB returns the value of the one norm, or the Frobenius norm, or the infinity norm, or the element of largest absolute value of an n by n band matrix A, with kl sub-diagonals and ku super-diagonals.
 complib/dlange(3) -- return the value of the one norm, or the Frobenius norm, or the infinity norm, or the element of largest absol
    DLANGE returns the value of the one norm, or the Frobenius norm, or the infinity norm, or the element of largest absolute value of a real matrix A.
 complib/dlangt(3) -- return the value of the one norm, or the Frobenius norm, or the infinity norm, or the element of largest absol
    DLANGT returns the value of the one norm, or the Frobenius norm, or the infinity norm, or the element of largest absolute value of a real tridiagonal matrix A.
 complib/dlanhs(3) -- return the value of the one norm, or the Frobenius norm, or the infinity norm, or the element of largest absol
    DLANHS returns the value of the one norm, or the Frobenius norm, or the infinity norm, or the element of largest absolute value of a Hessenberg matrix A.
 complib/dlansb(3) -- return the value of the one norm, or the Frobenius norm, or the infinity norm, or the element of largest absol
    DLANSB returns the value of the one norm, or the Frobenius norm, or the infinity norm, or the element of largest absolute value of an n by n symmetric band matrix A, with k super-diagonals.
 complib/dlansp(3) -- return the value of the one norm, or the Frobenius norm, or the infinity norm, or the element of largest absol
    DLANSP returns the value of the one norm, or the Frobenius norm, or the infinity norm, or the element of largest absolute value of a real symmetric matrix A, supplied in packed form.
 complib/dlanst(3) -- return the value of the one norm, or the Frobenius norm, or the infinity norm, or the element of largest absol
    DLANST returns the value of the one norm, or the Frobenius norm, or the infinity norm, or the element of largest absolute value of a real symmetric tridiagonal matrix A.
 complib/dlansy(3) -- return the value of the one norm, or the Frobenius norm, or the infinity norm, or the element of largest absol
    DLANSY returns the value of the one norm, or the Frobenius norm, or the infinity norm, or the element of largest absolute value of a real symmetric matrix A.
 complib/dlantb(3) -- return the value of the one norm, or the Frobenius norm, or the infinity norm, or the element of largest absol
    DLANTB returns the value of the one norm, or the Frobenius norm, or the infinity norm, or the element of largest absolute value of an n by n triangular band matrix A, with ( k + 1 ) diagonals.
 complib/dlantp(3) -- return the value of the one norm, or the Frobenius norm, or the infinity norm, or the element of largest absol
    DLANTP returns the value of the one norm, or the Frobenius norm, or the infinity norm, or the element of largest absolute value of a triangular matrix A, supplied in packed form.
 complib/dlantr(3) -- return the value of the one norm, or the Frobenius norm, or the infinity norm, or the element of largest absol
    DLANTR returns the value of the one norm, or the Frobenius norm, or the infinity norm, or the element of largest absolute value of a trapezoidal or triangular matrix A.
 complib/dlanv2(3) -- compute the Schur factorization of a real 2-by-2 nonsymmetric matrix in standard form
    DLANV2 computes the Schur factorization of a real 2-by-2 nonsymmetric matrix in standard form: [ A B ] = [ CS -SN ] [ AA BB ] [ CS SN ] [ C D ] [ SN CS ] [ CC DD ] [-SN CS ] where either 1) CC = 0 so that AA and DD are real eigenvalues of the matrix, or 2) AA = DD and BB*CC < 0, so that AA + or - sqrt(BB*CC) are complex conjugate eigenvalues.
 complib/dlapll(3) -- two column vectors X and Y, let A = ( X Y )
    Given two column vectors X and Y, let The subroutine first computes the QR factorization of A = Q*R, and then computes the SVD of the 2-by-2 upper triangular matrix R. The smaller singular value of R is returned in SSMIN, which is used as the measurement of the linear dependency of the vectors X and Y.
 complib/dlapmt(3) -- rearrange the columns of the M by N matrix X as specified by the permutation K(1),K(2),...,K(N) of the integer
    DLAPMT rearranges the columns of the M by N matrix X as specified by the permutation K(1),K(2),...,K(N) of the integers 1,...,N. If FORWRD = .TRUE., forward permutation: X(*,K(J)) is moved X(*,J) for J = 1,2,...,N. If FORWRD = .FALSE., backward permutation: X(*,J) is moved to X(*,K(J)) for J = 1,2,...,N.
 complib/dlapy2(3) -- return sqrt(x**2+y**2), taking care not to cause unnecessary overflow
    DLAPY2 returns sqrt(x**2+y**2), taking care not to cause unnecessary overflow.
 complib/dlapy3(3) -- return sqrt(x**2+y**2+z**2), taking care not to cause unnecessary overflow
    DLAPY3 returns sqrt(x**2+y**2+z**2), taking care not to cause unnecessary overflow.
 complib/dlaqgb(3) -- equilibrate a general M by N band matrix A with KL subdiagonals and KU superdiagonals using the row and scalin
    DLAQGB equilibrates a general M by N band matrix A with KL subdiagonals and KU superdiagonals using the row and scaling factors in the vectors R and C.
 complib/dlaqge(3) -- equilibrate a general M by N matrix A using the row and scaling factors in the vectors R and C
    DLAQGE equilibrates a general M by N matrix A using the row and scaling factors in the vectors R and C.
 complib/dlaqsb(3) -- equilibrate a symmetric band matrix A using the scaling factors in the vector S
    DLAQSB equilibrates a symmetric band matrix A using the scaling factors in the vector S.
 complib/dlaqsp(3) -- equilibrate a symmetric matrix A using the scaling factors in the vector S
    DLAQSP equilibrates a symmetric matrix A using the scaling factors in the vector S.
 complib/dlaqsy(3) -- equilibrate a symmetric matrix A using the scaling factors in the vector S
    DLAQSY equilibrates a symmetric matrix A using the scaling factors in the vector S.
 complib/dlaqtr(3) -- solve the real quasi-triangular system op(T)*p = scale*c, if LREAL = .TRUE
    DLAQTR solves the real quasi-triangular system or the complex quasi-triangular systems op(T + iB)*(p+iq) = scale*(c+id), if LREAL = .FALSE. in real arithmetic, where T is upper quasi-triangular. If LREAL = .FALSE., then the first diagonal block of T must be 1 by 1, B is the specially structured matrix B = [ b(1) b(2) ... b(n) ] [ w ] [ w ] [ . ] [ w ] op(A) = A or A', A' denotes the conjugate transpose of matrix A. On input, X = [ c ]. On output, X = [ p ]. [ d ] [ q ] This subroutine is desig...
 complib/dlar2v(3) -- sequence of 2-by-2 real symmetric matrices, defined by the elements of the vectors x, y and z
    DLAR2V applies a vector of real plane rotations from both sides to a sequence of 2-by-2 real symmetric matrices, defined by the elements of the vectors x, y and z. For i = 1,2,...,n ( x(i) z(i) ) := ( c(i) s(i) ) ( x(i) z(i) ) ( c(i) -s(i) ) ( z(i) y(i) ) ( -s(i) c(i) ) ( z(i) y(i) ) ( s(i) c(i) )
 complib/dlarf(3) -- applie a real elementary reflector H to a real m by n matrix C, from either the left or the right
    DLARF applies a real elementary reflector H to a real m by n matrix C, from either the left or the right. H is represented in the form H = I - tau * v * v' where tau is a real scalar and v is a real vector. If tau = 0, then H is taken to be the unit matrix.
 complib/dlarfb(3) -- applie a real block reflector H or its transpose H' to a real m by n matrix C, from either the left or the rig
    DLARFB applies a real block reflector H or its transpose H' to a real m by n matrix C, from either the left or the right.
 complib/dlarfg(3) -- generate a real elementary reflector H of order n, such that H * ( alpha ) = ( beta ), H' * H = I
    DLARFG generates a real elementary reflector H of order n, such that ( x ) ( 0 ) where alpha and beta are scalars, and x is an (n-1)-element real vector. H is represented in the form H = I - tau * ( 1 ) * ( 1 v' ) , ( v ) where tau is a real scalar and v is a real (n-1)-element vector. If the elements of x are all zero, then tau = 0 and H is taken to be the unit matrix. Otherwise 1 <= tau <= 2.
 complib/dlarft(3) -- form the triangular factor T of a real block reflector H of order n, which is defined as a product of k elemen
    DLARFT forms the triangular factor T of a real block reflector H of order n, which is defined as a product of k elementary reflectors. If DIRECT = 'F', H = H(1) H(2) . . . H(k) and T is upper triangular; If DIRECT = 'B', H = H(k) . . . H(2) H(1) and T is lower triangular. If STOREV = 'C', the vector which defines the elementary reflector H(i) is stored in the i-th column of the array V, and H = I - V * T * V' If STOREV = 'R', the vector which defines the elementary reflector H(i) is sto...
 complib/dlarfx(3) -- applie a real elementary reflector H to a real m by n matrix C, from either the left or the right
    DLARFX applies a real elementary reflector H to a real m by n matrix C, from either the left or the right. H is represented in the form H = I - tau * v * v' where tau is a real scalar and v is a real vector. If tau = 0, then H is taken to be the unit matrix This version uses inline code if H has order < 11.
 complib/dlargv(3) -- generate a vector of real plane rotations, determined by elements of the real vectors x and y
    DLARGV generates a vector of real plane rotations, determined by elements of the real vectors x and y. For i = 1,2,...,n ( c(i) s(i) ) ( x(i) ) = ( a(i) ) ( -s(i) c(i) ) ( y(i) ) = ( 0 )
 complib/dlarnv(3) -- return a vector of n random real numbers from a uniform or normal distribution
    DLARNV returns a vector of n random real numbers from a uniform or normal distribution.
 complib/dlartg(3) -- generate a plane rotation so that [ CS SN ]
    DLARTG generate a plane rotation so that [ -SN CS ] [ G ] [ 0 ] This is a slower, more accurate version of the BLAS1 routine DROTG, with the following other differences: F and G are unchanged on return. If G=0, then CS=1 and SN=0. If F=0 and (G .ne. 0), then CS=0 and SN=1 without doing any floating point operations (saves work in DBDSQR when there are zeros on the diagonal). If F exceeds G in magnitude, CS will be positive....
 complib/dlartv(3) -- applie a vector of real plane rotations to elements of the real vectors x and y
    DLARTV applies a vector of real plane rotations to elements of the real vectors x and y. For i = 1,2,...,n ( x(i) ) := ( c(i) s(i) ) ( x(i) ) ( y(i) ) ( -s(i) c(i) ) ( y(i) )
 complib/dlaruv(3) -- return a vector of n random real numbers from a uniform (0,1)
    DLARUV returns a vector of n random real numbers from a uniform (0,1) distribution (n <= 128). This is an auxiliary routine called by DLARNV and ZLARNV.
 complib/dlas2(3) -- compute the singular values of the 2-by-2 matrix [ F G ] [ 0 H ]
    DLAS2 computes the singular values of the 2-by-2 matrix [ F G ] [ 0 H ]. On return, SSMIN is the smaller singular value and SSMAX is the larger singular value.
 complib/dlascl(3) -- multiplie the M by N real matrix A by the real scalar CTO/CFROM
    DLASCL multiplies the M by N real matrix A by the real scalar CTO/CFROM. This is done without over/underflow as long as the final result CTO*A(I,J)/CFROM does not over/underflow. TYPE specifies that A may be full, upper triangular, lower triangular, upper Hessenberg, or banded.
 complib/dlaset(3) -- initialize an m-by-n matrix A to BETA on the diagonal and ALPHA on the offdiagonals
    DLASET initializes an m-by-n matrix A to BETA on the diagonal and ALPHA on the offdiagonals.
 complib/dlasq1(3) -- matrix with diagonal D and off-diagonal E
    DLASQ1 computes the singular values of a real N-by-N bidiagonal matrix with diagonal D and off-diagonal E. The singular values are computed to high relative accuracy, barring over/underflow or denormalization. The algorithm is described in "Accurate singular values and differential qd algorithms," by K. V. Fernando and B. N. Parlett, Numer. Math., Vol-67, No. 2, pp. 191-230,1994. See also "Implementation of differential qd algorithms," by K. V. Fernando and B. N. Parlett, Technical Report, D...
 complib/dlasq2(3) -- DLASQ2 computes the singular values of a real N-by-N unreduced bidiagonal matrix with squared diagonal element
    DLASQ2 computes the singular values of a real N-by-N unreduced bidiagonal matrix with squared diagonal elements in Q and squared off-diagonal elements in E. The singular values are computed to relative accuracy TOL, barring over/underflow or denormalization.
 complib/dlasq3(3) -- DLASQ3 is the workhorse of the whole bidiagonal SVD algorithm
    DLASQ3 is the workhorse of the whole bidiagonal SVD algorithm. This can be described as the differential qd with shifts.
 complib/dlasq4(3) -- DLASQ4 estimates TAU, the smallest eigenvalue of a matrix
    DLASQ4 estimates TAU, the smallest eigenvalue of a matrix. This routine improves the input value of SUP which is an upper bound for the smallest eigenvalue for this matrix .
 complib/dlasr(3) -- where A is an m by n real matrix and P is an orthogonal matrix,
    DLASR performs the transformation consisting of a sequence of plane rotations determined by the parameters PIVOT and DIRECT as follows ( z = m when SIDE = 'L' or 'l' and z = n when SIDE = 'R' or 'r' ): When DIRECT = 'F' or 'f' ( Forward sequence ) then P = P( z - 1 )*...*P( 2 )*P( 1 ), and when DIRECT = 'B' or 'b' ( Backward sequence ) then P = P( 1 )*P( 2 )*...*P( z - 1 ), where P( k ) is a plane rotation matrix for the following planes: when PIVOT = 'V' or 'v' ( Variable pi...
 complib/dlasrt(3) -- the numbers in D in increasing order (if ID = 'I') or in decreasing order (if ID = 'D' )
    Sort the numbers in D in increasing order (if ID = 'I') or in decreasing order (if ID = 'D' ). Use Quick Sort, reverting to Insertion sort on arrays of size <= 20. Dimension of STACK limits N to about 2**32.
 complib/dlassq(3) -- 1 )**2 +...+ x( n )**2 + ( scale**2 )*sumsq,
    DLASSQ returns the values scl and smsq such that where x( i ) = X( 1 + ( i - 1 )*INCX ). The value of sumsq is assumed to be non-negative and scl returns the value scl = max( scale, abs( x( i ) ) ). scale and sumsq must be supplied in SCALE and SUMSQ and scl and smsq are overwritten on SCALE and SUMSQ respectively. The routine makes only one pass through the vector x.
 complib/dlasv2(3) -- compute the singular value decomposition of a 2-by-2 triangular matrix [ F G ] [ 0 H ]
    DLASV2 computes the singular value decomposition of a 2-by-2 triangular matrix [ F G ] [ 0 H ]. On return, abs(SSMAX) is the larger singular value, abs(SSMIN) is the smaller singular value, and (CSL,SNL) and (CSR,SNR) are the left and right singular vectors for abs(SSMAX), giving the decomposition [ CSL SNL ] [ F G ] [ CSR -SNR ] = [ SSMAX 0 ] [-SNL CSL ] [ 0 H ] [ SNR CSR ] [ 0 SSMIN ].
 complib/dlaswp(3) -- perform a series of row interchanges on the matrix A
    DLASWP performs a series of row interchanges on the matrix A. One row interchange is initiated for each of rows K1 through K2 of A.
 complib/dlasy2(3) -- + ISGN*X*op(TR) = SCALE*B,
    DLASY2 solves for the N1 by N2 matrix X, 1 <= N1,N2 <= 2, in where TL is N1 by N1, TR is N2 by N2, B is N1 by N2, and ISGN = 1 or -1. op(T) = T or T', where T' denotes the transpose of T.
 complib/dlasyf(3) -- using the Bunch-Kaufman diagonal pivoting method
    DLASYF computes a partial factorization of a real symmetric matrix A using the Bunch-Kaufman diagonal pivoting method. The partial factorization has the form: A = ( I U12 ) ( A11 0 ) ( I 0 ) if UPLO = 'U', or: ( 0 U22 ) ( 0 D ) ( U12' U22' ) A = ( L11 0 ) ( D 0 ) ( L11' L21' ) if UPLO = 'L' ( L21 I ) ( 0 A22 ) ( 0 I ) where the order of D is at most NB. The actual order is returned in the argument KB, and is either NB or NB-1, or N if N <= NB. DLASYF is an auxiliary routine called by DSY...
 complib/dlatbs(3) -- solve one of the triangular systems A *x = s*b or A'*x = s*b with scaling to prevent overflow, where A is an u
    DLATBS solves one of the triangular systems are n-element vectors, and s is a scaling factor, usually less than or equal to 1, chosen so that the components of x will be less than the overflow threshold. If the unscaled problem will not cause overflow, the Level 2 BLAS routine DTBSV is called. If the matrix A is singular (A(j,j) = 0 for some j), then s is set to 0 and a non-trivial solution to A*x = 0 is returned....
 complib/dlatps(3) -- solve one of the triangular systems A *x = s*b or A'*x = s*b with scaling to prevent overflow, where A is an u
    DLATPS solves one of the triangular systems transpose of A, x and b are n-element vectors, and s is a scaling factor, usually less than or equal to 1, chosen so that the components of x will be less than the overflow threshold. If the unscaled problem will not cause overflow, the Level 2 BLAS routine DTPSV is called. If the matrix A is singular (A(j,j) = 0 for some j), then s is set to 0 and a non-trivial solution to A*x = 0 is returned....
 complib/dlatrd(3) -- reduce NB rows and columns of a real symmetric matrix A to symmetric tridiagonal form by an orthogonal similar
    DLATRD reduces NB rows and columns of a real symmetric matrix A to symmetric tridiagonal form by an orthogonal similarity transformation Q' * A * Q, and returns the matrices V and W which are needed to apply the transformation to the unreduced part of A. If UPLO = 'U', DLATRD reduces the last NB rows and columns of a matrix, of which the upper triangle is supplied; if UPLO = 'L', DLATRD reduces the first NB rows and columns of a matrix, of which the lower triangle is supplied. This is an au...
 complib/dlatrs(3) -- solve one of the triangular systems A *x = s*b or A'*x = s*b with scaling to prevent overflow
    DLATRS solves one of the triangular systems triangular matrix, A' denotes the transpose of A, x and b are n-element vectors, and s is a scaling factor, usually less than or equal to 1, chosen so that the components of x will be less than the overflow threshold. If the unscaled problem will not cause overflow, the Level 2 BLAS routine DTRSV is called. If the matrix A is singular (A(j,j) = 0 for some j), then s is set to 0 and a non-trivial solution to A*x = 0 is returned....
 complib/dlatzm(3) -- applie a Householder matrix generated by DTZRQF to a matrix
    DLATZM applies a Householder matrix generated by DTZRQF to a matrix. Let P = I - tau*u*u', u = ( 1 ), ( v ) where v is an (m-1) vector if SIDE = 'L', or a (n-1) vector if SIDE = 'R'. If SIDE equals 'L', let C = [ C1 ] 1 [ C2 ] m-1 n Then C is overwritten by P*C. If SIDE equals 'R', let C = [ C1, C2 ] m 1 n-1 Then C is overwritten by C*P.
 complib/dlauu2(3) -- compute the product U * U' or L' * L, where the triangular factor U or L is stored in the upper or lower trian
    DLAUU2 computes the product U * U' or L' * L, where the triangular factor U or L is stored in the upper or lower triangular part of the array A. If UPLO = 'U' or 'u' then the upper triangle of the result is stored, overwriting the factor U in A. If UPLO = 'L' or 'l' then the lower triangle of the result is stored, overwriting the factor L in A. This is the unblocked form of the algorithm, calling Level 2 BLAS....
 complib/dlauum(3) -- compute the product U * U' or L' * L, where the triangular factor U or L is stored in the upper or lower trian
    DLAUUM computes the product U * U' or L' * L, where the triangular factor U or L is stored in the upper or lower triangular part of the array A. If UPLO = 'U' or 'u' then the upper triangle of the result is stored, overwriting the factor U in A. If UPLO = 'L' or 'l' then the lower triangle of the result is stored, overwriting the factor L in A. This is the blocked form of the algorithm, calling Level 3 BLAS....
 libdl/dlclose(3) -- close a shared object
    dlclose disassociates a shared object previously opened by dlopen, sgidladd, or sgidlopen_version from the current process. Once an object has been closed using dlclose, its symbols are no longer available to dlsym or to the program. All objects loaded automatically as a result of invoking dlopen, on the referenced object [see dlopen(3) sgidladd, or sgidlopen_version] are also closed (however no object still open via any dlopen, sgidladd, or sgidlopen_version is closed till the last open handle ...
 libdl/dlerror(3) -- get diagnostic information
    dlerror returns a null-terminated character string (with no trailing newline) that describes the last error that occurred during dynamic linking processing. If no dynamic linking errors have occurred since the last invocation of dlerror, dlerror returns NULL. Thus, invoking dlerror a second time, immediately following a prior invocation, results in NULL being returned.
 libdl/dlopen(3) -- open a shared object
    dlopen is one of a family of routines that give the user direct access to the dynamic linking facilities. These routines are available in a library which is loaded if the option -lc is used with cc , f77 or ld. dlopen makes a shared object available to a running process. dlopen returns to the process a handle which the process may use on subsequent calls to dlsym and dlclose. This handle should not be interpreted in any way by the process. pathname is the path name of the object to be opened; it...
 libdl/dlsym(3) -- get the address of a symbol in shared object
    dlsym allows a process to obtain the address of a symbol defined within a shared object previously opened by dlopen, sgidlopen_version, or sgidladd. handle is a value returned by a call to dlopen; the corresponding shared object must not have been closed using dlclose. name is the symbol's name as a character string. dlsym searchs for the named symbol in all shared objects loaded automatically as a result of loading the object referenced by handle [see dlopen(3)]. The name search is done in the...
 dmedia/dmACConvert(3d) -- convert audio data format, sampling rate and compression
    converter is a DMaudioconverter handle created by a previous call to the creation method dmACCreate(3dm). inbuffer is a pointer to the buffer containing the audio data to be converted. Its length may need to be determined via the DM_AUDIO_MIN_INPUT_LEN parameter described below. If inbuffer is NULL, the converter will flush its internal buffers (if any) to the output buffer. outbuffer is a pointer to the buffer where the converter will place the converted data. Its length may need to be determin...
 dmedia/dmACCreate(3d) -- create/destroy a DMaudioconverter handle used for audio format conversion.
    Returns DM_SUCCESS if the operation succeeds. If DM_FAILURE is returned, the error number and/or message can be retrieved via dmGetError(3dm).
 dmedia/dmACGetMinInputSize(3d) -- auxiliary routines for querying input and output buffer sizes for dmACConvert.
    converter is a DMaudioconverter handle created by a previous call to the creation method dmACCreate(3dm). outputSize is a integer set to the requested output buffer size. The units will be bytes if compressing, otherwise frames. minInputSize is a pointer to integer which will be set to the minimum allowable input buffer size for the given outputSize. The units will be bytes if decompressing, otherwise frames. inputSize is a integer set to the requested input buffer size. The units will be bytes ...
 dmedia/dmACReset(3d) -- reset a DMaudioconverter handle to its default state
    converter is a DMaudioconverter handle created by a previous call to the creation method dmACCreate(3dm).
 dmedia/dmACSetParams(3d) -- set/get the Audio Converter parameter values
    converter is a DMaudioconverter handle created by a previous call to the creation method dmACCreate(3dm). sourceparams is a DMparams list describing the audio format of the data to be converted. destparams is a DMparams list describing the audio format into which the data is to be converted. Any parameter not specified will default to the input value, with some exceptions (see below). conversionparams is an optional DMparams list describing specific parameters relating to the conversion process ...
 dmedia/dmAudioRateConvert(3d) -- convert data sampling rate. It consumes an input buffer of floats and generates an output buffer of floats.
    handle DMaudiorateconverter structure, created by dmAudioRateConverterCreate(3dm), specifies the signal processing parameters. inbuf pointer to input data buffer. The converter does not alter the contents of this buffer. The data format is currently limited to single channel, 32-bit floating point. outbuf pointer to output data buffer. Ensure that inbuf and outbuf do not overlap. The data format is currently limited to single channel, 32-bit floating point. Sampling rate conversion alters the le...
 dmedia/dmAudioRateConverterCreate(3d) -- allocate new DMaudiorateconverter structure
    The converter is initialized with default configuration: Algorithm: Jitter Free Input sampling rate: 44100 Hertz Output samping rate: 22050 Hertz Stop band attenuation: 78 Decibels Transition band width: 20 % The input and output data format is currently limited to single channel, 32-bit floating point. See dmAudioRateConverterSetParams(3dm) for parameter specification.
 dmedia/dmAudioRateConverterDestroy(3d) -- deallocate an audio converter
    handle DMaudiorateconverter structure to be deallocated. This structure was created by dmAudioRateConverterCreate(3dm).
 dmedia/dmAudioRateConverterGetParams(3d) -- get rate converter parameter values
    handle DMaudiorateconverter structure, created by dmAudioRateConverterCreate(3dm). params List of parameters for query.
 dmedia/dmAudioRateConverterReset(3d) -- fill internal buffers with constant value
    handle DMaudiorateconverter structure resetval value of DM_TYPE_FLOAT with which to fill internal audio buffers.
 dmedia/dmAudioRateConverterSetParams(3d) -- set rate converter parameter values
    handle DMaudiorateconverter structure, created by dmAudioRateConverterCreate(3dm). params List of parameters for specification/query. Null (0) value ok.
 dmedia/dmbufalloc(3d) -- allocate and free a DMbuffer
    dmBufferAllocate reserves a DMbuffer in the specified DMbufferpool. The buffer handle is returned to the address specified with buffer. The availability of buffers in the pool is determined with select(2) (See dmBufferGetPoolFD(3dm) ). If no buffers are available this call immediately returns with DM_FAILURE. The buffer remains reserved until its handle is passed to dmBufferFree(3dm). dmBufferAllocateSize is similar to dmBufferAllocate except that a buffer size may be specified which is differen...
 dmedia/dmbufcreate(3d) -- create DMbufferpool
    These functions are used to create and destroy pools of digital media buffers. The pools and buffers are used for passing data among application programs and for passing data to and from the digital media libraries. When creating a buffer pool, you must make sure that it is compatible with all of the libraries with which it will be used. Different libraries will have different memory allocation constraints, such as alignment constraints, based on the I/O devices that they control. The sequence o...
 dmedia/dmbuffd(3d) -- configure DMbufferpool file descriptor
    dmBufferGetPoolFD returns a file descriptor for use in select(2) or poll(2). dmBufferSetPoolSelectSize sets the available byte count at which select(2) or poll(2) reports the pool has space available for allocation. The file descriptor is for use in the writefds argument to select(2).
 dmedia/dmbufglparams(3d) -- configures pool parameters required for use by graphics
    dmBufferGetGLPoolParams configures the poolParams given the constrains in DM_IMAGE_WIDTH, DM_IMAGE_HEIGHT and DM_IMAGE_PACKING must be set to valid values for the poolParams to be configured properly. The poolParams must also be configured by other subsystems (like dmIC and VL) before or after it has been configured by this call if the buffer pool is to be shared among the various subsystems (See also dmBufferCreatePool(3dm) ). If the poolParams cannot be altered (due to, for example, incompatib...
 dmedia/dmbufmap(3d) -- map DMbuffer memory
    dmBufferMapData returns a pointer to the memory in buffer. The pointer can be used for reading and writing the contents of the buffer. The pointer remains valid until the buffer is freed with dmBufferFree(3dm). After allocating a digital media buffer with dmBufferAllocate(3dm), the pointer returned dmBufferMapData by can be used to write data into the buffer. However, once the buffer has been sent to one of the digital media libraries, the pointer may be used to read from the buffer, but the con...
 dmedia/dmbufsize(3d) -- set and get DMbuffer data size
    dmBufferGetSize returns the size in bytes of the valid data in buffer. dmBufferSetSize sets the byte count of valid data in buffer.
 dmedia/dmbufstate(3d) -- query available space in pool
    dmBufferGetPoolState returns the number of bytes and buffers which can be successfully allocated from the pool before the pool fills up with allocated buffers (causing dmBufferAllocate to fail). Currently, each buffer in a DMbufferpool has a fixed size. Therefore, the number of DMbuffers which can be allocated and the number of bytes which can be allocated are related by a constant factor, which is returned by dmBufferGetAllocSize. This may change in future releases....
 dmedia/dmbuftype(3d) -- set and get the DMimagetype of a DMbuffer
    dmBufferGetImageType returns the DMimagetype of buffer. dmBufferSetImageType makes type the new DMimagetype of buffer. The following are valid values:
 dmedia/dmbufuserdata(3d) -- get and set user data for a buffer
    dmBufferGetUserData returns size bytes of user data in data. The maximum size of the user data area of buffer is DM_BUFFER_MAX_AUX_DATA_SIZE. The size of valid user data is set by dmBufferSetUserData. dmBufferSetUserData copies size bytes of data pointed to by data into the user data area of buffer. If size is greater than DM_BUFFER_MAX_AUX_DATA_SIZE , DM_FAILURE is returned.
 dmedia/dmbufustmsc(3d) -- get and set unadjusted system time and media stream counter value pair
    dmBufferGetUSTMSCpair returns the USTMSCpair for buf. dmBufferSetUSTMSCpair sets the USTMSCpair of buf.
 dmedia/dmColor(3d) -- The Silicon Graphics Color Space Library (CSL)
    The Color Space Library (CSL) provides a simple, yet powerful, means of converting images between color spaces (models), packings, subsamplings and datatypes and/or performing some operation on the image data, such as adjusting its contrast. The CSL adopts the concept of a "color converter" for which the source and destination images' parameters are specified as well as various conversion parameters. The image parameters are supplied via a DMparams using the calls dmColorSetSrcParams and dmCo...
 dmedia/dmColorConvert(3d) -- performs the actual image conversion.
    DMcolorconverter converter The converter upon which the action is to be applied.
 dmedia/dmColorCreate(3d) -- creates and initializes the color converter.
    DMcolorconverter *converter A pointer to the converter to be created.
 dmedia/dmColorDestroy(3d) -- destroys the color converter.
    DMcolorconverter *converter The converter to be destroyed.
 dmedia/dmColorGetError(3d) -- returns the value of the error flag.
    DMcolorconverter converter The converter upon which the action is to be applied. int *error The value of the error flag.
 dmedia/dmColorGetErrorString(3d) -- returns a text error message.
    const int error The dmColor error token (see dmColor man page).
 dmedia/dmColorGetSrcSize(3d) -- get the source/destination image size in bytes.
    DMcolorconverter converter The converter upon which the action is to be applied. int *size The expected size in bytes of the source/destination image.
 dmedia/dmColorPrecompute(3d) -- performs any precomputation required.
    DMcolorconverter converter The converter upon which the action is to be applied.
 dmedia/dmColorSetBrightness(3d) -- set/get brightness delta value.
    DMcolorconverter converter The converter upon which the action is to be applied. float brightness The brightness delta value.
 dmedia/dmColorSetContrast(3d) -- set/get the contrast multiplier.
    DMcolorconverter converter The converter upon which the action is to be applied. float contrast The contrast multiplier.
 dmedia/dmColorSetConvParams(3d) -- set/get the conversion parameters.
    DMcolorconverter converter The converter upon which the action is to be applied. DMparams *convParams The DMparams which provides/accepts the image conversion parameters.
 dmedia/dmColorSetDefaultAlpha(3d) -- set/get the default alpha value of the source image.
    DMcolorconverter converter The converter upon which the action is to be applied. float defaultAlpha The default alpha value.
 dmedia/dmColorSetHue(3d) -- set/get the hue rotation.
    DMcolorconverter converter The converter upon which the action is to be applied. float hue The hue rotation.
 dmedia/dmColorSetSaturation(3d) -- set/get the saturation multiplier.
    DMcolorconverter converter The converter upon which the action is to be applied. float saturation The saturation multiplier.
 dmedia/dmColorSetSrcParams(3d) -- set/get the source/destination image parameters.
    DMcolorconverter converter The converter upon which the action is to be applied. DMparams *imageParams The DMparams which provides/accepts the image parameters.
 dmedia/dmColorSetSubsamplingFilter(3d) -- set/get the subsampling filter type.
    DMcolorconverter converter The converter upon which the action is to be applied. int subsamplingFilter The subsampling filter type.
 dmedia/dmDVAudioDecode(3d) -- implements DV and DVCPRO audio decompression
    handle DMDVaudiodecoder structure, created by dmDVAudioDecoderCreate(3dm), specifies the states of the signal processing parameters. ibuf pointer to input compressed data buffer, which is a complete DIF frame with embedded audio. See dm_dv(3dm) for more information about DIF frames, DV, and DVCPRO. The DIF input buffer size must be either DM_DVAUDIO_NTSC_DIF_FRAMESIZE or DM_DVAUDIO_PAL_DIF_FRAMESIZE. obuf pointer to output sample data buffer. The data format is short (16-bit). The samples are as...
 dmedia/dmDVAudioDecoderCreate(3d) -- allocate new DMDVaudiodecoder structure
    decoder DMDVaudiodecoder structure to be allocated.
 dmedia/dmDVAudioDecoderDestroy(3d) -- deallocate a DMDVaudiodecoder
    handle DMDVaudiodecoder structure to be deallocated. This structure was created by dmDVAudioDecoderCreate(3dm).
 dmedia/dmDVAudioDecoderGetParams(3d) -- get DV audio decoder parameter values
    handle DMDVaudiodecoder structure, created by dmDVAudioDecoderCreate(3dm). params Parameters returned from the query.
 dmedia/dmDVAudioDecoderReset(3d) -- fill decoder internal buffers with zeros.
    decoder DMDVaudiodecoder structure
 dmedia/dmDVAudioDecoderSetParams(3d) -- set DV Audio decoder parameter values
    handle DMDVaudiodecoder structure, created by dmDVAudioDecoderCreate(3dm). params List of parameters for specification. Null (0) value ok.
 dmedia/dmDVAudioEncode(3d) -- implements DV and DVCPRO audio encode
    handle DMDVaudioencoder structure, created by dmDVAudioEncoderCreate(3dm), specifies the states of the signal processing parameters. ibuf pointer to input sample data buffer. The data format is short (16-bit). The samples are assumed to be two's complement. Sampling rate can be either 32 kHz or 48 kHz. obuf pointer to output data buffer which is a complete DIF frame. See dm_dv(3dm) for more info about DIF, DV, and DVCPRO. The audio is inserted into the DIF frame without affecting any video that...
 dmedia/dmDVAudioEncoderCreate(3d) -- allocate new DMDVaudioencoder structure
    encoder DMDVaudioencoder structure to be allocated.
 dmedia/dmDVAudioEncoderDestroy(3d) -- deallocate a DMDVaudioencoder
    handle DMDVaudioencoder structure to be deallocated. This structure was created by dmDVAudioEncoderCreate(3dm).
 dmedia/dmDVAudioEncoderGetFrameSize(3d) -- get DV audio encoder frame size
    handle DMDVaudioencoder structure, created by dmDVAudioEncoderCreate(3dm). numSampFrame Number of audio samples required for frame.
 dmedia/dmDVAudioEncoderGetParams(3d) -- get DV audio encoder parameter values
    handle DMDVaudioencoder structure, created by dmDVAudioEncoderCreate(3dm). params parameters returned from query
 dmedia/dmDVAudioEncoderReset(3d) -- fill encoder internal buffers with zeros.
    encoder DMDVaudioencoder structure
 dmedia/dmDVAudioEncoderSetParams(3d) -- set DV Audio encoder parameter values
    handle DMDVaudioencoder structure, created by dmDVAudioEncoderCreate(3dm). params list of parameters to configure the audio encoder. Null (0) value ok.
 dmedia/dmDVAudioHeaderGetParams(3d) -- get DV audio decoder parameter values
    dif Points to a valid frame of DIF data which contains embedded audio. See dm_dv(3dm) for more info about DIF, DV, and DVCPRO. params This params list is filled out by the function and returns extensive information about the audio in the DIF frame. numSampFrames If this paramater is non-NULL, the number of 16 bit samples embedded inside the DIF frame is returned in this parameter.
 dmedia/dmDVIAudioDecode(3d) -- decode audio data compressed using the IMA
    handle DMDVIaudiodecoder structure, created by a previous call to dmDVIAudioDecoderCreate(3dm). It contains the state associated with the decoder. ibuf A pointer to the compressed input data buffer. The data format is unsigned char (8-bit). obuf A pointer to the output sample data buffer. The data format is short (16-bit). The samples are assumed to be two's complement. Sampling rate may range from 8 kHz to 48 kHz, but has to be the same as encoder. nsamples The number of samples to be processe...
 dmedia/dmDVIAudioDecoderCreate(3d) -- allocate new DMDVIaudiodecoder structure
    decoder DMDVIaudiodecoder structure to be allocated.
 dmedia/dmDVIAudioDecoderDestroy(3d) -- deallocate a DMDVIaudiodecoder
    handle DMDVIaudiodecoder structure to be deallocated. This structure was created by dmDVIAudioDecoderCreate(3dm).
 dmedia/dmDVIAudioDecoderGetParams(3d) -- get DVI audio decoder parameter values
    handle DMDVIaudiodecoder structure, created by dmDVIAudioDecoderCreate(3dm). params List of parameters for query.
 dmedia/dmDVIAudioDecoderReset(3d) -- fill decoder internal buffers with zeros.
    decoder DMDVIaudiodecoder structure
 dmedia/dmDVIAudioDecoderSetParams(3d) -- set DVI Audio decoder parameter values
    handle DMDVIaudiodecoder structure, created by dmDVIAudioDecoderCreate(3dm). params List of parameters for specification. Null (0) value ok.
 dmedia/dmDVIAudioEncode(3d) -- compress audio data using the IMA (Interactive Multimedia Association) Recommended ADPCM compression, based on
    handle DMDVIaudioencoder structure, created by a previous call to dmDVIAudioEncoderCreate(3dm). It contains the state associated with the encoder. ibuf pointer to input sample data buffer. The data format is short (16-bit). The samples are assumed to be two's complement. Sampling rate could range from 8 kHz to 48 kHz. obuf pointer to output compressed data buffer. The data format is unsigned char (8-bit). nsamples The number of samples to be processed. For the 4:1 algorithm (the only one curren...
 dmedia/dmDVIAudioEncoderCreate(3d) -- allocate new DMDVIaudioencoder structure
    encoder DMDVIaudioencoder structure to be allocated.
 dmedia/dmDVIAudioEncoderDestroy(3d) -- deallocate a DMDVIaudioencoder
    handle DMDVIaudioencoder structure to be deallocated. This structure was created by dmDVIAudioEncoderCreate(3dm).
 dmedia/dmDVIAudioEncoderGetParams(3d) -- get DVI audio encoder parameter values
    handle DMDVIaudioencoder structure, created by dmDVIAudioEncoderCreate(3dm). params List of parameters for query.
 dmedia/dmDVIAudioEncoderReset(3d) -- fill encoder internal buffers with zeros.
    encoder DMDVIaudioencoder structure
 dmedia/dmDVIAudioEncoderSetParams(3d) -- set DVI Audio encoder parameter values
    handle DMDVIaudioencoder structure, created by dmDVIAudioEncoderCreate(3dm). params List of parameters for specification. Null (0) value ok.
 dmedia/dmedia(3d) -- Introduction to the IRIS Digital Media Libraries
    A "media stream" is a continuous stream of audio or video data entering or leaving the computer system through the audio/video connectors, or a stream of video data which is displayed through the graphics subsystem. An interlaced video stream consists of alternating even and odd video fields. Each field in the stream is sampled at a different time. Odd fields are vertically offset from even fields by one scan line. A non- interlaced video stream is composed of video frames. A frame may be conv...
 dmedia/dmFS1016Decode(3d) -- implements the US Federal Standard 1016 4800/7200/9600 bits/s CELP (Code Excited Linear Predictive) Voice Code
    handle DMFS1016decoder structure, created by dmFS1016DecoderCreate(3dm), specifies the signal processing parameters. ibuf pointer to input compressed data buffer. The data format is unsigned char (8-bit). This bitstream buffer must consist of a multiple of 18 bytes. obuf pointer to output sample data buffer. The data format is short (16-bit). The samples are assumed to be two's complement. The sampling rate must be 8 kHz. nsamples number of sample in the output buffer to be generated. The value...
 dmedia/dmFS1016DecoderCreate(3d) -- allocate new DMFS1016decoder structure
    decoder DMFS1016decoder structure to be allocated.
 dmedia/dmFS1016DecoderDestroy(3d) -- deallocate a DMFS1016decoder
    handle DMFS1016decoder structure to be deallocated. This structure was created by dmFS1016DecoderCreate(3dm).
 dmedia/dmFS1016DecoderGetParams(3d) -- get FS1016 decoder parameter values
    handle DMFS1016decoder structure, created by dmFS1016DecoderCreate(3dm). params List of parameters for query.
 dmedia/dmFS1016DecoderReset(3d) -- fill decoder internal buffers with zeros.
    decoder DMFS1016decoder structure
 dmedia/dmFS1016DecoderSetParams(3d) -- set FS1016 decoder parameter values.
    handle DMFS1016decoder structure, created by dmFS1016DecoderCreate(3dm). params List of parameters for specification. Null (0) value is acceptable.
 dmedia/dmFS1016Encode(3d) -- implements the US Federal Standard 1016 4800/7200/9600 bits/s CELP (Code Excited Linear Predictive) Voice Code
    handle DMFS1016encoder structure, created by dmFS1016EncoderCreate(3dm), specifies the signal processing parameters. ibuf pointer to input sample data buffer. The data format is short (16-bit). The samples are assumed to be two's complement. The sampling rate must be 8 kHz. obuf pointer to output data buffer. The data format is unsigned char (8-bit). This bitstream buffer must consist of a multiple of 18 bytes. nsamples number of samples in the input buffer to be processed. The value of nsample...
 dmedia/dmFS1016EncoderCreate(3d) -- allocate new DMFS1016encoder structure
    encoder DMFS1016encoder structure to be allocated.
 dmedia/dmFS1016EncoderDestroy(3d) -- deallocate a DMFS1016encoder
    handle DMFS1016encoder structure to be deallocated. This structure was created by dmFS1016EncoderCreate(3dm).
 dmedia/dmFS1016EncoderGetParams(3d) -- get FS1016 encoder parameter values
    handle DMFS1016encoder structure, created by dmFS1016EncoderCreate(3dm). params List of parameters for query.
 dmedia/dmFS1016EncoderReset(3d) -- fill encoder internal buffers with zeros.
    encoder DMFS1016encoder structure
 dmedia/dmFS1016EncoderSetParams(3d) -- set FS1016 encoder parameter values.
    handle DMFS1016encoder structure, created by dmFS1016EncoderCreate(3dm). params List of parameters for specification. Null (0) value ok.
 fx/DMFXDialog(3d) -- A dialog class for plugins
    #include Methods of class DMFXDialog: DMFXDialog( const char * name, Widget parent, const String * resources ) ~DMFXDialog() Widget getWorkAreaRowColumn()
 fx/dmFXDrawPixels(3d) -- pixel transfer operations for special effects
    These two parameters are common to all of these functions. The other parameters are described below in the sections on the different functions. Page 1 dmFXDrawPixels(3dm) dmFXDrawPixels(3dm) destination The image buffer into which pixels are copied. source The image buffer from which pixels are copied.
 fx/dmFXGetDataPtr(3d) -- return a pointer to the pixels stored in a DMfxbuffer
    fxbuffer A buffer that was created with dmFXAllocateImageBuffers.
 fx/dmFXGetDMBuffer(3d) -- return the DMbuffer associated with a DMfxbuffer
    fxbuffer A buffer that was created with dmFXAllocateImageBuffers. returnDMBuffer A pointer to a DMbuffer* to fill in.
 fx/DMFXImageViewer(3d) -- An image viewer class for plugins
    Special effects plugins may have user customizable settings in the form of a dialog box. These dialog boxes may have an image viewer. This class provides an easy way for plugins to display an image.
 fx/dmFXIsGLExtensionSupported(3d) -- Find out if a GL Extension is supported
    buffer The destination scanline buffer to query. extension The GL extension to look for.
 fx/dmFXJoinFields(3d) -- join two fields into a single frame
    inputUsage Specifies the modes in which dstFrame will be used as input; says how the image will be read from the buffer and used as input to a plug-in or application. The value is a bitwise combination of one or more of: bufInputDirect, bufInputTexture, bufInputDrawPixels, bufInputMovie. The options set must include all of the different ways in which dstFrame will be used. fieldA The "top-most" field. Scanline 0 of fieldA will be copied to scanline 0 of the destination frame (dstFrame). fieldB...
 fx/dmFXMergeResources(3d) -- load and merge plugin resources with those of the parent application
    rf The name of the X resource file.
 fx/dmFXSplitFields(3d) -- split a frame out into two fields
    inputUsage Specifies the modes in which the destination field buffers (fieldA and fieldB) will be used as input; says how the image will be read from the buffers and used as input to a plug-in or application. The value is a bitwise combination of one or more of: bufInputDirect, bufInputTexture, bufInputDrawPixels, bufInputMovie. The options set must include all of the different ways in which fieldA and fieldB will be used. srcFrame The source frame to copy scanlines from. The even numbered scanl...
 fx/dmFXTexImage2D(3d) -- load an image for use as a texture for special effects
    source The image buffer holding the image to be used as a texture. mipmap If true, a mipmap will be generated so that the mipmapped texture modes can be used.
 fx/dmFXUpdateImageBuffer(3d) -- change the active size of a special effects buffer
    imageFormat A parameter list that describes the new image size to be stored in the buffer. buffer An image buffer. numberOfBuffers The number of elements in the array buffers. buffers An array of image buffers.
 dmedia/dmG711(3d) -- G.711 mu-law, A-law conversion routines
    samples pointer to input sample data buffer. The data format is short (16-bit). The samples are assumed to be two's complement. Sampling rate could range from 8 kHz to 48 kHz. mulawdata pointer to output mulaw data buffer. The data format is unsigned char (8-bit). Alawdata pointer to output Alaw data buffer. The data format is unsigned char (8-bit). Page 1 dmG711(3dm) dmG711(3dm) numsamples length of the input and output buffers, in samples....
 dmedia/dmG722Decode(3d) -- implements the ITU (International Telecommunication Union) Recommendation G.722 decompression.
    handle DMG722decoder structure, created by dmG722DecoderCreate(3dm), specifies the signal processing parameters. ibuf pointer to input compressed data buffer. The data format is unsigned char (8-bit). obuf pointer to output sample data buffer. The data format is short (16-bit). The samples are assumed to be two's complement. Sampling rate must be 16 kHz or less. nsamples number of sample in the input buffer to be processed. the value of nsamples passed to the G.722 decode/decode routines must a...
 dmedia/dmG722DecoderCreate(3d) -- allocate new DMG722decoder structure
    decoder DMG722decoder structure to be allocated. maxsamples maximum of the data samples that can be process by dmG722Decode(3dm) in a single call. The input and output data format for dmG722Decode(3dm) are 8-bit unsigned char and 16-bit short, respectively. decode_mode G.722 decompression mode. They can be 1, 2, or 3, which correspond to 64, 56 or 48 kbit/sec for audio coding and 0, 8 or 16 kbit/sec. for data....
 dmedia/dmG722DecoderDestroy(3d) -- deallocate an DMG722decoder
    handle DMG722decoder structure to be deallocated. This structure was created by dmG722DecoderCreate(3dm).
 dmedia/dmG722DecoderGetParams(3d) -- get G722 decoder parameter values
    handle DMG722decoder structure, created by dmG722DecoderCreate(3dm). params List of parameters for query.
 dmedia/dmG722DecoderReset(3d) -- fill decoder internal buffers with zeros.
    decoder DMG722decoder structure
 dmedia/dmG722Encode(3d) -- implements the ITU (International Telecommunication Union) Recommendation G.722 compression.
    handle DMG722encoder structure, created by dmG722EncoderCreate(3dm), specifies the signal processing parameters. ibuf pointer to input sample data buffer. The data format is short (16-bit). The samples are assumed to be two's complement. Sampling rate must be 16 kHz or less. obuf pointer to output data buffer. The data format is unsigned char (8-bit). nsamples number of samples in the input buffer to be processed. the value of nsamples passed to the G.722 encode/decode routines must always be a...
 dmedia/dmG722EncoderCreate(3d) -- allocate new DMG722encoder structure
    encoder DMG722encoder structure to be allocated. maxsamples maxmum of the date samples that can be process by dmG722Encode(3dm) in a single call. The input and output data format for dmG722Encode(3dm) are 16-bit short and 8-bit unsigned char respectively.
 dmedia/dmG722EncoderDestroy(3d) -- deallocate an DMG722encoder
    handle DMG722encoder structure to be deallocated. This structure was created by dmG722EncoderCreate(3dm).
 dmedia/dmG722EncoderGetParams(3d) -- get G722 encoder parameter values
    handle DMG722encoder structure, created by dmG722EncoderCreate(3dm). params List of parameters for query.
 dmedia/dmG722EncoderReset(3d) -- fill encoder internal buffers with zeros.
    encoder DMG722encoder structure
 dmedia/dmG726Decode(3d) -- implements ITU (International Telecommunication Union) Recommendation G.726 ADPCM decompression for input comp
    handle DMG726decoder structure, created by dmG726DecoderCreate(3dm), specifies the signal processing parameters. ibuf pointer to input compressed data buffer, an array of bytes. The data format is unsigned char (8-bit). The input bitstrem buffer consists of a multiple of 1, 3, 1, or 5 bytes, for operations at 16, 24, 32, or 40 kbit/s respectively. obuf pointer to output sample data buffer, an array of short (16 bits) for linear output or unsigned char for A-law or mu-law output. For linear outpu...
 dmedia/dmG726DecoderCreate(3d) -- allocate new DMG726decoder structure
    decoder DMG726decoder structure to be allocated.
 dmedia/dmG726DecoderDestroy(3d) -- deallocate a DMG726decoder
    handle DMG726decoder structure to be deallocated. This structure was created by dmG726DecoderCreate(3dm).
 dmedia/dmG726DecoderGetParams(3d) -- get G726 decoder parameter values
    handle DMG726decoder structure, created by dmG726DecoderCreate(3dm). params List of parameters for query.
 dmedia/dmG726DecoderReset(3d) -- fill decoder internal buffers with zeros.
    decoder DMG726decoder structure
 dmedia/dmG726DecoderSetParams(3d) -- set G726 decoder parameter values
    handle DMG726decoder structure, created by dmG726DecoderCreate(3dm). params List of parameters for specification. Null (0) value ok.
 dmedia/dmG726Encode(3d) -- implements ITU (International Telecommunication Union)
    handle DMG726encoder structure, created by dmG726EncoderCreate(3dm), specifies the signal processing parameters. ibuf pointer to input sample data buffer, an array of short (16 bits) for linear input or unsigned char for A-law or mu-law input. For linear input, samples are assumed to be two's complement. Data buffer must be a multiple (the same multiple as that of output bitstrem buffer) of 4, 8, 2, or 8 for operations at 16, 24, 32, or 40 kbit/s respectively. This assumes the sampling rate of ...
 dmedia/dmG726EncoderCreate(3d) -- allocate new DMG726encoder structure
    encoder DMG726encoder structure to be allocated.
 dmedia/dmG726EncoderDestroy(3d) -- deallocate a DMG726encoder
    handle DMG726encoder structure to be deallocated. This structure was created by dmG726EncoderCreate(3dm).
 dmedia/dmG726EncoderGetParams(3d) -- get G726 encoder parameter values
    handle DMG726encoder structure, created by dmG726EncoderCreate(3dm). params List of parameters for query.
 dmedia/dmG726EncoderReset(3d) -- fill encoder internal buffers with zeros.
    encoder DMG726encoder structure
 dmedia/dmG726EncoderSetParams(3d) -- set G726 encoder parameter values
    handle DMG726encoder structure, created by dmG726EncoderCreate(3dm). params List of parameters for specification. Null (0) value ok.
 dmedia/dmG728Decode(3d) -- implements the ITU (International Telecommunication Union)
    handle DMG728decoder structure, created by dmG728DecoderCreate(3dm), specifies the signal processing parameters. ibuf pointer to input compressed data buffer. The data format is unsigned char (8-bit). This bitstrem buffer must consist of a multiple of 10 bytes. obuf pointer to output sample data buffer. The data format is short (16-bit). The samples are assumed to be two's complement. The sampling rate must be 8 kHz. nsamples number of sample in the output buffer to be generated. the value of n...
 dmedia/dmG728DecoderCreate(3d) -- allocate new DMG728decoder structure
    decoder DMG728decoder structure to be allocated.
 dmedia/dmG728DecoderDestroy(3d) -- deallocate a DMG728decoder
    handle DMG728decoder structure to be deallocated. This structure was created by dmG728DecoderCreate(3dm).
 dmedia/dmG728DecoderGetParams(3d) -- get G728 decoder parameter values
    handle DMG728decoder structure, created by dmG728DecoderCreate(3dm). params List of parameters for query.
 dmedia/dmG728DecoderReset(3d) -- fill decoder internal buffers with zeros.
    decoder DMG728decoder structure
 dmedia/dmG728DecoderSetParams(3d) -- set G728 decoder parameter values.
    handle DMG728decoder structure, created by dmG728DecoderCreate(3dm). params List of parameters for specification. Null (0) value ok.
 dmedia/dmG728Encode(3d) -- implements the ITU (International Telecommunication Union)
    handle DMG728encoder structure, created by dmG728EncoderCreate(3dm), specifies the signal processing parameters. ibuf pointer to input sample data buffer. The data format is short (16-bit). The samples are assumed to be two's complement. The sampling rate must be 8 kHz. obuf pointer to output data buffer. The data format is unsigned char (8-bit). This bitstrem buffer must consist of a multiple of 10 bytes. nsamples number of samples in the input buffer to be processed. the value of nsamples pas...
 dmedia/dmG728EncoderCreate(3d) -- allocate new DMG728encoder structure
    encoder DMG728encoder structure to be allocated.
 dmedia/dmG728EncoderDestroy(3d) -- deallocate a DMG728encoder
    handle DMG728encoder structure to be deallocated. This structure was created by dmG728EncoderCreate(3dm).
 dmedia/dmG728EncoderGetParams(3d) -- get G728 encoder parameter values
    handle DMG728encoder structure, created by dmG728EncoderCreate(3dm). params List of parameters for query.
 dmedia/dmG728EncoderReset(3d) -- fill encoder internal buffers with zeros.
    encoder DMG728encoder structure
 dmedia/dmGetError(3d) -- retrieve an error number, message, and detail for Digital Media errors
    pid The process id in which to check for an error. In dmGetError(), this defaults to the current pid as returned by getpid(2). errornum A pointer to an integer into which the error number of the current error will be loaded. If errornum is NULL, it will be ignored. error_detail The address of a char array of size DM_MAX_ERROR_DETAIL, allocated in the application's memory space. A detailed description of the error will be loaded into this array, if such a description is available. This string wi...
 dmedia/dmGetUST(3d) -- get digital media Unadjusted System Time (UST)
    dmGetUST(3dm) returns a high-resolution, unsigned 64-bit number to processes using libdmedia. The value of UST is the number of nanoseconds since the system was booted. Though the resolution is 1 nanosecond, the actual accuracy may be somewhat lower and varies from system to system. Unlike other representations of time under UNIX, the value from which this timestamp derives is never adjusted; therefore it is guaranteed to be monotonically increasing. Typically, the UST is used as a timestamp; th...
 dmedia/dmGSMDecode(3d) -- implements the European GSM 06.10 provisional standard for
    handle DMGSMdecoder structure, created by dmGSMDecoderCreate(3dm), specifies the signal processing parameters. ibuf pointer to input compressed data buffer, an array of a multiple of 33 bytes. The data format is unsigned char (8-bit). obuf pointer to output sample data buffer, an array of size of a multiple of 160. The data format is short (16-bit). The samples are assumed to be two's complement. The sampling rate must be 8 kHz. numSamples number of sample in the output buffer to be generated. ...
 dmedia/dmGSMDecoderCreate(3d) -- allocate new DMGSMdecoder structure
    decoder DMGSMdecoder structure to be allocated.
 dmedia/dmGSMDecoderDestroy(3d) -- deallocate a DMGSMdecoder
    handle DMGSMdecoder structure to be deallocated. This structure was created by dmGSMDecoderCreate(3dm).
 dmedia/dmGSMDecoderGetParams(3d) -- get GSM decoder parameter values
    handle DMGSMdecoder structure, created by dmGSMDecoderCreate(3dm). params List of parameters for query.
 dmedia/dmGSMDecoderReset(3d) -- fill decoder internal buffers with zeros.
    decoder DMGSMdecoder structure
 dmedia/dmGSMEncode(3d) -- implements the European GSM 06.10 provisional standard for
    handle DMGSMencoder structure, created by dmGSMEncoderCreate(3dm), specifies the signal processing parameters. ibuf pointer to input sample data buffer, an array of size of a multiple of 160. The data format is short (16-bit). The samples are assumed to be two's complement. The sampling rate must be 8 kHz. obuf pointer to output data buffer, an array of a multiple of 33 bytes. The data format is unsigned char (8-bit). numSamples number of sample in the input buffer to be processed. the value of...
 dmedia/dmGSMEncoderCreate(3d) -- allocate new DMGSMencoder structure
    encoder DMGSMencoder structure to be allocated.
 dmedia/dmGSMEncoderDestroy(3d) -- deallocate a DMGSMencoder
    handle DMGSMencoder structure to be deallocated. This structure was created by dmGSMEncoderCreate(3dm).
 dmedia/dmGSMEncoderGetParams(3d) -- get GSM encoder parameter values
    handle DMGSMencoder structure, created by dmGSMEncoderCreate(3dm). params List of parameters for query.
 dmedia/dmGSMEncoderReset(3d) -- fill encoder internal buffers with zeros.
    encoder DMGSMencoder structure
 dmedia/dmicanytoany(3d) -- Any to Any image conversion utility function
    pBufferSrc pointer to source image pBufferDst pointer to destination image pParamsSrc pointer to Source parameters that describes the source image. pParamsDst pointer to Destination parameters that describes the destination image, the user indends to convert to. pParamsConv pointer to Conversion parameters that may be used during any color conversion.
 dmedia/dmicchoose(3d) -- return an image converter that matches specified image parameters
    dmICChooseConverter returns the index of an image converter which performs the conversion of image data described by src to that described by dst using the conversion control parameters in conv. The number returned is for use in dmICGetDescription and dmICCreate. If no converter could be found, -1 will be returned and an error will be set (see dmSetError(3dm)). If the function succeeds, src, dst and conv can then be used in dmICSetSrcParams, dmICSetDstParams and dmICSetConvParams respectively. I...
 dmedia/dmicconv(3d) -- manipulate conversion controls of an image converter context
    The conversion parameters convParams control the image converter's operation. The list of supported conversion parameters vary from converter to converter. dmICGetDefaultConvParams returns the set of supported parameters and their default values. Conversion parameters supported by some converters are:
 dmedia/dmicdst(3d) -- manipulate image converter context dst image format
    The destination parameters describe the output image of the image converter. The minimum set of parameters that must be present in the dstParams are:
 dmedia/dmicgetnum(3d) -- find out about available image converters
    dmICGetNum returns the number of image converters available.This value may change from invocations to invocations, depending upon whether any image converters has been added or removed from the system since its last invocation. dmICGetDescription returns the description of the indicated converter. The value of the i argument ranges from 0 to one less than the value returned by dmICGetNum. The description consists of the values of the following DMparams parameters: DM_IC_ID Use dmParamsGetInt to ...
 dmedia/dmicopen(3d) -- create and destroy image converter context
    dmICCreate creates an image converter context. The actual selection of an image converter is separate from this operation. The i argument specifies the image converter to create and is a value in the range of 0 to one less than the return value of dmICGetNum. The return value of dmICChooseConverter is always valid directly in dmICCreate. NOTE: The i value for a given image converter may change at any time. The converter argument is the address of a caller supplied data structure for for use as a...
 dmedia/dmicpool(3d) -- get the input/output buffering needs of the image converter
    The image converters only operate on DMbuffer's allocated from a DMbufferpool (see dmBuffer(3dm)). Prior to setting up a pool for use by an image converter, users must call dmICGetSrcPoolParams and dmICGetDstPoolParams to set up the poolParams used to initialize a pool. If any of the source or destination buffers are to be shared with other subsystems, the Video Library (VL) or the Graphics Library (OpenGL), the application must make the corresponding calls in those libraries to make sure that ...
 dmedia/dmicqueue(3d) -- image converter queue management
    dmICGetDstQueueFD returns the file descriptor of the output queue, that becomes readable when output becomes available from the image converter. A user may use this in readfds in select(2) or in pollfds in poll(2) in an asynchronous application to receive notification when there is output available from the image converter. dmICGetDstQueueFilled returns the number of output buffers available to be received from the image converter using dmICReceive. dmICGetSrcQueueFilled returns the number of bu...
 dmedia/dmicreceive(3d) -- transfer output from the image converter
    dmICReceive receives the next available output buffer from the image converter. If it succeeds, dstBuffer will point to an output buffer that contains the output bytes, allocated by the image converter. After dmICReceive returns, the caller is automatically attached to the buffer (see dmBuffer(3dm). When dstBuffer is no longer referenced, dmBufferFree must be called to free up the buffer resource. The contents of dstBuffer should not be modified. After dmICReceive returns, dmICGetSrcParams, dmIC...
 dmedia/dmicsend(3d) -- transfer input to the image converter context
    This function sends a source buffer together with its reference buffers to the image converter. converter the converter instance srcBuffer the source buffer numRefBuffers the number of reference buffers pointed to by refBuffers refBuffers an array of reference buffers
 dmedia/dmicsrc(3d) -- manipulate image converter context src image format
    The source parameters describe the input image of the image converter. The minimum set of parameters that must be present in the srcParams are:
 dmedia/dmicwork(3d) -- call the image converter and have it perform a task
    This function calls into the image converter and has it perform a task (such as a compress or uncompress) on the buffers that have previously been sent to it using dmICSend. converter the converter instance status_flags bit field flags returning information about what transpired during the dmICWork call, especially in the event of an error. Flags include: DM_IC_WORK_NO_STATUS, DM_IC_WORK_ERROR, DM_IC_WORK_NOT_NEEDED, DM_IC_WORK_INSUFFICIENT_INPUT_DATA, and DM_IC_WORK_INSUFFICIENT_OUTPUT_SPACE. n...
 dmedia/dmLTC(3d) -- decode linear timecode (LTC)
    These routines provide a mechanism for decoding linear (or longitudinal) time code (LTC). LTC is a mechanism for storing and transferring SMPTE time code as an audio-like waveform. Applications may use LTC to synchronize audio, video, or other events with external devices by decoding an LTC signal connected to an audio input port, or they may parse the LTC code from a previously captured audio or movie file. To decode LTC from an external device, the LTC or time code output of the device should ...
 dmedia/dmMPEG1AudioDecode(3d) -- decodes a single compressed block of data created by a call to dmMPEG1AudioEncode(3dm).
    decoder DMMPEG1audiodecoder structure, created by dmMPEG1AudioDecoderCreate(3dm), specifies and stores the signal processing parameters. It describes the kind of decompression to perform, and holds the between-block state of the decompressor. It is initially generated and processed by calls to dmMPEG1AudioDecoderCreate(3dm) and dmMPEG1AudioDecoderSetParams(3dm), and is modified on each call. To get decoder in the proper state for the first call, see DESCRIPTION below. cmpData points to the next ...
 dmedia/dmMPEG1AudioDecoderCreate(3d) -- allocate new DMMPEG1audiodecoder structure.
    decoder DMMPEG1audiodecoder structure to be allocated.
 dmedia/dmMPEG1AudioDecoderDestroy(3d) -- deallocate a DMMPEG1audiodecoder
    decoder DMMPEG1audiodecoder structure to be deallocated. This structure was created by dmMPEG1AudioDecoderCreate(3dm).
 dmedia/dmMPEG1AudioDecoderReset(3d) -- fill decoder internal buffers with zeros.
    decoder DMMPEG1audiodecoder structure
 dmedia/dmMPEG1AudioEncode(3d) -- Compresses a single block of audio data using MPEG1 audio compression algorithm.
    encoder DMMPEG1audioencoder structure, created by dmMPEG1AudioEncoderCreate(3dm), specifies and stores the signal processing parameters. It describes the kind of compression to perform, and holds the between-block state of the compressor. It is initially generated and processed by calls to dmMPEG1AudioEncoderCreate(3dm) and dmMPEG1AudioEncoderSetParams(3dm), and is modified on each call. sampBuf pointer to input sample data buffer. The data format is short (16-bit). The samples are assumed to be...
 dmedia/dmMPEG1AudioEncoderCreate(3d) -- allocate new DMMPEG1audioencoder structure.
    encoder DMMPEG1audioencoder structure to be allocated.
 dmedia/dmMPEG1AudioEncoderDestroy(3d) -- deallocate a DMMPEG1audioencoder
    encoder DMMPEG1audioencoder structure to be deallocated. This structure was created by dmMPEG1AudioEncoderCreate(3dm).
 dmedia/dmMPEG1AudioEncoderReset(3d) -- fill encoder internal buffers with zeros.
    handle DMMPEG1audioencoder structure
 dmedia/dmMPEG1AudioEncoderSetParams(3d) -- set and query MPEG1 audio encoder/decoder parameter values.
    encoder DMMPEG1audioencoder structure, created by dmMPEG1AudioEncoderCreate(3dm). decoder DMMPEG1audiodecoder structure, created by dmMPEG1AudioDecoderCreate(3dm). params List of parameters for specification.
 dmedia/dmMPEG1AudioFilterStateCreate(3d) -- allocates new or frees DMMPEG1audiofilterstate structure.
    filterState DMMPEG1audiofilterstate structure to be allocated or freed.
 dmedia/dmMPEG1AudioFilterStateSave(3d) -- saves or restores encoder or decoder filter state.
    coder either DMMPEG1audioencoder or DMMPEG1audiodecoder structure, from/to which the filter state information is to be saved/restored. filterState DMMPEG1audiofilterstate structure to be used to save or restore the filter state information.
 dmedia/dmMPEG1AudioHeaderGetBlockBytes(3d) -- gets expected length in bytes of any compressed data block.
    decoder DMMPEG1audiodecoder structure, created by dmMPEG1AudioDecoderCreate(3dm), specifies and stores the signal processing parameters. It describes the kind of decompression to perform, and holds the between-block state of the decompressor. It is initially generated by calls to dmMPEG1AudioDecoderCreate(3dm) and dmMPEG1AudioDecoderSetParams(3dm). dmMPEG1AudioHeaderGetBlockBytes modifies DMMPEG1audiodecoder structure to reflect the header on the compressed data block if one is found; decoder pa...
 dmedia/dmMPEG1AudioHeaderGetParams(3d) -- get decoder parameter information from a header of any compressed MPEG1 audio data block.
    cmpData points to a block of data bytes presumed to constitute the compressed data stream and start with a MPEG audio header. params List of parameters for specification.
 dmnet/dmnet(3d) -- Digital Media Network Library
    dmNet Library is used by applications that need to transfer DMbuffers between processes on the same host, or on different hosts across a network. dmNet performs marshalling and unmarshalling of DMbuffers, converting timestamps and endianness. dmNet abstracts the underlying transport, and provides maximal throughput across network transports like Ethernet, Striped Hippi and Fibrechannel, by using native protocols whenever possible, thus liberating applications from the task of network-specific pe...
 dmnet/dmnetconnect(3d) -- DMNetConnection connection management
    dmNetConnect is the sender side routine which sets up a control connection. It opens a socket descriptor and tries to connect to the specified address. It calls connect and sets appropriate socket options. It requires a port and a hostname, specified through the parameters DMNET_PORT and DMNET_REMOTE_HOSTNAME. dmNetListen and dmNetAccept are the receiver side calls that set up a control connection. dmNetListen opens a socket descriptor for control, sets socket options as appropriate, calls bind ...
 dmnet/dmnetdatafd(3d) -- return FD associated with a DMNetConnection
    dmNetDataFd returns a file descriptor associated with the specified DMNetConnection. This descriptor is suitable for use by select() to signify the availability of incoming data.
 dmnet/dmnetgetparams(3d) -- Get DMparams associated with a DMNetConnection
    dmNetGetParams takes the specified parameter list and modifies and/or adds parameters as appropriate for creating a DMbufferpool for use with the specified DMNetConnection. Applications that send or receive DMbuffers from a DMNetconnection must call this routine before allocating a DMbufferpool.
 dmnet/dmnetopen(3d) -- open/close a dmNet connection to another process
    dmNetOpen Allocates and initializes a DMNetConnection structure which can be used to open a connection to a remote process in order to pass DMbuffers. dmNetClose closes and de-allocates all structures associated with the specified DMNetConnection.
 dmnet/dmnetregister(3d) -- register memory with dmNet
    dmNetRegisterPool and dmNetRegisterBuffer are the suite of dmNet memory registration calls, relevant only to the receiver process. One of these two calls must be made before a call to dmNetRecv is made, or dmNetRecv will fail with ENOMEM. dmNetRegisterPool allows an application to specify a buffer pool from which dmNetRecv may allocate memory for incoming DMbuffers. The buffer must be returned to the pool with a call to dmBufferFree after the application is done with it, or dmNetRecv may fail wi...
 dmnet/dmnetsend(3d) -- send and receive DMbuffers
    dmNetSend sends the specified DMbuffer over the open data connection specified by DMnetconnection. dmNetRecv returns a filled DMbuffer from the open data connection specified by DMnetconnection. The DMbuffer is allocated from the DMbufferpool which had been previous registered with the call to dmNetRegisterPool or is pre-allocated and passed into dmNetRecv, after a call to dmNetRegisterBuffer .
 dmedia/dmParamsCreate(3d) -- create and destroy digital media parameter/value lists
    Parameter/value lists are used by the Digital Media Libraries to hold configuration information about digital video and movies. There are standard parameters that apply to images (for video and movies) and standard parameters that apply to audio (for movies). The function dmParamsCreate is used to create a new (empty) parameter/value list. This can be filled in one of several ways: (1) using the generic "set" functions such as dmParamsSetInt, (2) using a function to set up the standard paramet...
 dmedia/dmParamsFlatten(3d) -- convert digital media parameter lists to and from byte strings
    These functions are used to convert a digital media parameter list into a form that can be written to a file or sent over a network, and then later to reconstruct the parameter list. dmParamsFlatten converts the parameters in sourceParams to a byte string and stores the result in the buffer provided by the caller. There are two ways to use it: to store just one parameter, or to store the entire contents of a parameter list. To store just one parameter, pass the name of the desired parameter in p...
 dmedia/dmParamsGetElem(3d) -- obsolete functions to get indexed elements in a digital media parameter/value list
    These functions have been obsoleted and are provide only for backward compatibility. New implementations should use dmParamsScan to traverse a parameter/value list, or dmParamsGetType to determine the type of an entry in a list. dmParamsGetElem returns the name of the nth element of a parameter value list. The index given must be from 0 to one less than the number of elements in the list. dmParamsGetElemType returns the type of value stored in an entry in the list. The value returned will be one...
 dmedia/dmParamsGetInt(3d) -- get values from digital media parameter/value lists
    These functions all retrieve values stored in a parameter/value list. They assume that the named parameter is present and is of the specified type; the debugging version of the library asserts that this is the case. The value, or a pointer to it is returned. For strings, binary data, parameter lists, and table-of-contents entries, the pointer returned points into the internal data structure of the parameter list. It should never be freed, and is only guaranteed to remain valid until the next tim...
 dmedia/dmParamsGetIntArray(3d) -- get arrays of values from digital media parameter/value lists
    These functions all retrieve values stored in a parameter/value list. They assume that the named parameter is present and is of the specified type; the debugging version of the library asserts that this is the case. The value, or a pointer to it is returned. The returned array points to the internal data structure of the parameter list, and is owned by the parameter list. It should never be freed, and is only guaranteed to remain valid until the next time the list is changed. In general, if you ...
 dmedia/dmParamsGetIntRange(3d) -- get ranges of values from digital media parameter/value lists
    These functions all retrieve values stored in a parameter/value list. They assume that the named parameter is present and is of the specified type; the debugging version of the library asserts that this is the case. The value, or a pointer to it is returned. The returned range points to the internal data structure of the parameter list, and is owned by the parameter list. It should never be freed, and is only guaranteed to remain valid until the next time the list is changed. In general, if you ...
 dmedia/dmParamsGetNumElems(3d) -- manipulate the contents of a digital media parameter/value list
    dmParamsGetNumElems returns the number of elements present in a parameter/value list. The number of elements in a list, and their ordering is guaranteed to remain stable unless the list is changed using one of the "set" functions, by copying an element into it, or by removing an element. dmParamsGetType returns the type of value stored in an entry in the list. The value returned will be one of: DM_TYPE_ENUM, DM_TYPE_INT, DM_TYPE_STRING, DM_TYPE_FLOAT, DM_TYPE_FRACTION, DM_TYPE_PARAMS, or DM_TY...
 dmedia/dmParamsScan(3d) -- scan all entries of a digital media parameter/value list
    dmParamsScan scans all of the elements present in a parameter/value list, calling the provided operator function on each entry. This can be used in a program that wants to loop through the contents of a parameter/value list. dmParamsScan applies scanFunc to each element in a parameter/value list, passing the name of the list entry and scanArg as parameters to scanFunc. If scanFunc sets the value of the variable stopScan to DM_TRUE, the parameter/value list scan will be stopped, and the return va...
 dmedia/dmParamsSetInt(3d) -- set values in digital media parameter/value lists
    These functions all store values in a parameter value list. If there is already a value in the list with the given name it will be replaced with the new one. For strings, binary data, parameter lists, and table-ofcontents entries, a copy is made that is owned by the parameter list. DM_SUCCESS is returned if the operation succeeded, DM_FAILURE if there was not enough memory available to hold a copy of the value. Page 1 dmParamsSetInt(3dm) dmParamsSetInt(3dm)...
 dmedia/dmParamsSetIntArray(3d) -- set array values in digital media parameter/value lists
    These functions all store arrays of values in a parameter value list. If there is already a value in the list with the given name it will be replaced with the new one. The contents of the array passed in is copied into the parameter list. This means that the caller can free the array structure after storing it in the parameter list. DM_SUCCESS is returned if the operation succeeded, DM_FAILURE if there was not enough memory available to hold a copy of the array....
 dmedia/dmParamsSetIntRange(3d) -- set range values in digital media parameter/value lists
    These functions all store ranges of values in a parameter value list. If there is already a value in the list with the given name it will be replaced with the new one. The contents of the range passed in is copied into the parameter list. This means that the caller can free the range structure after storing it in the parameter list. DM_SUCCESS is returned if the operation succeeded, DM_FAILURE if there was not enough memory available to hold a copy of the range....
 fx/dmPMConvertToByteStream(3d) -- saves away a special effect as a byte stream
    effect A pointer to a DMeffect, which was returned from dmPMCreateEffect. byteStream A placeholder for the byte stream. numBytes The size of the byte stream to be returned.
 fx/dmPMCreateEffect(3d) -- create and destroy special effects
    manager A pointer to a DMplugmgr, which was returned from dmPMCreateManager. plugin A pointer to a DMplugin, which was returned from dmPMInitPlugin. name The name of a plugin from which to create the DMeffect. prefix The prefix of a plugin from which to create the DMeffect; can be NULL. effect A pointer to a DMeffect, which was returned from dmPMCreateEffect or dmPMCreateEffectByName.
 fx/dmPMCreateFromByteStream(3d) -- recreates a special effect from a byte stream
    manager A pointer to a DMplugmgr, which was returned from dmPMCreateManager. byteStream The byte stream from which to create the DMeffect. numBytes The size of the byte stream.
 fx/dmPMCreateManager(3d) -- create and destroy special
    parent The parent widget to use if the plugin requires a GUI; can be NULL. manager A pointer to a DMplugmgr, which was returned from dmPMCreateManager.
 fx/dmPMGetAppShell(3d) -- retrieves the app shell widget used by the pluginmanager
    manager A pointer to a DMplugmgr, which was returned from dmPMCreateManager.
 fx/dmPMGetDefaultPluginPathForType(3d) -- return the default path for plugins of a specific type
    pluginType The plugin type that you want the default path for. pluginType must be exactly one of: DM_VIDEO_FILTER, DM_VIDEO_TRANSITION, DM_AUDIO_FILTER. Note that with this usage of pluginType, you cannot specify more than one plugin type.
 fx/dmPMGetName(3d) -- retrieve the name, prefix, pathname or type of a plugin
    plugin A pointer to a DMplugin, which was created with dmPMInitPlugin or dmPMInitDirectory.
 fx/dmPMGetPlugin(3d) -- retrieve a pointer to a special effects plugin
    manager A pointer to a DMplugmgr, which was returned from dmPMCreateManager. n The index into the plugin list in the plugin-manager. name The name of a plugin to retrieve. prefix The prefix of a plugin to retrieve; can be NULL. pathname The pathname of a plugin to retrieve. effect A pointer to a DMeffect, which was returned from dmPMCreateEffect.
 fx/dmPMGetPluginCount(3d) -- returns the number of initialized plugins
    manager A pointer to a DMplugmgr, which was returned from dmPMCreateManager.
 fx/dmPMGetProperty(3d) -- retrieves a property of the specified plugin
    plugin A pointer to a DMplugin, which was created with dmPMInitPlugin or dmPMInitDirectory. property A property to obtain from the plugin. value dmPMGetProperty will fill in the value of the property.
 fx/dmPMGetSourceAUsage(3d) -- retrieves the usage bitmask of the plugin
    plugin A pointer to a DMplugin, which was created with dmPMInitPlugin or dmPMInitDirectory.
 fx/dmPMHasDialog(3d) -- determine whether or not a plugin has a setup dialog
    plugin A pointer to a DMplugin, which was created with dmPMInitPlugin or dmPMInitDirectory.
 fx/dmPMInitDirectory(3d) -- initializes a directory of plugins
    manager A pointer to a DMplugmgr, which was returned from dmPMCreateManager. pathname The pathname of the directory from which to initialize the plugins; can be NULL. typemask The typemask of the plugin type which is a bitwise combination of one or more of: DM_VIDEO_FILTER, DM_VIDEO_TRANSITION, DM_AUDIO_FILTER, or DM_ALL_PLUGIN_TYPES. progressCallback The progressCallback is a pointer to a DMprogresscallback callback. This callback gets triggered periodically during the loading of plugins if and...
 fx/dmPMInitPlugin(3d) -- initializes and frees plugins
    manager A pointer to a DMplugmgr, which was returned from dmPMCreateManager. pathname The pathname of a plugin to initialize. plugin A pointer to a DMplugin, which was returned from dmPMInitPlugin.
 fx/dmPMProcessClip(3d) -- apply special effects to movies
    arrayOfOperations an array of: source movies, filters, and transitions Page 1 dmPMProcessImageClip(3dm) dmPMProcessImageClip(3dm) numberOfOperations The number of DMprocessops in arrayOfOperations. callSetup If true, the setup function (dmPMSetupVideoFilter or dmPMSetupVideoTransition) will be called once for each effect before the movie is processed. frameDuration The fraction frameDuration/timescale is the duration, in seconds, of each frame generated. movieDuration The fraction movieDuration/...
 fx/dmPMSetAudioCallback(3d) -- sets the audio and video callbacks
    effect A pointer to a DMeffect, which was returned from dmPMCreateEffect. audioCallback A callback for a DMeffect, defined as follows: DMstatus DMaudiocallback( void *clientData, int firstByte, int size, unsigned char *samples); videoCallback A callback for a DMeffect, defined as follows: DMstatus DMvideocallback( void *clientData, int frame, DMplugintrack track, /* DM_TRACK_A or DM_TRACK_B */ int width, int height, int rowBytes, unsigned char *data); clientData The clientData gets passed into t...
 fx/dmPMSetupAudioFilter(3d) -- sets up, executes, and cleanups audio filters
    effect A pointer to a DMeffect, which was returned from dmPMCreateEffect. src A pointer to the source audio samples. srcParams The source parameter/value list, a pointer to DMparams, can be created with dmParamsCreate. firstByte The first sample byte offset. size The size of src in bytes. total The total byte size of the audio clip. dst A pointer to the destination audio samples. dstParams The destination parameter/value list, a pointer to DMparams, can be created with dmParamsCreate. Page 1 dmP...
 fx/dmPMSetupVideoFilter(3d) -- sets up, executes, and cleanups video filters
    effect A pointer to a DMeffect, which was returned from dmPMCreateEffect. src A pointer to the video source image. Page 1 dmPMSetupVideoFilter(3dm) dmPMSetupVideoFilter(3dm) srcParams The source parameter/value list, a pointer to DMparams, can be created with dmParamsCreate. part Goes from 0 to total (inclusive). total The total number of frames. dst A pointer to the video destination image. dstParams The destination parameter/value list, a pointer to DMparams, can be created with dmParamsCreate...
 fx/dmPMSetupVideoTransition(3d) -- sets up, executes, and cleanups video transitions
    effect A pointer to a DMeffect, which was returned from dmPMCreateEffect. srcA A pointer to the video source image for track A. srcAParams The source (track A) parameter/value list, a pointer to DMparams, can be created with dmParamsCreate. srcB A pointer to the video source image for track B. srcBParams The source (trackB) parameter/value list, a pointer to DMparams, can be created with dmParamsCreate. part Goes from 0 to total (inclusive). total The total number of frames. dst A pointer to the...
 fx/dmPMSortByName(3d) -- sorts the list of plugins stored in
    manager A pointer to a DMplugmgr, which was returned from dmPMCreateManager.
 dmedia/dmSetAudioDefaults(3d) -- parameters for digital-media audio
    dmSetAudioDefaults sets up a parameter list with all of the necessary parameters to describe audio for the digital-media libraries. The parameters that are set and their values are: DM_MEDIUM = DM_AUDIO, DM_AUDIO_WIDTH = width, DM_AUDIO_FORMAT = DM_AUDIO_TWOS_COMPLEMENT, DM_AUDIO_RATE = rate, DM_AUDIO_CHANNELS = channels, DM_AUDIO_COMPRESSION = DM_AUDIO_UNCOMPRESSED. dmSetAudioDefaults returns DM_SUCCESS if there was enough memory available to set up the parameters, and DM_FAILURE if not. dmAudi...
 dmedia/dmSetImageDefaults(3d) -- parameters for digital-media images
    dmSetImageDefaults sets up a parameter list with all of the necessary parameters to describe an image for the digital-media libraries. The parameters that are set and their values are: DM_MEDIUM = DM_IMAGE, DM_IMAGE_WIDTH = width, DM_IMAGE_HEIGHT = height, DM_IMAGE_RATE = 15.0, DM_IMAGE_COMPRESSION = DM_IMAGE_UNCOMPRESSED, DM_IMAGE_INTERLACING = DM_IMAGE_NONINTERLEAVED, DM_IMAGE_PACKING = packing, DM_IMAGE_ORIENTATION = DM_BOTTOM_TO_TOP, DM_IMAGE_PIXEL_ASPECT = 1.0. dmSetImageDefaults returns DM...
 dmedia/dmTCAddTC(3d) -- digital media timecode mathematics
    DMtimecode A structure containing a representation of SMPTE time code on which certain mathematical and utility functions can be performed. Can be used with: dmTCAddTC(3dm), dmTCAddFrames(3dm), dmTCToString(3dm), dmTCFromSeconds(3dm), dmTCToSeconds(3dm), dmTCFromString(3dm), dmTCFramesPerDay(3dm), and dmTCFramesBetween(3dm). Can also be used with the dmLTC(3dm) and dmVITC(3dm) routines. See also DMtimecode(3dm)....
 dmedia/dmTCFramesBetween(3d) -- digital media timecode mathematics
    DMtimecode A structure containing a representation of SMPTE time code on which certain mathematical and utility functions can be performed. Can be used with: dmTCAddTC(3dm), dmTCAddFrames(3dm), dmTCToString(3dm), dmTCFromSeconds(3dm), dmTCToSeconds(3dm), dmTCFromString(3dm), dmTCFramesPerDay(3dm), and dmTCFramesBetween(3dm). Can also be used with the dmLTC(3dm) and dmVITC(3dm) routines. See also DMtimecode(3dm)....
 dmedia/dmTCFramesPerDay(3d) -- digital media timecode mathematics
    DMtimecode A structure containing a representation of SMPTE time code on which certain mathematical and utility functions can be performed. Can be used with: dmTCAddTC(3dm), dmTCAddFrames(3dm), dmTCToString(3dm), dmTCFromSeconds(3dm), dmTCToSeconds(3dm), dmTCFromString(3dm), dmTCFramesPerDay(3dm), and dmTCFramesBetween(3dm). Can also be used with the dmLTC(3dm) and dmVITC(3dm) routines. See also DMtimecode(3dm)....
 dmedia/dmTCToSeconds(3d) -- digital media timecode mathematics
    DMtimecode A structure containing a representation of SMPTE time code on which certain mathematical and utility functions can be performed. Can be used with: dmTCAddTC(3dm), dmTCAddFrames(3dm), dmTCToString(3dm), dmTCFromSeconds(3dm), dmTCToSeconds(3dm), dmTCFromString(3dm), dmTCFramesPerDay(3dm), and dmTCFramesBetween(3dm). Can also be used with the dmLTC(3dm) and dmVITC(3dm) routines. See also DMtimecode(3dm)....
 dmedia/dmTCToString(3d) -- digital media timecode mathematics
    DMtimecode A structure containing a representation of SMPTE time code on which certain mathematical and utility functions can be performed. Can be used with: dmTCAddTC(3dm), dmTCAddFrames(3dm), dmTCToString(3dm), dmTCFromSeconds(3dm), dmTCToSeconds(3dm), dmTCFromString(3dm), dmTCFramesPerDay(3dm), and dmTCFramesBetween(3dm). Can also be used with the dmLTC(3dm) and dmVITC(3dm) routines.
 dmedia/dmVITC(3d) -- decode vertical interval timecode (VITC)
    These routines provide a mechanism for decoding vertical interval time code (VITC). VITC is a mechanism for storing and transferring SMPTE time code in the vertical blanking portion of a video signal. Applications may use VITC to synchronize audio, video, or other events with external devices by decoding VITC from a video source connected to a video input port, or they may parse the VITC code from a previously captured movie file. To decode VITC, a video source with embedded VITC must be connect...
 dmedia/dm_dv(3d) -- DV and DVCPRO image and audio compression programming with dmIC, dmAC and dmBuffers
    The DV and DVCPRO image and audio compression standards operate with dmIC and dmAC and dmBuffers as described in this man page. The dmIC and dmAC man pages are generic and contain no information about specific compression schemes. This man page describes details of dmIC specific to DV and DVCPRO image compression, and also describes DV and DVCPRO audio compression. This man page describes the difference between DV and DVCPRO compression, and makes recommendations as to when you should use each o...
 dmedia/dm_jpeg(3d) -- JPEG compression programming with dmIC and dmBuffers
    The JPEG compression standard (ISO/IEC 10918) operates with dmIC and dmBuffers as described in this man page. The dmIC man pages are generic and contain no information about specific compression schemes. This man page describes details of dmIC specific to baseline (DCT-based, Huffmanencoded) JPEG. NOTE: Some previous generation realtime JPEG products are not supported via this interface. Indy Cosmo and Indigo2 Cosmo2 are available only via the Compression Library (CL). See CLintro and cl_jpeg fo...
 doconfig(3n) -- execute a configuration script
    doconfig is a Service Access Facility library function that interprets the configuration scripts contained in the files /etc/saf/pmtag/_config, /etc/saf/_sysconfig, and /etc/saf/pmtag/svctag. script is the name of the configuration script; fd is a file descriptor that designates the stream to which stream manipulation operation...
 Tk/dooneevent(3) -- wait for events and invoke event handlers
    int flags (in) This parameter is normally zero. It may be an OR-ed combination of any of the following flag bits: TK_X_EVENTS, TK_FILE_EVENTS, TK_TIMER_EVENTS, TK_IDLE_EVENTS, TK_ALL_EVENTS, or TK_DONT_WAIT. XEvent *eventPtr (in) Pointer to X event to dispatch to relevant handler(s).
 complib/dopgtr(3) -- product of n-1 elementary reflectors H(i) of order n, as returned by DSPTRD using packed storage
    DOPGTR generates a real orthogonal matrix Q which is defined as the product of n-1 elementary reflectors H(i) of order n, as returned by DSPTRD using packed storage: if UPLO = 'U', Q = H(n-1) . . . H(2) H(1), if UPLO = 'L', Q = H(1) H(2) . . . H(n-1).
 complib/dopmtr(3) -- overwrite the general real M-by-N matrix C with SIDE = 'L' SIDE = 'R' TRANS = 'N'
    DOPMTR overwrites the general real M-by-N matrix C with TRANS = 'T': Q**T * C C * Q**T where Q is a real orthogonal matrix of order nq, with nq = m if SIDE = 'L' and nq = n if SIDE = 'R'. Q is defined as the product of nq-1 elementary reflectors, as returned by DSPTRD using packed storage: if UPLO = 'U', Q = H(nq-1) . . . H(2) H(1); if UPLO = 'L', Q = H(1) H(2) . . . H(nq-1).
 standard/dopup(3) -- displays the specified pop-up menu
    pup expects the identifier of the pop-up menu you want to display. FUNCTION RETURN VALUE The returned value of the function is the value of the item selected from the pop-up menu. If the user makes no menu selection, the returned value of the function is -1.
 complib/dorg2l(3) -- generate an m by n real matrix Q with orthonormal columns,
    DORG2L generates an m by n real matrix Q with orthonormal columns, which is defined as the last n columns of a product of k elementary reflectors of order m Q = H(k) . . . H(2) H(1) as returned by DGEQLF.
 complib/dorg2r(3) -- generate an m by n real matrix Q with orthonormal columns,
    DORG2R generates an m by n real matrix Q with orthonormal columns, which is defined as the first n columns of a product of k elementary reflectors of order m Q = H(1) H(2) . . . H(k) as returned by DGEQRF.
 complib/dorgbr(3) -- generate one of the real orthogonal matrices Q or P**T determined by DGEBRD when reducing a real matrix A to b
    DORGBR generates one of the real orthogonal matrices Q or P**T determined by DGEBRD when reducing a real matrix A to bidiagonal form: A = Q * B * P**T. Q and P**T are defined as products of elementary reflectors H(i) or G(i) respectively. If VECT = 'Q', A is assumed to have been an M-by-K matrix, and Q is of order M: if m >= k, Q = H(1) H(2) . . . H(k) and DORGBR returns the first n columns of Q, where m >= n >= k; if m < k, Q = H(1) H(2) . . . H(m-1) and DORGBR returns Q as an M-by-M matrix. ...
 complib/dorghr(3) -- product of IHI-ILO elementary reflectors of order N, as returned by DGEHRD
    DORGHR generates a real orthogonal matrix Q which is defined as the product of IHI-ILO elementary reflectors of order N, as returned by DGEHRD: Q = H(ilo) H(ilo+1) . . . H(ihi-1).
 complib/dorgl2(3) -- generate an m by n real matrix Q with orthonormal rows,
    DORGL2 generates an m by n real matrix Q with orthonormal rows, which is defined as the first m rows of a product of k elementary reflectors of order n Q = H(k) . . . H(2) H(1) as returned by DGELQF.
 complib/dorglq(3) -- generate an M-by-N real matrix Q with orthonormal rows,
    DORGLQ generates an M-by-N real matrix Q with orthonormal rows, which is defined as the first M rows of a product of K elementary reflectors of order N Q = H(k) . . . H(2) H(1) as returned by DGELQF.
 complib/dorgql(3) -- generate an M-by-N real matrix Q with orthonormal columns,
    DORGQL generates an M-by-N real matrix Q with orthonormal columns, which is defined as the last N columns of a product of K elementary reflectors of order M Q = H(k) . . . H(2) H(1) as returned by DGEQLF.
 complib/dorgqr(3) -- generate an M-by-N real matrix Q with orthonormal columns,
    DORGQR generates an M-by-N real matrix Q with orthonormal columns, which is defined as the first N columns of a product of K elementary reflectors of order M Q = H(1) H(2) . . . H(k) as returned by DGEQRF.
 complib/dorgr2(3) -- generate an m by n real matrix Q with orthonormal rows,
    DORGR2 generates an m by n real matrix Q with orthonormal rows, which is defined as the last m rows of a product of k elementary reflectors of order n Q = H(1) H(2) . . . H(k) as returned by DGERQF.
 complib/dorgrq(3) -- generate an M-by-N real matrix Q with orthonormal rows,
    DORGRQ generates an M-by-N real matrix Q with orthonormal rows, which is defined as the last M rows of a product of K elementary reflectors of order N Q = H(1) H(2) . . . H(k) as returned by DGERQF.
 complib/dorgtr(3) -- product of n-1 elementary reflectors of order N, as returned by DSYTRD
    DORGTR generates a real orthogonal matrix Q which is defined as the product of n-1 elementary reflectors of order N, as returned by DSYTRD: if UPLO = 'U', Q = H(n-1) . . . H(2) H(1), if UPLO = 'L', Q = H(1) H(2) . . . H(n-1).
 complib/dorm2l(3) -- overwrite the general real m by n matrix C with Q * C if SIDE = 'L' and TRANS = 'N', or Q'* C if SIDE = 'L' an
    DORM2L overwrites the general real m by n matrix C with where Q is a real orthogonal matrix defined as the product of k elementary reflectors Q = H(k) . . . H(2) H(1) as returned by DGEQLF. Q is of order m if SIDE = 'L' and of order n if SIDE = 'R'.
 complib/dorm2r(3) -- overwrite the general real m by n matrix C with Q * C if SIDE = 'L' and TRANS = 'N', or Q'* C if SIDE = 'L' an
    DORM2R overwrites the general real m by n matrix C with where Q is a real orthogonal matrix defined as the product of k elementary reflectors Q = H(1) H(2) . . . H(k) as returned by DGEQRF. Q is of order m if SIDE = 'L' and of order n if SIDE = 'R'.
 complib/dormbr(3) -- VECT = 'Q', DORMBR overwrites the general real M-by-N matrix C with SIDE = 'L' SIDE = 'R' TRANS = 'N'
    If VECT = 'Q', DORMBR overwrites the general real M-by-N matrix C with SIDE = 'L' SIDE = 'R' TRANS = 'N': Q * C C * Q TRANS = 'T': Q**T * C C * Q**T If VECT = 'P', DORMBR overwrites the general real M-by-N matrix C with SIDE = 'L' SIDE = 'R' TRANS = 'N': P * C C * P TRANS = 'T': P**T * C C * P**T Here Q and P**T are the orthogonal matrices determined by DGEBRD when reducing a real matrix A to bidiagonal form: A = Q * B * P**T. Q and P**T are defined as products of elementary ...
 complib/dormhr(3) -- overwrite the general real M-by-N matrix C with SIDE = 'L' SIDE = 'R' TRANS = 'N'
    DORMHR overwrites the general real M-by-N matrix C with TRANS = 'T': Q**T * C C * Q**T where Q is a real orthogonal matrix of order nq, with nq = m if SIDE = 'L' and nq = n if SIDE = 'R'. Q is defined as the product of IHI-ILO elementary reflectors, as returned by DGEHRD: Q = H(ilo) H(ilo+1) . . . H(ihi-1).
 complib/dorml2(3) -- overwrite the general real m by n matrix C with Q * C if SIDE = 'L' and TRANS = 'N', or Q'* C if SIDE = 'L' an
    DORML2 overwrites the general real m by n matrix C with where Q is a real orthogonal matrix defined as the product of k elementary reflectors Q = H(k) . . . H(2) H(1) as returned by DGELQF. Q is of order m if SIDE = 'L' and of order n if SIDE = 'R'.
 complib/dormlq(3) -- overwrite the general real M-by-N matrix C with SIDE = 'L' SIDE = 'R' TRANS = 'N'
    DORMLQ overwrites the general real M-by-N matrix C with TRANS = 'T': Q**T * C C * Q**T where Q is a real orthogonal matrix defined as the product of k elementary reflectors Q = H(k) . . . H(2) H(1) as returned by DGELQF. Q is of order M if SIDE = 'L' and of order N if SIDE = 'R'.
 complib/dormql(3) -- overwrite the general real M-by-N matrix C with SIDE = 'L' SIDE = 'R' TRANS = 'N'
    DORMQL overwrites the general real M-by-N matrix C with TRANS = 'T': Q**T * C C * Q**T where Q is a real orthogonal matrix defined as the product of k elementary reflectors Q = H(k) . . . H(2) H(1) as returned by DGEQLF. Q is of order M if SIDE = 'L' and of order N if SIDE = 'R'.
 complib/dormqr(3) -- overwrite the general real M-by-N matrix C with SIDE = 'L' SIDE = 'R' TRANS = 'N'
    DORMQR overwrites the general real M-by-N matrix C with TRANS = 'T': Q**T * C C * Q**T where Q is a real orthogonal matrix defined as the product of k elementary reflectors Q = H(1) H(2) . . . H(k) as returned by DGEQRF. Q is of order M if SIDE = 'L' and of order N if SIDE = 'R'.
 complib/dormr2(3) -- overwrite the general real m by n matrix C with Q * C if SIDE = 'L' and TRANS = 'N', or Q'* C if SIDE = 'L' an
    DORMR2 overwrites the general real m by n matrix C with where Q is a real orthogonal matrix defined as the product of k elementary reflectors Q = H(1) H(2) . . . H(k) as returned by DGERQF. Q is of order m if SIDE = 'L' and of order n if SIDE = 'R'.
 complib/dormrq(3) -- overwrite the general real M-by-N matrix C with SIDE = 'L' SIDE = 'R' TRANS = 'N'
    DORMRQ overwrites the general real M-by-N matrix C with TRANS = 'T': Q**T * C C * Q**T where Q is a real orthogonal matrix defined as the product of k elementary reflectors Q = H(1) H(2) . . . H(k) as returned by DGERQF. Q is of order M if SIDE = 'L' and of order N if SIDE = 'R'.
 complib/dormtr(3) -- overwrite the general real M-by-N matrix C with SIDE = 'L' SIDE = 'R' TRANS = 'N'
    DORMTR overwrites the general real M-by-N matrix C with TRANS = 'T': Q**T * C C * Q**T where Q is a real orthogonal matrix of order nq, with nq = m if SIDE = 'L' and nq = n if SIDE = 'R'. Q is defined as the product of nq-1 elementary reflectors, as returned by DSYTRD: if UPLO = 'U', Q = H(nq-1) . . . H(2) H(1); if UPLO = 'L', Q = H(1) H(2) . . . H(nq-1).
 libblas/dot(3) -- BLAS level ONE, dot product functions FORTRAN 77 SYNOPSIS double precision ddot( n, x, incx, y, incy ) integer
    ddot, sdot, zdotc, and cdotc compute the dot product of vector x and vector y. dot <--- transpose( x ) . y zdotu, and cdotu compute the hermitian dot product of vector x and vector y. dot <--- transpose( conjg( x ) ) . y incx and incy specify the increment between two consecutive elements of respectively vector x and y.
 f90/dot_product(3) -- Performs dot-product multiplication of numeric or logical vectors
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 standard/doublebuffer(3) -- sets the display mode to double buffer mode
    none
 Tk/dowhenidle(3) -- invoke a procedure when there are no pending events
    Tk_IdleProc *proc (in) Procedure to invoke. ClientData clientData (in) Arbitrary one-word value to pass to proc.
 complib/DPBCO(3) -- DPBCO factors a double precision symmetric positive definite matrix stored in band form and estimates the cond
    On Entry ABD DOUBLE PRECISION(LDA, N) the matrix to be factored. The columns of the upper triangle are stored in the columns of ABD and the diagonals of the upper triangle are stored in the rows of ABD . See the comments below for details. LDA INTEGER the leading dimension of the array ABD . LDA must be .GE. M + 1 . N INTEGER the order of the matrix A . M INTEGER the number of diagonals above the main diagonal. 0 .LE. M .LT. N . On Return ABD an upper triangular matrix R , stored in band form, s...
 complib/dpbcon(3) -- estimate the reciprocal of the condition number (in the 1-norm) of a real symmetric positive definite band mat
    DPBCON estimates the reciprocal of the condition number (in the 1-norm) of a real symmetric positive definite band matrix using the Cholesky factorization A = U**T*U or A = L*L**T computed by DPBTRF. An estimate is obtained for norm(inv(A)), and the reciprocal of the condition number is computed as RCOND = 1 / (ANORM * norm(inv(A))).
 complib/DPBDI(3) -- DPBDI computes the determinant of a double precision symmetric positive definite band matrix using the factors
    On Entry ABD DOUBLE PRECISION(LDA, N) the output from DPBCO or DPBFA. LDA INTEGER the leading dimension of the array ABD . N INTEGER the order of the matrix A . M INTEGER the number of diagonals above the main diagonal. On Return DET DOUBLE PRECISION(2) determinant of original matrix in the form DETERMINANT = DET(1) * 10.0**DET(2) with 1.0 .LE. DET(1) .LT. 10.0 or DET(1) .EQ. 0.0 . LINPACK. This version dated 08/14/78 . Cleve Moler, University of New Mexico, Argonne National Lab. PPPPaaaag...
 complib/dpbequ(3) -- compute row and column scalings intended to equilibrate a symmetric positive definite band matrix A and reduce
    DPBEQU computes row and column scalings intended to equilibrate a symmetric positive definite band matrix A and reduce its condition number (with respect to the two-norm). S contains the scale factors, S(i) = 1/sqrt(A(i,i)), chosen so that the scaled matrix B with elements B(i,j) = S(i)*A(i,j)*S(j) has ones on the diagonal. This choice of S puts the condition number of B within a factor N of the smallest possible condition number over all possible diagonal scalings....
 complib/DPBFA(3) -- DPBFA factors a double precision symmetric positive definite matrix stored in band form. DPBFA is usually call
    On Entry ABD DOUBLE PRECISION(LDA, N) the matrix to be factored. The columns of the upper triangle are stored in the columns of ABD and the diagonals of the upper triangle are stored in the rows of ABD . See the comments below for details. LDA INTEGER the leading dimension of the array ABD . LDA must be .GE. M + 1 . N INTEGER the order of the matrix A . M INTEGER the number of diagonals above the main diagonal. 0 .LE. M .LT. N . On Return ABD an upper triangular matrix R , stored in band form, s...
 complib/dpbrfs(3) -- when the coefficient matrix is symmetric positive definite and banded, and provides error bounds and backward
    DPBRFS improves the computed solution to a system of linear equations when the coefficient matrix is symmetric positive definite and banded, and provides error bounds and backward error estimates for the solution.
 complib/DPBSL(3) -- DPBSL solves the double precision symmetric positive definite band system A*X = B using the factors computed b
    On Entry ABD DOUBLE PRECISION(LDA, N) the output from DPBCO or DPBFA. LDA INTEGER the leading dimension of the array ABD . N INTEGER the order of the matrix A . M INTEGER the number of diagonals above the main diagonal. B DOUBLE PRECISION(N) the right hand side vector. On Return B the solution vector X . Error Condition A division by zero will occur if the input factor contains a zero on the diagonal. Technically this indicates singularity, but it is usually caused by improper subroutine argumen...
 complib/dpbstf(3) -- compute a split Cholesky factorization of a real symmetric positive definite band matrix A
    DPBSTF computes a split Cholesky factorization of a real symmetric positive definite band matrix A. This routine is designed to be used in conjunction with DSBGST. The factorization has the form A = S**T*S where S is a band matrix of the same bandwidth as A and the following structure: S = ( U ) ( M L ) where U is upper triangular of order m = (n+kd)/2, and L is lower triangular of order n-m.
 complib/dpbsv(3) -- = B,
    DPBSV computes the solution to a real system of linear equations A * X = B, where A is an N-by-N symmetric positive definite band matrix and X and B are N-by-NRHS matrices. The Cholesky decomposition is used to factor A as A = U**T * U, if UPLO = 'U', or A = L * L**T, if UPLO = 'L', where U is an upper triangular band matrix, and L is a lower triangular band matrix, with the same number of superdiagonals or subdiagonals as A. The factored form of A is then used to solve the system of equatio...
 complib/dpbsvx(3) -- compute the solution to a real system of linear equations A * X = B,
    DPBSVX uses the Cholesky factorization A = U**T*U or A = L*L**T to compute the solution to a real system of linear equations A * X = B, where A is an N-by-N symmetric positive definite band matrix and X and B are N-by-NRHS matrices. Error bounds on the solution and a condition estimate are also provided.
 complib/dpbtf2(3) -- compute the Cholesky factorization of a real symmetric positive definite band matrix A
    DPBTF2 computes the Cholesky factorization of a real symmetric positive definite band matrix A. The factorization has the form A = U' * U , if UPLO = 'U', or A = L * L', if UPLO = 'L', where U is an upper triangular matrix, U' is the transpose of U, and L is lower triangular. This is the unblocked version of the algorithm, calling Level 2 BLAS.
 complib/dpbtrf(3) -- compute the Cholesky factorization of a real symmetric positive definite band matrix A
    DPBTRF computes the Cholesky factorization of a real symmetric positive definite band matrix A. The factorization has the form A = U**T * U, if UPLO = 'U', or A = L * L**T, if UPLO = 'L', where U is an upper triangular matrix and L is lower triangular.
 complib/dpbtrs(3) -- solve a system of linear equations A*X = B with a symmetric positive definite band matrix A using the Cholesky
    DPBTRS solves a system of linear equations A*X = B with a symmetric positive definite band matrix A using the Cholesky factorization A = U**T*U or A = L*L**T computed by DPBTRF.
 dplace(3) -- a library interface to dplace
    These library routines provide high level access to a subset of the memory management and control mechanisms of IRIX. Dynamic dplace(1) functionality is provided from within a user's program. The first form takes a filename as an argument and all commands within the file are processed. The second form operates on a single command. Errors are handled in the same way as dplace(1); the program exits and a diagnostic message is printed to standard error. The library can be used with or without usin...
 complib/DPOCO(3) -- DPOCO factors a double precision symmetric positive definite matrix and estimates the condition of the matrix.
    On Entry A DOUBLE PRECISION(LDA, N) the symmetric matrix to be factored. Only the diagonal and upper triangle are used. LDA INTEGER the leading dimension of the array A . N INTEGER the order of the matrix A . On Return A an upper triangular matrix R so that A = TRANS(R)*R where TRANS(R) is the transpose. The strict lower triangle is unaltered. If INFO .NE. 0 , the factorization is not complete. RCOND DOUBLE PRECISION an estimate of the reciprocal condition of A . For the system A*X = B , relativ...
 complib/dpocon(3) -- estimate the reciprocal of the condition number (in the 1-norm) of a real symmetric positive definite matrix u
    DPOCON estimates the reciprocal of the condition number (in the 1-norm) of a real symmetric positive definite matrix using the Cholesky factorization A = U**T*U or A = L*L**T computed by DPOTRF. An estimate is obtained for norm(inv(A)), and the reciprocal of the condition number is computed as RCOND = 1 / (ANORM * norm(inv(A))).
 complib/DPODI(3) -- DPODI computes the determinant and inverse of a certain double precision symmetric positive definite matrix (s
    On Entry A DOUBLE PRECISION(LDA, N) the output A from DPOCO or DPOFA or the output X from DQRDC. LDA INTEGER the leading dimension of the array A . N INTEGER the order of the matrix A . JOB INTEGER = 11 both determinant and inverse. = 01 inverse only. = 10 determinant only. On Return A If DPOCO or DPOFA was used to factor A , then DPODI produces the upper half of INVERSE(A) . If DQRDC was used to decompose X , then DPODI produces the upper half of inverse(TRANS(X)*X) where TRANS(X) is the transp...
 complib/dpoequ(3) -- compute row and column scalings intended to equilibrate a symmetric positive definite matrix A and reduce its
    DPOEQU computes row and column scalings intended to equilibrate a symmetric positive definite matrix A and reduce its condition number (with respect to the two-norm). S contains the scale factors, S(i) = 1/sqrt(A(i,i)), chosen so that the scaled matrix B with elements B(i,j) = S(i)*A(i,j)*S(j) has ones on the diagonal. This choice of S puts the condition number of B within a factor N of the smallest possible condition number over all possible diagonal scalings....
 complib/DPOFA(3) -- DPOFA factors a double precision symmetric positive definite matrix. DPOFA is usually called by DPOCO, but it
    On Entry A DOUBLE PRECISION(LDA, N) the symmetric matrix to be factored. Only the diagonal and upper triangle are used. LDA INTEGER the leading dimension of the array A . N INTEGER the order of the matrix A . On Return A an upper triangular matrix R so that A = TRANS(R)*R where TRANS(R) is the transpose. The strict lower triangle is unaltered. If INFO .NE. 0 , the factorization is not complete. INFO INTEGER = 0 for normal return. = K signals an error condition. The leading minor of order K is no...
 complib/dporfs(3) -- when the coefficient matrix is symmetric positive definite,
    DPORFS improves the computed solution to a system of linear equations when the coefficient matrix is symmetric positive definite, and provides error bounds and backward error estimates for the solution.
 complib/DPOSL(3) -- DPOSL solves the double precision symmetric positive definite system A * X = B using the factors computed by D
    On Entry A DOUBLE PRECISION(LDA, N) the output from DPOCO or DPOFA. LDA INTEGER the leading dimension of the array A . N INTEGER the order of the matrix A . B DOUBLE PRECISION(N) the right hand side vector. On Return B the solution vector X . Error Condition A division by zero will occur if the input factor contains a zero on the diagonal. Technically this indicates singularity, but it is usually caused by improper subroutine arguments. It will not occur if the subroutines are called correctly a...
 complib/dposv(3) -- = B,
    DPOSV computes the solution to a real system of linear equations A * X = B, where A is an N-by-N symmetric positive definite matrix and X and B are N-by-NRHS matrices. The Cholesky decomposition is used to factor A as A = U**T* U, if UPLO = 'U', or A = L * L**T, if UPLO = 'L', where U is an upper triangular matrix and L is a lower triangular matrix. The factored form of A is then used to solve the system of equations A * X = B....
 complib/dposvx(3) -- compute the solution to a real system of linear equations A * X = B,
    DPOSVX uses the Cholesky factorization A = U**T*U or A = L*L**T to compute the solution to a real system of linear equations A * X = B, where A is an N-by-N symmetric positive definite matrix and X and B are N-by-NRHS matrices. Error bounds on the solution and a condition estimate are also provided.
 complib/dpotf2(3) -- compute the Cholesky factorization of a real symmetric positive definite matrix A
    DPOTF2 computes the Cholesky factorization of a real symmetric positive definite matrix A. The factorization has the form A = U' * U , if UPLO = 'U', or A = L * L', if UPLO = 'L', where U is an upper triangular matrix and L is lower triangular. This is the unblocked version of the algorithm, calling Level 2 BLAS.
 complib/dpotrf(3) -- compute the Cholesky factorization of a real symmetric positive definite matrix A
    DPOTRF computes the Cholesky factorization of a real symmetric positive definite matrix A. The factorization has the form A = U**T * U, if UPLO = 'U', or A = L * L**T, if UPLO = 'L', where U is an upper triangular matrix and L is lower triangular. This is the block version of the algorithm, calling Level 3 BLAS.
 complib/dpotri(3) -- compute the inverse of a real symmetric positive definite matrix A using the Cholesky factorization A = U**T*U
    DPOTRI computes the inverse of a real symmetric positive definite matrix A using the Cholesky factorization A = U**T*U or A = L*L**T computed by DPOTRF.
 complib/dpotrs(3) -- solve a system of linear equations A*X = B with a symmetric positive definite matrix A using the Cholesky fact
    DPOTRS solves a system of linear equations A*X = B with a symmetric positive definite matrix A using the Cholesky factorization A = U**T*U or A = L*L**T computed by DPOTRF.
 complib/DPPCO(3) -- DPPCO factors a double precision symmetric positive definite matrix stored in packed form and estimates the co
    On Entry AP DOUBLE PRECISION (N*(N+1)/2) the packed form of a symmetric matrix A . The columns of the upper triangle are stored sequentially in a one-dimensional array of length N*(N+1)/2 . See comments below for details. N INTEGER the order of the matrix A . On Return AP an upper triangular matrix R , stored in packed form, so that A = TRANS(R)*R . If INFO .NE. 0 , the factorization is not complete. RCOND DOUBLE PRECISION an estimate of the reciprocal condition of A . For the system A*X = B , r...
 complib/dppcon(3) -- estimate the reciprocal of the condition number (in the 1-norm) of a real symmetric positive definite packed m
    DPPCON estimates the reciprocal of the condition number (in the 1-norm) of a real symmetric positive definite packed matrix using the Cholesky factorization A = U**T*U or A = L*L**T computed by DPPTRF. An estimate is obtained for norm(inv(A)), and the reciprocal of the condition number is computed as RCOND = 1 / (ANORM * norm(inv(A))).
 complib/DPPDI(3) -- DPPDI computes the determinant and inverse of a double precision symmetric positive definite matrix using the
    On Entry AP DOUBLE PRECISION (N*(N+1)/2) the output from DPPCO or DPPFA. N INTEGER the order of the matrix A . JOB INTEGER = 11 both determinant and inverse. = 01 inverse only. = 10 determinant only. On Return AP the upper triangular half of the inverse . The strict lower triangle is unaltered. DET DOUBLE PRECISION(2) determinant of original matrix if requested. Otherwise not referenced. DETERMINANT = DET(1) * 10.0**DET(2) with 1.0 .LE. DET(1) .LT. 10.0 or DET(1) .EQ. 0.0 . Error Condition A div...
 complib/dppequ(3) -- compute row and column scalings intended to equilibrate a symmetric positive definite matrix A in packed stora
    DPPEQU computes row and column scalings intended to equilibrate a symmetric positive definite matrix A in packed storage and reduce its condition number (with respect to the two-norm). S contains the scale factors, S(i)=1/sqrt(A(i,i)), chosen so that the scaled matrix B with elements B(i,j)=S(i)*A(i,j)*S(j) has ones on the diagonal. This choice of S puts the condition number of B within a factor N of the smallest possible condition number over all possible diagonal scalings....
 complib/DPPFA(3) -- DPPFA factors a double precision symmetric positive definite matrix stored in packed form. DPPFA is usually ca
    On Entry AP DOUBLE PRECISION (N*(N+1)/2) the packed form of a symmetric matrix A . The columns of the upper triangle are stored sequentially in a one-dimensional array of length N*(N+1)/2 . See comments below for details. N INTEGER the order of the matrix A . On Return AP an upper triangular matrix R , stored in packed form, so that A = TRANS(R)*R . INFO INTEGER = 0 for normal return. = K if the leading minor of order K is not positive definite. Packed Storage The following program segment will ...
 complib/dpprfs(3) -- when the coefficient matrix is symmetric positive definite and packed, and provides error bounds and backward
    DPPRFS improves the computed solution to a system of linear equations when the coefficient matrix is symmetric positive definite and packed, and provides error bounds and backward error estimates for the solution.
 complib/DPPSL(3) -- DPPSL solves the double precision symmetric positive definite system A * X = B using the factors computed by D
    On Entry AP DOUBLE PRECISION (N*(N+1)/2) the output from DPPCO or DPPFA. N INTEGER the order of the matrix A . B DOUBLE PRECISION(N) the right hand side vector. On Return B the solution vector X . Error Condition A division by zero will occur if the input factor contains a zero on the diagonal. Technically this indicates singularity, but it is usually caused by improper subroutine arguments. It will not occur if the subroutines are called correctly and INFO .EQ. 0 . To compute INVERSE(A) * C whe...
 complib/dppsv(3) -- = B,
    DPPSV computes the solution to a real system of linear equations A * X = B, where A is an N-by-N symmetric positive definite matrix stored in packed format and X and B are N-by-NRHS matrices. The Cholesky decomposition is used to factor A as A = U**T* U, if UPLO = 'U', or A = L * L**T, if UPLO = 'L', where U is an upper triangular matrix and L is a lower triangular matrix. The factored form of A is then used to solve the system of equations A * X = B....
 complib/dppsvx(3) -- compute the solution to a real system of linear equations A * X = B,
    DPPSVX uses the Cholesky factorization A = U**T*U or A = L*L**T to compute the solution to a real system of linear equations A * X = B, where A is an N-by-N symmetric positive definite matrix stored in packed format and X and B are N-by-NRHS matrices. Error bounds on the solution and a condition estimate are also provided.
 complib/dpptrf(3) -- compute the Cholesky factorization of a real symmetric positive definite matrix A stored in packed format
    DPPTRF computes the Cholesky factorization of a real symmetric positive definite matrix A stored in packed format. The factorization has the form A = U**T * U, if UPLO = 'U', or A = L * L**T, if UPLO = 'L', where U is an upper triangular matrix and L is lower triangular.
 complib/dpptri(3) -- compute the inverse of a real symmetric positive definite matrix A using the Cholesky factorization A = U**T*U
    DPPTRI computes the inverse of a real symmetric positive definite matrix A using the Cholesky factorization A = U**T*U or A = L*L**T computed by DPPTRF.
 complib/dpptrs(3) -- solve a system of linear equations A*X = B with a symmetric positive definite matrix A in packed storage using
    DPPTRS solves a system of linear equations A*X = B with a symmetric positive definite matrix A in packed storage using the Cholesky factorization A = U**T*U or A = L*L**T computed by DPPTRF.
 ftn/dprod(3) -- FORTRAN double precision and quad precision product intrinsic functions
    dprod returns the double precision product of its real arguments. qprod returns the quad precision product of its double precision arguments. PPPPaaaaggggeeee 1111
 complib/dptcon(3) -- compute the reciprocal of the condition number (in the 1-norm) of a real symmetric positive definite tridiagon
    DPTCON computes the reciprocal of the condition number (in the 1-norm) of a real symmetric positive definite tridiagonal matrix using the factorization A = L*D*L**T or A = U**T*D*U computed by DPTTRF. Norm(inv(A)) is computed by a direct method, and the reciprocal of the condition number is computed as RCOND = 1 / (ANORM * norm(inv(A))).
 complib/dpteqr(3) -- compute all eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a symmetric positive definite tridiagonal matrix by f
    DPTEQR computes all eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a symmetric positive definite tridiagonal matrix by first factoring the matrix using DPTTRF, and then calling DBDSQR to compute the singular values of the bidiagonal factor. This routine computes the eigenvalues of the positive definite tridiagonal matrix to high relative accuracy. This means that if the eigenvalues range over many orders of magnitude in size, then the small eigenvalues and corresponding eigenvectors will be comput...
 complib/dptrfs(3) -- improve the computed solution to a system of linear equations when the coefficient matrix is symmetric positiv
    DPTRFS improves the computed solution to a system of linear equations when the coefficient matrix is symmetric positive definite and tridiagonal, and provides error bounds and backward error estimates for the solution.
 complib/DPTSL(3) -- DPTSL, given a positive definite symmetric tridiagonal matrix and a right hand side, will find the solution.
    On Entry N INTEGER is the order of the tridiagonal matrix. D DOUBLE PRECISION(N) is the diagonal of the tridiagonal matrix. On output D is destroyed. E DOUBLE PRECISION(N) is the offdiagonal of the tridiagonal matrix. E(1) through E(N-1) should contain the offdiagonal. B DOUBLE PRECISION(N) is the right hand side vector. On Return B contains the solution. LINPACK. This version dated 08/14/78 . Jack Dongarra, Argonne National Laboratory. No externals Fortran MOD PPPPaaaaggggeeee 111...
 complib/dptsv(3) -- and X and B are N-by-NRHS matrices
    DPTSV computes the solution to a real system of linear equations A*X = B, where A is an N-by-N symmetric positive definite tridiagonal matrix, and X and B are N-by-NRHS matrices. A is factored as A = L*D*L**T, and the factored form of A is then used to solve the system of equations.
 complib/dptsvx(3) -- positive definite tridiagonal matrix and X and B are N-by-NRHS matrices
    DPTSVX uses the factorization A = L*D*L**T to compute the solution to a real system of linear equations A*X = B, where A is an N-by-N symmetric positive definite tridiagonal matrix and X and B are N-by-NRHS matrices. Error bounds on the solution and a condition estimate are also provided.
 complib/dpttrf(3) -- compute the factorization of a real symmetric positive definite tridiagonal matrix A
    DPTTRF computes the factorization of a real symmetric positive definite tridiagonal matrix A. If the subdiagonal elements of A are supplied in the array E, the factorization has the form A = L*D*L**T, where D is diagonal and L is unit lower bidiagonal; if the superdiagonal elements of A are supplied, it has the form A = U**T*D*U, where U is unit upper bidiagonal. (The two forms are equivalent if A is real.)...
 complib/dpttrs(3) -- solve a system of linear equations A * X = B with a symmetric positive definite tridiagonal matrix A using the
    DPTTRS solves a system of linear equations A * X = B with a symmetric positive definite tridiagonal matrix A using the factorization A = L*D*L**T or A = U**T*D*U computed by DPTTRF. (The two forms are equivalent if A is real.)
 complib/DQRDC(3) -- DQRDC uses Householder transformations to compute the QR
    On Entry X DOUBLE PRECISION(LDX,P), where LDX .GE. N. X contains the matrix whose decomposition is to be computed. LDX INTEGER. LDX is the leading dimension of the array X. N INTEGER. N is the number of rows of the matrix X. P INTEGER. P is the number of columns of the matrix X. JPVT INTEGER(P). JPVT contains integers that control the selection of the pivot columns. The K-th column X(K) of X is placed in one of three classes according to the value of JPVT(K). If JPVT(K) .GT. 0, then X(K) is an i...
 complib/DQRSL(3) -- DQRSL applies the output of DQRDC to compute coordinate transformations, projections, and least squares soluti
    On Entry X DOUBLE PRECISION(LDX,P). X contains the output of DQRDC. LDX INTEGER. LDX is the leading dimension of the array X. N INTEGER. N is the number of rows of the matrix XK. It must have the same value as N in DQRDC. K INTEGER. K is the number of columns of the matrix XK. K must not be greater than MIN(N,P), where P is the same as in the calling sequence to DQRDC. QRAUX DOUBLE PRECISION(P). QRAUX contains the auxiliary output from DQRDC. Y DOUBLE PRECISION(N) Y contains an N-vector that is ...
 drand48(3c) -- generate uniformly distributed pseudo-random numbers
    This family of functions generates pseudo-random numbers using the wellknown linear congruential algorithm and 48-bit integer arithmetic. Functions drand48 and erand48 return non-negative double-precision floating-point values uniformly distributed over the interval [0.0,~1.0) . Functions lrand48 and nrand48 return non-negative long integers uniformly distributed over the 31 interval [0,~2 ). Functions mr
 standard/draw(3) -- draws a line
    x expects the x coordinate of the point to which you want to draw a line segment. y expects the y coordinate of the point to which you want to draw a line segment. z expects the z coordinate of the point to which you want to draw a line segment. (Not used by 2-D subroutines.)
 Tk/drawfochlt(3) -- draw the traversal highlight ring for a widget
    Tk_Window tkwin (in) Window for which the highlight is being drawn. Used to retrieve the window's dimensions, among other things. GC gc (in) Graphics context to use for drawing the highlight. int width (in) Width of the highlight ring, in pixels. Drawable drawable (in) Drawable in which to draw the highlight; usually an offscreen pixmap for double buffering.
 standard/drawmode(3) -- selects which GL framebuffer is drawable
    mode expects the identifier of the framebuffer to which GL drawing commands are to be directed: NORMALDRAW, which sets operations for the normal color and z buffer bitplanes. OVERDRAW, which sets operations for the overlay bitplanes. UNDERDRAW, which sets operations for the underlay bitplanes. PUPDRAW, which sets operations for the pop-up bitplanes. CURSORDRAW, which sets operations for the cursor....
 complib/drscl(3) -- multiplie an n-element real vector x by the real scalar 1/a
    DRSCL multiplies an n-element real vector x by the real scalar 1/a. This is done without overflow or underflow as long as the final result x/a does not overflow or underflow.
 complib/dsbev(3) -- compute all the eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a real symmetric band matrix A
    DSBEV computes all the eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a real symmetric band matrix A.
 complib/dsbevd(3) -- compute all the eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a real symmetric band matrix A
    DSBEVD computes all the eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a real symmetric band matrix A. If eigenvectors are desired, it uses a divide and conquer algorithm. The divide and conquer algorithm makes very mild assumptions about floating point arithmetic. It will work on machines with a guard digit in add/subtract, or on those binary machines without guard digits which subtract like the Cray X-MP, Cray Y-MP, Cray C-90, or Cray-2. It could conceivably fail on hexadecimal or decimal machin...
 complib/dsbevx(3) -- compute selected eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a real symmetric band matrix A
    DSBEVX computes selected eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a real symmetric band matrix A. Eigenvalues and eigenvectors can be selected by specifying either a range of values or a range of indices for the desired eigenvalues.
 complib/dsbgst(3) -- A*x = lambda*B*x to standard form C*y = lambda*y,
    DSBGST reduces a real symmetric-definite banded generalized eigenproblem A*x = lambda*B*x to standard form C*y = lambda*y, such that C has the same bandwidth as A. B must have been previously factorized as S**T*S by DPBSTF, using a split Cholesky factorization. A is overwritten by C = X**T*A*X, where X = S**(-1)*Q and Q is an orthogonal matrix chosen to preserve the bandwidth of A.
 complib/dsbgv(3) -- a real generalized symmetric-definite banded eigenproblem, of the form A*x=(lambda)*B*x
    DSBGV computes all the eigenvalues, and optionally, the eigenvectors of a real generalized symmetric-definite banded eigenproblem, of the form A*x=(lambda)*B*x. Here A and B are assumed to be symmetric and banded, and B is also positive definite.
 complib/dsbtrd(3) -- reduce a real symmetric band matrix A to symmetric tridiagonal form T by an orthogonal similarity transformati
    DSBTRD reduces a real symmetric band matrix A to symmetric tridiagonal form T by an orthogonal similarity transformation: Q**T * A * Q = T.
 complib/dsecnd(3) -- 0DOUBLE PRECISION FUNCTION DSECND( )
    
 f90/dshiftl(3) -- Performs a double-object left shift
    C/C++: UNICOS and UNICOS/mk systems Fortran: UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/dshiftr(3) -- Performs a double-object right shift
    C/C++: UNICOS and UNICOS/mk systems Fortran: UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 complib/DSICO(3) -- DSICO factors a double precision symmetric matrix by elimination with symmetric pivoting and estimates the con
    On Entry A DOUBLE PRECISION(LDA, N) the symmetric matrix to be factored. Only the diagonal and upper triangle are used. LDA INTEGER the leading dimension of the array A . N INTEGER the order of the matrix A . Output A a block diagonal matrix and the multipliers which were used to obtain it. The factorization can be written A = U*D*TRANS(U) where U is a product of permutation and unit upper triangular matrices, TRANS(U) is the transpose of U , and D is block diagonal with 1 by 1 and 2 by 2 blocks...
 complib/DSIDI(3) -- DSIDI computes the determinant, inertia and inverse of a double precision symmetric matrix using the factors f
    On Entry A DOUBLE PRECISION(LDA,N) the output from DSIFA. LDA INTEGER the leading dimension of the array A. N INTEGER the order of the matrix A. KPVT INTEGER(N) the pivot vector from DSIFA. WORK DOUBLE PRECISION(N) work vector. Contents destroyed. JOB INTEGER JOB has the decimal expansion ABC where if C .NE. 0, the inverse is computed, if B .NE. 0, the determinant is computed, if A .NE. 0, the inertia is computed. For example, JOB = 111 gives all three. On Return Variables not requested by JOB a...
 complib/DSIFA(3) -- DSIFA factors a double precision symmetric matrix by elimination with symmetric pivoting. To solve A*X = B , f
    On Entry A DOUBLE PRECISION(LDA,N) the symmetric matrix to be factored. Only the diagonal and upper triangle are used. LDA INTEGER the leading dimension of the array A . N INTEGER the order of the matrix A . On Return A a block diagonal matrix and the multipliers which were used to obtain it. The factorization can be written A = U*D*TRANS(U) where U is a product of permutation and unit upper triangular matrices, TRANS(U) is the transpose of U , and D is block diagonal with 1 by 1 and 2 by 2 bloc...
 complib/DSISL(3) -- DSISL solves the double precision symmetric system A * X = B using the factors computed by DSIFA.
    On Entry A DOUBLE PRECISION(LDA,N) the output from DSIFA. LDA INTEGER the leading dimension of the array A . N INTEGER the order of the matrix A . KPVT INTEGER(N) the pivot vector from DSIFA. B DOUBLE PRECISION(N) the right hand side vector. On Return B the solution vector X . Error Condition A division by zero may occur if DSICO has set RCOND .EQ. 0.0 or DSIFA has set INFO .NE. 0 . To compute INVERSE(A) * C where C is a matrix with P columns CALL DSIFA(A,LDA,N,KPVT,INFO) IF (INFO .NE. 0) GO TO ...
 dslib(3x) -- communicate with generic SCSI devices
    dsopen returns a NULL pointer on failure. doscsireq returns -1 on absolute failure, and the status byte otherwise. A status byte of 0xff indicates an invalid status byte because the scsi command didn't complete. The RET(dsp) macro returns a result code, which can be consulted for any error or 'unusual' status from the driver; a value of 0 indicates a normal return.
 complib/DSPCO(3) -- DSPCO factors a double precision symmetric matrix stored in packed form by elimination with symmetric pivoting
    On Entry AP DOUBLE PRECISION (N*(N+1)/2) the packed form of a symmetric matrix A . The columns of the upper triangle are stored sequentially in a one-dimensional array of length N*(N+1)/2 . See comments below for details. N INTEGER the order of the matrix A . Output AP a block diagonal matrix and the multipliers which were used to obtain it stored in packed form. The factorization can be written A = U*D*TRANS(U) where U is a product of permutation and unit upper triangular matrices , TRANS(U) is...
 complib/dspcon(3) -- estimate the reciprocal of the condition number (in the 1-norm) of a real symmetric packed matrix A using the
    DSPCON estimates the reciprocal of the condition number (in the 1-norm) of a real symmetric packed matrix A using the factorization A = U*D*U**T or A = L*D*L**T computed by DSPTRF. An estimate is obtained for norm(inv(A)), and the reciprocal of the condition number is computed as RCOND = 1 / (ANORM * norm(inv(A))).
 complib/DSPDI(3) -- DSPDI computes the determinant, inertia and inverse of a double precision symmetric matrix using the factors f
    On Entry AP DOUBLE PRECISION (N*(N+1)/2) the output from DSPFA. N INTEGER the order of the matrix A. KPVT INTEGER(N) the pivot vector from DSPFA. WORK DOUBLE PRECISION(N) work vector. Contents ignored. JOB INTEGER JOB has the decimal expansion ABC where if C .NE. 0, the inverse is computed, if B .NE. 0, the determinant is computed, if A .NE. 0, the inertia is computed. For example, JOB = 111 gives all three. On Return Variables not requested by JOB are not used. AP contains the upper triangle of...
 complib/dspev(3) -- compute all the eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a real symmetric matrix A in packed storage
    DSPEV computes all the eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a real symmetric matrix A in packed storage.
 complib/dspevd(3) -- compute all the eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a real symmetric matrix A in packed storage
    DSPEVD computes all the eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a real symmetric matrix A in packed storage. If eigenvectors are desired, it uses a divide and conquer algorithm. The divide and conquer algorithm makes very mild assumptions about floating point arithmetic. It will work on machines with a guard digit in add/subtract, or on those binary machines without guard digits which subtract like the Cray X-MP, Cray Y-MP, Cray C-90, or Cray-2. It could conceivably fail on hexadecimal or d...
 complib/dspevx(3) -- compute selected eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a real symmetric matrix A in packed storage
    DSPEVX computes selected eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a real symmetric matrix A in packed storage. Eigenvalues/vectors can be selected by specifying either a range of values or a range of indices for the desired eigenvalues.
 complib/DSPFA(3) -- DSPFA factors a double precision symmetric matrix stored in packed form by elimination with symmetric pivoting
    On Entry AP DOUBLE PRECISION (N*(N+1)/2) the packed form of a symmetric matrix A . The columns of the upper triangle are stored sequentially in a one-dimensional array of length N*(N+1)/2 . See comments below for details. N INTEGER the order of the matrix A . Output AP a block diagonal matrix and the multipliers which were used to obtain it stored in packed form. The factorization can be written A = U*D*TRANS(U) where U is a product of permutation and unit upper triangular matrices, TRANS(U) is ...
 complib/dspgst(3) -- reduce a real symmetric-definite generalized eigenproblem to standard form, using packed storage
    DSPGST reduces a real symmetric-definite generalized eigenproblem to standard form, using packed storage. If ITYPE = 1, the problem is A*x = lambda*B*x, and A is overwritten by inv(U**T)*A*inv(U) or inv(L)*A*inv(L**T) If ITYPE = 2 or 3, the problem is A*B*x = lambda*x or B*A*x = lambda*x, and A is overwritten by U*A*U**T or L**T*A*L. B must have been previously factorized as U**T*U or L*L**T by DPPTRF....
 complib/dspgv(3) -- a real generalized symmetric-definite eigenproblem, of the form A*x=(lambda)*B*x, A*Bx=(lambda)*x, or B*A*x=(l
    DSPGV computes all the eigenvalues and, optionally, the eigenvectors of a real generalized symmetric-definite eigenproblem, of the form A*x=(lambda)*B*x, A*Bx=(lambda)*x, or B*A*x=(lambda)*x. Here A and B are assumed to be symmetric, stored in packed format, and B is also positive definite.
 complib/dsprfs(3) -- improve the computed solution to a system of linear equations when the coefficient matrix is symmetric indefin
    DSPRFS improves the computed solution to a system of linear equations when the coefficient matrix is symmetric indefinite and packed, and provides error bounds and backward error estimates for the solution.
 complib/DSPSL(3) -- DSISL solves the double precision symmetric system A * X = B using the factors computed by DSPFA.
    On Entry AP DOUBLE PRECISION(N*(N+1)/2) the output from DSPFA. N INTEGER the order of the matrix A . KPVT INTEGER(N) the pivot vector from DSPFA. B DOUBLE PRECISION(N) the right hand side vector. On Return B the solution vector X . Error Condition A division by zero may occur if DSPCO has set RCOND .EQ. 0.0 or DSPFA has set INFO .NE. 0 . To compute INVERSE(A) * C where C is a matrix with P columns CALL DSPFA(AP,N,KPVT,INFO) IF (INFO .NE. 0) GO TO ... DO 10 J = 1, P CALL DSPSL(AP,N,KPVT,C(1,J)) 1...
 complib/dspsv(3) -- = B,
    DSPSV computes the solution to a real system of linear equations A * X = B, where A is an N-by-N symmetric matrix stored in packed format and X and B are N-by-NRHS matrices. The diagonal pivoting method is used to factor A as A = U * D * U**T, if UPLO = 'U', or A = L * D * L**T, if UPLO = 'L', where U (or L) is a product of permutation and unit upper (lower) triangular matrices, D is symmetric and block diagonal with 1-by-1 and 2-by-2 diagonal blocks. The factored form of A is then used to s...
 complib/dspsvx(3) -- X and B are N-by-NRHS matrices
    DSPSVX uses the diagonal pivoting factorization A = U*D*U**T or A = L*D*L**T to compute the solution to a real system of linear equations A * X = B, where A is an N-by-N symmetric matrix stored in packed format and X and B are N-by-NRHS matrices. Error bounds on the solution and a condition estimate are also provided.
 complib/dsptrd(3) -- reduce a real symmetric matrix A stored in packed form to symmetric tridiagonal form T by an orthogonal simila
    DSPTRD reduces a real symmetric matrix A stored in packed form to symmetric tridiagonal form T by an orthogonal similarity transformation: Q**T * A * Q = T.
 complib/dsptrf(3) -- packed format using the Bunch-Kaufman diagonal pivoting method
    DSPTRF computes the factorization of a real symmetric matrix A stored in packed format using the Bunch-Kaufman diagonal pivoting method: A = U*D*U**T or A = L*D*L**T where U (or L) is a product of permutation and unit upper (lower) triangular matrices, and D is symmetric and block diagonal with 1-by-1 and 2-by-2 diagonal blocks.
 complib/dsptri(3) -- compute the inverse of a real symmetric indefinite matrix A in packed storage using the factorization A = U*D*
    DSPTRI computes the inverse of a real symmetric indefinite matrix A in packed storage using the factorization A = U*D*U**T or A = L*D*L**T computed by DSPTRF.
 complib/dsptrs(3) -- solve a system of linear equations A*X = B with a real symmetric matrix A stored in packed format using the fa
    DSPTRS solves a system of linear equations A*X = B with a real symmetric matrix A stored in packed format using the factorization A = U*D*U**T or A = L*D*L**T computed by DSPTRF.
 complib/dstebz(3) -- compute the eigenvalues of a symmetric tridiagonal matrix T
    DSTEBZ computes the eigenvalues of a symmetric tridiagonal matrix T. The user may ask for all eigenvalues, all eigenvalues in the half-open interval (VL, VU], or the IL-th through IU-th eigenvalues. To avoid overflow, the matrix must be scaled so that its largest element is no greater than overflow**(1/2) * underflow**(1/4) in absolute value, and for greatest accuracy, it should not be much smaller than that. See W. Kahan "Accurate Eigenvalues of a Symmetric Tridiagonal Matrix", Report CS41, C...
 complib/dstedc(3) -- compute all eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a symmetric tridiagonal matrix using the divide and c
    DSTEDC computes all eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a symmetric tridiagonal matrix using the divide and conquer method. The eigenvectors of a full or band real symmetric matrix can also be found if DSYTRD or DSPTRD or DSBTRD has been used to reduce this matrix to tridiagonal form. This code makes very mild assumptions about floating point arithmetic. It will work on machines with a guard digit in add/subtract, or on those binary machines without guard digits which subtract like the ...
 complib/dstein(3) -- compute the eigenvectors of a real symmetric tridiagonal matrix T corresponding to specified eigenvalues, usin
    DSTEIN computes the eigenvectors of a real symmetric tridiagonal matrix T corresponding to specified eigenvalues, using inverse iteration. The maximum number of iterations allowed for each eigenvector is specified by an internal parameter MAXITS (currently set to 5).
 complib/dsteqr(3) -- compute all eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a symmetric tridiagonal matrix using the implicit QL
    DSTEQR computes all eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a symmetric tridiagonal matrix using the implicit QL or QR method. The eigenvectors of a full or band symmetric matrix can also be found if DSYTRD or DSPTRD or DSBTRD has been used to reduce this matrix to tridiagonal form.
 complib/dsterf(3) -- the Pal-Walker-Kahan variant of the QL or QR algorithm
    DSTERF computes all eigenvalues of a symmetric tridiagonal matrix using the Pal-Walker-Kahan variant of the QL or QR algorithm.
 complib/dstev(3) -- compute all eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a real symmetric tridiagonal matrix A
    DSTEV computes all eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a real symmetric tridiagonal matrix A.
 complib/dstevd(3) -- compute all eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a real symmetric tridiagonal matrix
    DSTEVD computes all eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a real symmetric tridiagonal matrix. If eigenvectors are desired, it uses a divide and conquer algorithm. The divide and conquer algorithm makes very mild assumptions about floating point arithmetic. It will work on machines with a guard digit in add/subtract, or on those binary machines without guard digits which subtract like the Cray X-MP, Cray Y-MP, Cray C-90, or Cray-2. It could conceivably fail on hexadecimal or decimal machi...
 complib/dstevx(3) -- compute selected eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a real symmetric tridiagonal matrix A
    DSTEVX computes selected eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a real symmetric tridiagonal matrix A. Eigenvalues and eigenvectors can be selected by specifying either a range of values or a range of indices for the desired eigenvalues.
 Tcl/dstring(3) -- manipulate dynamic strings
    Tcl_DString *dsPtr (in/out) Pointer to structure that is used to manage a dynamic string. char *string (in) Pointer to characters to add to dynamic string. int length (in) Number of characters from string to add to dynamic string. If -1, add all characters up to null terminating character. int newLength (in) New length for dynamic string, not including null terminating character. Page 1 Tcl_DString(3Tcl) Tcl_DString(3Tcl) Tcl_Interp *interp (in/out) Interpreter whose result is to be set from or ...
 complib/DSVDC(3) -- DSVDC is a subroutine to reduce a double precision NxP matrix X by orthogonal transformations U and V to diago
    On Entry X DOUBLE PRECISION(LDX,P), where LDX .GE. N. X contains the matrix whose singular value decomposition is to be computed. X is destroyed by DSVDC. LDX INTEGER. LDX is the leading dimension of the array X. N INTEGER. N is the number of columns of the matrix X. P INTEGER. P is the number of rows of the matrix X. LDU INTEGER. LDU is the leading dimension of the array U. (See below). LDV INTEGER. LDV is the leading dimension of the array V. (See below). WORK DOUBLE PRECISION(N). WORK is a sc...
 complib/dsycon(3) -- estimate the reciprocal of the condition number (in the 1-norm) of a real symmetric matrix A using the factori
    DSYCON estimates the reciprocal of the condition number (in the 1-norm) of a real symmetric matrix A using the factorization A = U*D*U**T or A = L*D*L**T computed by DSYTRF. An estimate is obtained for norm(inv(A)), and the reciprocal of the condition number is computed as RCOND = 1 / (ANORM * norm(inv(A))).
 complib/dsyev(3) -- compute all eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a real symmetric matrix A
    DSYEV computes all eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a real symmetric matrix A.
 complib/dsyevd(3) -- compute all eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a real symmetric matrix A
    DSYEVD computes all eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a real symmetric matrix A. If eigenvectors are desired, it uses a divide and conquer algorithm. The divide and conquer algorithm makes very mild assumptions about floating point arithmetic. It will work on machines with a guard digit in add/subtract, or on those binary machines without guard digits which subtract like the Cray X-MP, Cray Y-MP, Cray C-90, or Cray-2. It could conceivably fail on hexadecimal or decimal machines withou...
 complib/dsyevx(3) -- compute selected eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a real symmetric matrix A
    DSYEVX computes selected eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a real symmetric matrix A. Eigenvalues and eigenvectors can be selected by specifying either a range of values or a range of indices for the desired eigenvalues.
 complib/dsygs2(3) -- reduce a real symmetric-definite generalized eigenproblem to standard form
    DSYGS2 reduces a real symmetric-definite generalized eigenproblem to standard form. If ITYPE = 1, the problem is A*x = lambda*B*x, and A is overwritten by inv(U')*A*inv(U) or inv(L)*A*inv(L') If ITYPE = 2 or 3, the problem is A*B*x = lambda*x or B*A*x = lambda*x, and A is overwritten by U*A*U` or L'*A*L. B must have been previously factorized as U'*U or L*L' by DPOTRF.
 complib/dsygst(3) -- reduce a real symmetric-definite generalized eigenproblem to standard form
    DSYGST reduces a real symmetric-definite generalized eigenproblem to standard form. If ITYPE = 1, the problem is A*x = lambda*B*x, and A is overwritten by inv(U**T)*A*inv(U) or inv(L)*A*inv(L**T) If ITYPE = 2 or 3, the problem is A*B*x = lambda*x or B*A*x = lambda*x, and A is overwritten by U*A*U**T or L**T*A*L. B must have been previously factorized as U**T*U or L*L**T by DPOTRF.
 complib/dsygv(3) -- a real generalized symmetric-definite eigenproblem, of the form A*x=(lambda)*B*x, A*Bx=(lambda)*x, or B*A*x=(l
    DSYGV computes all the eigenvalues, and optionally, the eigenvectors of a real generalized symmetric-definite eigenproblem, of the form A*x=(lambda)*B*x, A*Bx=(lambda)*x, or B*A*x=(lambda)*x. Here A and B are assumed to be symmetric and B is also positive definite.
 complib/dsyrfs(3) -- improve the computed solution to a system of linear equations when the coefficient matrix is symmetric indefin
    DSYRFS improves the computed solution to a system of linear equations when the coefficient matrix is symmetric indefinite, and provides error bounds and backward error estimates for the solution.
 complib/dsysv(3) -- = B,
    DSYSV computes the solution to a real system of linear equations A * X = B, where A is an N-by-N symmetric matrix and X and B are Nby-NRHS matrices. The diagonal pivoting method is used to factor A as A = U * D * U**T, if UPLO = 'U', or A = L * D * L**T, if UPLO = 'L', where U (or L) is a product of permutation and unit upper (lower) triangular matrices, and D is symmetric and block diagonal with 1-by-1 and 2-by-2 diagonal blocks. The factored form of A is then used to solve the system of eq...
 complib/dsysvx(3) -- to a real system of linear equations A * X = B,
    DSYSVX uses the diagonal pivoting factorization to compute the solution to a real system of linear equations A * X = B, where A is an N-by-N symmetric matrix and X and B are N-by-NRHS matrices. Error bounds on the solution and a condition estimate are also provided.
 complib/dsytd2(3) -- reduce a real symmetric matrix A to symmetric tridiagonal form T by an orthogonal similarity transformation
    DSYTD2 reduces a real symmetric matrix A to symmetric tridiagonal form T by an orthogonal similarity transformation: Q' * A * Q = T.
 complib/dsytf2(3) -- Bunch-Kaufman diagonal pivoting method
    DSYTF2 computes the factorization of a real symmetric matrix A using the Bunch-Kaufman diagonal pivoting method: A = U*D*U' or A = L*D*L' where U (or L) is a product of permutation and unit upper (lower) triangular matrices, U' is the transpose of U, and D is symmetric and block diagonal with 1-by-1 and 2-by-2 diagonal blocks. This is the unblocked version of the algorithm, calling Level 2 BLAS....
 complib/dsytrd(3) -- reduce a real symmetric matrix A to real symmetric tridiagonal form T by an orthogonal similarity transformati
    DSYTRD reduces a real symmetric matrix A to real symmetric tridiagonal form T by an orthogonal similarity transformation: Q**T * A * Q = T.
 complib/dsytrf(3) -- Bunch-Kaufman diagonal pivoting method
    DSYTRF computes the factorization of a real symmetric matrix A using the Bunch-Kaufman diagonal pivoting method. The form of the factorization is A = U*D*U**T or A = L*D*L**T where U (or L) is a product of permutation and unit upper (lower) triangular matrices, and D is symmetric and block diagonal with 1-by-1 and 2-by-2 diagonal blocks. This is the blocked version of the algorithm, calling Level 3 BLAS....
 complib/dsytri(3) -- compute the inverse of a real symmetric indefinite matrix A using the factorization A = U*D*U**T or A = L*D*L*
    DSYTRI computes the inverse of a real symmetric indefinite matrix A using the factorization A = U*D*U**T or A = L*D*L**T computed by DSYTRF.
 complib/dsytrs(3) -- solve a system of linear equations A*X = B with a real symmetric matrix A using the factorization A = U*D*U**T
    DSYTRS solves a system of linear equations A*X = B with a real symmetric matrix A using the factorization A = U*D*U**T or A = L*D*L**T computed by DSYTRF.
 audiocddat/DTaddcallback(3d) -- set a callback for the DAT audio data parser
    dtp A pointer to the target DTPARSER. type The type of callback being set. DTDATATYPES is an enumerated type defined in dataudio.h containing the following values: dt_audio, dt_pnum, dt_index, dt_ptime, dt_atime, dt_rtime, dt_prortime, dt_mainid, dt_sampfreq, dt_toc, dt_date, dt_catalog, dt_ident, dt_probinary. func A pointer to the function to be called. arg A user supplied argument that is passed to the callback function....
 audiocddat/DTatohmsf(3d) -- convert ASCII string to hours, minutes, seconds, frames
    str A pointer to the ASCII string to be converted. h A pointer to the location to store the hours value. m A pointer to the location to store the minutes value. s A pointer to the location to store the seconds value. f A pointer to the location to store the frame value.
 audiocddat/DTatotime(3d) -- convert ASCII string to timecode
    tc A pointer to the struct dttimecode in which to place the result. s A pointer to the ASCII string to be converted. The string pointed at by s must be at least 11 bytes long not counting the terminating null.
 complib/dtbcon(3) -- band matrix A, in either the 1-norm or the infinity-norm
    DTBCON estimates the reciprocal of the condition number of a triangular band matrix A, in either the 1-norm or the infinity-norm. The norm of A is computed and an estimate is obtained for norm(inv(A)), then the reciprocal of the condition number is computed as RCOND = 1 / ( norm(A) * norm(inv(A)) ).
 complib/dtbrfs(3) -- provide error bounds and backward error estimates for the solution to a system of linear equations with a tria
    DTBRFS provides error bounds and backward error estimates for the solution to a system of linear equations with a triangular band coefficient matrix. The solution matrix X must be computed by DTBTRS or some other means before entering this routine. DTBRFS does not do iterative refinement because doing so cannot improve the backward error.
 complib/dtbtrs(3) -- B,
    DTBTRS solves a triangular system of the form where A is a triangular band matrix of order N, and B is an N-by NRHS matrix. A check is made to verify that A is nonsingular.
 audiocddat/DTcreateparser(3d) -- creates a DAT audio data parser
    Upon successful completion, DTcreateparser returns a pointer to a DTPARSER, an opaque type defined in dataudio.h. Otherwise a value of null (0) is returned.
 audiocddat/DTdeleteparser(3d) -- deletes a DAT audio data parser
    dtp A pointer to the DTPARSER to be deleted.
 audiocddat/DTframetohmsf(3d) -- convert DAT frame number to hours, minutes, seconds, frame
    fr The frame number to be converted. h A pointer to the location to store the hours value. m A pointer to the location to store the minutes value. s A pointer to the location to store the seconds value. f A pointer to the location to store the frame value.
 audiocddat/DTframetotc(3d) -- convert frame number to timecode
    fr The frame number to be converted. tc A pointer to the struct dttimecode in which to place the result.
 complib/dtgevc(3) -- compute some or all of the right and/or left generalized eigenvectors of a pair of real upper triangular matri
    DTGEVC computes some or all of the right and/or left generalized eigenvectors of a pair of real upper triangular matrices (A,B). The right generalized eigenvector x and the left generalized eigenvector y of (A,B) corresponding to a generalized eigenvalue w are defined by: (A - wB) * x = 0 and y**H * (A - wB) = 0 where y**H denotes the conjugate tranpose of y. If an eigenvalue w is determined by zero diagonal elements of both A and B, a unit vector is returned as the corresponding eigenvector. If...
 complib/dtgsja(3) -- compute the generalized singular value decomposition (GSVD) of two real upper triangular (or trapezoidal) matr
    DTGSJA computes the generalized singular value decomposition (GSVD) of two real upper triangular (or trapezoidal) matrices A and B. On entry, it is assumed that matrices A and B have the following forms, which may be obtained by the preprocessing subroutine DGGSVP from a general M-by-N matrix A and P-by-N matrix B: N-K-L K L A = K ( 0 A12 A13 ) if M-K-L >= 0; L ( 0 0 A23 ) M-K-L ( 0 0 0 ) N-K-L K L A = K ( 0 A12 A13 ) if M-K-L < 0; M-K ( 0 0 A23 ) N-K-L K L B = L ( 0 0 B13 ) P-L ( 0 0 0 ) where ...
 audiocddat/DThmsftoframe(3d) -- convert hours, minutes, seconds, frame to DAT frame number.
    hour,min,sec,frame The value to be converted, in absolute time.
 audiocddat/DTinctime(3d) -- increment a DAT time code
    tc A pointer to the struct dttimecode to be incremented
 audiocddat/DTintro(3d) -- Introduction to the Silicon Graphics DAT Audio Library (DT)
    The Archive Python DAT (Digital Audio Tape) drive has the capability of reading and writing audio tapes compatible with consumer and professional DAT recorders. This man page describes the support for handling audio tapes in the DAT drive. There are two components to the support: the kernel SCSI tape driver and libdataudio. SCSI Tape Driver The kernel tape driver supports both regular data mode and the special audio mode. The driver is switched between modes using the MTIOCTOP ioctl as follows: ...
 audiocddat/DTparseframe(3d) -- parse a frame of DAT audio data
    dtp A pointer to the target DTPARSER dtfp A pointer to the frame of DAT audio data to be parsed.
 complib/dtpcon(3) -- triangular matrix A, in either the 1-norm or the infinity-norm
    DTPCON estimates the reciprocal of the condition number of a packed triangular matrix A, in either the 1-norm or the infinity-norm. The norm of A is computed and an estimate is obtained for norm(inv(A)), then the reciprocal of the condition number is computed as RCOND = 1 / ( norm(A) * norm(inv(A)) ).
 audiocddat/DTpnotodec(3d) -- convert BCD program number to decimal
    pno1 The first (most significant) BCD digit of the program number. pno2 The second BCD digit of the program number. pno1 The third (least significant) BCD digit of the program number.
 complib/dtprfs(3) -- provide error bounds and backward error estimates for the solution to a system of linear equations with a tria
    DTPRFS provides error bounds and backward error estimates for the solution to a system of linear equations with a triangular packed coefficient matrix. The solution matrix X must be computed by DTPTRS or some other means before entering this routine. DTPRFS does not do iterative refinement because doing so cannot improve the backward error.
 complib/dtptri(3) -- compute the inverse of a real upper or lower triangular matrix A stored in packed format
    DTPTRI computes the inverse of a real upper or lower triangular matrix A stored in packed format.
 complib/dtptrs(3) -- B,
    DTPTRS solves a triangular system of the form where A is a triangular matrix of order N stored in packed format, and B is an N-by-NRHS matrix. A check is made to verify that A is nonsingular.
 complib/DTRCO(3) -- DTRCO estimates the condition of a double precision triangular matrix.
    On Entry T DOUBLE PRECISION(LDT,N) T contains the triangular matrix. The zero elements of the matrix are not referenced, and the corresponding elements of the array can be used to store other information. LDT INTEGER LDT is the leading dimension of the array T. N INTEGER N is the order of the system. JOB INTEGER = 0 T is lower triangular. = nonzero T is upper triangular. On Return RCOND DOUBLE PRECISION an estimate of the reciprocal condition of T . For the system T*X = B , relative perturbation...
 complib/dtrcon(3) -- matrix A, in either the 1-norm or the infinity-norm
    DTRCON estimates the reciprocal of the condition number of a triangular matrix A, in either the 1-norm or the infinity-norm. The norm of A is computed and an estimate is obtained for norm(inv(A)), then the reciprocal of the condition number is computed as RCOND = 1 / ( norm(A) * norm(inv(A)) ).
 complib/DTRDI(3) -- DTRDI computes the determinant and inverse of a double precision triangular matrix.
    On Entry T DOUBLE PRECISION(LDT,N) T contains the triangular matrix. The zero elements of the matrix are not referenced, and the corresponding elements of the array can be used to store other information. LDT INTEGER LDT is the leading dimension of the array T. N INTEGER N is the order of the system. JOB INTEGER = 010 no det, inverse of lower triangular. = 011 no det, inverse of upper triangular. = 100 det, no inverse. = 110 det, inverse of lower triangular. = 111 det, inverse of upper triangula...
 audiocddat/DTremovecallback(3d) -- remove a callback from the DAT audio data parser
    dtp A pointer to the target DTPARSER. type The type of callback to remove. DTDATATYPES is an enumerated type defined in dataudio.h containing the following values: dt_audio, dt_pnum, dt_index, dt_ptime, dt_atime, dt_rtime, dt_prortime, dt_mainid, dt_sampfreq, dt_toc, dt_date, dt_catalog, dt_ident, dt_probinary.
 audiocddat/DTresetparser(3d) -- resets a DAT audio data parser
    dtp A pointer to the DTPARSER to be reset.
 complib/dtrevc(3) -- real upper quasi-triangular matrix T
    DTREVC computes some or all of the right and/or left eigenvectors of a real upper quasi-triangular matrix T. The right eigenvector x and the left eigenvector y of T corresponding to an eigenvalue w are defined by: T*x = w*x, y'*T = w*y' where y' denotes the conjugate transpose of the vector y. If all eigenvectors are requested, the routine may either return the matrices X and/or Y of right or left eigenvectors of T, or the products Q*X and/or Q*Y, where Q is an input orthogonal matrix. If T w...
 complib/dtrexc(3) -- reorder the real Schur factorization of a real matrix A = Q*T*Q**T, so that the diagonal block of T with row i
    DTREXC reorders the real Schur factorization of a real matrix A = Q*T*Q**T, so that the diagonal block of T with row index IFST is moved to row ILST. The real Schur form T is reordered by an orthogonal similarity transformation Z**T*T*Z, and optionally the matrix Q of Schur vectors is updated by postmultiplying it with Z. T must be in Schur canonical form (as returned by DHSEQR), that is, block upper triangular with 1-by-1 and 2-by-2 diagonal blocks; each 2-by-2 diagonal block has its diagonal e...
 complib/dtrrfs(3) -- provide error bounds and backward error estimates for the solution to a system of linear equations with a tria
    DTRRFS provides error bounds and backward error estimates for the solution to a system of linear equations with a triangular coefficient matrix. The solution matrix X must be computed by DTRTRS or some other means before entering this routine. DTRRFS does not do iterative refinement because doing so cannot improve the backward error.
 complib/dtrsen(3) -- reorder the real Schur factorization of a real matrix A = Q*T*Q**T, so that a selected cluster of eigenvalues
    DTRSEN reorders the real Schur factorization of a real matrix A = Q*T*Q**T, so that a selected cluster of eigenvalues appears in the leading diagonal blocks of the upper quasi-triangular matrix T, and the leading columns of Q form an orthonormal basis of the corresponding right invariant subspace. Optionally the routine computes the reciprocal condition numbers of the cluster of eigenvalues and/or the invariant subspace. T must be in Schur canonical form (as returned by DHSEQR), that is, block u...
 complib/DTRSL(3) -- DTRSL solves systems of the form T * X = B or TRANS(T) * X = B where T is a triangular matrix of order N. Here
    On Entry T DOUBLE PRECISION(LDT,N) T contains the matrix of the system. The zero elements of the matrix are not referenced, and the corresponding elements of the array can be used to store other information. LDT INTEGER LDT is the leading dimension of the array T. N INTEGER N is the order of the system. B DOUBLE PRECISION(N). B contains the right hand side of the system. JOB INTEGER JOB specifies what kind of system is to be solved. If JOB is 00 solve T*X=B, T lower triangular, 01 solve T*X=B, T...
 complib/dtrsna(3) -- and/or right eigenvectors of a real upper quasi-triangular matrix T (or of any matrix Q*T*Q**T with Q orthogon
    DTRSNA estimates reciprocal condition numbers for specified eigenvalues and/or right eigenvectors of a real upper quasi-triangular matrix T (or of any matrix Q*T*Q**T with Q orthogonal). T must be in Schur canonical form (as returned by DHSEQR), that is, block upper triangular with 1-by-1 and 2-by-2 diagonal blocks; each 2-by-2 diagonal block has its diagonal elements equal and its off-diagonal elements of opposite sign....
 complib/dtrsyl(3) -- solve the real Sylvester matrix equation
    DTRSYL solves the real Sylvester matrix equation: op(A)*X + X*op(B) = scale*C or op(A)*X - X*op(B) = scale*C, where op(A) = A or A**T, and A and B are both upper quasi- triangular. A is M-by-M and B is N-by-N; the right hand side C and the solution X are M-by-N; and scale is an output scale factor, set <= 1 to avoid overflow in X. A and B must be in Schur canonical form (as returned by DHSEQR), that is, block upper triangular with 1-by-1 and 2-by-2 diagonal blocks; each 2- by-2 diagonal block ha...
 complib/dtrti2(3) -- compute the inverse of a real upper or lower triangular matrix
    DTRTI2 computes the inverse of a real upper or lower triangular matrix. This is the Level 2 BLAS version of the algorithm.
 complib/dtrtri(3) -- compute the inverse of a real upper or lower triangular matrix A
    DTRTRI computes the inverse of a real upper or lower triangular matrix A. This is the Level 3 BLAS version of the algorithm.
 complib/dtrtrs(3) -- B,
    DTRTRS solves a triangular system of the form where A is a triangular matrix of order N, and B is an N-by-NRHS matrix. A check is made to verify that A is nonsingular.
 audiocddat/DTsbtoa(3d) -- convert six-bit country and owner codes to ASCII string
    s A pointer to a string to store the converted value. The string pointed at by s must be at least count bytes long not counting the terminating null. sb A pointer to an array of six-bit coded characters. count The number of six-bit characters in the sb array.
 audiocddat/DTsetdate(3d) -- set a date pack to the current time
    dp A pointer to the struct dtdatepack to be set.
 audiocddat/DTtctoframe(3d) -- convert DAT timecode structure to DAT frame number.
    tc A pointer to the struct dttimecode to be converted.
 audiocddat/DTtcvalid(3d) -- check a dat timecode for validity
    tc A pointer to the struct dttimecode to be checked.
 audiocddat/DTtimetoa(3d) -- convert timecode to ASCII string
    s A pointer to a string to store the converted value. The string pointed at by s must be at least 11 bytes long not counting the terminating null. tc A pointer to the struct dttimecode to be converted.
 complib/dtzrqf(3) -- reduce the M-by-N ( M<=N ) real upper trapezoidal matrix A to upper triangular form by means of orthogonal tra
    DTZRQF reduces the M-by-N ( M<=N ) real upper trapezoidal matrix A to upper triangular form by means of orthogonal transformations. The upper trapezoidal matrix A is factored as A = ( R 0 ) * Z, where Z is an N-by-N orthogonal matrix and R is an M-by-M upper triangular matrix.
 dup2(3c) -- duplicate an open file descriptor
    fildes is a file descriptor referring to an open file, and fildes2 is a non-negative integer less than the maximum number of open files available. dup2 causes fildes2 to refer to the same file as fildes. If fildes2 already referred to an open file, not fildes, it is closed first. If fildes2 refers to fildes, or if fildes is not a valid open file descriptor, fildes2 will not be closed first. dup2 will fail if one or more of the following are true: EBADF fild...
 perl5/DynaLoader(3) -- Dynamically load C libraries into Perl code dl_error(), dl_findfile(), dl_expandspec(), dl_load_file(), dl_fin
    This document defines a standard generic interface to the dynamic linking mechanisms available on many platforms. Its primary purpose is to implement automatic dynamic loading of Perl modules. This document serves as both a specification for anyone wishing to implement the DynaLoader for a new platform and as a guide for anyone wishing to use the DynaLoader directly in an application. The DynaLoader is designed to be a very simple high-level interface that is sufficiently general to cover the re...
 complib/dzsum1(3) -- take the sum of the absolute values of a complex vector and returns a double precision result
    DZSUM1 takes the sum of the absolute values of a complex vector and returns a double precision result. Based on DZASUM from the Level 1 BLAS. The change is to use the 'genuine' absolute value. Contributed by Nick Higham for use with ZLACON.
 ecvt(3c) -- convert floating-point number to string
    (Note that the long double routines are only valid for the MIPSpro compilers.) Long double functions have been renamed to be compliant with the ANSI-C standard, however to be backward compatible, they may still be called with the double precision function name prefixed with a q. (Exceptions: ecvtl_r and fcvtl_r can be called with names qecvt_r and qfcvt_r, resp.) ecvt converts value to a null-terminated string of ndigit digits and returns a pointer thereto. The high-order digit is no...
 standard/editobj(3) -- opens an object definition for editing
    obj expects object identifier for object definition you want to edit.
 libelf/elf(3) -- object file access library
    Functions in the ELF access library let a program manipulate ELF (Executable and Linking Format) object files, archive files, and archive members. The header file provides type and function declarations for all library services. Programs communicate with many of the higher-level routines using an ELF descriptor. That is, when the program starts working with a file, elf_begin creates an ELF descriptor through which the program manipulates the structures and information in ...
 libelf/elf_begin(3) -- make a file descriptor
    elf_begin, elf_next, elf_rand, and elf_end work together to process ELF object files, either individually or as members of archives. After obtaining an ELF descriptor from elf_begin, the program may read an existing file, update an existing file, or create a new file. fildes is an open file descriptor that elf_begin uses for reading or writing. The initial file offs...
 libelf/elf_cntl(3) -- control a file descriptor
    elf_cntl instructs the library to modify its behavior with respect to an ELF descriptor, elf. As elf_begin(3E) describes, an ELF descriptor can have multiple activations, and multiple ELF descriptors may share a single file descriptor. Generally, elf_cntl commands apply to all activations of elf. Moreover, if the ELF descriptor is associated with an archive file, descriptors for members within the archive will also be affected as ...
 libelf/elf_end(3) -- finish using an object file
    A program uses elf_end to terminate an ELF descriptor, elf, and to deallocate data associated with the descriptor. Until the program terminates a descriptor, the data remain allocated. elf should be a value previously returned by elf_begin; a null pointer is allowed as an argument, to simplify error handling. If the program wishes to write data associated with the ELF descriptor to the file, it must use elf_update before callin...
 libelf/elf_error(3) -- error handling
    If an ELF library function fails, a program may call elf_errno to retrieve the library's internal error number. As a side effect, this function resets the internal error number to zero, which indicates no error. elf_errmsg takes an error number, err, and returns a null-terminated error message (with no trailing new-line) that describes the problem. A zero err retrieves a message for the most recent error. If no error has occurred, the return va...
 libelf/elf_fill(3) -- set fill byte
    Alignment constraints for ELF files sometimes require the presence of ``holes.'' For example, if the data for one section are required to begin on an eight-byte boundary, but the preceding section is too ``short,'' the library must fill the intervening bytes. These bytes are set to the fill character. The library uses zero bytes unless the application supplies a value. See elf_getdata(3E) for more information about these holes....
 libelf/elf_flag(3) -- manipulate flags
    These functions manipulate the flags associated with various structures of an ELF file. Given an ELF descriptor (elf), a data descriptor (data), or a section descriptor (scn), the functions may set or clear the associated status bits, returning the updated bits. A null descriptor is allowed, to simplify error handling; all functions return zero for this degenerate case. cmd may have the following values. ELF_C_CLR The functions clear the bits that are asserted in flags. Only...
 libelf/elf_fsize(3) -- return the size of an object file type
    elf32_fsize gives the size in bytes of the 32-bit file representation of count data objects with the given type. The library uses version ver to calculate the size [see elf(3E) and elf_version(3E)]. Constant values are available for the sizes of fundamental types. Elf_Type File Size Memory Size _____________________________________________________ ELF_T_ADDR | ELF32_
 libelf/elf_getarhdr(3) -- retrieve archive member header
    elf_getarhdr returns a pointer to an archive member header, if one is available for the ELF descriptor elf. Otherwise, no archive member header exists, an error occurred, or elf was null; elf_getarhdr then returns a null value. The header includes the following members. char *ar_name; time_t ar_date; long ar_uid; long ...
 libelf/elf_getarsym(3) -- retrieve archive symbol table
    elf_getarsym returns a pointer to the archive symbol table, if one is available for the ELF descriptor elf. Otherwise, the archive doesn't have a symbol table, an error occurred, or elf was null; elf_getarsym then returns a null value. The symbol table is an array of structures that include the following members. char *as_name; size_t as_off; unsi...
 libelf/elf_getbase(3) -- get the base offset for an object file
    elf_getbase returns the file offset of the first byte of the file or archive member associated with elf, if it is known or obtainable, and -1 otherwise. A null elf is allowed, to simplify error handling; the return value in this case is -1. The base offset of an archive member is the beginning of the member's information, not the beginning of the archive member header....
 libelf/elf_getdata(3) -- get section data
    These functions access and manipulate the data associated with a section descriptor, scn. When reading an existing file, a section will have a single data buffer associated with it. A program may build a new section in pieces, however, composing the new data from multiple data buffers. For this reason, ``the'' data for a section should be viewed as a list of buffers, each of which is available through a data descriptor. elf_getdata lets a program step through a se...
 libelf/elf_getehdr(3) -- retrieve class-dependent object file header
    For a 32-bit class file, elf32_getehdr returns a pointer to an ELF header, if one is available for the ELF descriptor elf. If no header exists for the descriptor, elf32_newehdr allocates a ``clean'' one, but it otherwise behaves the same as elf32_getehdr. It does not allocate a new header if one exists already. If no header exists (for elf_getehdr), one cann...
 libelf/elf_getident(3) -- retrieve file identification data
    As elf(3E) explains, ELF provides a framework for various classes of files, where basic objects may have 32 bits, 64 bits, etc. To accommodate these differences, without forcing the larger sizes on smaller machines, the initial bytes in an ELF file hold identification information common to all file classes. Every ELF header's e_ident has EI_NIDENT bytes with the following interpretation. e_ident Index Value Purpose ___________...
 libelf/elf_getphdr(3) -- retrieve class-dependent program header table
    For a 32-bit class file, elf32_getphdr returns a pointer to the program execution header table, if one is available for the ELF descriptor elf. elf32_newphdr allocates a new table with count entries, regardless of whether one existed previously, and sets the ELF_F_DIRTY bit for the table [see elf_flag(3E)]. Specifying a zero count deletes an existing table. Note this behavior d...
 libelf/elf_getscn(3) -- get section information
    These functions provide indexed and sequential access to the sections associated with the ELF descriptor elf. If the program is building a new file, it is responsible for creating the file's ELF header before creating sections; see elf_getehdr(3E). elf_getscn returns a section descriptor, given an index into the file's section header table. Note the first ``real'' section has index 1. Although a program can get a section descriptor for...
 libelf/elf_getshdr(3) -- retrieve class-dependent section header
    For a 32-bit class file, elf32_getshdr returns a pointer to a section header for the section descriptor scn. Otherwise, the file is not a 32- bit class file, scn was null, or an error occurred; elf32_getshdr then returns null. The header includes the following members. Elf32_Word sh_name; Elf32_Word sh_type; Elf32_<...
 libelf/elf_hash(3) -- compute hash value
    elf_hash computes a hash value, given a null terminated string, name. The returned hash value, h, can be used as a bucket index, typically after computing h mod x to ensure appropriate bounds. Hash tables may be built on one machine and used on another because elf_hash uses unsigned arithmetic to avoid possible differences in various machines' signed arithmetic. Although name is shown as char* above, elf_hash treats i...
 libelf/elf_kind(3) -- determine file type
    This function returns a value identifying the kind of file associated with an ELF descriptor (elf). Currently defined values appear below. ELF_K_AR The file is an archive [see ar(4)]. An ELF descriptor may also be associated with an archive member, not the archive itself, and then elf_kind identifies the member's type. ELF_K_COFF The file is a COFF object file. COFF object files cannot be processed by this library, and E...
 libelf/elf_next(3) -- sequential archive member access
    elf_next, elf_rand, and elf_begin manipulate simple object files and archives. elf is an ELF descriptor previously returned from elf_begin. elf_next provides sequential access to the next archive member. That is, having an ELF descriptor, elf, associated with an archive member, elf_next prepares the containing archive to access the following member when the program ...
 libelf/elf_rand(3) -- random archive member access
    elf_rand, elf_next, and elf_begin manipulate simple object files and archives. elf is an ELF descriptor previously returned from elf_begin. elf_rand provides random archive processing, preparing elf to access an arbitrary archive member. elf must be a descriptor for the archive itself, not a member within the archive. offset gives the byte offset from the beginning of the archive to the...
 libelf/elf_rawfile(3) -- retrieve uninterpreted file contents
    elf_rawfile returns a pointer to an uninterpreted byte image of the file. This function should be used only to retrieve a file being read. For example, a program might use elf_rawfile to retrieve the bytes for an archive member. A program may not close or disable [see elf_cntl(3E)] the file descriptor associated with elf before the initial call to elf_rawfile, because elf_r<...
 libelf/elf_strptr(3) -- make a string pointer
    This function converts a string section offset to a string pointer. elf identifies the file in which the string section resides, and section gives the section table index for the strings. elf_strptr normally returns a pointer to a string, but it returns a null pointer when elf is null, section is invalid or is not a section of type SHT_STRTAB, the section data cannot be obtained, offset is invalid, or an error occurs....
 libelf/elf_update(3) -- update an ELF descriptor
    elf_update causes the library to examine the information associated with an ELF descriptor, elf, and to recalculate the structural data needed to generate the file's image. cmd may have the following values. ELF_C_NULL This value tells elf_update to recalculate various values, updating only the ELF descriptor's memory structures. Any modified structures are flagged with the ELF_F_DIRTY bit....
 libelf/elf_version(3) -- coordinate ELF library and application versions
    As elf(3E) explains, the program, the library, and an object file have independent notions of the ``latest'' ELF version. elf_version lets a program determine the ELF library's internal version. It further lets the program specify what memory types it uses by giving its own working version, ver, to the library. Every program that uses the ELF library must coordinate versions as described below. The header file <libelf.h> sup...
 libelf/elf_xlate(3) -- class-dependent data translation
    elf32_xlatetom translates various data structures from their 32-bit class file representations to their memory representations; elf32_xlatetof provides the inverse. This conversion is particularly important for cross development environments. src is a pointer to the source buffer that holds the original data; dst is a pointer to a destination buffer that will hold the translated copy. encode gives the byte encoding in ...
 complib/ELMBAK(3) -- EISPACK routine. This subroutine forms the eigenvectors of a REAL GENERAL matrix by back transforming those of
    On INPUT NM must be set to the row dimension of two-dimensional array parameters as declared in the calling program dimension statement. LOW and IGH are integers determined by the balancing subroutine BALANC. If BALANC has not been used, set LOW=1 and IGH equal to the order of the matrix. A contains the multipliers which were used in the reduction by ELMHES in its lower triangle below the subdiagonal. INT contains information on the rows and columns interchanged in the reduction by ELMHES. Only ...
 complib/ELMHES(3) -- EISPACK routine. Given a REAL GENERAL matrix, this subroutine reduces a submatrix situated in rows and columns
    On INPUT NM must be set to the row dimension of two-dimensional array parameters as declared in the calling program dimension statement. N is the order of the matrix. LOW and IGH are integers determined by the balancing subroutine BALANC. If BALANC has not been used, set LOW=1, IGH=N. A contains the input matrix. On OUTPUT A contains the Hessenberg matrix. The multipliers which were used in the reduction are stored in the remaining triangle under the Hessenberg matrix. INT contains information o...
 complib/ELTRAN(3) -- EISPACK routine. This subroutine accumulates the stabilized elementary similarity transformations used in the
    On INPUT NM must be set to the row dimension of two-dimensional array parameters as declared in the calling program dimension statement. N is the order of the matrix. LOW and IGH are integers determined by the balancing subroutine BALANC. If BALANC has not been used, set LOW=1, IGH=N. A contains the multipliers which were used in the reduction by ELMHES in its lower triangle below the subdiagonal. INT contains information on the rows and columns interchanged in the reduction by ELMHES. only elem...
 f90/enable_ieee_interrupt(3) -- Enables floating-point interrupt
    UNICOS/mk and IRIX systems CRAY T90 systems that support IEEE floating-point arithmetic
 standard/end(3) -- loader defined symbols in a program
    For the convenience of utilities and other applications which need to access an executable in special ways, ld(1) may create one or more of the special symbols in the list above. Of these, only the symbols _procedure_table _procedure_string_table, _rt_symbol_table and _rt_symbol_string_table, __rld_obj_head, __elf_header, __program_header_table, _lib_version, which are described below, actually have associated data, which is specially created by ld(1). For each of the remaining special symbols i...
 standard/endclosedline(3) -- delimit the vertices of a closed line
    none
 standard/endcurve(3) -- delimit a NURBS curve definition
    none
 standard/endfeedback(3) -- control feedback mode
    buffer expects a buffer into which the system writes the feedback output from the Geometry Pipeline. On the Personal Iris, Iris Entry, Indy, XL, XS, XS24, Elan, Extreme, and VGX, the output consists of 32-bit floating point values; on the other IRIS-4D models, the output consists of 16-bit integer values. Be sure you declare your buffer appropriately. size expects the maximum number of buffer elements into which the system will write feedback output. This must not exceed the number of elements i...
 standard/endfullscrn(3) -- ends full-screen mode
    none
 standard/endline(3) -- delimit the vertices of a line
    none
 standard/endpick(3) -- turns off picking mode
    buffer expects a buffer into which to append the contents of the name stack when a drawing routine draws in the picking region. Before writing the contents of the name stack, the system appends the number of entries it is about to append. Thus, if the name stack contains the values, 5, 9, and 17; then endpick appends the values, 3, 5, 9, and 17, to buffer. Because more than one drawing routine may have written in the picking region, it is possible for buffer to contain a number of readings from ...
 standard/endpoint(3) -- delimit the interpretation of vertex routines as points
    none
 standard/endpolygon(3) -- delimit the vertices of a polygon
    none
 standard/endpupmode(3) -- obsolete routines
    none
 standard/endqstrip(3) -- delimit the vertices of a quadrilateral strip
    Vertices specified between bgnqstrip and endqstrip are used to define a strip of quadrilaterals. The graphics pipe maintains three vertex registers. The first, second, and third vertices are loaded into the registers, but no quadrilateral is drawn until the system executes the fourth vertex routine. Upon executing the fourth vertex routine, the system draws a quadrilateral through the vertices, then replaces the two oldest vertices with the third and fourth vertices. For each new pair of vertex ...
 standard/endselect(3) -- turns off selecting mode
    buffer expects a buffer into which to write hits. FUNCTION RETURN VALUE The returned function values is the number of hits made while selection mode was active. Each time there is a hit, the system writes the name stack to buffer. If the value returned is negative, the buffer is not large enough to hold all the hits that occurred.
 standard/endsurface(3) -- delimit a NURBS surface definition
    none
 standard/endtmesh(3) -- delimit the vertices of a triangle mesh
    none
 standard/endtrim(3) -- delimit a NURBS surface trimming loop
    none
 perl5/English(3) -- use nice English (or awk) names for ugly punctuation variables
    This module provides aliases for the built-in variables whose names no one seems to like to read. Variables with side-effects which get triggered just by accessing them (like $0) will still be affected. For those variables that have an awk version, both long and short English alternatives are provided. For example, the $/ variable can be referred to either $RS or $INPUT_RECORD_SEPARATOR if you are using the English module. See the perlvar manpage for a complete list of these. PPPPaaaaggg...
 Tcl/enterfile(3) -- manipulate the table of open files
    Tcl_Interp *interp (in) Tcl interpreter from which file is to be accessed. FILE *file (in) Handle for file that is to become accessible in interp. int permissions (in) OR-ed combination of TCL_FILE_READABLE and TCL_FILE_WRITABLE; indicates whether file was opened for reading or writing or both. char *string (in) String identifying file, such as stdin or file4. int write (in) Non-zero means the file will be used for writing, zero means it will be used for reading. int checkUsage (in) If non-zero,...
 Tk/entry(3) -- Create and manipulate entry widgets
    background highlightBackground insertOnTime selectForeground | borderWidth highlightColor insertWidth takeFocus | cursor highlightThickness justify textVariable exportSelection insertBackground relief xScrollCommand foreground insertBorderWidth selectBackground font insertOffTime selectBorderWidth See the ``options'' manual entry for details on the standard options. WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS Name: show | Class: Show | Command-Line Switch:-show | If this option is specified, then the true content...
 perl5/Env(3) -- perl module that imports environment variables
    Perl maintains environment variables in a pseudo-hash named %ENV. For when this access method is inconvenient, the Perl module Env allows environment variables to be treated as simple variables. The Env::import() function ties environment variables with suitable names to global Perl variables with the same names. By default it does so with all existing environment variables (keys %ENV). If the import function receives arguments, it takes them to be a list of environment variables to tie; it's o...
 Tcl/eof(3) -- Check for end-of-file condition on open file
    Returns 1 if an end-of-file condition has occurred on fileId, 0 otherwise. FileId must have been the return value from a previous call to open, or it may be stdin, stdout, or stderr to refer to one of the standard I/O channels.
 f90/eoshift(3) -- Performs an end-off shift on an array expression
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 ftn/ep(3) -- FORTRAN numeric characteristic constants
    ep is the general name for the set of intrinsic functions which return the numeric characteristics of each of the standard numeric types. epbase - returns the base for the type of the argument (for floating point types, epbase returns the base of the mantissa). Currently this is 2. Page 1 EP(3F) EP(3F) epprec - returns the precision (in terms of power of the base) for the type of the argument. The sign bit (if any) is not included in the precision. The assumed bit (see IEEE floating point specif...
 f90/epsilon(3) -- Returns a positive number near 1 in the numeric model
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 complib/EPSLON(3) -- EISPACK auxiliary routine.
    Estimate unit roundoff in quantities of size x. PPPPaaaaggggeeee 1111
 f90/eqv(3) -- Computes logical equivalence
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 standard/erf(3) -- error function and complementary error function
    erf returns the error function of x, defined as (2 / sqrt(pi)) integral{0 to x} of (e ** -t **2) dt. erfc, which returns 1.0 - erf(x), is provided because of the extreme loss of relative accuracy if erf(x) is called for large x and the result subtracted from 1.0 (e.g., for x = 10, 12 places are lost). The standard math library libm.a, libmx.a, and libm43.a each contain versions of erf and erfc, however the long double-precision routines erfl and erfcl are only available in the standard math libr...
 ftn/erf(3) -- error function and complementary error function
    erf returns the error function of x, defined as (2 / sqrt(pi)) integral{0 to x} of (e ** -t **2) dt. erfc, which returns 1.0 - erf(x), is provided because of the extreme loss of relative accuracy if erf(x) is called for large x and the result subtracted from 1.0 (e.g., for x = 10, 12 places are lost). The standard math library libm.a, libmx.a, and libm43.a each contain versions of erf and erfc, however the long double-precision routines erfl and erfcl are only available in the standard math libr...
 Tcl/error(3) -- Generate an error
    Returns a TCL_ERROR code, which causes command interpretation to be unwound. Message is a string that is returned to the application to indicate what went wrong. If the info argument is provided and is non-empty, it is used to initialize the global variable errorInfo. errorInfo is used to accumulate a stack trace of what was in progress when an error occurred; as nested commands unwind, the Tcl interpreter adds information to errorInfo. If the info argument is present, it is used to initialize e...
 ethers(3c) -- ethernet address mapping operations
    These routines are useful for mapping 48 bit ethernet numbers to their ASCII representations or their corresponding host names, and vice versa. The function ether_ntoa converts a 48-bit ethernet number pointed to by e to its standard ACSII representation; it returns a pointer to the ASCII string. The representation is of the form: ``x:x:x:x:x:x'' where x is a hexadecimal number between 0 and ff. The function ether_aton converts an ASCII string in the standard representation back to a 48 bit et...
 ftn/etime(3) -- return user+system execution time
    These two routines return user and system runtime in seconds for the calling process. Dtime returns the user and system time since the last call to dtime, or the start of execution on the first call. The argument array returns user time in the first element and system time in the second element. The function value is the sum of user and system time. This value approximates the program's elapsed time on a quiet system. The resolution of all timing is 1/HZ. See the system include file param.h in ...
 Tcl/eval(3) -- Evaluate a Tcl script
    Eval takes one or more arguments, which together comprise a Tcl script containing one or more commands. Eval concatenates all its arguments in the same fashion as the concat command, passes the concatenated string to the Tcl interpreter recursively, and returns the result of that evaluation (or any error generated by it).
 Tk/eventhndlr(3) -- associate procedure callback with an X event
    Tk_Window tkwin (in) Token for window in which events may occur. unsigned long mask (in) Bit-mask of events (such as ButtonPressMask) for which proc should be called. Tk_EventProc *proc (in) Procedure to invoke whenever an event in mask occurs in the window given by tkwin. ClientData clientData (in) Arbitrary one-word value to pass to proc.
 Tk/eventinit(3) -- Use the Tk event loop without the rest of Tk
    Tcl_Interp *interp (in) Interpreter in which event-related Tk commands are to be created.
 EventMonAPI(3x) -- Programmer's Guide
    EventMon API is a set of functions for connecting to and communicating with Event Monitor daemon (see eventmond(1M) for more details). (EventMon daemon is a system daemon responsible for intercepting all system events messages from syslog daemon, filtering and buffering them). This API allows different applications to communicate with EventMon daemon in order to do the following: check installed binary image of EventMon daemon in system directory (function emapiIsDaemonInstalled()); check if an ...
 standard/exception(3) -- exception handling facility
    NOTE: this version (4.0) of exception handling facility is totally different from the (3.xx) versions. This version extracts information from the .debug_frame section instead of the runtime procedure table as in the prior releases. All the old functions -- exception_dispatcher, find_rpd, set_unhandled_exception and unwind -- are no longer supported. To handle exceptions from UNIX signals and to minimize the cost at runtime until an exception is encountered, the loader collects perprocedure excep...
 Tcl/exec(3) -- Invoke subprocess(es)
    This command treats its arguments as the specification of one or more subprocesses to execute. The arguments take the form of a standard shell pipeline where each arg becomes one word of a command, and each distinct command becomes a subprocess. If the initial arguments to exec start with - then they are treated as | command-line switches and are not part of the pipeline specification. | The following switches are currently supported: -keepnewline Retains a trailing newline in the pipeline's ou...
 f90/exit(3) -- End the application
    Terminate the process, returning returnCode to the system as the exit status. If returnCode isn't specified then it defaults to 0.
 Tcl/exit(3) -- End the application
    Terminate the process, returning returnCode to the system as the exit status. If returnCode isn't specified then it defaults to 0.
 Tk/exit(3) -- End the application
    Terminate the process, returning returnCode to the system as the exit status. If returnCode isn't specified then it defaults to 0.
 standard/exp(3) -- exponential, logarithm, power
    The long double and single-precision routines listed above are only available in the standard math library, -lm, and in -lmx. The exp family return the exponential function of x, e**x. The expm1 family return exp(x)-1 accurately even for tiny x. The log functions return the natural logarithm of x. The log10 functions return the base 10 logarithm of x. Page 1 EXP(3M) EXP(3M) The log1p family return log(1+x) accurately even for tiny x. pow(x,y), its single-precision counterpart powf(x,y), and its ...
 f90/exp(3) -- exponential, logarithm, power
    The long double and single-precision routines listed above are only available in the standard math library, -lm, and in -lmx. The exp family return the exponential function of x, e**x. The expm1 family return exp(x)-1 accurately even for tiny x. The log functions return the natural logarithm of x. The log10 functions return the base 10 logarithm of x. Page 1 EXP(3M) EXP(3M) The log1p family return log(1+x) accurately even for tiny x. pow(x,y), its single-precision counterpart powf(x,y), and its ...
 ftn/exp(3) -- exponential, logarithm, power
    The long double and single-precision routines listed above are only available in the standard math library, -lm, and in -lmx. The exp family return the exponential function of x, e**x. The expm1 family return exp(x)-1 accurately even for tiny x. The log functions return the natural logarithm of x. The log10 functions return the base 10 logarithm of x. Page 1 EXP(3M) EXP(3M) The log1p family return log(1+x) accurately even for tiny x. pow(x,y), its single-precision counterpart powf(x,y), and its ...
 f90/exponent(3) -- Returns the exponent part of the argument when represented as a numeric model number
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 exportent(3) -- get exported file system information
    These routines access the exported filesystem information in /etc/xtab. setexportent opens the export information file and returns a file pointer to use with getexportent, addexportent, remexportent, and endexportent. getexportent reads the next line from filep and returns a pointer to an object with the following structure containing the broken-out fields of a line in the file, /etc/xtab. The fields have meanings described in exports(4). #define ACCESS_OPT ``access'' /* machines that can moun...
 perl5/Exporter(3) -- Implements default import method for modules
    The Exporter module implements a default import method which many modules choose to inherit rather than implement their own. Perl automatically calls the import method when processing a use statement for a module. Modules and use are documented in the perlfunc manpage and the perlmod manpage. Understanding the concept of modules and how the use statement operates is important to understanding the Exporter....
 Tcl/expr(3) -- Evaluate an expression
    Concatenates arg's (adding separator spaces between them), evaluates the | result as a Tcl expression, and returns the value. The operators permitted in Tcl expressions are a subset of the operators permitted in C expressions, and they have the same meaning and precedence as the corresponding C operators. Expressions almost always yield numeric results (integer or floating-point values). For example, the expression expr 8.2 + 6 evaluates to 14.2. Tcl expressions differ from C expressions in the...
 Tcl/exprlong(3) -- evaluate an expression
    Tcl_Interp *interp (in) Interpreter in whose context to evaluate string. char *string (in) Expression to be evaluated. Must be in writable memory (the expression parser makes temporary modifications to the string during parsing, which it undoes before returning). long *longPtr (out) Pointer to location in which to store the integer value of the expression. int *doublePtr (out) Pointer to location in which to store the floating-point value of the expression. int *booleanPtr (out) Pointer to locat...
 perl5/ExtUtils::Command(3) -- utilities to replace common UNIX commands in Makefiles etc.
    The module is used in Win32 port to replace common UNIX commands. Most commands are wrapers on generic modules File::Path and File::Basename. cat Concatenates all files mentioned on command line to STDOUT. eqtime src dst Sets modified time of dst to that of src rm_f files.... Removes directories - recursively (even if readonly) rm_f files.... Removes files (even if readonly) touch files ... Makes files exist, with current timestamp mv source... destination Moves source to destination. Multiple s...
 perl5/ExtUtils::Embed(3) -- Utilities for embedding Perl in C/C++ applications
    ExtUtils::Embed provides utility functions for embedding a Perl interpreter and extensions in your C/C++ applications. Typically, an application Makefile will invoke ExtUtils::Embed functions while building your application. @EXPORT ExtUtils::Embed exports the following functions: xsinit(), ldopts(), ccopts(), perl_inc(), ccflags(), ccdlflags(), xsi_header(), xsi_protos(), xsi_body()
 perl5/ExtUtils::Install(3) -- install files from here to there
    Both install() and uninstall() are specific to the way ExtUtils::MakeMaker handles the installation and deinstallation of perl modules. They are not designed as general purpose tools. install() takes three arguments. A reference to a hash, a verbose switch and a don't-really-do-it switch. The hash ref contains a mapping of directories: each key/value pair is a combination of directories to be copied. Key is a directory to copy from, value is a directory to copy to. The whole tree below the "fr...
 perl5/ExtUtils::Liblist(3) -- determine libraries to use and how to use them
    This utility takes a list of libraries in the form -llib1 -llib2 -llib3 and prints out lines suitable for inclusion in an extension Makefile. Extra library paths may be included with the form -L/another/path this will affect the searches for all subsequent libraries. It returns an array of four scalar values: EXTRALIBS, BSLOADLIBS, LDLOADLIBS, and LD_RUN_PATH. Some of these don't mean anything on VMS and Win32. See the details about those platform specifics below. Dependent libraries can be lin...
 perl5/ExtUtils::MakeMaker(3) -- create an extension Makefile
    This utility is designed to write a Makefile for an extension module from a Makefile.PL. It is based on the Makefile.SH model provided by Andy Dougherty and the perl5-porters. It splits the task of generating the Makefile into several subroutines that can be individually overridden. Each subroutine returns the text it wishes to have written to the Makefile. MakeMaker is object oriented. Each directory below the current directory that contains a Makefile.PL. Is treated as a separate object. This ...
 perl5/ExtUtils::Manifest(3) -- utilities to write and check a MANIFEST file
    Mkmanifest() writes all files in and below the current directory to a file named in the global variable $ExtUtils::Manifest::MANIFEST (which defaults to MANIFEST) in the current directory. It works similar to find . -print but in doing so checks each line in an existing MANIFEST file and includes any comments that are found in the existing MANIFEST file in the new one. Anything between white space and an end of line within a MANIFEST file is considered to be a comment. Filenames and comments are...
 perl5/ExtUtils::Miniperl(3) -- write the C code for perlmain.c
    This whole module is written when perl itself is built from a script called minimod.PL. In case you want to patch it, please patch minimod.PL in the perl distribution instead. writemain() takes an argument list of directories containing archive libraries that relate to perl modules and should be linked into a new perl binary. It writes to STDOUT a corresponding perlmain.c file that is a plain C file containing all the bootstrap code to make the modules associated with the libraries available fro...
 perl5/ExtUtils::Mkbootstrap(3) -- make a bootstrap file for use by DynaLoader
    Mkbootstrap typically gets called from an extension Makefile. There is no *.bs file supplied with the extension. Instead a *_BS file which has code for the special cases, like posix for berkeley db on the NeXT. This file will get parsed, and produce a maybe empty @DynaLoader::dl_resolve_using array for the current architecture. That will be extended by $BSLOADLIBS, which was computed by ExtUtils::Liblist::ext(). If this array still is empty, we do nothing, else we write a .bs file with an @DynaL...
 perl5/ExtUtils::Mksymlists(3) -- write linker options files for dynamic extension
    ExtUtils::Mksymlists produces files used by the linker under some OSs during the creation of shared libraries for dynamic extensions. It is normally called from a MakeMaker-generated Makefile when the extension is built. The linker option file is generated by calling the function Mksymlists, which is exported by default from ExtUtils::Mksymlists. It takes one argument, a list of key-value pairs, in which the following keys are recognized: NAME This gives the name of the extension (e.g. Tk::Canva...
 perl5/ExtUtils::MM_OS2(3) -- methods to override UN*X behaviour in ExtUtils::MakeMaker
    See ExtUtils::MM_Unix for a documentation of the methods provided there. This package overrides the implementation of these methods, not the semantics. PPPPaaaaggggeeee 1111
 perl5/ExtUtils::MM_Unix(3) -- methods used by ExtUtils::MakeMaker
    The methods provided by this package are designed to be used in conjunction with ExtUtils::MakeMaker. When MakeMaker writes a Makefile, it creates one or more objects that inherit their methods from a package MM. MM itself doesn't provide any methods, but it ISA ExtUtils::MM_Unix class. The inheritance tree of MM lets operating specific packages take the responsibility for all the methods provided by MM_Unix. We are trying to reduce the number of the necessary overrides by defining rather primi...
 perl5/ExtUtils::MM_VMS(3) -- methods to override UN*X behaviour in ExtUtils::MakeMaker
    See ExtUtils::MM_Unix for a documentation of the methods provided there. This package overrides the implementation of these methods, not the semantics.
 perl5/ExtUtils::MM_Win32(3) -- methods to override UN*X behaviour in ExtUtils::MakeMaker
    See ExtUtils::MM_Unix for a documentation of the methods provided there. This package overrides the implementation of these methods, not the semantics. catfile Concatenate one or more directory names and a filename to form a complete path ending with a filename constants (o) Initializes lots of constants and .SUFFIXES and .PHONY static_lib (o) Defines how to produce the *.a (or equivalent) files. dynamic_bs (o) Defines targets for bootstrap files. dynamic_lib (o) Defines how to produce the *.so ...
 perl5/ExtUtils::testlib(3) -- add blib/* directories to @INC
    After an extension has been built and before it is installed it may be desirable to test it bypassing make test. By adding use ExtUtils::testlib; to a test program the intermediate directories used by make are added to @INC. PPPPaaaaggggeeee 1111
 fam(3x) -- File Alteration Monitor (FAM) library routines
    FAM monitors files and directories, notifying interested applications of changes. Routines for communicating with the fam(1M) server process are found in ``libfam.a'', which is loaded if the option ``-lfam'' is used with cc(1) or ld(1). The library ``libC.a'' (``-lC'') must also be specified. An application calls routines described here to establish a list of files for fam to monitor. Fam generates events on a socket to communicate with the application. The fam process is started when th...
 fattach(3c) -- attach a STREAMS-based file descriptor to an object in the filesystem name space
    The fattach routine attaches a STREAMS-based file descriptor to an object in the filesystem name space, effectively associating a name with fildes. fildes must be a valid open file descriptor representing a STREAMS file. path is a pathname of an existing object, and the effective user ID of the calling process must be the owner of the file and have write permissions, or the calling process must have appropriate privilege (P_OWNER). All subsequent operations...
 standard/fbsubtexload(3) -- load part or all of a texture defined with TX_FASTDEFINE
    x is the window-relative starting x coordinate of the rectangle in the framebuffer that is being loaded into texture memory. y is the window-relative starting y coordinate of the rectangle in the framebuffer that is being loaded into texture memory. target is the texture target to which the texture we are loading is bound. id is the id of the texture we are loading. s0 is the starting S coordinate of the subtexture to load. s1 is the ending S coordinate of the subtexture to load. t0 is the start...
 f90/fcd(3) -- Constructs a Cray character pointer in Fortran character Descriptor (FCD) format
    UNICOS and UNICOS/mk systems IRIX systems (DEFERRED IMPLEMENTATION)
 fclose(3s) -- close or flush a stream
    fclose causes any buffered data waiting to be written for the named stream [see intro(3)] to be written out, and the stream to be closed. If the underlying file pointer is not already at end of file, and the file is one capable of seeking, the file pointer is adjusted so that the next operation on the open file pointer deals with the byte after the last one read from or written to the file being closed. If stream points to an output stream or an update stream on ...
 perl5/Fcntl(3) -- load the C Fcntl.h defines
    This module is just a translation of the C fnctl.h file. Unlike the old mechanism of requiring a translated fnctl.ph file, this uses the h2xs program (see the Perl source distribution) and your native C compiler. This means that it has a far more likely chance of getting the numbers right.
 ftn/fdate(3) -- return date and time in an ASCII string
    Fdate returns the current date and time as a 24 character string in the format described under ctime(3). Neither `newline' nor NULL will be included. Fdate can be called either as a function or as a subroutine. If called as a function, the calling routine must define its type and length. For example: character*24 fdate external fdate write(*,*) fdate()
 fdetach(3c) -- detach a name from a STREAMS-based file descriptor
    The fdetach routine detaches a STREAMS-based file descriptor from a name in the filesystem. path is the pathname of the object in the filesystem name space, which was previously attached (see fattach(3C)). The user must be the owner of the file or a user with the appropriate privileges. All subsequent operations on path will operate on the filesystem node and not on the STREAMS file. The permissions and status of the node are restored to the state the no...
 standard/feedback(3) -- control feedback mode
    buffer expects a buffer into which the system writes the feedback output from the Geometry Pipeline. On the Personal Iris, Iris Entry, Indy, XL, XS, XS24, Elan, Extreme, and VGX, the output consists of 32-bit floating point values; on the other IRIS-4D models, the output consists of 16-bit integer values. Be sure you declare your buffer appropriately. size expects the maximum number of buffer elements into which the system will write feedback output. This must not exceed the number of elements i...
 ferror(3s) -- stream status inquiries
    ferror returns non-zero when an I/O error has previously occurred reading from or writing to the named stream, otherwise zero. feof returns non-zero when EOF has previously been detected reading the named input stream, otherwise zero. clearerr resets the error indicator and EOF indicator to zero on the named stream. fileno returns the integer file descriptor associated with the named stream (see below for common file descriptors, and open(2) for general information on file descriptors.) The foll...
 fetchop(3p) -- atomic operations employing special fetchop hardware
    res_id The handle used by unrelated processes to allocate a reservoir. This is the value returned by atomic_alloc_res_ident(). policy The handle of a policy module created by the user. count The number of atomic variables that will be needed in a reservoir. addr The base address when choosing or getting information about the base address where the variables are allocated. flags The flags indicate whether to set or return the base address of the variables. reservoir The handle for a reservoir fro...
 f90/ffassign(3) -- Provides library interface to assign processing
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/fffcntl(3) -- Performs functions on files opened using flexible file I/O
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/ffopen(3) -- Opens or closes a file using flexible file I/O
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/ffpos(3) -- Positions files opened using flexible file I/O
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/ffread(3) -- Provides flexible file I/O
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/ffseek(3) -- Repositions a flexible file I/O file
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 complib/fft(3) -- Fast Fourier Transforms
    For the C interface two types "complex" and "zomplex" have been defined as structures of two floating point variables ( re, im ). They are equivalent to the "complex" and "double complex" Fortran types. typedef struct { float re; float im; } complex; typedef struct { double re; double im; } zomplex; These types as well as the prototypes of the different functions for FFTs are defined in the "/usr/include/fft.h" header file. In C, Multi Dimensional sequences are actually stored into a 1...
 complib/fft1d(3) -- 1D, Real Complex-to-Complex, Fast Fourier Transforms.
    cfft1d and zfft1d compute the Fourier transform of a complex sequence. The k-th index F(k) of the Fourier transform of a real sequence f(i) is equal to: F(k) = Sum ( W^(i*k) * f(i) ), for i =0, ..., (N-1) W = exp( (Sign*2*sqrt(-1)*PI) / N ) The Direct Fourier transform is performed in-place, so the input sequence is overwritten by its Fourier transform.
 complib/fft1di(3) -- initialize the coefficient array for Complex-toComplex 1D FFT modules.
    Initialize the coefficient array which is used in the FFT modules. This array contains the different twiddle factors and the factorization of N into prime numbers. As the FFT modules cfft1d or zfft1d only read the coeff array, it may be reused as long as necessary once it has been initialized. In C, if ptr is NULL, cfft1di or zfft1di returns a pointer to an allocated buffer. CFFT1DI should be used to initialize the coeeficient array before any call to CFFT1D ZFFT1DI should be used to initialize ...
 complib/fft1du(3) -- 1D, Real to Complex, Direct Fast Fourier Transforms.
    scfft1du and dzfft1du compute the Fourier transform of a real sequence. The k-th index F(k) of the Fourier transform of a real sequence f(i) is equal to: F(k) = Sum ( W^(i*k) * f(i) ), for i =0, ..., (N-1) W = exp( (Sign*2*sqrt(-1)*PI) / N ) The Direct Fourier transform is performed in-place, so the input sequence is overwritten by its Fourier transform. As the input sequence has real values, only the first half of the transform is needed. The (N-k)-th sample of the transform would be the conjug...
 complib/fft1dui(3) -- initialize the coefficient array for real-tocomplex 1D FFT modules.
    Initialize, the coefficient array which is used in the FFT modules. This array contains the different twiddle factors and the factorization of N into prime numbers. As the FFT modules scfft1d or dzfft1d only read the coeff array, it may be reused as long as necessary once it has been initialized. In C, if ptr is NULL, scfft1dui or dzfft1dui returns a pointer to an allocated buffer. SCFFT1DUI should be used to initialize the coefficient array before any call to SCFFT1DU DZFFT1DUI should be used t...
 complib/fft2d(3) -- 2D Complex-to-Complex Fast Fourier Transform.
    cfft2d and zfft2d compute in place the complex Fourier transform of complex 2D sequence of size N1 x N2. The value F{k,l} of the transform of the 2D sequence f{i,j} is equal to: F{k,l} = Sum ( W1^(i*k) * W2^(j*l) * f{i,j} ), for i =0,...,(N1-1), and j=0,...,(n2-1) W1 = exp( (Sign*2*sqrt(-1)*PI) / N1 ) W2 = exp( (Sign*2*sqrt(-1)*PI) / N2 )
 complib/fft2di(3) -- initialize the coefficient array for complex-tocomplex 2D FFT modules.
    Initialize the coefficient array which is used in the 2D FFT modules. This array contains the different twiddle factors and the factorization of N1 and N2 into prime numbers. As the FFT modules cfft2d or zfft2d only read the coeff array, it may be reused as long as necessary once it has been initialized. In C, if ptr is NULL, cfft2di or zfft2di returns a pointer to an allocated buffer. CFFT2DI should be used to initialize the coefficient array before any call to CFFT2D ZFFT2DI should be used to ...
 complib/fft2du(3) -- 2D, Real to Complex, Direct Fast Fourier Transforms.
    scfft2du and dzfft2du compute in place the complex Fourier transform of real 2D sequence of size N1 x N2. The value F{k,l} of the transform of the 2D sequence f{i,j} is equal to: F{k,l} = Sum ( W1^(i*k) * W2^(j*l) * f{i,j} ), for i =0,...,(N1-1), j=0,...,(n2-1) W1 = exp( (Sign*2*sqrt(-1)*PI) / N1 ) W2 = exp( (Sign*2*sqrt(-1)*PI) / N2 )
 complib/fft2dui(3) -- initialize the coefficient array for real-tocomplex 2D FFT modules.
    Initialize, the coefficient array which is used in the 2D FFT modules. This array contains the different twiddle factors and the factorization of N1 and N2 into prime numbers. As the FFT modules scfft2d or dzfft2d only read the coeff array, it may be reused as many times as necessary once it has been initialized. In C, if ptr is NULL, scfft2dui or dzfft2dui returns a pointer to an allocated buffer. SCFFT2DUI should be used to initialize the coefficient array before any call to SCFFT2DU DZFFT2DUI...
 complib/fft3d(3) -- 3D Complex-to-Complex Fast Fourier Transform.
    cfft3d and zfft3d compute in place the complex Fourier transform of complex 3D sequence of size N1xN2xN3. The value F{j1,j2,j3} of the transform of the 3D sequence f{i1,i2,i3} is equal to: F{j1,j2,j3} = Sum(W1^(i1*j1)*W2^(i2*j2)*W3^(i3*j3*f{i1,i2,i3} ), for i[123] =0,...,(N[123]-1) W[123] = exp( (Sign*2*sqrt(-1)*PI) / N[123] )
 complib/fft3di(3) -- initialize the coefficient array for complex-tocomplex 3D FFT modules.
    Initialize the coefficient array which is used in the 3D FFT modules. This array contains the different twiddle factors and the factorization of N1,N2 and N3 into prime numbers. As the FFT modules cfft3d or zfft3d only read the coeff array, it may be reused as many times as necessary once it has been initialized. In C, if ptr is NULL, cfft3di or zfft3di returns a pointer to an allocated buffer. CFFT3DI should be used to initialize the coefficient array before any call to CFFT3D ZFFT3DI should be...
 complib/fft3du(3) -- 3D, Real to Complex, Direct Fast Fourier Transforms.
    scfft3du and dzfft3du compute in place the complex Fourier transform of real 3D sequence of size N1 x N2 x N3. The value F{j1,j2,j3} of the transform of the 3D sequence f{i1,i2,i3} is equal to: F{j1,j2,j3}=Sum(W1^(i1*j1)*W2^(i2*j2)*W3^(i3*j3)*f{i1,i2,i3}), for i[123] =0,...,(N[123]-1) W[123] = exp( (Sign*2*sqrt(-1)*PI) / N[123] )
 complib/fft3dui(3) -- initialize the coefficient array for real-tocomplex 3D FFT modules.
    Initialize, the coefficient array which is used in the 3D FFT modules. This array contains the different twiddle factors and the factorization of N1, N2 and N3 into prime numbers. As the FFT modules scfft3d or dzfft3d only read the coeff array, it may be reused as many times as necessary once it has been initialized. In C, if ptr is NULL, scfft3dui or dzfft3dui returns a pointer to an allocated buffer. SCFFT3DUI should be used to initialize the coefficient array before any call to SCFFT3DU DZFFT...
 complib/FIGI(3) -- EISPACK routine. Given a NONSYMMETRIC TRIDIAGONAL
    On INPUT NM must be set to the row dimension of two-dimensional array parameters as declared in the calling program dimension statement. N is the order of the matrix. T contains the input matrix. Its subdiagonal is stored in the last N-1 positions of the first column, its diagonal in the N positions of the second column, and its superdiagonal in the first N-1 positions of the third column. T(1,1) and T(N,3) are arbitrary. On OUTPUT T is unaltered. D contains the diagonal elements of the symmetri...
 complib/FIGI2(3) -- EISPACK routine. Given a NONSYMMETRIC TRIDIAGONAL
    On INPUT NM must be set to the row dimension of two-dimensional array parameters as declared in the calling program dimension statement. N is the order of the matrix. T contains the input matrix. Its subdiagonal is stored in the last N-1 positions of the first column, its diagonal in the N positions of the second column, and its superdiagonal in the first N-1 positions of the third column. T(1,1) and T(N,3) are arbitrary. On OUTPUT T is unaltered. D contains the diagonal elements of the symmetri...
 Tcl/file(3) -- Manipulate file names and attributes
    This command provides several operations on a file's name or attributes. Name is the name of a file; if it starts with a tilde, then tilde substitution is done before executing the command (see the manual entry for Tcl_TildeSubst for details). Option indicates what to do with the file name. Any unique abbreviation for option is acceptable. The valid options are: file atime name Returns a decimal string giving the time at which file name was last accessed. The time is measured in the standard PO...
 perl5/File::Basename(3) -- extract just the directory from a path
    These routines allow you to parse file specifications into useful pieces using the syntax of different operating systems. fileparse_set_fstype You select the syntax via the routine fileparse_set_fstype(). If the argument passed to it contains one of the substrings "VMS", "MSDOS", "MacOS", "AmigaOS" or "MSWin32", the file specification syntax of that operating system is used in future calls to fileparse(), basename(), and dirname(). If it contains none of these substrings, UNIX syntax i...
 perl5/File::CheckTree(3) -- run many filetest checks on a tree
    The validate() routine takes a single multiline string consisting of lines containing a filename plus a file test to try on it. (The file test may also be a "cd", causing subsequent relative filenames to be interpreted relative to that directory.) After the file test you may put || die to make it a fatal error if the file test fails. The default is || warn. The file test may optionally have a "!' prepended to test for the opposite condition. If you do a cd and then list some relative filenam...
 perl5/File::Compare(3) -- Compare files or filehandles
    The File::Compare::compare function compares the contents of two sources, each of which can be a file or a file handle. It is exported from File::Compare by default. File::Compare::cmp is a synonym for File::Compare::compare. It is exported from File::Compare only by request.
 perl5/File::Copy(3) -- Copy files or filehandles
    The File::Copy module provides two basic functions, copy and move, which are useful for getting the contents of a file from one place to another. o The copy function takes two parameters: a file to copy from and a file to copy to. Either argument may be a string, a FileHandle reference or a FileHandle glob. Obviously, if the first argument is a filehandle of some sort, it will be read from, and if it is a file name it will be opened for reading. Likewise, the second argument will be written to (...
 perl5/File::DosGlob(3) -- a more capable perlglob.exe replacement
    A module that implements DOS-like globbing with a few enhancements. This file is also a portable replacement for perlglob.exe. It is largely compatible with perlglob.exe (the M$ setargv.obj version) in all but one respect--it understands wildcards in directory components. For example, C<<..\\l*b\\file/*glob.p?>> will work as expected (in that it will find something like '..\lib\File/DosGlob.pm' alright). Note that all path components are case-insensitive, and that backslashes and forward...
 perl5/File::Find(3) -- traverse a directory structure depth-first
    The wanted() function does whatever verifications you want. $File::Find::dir contains the current directory name, and $_ the current filename within that directory. $File::Find::name contains "$File::Find::dir/$_". You are chdir()'d to $File::Find::dir when the function is called. The function may set $File::Find::prune to prune the tree. File::Find assumes that you don't alter the $_ variable. If you do then make sure you return it to its original value before exiting your function. This li...
 perl5/File::Path(3) -- create or remove a series of directories
    The mkpath function provides a convenient way to create directories, even if your mkdir kernel call won't create more than one level of directory at a time. mkpath takes three arguments: o the name of the path to create, or a reference to a list of paths to create, o a boolean value, which if TRUE will cause mkpath to print the name of each directory as it is created (defaults to FALSE), and o the numeric mode to use when creating the directories (defaults to 0777) It returns a list of all dire...
 perl5/File::stat(3) -- by-name interface to Perl's built-in stat() functions
    This module's default exports override the core stat() and lstat() functions, replacing them with versions that return "File::stat" objects. This object has methods that return the similarly named structure field name from the stat(2) function; namely, dev, ino, mode, nlink, uid, gid, rdev, size, atime, mtime, ctime, blksize, and blocks. You may also import all the structure fields directly into your namespace as regular variables using the :FIELDS import tag. (Note that this still overrides ...
 c++/filebuf(3) -- buffer for file I/O.
    filebufs specialize streambufs to use a file as a source or sink of characters. Characters are consumed by doing writes to the file, and are produced by doing reads. When the file is seekable, a filebuf allows seeks. At least 4 characters of putback are guaranteed. When the file permits reading and writing, the filebuf permits both storing and fetching. No special action is required between gets and puts (u...
 perl5/FileCache(3) -- keep more files open than the system permits
    The cacheout function will make sure that there's a filehandle open for writing available as the pathname you give it. It automatically closes and re-opens files if you exceed your system file descriptor maximum.
 Tk/fileevent(3) -- Execute a script when a file becomes readable or writable
    This command is used to create file event handlers. A file event handler is a binding between a file and a script, such that the script is evaluated whenever the file becomes readable or writable. File event handlers are most commonly used to allow data to be received from a child process on an event-driven basis, so that the receiver can continue to interact with the user while waiting for the data to arrive. If an application invokes gets or read when there is no input data available, the proc...
 perl5/FileHandle(3) -- supply object methods for filehandles
    NOTE: This class is now a front-end to the IO::* classes. FileHandle::new creates a FileHandle, which is a reference to a newly created symbol (see the Symbol package). If it receives any parameters, they are passed to FileHandle::open; if the open fails, the FileHandle object is destroyed. Otherwise, it is returned to the caller. FileHandle::new_from_fd creates a FileHandle like new does. It requires two parameters, which are passed to FileHandle::fdopen; if the fdopen fails, the FileHandle obj...
 Tk/filehndlr(3) -- associate procedure callbacks with files or devices
    int id (in) Integer identifier for an open file or device (such as returned by open system call). int mask (in) Conditions under which proc should be called: OR-ed combination of TK_READABLE, TK_WRITABLE, and TK_EXCEPTION. Tk_FileProc *proc (in) Procedure to invoke whenever the file or device indicated by id meets the conditions specified by mask. Tk_FileProc2 *proc2 (in) Procedure to invoke from event loop to check whether fd is ready and, if so, handle it. ClientData clientData (in) Arbitrary ...
 perl5/FindBin(3) -- Locate directory of original perl script
    Locates the full path to the script bin directory to allow the use of paths relative to the bin directory. This allows a user to setup a directory tree for some software with directories /bin and /lib and then the above example will allow the use of modules in the lib directory without knowing where the software tree is installed. If perl is invoked using the -e option or the perl script is read from STDIN then FindBin sets both $Bin and $RealBin to the current directory....
 Tk/findphoto(3) -- manipulate the image data stored in a photo image.
    char *imageName (in) Name of the photo image. Tk_PhotoHandle handle (in) Opaque handle identifying the photo image to be affected. Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr (in) Specifies the address and storage layout of image data. int x (in) Specifies the X coordinate where the top-left corner of the block is to be placed within the image. int y (in) Specifies the Y coordinate where the top-left corner of the block is to be placed Page 1 Tk_FindPhoto(3Tk) Tk_FindPhoto(3Tk) within the image. int width (in)...
 standard/finish(3) -- blocks until the Geometry Pipeline is empty
    none
 complib/fir1d(3) -- 1D Convolution in the time domain. FORTRAN SPECIFICATION subroutine SFIR1D( in_put, incinp, i0_inp, n_inp, fir
    SFIR1D and DFIR1D compute a 1D convolution in the time domain : O(j) = Sum[ I(i) * F(j-i) ]
 complib/fir2d(3) -- 2D Convolution in the time domain. FORTRAN SPECIFICATION subroutine SFIR2D( f, incf, ldf, ifx0, n_fx, ify0, n_
    SFIR2D and DFIR2D compute a 2D convolution in the time domain : h(i,j) = beta * h(i,j) + alpha * Sum.Sum[ f(k,l) * g(i-k,j-l) ]
 complib/firm1d(3) -- N 1D convolutions in the time domain. FORTRAN SPECIFICATION subroutine SFIRM1D( f, incf, ldf, ifx0, n_fx, ny,
    SFIRM1D, DFIRM1D, CFIRM1D and DFIRM1D compute N 1D convolutions in the time domain : h(i,j) = beta * h(i,j) + alpha * Sum[ f(k,j) * g(i-k) ] with j=1,...,N USAGE: 1. Suppose you want to: filter a 2D "image" f(0:449,0:699) along the first dimension , by a 1D filter g(-15:15), put the result in h(0:449,0:699), you can use: call dfirm1d( 700,f(0,0),1,449-0+1,0,449,g(-15),1,-15,15,1.0, $ h(0,0),1,449-0+1,0,449,0.0) 2. Suppose you want to: filter a 2D "image" f(0:449,0:699) along the Second dimen...
 standard/fixade(3) -- misaligned data bus error handler and report generator
    Fixade is a bus error handler which fields, corrects, and reports bus errors arising due to misaligned data in Irix programs. The MIPS architecture, for performance reasons, is very restrictive on the alignment of data which can be used with its standard instruction set. Usually, the compilers can guarantee this alignment, however, some situations exist in which this guarantee cannot be made. These misalignments may be necessary to satisfy Fortran equivalence statements, due to mismatched formal...
 f90/floating(3) -- 0- return scalar values associated with the argument derived from the model of floating point data.
    These Fortran 90 inquiry functions return scalar values which describe the value of x as components of the model of floating point data. The model for real x is defined by section 13.71.1 of the Fortran standard. In each case the argument x is of type real and with the exception of exponent the type and kind type parameter of each result is the same as x. The exponent function returns an integer of default type equal to the base two exponent (e) of x if the argument is non-zero. If zero, the res...
 flock(3c) -- apply or remove an advisory lock on an open file
    Flock applies or removes an advisory lock on the file associated with the file descriptor fd. A lock is applied by specifying one of the following as an operation parameter: LOCK_SH, LOCK_EX, LOCK_SH|LOCK_NB or LOCK_EX|LOCK_NB. Note that LOCK_NB, if used, must appear in an inclusive OR expression with either LOCK_SH or LOCK_EX. To unlock an existing lock, operation should be LOCK_UN. Advisory locks allow cooperating processes to perform consistent operations on files, but do not guarantee consis...
 flockfile(3s) -- stdio synchronization functions
    flockfile, ftrylockfile, and funlockfile provide for explicit locking and unlocking of stdio streams. They may be used by a thread to delineate a sequence of I/O statements to be executed as a critical section. flockfile is used by a thread to acquire exclusive use of file. ftrylockfile is used by a thread to acquire exclusive use of file ...
 standard/floor(3) -- floor, ceiling, remainder, absolute value, nearest integer, and truncation functions
    The fmod, fabs, and trunc functions listed above, as well as the long double and single-precision versions of the remaining functions, are only available in the standard math library, -lm, and in -lmx. Page 1 FLOOR(3M) FLOOR(3M) The floor functions return the largest integer not greater than x. The argument x is double for floor, long double for floorl, and float for ffloor and its ANSI-named equivalent floorf. copysign(x,y) returns the number with the magnitude of x and the sign of y. copysignl...
 f90/floor(3) -- floor, ceiling, remainder, absolute value, nearest integer, and truncation functions
    The fmod, fabs, and trunc functions listed above, as well as the long double and single-precision versions of the remaining functions, are only available in the standard math library, -lm, and in -lmx. Page 1 FLOOR(3M) FLOOR(3M) The floor functions return the largest integer not greater than x. The argument x is double for floor, long double for floorl, and float for ffloor and its ANSI-named equivalent floorf. copysign(x,y) returns the number with the magnitude of x and the sign of y. copysignl...
 f90/flush(3) -- Flush buffered output for a file
    Flushes any output that has been buffered for fileId. FileId must have been the return value from a previous call to open, or it may be stdout or stderr to access one of the standard I/O streams; it must refer to a file that was opened for writing. The command returns an empty string.
 ftn/flush(3) -- Flush buffered output for a file
    Flushes any output that has been buffered for fileId. FileId must have been the return value from a previous call to open, or it may be stdout or stderr to access one of the standard I/O streams; it must refer to a file that was opened for writing. The command returns an empty string.
 Tcl/flush(3) -- Flush buffered output for a file
    Flushes any output that has been buffered for fileId. FileId must have been the return value from a previous call to open, or it may be stdout or stderr to access one of the standard I/O streams; it must refer to a file that was opened for writing. The command returns an empty string.
 fmcachedisable(3w) -- disable font cache flushing
    This function was made obsolete by changes to the IRIS Font Manager. The function was replaced by a stub that does not do anything. What follows is a description of what this function did under the NeWS windowing system. The Font Manager provides font cache flushing by default. To disable automatic flushing of the font cache, call fmcachedisable . The Font Manager continues to keep track of the space fonts occupy, but does nothing to flush the space when it exceeds the font cache limit. You can ...
 fmcacheenable(3w) -- enable font cache flushing
    This function was made obsolete by changes to the IRIS Font Manager. The function was replaced by a stub that does not do anything. What follows is a description of what this function did under the NeWS windowing system. The Font Manager provides font cache flushing by default. You can disable font cache flushing with a call to fmcachedisable. The Font Manager continues to keep track of the space fonts occupy, but does nothing to flush the space when it exceeds the font cache limit. To restart a...
 fmcachelimit(3w) -- return current font cache limit in quanta
    This function was made obsolete by changes to the IRIS Font Manager. The function was replaced by a stub that does not do anything. What follows is a description of what this function did under the NeWS windowing system. The font cache maintains the space reserved for font data. Use fmcachelimit to get the number of Font Manager cache quanta currently set as the upper size limit of the font cache. To calculate the number of bytes reserved for the font cache, multiply the returned value of fmcach...
 fmchrwid(3w) -- return the width of a character
    fmgetchrwidth returns the number of pixels (in the x dimension) by which the current character position moves when you image the specified character. This value is rounded to an integer (for some fonts, characters can have subpixel dimensions). If the specified character glyph does not exist, the width of a space is returned. If a space does not exist, the width of the font is returned.
 fmcommen(3w) -- return a comment associated with a font
    This function was made obsolete by changes to the IRIS Font Manager. The function was replaced by a stub that does not do anything. What follows is a description of what this function did under the NeWS windowing system. fmgetcomment gets the comment associated with the font fh. This routine writes that comment to the location (array) pointed to by the str character pointer. You must use the slen parameter to tell fmgetcomment the longest string it can write to the str array. fmgetcomment does n...
 fmenumerate(3w) -- enumerate the font faces available through the font manager.
    fmenumerate accepts a callback routine as an argument. It calls the routine once for each font face file in the font directories in the font path, When fmenumerate calls the callback routine, it passes the callback routine a pointer to a character string that contains the name of a font file. For example, the following code prints the name of each "family" to the terminal: void printname(str) char *str; { printf("%s\n", str); } main() { fminit(); fmenumerate(printname); }...
 fmfindfont(3w) -- select a font face.
    Before you can call fmfindfont, you must startup the Font Manager. (Call fminit.) Once you have initialized the Font Manager, you can call fmfindfont to get a font handle for a type face. The face argument expects a pointer to a character string that specifies a font family. The returned value of the function is the requested font handle. This font handle gives you access to a one point version of the font. Use fmfonthandle much as you would use the findfont operator of PostScript. If fmfindfont...
 fmfontin(3w) -- return information about the overall font
    fmgetfontinfo writes information to the members of the fmfontinfo type structure pointed to by the info parameter. The information written pertains to the whole fh font. If fmgetfontinfo cannot find the fh font, its returned function value is -1. Otherwise the value of the function is 0. The members of fmfontinfo are declared to make it easy for FORTRAN programmers to access and interpret (hence the large number of long declarations). For a listing of the entire fmfontinfo type structure, see
 fmfontna(3w) -- return the name associated with a font
    fmgetfontname gets the name of the font associated with the fonthandle in fh. fmgetfontname writes this information to the location (array) pointed to by str. Use slen to tell fmgetfontname the size of the array pointed to by str. fmgetfontname does not write more characters to str than specified by slen. Normally, the returned value of the fmgetfontname function is the length of the string written to str. But if the font does not have a name, or if fmgetfontname cannot find the font, the return...
 fmfontpath(3w) -- get the current font path.
    fmfontpath returns a pointer to a string that describes the current search path for finding font files. The string contains a colonseparated list of directories. The default font path for bitmap fonts for the IRIS Font Manager is "/usr/lib/X11/fonts/100dpi:/usr/lib/X11/fonts/75dpi:/usr/lib/X11/fonts/misc". That font path can be changed by using the environment variable FONTPATH. The default font path for those outline fonts which are in the Type 1 format is "/usr/lib/DPS/outline/base". That ...
 fmfprstr(3w) -- render a character string in a specified font
    fmfprstr sets the current font to a specified font, and then renders a specified character string by using that font. fmfprstr does not perform the subpixel positioning of characters. It returns the length of the rendered character string in pixels. This function can usually render a given character string faster than the function fmprstr. The return value of -1 indicates an error.
 fmfreefont(3w) -- free the storage for a font
    fmfreefont frees the storage associated with a font in a given rotation and size (as specified in the font handle fh). Deleting a font also deletes its font handle. To ensure that fmfreefont frees the correct font/rotation/size instance, be sure that the same page matrix is in force as when you first queried or imaged from that font. Because normal usage of the font manager does not involve changing the page matrix, you seldom need to worry about it. But if you find that you cannot delete a font...
 fmgetcacheused(3w) -- return the number of bytes used by the font cache
    This function was made obsolete by changes to the IRIS Font Manager. The function was replaced by a stub that does not do anything. What follows is a description of what this function did under the NeWS windowing system. This routine returns the exact number of bytes used by the font cache. There are no implied multipliers.
 fminit(3w) -- initialize the Font Manager
    Call fminit to initialize the Font Manager. You must call fminit before you can call any other routine in the Font Manager library. It sets the default page matrix that the font scaling and transformation routines use.
 fmmakefont(3w) -- associate a transformation matrix with a font
    fmmakefont concatenates the provided matrix to the matrix associated with this instance of the font, returning a new handle. When the font is imaged, this matrix is inspected to determine the proper scaling, shearing, rotation, or combination of these, for the imaging. This operator is more general than fmscalefont, which applies uniform scaling only.
 fmmatrix(3w) -- font manager page matrix operations
    The argument m points to a 3x2 matrix of doubles, of which you need fill in only the first two rows when loading values. (The third row is reserved for future development and is currently ignored.) This matrix is a two dimensional transformation matrix that you can multiply against the page matrix. (The page matrix is independent of the hardware matrix stack.) You can use this multiplication of the page matrix to scale and rotate text. For more information on two-dimensional transformation matri...
 fmoutchar(3w) -- render a single glyph.
    fmoutchar renders a single glyph from the given font. It does not change the current font. If the glyph doesn't exist, it spaces forward the width of a space; if a space doesn't exist, it spaces forward the width of the font. The width used is returned. Note that 'ch' is declared as 'unsigned int' so that characters with code > 256 can be displayed.
 fmprintermatch(3w) -- toggle printer matching
    fmprintermatch sets a state variable that controls printer font matching. fmprintermatch(0) disables printer font matching, fmprintermatch(1) enables printer font matching. When a font is rendered (imaged), the Font Manager check the state of this variable. If enabled, the Font Manager looks for a printer widths file that corresponds to the font. If the file exists, and the font has not yet been sized, the Font Manager creates a new font and inserts it into the font handle that has widths that c...
 fmprstr(3w) -- render a string in the current font
    fmprstr renders a string using the current font, as set by fmsetfont. It uses subpixel-positioning to assure that rounding errors do not cause aberrant spacing. It also renders rotated characters by inspecting and concatenating the page matrix with the font matrix, then rendering in the resulting coordinate system. If the string is null, or the font does not exist, fmprstr returns -1. Otherwise, it returns 0....
 fmscalefont(3w) -- scale a font face.
    fmfindfont returns a handle to a 1-point-high font in the face specified. fmscalefont applies the provided scale factor to the matrix associated with this instance of the font, returning a new handle. Later, when the font is imaged, this value is used to determine the size of characters to use. Its default coordinate system is in points, so passing a scale of "12" creates a specification of a 12-point font. This is displayresolution independent. Its functionality parallels the scalefont operat...
 fmsetcachelimit(3w) -- set maximum cache size in quanta
    This function was made obsolete by changes to the IRIS Font Manager. The function was replaced by a stub that does not do anything. What follows is a description of what this function did under the NeWS windowing system. fmsetcachelimit accepts a small integer as an argument, multiplies it by FMCACHE_QUANTUM, and uses the result to reset the upper limit of the font cache data space. If new_limit is less than one, fmsetcachelimit resets it to one before multiplying by FMCACHE_QUANTUM. If new_limi...
 fmsetfont(3w) -- set the current font.
    fmfindfont returns a handle to a 1-point-high font in the face specified. fmscalefont applies a specified scale factor to that font. fmsetfont makes the scaled font the current font. Its functionality parallels the setfont operator of PostScript.
 fmsetpath(3w) -- set the current font path.
    fmsetpath accepts a pointer to a string that describes the current search path for finding font files. The string should be a colon-separated list of directories. The default font path for bitmap fonts for the IRIS Font Manager is "/usr/lib/X11/fonts/100dpi:/usr/lib/X11/fonts/75dpi:/usr/lib/X11/fonts/misc". That font path can be changed by using the environment variable FONTPATH. The default font path for outline fonts for the IRIS Font Manager is "/usr/lib/DPS/outline/base". That font path ...
 fmstrwid(3w) -- return the width of a string in pixels
    fmgetstrwidth returns the number of pixels the string occupies in the x dimension. It uses the subpixel resolution provided in the glyph widths as it accumulates the width. If fmgetstrwidth fails, the return value is set to -1.
 fmtmsg(3c) -- display a message on stderr or system console
    Based on a message's classification component, fmtmsg writes a formatted message to stderr, to the console, or to both. fmtmsg can be used instead of the traditional printf interface to display messages to stderr. fmtmsg, in conjunction with gettxt, provides a simple interface for producing language-independent applications. A formatted message consists of up to five sta...
 fmwhole(3w) -- return information about each of the characters in a font
    fmgetwholemetrics gets the glyph (character) information associated the font handle fh and writes it to the fmglyphinfo structures pointed to by the elements of the fi array. You should allocate enough space to contain nglyphs*sizeof(fmglyphinfo). fmgetwholemetrics fills only those structures of the fi array that have corresponding glyphs in the font file. Therefore, you should initialize all the fmglyphinfo structures before calling fmgetwhometrics. (For example, you could use calloc to allocat...
 fnmatch(3g) -- match filename or pathname
    fnmatch compares the string specified by the string argument against the pattern specified by the pattern argument. The flags argument modifies the interpretation of pattern and string. It is the bitwise inclusive OR of zero or more of the flags defined in the header <fnmatch.h>. If the FNM_PATHNAME flag is set in flags, then a slash character in string will be explicitly matched by a slash in pattern; it will not be matched by either the ast...
 Tk/focus(3) -- Manage the input focus
    The focus command is used to manage the Tk input focus. At any given | time, one window on each display is designated as the focus window; any | key press or key release events for the display are sent to that window. | It is normally up to the window manager to redirect the focus among the | top-level windows of a display. For example, some window managers | automatically set the input focus to a top-level window whenever the | mouse enters it; others redirect the input focus only when the user...
 Tk/focusnext(3) -- Utility procedures for managing the input focus.
    tk_focusNext is a utility procedure used for keyboard traversal. It returns the ``next'' window after window in focus order. The focus order is determined by the stacking order of windows and the structure of the window hierarchy. Among siblings, the focus order is the same as the stacking order, with the lowest window being first. If a window has children, the window is visited first, followed by its children (recursively), followed by its next sibling. Top-level windows other than window are...
 standard/fogvertex(3) -- specify atmospheric fogging effects
    mode expects one of eight valid symbolic constants: FG_VTX_EXP: FG_PIX_EXP: interpret params as a specification for fog density and color. These modes are suited to simulate heavy fog. FG_VTX_EXP2: FG_PIX_EXP2: interpret params as a specification for fog density and color. These modes are suited to simulate distant haze. FG_VTX_LIN: FG_PIX_LIN: interpret params as a specification for eye space distance to start of fog, eye space distance at which fully fogged, and fog color. These modes can be u...
 standard/font(3) -- selects a raster font for drawing text strings
    fntnum expects the font identifier, an index into the font table built by defrasterfont. If you specify a font number that is not defined, the system selects font 0.
 fopen(3s) -- open a stream
    fopen opens the file named by filename and associates a stream with it. fopen returns a pointer to the FILE structure associated with the stream. filename points to a character string that contains the name of the file to be opened. type is a character string. The initial portion of type must consist of one of the following character sequences: r or rb open for reading w or wb truncate or create for writing a or ab append: open for writing at end of file or create for writing r+,r+b or rb+ open ...
 Tcl/for(3) -- ``For'' loop
    For is a looping command, similar in structure to the C for statement. The start, next, and body arguments must be Tcl command strings, and test is an expression string. The for command first invokes the Tcl interpreter to execute start. Then it repeatedly evaluates test as an expression; if the result is non-zero it invokes the Tcl interpreter on body, then invokes the Tcl interpreter on next, then repeats the loop. The command terminates when test evaluates to 0. If a continue command is invok...
 Tcl/foreach(3) -- Iterate over all elements in a list
    In this command varname is the name of a variable, list is a list of values to assign to varname, and body is a Tcl script. For each element of list (in order from left to right), foreach assigns the contents of the field to varname as if the lindex command had been used to extract the field, then calls the Tcl interpreter to execute body. The break and continue statements may be invoked inside body, with the same effect as in the for command. Foreach returns an empty string....
 standard/foreground(3) -- prevents a graphical process from being put into the background
    none
 Tcl/format(3) -- Format a string in the style of sprintf
    This command generates a formatted string in the same way as the ANSI C sprintf procedure (it uses sprintf in its implementation). FormatString indicates how to format the result, using % conversion specifiers as in sprintf, and the additional arguments, if any, provide values to be substituted into the result. The return value from format is the formatted string. DETAILS ON FORMATTING The command operates by scanning formatString from left to right. Each character from the format string is appe...
 standard/fpc(3) -- floatingpoint control registers
    These routines are to get and set the floating-point control registers of MIPS floating-point units. All of these routines take and or return their values as 32 bit integers. The file contains unions for each of the control registers. Each union contains a structure that breaks out the bit fields into the logical parts for each control register. This file also contains constants for fields of the control registers. All implementations of MIPS floating-point have a control and status ...
 fpe_ss(3) -- SpeedShop floating-point exception tracing library
    The SpeedShop Performance Tools contain a floating-point exception tracing library, -lfpe_ss, which provides tracing for floating-point exceptions. The library provides an intercept layer for the call to fpe_trace_option, generated by the standard fpe library. Note that users do not call this routine, rather it is invoked from the standard FPE library. It allows tracing of all FPE's with the SpeedShop performance tools. It is normally not linked or invoked directly; the ssrun(1) command will us...
 fpgetmask(3c) -- floating-point units
    These routines fetch/set various subfields of the floatingpoint control status register of the floating-point unit. fpgetmask returns the current exception mask. fpgetround returns the current rounding mode. fpgetsticky returns the logged exceptions. fpsetmask sets the exception mask, returning the previous exception mask. Any sticky bit whose corresponding mask bit is being enabl...
 fp_class(3c) -- classes of long double floating-point values
    (Note that the long double routines are only valid for the MIPSpro compilers.) Long double function fp_class_l has been renamed to be compliant with the ANSI-C standard, however to be backward compatible, it may still be called with the name fp_class_q. These routines are used to determine the class of IEEE or long double floating-point values. They return one of the constants in the file <fp_class.h> and never cause an exception even for signaling NaN's. These ...
 f90/fraction(3) -- Returns the fractional part of the numeric model representation of the argument value
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 Tk/frame(3) -- Create and manipulate frame widgets
    borderWidth highlightBackground highlightThickness takeFocus | cursor highlightColor relief See the ``options'' manual entry for details on the standard options. WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS Name: background | Class: Background | Command-Line Switch:-background | This option is the same as the standard background option except | that its value may also be specified as an empty string. In this | case, the widget will display no background or border, and no colors| will be consumed from its colormap ...
 fread(3s) -- binary input/output
    fread copies, into an array pointed to by ptr, up to nitems items of data from the named input stream, where an item of data is a sequence of bytes (not necessarily terminated by a null byte) of length size. fread stops reading bytes if an end-of-file or error condition is encountered while reading stream, or if nitems items have been read. The file pointer associated with stream is positioned following the last byte read, which may be at end-of-file. fread does not change the contents of stream...
 standard/freepup(3) -- deallocates a menu
    pup expects the menu identifier of the pop-up menu that you want to deallocate.
 Tk/freexid(3) -- make X resource identifier available for reuse
    Display *display (in) Display for which id was allocated. XID id (in) Identifier of X resource (window, font, pixmap, cursor, graphics context, or colormap) that is no longer in use.
 frexp(3c) -- manipulate parts of floating-point numbers (libc routines)
    (Note that the long double routines are only valid for the MIPSpro compilers.) Long double functions have been renamed to be compliant with the ANSI-C standard, however to be backward compatible, they may still be called with the double precision function name prefixed with a q. Every non-zero number can be written uniquely as x*2**n, where the ``mantissa'' (fraction) x is in the range 0.5 < |x| < 1.0, and the ``exponent'' n is an integer. frexp returns the mantissa of a doubl...
 standard/frontbuffer(3) -- enable and disable drawing to the back or front buffer
    b is either TRUE or FALSE. TRUE enables updating in the back/front bitplane buffer. FALSE disables updating in the back/front bitplane buffer.
 standard/frontface(3) -- turns frontfacing polygon removal on and off
    b expects either TRUE or FALSE. TRUE suppresses the display of frontfacing filled polygons. FALSE allows the display of frontfacing filled polygons.
 ftn/fseek(3) -- reposition a file on a logical unit
    lunit must refer to an open logical unit. offset is an offset in bytes relative to the position specified by from. Valid values for from are: 0 meaning `beginning of the file' 1 meaning `the current position' 2 meaning `the end of the file' The value returned by fseek will be 0 if successful, a system error code otherwise. (See perror(3F)) Ftell returns the current position of the file associated with the specified logical unit. The value is an offset, in bytes, from the beginning of the file...
 fseek(3s) -- reposition a file pointer in a stream
    fseek sets the file position indicator for the stream pointed to by stream. The new position, measured in bytes from the beginning of the file, is obtained by adding offset to the position specified by whence. SEEK_SET specified starting point is the beginning of the file plus offset. SEEK_CUR starting point is the current value of the file position indicator plus offset. SEEK_END specified starting point is the EOF of the file plus offset. A successful call to fseek clears the end-of-file indic...
 fsetpos(3s) -- reposition a file pointer in a stream
    Fsetpos and fgetpos save and restore the file position indicated by the value of the object pointed at by pos. The functions fsetpos64 and fgetpos64 are identical to fsetpos and fgetpos respectively, except that they take an fpos64_t * as an argument. This allows for the specification of a file position that is greater that 2 Gigabytes. A call to fgetpos stores the current value of the file position indicator for stream in the object pointed at by pos. The information is encoded in a format whic...
 ftn/fsigfpe(3) -- floating-point exception handler package
    The MIPS floating-point accelerator may raise floating-point exceptions, signal SIGFPE, due to five conditions: FPE_OVERFL(overflow), FPE_UNDERFL(underflow), FPE_DIVZERO(divide-by-zero), FPE_INEXACT(inexact result), or FPE_INVALID(invalid operand, e.g., infinity). Usually these conditions are masked, and do not cause a floating-point exception. Instead, a default value is substituted for the result of the operation, and the program continues silently. This event may be intercepted by Page 1 FSIG...
 c++/fstream(3) -- iostream and streambuf specialized to files
    ifstream, ofstream, and fstream specialize istream, ostream, and iostream, respectively, to files. That is, the associated streambuf will be a filebuf. In the following descriptions, assume - f is any of ifstream, ofstream, or fstream. - pfb is a <...
 ftime(3c) -- get date and time
    ftime sets the time and millitm members of the timeb structure pointed to by tp to contain the seconds and milliseconds, respectively, of the current time in seconds since 00:00:00 UTC, January 1, 1970. The contents of the timezone and dstflag members of tp after a call to ftime() are unspecified....
 ftw(3c) -- walk a file tree
    ftw recursively descends the directory hierarchy rooted in path. For each object in the hierarchy, ftw calls the user-defined function fn, passing it a pointer to a null-terminated character string containing the name of the object, a pointer to a stat structure (see stat(2)) containing information about the object, and an integer. Possible values of the integer, defined in the ftw.h header file, are: FTW_F The object is a file...
 ftn/ftype(3) -- explicit FORTRAN type conversion
    These functions perform conversion from one data type to another. The function int converts to integer from its integer, real*4, double precision, real*16, complex, double complex, or complex*32 argument. If the argument is real, integer, real*4, double precision, or real*16 int returns the integer whose magnitude is the largest integer that does not exceed the magnitude of the argument and whose sign is the same as the sign of the argument (i.e. truncation). For complex the above rule is applie...
 standard/fudge(3) -- specifies fudge values that are added to a graphics window
    xfudge expects the number of pixels added in the x direction. yfudge expects the number of pixels added in the y direction.
 standard/fullscrn(3) -- allows a program write to the entire screen
    none
 fx/fxAllocateImageBuffers(3d) -- create and destroy image buffers for special effects
    dpy An open connection to an X server. Used to create off-screen render areas for OpenGL. The caller must not close the display connection until all of the DMfxbuffers have been freed. imageFormat A complete image format parameter list (see dmSetImageDefaults(3dm)). This format is used to determine how large the buffers need to be. inputUsage Specifies the modes in which the buffer will be used as input; says how the image will be read from the buffer and used as input to a plug-in or applicatio...
 fx/fxMovieRenderImage(3d) -- transfer images between movies and special effects
    movie The movie that contains the image to be rendered. track The track into which a new image is inserted. time A time within the movie. duration Specifies how long an inserted image will be displayed when the movie is played. Page 1 dmFXMovieRenderImage(3dm) dmFXMovieRenderImage(3dm) timeScale Specifies the units for time and duration. inputUsage Specifies how the image buffer will be used, a combination of bufInputDirect, bufInputTexture, bufInputDrawPixels, and bufInputMovie. destinationBuff...
 fx/fxSetupInputImageBuffer(3d) -- manage special-effects image buffers
    buffer a special-effects image buffer, allocated with dmFXAllocateImageBuffers. outputUsage Specifies the mode in which the buffer will be used as output; says how the image will be placed into the buffer by a plug-in or application. The value is one of bufOutputDirect, bufOutputOpenGL, bufOutputmovie. No more that one can be set. inputUsage Specifies the modes in which the buffer will be used as input; says how the image will be read from the buffer and used as input to a plug-in or application...
 fx/fxSetupScanlineBuffer(3d) -- get information about a special-effects image buffer
    buffer A special-effects image buffer that has been set up for access with dmFXSetupInputImageBuffer or dmFXSetupOutputImageBuffer. returnInfo A PRX_ScanlineBufferRec structure, which will be filled in.
 standard/gamma(3) -- log gamma function
    lgamma and gamma return ln|(GAMMA(x))|, where GAMMA is the mathematical gamma function. gammal and lgammal are the long double versions of the log gamma function. gamma and lgamma are identical, as are gammal and lgammal. The external integer signgam returns the sign of GAMMA(x), and the external integer signgaml returns the sign of GAMMAL(x).
 standard/gammaramp(3) -- defines a color map ramp for gamma correction
    r expects an array of 256 elements. Each element contains a setting for the red electron gun. g expects an array of 256 elements. Each element contains a setting for the green electron gun. b expects an array of 256 elements. Each element contains a setting for the blue electron gun.
 standard/gbegin(3) -- create a window that occupies the entire screen
    none
 libblas/gbmv(3) -- BLAS Level Two Matrix-Vector Product FORTRAN 77 SYNOPSIS subroutine dgbmv( trans,m,n,kl,ku,alpha,a,lda,x,incx,
    dgbmv, sgbmv, zgbmv and cgbmv perform one of the matrix-vector operations: y := alpha*A*x + beta*y, or y := alpha*A'*x + beta*y, or y := alpha*conjg( A' )*x + beta*y, where alpha and beta are scalars, x and y are vectors and A is an m by n band matrix, with kl sub-diagonals and ku super-diagonals.
 standard/gconfig(3) -- reconfigures the GL modes of the current window
    none
 libblas/gemm(3) -- BLAS level three Matrix Product FORTRAN 77 SYNOPSIS subroutine dgemm( transa,transb,m,n,k,alpha,a,lda,b,ldb,be
    dgemm, sgemm, zgemm and cgemm perform one of the matrix-matrix operations C := alpha*op( A )*op( B ) + beta*C, where op( X ) is one of op( X ) = X or op( X ) = X', alpha and beta are scalars, and A, B and C are matrices, with op( A ) an m by k matrix, op( B ) a k by n matrix and C an m by n matrix.
 libblas/gemv(3) -- BLAS Level Two Matrix-Vector Product FORTRAN 77 SYNOPSIS subroutine dgemv( trans,m,n,alpha,a,lda,x,incx,beta,y
    dgemv , sgemv , dgemv and cgemv perform one of the matrix-vector operations: y := alpha*A*x + beta*y, or y := alpha*A'*x + beta*y, or y := alpha*conjg( A' )*x + beta*y, where alpha and beta are scalars, x and y are vectors and A is an m by n matrix.
 standard/genobj(3) -- returns a unique integer for use as an object identifier
    none FUNCTION RETURN VALUE The returned value for this function is an object identifier.
 standard/gentag(3) -- returns a unique integer for use as a tag
    none FUNCTION RETURN VALUE The returned value for this function is a tag number.
 Tk/geomreq(3) -- specify desired geometry or internal border for a window
    Tk_Window tkwin (in) Window for which geometry is being requested. int reqWidth (in) Desired width for tkwin, in pixel units. int reqHeight (in) Desired height for tkwin, in pixel units. int width (in) Space to leave for internal border for tkwin, in pixel units.
 libblas/ger(3) -- BLAS Level Two Rank 1 Operation FORTRAN 77 SYNOPSIS subroutine dger( m, n, alpha, x, incx, y, incy, a, lda ) i
    dger , sger , zheru and cgeru perform the rank 1 operation A := alpha*x*y' + A, zgerc and cgerc perform the rank 1 operation A := alpha*x*conjg( y' ) + A, where alpha is a scalar, x is an m element vector, y is an n element vector and A is an m by n matrix.
 getabi(3c) -- get ABI from argument vector
    getabi is used to determine whether to use the 32-bit ABI (abi32) or the 64-bit ABI (abi64). First it checks the argv list for "-32" or "-64". If neither of these is given, then it checks the argv list for a "-mips[1- 4]" option. Mips 1 and 2 imply abi32 while mips 3 and 4 imply abi64. If none of the argv options specify the abi, then we check the SGI_ABI environment variable, which can be set to either "-32" or "-64". If SGI_ABI is not in the environment, then we che...
 Tk/getanchor(3) -- translate between strings and anchor positions
    Tcl_Interp *interp (in) Interpreter to use for error reporting. char *string (in) String containing name of anchor point: one of ``n'', ``ne'', ``e'', ``se'', ``s'', ``sw'', ``w'', ``nw'', or ``center''. int *anchorPtr (out) Pointer to location in which to store anchor position corresponding to string. Tk_Anchor anchor (in) Anchor position, e.g. TCL_ANCHOR_CENTER.
 ftn/getarg(3) -- return Fortran command-line argument
    getarg returns the i-th command-line argument of the current process. iargc returns the index of the last argument. foo arg1 arg2 arg3 getarg(2, c) would return the string ``arg2'' in the character variable c. iargc would return 3 as the value of the function call.
 standard/getbackface(3) -- returns whether backfacing polygons will appear
    none FUNCTION RETURN VALUE The returned value for this function is either 0 or 1. 0 indicates that backfacing polygon removal is turned off. 1 indicates that backfacing polygon removal is enabled.
 Tk/getbitmap(3) -- maintain database of single-plane pixmaps
    Tcl_Interp *interp (in) Interpreter to use for error reporting. Tk_Window tkwin (in) Token for window in which the bitmap will be used. Tk_Uid id (in) Description of bitmap; see below for possible values. Tk_Uid *nameId (in) Name for new bitmap to be defined. char *source (in) Data for bitmap, in standard bitmap format. Must be stored in static memory whose value will never change. int width (in) Width of bitmap. | int height (in) Height of bitmap. | int *widthPtr (out) Pointer to word to fill i...
 standard/getbuffer(3) -- indicates which buffers are enabled for writing
    none FUNCTION RETURN VALUE Individual bits in the returned value indicate which buffers are enabled. The bits are named: _________________________________ |Symbolic Name | Buffer Enabled | |________________________________| |BCKBUFFER back buffer | |FRNTBUFFER front buffer | |DRAWZBUFFER zbuffer drawing | |________________________________|
 standard/getbutton(3) -- returns the state of a button
    num is the device number of the button you want to test. FUNCTION RETURN VALUE There are two possible return values for this function: FALSE indicates that button num is up. TRUE indicates that button num is down. The return value is undefined if there was an error, e.g. num is not a button device.
 ftn/getc(3) -- get a character from a logical unit
    These routines return the next character from a file associated with a fortran logical unit, bypassing normal fortran I/O. Getc reads from logical unit 5, normally connected to the control terminal input. The value of each function is a system status code. Zero indicates no error occurred on the read; -1 indicates end of file was detected. A positive value will be either a UNIX system error code or an f77 I/O error code. See perror(3F)....
 getc(3s) -- get character or word from a stream
    Fgetc and getc return the next character (if it exists) from the named input stream, as an unsigned character converted to an integer. It also moves the file pointer, if defined, ahead one character in stream. getchar is defined as getc(stdin). Each of getc,getchar and fgetc exist as functions in the C library. Getc and getchar are also available as macros in (see below under CAVEATS for important details on the implementation of these macros.) Getw returns the next word (i.e., integer...
 Tk/getcapstyl(3) -- translate between strings and cap styles
    Tcl_Interp *interp (in) Interpreter to use for error reporting. char *string (in) String containing name of cap style: one of ```butt'', ``projecting'', or ``round''. int *capPtr (out) Pointer to location in which to store X cap style corresponding to string. int cap (in) Cap style: one of CapButt, CapProjecting, or CapRound.
 Tk/getclrmap(3) -- allocate and free colormaps
    Tcl_Interp *interp (in) Interpreter to use for error reporting. Tk_Window tkwin (in) Token for window in which colormap will be used. char *string (in) Selects a colormap: either new or the name of a window with the same screen and visual as tkwin. Display *display (in) Display for which colormap was allocated. Colormap colormap (in) Colormap to free; must have been returned by a previous call to Tk_GetColormap or Tk_GetVisual....
 standard/getcmmode(3) -- returns the current color map mode
    none FUNCTION RETURN VALUE There are two possible returned values for this function: TRUE indicates that onemap mode is active. FALSE indicates that multimap mode is active.
 standard/getcolor(3) -- maintain database of colors
    Tcl_Interp *interp (in) Interpreter to use for error reporting. Tk_Window tkwin (in) Token for window in which color will be used. Tk_Uid nameId (in) Textual description of desired color. XColor *prefPtr (in) Indicates red, green, and blue intensities of desired color. XColor *colorPtr (in) Pointer to X color information. Must have been allocated by previous call to Tk_GetColor or Tk_GetColorByValue, except when passed to Tk_NameOfColor. Drawable drawable (in) Drawable in which the result graphi...
 Tk/getcolor(3) -- maintain database of colors
    Tcl_Interp *interp (in) Interpreter to use for error reporting. Tk_Window tkwin (in) Token for window in which color will be used. Tk_Uid nameId (in) Textual description of desired color. XColor *prefPtr (in) Indicates red, green, and blue intensities of desired color. XColor *colorPtr (in) Pointer to X color information. Must have been allocated by previous call to Tk_GetColor or Tk_GetColorByValue, except when passed to Tk_NameOfColor. Drawable drawable (in) Drawable in which the result graphi...
 standard/getcpos(3) -- returns the current character position
    ix expects the pointer to the location at which to write the x coordinate of the current character position. iy expects the pointer to the location at which to write the y coordinate of the current character position.
 standard/getcursor(3) -- maintain database of cursors
    Tcl_Interp *interp (in) Interpreter to use for error reporting. Tk_Window tkwin (in) Token for window in which the cursor will be used. Tk_Uid nameId (in) Description of cursor; see below for possible values. char *source (in) Data for cursor bitmap, in standard bitmap format. char *mask (in) Data for mask bitmap, in standard bitmap format. int width (in) Width of source and mask. | int height (in) Height of source and mask. | int xHot (in) X-location of cursor hot-spot. | int yHot (in) Y-locati...
 Tk/getcursor(3) -- maintain database of cursors
    Tcl_Interp *interp (in) Interpreter to use for error reporting. Tk_Window tkwin (in) Token for window in which the cursor will be used. Tk_Uid nameId (in) Description of cursor; see below for possible values. char *source (in) Data for cursor bitmap, in standard bitmap format. char *mask (in) Data for mask bitmap, in standard bitmap format. int width (in) Width of source and mask. | int height (in) Height of source and mask. | int xHot (in) X-location of cursor hot-spot. | int yHot (in) Y-locati...
 getcwd(3c) -- get pathname of current working directory
    getcwd returns a pointer to the current directory pathname. The value of size must be at least one greater than the length of the pathname to be returned. If buf is not NULL, the pathname will be stored in the space pointed to by buf. If buf is a NULL pointer, getcwd will obtain size bytes of space using malloc(3C). In this case, a subsequent call to free should be made using the pointer returned by g...
 getdate(3c) -- convert user format date and time
    getdate The getdate function converts a string representation of a date or time into a broken-down time. The external variable or macro getdate_err is used by getdate() to return error values. Templates are used to parse and interpret the input string. The templates are contained in a text file identified by the environment variable DATEMSK. The DATEMSK variable should be se...
 standard/getdcm(3) -- indicates whether depth-cue mode is on or off
    none FUNCTION RETURN VALUE This function can return either of two possible values: FALSE, indicating that the system is not in depth-cue mode. TRUE, indicating that the system is in depth-cue mode.
 standard/getdepth(3) -- obsolete routine
    near expects a pointer to the location into which the system should write the distance of the near clipping plane. far expects a pointer to the location into which the system should write the distance of the far clipping plane.
 standard/getdescender(3) -- returns the character characteristics
    none FUNCTION RETURN VALUE The returned value of this function is the length (in pixels) of the longest descender in the current font.
 standard/getdev(3) -- reads a list of valuators at one time
    n expects the number of devices named in the devs array (no more than 128). devs expects an array containing the device identifiers (device number constants, such as MOUSEX, BPADX, LEFTMOUSE, etc.) of the devices you want to read. This array can contain up to 128 devices. vals expects the array into which you want the system to write the values read from the devices listed in the devs array. Each member in the vals array corresponds to a member of the devs array. Thus, the value at vals[3] was r...
 getdfltprojuser(3c) -- get user's default project ID
    The getdfltprojuser function searches the project file for the user name and returns the first project ID associated with that user. The first project in a user's project entry is considered to be their default project for the purposes of login and similar situations. The fgetdfltprojuser function is a variant of getdfltprojuser that uses a PROJ token to make it more efficient for repeated use. Otherwise its operation is identical. For more details on creating a PROJ token, see openproj(3C)....
 standard/getdisplaymode(3) -- returns the current display mode
    none FUNCTION RETURN VALUE The returned value for this function tells you which display mode is currently active. ______________________________________________ |Symbolic Name | Display Mode | |_____________________________________________| |DMSINGLE color map single buffer mode | |DMDOUBLE color map double buffer mode | |DMRGB RGB single buffer mode | |DMRGBDOUBLE RGB double buffer mode | |_____________________________________________|...
 standard/getdrawmode(3) -- returns the current drawing mode
    none FUNCTION RETURN VALUE __________________________________ |Symbolic Name | Drawing Mode | |_________________________________| |NORMALDRAW color planes | |OVERDRAW overlay planes | |UNDERDRAW underlay planes | |PUPDRAW pop-up planes | |CURSORDRAW cursor | |_________________________________|
 getdtablehi(3c) -- get largest open file descriptor index
    getdtablehi returns the index of the largest open descriptor for the calling process plus one. The 'plus one' makes getdtablehi an ideal replacement for getdtablesize(2) when the program wishes simply to loop through and act on all open file descriptors, rather than up to the system maximum.
 ftn/getenv(3) -- get value of environment variable
    getenv returns the character-string value of the environment variable represented by its first argument into the character variable of its second argument. If no such environment variable exists, all blanks will be returned.
 getenv(3c) -- return value for environment name
    getenv searches the environment list [see environ(5)] for a string of the form name=value and, if the string is present, returns a pointer to the value in the current environment. Otherwise, it returns a null pointer.
 standard/getfont(3) -- returns the current raster font number
    none FUNCTION RETURN VALUE The returned value for this function is the index into the font table for the current raster font.
 Tk/getfontstr(3) -- maintain database of fonts
    Tcl_Interp *interp (in) Interpreter to use for error reporting. Tk_Window tkwin (in) Token for window in which font will be used. Tk_Uid nameId (in) Name of desired font. XFontStruct *fontStructPtr (in) Font structure to return name for or delete.
 Tk/getgc(3) -- maintain database of read-only graphics contexts
    Tk_Window tkwin (in) Token for window in which the graphics context will be used. unsigned long valueMask (in) Mask of bits (such as GCForeground or GCStipple) indicating which fields of *valuePtr are valid. XGCValues *valuePtr (in) Pointer to structure describing the desired values for the graphics context. Display *display (in) Display for which gc was allocated. GC gc (in) X identifier for graphics context that is no longer needed. Must have been allocated by Tk_GetGC....
 standard/getgconfig(3) -- gets the size of a buffer or a state in the current buffer configuration
    buffer is a symbolic constant taken from the list below. It identifies the buffer or state being queried. GC_BITS_CMODE color index size. zero indicates RGB mode. GC_BITS_RED red component size. GC_BITS_GREEN green component size. GC_BITS_BLUE blue component size. GC_BITS_ALPHA alpha component size.
 standard/getgdesc(3) -- gets graphics system description
    inquiry is a symbolic constant taken from the list below. It identifies the characteristic about which you want to inquire. FUNCTION RETURN VALUE The function returns the value of the requested characteristic, or -1, if the request is invalid or its value cannot be determined.
 standard/getgpos(3) -- gets the current graphics position
    fx expects a pointer to the location into which you want the system to write the x coordinate of the current graphics position. fy expects a pointer to the location into which you want the system to write the y coordinate of the current graphics position. fz expects a pointer to the location into which you want the system to write the z coordinate of the current graphics position. fw expects a pointer to the location into which you want the system to write the w coordinate of the current graphic...
 getgrent(3c) -- get group file entry
    getgrent, getgrgid and getgrnam and their reentrant counterparts each return pointers to an object with the following structure containing the broken-out fields of a line in the /etc/group file or some other back-end group database. Each line contains a ``group'' structure, defined in the header file. struct group { char *gr_name; /* the name of the group */ char *gr_passwd; /* the encrypted group password */ gid_t gr_gid; /* the numerical group ID */ char **gr_mem; /* vector of pointe...
 standard/getheight(3) -- returns the maximum character height in the current raster font
    none FUNCTION RETURN VALUE The returned value of this function is the maximum height (in pixels) of a character in the current font.
 standard/gethistogram(3) -- gets histogram data computed by hgram
    hist is the destination for the histogram data specified with hgram. Hist must be at least (number of bins per component) x (number of components per pixel) long.
 standard/gethitcode(3) -- returns the current hitcode
    none
 gethostbyname(3c) -- get network host entry
    gethostbyname, gethostbyaddr and their reentrant counterpoints each return a pointer to a hostent data structure describing an Internet host referenced by name or by address, respectively. This structure contains either the information obtained from broken-out fields from a line in /etc/hosts. or some other back-end hosts database. struct hostent { char *h_name; /* official name of host */ char **h_aliases; /* alias list */ int h_addrtype; /* host address type */ int h_length; /* length of addre...
 Tk/getimage(3) -- use an image in a widget
    Tcl_Interp *interp (in) Place to leave error message. Tk_Window tkwin (in) Window in which image will be used. char *name (in) Name of image. Tk_ImageChangedProc *changeProc (in) Procedure for Tk to invoke whenever image content or size changes. ClientData clientData (in) One-word value for Tk to pass to changeProc. Tk_Image image Token for image instance; must have been returned by a previous call to Tk_GetImage. int imageX (in) X-coordinate of upper-left corner of region of image to redisplay ...
 Tcl/getint(3) -- convert from string to integer, double, or boolean
    Tcl_Interp *interp (in) Interpreter to use for error reporting. char *string (in) Textual value to be converted. int *intPtr (out) Points to place to store integer value converted from string. double *doublePtr (out) Points to place to store doubleprecision floating-point value converted from string. int *boolPtr (out) Points to place to store boolean value (0 or 1) converted from string.
 getinvent(3c) -- get hardware inventory entry
    getinvent returns a pointer to an object with the following structure containing an entry from the system hardware inventory table. Each entry in the table contains an ``inventory'' structure, declared in the header file: typedef struct inventory_s { struct inventory_s *inv_next; int inv_class; int inv_type; char inv_controller; char inv_unit; long inv_state; } inventory_t; Each inventory entry is described by a class and a class-specific type. The remaining fields provide furth...
 Tk/getjoinstl(3) -- translate between strings and join styles
    Tcl_Interp *interp (in) Interpreter to use for error reporting. char *string (in) String containing name of join style: one of ``bevel'', ``miter'', or ``round''. int *joinPtr (out) Pointer to location in which to store X join style corresponding to string. int join (in) Join style: one of JoinBevel, JoinMiter, JoinRound.
 Tk/getjustify(3) -- translate between strings and justification styles
    Tcl_Interp *interp (in) Interpreter to use for error reporting. char *string (in) String containing name of | justification style (``left'', | ``right'', or ``center''). int *justifyPtr (out) Pointer to location in which to store justify value corresponding to string. Tk_Justify justify (in) Justification style (one of the values listed below).
 ftn/getlog(3) -- get user's login name
    Getlog will return the user's login name or all blanks if the process is running detached from a terminal.
 getlogin(3c) -- get login name
    getlogin returns a pointer to the login name as found in /var/adm/utmp. It may be used in conjunction with getpwnam to locate the correct password file entry when the same user id is shared by several login names. If getlogin is called within a process that is not attached to a terminal, it returns a null pointer. The correct procedure for determining the login name is to call cu<...
 standard/getlsbackup(3) -- returns the state of linestyle backup mode
    none FUNCTION RETURN VALUE The returned value of this function is the current state of linestyle backup mode.
 standard/getlsrepeat(3) -- returns the linestyle repeat count
    none FUNCTION RETURN VALUE The returned value of this function is the repeat factor for the current linestyle.
 standard/getlstyle(3) -- returns the current linestyle
    none FUNCTION RETURN VALUE The returned value of this function is the index into the linestyle table for the current linestyle.
 standard/getlwidth(3) -- returns the current linewidth
    none FUNCTION RETURN VALUE The returned value of this function is the current linewidth in pixels.
 standard/getmap(3) -- returns the number of the current color map
    none FUNCTION RETURN VALUE The returned value of this function is the number of the current color map.
 standard/getmatrix(3) -- returns a copy of a transformation matrix
    m expects an array into which to copy a matrix.
 standard/getmcolor(3) -- gets a copy of the RGB values for a color map entry
    i expects an index into the color map r expects a pointer to the location into which you want to copy the red value of the color at the color map index specified by i. g expects a pointer to the location into which you want to copy the green value of the color at the color map index specified by i. b expects a pointer to the location into which you want to copy the blue value of the color at the color map index specified by i....
 standard/getminmax(3) -- gets data computed by minmax
    minmax is the destination for the minmax data specified with minmax. Minmax must have at least 2 x (number of components per pixel) elements.
 standard/getmmode(3) -- returns the current matrix mode
    none FUNCTION RETURN VALUE The returned value of this function is the current matrix mode. There are four possible values for this function. MSINGLE indicates single matrix mode. MPROJECTION indicates projection matrix mode. MVIEWING indicates viewing matrix mode. MTEXTURE indicates texture matrix mode.
 getmntent(3c) -- get file system descriptor file entry
    These routines replace the getfsent routines for accessing the file system description file /etc/fstab. They are also used to access the mounted file system description file /etc/mtab. Setmntent opens a file system description file and returns a file pointer which can then be used with getmntent, addmntent, getmntany, or endmntent. The type argument is the same as in fopen(3S). Getmntent reads the next line from filep and returns a pointer to an object with the following structure containing the...
 standard/getmonitor(3) -- returns the video output format currently being generated by the graphics system
    none FUNCTION RETURN VALUE The returned value of this function is the type of the current display monitor.
 standard/getmultisample(3) -- returns the current multisample mode
    none FUNCTION RETURN VALUE The returned value of this function is either TRUE or FALSE. TRUE indicates that multisample is on. FALSE indicates that multisample is off. For systems without the multisample option, this function always returns FALSE.
 getnetconfig(3n) -- get network configuration database entry
    The five library routines described on this page are part of the UNIX System V Network Selection component. They provide application access to the system network configuration database, /etc/netconfig. In addition to the netconfig database and the routines for accessing it, Network Selection includes the environment variable NETPATH [see environ(5)] and the NETPATH ...
 getnetent(3c) -- get network entry
    Getnetent, fgetnetent, getnetbyname, getnetbyaddr and each of their reentrant counterparts each return a pointer to an object with the following structure containing the broken-out fields of a line in the network data base file, /etc/networks, or some other back-end networks database. struct netent { char *n_name; /* official name of net */ char **n_aliases; /* alias list */ int n_addrtype; /* net number type */ unsigned long n_net; /* net number */ }; The members of this structure are: n_name T...
 getnetgrent(3c) -- get NIS network group entry
    Innetgr returns 1 or 0, depending on whether netgroup contains the machine, user, or domain triple as a member. Any of the three strings machine, user, or domain can be NULL, in which case it signifies a wild card. Getnetgrent returns the next member of a network group. After the call, machinep will contain a pointer to a string containing the name of the machine part of the network group member, and similarly for userp and domainp. If any of machinep, userp or domainp is returned as a NULL poin...
 getnetpath(3n) -- get netconfig entry corresponding to NETPATH component
    The three routines described on this page are part of the UNIX System V Network Selection component. They provide application access to the system network configuration database, /etc/netconfig, as it is ``filtered'' by the NETPATH environment variable [see environ(5)]. Network Selection also includes routines that access the network configuration database directly [see getnetconf<...
 standard/getnurbsproperty(3) -- returns the current value of a trimmed NURBS surfaces display property
    property expects the name of the property to be queried. value expects pointer to the location into which the system should write the value of the named property.
 standard/getopenobj(3) -- returns the identifier of the currently open object
    none FUNCTION RETURN VALUE The returned value of this function is the object identifier of the currently open object. If no object is now open, the returned value is -1.
 getopt(3c) -- get option letter from argument vector
    getopt returns the next option letter in argv that matches a letter in optstring. It supports all the rules of the command syntax standard [see intro(1)]. Since all new commands are intended to adhere to the command syntax standard, they should use getopts(1), getopt(3C), or getsubopt(3C) to parse positional parameters and check for options that are legal for that command. optstring must contain th...
 perl5/Getopt::Long(3) -- extended processing of command line options
    The Getopt::Long module implements an extended getopt function called GetOptions(). This function adheres to the POSIX syntax for command line options, with GNU extensions. In general, this means that options have long names instead of single letters, and are introduced with a double dash "--". Support for bundling of command line options, as was the case with the more traditional single-letter approach, is provided but not enabled by default. For example, the UNIX "ps" command can be given ...
 perl5/Getopt::Std(3) -- Process single-character switches with switch clustering
    The getopt() functions processes single-character switches with switch clustering. Pass one argument which is a string containing all switches that take an argument. For each switch found, sets $opt_x (where x is the switch name) to the value of the argument, or 1 if no argument. Switches which take an argument don't care whether there is a space between the switch and the argument. For those of you who don't like additional variables being created, getopt() and getopts() will also accept a ha...
 Tk/getoption(3) -- retrieve an option from the option database
    Tk_Window tkwin (in) Token for window. char *name (in) Name of desired option. char *class (in) Class of desired option. Null means there is no class for this option; do lookup based on name only.
 standard/getorigin(3) -- returns the position of a graphics window
    x expects a pointer to the location into which the system should copy the x position (in pixels) of the lower left corner of the graphics window. y expects a pointer to the location into which the system should copy the y position (in pixels) of the lower left corner of the graphics window.
 standard/getothermonitor(3) -- obsolete routine
    none FUNCTION RETURN VALUE The return value of this function indicates if the optional Composite Video and Genlock Board is installed in the system.
 getpass(3c) -- read a password
    getpass reads up to a newline or EOF from the file /dev/tty, after prompting on the standard error output with the null-terminated string prompt and disabling echoing. A pointer is returned to a null-terminated string of at most 8 characters. If /dev/tty cannot be opened, a null pointer is returned. An interrupt will terminate input and send an interrupt signal to the calling program before returning....
 standard/getpattern(3) -- returns the index of the current pattern
    none FUNCTION RETURN VALUE The returned value of this function is an index into the table of available patterns.
 getpeername(3n) -- get name of connected peer
    getpeername returns the name of the peer connected to socket s. The int pointed to by the namelen parameter should be initialized to indicate the amount of space pointed to by name. On return it contains the actual size of the name returned (in bytes). The name is truncated if the buffer provided is too small.
 Tk/getpixels(3) -- translate between strings and screen units
    Tcl_Interp *interp (in) Interpreter to use for error reporting. Tk_Window tkwin (in) Window whose screen geometry determines the conversion between absolute units and pixels. char *string (in) String that specifies a distance on the screen. int *intPtr (out) Pointer to location in which to store converted distance in pixels. double *doublePtr (out) Pointer to location in which to store converted distance in millimeters....
 Tk/getpixmap(3) -- allocate and free pixmaps
    Display *display (in) X display for the pixmap. Drawable d (in) Pixmap or window where the new pixmap will be used for drawing. int width (in) Width of pixmap. int height (in) Height of pixmap. int depth (in) Number of bits per pixel in pixmap. Pixmap pixmap (in) Pixmap to destroy.
 standard/getplanes(3) -- returns the number of available bitplanes
    none FUNCTION RETURN VALUE The returned value of this function is the number of bitplanes available for drawing under the current drawmode.
 standard/getport(3) -- obsolete routine
    name expects the window title that is displayed on the left hand side of the title bar for the window.
 getprojall(3c) -- enumerate all project IDs
    The getprojall function stores information about all of the project IDs known to the system into an array of projid_t structs pointed to by buf. A maximum of len entries will be stored. The projid_t struct is defined in and has the following format: #define MAXPROJNAMELEN 32 typedef struct projid { char proj_name[MAXPROJNAMELEN]; /* project name */ prid_t proj_id; /* project ID */ } projid_t; Note that project names that have more than MAXPROJNAMELEN-1 characters will be truncated. The ...
 getprojuser(3c) -- get a user's project IDs
    The getprojuser function searches the project file for the user name and stores information about the projects for which name is authorized into an array of projid_t structs. The array is pointed to by buf and is assumed to have room for a maximum of len entries. The projid_t struct is defined in and has the following format: #define MAXPROJNAMELEN 32 typedef struct projid { char proj_name[MAXPROJNAMELEN]; /* project name */ prid_t proj_id; /* project ID */ } projid_t; Note that project...
 getprotoent(3c) -- get protocol entry
    getprotoent, getprotobyname, and getprotobynumber each return a pointer to an object with the following structure containing the broken-out fields of a line in the network protocol data base file, /etc/protocols, or the NIS protocols map. struct protoent { char *p_name; /* official name of protocol */ char **p_aliases; /* alias list */ int p_proto; /* protocol number */ }; The members of this structure are: p_name The official name of the protocol. p_aliases A zero terminated list of alternate n...
 getpty(3) -- get a PTY or Pseudo-TTY
    This function finds and allocates a pair of devices making a pseudo-TTY, described in pty(7M). If filedes is not null, then the file descriptor for the master or controlling side of the pty is stored through the pointer. If successful, a pointer to an internal, static area containing the name of the slave device node is returned. The file descriptor is opened with the value oflag, constructed as described in open(2). The access bits of the slave device node are set to mode. The owner of the slav...
 getpw(3c) -- get name from UID
    getpw searches the password file for a user id number that equals uid, copies the line of the password file in which uid was found into the array pointed to by buf, and returns 0. getpw returns non-zero if uid cannot be found. This routine is included only for compatibility with prior systems and should not be used; see getpwent(3C) for routines to use instead.
 getpwent(3c) -- get password file entry
    getpwent, getpwuid , getpwnam and their reentrant counterparts each return a pointer to an object with the following structure containing the broken-out fields of a line in the /etc/passwd file or some other backend database. Each line in the file contains a ``passwd'' structure, declared in the header file: struct passwd { char *pw_name; char *pw_passwd; uid_t pw_uid; gid_t pw_gid; char *pw_age; char *pw_comment; char *pw_gecos; char *pw_dir; char *pw_shell; }; Page 1 GETPWENT(3C) GET...
 Tk/getrelief(3) -- translate between strings and relief values
    Tcl_Interp *interp (in) Interpreter to use for error reporting. char *name (in) String containing relief name (one of ``flat'', ``groove'', ``raised'', ``ridge'', or ``sunken''). int *reliefPtr (out) Pointer to location in which to store relief value corresponding to name. int relief (in) Relief value (one of TK_RELIEF_FLAT, TK_RELIEF_RAISED, TK_RELIEF_SUNKEN, TK_RELIEF_GROOVE, or TK_RELIEF_RIDGE)....
 standard/getresetls(3) -- returns the state of linestyle reset mode
    none FUNCTION RETURN VALUE The returned value of this function is the current state of linestyle reset mode.
 Tk/getrootcrd(3) -- Compute root-window coordinates of window
    Tk_Window tkwin (in) Token for window. int *xPtr (out) Pointer to location in which to store root-window x-coordinate corresponding to left edge of tkwin's border. int *yPtr (out) Pointer to location in which to store root-window y-coordinate corresponding to top edge of tkwin's border.
 getrpcent(3c) -- get RPC entry
    Getrpcent, getrpcbyname, getrpcbynumber and their reentrant counterparts each return a pointer to an object with the following structure containing the broken-out fields of a line in the Sun RPC program number data base, /etc/rpc, or some other back-end database. struct rpcent { char *r_name; /* name of server for this rpc program */ char **r_aliases; /* alias list */ long r_number; /* rpc program number */ }; The members of this structure are: r_name The name of the server for this rpc program....
 getrpcpor(3c) -- get RPC port number
    Getrpcport returns the port number for version versnum of the RPC program prognum running on host and using protocol proto. It returns 0 if it cannot contact the portmapper, or if prognum is not registered. If prognum is registered but not with version versnum, it will still return a port number (for some version of the program) indicating that the program is indeed registered. The version mismatch will be detected upon the first call to the service....
 getrusage(3) -- get information about resource utilization
    Getrusage returns information describing the resources utilized by the current process, or all its terminated child processes. This routine is provided for compatibility with 4.3BSD. The who parameter is one of RUSAGE_SELF or RUSAGE_CHILDREN. The buffer to which rusage points will be filled in with the following structure: struct rusage { struct timeval ru_utime;/* user time used */ struct timeval ru_stime;/* system time used */ long ru_maxrss; long ru_ixrss; /* integral shared memory size */ lo...
 Tcl/gets(3) -- Read a line from a file
    This command reads the next line from the file given by fileId and discards the terminating newline character. If varName is specified then the line is placed in the variable by that name and the return value is a count of the number of characters read (not including the newline). If the end of the file is reached before reading any characters then -1 is returned and varName is set to an empty string. If varName is not specified then the return value will be the line (minus the newline character...
 gets(3s) -- get a string from a stream
    gets reads characters from the standard input stream, stdin, into the array pointed to by s, until a new-line character is read or an end-offile condition is encountered. The new-line character is discarded and the string is terminated with a null character. fgets reads characters from the stream into the array pointed to by s, until n-1 characters are read, or a new-line character is read and transferred to s, or an end-of-file condition is encountered. The string is then terminated with a null...
 standard/getscrbox(3) -- read back the current computed screen bounding box
    left returns the window coordinate of the left-most pixel drawn while scrbox has been tracking. right returns the window coordinate of the right-most pixel drawn while scrbox has been tracking. bottom returns the window coordinate of the lowest pixel drawn while scrbox has been tracking. top returns the window coordinate of the highest pixel drawn while scrbox has been tracking.
 standard/getscrmask(3) -- returns the current screen mask
    left expects a pointer to a location into which the system should copy the x coordinate (in pixels) of the left side of the current screen mask. right expects a pointer to a location into which the system should copy the x coordinate (in pixels) of the right side of the current screen mask. bottom expects a pointer to a location into which the system should copy the y coordinate (in pixels) of the bottom side of the current screen mask. top expects a pointer to a location into which the system s...
 Tk/getscroll(3) -- parse arguments for scrolling commands
    Tcl_Interp *interp (in) Interpreter to use for error reporting. int argc (in) Number of strings in argv array. char *argv[] (in) Argument strings. These represent the entire widget command, of which the first word is typically the widget name and the second word is typically xview or yview. This procedure parses arguments starting with argv[2]. double *dblPtr (out) Filled in with fraction from moveto option, if any. int *intPtr (out) Filled in with line or page count from scroll option, if any. ...
 Tk/getselect(3) -- retrieve the contents of a selection
    Tcl_Interp *interp (in) Interpreter to use for reporting errors. Tk_Window tkwin (in) Window on whose behalf to retrieve the selection (determines display from which to retrieve). Atom selection (in) The name of the selection to be | retrieved. Atom target (in) Form in which to retrieve selection. Tk_GetSelProc *proc (in) Procedure to invoke to process pieces of the selection as they are retrieved. ClientData clientData (in) Arbitrary one-word value to pass to proc....
 getservent(3c) -- get service entry
    getservent, getservbyname, getservbyport and their reentrant counterparts each return a pointer to an object with the following structure containing the broken-out fields of a line in the file /etc/services, or some other back-end database. struct servent { char *s_name; /* official name of service */ char **s_aliases; /* alias list */ int s_port; /* port service resides at */ char *s_proto; /* protocol to use */ }; The members of this structure are: s_name The official name of the service. s_al...
 standard/getshade(3) -- obsolete routine
    none
 standard/getsize(3) -- returns the size of a graphics window
    x expects a pointer to the location into which the system should copy the width (in pixels) of a graphics window. y expects a pointer to the location into which the system should copy the height (in pixels) of a graphics window.
 standard/getsm(3) -- returns the current shading model
    none FUNCTION RETURN VALUE The returned value of this function indicates which shading model is now active. There are two possible return values: FLAT the system renders lines and filled polygons in a constant color. GOURAUD the system renders lines and filled polygons with Gouraud shading.
 getsockname(3n) -- get socket name
    getsockname returns the current name for socket s. The namelen parameter should be initialized to indicate the amount of space pointed to by name. On return it contains the actual size of the name returned (in bytes).
 getsockopt(3n) -- get and set options on sockets
    getsockopt and setsockopt manipulate options associated with a socket. Options may exist at multiple protocol levels; they are always present at the uppermost socket level. When manipulating socket options, the level at which the option resides and the name of the option must be specified. To manipulate options at the socket level, level is specified as SOL_SOCKET. To manipulate options at any other level, lev...
 getspent(3c) -- manipulate shadow password file entry
    The getspent, getspnam and their reentrant counterpart routines each return a pointer to an object with the following structure containing the broken-out fields of a line in the /etc/shadow file, or some other backend database. Each line in the file contains a ``shadow password'' structure, declared in the shadow.h header file: struct spwd{ char ...
 getsubopt(3c) -- parse suboptions from a string
    getsubopt parses suboptions in a flag argument that was initially parsed by getopt(3C). These suboptions are separated by commas and may consist of either a single token or a token-value pair separated by an equal sign. Since commas delimit suboptions in the option string, they are not allowed to be part of the suboption or the value of a suboption. A command that uses this syntax is mount(1M), which allows the user to specify mount par...
 gettimeofday(3c) -- get/set date and time
    The system's notion of the current time is obtained with the gettimeofday and BSDgettimeofday calls. The time is expressed in seconds and microseconds since midnight (00:00) Coordinated Universal Time (UTC), January 1, 1970. The resolution for (BSD)gettimeofday is never worse than 100 HZ (which equals 10 milliseconds). The actual resolution of (BSD)gettimeofday depends on the timer capability of the underlying hardware(see timers(5)). The difference between the calls gettimeofday(settimeofday) ...
 gettxt(3c) -- retrieve a text string
    gettxt retrieves a text string from a message file. The arguments to the function are a message identification msgid and a default string dflt_str to be used if the retrieval fails. The text strings are in files created by the mkmsgs utility [see mkmsgs(1)] and installed in directories in /usr/lib/locale/locale/LC_MESSAGES. The directory locale can be viewed as t...
 Tk/getuid(3) -- convert from string to unique identifier
    char*string(in) String for which the corresponding unique identifier is desired.
 getut(3c) -- access utmp file entry
    NOTE: these routines are all obsolete and are provided for backward compatibility only. All access to or modification of these files must be done via the getutx(3C) set of interfaces. getutent, getutid, getutline, and pututline each return a pointer to a utmp structure: struct utmp { char ut_user[8...
 getutx(3c) -- access utmpx (extended utmp) file entry
    getutxent, getutxid, and getutxline each return a pointer to a utmpx structure: struct utmpx { char ut_user[32]; /* user login name */ char ut_id[4]; /* /etc/inittab id (usu...
 standard/getvaluator(3) -- returns the current state of a valuator
    dev expects the identifier of the device (e.g., MOUSEX, BPADX, etc.) from which you want to read. FUNCTION RETURN VALUE The returned value of this function is the value stored at the device named by the dev parameter.
 standard/getvideo(3) -- set and get video registers
    reg expects the name of the register to access. value expects the value which is to be placed into reg. FUNCTION RETURN VALUE The returned value of getvideo is the value read from register reg, or -1. -1 indicates that reg is not a valid register or that you queried a video register on a system without that particular board installed.
 standard/getviewport(3) -- gets a copy of the dimensions of the current viewport
    left expects a pointer to a location into which the system should copy the x coordinate (in pixels) of the left side of the current view port. right expects a pointer to a location into which the system should copy the x coordinate (in pixels) of the right side of the current view port. bottom expects a pointer to a location into which the system should copy the y coordinate (in pixels) of the bottom side of the current view port. top expects a pointer to a location into which the system should ...
 Tk/getvisual(3) -- translate from string to visual
    Tcl_Interp *interp (in) Interpreter to use for error reporting. Tk_Window tkwin (in) Token for window in which the visual will be used. char *string (in) String that identifies the desired visual. See below for valid formats. int *depthPtr (out) Depth of returned visual gets stored here. Colormap *colormapPtr (out) If non-NULL then a suitable colormap for visual is found and its identifier is stored here....
 Tk/getvroot(3) -- Get location and size of virtual root for window
    Tk_Window tkwin (in) Token for window whose virtual root is to be queried. int xPtr (out) Points to word in which to store xoffset of virtual root. int yPtr (out) Points to word in which to store yoffset of virtual root. int widthPtr (out) Points to word in which to store width | of virtual root. int heightPtr (out) Points to word in which to store height| of virtual root.
 getwc(3s) -- get wchar_t character or word from a stream
    getwc transforms the next EUC character from the named input stream into a wchar_t character, and returns it. It also increments the file pointer, if defined, by one EUC character in the stream. getwchar is defined as getwc(stdin). getwc and getwchar are macros. fgetwc behaves like getwc, but is a function....
 getwd(3c) -- get current working directory pathname
    getwd copies the absolute pathname of the current working directory to pathname and returns a pointer to the result.
 getwidth(3w) -- get information on supplementary code sets
    getwidth reads the character class table generated by chrtbl(1M) or wchrtbl(1M) to get information on supplementary code sets, and puts it in the structure eucwidth_t. The structure eucwidth_t is defined in the header file euc.h as follows: typedef struct { short int _eucw1,_eu...
 standard/getwritemask(3) -- returns the current writemask
    none FUNCTION RETURN VALUE The returned value of this function is the current writemask for the current drawing mode.
 getws(3s) -- get a wchar_t string from a stream
    getws reads EUC characters from stdin, converts them to wchar_t characters, and places them in the wchar_t array pointed to by s. getws reads until a newline character is read or an end-of-file condition is encountered. The newline character is discarded and the wchar_t string is terminated with a wchar_t null character. fgetws reads EUC characters from the strea...
 standard/getwscrn(3) -- returns the screen upon which the current window appears
    none FUNCTION RETURN VALUE The returned function value is the screen number upon which the current window appears.
 standard/getzbuffer(3) -- returns whether z-buffering is on or off
    none FUNCTION RETURN VALUE The returned value of this function is either TRUE or FALSE. TRUE indicates that z-buffering is on. FALSE indicates that z-buffering is off. (FALSE is the default.) For systems without the zbuffer option, this function always returns FALSE.
 f90/get_ieee_exceptions(3) -- floating-point exception status
    UNICOS/mk and IRIX systems CRAY T90 systems that support IEEE floating-point arithmetic
 f90/get_ieee_interrupts(3) -- floating-point interrupt status
    UNICOS/mk and IRIX systems CRAY T90 systems that support IEEE floating-point arithmetic
 f90/get_ieee_rounding_mode(3) -- Returns current floating-point rounding mode
    UNICOS/mk and IRIX systems CRAY T90 systems that support IEEE floating-point arithmetic
 f90/get_ieee_status(3) -- floating-point status upon entry to a procedure
    UNICOS/mk and IRIX systems CRAY T90 systems that support IEEE floating-point arithmetic
 standard/gexit(3) -- exits graphics
    none
 standard/gflush(3) -- flushs the remote GL client buffer
    none
 standard/ginit(3) -- create a window that occupies the entire screen
    none
 OpenGL/glaccum(3) -- operate on the accumulation buffer
    op Specifies the accumulation buffer operation. Symbolic constants GL_ACCUM, GL_LOAD, GL_ADD, GL_MULT, and GL_RETURN are accepted. value Specifies a floating-point value used in the accumulation buffer operation. op determines how value is used.
 OpenGL/glalphafunc(3) -- specify the alpha test function
    func Specifies the alpha comparison function. Symbolic constants GL_NEVER, GL_LESS, GL_EQUAL, GL_LEQUAL, GL_GREATER, GL_NOTEQUAL, GL_GEQUAL, and GL_ALWAYS are accepted. The initial value is GL_ALWAYS. ref Specifies the reference value that incoming alpha values are compared to. This value is clamped to the range [0, 1], where 0 represents the lowest possible alpha value and 1 the highest possible value. The initial reference value is 0....
 OpenGL/glaretexturesresident(3) -- determine if textures are loaded in texture memory
    n Specifies the number of textures to be queried. textures Specifies an array containing the names of the textures to be queried. residences Specifies an array in which the texture residence status is returned. The residence status of a texture named by an element of textures is returned in the corresponding element of residences.
 OpenGL/glaretexturesresidentext(3) -- determine if textures are loaded in texture memory
    n The number of textures to be queried. textures An array containing the names of the textures to be queried. residences An array in which the texture residence status is returned. The residence status of a texture named by an element of textures is returned in the corresponding element of residences.
 OpenGL/glarrayelement(3) -- render a vertex using the specified vertex array element
    i Specifies an index into the enabled vertex data arrays.
 OpenGL/glarrayelementext(3) -- specify the array elements used to render a vertex
    i Specifies an index in the enabled arrays.
 OpenGL/glasyncmarkersgix(3) -- set a marker for tracking asynchronous commands
    marker Specifies a marker value for tracking asynchronous commands.
 OpenGL/glbegin(3) -- delimit the vertices of a primitive or a group of like primitives
    mode Specifies the primitive or primitives that will be created from vertices presented between glBegin and the subsequent glEnd. Ten symbolic constants are accepted: GL_POINTS, GL_LINES, GL_LINE_STRIP, GL_LINE_LOOP, GL_TRIANGLES, GL_TRIANGLE_STRIP, GL_TRIANGLE_FAN, GL_QUADS, GL_QUAD_STRIP, and GL_POLYGON.
 OpenGL/glbindtexture(3) -- bind a named texture to a texturing target
    target Specifies the target to which the texture is bound. Must be either GL_TEXTURE_1D, GL_TEXTURE_2D, or GL_TEXTURE_3D. texture Specifies the name of a texture.
 OpenGL/glbindtextureext(3) -- bind a named texture to a texturing target
    target The target to which the texture will be bound. Must be one of GL_TEXTURE_1D, GL_TEXTURE_2D, GL_DETAIL_TEXTURE_2D_SGIS, or GL_TEXTURE_3D_EXT. texture The name of a texture.
 OpenGL/glbitmap(3) -- draw a bitmap
    width, height Specify the pixel width and height of the bitmap image. xorig, yorig Specify the location of the origin in the bitmap image. The origin is measured from the lower left corner of the bitmap, with right and up being the positive axes. xmove, ymove Specify the x and y offsets to be added to the current raster position after the bitmap is drawn. bitmap Specifies the address of the bitmap image....
 OpenGL/glblendcolor(3) -- set the blend color
    red, green, blue, alpha specify the components of GL_BLEND_COLOR
 OpenGL/glblendcolorext(3) -- set the blend color
    red, green, blue, alpha specify the components of GL_BLEND_COLOR_EXT
 OpenGL/glblendequation(3) -- set the blend equation
    mode specifies how source and destination colors are combined. It must be GL_FUNC_ADD, GL_FUNC_SUBTRACT, GL_FUNC_REVERSE_SUBTRACT, GL_MIN, GL_MAX, GL_ALPHA_MIN_SGIX, or GL_ALPHA_MAX_SGIX.
 OpenGL/glblendequationext(3) -- set the blend equation
    mode specifies how source and destination colors are combined. It must be GL_FUNC_ADD_EXT, GL_FUNC_SUBTRACT_EXT, GL_FUNC_REVERSE_SUBTRACT_EXT, GL_MIN_EXT, GL_MAX_EXT, GL_ALPHA_MIN_SGIX, GL_ALPHA_MAX_SGIX, or GL_LOGIC_OP.
 OpenGL/glblendfunc(3) -- specify pixel arithmetic
    sfactor Specifies how the red, green, blue, and alpha source blending factors are computed. The following symbolic constants are accepted: GL_ZERO, GL_ONE, GL_DST_COLOR, GL_ONE_MINUS_DST_COLOR, GL_SRC_ALPHA, GL_ONE_MINUS_SRC_ALPHA, GL_DST_ALPHA, GL_ONE_MINUS_DST_ALPHA, and GL_SRC_ALPHA_SATURATE. The initial value is GL_ONE. Additionally, if the GL_ARB_imaging extension is supported, the following constants are accepted: GL_CONSTANT_COLOR, GL_ONE_MINUS_CONSTANT_COLOR, GL_CONSTANT_ALPHA, GL_ONE_MI...
 OpenGL/glcalllist(3) -- execute a display list
    list Specifies the integer name of the display list to be executed.
 OpenGL/glcalllists(3) -- execute a list of display lists
    n Specifies the number of display lists to be executed. type Specifies the type of values in lists. Symbolic constants GL_BYTE, GL_UNSIGNED_BYTE, GL_SHORT, GL_UNSIGNED_SHORT, GL_INT, GL_UNSIGNED_INT, GL_FLOAT, GL_2_BYTES, GL_3_BYTES, and GL_4_BYTES are accepted. lists Specifies the address of an array of name offsets in the display list. The pointer type is void because the offsets can be bytes, shorts, ints, or floats, depending on the value of type....
 OpenGL-GLC/glcappendcatalog(3) -- append a catalog to the catalog list
    void glcPrependCatalog( const GLCchar *inCatalog )
 OpenGL-GLC/glcappendfont(3) -- append a font to the current font list
    inFont Specifies the ID of the font to append to the list GLC_CURRENT_FONT_LIST.
 OpenGL-GLC/glccontext(3) -- make a context current to a thread
    inContext Context ID indicating which context to make current.
 OpenGL-GLC/glcdatapointer(3) -- assign a value to GLC_DATA_POINTER
    inPointer Specifies the value to assign to GLC_DATA_POINTER.
 OpenGL-GLC/glcdeletefont(3) -- delete a font
    inFont Specifies the ID of the font to delete.
 OpenGL-GLC/glcdeleteglobjects(3) -- delete all GL objects that a GLC context owns
    When you call glcDeleteGLObjects, GLC issues a sequence of GL commands to delete all GL objects that GLC owns. GLC uses the command glDeleteLists to delete all the GL lists named in GLC_LIST_OBJECT_LIST and uses the commmand glDeleteTexturesEXT to delete all the GL texture objects named in GLC_TEXTURE_OBJECT_LIST. When an execution of glcDeleteGLObjects finishes, both lists are empty. Note that glcDeleteGLObjects deletes only the objects that the current context owns, not all objects in all cont...
 OpenGL-GLC/glcenable(3) -- enable or disable GLC capabilities
    void glcDisable( GLCenum inAttrib )
 OpenGL-GLC/glcfont(3) -- replace fonts in the font list
    inFont Specifies the ID of a font.
 OpenGL-GLC/glcfontface(3) -- set the face of a font or of all current fonts
    inFont Specifies the ID of the font to be changed. inFace Specifies the face for inFont.
 OpenGL-GLC/glcfontmap(3) -- modify the map of a font
    inFont Specifies the ID of a font. inCode Specifies the integer ID of a character. inCharName Specifies the string name of a character.
 OpenGL-GLC/glcgencontext(3) -- generate or delete a context
    void glcDeleteContext( GLint inContext )
 OpenGL-GLC/glcgenfontid(3) -- generate a new font ID
    glcGenFontID returns a font ID that is not an element of the list GLC_FONT_LIST.
 OpenGL-GLC/glcgetallcontexts(3) -- return an array of GLC contexts
    glcGetAllContexts returns a zero-terminated array of GLC context IDs. The array contains one entry for each of the client's GLC contexts. GLC uses the C library command malloc to allocate the array. The client should therefore use the C library command free to deallocate the array when it is no longer needed.
 OpenGL-GLC/glcgetc(3) -- return the value or values of a specified string constant
    inAttrib Specifies the parameter value to be returned.
 OpenGL-GLC/glcgetcallbackfunc(3) -- return the value of a callback function variable
    inOpcode Specifies the callback function variable.
 OpenGL-GLC/glcgetcharmetric(3) -- measure a character
    inCode Specifies the character to measure. inMetric Specifies the metric to measure, either GLC_BASELINE or GLC_BOUNDS. outVec Specifies a vector in which to store value of inMetric for the specified character.
 OpenGL-GLC/glcgetcurrentcontext(3) -- return current context ID
    glcGetCurrentContext returns the ID of the thread's current GLC context ID variable.
 OpenGL-GLC/glcgeterror(3) -- return error information
    glcGetError retrieves the value of the issuing thread's GLC error code variable, assigns the value GLC_NONE to that variable, and returns the retrieved value. glcGetError returns the error codes GLC_NONE, GLC_PARAMETER_ERROR, GLC_RESOURCE_ERROR, or GLC_STATE_ERROR. Note that in contrast to the GL function glGetError, glcGetError only returns one error, not a list of errors. PPPPaaaaggggeeee 1111...
 OpenGL-GLC/glcgetf(3) -- return value of a specified floating point variable
    inAttrib Specifies the parameter value to be returned.
 OpenGL-GLC/glcgetfontc(3) -- return a string attribute of a font
    inFont Specifies the font for which the attribute is requested. inAttrib Specifies the requested string attribute.
 OpenGL-GLC/glcgetfontface(3) -- return the name of a font's current face
    inFont Specifies a font.
 OpenGL-GLC/glcgetfonti(3) -- return an integer attribute of a font
    inFont Specifies the font for which the attribute is requested. inAttrib Specifies the requested integer attribute.
 OpenGL-GLC/glcgetfontlistc(3) -- return an attribute of a font
    inFont Specifies a font. inAttrib Specifies the string list from which a string is requested. inIndex Specifies the offset from the first element of the list associated with inAttrib.
 OpenGL-GLC/glcgetfontmap(3) -- return the string name of a character
    inFont Specifies the integer ID of the font from which to select the character. inCode Specifies the integer ID of the character in the font map.
 OpenGL-GLC/glcgetfv(3) -- return the value of a floating point vector variable
    inAttrib Specifies the parameter value to be returned. outVec Specifies where to store the return value.
 OpenGL-GLC/glcgeti(3) -- return the value or values of a integer variable or constant
    inAttrib Specifies string for which the value is requested.
 OpenGL-GLC/glcgetlistc(3) -- return element from list
    inAttrib Specifies a string list. inIndex Specifies the index from which to retrieve an element.
 OpenGL-GLC/glcgetlisti(3) -- return element from list
    inAttrib Specifies an integer list. inIndex Specifies the index from which to retrieve the element.
 OpenGL-GLC/glcgetmasterc(3) -- return the value of a master's string attribute
    inMaster Specifies the master for which an attribute value is needed. inAttrib Specifies the attribute for which the value is needed.
 OpenGL-GLC/glcgetmasteri(3) -- return the value of a master's attribute
    inMaster Specifies the master for which an attribute value is needed. inAttrib Specifies the attribute for which the value is needed.
 OpenGL-GLC/glcgetmasterlistc(3) -- return attribute of master
    inMaster Specifies the master from which an attribute is needed. inAttrib Specifies the string list that contains the desired attribute. inIndex Specifies the offset from the first element of the list associated with inAttrib.
 OpenGL-GLC/glcgetmastermap(3) -- return the string name of a character in a master
    inMaster Specifies the integer ID of the master from which to select the character. inCode Specifies the integer ID of the character in the master map.
 OpenGL-GLC/glcgetmaxcharmetric(3) -- measure layout of characters
    inMetric Specifies the metric to measure, either GLC_BASELINE or GLC_BOUNDS. outVec Specifies a vector in which to store the value of outVec for the specified character.
 OpenGL-GLC/glcgetpointer(3) -- return pointer value
    inAttrib The pointer variable; currently always GLC_DATA_POINTER, with an initial value of GLC_NONE.
 OpenGL-GLC/glcgetstringcharmetric(3) -- retrieve character metric from measurement buffer
    inIndex Specifies which element in the string to measure. inMetric Specifies the metric to measure, either GLC_BASELINE or GLC_BOUNDS. outVec Specifies a vector in which to store value of inMetric for the specified character.
 OpenGL-GLC/glcgetstringmetric(3) -- return a string metric
    inMetric Specifies the string to be measured. outVec Specifies a vector in which the metric is stored.
 OpenGL-GLC/glcintro(3) -- Introduction to the OpenGL Character Renderer
    The OpenGL Character Renderer (GLC) is a subroutine library that provides OpenGL programs with character rendering services. A GLC context is an instantiation of the GLC state machine. A GLC client is a program that uses both OpenGL (henceforth, "GL") and GLC. When a client thread issues a GLC command, the thread's current GLC context executes the command. To render a character, a GLC client issues the command glcRenderChar(GLint inCode); GLC then goes through these steps: 1. GLC finds a font...
 OpenGL-GLC/glciscontext(3) -- test whether a context ID is the current GLC context
    inContext Specifies the context ID to be tested.
 OpenGL-GLC/glcisenabled(3) -- test whether a boolean attribute is true
    inAttrib Specifies an attribute to be tested.
 OpenGL-GLC/glcisfont(3) -- test whether inFont is a font ID
    inFont Specifies the element to be tested.
 OpenGL/glclear(3) -- clear buffers to preset values
    mask Bitwise OR of masks that indicate the buffers to be cleared. The four masks are GL_COLOR_BUFFER_BIT, GL_DEPTH_BUFFER_BIT, GL_ACCUM_BUFFER_BIT, and GL_STENCIL_BUFFER_BIT.
 OpenGL/glclearaccum(3) -- specify clear values for the accumulation buffer
    red, green, blue, alpha Specify the red, green, blue, and alpha values used when the accumulation buffer is cleared. The initial values are all 0.
 OpenGL/glclearcolor(3) -- specify clear values for the color buffers
    red, green, blue, alpha Specify the red, green, blue, and alpha values used when the color buffers are cleared. The initial values are all 0.
 OpenGL/glcleardepth(3) -- specify the clear value for the depth buffer
    depth Specifies the depth value used when the depth buffer is cleared. The initial value is 1.
 OpenGL/glclearindex(3) -- specify the clear value for the color index buffers
    c Specifies the index used when the color index buffers are cleared. The initial value is 0.
 OpenGL/glclearstencil(3) -- specify the clear value for the stencil buffer
    s Specifies the index used when the stencil buffer is cleared. The initial value is 0.
 OpenGL/glclipplane(3) -- specify a plane against which all geometry is clipped
    plane Specifies which clipping plane is being positioned. Symbolic names of the form GL_CLIP_PLANEi, where i is an integer between 0 and GL_MAX_CLIP_PLANES-1, are accepted. equation Specifies the address of an array of four double-precision floating-point values. These values are interpreted as a plane equation.
 OpenGL-GLC/glcloadidentity(3) -- assign identity value to GLC_BITMAP_MATRIX
    glcLoadIdentity assigns the value [1 0 0 1] to the floating point vector variable GLC_BITMAP_MATRIX.
 OpenGL-GLC/glcloadmatrix(3) -- assign a value to GLC_BITMAP_MATRIX
    inMatrix Specifies the value to assign to GLC_BITMAP_MATRIX.
 OpenGL-GLC/glcmeasurecountedstring(3) -- store a string of specified length in measurement buffer
    inMeasureChars Specifies whether to compute metrics only for the string or for the characters as well. inCount Specifies the number of elements to measure, starting at the first element. inString Specifies the string to be measured.
 OpenGL-GLC/glcmeasurestring(3) -- measure a specified string
    inMeasureChars Specifies whether to compute metrics only for the string or for the characters as well. inString Specifies a zero-terminated array of characters.
 OpenGL-GLC/glcmultmatrix(3) -- multiply GLC_BITMAP_MATRIX with a matrix
    inMatrix Specifies a pointer a to 2x2 matrix stored in column-major order as four consecutive values.
 OpenGL-GLC/glcnewfontfromfamily(3) -- create a new font from a master of specified family
    inFont Specifies the ID of the new font. inFamily Specifies the font family, that is, the string that the GLC_FAMILY attribute has to match.
 OpenGL-GLC/glcnewfontfrommaster(3) -- create a new font from a master
    inFont Specifies the ID of the new font. inMaster Specifies the master from which to create the new font.
 OpenGL/glcolor(3) -- set the current color
    red, green, blue Specify new red, green, and blue values for the current color. alpha Specifies a new alpha value for the current color. Included only in the four-argument glColor4 commands.
 OpenGL/glcolormask(3) -- enable and disable writing of frame buffer color components
    red, green, blue, alpha Specify whether red, green, blue, and alpha can or cannot be written into the frame buffer. The initial values are all GL_TRUE, indicating that the color components can be written.
 OpenGL/glcolormaterial(3) -- cause a material color to track the current color
    face Specifies whether front, back, or both front and back material parameters should track the current color. Accepted values are GL_FRONT, GL_BACK, and GL_FRONT_AND_BACK. The initial value is GL_FRONT_AND_BACK. mode Specifies which of several material parameters track the current color. Accepted values are GL_EMISSION, GL_AMBIENT, GL_DIFFUSE, GL_SPECULAR, and GL_AMBIENT_AND_DIFFUSE. The initial value is GL_AMBIENT_AND_DIFFUSE....
 OpenGL/glcolorpointer(3) -- define an array of colors
    size Specifies the number of components per color. Must be 3 or 4. The initial value is 4. type Specifies the data type of each color component in the array. Symbolic constants GL_BYTE, GL_UNSIGNED_BYTE, GL_SHORT, GL_UNSIGNED_SHORT, GL_INT, GL_UNSIGNED_INT, GL_FLOAT, and GL_DOUBLE are accepted. The initial value is GL_FLOAT. stride Specifies the byte offset between consecutive colors. If stride is 0 (the initial value), the colors are understood to be tightly packed in the array. The initial val...
 OpenGL/glcolorpointerext(3) -- define a array of colors
    size Specifies the number of components per color. It must be 3 or 4. type Specifies the data type of each color component in the array. Symbolic constants GL_BYTE, GL_UNSIGNED_BYTE, GL_SHORT, GL_UNSIGNED_SHORT, GL_INT, GL_UNSIGNED_INT, GL_FLOAT, or GL_DOUBLE_EXT, are accepted. stride Specifies the byte offset between consecutive colors. If stride is zero the colors are understood to be tightly packed in the array. count Specifies the number of colors, counting from the first, that are static. p...
 OpenGL/glcolorsubtable(3) -- respecify a portion of a color table
    target Must be one of GL_COLOR_TABLE, GL_POST_CONVOLUTION_COLOR_TABLE, or GL_POST_COLOR_MATRIX_COLOR_TABLE. start The starting index of the portion of the color table to be replaced. count The number of table entries to replace. format The format of the pixel data in data. The allowable values are GL_RED, GL_GREEN, GL_BLUE, GL_ALPHA, GL_LUMINANCE, GL_LUMINANCE_ALPHA, GL_RGB, GL_BGR, GL_RGBA, GL_BGRA, and GL_ABGR_EXT. type The type of the pixel data in data. The allowable values are GL_UNSIGNED_B...
 OpenGL/glcolortable(3) -- define a color lookup table
    target Must be one of GL_COLOR_TABLE, GL_POST_CONVOLUTION_COLOR_TABLE, GL_POST_COLOR_MATRIX_COLOR_TABLE, GL_PROXY_COLOR_TABLE, GL_PROXY_POST_CONVOLUTION_COLOR_TABLE, or GL_PROXY_POST_COLOR_MATRIX_COLOR_TABLE. internalformat The internal format of the color table. The allowable values are GL_ALPHA, GL_ALPHA4, GL_ALPHA8, GL_ALPHA12, GL_ALPHA16, GL_LUMINANCE, GL_LUMINANCE4, GL_LUMINANCE8, GL_LUMINANCE12, GL_LUMINANCE16, GL_LUMINANCE_ALPHA, GL_LUMINANCE4_ALPHA4, GL_LUMINANCE6_ALPHA2, GL_LUMINANCE8_A...
 OpenGL/glcolortableparameter(3) -- set color lookup table parameters
    target The target color table. Must be GL_COLOR_TABLE, GL_POST_CONVOLUTION_COLOR_TABLE, or GL_POST_COLOR_MATRIX_COLOR_TABLE. pname The symbolic name of a texture color lookup table parameter. Must be one of GL_COLOR_TABLE_SCALE or GL_COLOR_TABLE_BIAS. params A pointer to an array where the values of the parameters are stored.
 OpenGL/glcolortableparametersgi(3) -- set color lookup table parameters
    target The target color table. Must be GL_COLOR_TABLE_SGI, GL_POST_CONVOLUTION_COLOR_TABLE_SGI, GL_POST_COLOR_MATRIX_COLOR_TABLE_SGI, or GL_TEXTURE_COLOR_TABLE_SGI. pname The symbolic name of a texture color lookup table parameter. Must be one of GL_COLOR_TABLE_SCALE_SGI or GL_COLOR_TABLE_BIAS_SGI. params A pointer to an array where the values of the parameters are stored.
 OpenGL/glcolortablesgi(3) -- define a color lookup table
    target Must be GL_TEXTURE_COLOR_TABLE_SGI, GL_COLOR_TABLE_SGI, GL_POST_CONVOLUTION_COLOR_TABLE_SGI, GL_POST_COLOR_MATRIX_COLOR_TABLE_SGI, GL_PROXY_TEXTURE_COLOR_TABLE_SGI, GL_PROXY_COLOR_TABLE_SGI, GL_PROXY_POST_CONVOLUTION_COLOR_TABLE_SGI, or GL_PROXY_POST_COLOR_MATRIX_COLOR_TABLE_SGI. internalformat The internal format of the color table. The allowable values are GL_ALPHA, GL_ALPHA4_EXT, GL_ALPHA8_EXT, GL_ALPHA12_EXT, GL_ALPHA16_EXT, GL_LUMINANCE, GL_LUMINANCE4_EXT, GL_LUMINANCE8_EXT, GL_LUMIN...
 standard/glcompat(3) -- controls compatibility modes
    mode the name of the compatibility mode you want to change. The available modes are: GLC_OLDPOLYGON controls the state of old-style polygon mode. GLC_ZRANGEMAP controls the state of z-range mapping mode. GLC_SOFTATTACH controls whether this program will keep mouse focus when a shift or control key is pressed. GLC_MANAGEBG sets imakebackground windows to be override redirect. GLC_SLOWMAPCOLORS controls whether mapcolor calls are buffered. GLC_INPUTCHANGEBUG controls whether extra INPUTCHANGE even...
 OpenGL/glconvolutionfilter1d(3) -- define a one-dimensional convolution filter
    target Must be GL_CONVOLUTION_1D. internalformat The internal format of the convolution filter kernel. The allowable values are GL_ALPHA, GL_ALPHA4, GL_ALPHA8, GL_ALPHA12, GL_ALPHA16, GL_LUMINANCE, GL_LUMINANCE4, GL_LUMINANCE8, GL_LUMINANCE12, GL_LUMINANCE16, GL_LUMINANCE_ALPHA, GL_LUMINANCE4_ALPHA4, GL_LUMINANCE6_ALPHA2, GL_LUMINANCE8_ALPHA8, GL_LUMINANCE12_ALPHA4, GL_LUMINANCE12_ALPHA12, GL_LUMINANCE16_ALPHA16, GL_INTENSITY, GL_INTENSITY4, GL_INTENSITY8, GL_INTENSITY12, GL_INTENSITY16, GL_R3_G...
 OpenGL/glconvolutionfilter1dext(3) -- define a one-dimensional convolution filter
    target Must be GL_CONVOLUTION_1D_EXT. internalformat The internal format of the convolution filter kernel. The allowable values are GL_ALPHA, GL_LUMINANCE, GL_LUMINANCE_ALPHA, GL_INTENSITY_EXT, GL_RGB, and GL_RGBA. width The width of the pixel array referenced by image. format The format of the pixel data in image. The allowable values are GL_RGBA, GL_ABGR_EXT, GL_RED, GL_GREEN, GL_BLUE, GL_ALPHA, GL_RGB, GL_LUMINANCE, GL_LUMINANCE_ALPHA and GL_YCRCB_422_SGIX are accepted. type The type of the p...
 OpenGL/glconvolutionfilter2d(3) -- define a two-dimensional convolution filter
    target Must be GL_CONVOLUTION_2D. internalformat The internal format of the convolution filter kernel. The allowable values are GL_ALPHA, GL_ALPHA4, GL_ALPHA8, GL_ALPHA12, GL_ALPHA16, GL_LUMINANCE, GL_LUMINANCE4, GL_LUMINANCE8, GL_LUMINANCE12, GL_LUMINANCE16, GL_LUMINANCE_ALPHA, GL_LUMINANCE4_ALPHA4, GL_LUMINANCE6_ALPHA2, GL_LUMINANCE8_ALPHA8, GL_LUMINANCE12_ALPHA4, GL_LUMINANCE12_ALPHA12, GL_LUMINANCE16_ALPHA16, GL_INTENSITY, GL_INTENSITY4, GL_INTENSITY8, GL_INTENSITY12, GL_INTENSITY16, GL_R3_G...
 OpenGL/glconvolutionfilter2dext(3) -- define a two-dimensional convolution filter
    target Must be GL_CONVOLUTION_2D_EXT. internalformat The internal format of the convolution filter kernel. The allowable values are GL_ALPHA, GL_LUMINANCE, GL_LUMINANCE_ALPHA, GL_INTENSITY_EXT, GL_RGB, and GL_RGBA. width The width of the pixel array referenced by image. height The height of the pixel array referenced by image. format The format of the pixel data in image. The allowable values are GL_RGBA, GL_ABGR_EXT, GL_RED, GL_GREEN, GL_BLUE, GL_ALPHA, GL_RGB, GL_LUMINANCE, GL_LUMINANCE_ALPHA ...
 OpenGL/glconvolutionparameter(3) -- set convolution parameters
    target The target for the convolution parameter. Must be one of GL_CONVOLUTION_1D, GL_CONVOLUTION_2D, or GL_SEPARABLE_2D. pname The parameter to be set. Must be GL_CONVOLUTION_BORDER_MODE. params The parameter value. Must be one of GL_REDUCE, GL_CONSTANT_BORDER, GL_REPLICATE_BORDER.
 OpenGL/glconvolutionparameterext(3) -- set convolution parameters
    target The target for the convolution parameter. Must be one of GL_CONVOLUTION_1D_EXT, GL_CONVOLUTION_2D_EXT, or GL_SEPARABLE_2D_EXT. pname The parameter to be set. Must be GL_CONVOLUTION_BORDER_MODE_EXT. params The parameter value. Must be GL_REDUCE_EXT.
 OpenGL/glcopycolorsubtable(3) -- respecify a portion of a color table
    target Must be one of GL_COLOR_TABLE, GL_POST_CONVOLUTION_COLOR_TABLE, or GL_POST_COLOR_MATRIX_COLOR_TABLE. start The starting index of the portion of the color table to be replaced. x, y The window coordinates of the left corner of the row of pixels to be copied. width The number of table entries to replace.
 OpenGL/glcopycolortable(3) -- copy pixels into a color table
    target The color table target. Must be GL_COLOR_TABLE, GL_POST_CONVOLUTION_COLOR_TABLE, or GL_POST_COLOR_MATRIX_COLOR_TABLE. internalformat The internal storage format of the texture image. Must be one of the following symbolic constants: GL_ALPHA, GL_ALPHA4, GL_ALPHA8, GL_ALPHA12, GL_ALPHA16, GL_LUMINANCE, GL_LUMINANCE4, GL_LUMINANCE8, GL_LUMINANCE12, GL_LUMINANCE16, GL_LUMINANCE_ALPHA, GL_LUMINANCE4_ALPHA4, GL_LUMINANCE6_ALPHA2, GL_LUMINANCE8_ALPHA8, GL_LUMINANCE12_ALPHA4, GL_LUMINANCE12_ALPHA...
 OpenGL/glcopycolortablesgi(3) -- copy pixels into a color table
    target The color table target. Must be GL_TEXTURE_COLOR_TABLE_SGI, GL_COLOR_TABLE_SGI, GL_POST_CONVOLUTION_COLOR_TABLE_SGI, or GL_POST_COLOR_MATRIX_COLOR_TABLE_SGI. internalformat The internal storage format of the texture image. Must be one of the following symbolic constants: GL_ALPHA, GL_ALPHA4_EXT, GL_ALPHA8_EXT, GL_ALPHA12_EXT, GL_ALPHA16_EXT, GL_LUMINANCE, GL_LUMINANCE4_EXT, GL_LUMINANCE8_EXT, GL_LUMINANCE12_EXT, GL_LUMINANCE16_EXT, GL_LUMINANCE_ALPHA, GL_LUMINANCE4_ALPHA4_EXT, GL_LUMINANC...
 OpenGL/glcopyconvolutionfilter1d(3) -- copy pixels into a one-dimensional convolution filter
    target Must be GL_CONVOLUTION_1D. internalformat The internal format of the convolution filter kernel. The allowable values are GL_ALPHA, GL_ALPHA4, GL_ALPHA8, GL_ALPHA12, GL_ALPHA16, GL_LUMINANCE, GL_LUMINANCE4, GL_LUMINANCE8, GL_LUMINANCE12, GL_LUMINANCE16, GL_LUMINANCE_ALPHA, GL_LUMINANCE4_ALPHA4, GL_LUMINANCE6_ALPHA2, GL_LUMINANCE8_ALPHA8, GL_LUMINANCE12_ALPHA4, GL_LUMINANCE12_ALPHA12, GL_LUMINANCE16_ALPHA16, GL_INTENSITY, GL_INTENSITY4, GL_INTENSITY8, GL_INTENSITY12, GL_INTENSITY16, GL_R3_G...
 OpenGL/glcopyconvolutionfilter1dext(3) -- copy pixels into a one-dimensional convolution filter
    target Must be GL_CONVOLUTION_1D_EXT. internalformat The internal format of the convolution filter kernel. The allowable values are GL_ALPHA, GL_LUMINANCE, GL_LUMINANCE_ALPHA, GL_INTENSITY_EXT, GL_RGB, and GL_RGBA. x The x coordinate of the lower-left coordinate of the pixel array to copy. y The y coordinate of the lower-left coordinate of the pixel array to copy. width The width of the pixel array to copy....
 OpenGL/glcopyconvolutionfilter2d(3) -- copy pixels into a two-dimensional convolution filter
    target Must be GL_CONVOLUTION_2D. internalformat The internal format of the convolution filter kernel. The allowable values are GL_ALPHA, GL_ALPHA4, GL_ALPHA8, GL_ALPHA12, GL_ALPHA16, GL_LUMINANCE, GL_LUMINANCE4, GL_LUMINANCE8, GL_LUMINANCE12, GL_LUMINANCE16, GL_LUMINANCE_ALPHA, GL_LUMINANCE4_ALPHA4, GL_LUMINANCE6_ALPHA2, GL_LUMINANCE8_ALPHA8, GL_LUMINANCE12_ALPHA4, GL_LUMINANCE12_ALPHA12, GL_LUMINANCE16_ALPHA16, GL_INTENSITY, GL_INTENSITY4, GL_INTENSITY8, GL_INTENSITY12, GL_INTENSITY16, GL_R3_G...
 OpenGL/glcopyconvolutionfilter2dext(3) -- copy pixels into a two-dimensional convolution filter
    target Must be GL_CONVOLUTION_2D_EXT. internalformat The internal format of the convolution filter kernel. The allowable values are GL_ALPHA, GL_LUMINANCE, GL_LUMINANCE_ALPHA, GL_INTENSITY_EXT, GL_RGB, and GL_RGBA. x The x coordinate of the lower-left coordinate of the pixel array to copy. y The y coordinate of the lower-left coordinate of the pixel array to copy. width The width of the pixel array to copy. height The height of the pixel array to copy....
 OpenGL/glcopypixels(3) -- copy pixels in the frame buffer
    x, y Specify the window coordinates of the lower left corner of the rectangular region of pixels to be copied. width, height Specify the dimensions of the rectangular region of pixels to be copied. Both must be nonnegative. type Specifies whether color values, depth values, or stencil values are to be copied. Symbolic constants GL_COLOR, GL_DEPTH, and GL_STENCIL are accepted.
 OpenGL/glcopyteximage1d(3) -- copy pixels into a 1D texture image
    target Specifies the target texture. Must be GL_TEXTURE_1D. level Specifies the level-of-detail number. Level 0 is the base image level. Level n is the nth mipmap reduction image. internalformat Specifies the internal format of the texture. Must be one of the following symbolic constants: GL_ALPHA, GL_ALPHA4, GL_ALPHA8, GL_ALPHA12, GL_ALPHA16, GL_LUMINANCE, GL_LUMINANCE4, GL_LUMINANCE8, GL_LUMINANCE12, GL_LUMINANCE16, GL_LUMINANCE_ALPHA, GL_LUMINANCE4_ALPHA4, GL_LUMINANCE6_ALPHA2, GL_LUMINANCE8_...
 OpenGL/glcopyteximage1dext(3) -- copy pixels into a 1D texture image
    target The target texture. Must be GL_TEXTURE_1D level The level-of-detail number. Level 0 is the base image level. Level n is the nth mipmap reduction image. internalformat The internal storage format of the texture image. Must be one of the following symbolic constants: GL_ALPHA, GL_ALPHA4_EXT, GL_ALPHA8_EXT, GL_ALPHA12_EXT, GL_ALPHA16_EXT, GL_LUMINANCE, GL_LUMINANCE4_EXT, GL_LUMINANCE8_EXT, GL_LUMINANCE12_EXT, GL_LUMINANCE16_EXT, GL_LUMINANCE_ALPHA, GL_LUMINANCE4_ALPHA4_EXT, GL_LUMINANCE6_ALP...
 OpenGL/glcopyteximage2d(3) -- copy pixels into a 2D texture image
    target Specifies the target texture. Must be GL_TEXTURE_2D. level Specifies the level-of-detail number. Level 0 is the base image level. Level n is the nth mipmap reduction image. internalformat Specifies the internal format of the texture. Must be one of the following symbolic constants: GL_ALPHA, GL_ALPHA4, GL_ALPHA8, GL_ALPHA12, GL_ALPHA16, GL_LUMINANCE, GL_LUMINANCE4, GL_LUMINANCE8, GL_LUMINANCE12, GL_LUMINANCE16, GL_LUMINANCE_ALPHA, GL_LUMINANCE4_ALPHA4, GL_LUMINANCE6_ALPHA2, GL_LUMINANCE8_...
 OpenGL/glcopyteximage2dext(3) -- copy pixels into a 2D texture image
    target The target texture. Must be GL_TEXTURE_2D or GL_DETAIL_TEXTURE_2D_SGIS. level The level-of-detail number. Level 0 is the base image level. Level n is the nth mipmap reduction image. internalformat The internal storage format of the texture image. Must be one of the following symbolic constants: GL_ALPHA, GL_ALPHA4_EXT, GL_ALPHA8_EXT, GL_ALPHA12_EXT, GL_ALPHA16_EXT, GL_LUMINANCE, GL_LUMINANCE4_EXT, GL_LUMINANCE8_EXT, GL_LUMINANCE12_EXT, GL_LUMINANCE16_EXT, GL_LUMINANCE_ALPHA, GL_LUMINANCE4...
 OpenGL/glcopytexsubimage1d(3) -- copy a one-dimensional texture subimage
    target Specifies the target texture. Must be GL_TEXTURE_1D. level Specifies the level-of-detail number. Level 0 is the base image level. Level n is the nth mipmap reduction image. xoffset Specifies the texel offset within the texture array. x, y Specify the window coordinates of the left corner of the row of pixels to be copied. width Specifies the width of the texture subimage.
 OpenGL/glcopytexsubimage1dext(3) -- copy pixels into a 1D texture subimage
    target The target texture. Must be GL_TEXTURE_1D level The level-of-detail number. Level 0 is the base image level. Level n is the nth mipmap reduction image. xoffset A texel offset in the x direction within the texture array. x The x coordinate of the lower-left corner of the pixel rectangle to be transferred to the texture array. y The y coordinate of the lower-left corner of the pixel rectangle to be transferred to the texture array. width The width of the pixel rectangle to be transferred to...
 OpenGL/glcopytexsubimage2d(3) -- copy a two-dimensional texture subimage
    target Specifies the target texture. Must be GL_TEXTURE_2D. level Specifies the level-of-detail number. Level 0 is the base image level. Level n is the nth mipmap reduction image. xoffset Specifies a texel offset in the x direction within the texture array. yoffset Specifies a texel offset in the y direction within the texture array. x, y Specify the window coordinates of the lower left corner of the rectangular region of pixels to be copied. width Specifies the width of the texture subimage. he...
 OpenGL/glcopytexsubimage2dext(3) -- copy pixels into a 2D texture subimage
    target The target texture. Must be GL_TEXTURE_2D or GL_DETAIL_TEXTURE_2D_SGIS. level The level-of-detail number. Level 0 is the base image level. Level n is the nth mipmap reduction image. xoffset A texel offset in the x direction within the texture array. yoffset A texel offset in the y direction within the texture array. x The x coordinate of the lower-left corner of the pixel rectangle to be transferred to the texture array. y The y coordinate of the lower-left corner of the pixel rectangle t...
 OpenGL/glcopytexsubimage3d(3) -- copy a three-dimensional texture subimage
    target Specifies the target texture. Must be GL_TEXTURE_3D level Specifies the level-of-detail number. Level 0 is the base image level. Level n is the nth mipmap reduction image. xoffset Specifies a texel offset in the x direction within the texture array. yoffset Specifies a texel offset in the y direction within the texture array. zoffset Specifies a texel offset in the z direction within the texture array. x, y Specify the window coordinates of the lower left corner of the rectangular region ...
 OpenGL/glcopytexsubimage3dext(3) -- copy pixels into a 3D texture subimage
    target The target texture. Must be GL_TEXTURE_3D_EXT level The level-of-detail number. Level 0 is the base image level. Level n is the nth mipmap reduction image. xoffset A texel offset in the x direction within the texture array. yoffset A texel offset in the y direction within the texture array. zoffset A texel offset in the z direction within the texture array. x The x coordinate of the lower-left corner of the pixel rectangle to be transferred to the texture array. y The y coordinate of the ...
 OpenGL-GLC/glcremovecatalog(3) -- remove a catalog from the catalog list
    inIndex Specifies the string to remove from the catalog list GLC_CATALOG_LIST.
 OpenGL-GLC/glcrenderchar(3) -- render a character
    inCode Specifies the character to render.
 OpenGL-GLC/glcrendercountedstring(3) -- render a string of a specified number of characters
    inCount Specifies the number of elements in the string to be rendered. inString Specifies the array of characters from which to render inCount elements.
 OpenGL-GLC/glcrenderstring(3) -- render a string
    inString Specifies a zero-terminated string of characters.
 OpenGL-GLC/glcrenderstyle(3) -- assign a value to the variable GLC_RENDER_STYLE
    inStyle Specifies the value to assign to the variable GLC_RENDER_STYLE.
 OpenGL-GLC/glcreplacementcode(3) -- assign a value to GLC_REPLACEMENT_CODE
    inCode Specifies an integer to assign to GLC_REPLACEMENT_CODE.
 OpenGL-GLC/glcresolution(3) -- assign a value to GLC_RESOLUTION
    inVal Specifies a floating point number to be used as resolution.
 OpenGL-GLC/glcrotate(3) -- multiply GLC_BITMAP_MATRIX by a rotation matrix
    inAngle Specifies the angle of rotation around the Z axis, in degrees.
 OpenGL-GLC/glcscale(3) -- multiply GLC_BITMAP_MATRIX with a general scaling matrix
    inX Specifies the scale factor along the x axis. inY Specifies the scale factor along the y axis.
 OpenGL-GLC/glcstringtype(3) -- assign a value to GLC_STRING_TYPE
    inStringType Value to assign to GLC_STRING_TYPE.
 OpenGL/glcullface(3) -- specify whether front- or back-facing facets can be culled
    mode Specifies whether front- or back-facing facets are candidates for culling. Symbolic constants GL_FRONT, GL_BACK, and GL_FRONT_AND_BACK are accepted. The initial value is GL_BACK.
 OpenGL/gldeleteasyncmarkerssgix(3) -- delete markers for tracking asynchronous commands
    marker Specifies the first marker value to delete. range Specifies the number of contiguous marker values to delete.
 OpenGL/gldeletelists(3) -- delete a contiguous group of display lists
    list Specifies the integer name of the first display list to delete. range Specifies the number of display lists to delete.
 OpenGL/gldeletetextures(3) -- delete named textures
    n Specifies the number of textures to be deleted. textures Specifies an array of textures to be deleted.
 OpenGL/gldeletetexturesext(3) -- delete named textures
    n The number of textures to be deleted. textures An array in which each element is the name of a texture to be deleted.
 OpenGL/gldepthfunc(3) -- specify the value used for depth buffer comparisons
    func Specifies the depth comparison function. Symbolic constants GL_NEVER, GL_LESS, GL_EQUAL, GL_LEQUAL, GL_GREATER, GL_NOTEQUAL, GL_GEQUAL, and GL_ALWAYS are accepted. The initial value is GL_LESS.
 OpenGL/gldepthmask(3) -- enable or disable writing into the depth buffer
    flag Specifies whether the depth buffer is enabled for writing. If flag is GL_FALSE, depth buffer writing is disabled. Otherwise, it is enabled. Initially, depth buffer writing is enabled.
 OpenGL/gldepthrange(3) -- specify mapping of depth values from normalized device coordinates to window coordinates
    near Specifies the mapping of the near clipping plane to window coordinates. The initial value is 0. far Specifies the mapping of the far clipping plane to window coordinates. The initial value is 1.
 OpenGL/gldetailtexfuncsgis(3) -- specify detail texture scaling function
    target The target to which the scaling function will be applied. Must be GL_TEXTURE_2D. n The number of scaling function samples in points. points An array of scaling function samples, each of which is an (LOD, function-value) pair.
 OpenGL/gldrawarrays(3) -- render primitives from array data
    mode Specifies what kind of primitives to render. Symbolic constants GL_POINTS, GL_LINE_STRIP, GL_LINE_LOOP, GL_LINES, GL_TRIANGLE_STRIP, GL_TRIANGLE_FAN, GL_TRIANGLES, GL_QUAD_STRIP, GL_QUADS, and GL_POLYGON are accepted. first Specifies the starting index in the enabled arrays. count Specifies the number of indices to be rendered.
 OpenGL/gldrawarraysext(3) -- render primitives from array data
    mode Specifies what kind of primitives to render. Symbolic constants GL_POINTS, GL_LINE_STRIP, GL_LINE_LOOP, GL_LINES, GL_TRIANGLE_STRIP, GL_TRIANGLE_FAN, GL_TRIANGLES, GL_QUAD_STRIP, GL_QUADS, and GL_POLYGON are accepted. first Specifies the starting index in the enabled arrays. count Specifies the number of indices which should be rendered.
 OpenGL/gldrawbuffer(3) -- specify which color buffers are to be drawn into
    mode Specifies up to four color buffers to be drawn into. Symbolic constants GL_NONE, GL_FRONT_LEFT, GL_FRONT_RIGHT, GL_BACK_LEFT, GL_BACK_RIGHT, GL_FRONT, GL_BACK, GL_LEFT, GL_RIGHT, GL_FRONT_AND_BACK, and GL_AUXi, where i is between 0 and ``GL_AUX_BUFFERS'' -1, are accepted (GL_AUX_BUFFERS is not the upper limit; use glGet to query the number of available aux buffers.) The initial value is GL_FRONT for single-buffered contexts, and GL_BACK for double-buffered contexts....
 OpenGL/gldrawelements(3) -- render primitives from array data
    mode Specifies what kind of primitives to render. Symbolic constants GL_POINTS, GL_LINE_STRIP, GL_LINE_LOOP, GL_LINES, GL_TRIANGLE_STRIP, GL_TRIANGLE_FAN, GL_TRIANGLES, GL_QUAD_STRIP, GL_QUADS, and GL_POLYGON are accepted. count Specifies the number of elements to be rendered. type Specifies the type of the values in indices. Must be one of GL_UNSIGNED_BYTE, GL_UNSIGNED_SHORT, or GL_UNSIGNED_INT. indices Specifies a pointer to the location where the indices are stored....
 OpenGL/gldrawpixels(3) -- write a block of pixels to the frame buffer
    width, height Specify the dimensions of the pixel rectangle to be written into the frame buffer. format Specifies the format of the pixel data. Symbolic constants GL_COLOR_INDEX, GL_STENCIL_INDEX, GL_DEPTH_COMPONENT, GL_RGB, GL_BGR, GL_RGBA, GL_BGRA, GL_ABGR_EXT, GL_RED, GL_GREEN, GL_BLUE, GL_ALPHA, GL_LUMINANCE, and GL_LUMINANCE_ALPHA are accepted. type Specifies the data type for pixels. Symbolic constants GL_UNSIGNED_BYTE, GL_BYTE, GL_BITMAP, GL_UNSIGNED_SHORT, GL_SHORT, GL_UNSIGNED_INT, GL_I...
 OpenGL/gldrawrangeelements(3) -- render primitives from array data
    mode Specifies what kind of primitives to render. Symbolic constants GL_POINTS, GL_LINE_STRIP, GL_LINE_LOOP, GL_LINES, GL_TRIANGLE_STRIP, GL_TRIANGLE_FAN, GL_TRIANGLES, GL_QUAD_STRIP, GL_QUADS, and GL_POLYGON are accepted. start Specifies the minimum array index contained in indices. end Specifies the maximum array index contained in indices. count Specifies the number of elements to be rendered. type Specifies the type of the values in count. Must be one of GL_UNSIGNED_BYTE, GL_UNSIGNED_SHORT, ...
 OpenGL/gledgeflag(3) -- flag edges as either boundary or nonboundary
    flag Specifies the current edge flag value, either GL_TRUE or GL_FALSE. The initial value is GL_TRUE.
 OpenGL/gledgeflagpointer(3) -- define an array of edge flags
    stride Specifies the byte offset between consecutive edge flags. If stride is 0 (the initial value), the edge flags are understood to be tightly packed in the array. The initial value is 0. pointer Specifies a pointer to the first edge flag in the array. The initial value is zero.
 OpenGL/gledgeflagpointerext(3) -- define an array of edge flags
    stride Specifies the byte offset between consecutive edge flags. If stride is zero the edge flags are understood to be tightly packed in the array. count Specifies the number of edge flags, counting from the first, that are static. pointer Specifies a pointer to the first edge flag in the array.
 OpenGL/glenable(3) -- enable or disable server-side GL capabilities
    cap Specifies a symbolic constant indicating a GL capability.
 OpenGL/glenableclientstate(3) -- enable or disable client-side capability
    array Specifies the capability to enable. Symbolic constants GL_COLOR_ARRAY, GL_EDGE_FLAG_ARRAY, GL_INDEX_ARRAY, GL_NORMAL_ARRAY, GL_TEXTURE_COORD_ARRAY, and GL_VERTEX_ARRAY are accepted.
 OpenGL/glevalcoord(3) -- enabled one- and two-dimensional maps
    u Specifies a value that is the domain coordinate u to the basis function defined in a previous glMap1 or glMap2 command. v Specifies a value that is the domain coordinate v to the basis function defined in a previous glMap2 command. This argument is not present in a glEvalCoord1 command.
 OpenGL/glevalmesh(3) -- compute a one- or two-dimensional grid of points or lines
    mode In glEvalMesh1, specifies whether to compute a one-dimensional mesh of points or lines. Symbolic constants GL_POINT and GL_LINE are accepted. i1, i2 Specify the first and last integer values for grid domain variable i.
 OpenGL/glevalpoint(3) -- generate and evaluate a single point in a mesh
    i Specifies the integer value for grid domain variable i. j Specifies the integer value for grid domain variable j (glEvalPoint2 only).
 OpenGL/glfeedbackbuffer(3) -- controls feedback mode
    size Specifies the maximum number of values that can be written into buffer. type Specifies a symbolic constant that describes the information that will be returned for each vertex. GL_2D, GL_3D, GL_3D_COLOR, GL_3D_COLOR_TEXTURE, and GL_4D_COLOR_TEXTURE are accepted. buffer Returns the feedback data.
 OpenGL/glfinish(3) -- block until all GL execution is complete
    glFinish does not return until the effects of all previously called GL commands are complete. Such effects include all changes to GL state, all changes to connection state, and all changes to the frame buffer contents. Such effects also include asynchronous GL commands, if the SGIX_async extension is implemented.
 OpenGL/glfinishasyncsgix(3) -- wait for completion of an asynchronous command
    markerp Returns a marker for a completed asynchronous command.
 OpenGL/glflush(3) -- force execution of GL commands in finite time
    Different GL implementations buffer commands in several different locations, including network buffers and the graphics accelerator itself. glFlush empties all of these buffers, causing all issued commands to be executed as quickly as they are accepted by the actual rendering engine. Though this execution may not be completed in any particular time period, it does complete in finite time. Because any GL program might be executed over a network, or on an accelerator that buffers commands, all pro...
 OpenGL/glflushrastersgix(3) -- complete rasterization of previous GL commands
    Different GL implementations buffer commands in several different locations, including network buffers and the graphics accelerator itself. glFlushRasterSGIX causes all GL commands that preceed glFlushRasterSGIX to complete rasterization before the GL commands that follow begin rasterization. This is essential for some types of performance measurement; see glInstrumentsBufferSGIX. The point in the GL machine that defines the start of rasterization is implementation dependent....
 OpenGL/glfog(3) -- specify fog parameters
    pname Specifies a single-valued fog parameter. GL_FOG_MODE, GL_FOG_DENSITY, GL_FOG_START, GL_FOG_END, and GL_FOG_INDEX are accepted. param Specifies the value that pname will be set to.
 OpenGL/glfogfuncsgis(3) -- custom fog blending function
    n Specifies the number of control points in the custom fog blending function. The initial value is 1. points Specifies an array of control points. Each control point consists of two floating-point values. The first is an eye-space distance, and the second is a fog blending factor in the range [0.0,1.0]. Blending factor 0.0 indicates full fog, and 1.0 indicates no fog. The initial value is (0.0,1.0) (no fog)....
 OpenGL/glfragmentcolormaterial(3) -- cause a fragment material color to track the current fragment color
    face Specifies whether front, back, or both front and back fragment material parameters should track the current fragment color. Accepted values are GL_FRONT, GL_BACK, and GL_FRONT_AND_BACK. The initial value is GL_FRONT_AND_BACK. mode Specifies which of several fragment material parameters track the current fragment color. Accepted values are GL_EMISSION, GL_AMBIENT, GL_DIFFUSE, GL_SPECULAR, and GL_AMBIENT_AND_DIFFUSE. The initial value is GL_AMBIENT_AND_DIFFUSE....
 OpenGL/glfragmentlight(3) -- set fragment light source parameters
    light Specifies a fragment light. The number of fragment lights depends on the implementation. They are identified by names of the form GL_FRAGMENT_LIGHTi_SGIX where 0 < i < GL_MAX_FRAGMENT_LIGHTS_SGIX. pname Specifies a single-valued fragment light source parameter for light. GL_SPOT_EXPONENT, GL_SPOT_CUTOFF, GL_CONSTANT_ATTENUATION, GL_LINEAR_ATTENUATION, and GL_QUADRATIC_ATTENUATION are accepted. param Specifies the value that parameter pname of fragment light source light will be set to....
 OpenGL/glfragmentlightmodel(3) -- set the lighting model parameters
    pname Specifies a single-valued lighting model parameter. GL_FRAGMENT_LIGHT_MODEL_LOCAL_VIEWER_SGIX, GL_FRAGMENT_LIGHT_MODEL_NORMAL_INTERPOLATION_SGIX, and GL_FRAGMENT_LIGHT_MODEL_TWO_SIDE_SGIX are accepted. param Specifies the value that param will be set to.
 OpenGL/glfragmentmaterial(3) -- specify fragment material parameters for the fragment lighting model
    face Specifies which face or faces are being updated. Must be one of GL_FRONT, GL_BACK, or GL_FRONT_AND_BACK. pname Specifies the single-valued fragment material parameter of the face or faces that is being updated. Must be GL_SHININESS. param Specifies the value that parameter GL_SHININESS will be set to.
 OpenGL/glfrontface(3) -- define front- and back-facing polygons
    mode Specifies the orientation of front-facing polygons. GL_CW and GL_CCW are accepted. The initial value is GL_CCW.
 OpenGL/glfrustum(3) -- multiply the current matrix by a perspective matrix
    left, right Specify the coordinates for the left and right vertical clipping planes. bottom, top Specify the coordinates for the bottom and top horizontal clipping planes. near, far Specify the distances to the near and far depth clipping planes. Both distances must be positive.
 OpenGL/glgenasyncmarkerssgix(3) -- reserve markers for tracking asynchronous commands
    range Specifies the number of contiguous marker values to reserve.
 OpenGL/glgenlists(3) -- generate a contiguous set of empty display lists
    range Specifies the number of contiguous empty display lists to be generated.
 OpenGL/glgentextures(3) -- generate texture names
    n Specifies the number of texture names to be generated. textures Specifies an array in which the generated texture names are stored.
 OpenGL/glgentexturesext(3) -- generate texture names
    n The number of texture names to be generated. textures An array in which the generated texture names are stored.
 OpenGL/glget(3) -- return the value or values of a selected parameter
    void glGetDoublev( GLenum pname, GLdouble *params )
 OpenGL/glgetclipplane(3) -- return the coefficients of the specified clipping plane
    plane Specifies a clipping plane. The number of clipping planes depends on the implementation, but at least six clipping planes are supported. They are identified by symbolic names of the form GL_CLIP_PLANEi where 0 < i < GL_MAX_CLIP_PLANES. equation Returns four double-precision values that are the coefficients of the plane equation of plane in eye coordinates. The initial value is (0, 0, 0, 0).
 OpenGL/glgetcolortable(3) -- retrieve contents of a color lookup table
    target Must be GL_COLOR_TABLE, GL_POST_CONVOLUTION_COLOR_TABLE, or GL_POST_COLOR_MATRIX_COLOR_TABLE. format The format of the pixel data in table. The possible values are GL_RED, GL_GREEN, GL_BLUE, GL_ALPHA, GL_LUMINANCE, GL_LUMINANCE_ALPHA, GL_RGB, GL_BGR, GL_RGBA, GL_BGRA, and GL_ABGR_EXT. type The type of the pixel data in table. Symbolic constants GL_UNSIGNED_BYTE, GL_BYTE, GL_BITMAP, GL_UNSIGNED_SHORT, GL_SHORT, GL_UNSIGNED_INT, GL_INT, GL_FLOAT, GL_UNSIGNED_BYTE_3_3_2, GL_UNSIGNED_BYTE_2_3...
 OpenGL/glgetcolortableparameter(3) -- get color lookup table parameters
    target The target color table. Must be GL_COLOR_TABLE, GL_POST_CONVOLUTION_COLOR_TABLE, GL_POST_COLOR_MATRIX_COLOR_TABLE, GL_PROXY_COLOR_TABLE, GL_PROXY_POST_CONVOLUTION_COLOR_TABLE, GL_PROXY_POST_COLOR_MATRIX_COLOR_TABLE. pname The symbolic name of a color lookup table parameter. Must be one of GL_COLOR_TABLE_BIAS, GL_COLOR_TABLE_SCALE, GL_COLOR_TABLE_FORMAT, GL_COLOR_TABLE_WIDTH, GL_COLOR_TABLE_RED_SIZE, GL_COLOR_TABLE_GREEN_SIZE, GL_COLOR_TABLE_BLUE_SIZE, GL_COLOR_TABLE_ALPHA_SIZE, GL_COLOR_T...
 OpenGL/glgetcolortableparametersgi(3) -- get color lookup table parameters
    target The target color table. Must be GL_TEXTURE_COLOR_TABLE_SGI, GL_COLOR_TABLE_SGI, GL_POST_CONVOLUTION_COLOR_TABLE_SGI, GL_POST_COLOR_MATRIX_COLOR_TABLE_SGI, GL_PROXY_TEXTURE_COLOR_TABLE_SGI, GL_PROXY_COLOR_TABLE_SGI, GL_PROXY_POST_CONVOLUTION_COLOR_TABLE_SGI, GL_PROXY_POST_COLOR_MATRIX_COLOR_TABLE_SGI. pname The symbolic name of a color lookup table parameter. Must be one of GL_COLOR_TABLE_BIAS_SGI, GL_COLOR_TABLE_SCALE_SGI, GL_COLOR_TABLE_FORMAT_SGI, GL_COLOR_TABLE_WIDTH_SGI, GL_COLOR_TABL...
 OpenGL/glgetcolortablesgi(3) -- retrieve contents of a color lookup table
    target Must be GL_TEXTURE_COLOR_TABLE_SGI, GL_COLOR_TABLE_SGI, GL_POST_CONVOLUTION_COLOR_TABLE_SGI, or GL_POST_COLOR_MATRIX_COLOR_TABLE_SGI. format The format of the pixel data in table. The possible values are GL_RED, GL_GREEN, GL_BLUE, GL_ALPHA, GL_LUMINANCE, GL_LUMINANCE_ALPHA, GL_RGB, GL_RGBA, and GL_ABGR_EXT. type The type of the pixel data in table. The allowable values are GL_UNSIGNED_BYTE, GL_BYTE, GL_UNSIGNED_SHORT, GL_SHORT, GL_UNSIGNED_INT, GL_INT, GL_FLOAT, GL_UNSIGNED_BYTE_3_3_2_EXT...
 OpenGL/glgetconvolutionfilter(3) -- get current 1D or 2D convolution filter kernel
    target The filter to be retrieved. Must be one of GL_CONVOLUTION_1D or GL_CONVOLUTION_2D. format Format of the output image. Must be one of GL_RED, GL_GREEN, GL_BLUE, GL_ALPHA, GL_RGB, GL_BGR, GL_RGBA, GL_BGRA, GL_ABGR_EXT, GL_LUMINANCE, or GL_LUMINANCE_ALPHA. type Data type of components in the output image. Symbolic constants GL_UNSIGNED_BYTE, GL_BYTE, GL_BITMAP, GL_UNSIGNED_SHORT, GL_SHORT, GL_UNSIGNED_INT, GL_INT, GL_FLOAT, GL_UNSIGNED_BYTE_3_3_2, GL_UNSIGNED_BYTE_2_3_3_REV, GL_UNSIGNED_SHOR...
 OpenGL/glgetconvolutionfilterext(3) -- get current 1D or 2D convolution filter kernel
    target The filter to be retrieved. Must be one of GL_CONVOLUTION_1D_EXT or GL_CONVOLUTION_2D_EXT. format Format of the output image. Must be one of GL_RED, GL_GREEN, GL_BLUE, GL_ALPHA, GL_RGB, GL_RGBA, GL_ABGR_EXT, GL_LUMINANCE, or GL_LUMINANCE_ALPHA. type Data type of components in the output image. Must be one of GL_UNSIGNED_BYTE, GL_BYTE, GL_UNSIGNED_SHORT, GL_SHORT, GL_UNSIGNED_INT, GL_INT, GL_FLOAT, GL_UNSIGNED_BYTE_3_3_2_EXT, GL_UNSIGNED_SHORT_4_4_4_4_EXT, GL_UNSIGNED_SHORT_5_5_5_1_EXT, GL...
 OpenGL/glgetconvolutionparameter(3) -- get convolution parameters
    target The filter whose parameters are to be retrieved. Must be one of GL_CONVOLUTION_1D, GL_CONVOLUTION_2D, or GL_SEPARABLE_2D. pname The parameter to be retrieved. Must be one of GL_CONVOLUTION_BORDER_MODE, GL_CONVOLUTION_BORDER_COLOR, GL_CONVOLUTION_FILTER_SCALE, GL_CONVOLUTION_FILTER_BIAS, GL_CONVOLUTION_FORMAT, GL_CONVOLUTION_WIDTH, GL_CONVOLUTION_HEIGHT, GL_MAX_CONVOLUTION_WIDTH, or GL_MAX_CONVOLUTION_HEIGHT. params Pointer to storage for the parameters to be retrieved....
 OpenGL/glgetconvolutionparameterext(3) -- get convolution parameters
    target The filter whose parameters are to be retrieved. Must be one of GL_CONVOLUTION_1D_EXT, GL_CONVOLUTION_2D_EXT, or GL_SEPARABLE_2D_EXT. pname The parameter to be retrieved. Must be one of GL_CONVOLUTION_BORDER_MODE_EXT, GL_CONVOLUTION_FILTER_SCALE_EXT, GL_CONVOLUTION_FILTER_BIAS_EXT, GL_CONVOLUTION_FORMAT_EXT, GL_CONVOLUTION_WIDTH_EXT, GL_CONVOLUTION_HEIGHT_EXT, GL_MAX_CONVOLUTION_WIDTH_EXT, or GL_MAX_CONVOLUTION_HEIGHT_EXT. params Pointer to storage for the parameters to be retrieved....
 OpenGL/glgetdetailtexfuncsgis(3) -- get detail texture scaling function
    target The texture whose detail texture scaling function is to be retrieved. Must be GL_TEXTURE_2D. points A pointer to a floating-point array which receives the retrieved detail texture function. Each pair of elements in the array receives an LOD (level-of-detail) value and a scaling function value.
 OpenGL/glgeterror(3) -- return error information
    glGetError returns the value of the error flag. Each detectable error is assigned a numeric code and symbolic name. When an error occurs, the error flag is set to the appropriate error code value. No other errors are recorded until glGetError is called, the error code is returned, and the flag is reset to GL_NO_ERROR. If a call to glGetError returns GL_NO_ERROR, there has been no detectable error since the last call to glGetError, or since the GL was initialized. To allow for distributed impleme...
 OpenGL/glgetfragmentlight(3) -- return fragment light source parameter values
    light Specifies a fragment light source. The number of possible fragment lights depends on the implementation. They are identified by symbolic names of the form GL_FRAGMENT_LIGHTi_SGIX where 0 < i < GL_MAX_FRAGMENT_LIGHTS_SGIX. pname Specifies a fragment light source parameter for light. Accepted symbolic names are GL_AMBIENT, GL_DIFFUSE, GL_SPECULAR, GL_POSITION, GL_SPOT_DIRECTION, GL_SPOT_EXPONENT, GL_SPOT_CUTOFF, GL_CONSTANT_ATTENUATION, GL_LINEAR_ATTENUATION, and GL_QUADRATIC_ATTENUATION. pa...
 OpenGL/glgetfragmentmaterial(3) -- return fragment material parameters
    face Specifies which of the two fragment materials is being queried. GL_FRONT or GL_BACK are accepted, representing the front and back fragment materials, respectively. pname Specifies the fragment material parameter to return. GL_AMBIENT, GL_DIFFUSE, GL_SPECULAR, GL_EMISSION, GL_SHININESS, and GL_COLOR_INDEXES are accepted. params Returns the requested data.
 OpenGL/glgethistogram(3) -- get histogram table
    target Must be GL_HISTOGRAM. reset If GL_TRUE, each component counter that is actually returned is reset to zero. (Other counters are unaffected.) If GL_FALSE, none of the counters in the histogram table is modified. format The format of values to be returned in values. Must be one of GL_RED, GL_GREEN, GL_BLUE, GL_ALPHA, GL_RGB, GL_BGR, GL_RGBA, GL_BGRA, GL_ABGR_EXT, GL_LUMINANCE, or GL_LUMINANCE_ALPHA. type The type of values to be returned in values. Symbolic constants GL_UNSIGNED_BYTE, GL_BYT...
 OpenGL/glgethistogramext(3) -- get histogram table
    target Must be GL_HISTOGRAM_EXT. reset If GL_TRUE, each component counter that is actually returned is reset to zero. (Other counters are unaffected.) If GL_FALSE, none of the counters in the histogram table is modified. format The format of values to be returned in values. Must be one of GL_RED, GL_GREEN, GL_BLUE, GL_ALPHA, GL_RGB, GL_RGBA, GL_ABGR_EXT, GL_LUMINANCE, or GL_LUMINANCE_ALPHA. type The type of values to be returned in values. Must be one of GL_UNSIGNED_BYTE, GL_BYTE, GL_UNSIGNED_SH...
 OpenGL/glgethistogramparameter(3) -- get histogram parameters
    target Must be one of GL_HISTOGRAM or GL_PROXY_HISTOGRAM. pname The name of the parameter to be retrieved. Must be one of GL_HISTOGRAM_WIDTH, GL_HISTOGRAM_FORMAT, GL_HISTOGRAM_RED_SIZE, GL_HISTOGRAM_GREEN_SIZE, GL_HISTOGRAM_BLUE_SIZE, GL_HISTOGRAM_ALPHA_SIZE, GL_HISTOGRAM_LUMINANCE_SIZE, or GL_HISTOGRAM_SINK. params Pointer to storage for the returned values.
 OpenGL/glgethistogramparameterext(3) -- get histogram parameters
    target Must be one of GL_HISTOGRAM_EXT or GL_PROXY_HISTOGRAM_EXT. pname The name of the parameter to be retrieved. Must be one of GL_HISTOGRAM_WIDTH_EXT, GL_HISTOGRAM_FORMAT_EXT, GL_HISTOGRAM_RED_SIZE_EXT, GL_HISTOGRAM_GREEN_SIZE_EXT, GL_HISTOGRAM_BLUE_SIZE_EXT, GL_HISTOGRAM_ALPHA_SIZE_EXT, GL_HISTOGRAM_LUMINANCE_SIZE_EXT, or GL_HISTOGRAM_SINK_EXT. params Pointer to storage for the returned values....
 OpenGL/glgetlight(3) -- return light source parameter values
    light Specifies a light source. The number of possible lights depends on the implementation, but at least eight lights are supported. They are identified by symbolic names of the form GL_LIGHTi where 0 < i < GL_MAX_LIGHTS. pname Specifies a light source parameter for light. Accepted symbolic names are GL_AMBIENT, GL_DIFFUSE, GL_SPECULAR, GL_POSITION, GL_SPOT_DIRECTION, GL_SPOT_EXPONENT, GL_SPOT_CUTOFF, GL_CONSTANT_ATTENUATION, GL_LINEAR_ATTENUATION, and GL_QUADRATIC_ATTENUATION. params Returns t...
 OpenGL/glgetlistparametersgix(3) -- retrieve display list parameters
    list Specifies the integer name of the display list whose parameters are to be retrieved. pname Specifies the symbolic name for display list parameter. Must be GL_LIST_PRIORITY_SGIX. params Specifies a pointer to an array in which parameter values will be stored. If pname is GL_LIST_PRIORITY_SGIX, then the array must have at least one element.
 OpenGL/glgetmap(3) -- return evaluator parameters
    target Specifies the symbolic name of a map. Accepted values are GL_MAP1_COLOR_4, GL_MAP1_INDEX, GL_MAP1_NORMAL, GL_MAP1_TEXTURE_COORD_1, GL_MAP1_TEXTURE_COORD_2, GL_MAP1_TEXTURE_COORD_3, GL_MAP1_TEXTURE_COORD_4, GL_MAP1_VERTEX_3, GL_MAP1_VERTEX_4, GL_MAP2_COLOR_4, GL_MAP2_INDEX, GL_MAP2_NORMAL, GL_MAP2_TEXTURE_COORD_1, GL_MAP2_TEXTURE_COORD_2, GL_MAP2_TEXTURE_COORD_3, GL_MAP2_TEXTURE_COORD_4, GL_MAP2_VERTEX_3, and GL_MAP2_VERTEX_4. query Specifies which parameter to return. Symbolic names GL_CO...
 OpenGL/glgetmaterial(3) -- return material parameters
    face Specifies which of the two materials is being queried. GL_FRONT or GL_BACK are accepted, representing the front and back materials, respectively. pname Specifies the material parameter to return. GL_AMBIENT, GL_DIFFUSE, GL_SPECULAR, GL_EMISSION, GL_SHININESS, and GL_COLOR_INDEXES are accepted. params Returns the requested data.
 OpenGL/glgetminmax(3) -- get minimum and maximum pixel values
    target Must be GL_MINMAX. reset If GL_TRUE, all entries in the minmax table that are actually returned are reset to their initial values. (Other entries are unaltered.) If GL_FALSE, the minmax table is unaltered. format The format of the data to be returned in values. Must be one of GL_RED, GL_GREEN, GL_BLUE, GL_ALPHA, GL_RGB, GL_BGR, GL_RGBA, GL_BGRA, GL_ABGR_EXT, GL_LUMINANCE, or GL_LUMINANCE_ALPHA. type The type of the data to be returned in values. Symbolic constants GL_UNSIGNED_BYTE, GL_BYT...
 OpenGL/glgetminmaxext(3) -- get minimum and maximum pixel values
    target Must be GL_MINMAX_EXT. reset If GL_TRUE, all entries in the minmax table that are actually returned are reset to their initial values. (Other entries are unaltered.) If GL_FALSE, the minmax table is unaltered. format The format of the data to be returned in values. Must be one of GL_RED, GL_GREEN, GL_BLUE, GL_ALPHA, GL_RGB, GL_RGBA, GL_ABGR_EXT, GL_LUMINANCE, or GL_LUMINANCE_ALPHA. type The type of the data to be returned in values. Must be one of GL_UNSIGNED_BYTE, GL_BYTE, GL_UNSIGNED_SH...
 OpenGL/glgetminmaxparameter(3) -- get minmax parameters
    target Must be GL_MINMAX. pname The parameter to be retrieved. Must be one of GL_MINMAX_FORMAT or GL_MINMAX_SINK. params A pointer to storage for the retrieved parameters.
 OpenGL/glgetminmaxparameterext(3) -- get minmax parameters
    target Must be GL_MINMAX_EXT. pname The parameter to be retrieved. Must be one of GL_MINMAX_FORMAT_EXT or GL_MINMAX_SINK_EXT. params A pointer to storage for the retrieved parameters.
 OpenGL/glgetpixelmap(3) -- return the specified pixel map
    map Specifies the name of the pixel map to return. Accepted values are GL_PIXEL_MAP_I_TO_I, GL_PIXEL_MAP_S_TO_S, GL_PIXEL_MAP_I_TO_R, GL_PIXEL_MAP_I_TO_G, GL_PIXEL_MAP_I_TO_B, GL_PIXEL_MAP_I_TO_A, GL_PIXEL_MAP_R_TO_R, GL_PIXEL_MAP_G_TO_G, GL_PIXEL_MAP_B_TO_B, and GL_PIXEL_MAP_A_TO_A. values Returns the pixel map contents.
 OpenGL/glgetpixeltexgenparameter(3) -- return pixel texture parameter values
    pname Specifies the symbolic name of the parameter to be queried. Accepted values are GL_PIXEL_FRAGMENT_RGB_SOURCE_SGIS and GL_PIXEL_FRAGMENT_ALPHA_SOURCE_SGIS. params Returns the pixel texture parameters.
 OpenGL/glgetpointerv(3) -- return the address of the specified pointer
    pname Specifies the array or buffer pointer to be returned. Symbolic constants GL_COLOR_ARRAY_POINTER, GL_EDGE_FLAG_ARRAY_POINTER, GL_FEEDBACK_BUFFER_POINTER, GL_INDEX_ARRAY_POINTER, GL_NORMAL_ARRAY_POINTER, GL_TEXTURE_COORD_ARRAY_POINTER, GL_SELECTION_BUFFER_POINTER, and GL_VERTEX_ARRAY_POINTER are accepted. params Returns the pointer value specified by pname.
 OpenGL/glgetpointervext(3) -- return the address of a buffer or vertex array
    pname Specifies the pointer to be returned. Symbolic constants GL_VERTEX_ARRAY_POINTER_EXT, GL_NORMAL_ARRAY_POINTER_EXT, GL_COLOR_ARRAY_POINTER_EXT, GL_INDEX_ARRAY_POINTER_EXT, GL_TEXTURE_COORD_ARRAY_POINTER_EXT, GL_EDGE_FLAG_ARRAY_POINTER_EXT, and GL_INSTRUMENT_BUFFER_POINTER_SGIX are accepted. params returns the pointer value specified by pname.
 OpenGL/glgetpolygonstipple(3) -- return the polygon stipple pattern
    mask Returns the stipple pattern. The initial value is all 1's.
 OpenGL/glgetseparablefilter(3) -- get separable convolution filter kernel images
    target The separable filter to be retrieved. Must be GL_SEPARABLE_2D. format Format of the output images. Must be one of GL_RED, GL_GREEN, GL_BLUE, GL_ALPHA, GL_RGB, GL_BGR GL_RGBA, GL_BGRA, GL_ABGR_EXT, GL_LUMINANCE, or GL_LUMINANCE_ALPHA. type Data type of components in the output images. Symbolic constants GL_UNSIGNED_BYTE, GL_BYTE, GL_BITMAP, GL_UNSIGNED_SHORT, GL_SHORT, GL_UNSIGNED_INT, GL_INT, GL_FLOAT, GL_UNSIGNED_BYTE_3_3_2, GL_UNSIGNED_BYTE_2_3_3_REV, GL_UNSIGNED_SHORT_5_6_5, GL_UNSIGNE...
 OpenGL/glgetseparablefilterext(3) -- get separable convolution filter kernel images
    target The separable filter to be retrieved. Must be GL_SEPARABLE_2D_EXT. format Format of the output images. Must be one of GL_RED, GL_GREEN, GL_BLUE, GL_ALPHA, GL_RGB, GL_RGBA, GL_ABGR_EXT, GL_LUMINANCE, or GL_LUMINANCE_ALPHA. type Data type of components in the output images. Must be one of GL_UNSIGNED_BYTE, GL_BYTE, GL_UNSIGNED_SHORT, GL_SHORT, GL_UNSIGNED_INT, GL_INT, GL_FLOAT, GL_UNSIGNED_BYTE_3_3_2_EXT, GL_UNSIGNED_SHORT_4_4_4_4_EXT, GL_UNSIGNED_SHORT_5_5_5_1_EXT, GL_UNSIGNED_INT_8_8_8_8_...
 OpenGL/glgetsharpentexfuncsgis(3) -- get sharpen texture scaling function
    target The texture whose sharpen texture scaling function is to be retrieved. Must be GL_TEXTURE_1D, GL_TEXTURE_2D, or GL_TEXTURE_3D_EXT. points A pointer to a floating-point array which receives the retrieved scaling function. Each pair of elements in the array receives an LOD (level-of-detail) value and a scaling function value.
 OpenGL/glgetstring(3) -- return a string describing the current GL connection
    name Specifies a symbolic constant, one of GL_VENDOR, GL_RENDERER, GL_VERSION, or GL_EXTENSIONS.
 OpenGL/glgettexenv(3) -- return texture environment parameters
    target Specifies a texture environment. Must be GL_TEXTURE_ENV. pname Specifies the symbolic name of a texture environment parameter. Accepted values are GL_TEXTURE_ENV_MODE, GL_TEXTURE_ENV_COLOR, and GL_TEXTURE_ENV_BIAS_SGIX. params Returns the requested data.
 OpenGL/glgettexfilterfuncsgis(3) -- return user-defined texture filtering function
    target Specifies the target texture whose filtering function weights are to be returned. Must be GL_TEXTURE_1D or GL_TEXTURE_2D. filter Specifies the filter function whose weights are to be returned. Must be GL_FILTER4_SGIS. weights Specifies an array to receive the floating-point weight values.
 OpenGL/glgettexgen(3) -- return texture coordinate generation parameters
    coord Specifies a texture coordinate. Must be GL_S, GL_T, GL_R, or GL_Q. pname Specifies the symbolic name of the value(s) to be returned. Must be either GL_TEXTURE_GEN_MODE or the name of one of the texture generation plane equations: GL_OBJECT_PLANE or GL_EYE_PLANE. params Returns the requested data.
 OpenGL/glgetteximage(3) -- return a texture image
    target Specifies which texture is to be obtained. GL_TEXTURE_1D, GL_TEXTURE_2D, GL_DETAIL_TEXTURE_2D_SGIS, and GL_TEXTURE_3D are accepted. level Specifies the level-of-detail number of the desired image. Level 0 is the base image level. Level n is the nth mipmap reduction image. format Specifies a pixel format for the returned data. The supported formats are GL_RED, GL_GREEN, GL_BLUE, GL_ALPHA, GL_RGB, GL_BGR, GL_RGBA, GL_BGRA, GL_ABGR_EXT, GL_LUMINANCE, and GL_LUMINANCE_ALPHA. type Specifies a ...
 OpenGL/glgettexlevelparameter(3) -- return texture parameter values for a specific level of detail
    target Specifies the symbolic name of the target texture, either GL_TEXTURE_1D, GL_TEXTURE_2D, GL_TEXTURE_3D, GL_PROXY_TEXTURE_1D, GL_PROXY_TEXTURE_2D, GL_PROXY_TEXTURE_3D, or GL_DETAIL_TEXTURE_2D_SGIS. level Specifies the level-of-detail number of the desired image. Level 0 is the base image level. Level n is the nth mipmap reduction image. pname Specifies the symbolic name of a texture parameter. GL_TEXTURE_WIDTH, GL_TEXTURE_HEIGHT, GL_TEXTURE_DEPTH, GL_TEXTURE_INTERNAL_FORMAT, GL_TEXTURE_BORD...
 OpenGL/glgettexparameter(3) -- return texture parameter values
    target Specifies the symbolic name of the target texture. GL_TEXTURE_1D, GL_TEXTURE_2D, GL_DETAIL_TEXTURE_2D_SGIS, and GL_TEXTURE_3D_EXT are accepted. pname Specifies the symbolic name of a texture parameter. GL_TEXTURE_MAG_FILTER, GL_TEXTURE_MIN_FILTER, GL_TEXTURE_MIN_LOD, GL_TEXTURE_MAX_LOD, GL_TEXTURE_BASE_LEVEL, GL_TEXTURE_MAX_LEVEL, GL_TEXTURE_WRAP_S, GL_TEXTURE_WRAP_T, GL_TEXTURE_WRAP_R, GL_TEXTURE_BORDER_COLOR, GL_DETAIL_TEXTURE_LEVEL_SGIS, GL_DETAIL_TEXTURE_MODE_SGIS, GL_DETAIL_TEXTURE_F...
 OpenGL/glhint(3) -- specify implementation-specific hints
    target Specifies a symbolic constant indicating the behavior to be controlled. GL_CONVOLUTION_HINT_SGIX, GL_SCALEBIAS_HINT_SGIX, GL_FOG_HINT, GL_LINE_SMOOTH_HINT, GL_PERSPECTIVE_CORRECTION_HINT, GL_POINT_SMOOTH_HINT, GL_POLYGON_SMOOTH_HINT, and GL_VERTEX_PRECLIP_HINT_SGIX are accepted. mode Specifies a symbolic constant indicating the desired behavior. GL_FASTEST, GL_NICEST, and GL_DONT_CARE are accepted....
 OpenGL/glhistogram(3) -- define histogram table
    target The histogram whose parameters are to be set. Must be one of GL_HISTOGRAM or GL_PROXY_HISTOGRAM. width The number of entries in the histogram table. Must be a power of 2. internalformat The format of entries in the histogram table. Must be one of GL_ALPHA, GL_ALPHA4, GL_ALPHA8, GL_ALPHA12, GL_ALPHA16, GL_LUMINANCE, GL_LUMINANCE4, GL_LUMINANCE8, GL_LUMINANCE12, GL_LUMINANCE16, GL_LUMINANCE_ALPHA, GL_LUMINANCE4_ALPHA4, GL_LUMINANCE6_ALPHA2, GL_LUMINANCE8_ALPHA8, GL_LUMINANCE12_ALPHA4, GL_LU...
 OpenGL/glhistogramext(3) -- define histogram table
    target The histogram whose parameters are to be set. Must be one of GL_HISTOGRAM_EXT or GL_PROXY_HISTOGRAM_EXT. width The number of entries in the histogram table. Must be a power of 2. internalformat The format of entries in the histogram table. Must be one of GL_ALPHA, GL_ALPHA4_EXT, GL_ALPHA8_EXT, GL_ALPHA12_EXT, GL_ALPHA16_EXT, GL_LUMINANCE, GL_LUMINANCE4_EXT, GL_LUMINANCE8_EXT, GL_LUMINANCE12_EXT, GL_LUMINANCE16_EXT, GL_LUMINANCE_ALPHA, GL_LUMINANCE4_ALPHA4_EXT, GL_LUMINANCE6_ALPHA2_EXT, GL...
 OpenGL/glindex(3) -- set the current color index
    c Specifies the new value for the current color index.
 OpenGL/glindexmask(3) -- control the writing of individual bits in the color index buffers
    mask Specifies a bit mask to enable and disable the writing of individual bits in the color index buffers. Initially, the mask is all 1's.
 OpenGL/glindexpointer(3) -- define an array of color indexes
    type Specifies the data type of each color index in the array. Symbolic constants GL_UNSIGNED_BYTE, GL_SHORT, GL_INT, GL_FLOAT, and GL_DOUBLE are accepted. The initial value is GL_FLOAT. stride Specifies the byte offset between consecutive color indexes. If stride is 0 (the initial value), the color indexes are understood to be tightly packed in the array. The initial value is 0. pointer Specifies a pointer to the first index in the array. The initial value is 0....
 OpenGL/glindexpointerext(3) -- define an array of color indexes
    type Specifies the data type of each color index in the array. Symbolic constants GL_SHORT, GL_INT, GL_FLOAT, or GL_DOUBLE_EXT, are accepted. stride Specifies the byte offset between consecutive color indexes. If stride is zero the color indexes are understood to be tightly packed in the array. count Specifies the number of indexes, counting from the first, that are static. pointer Specifies a pointer to the first index in the array....
 OpenGL/glinitnames(3) -- initialize the name stack
    The name stack is used during selection mode to allow sets of rendering commands to be uniquely identified. It consists of an ordered set of unsigned integers. glInitNames causes the name stack to be initialized to its default empty state. The name stack is always empty while the render mode is not GL_SELECT. Calls to glInitNames while the render mode is not GL_SELECT are ignored.
 OpenGL/glinstrumentssgix(3) -- take measurements from enabled instruments in the GL
    size specifies the number of GLints in buffer buffer specifies a pointer to the buffer for instrument measurement records
 OpenGL/glinterleavedarrays(3) -- simultaneously specify and enable several interleaved arrays
    format Specifies the type of array to enable. Symbolic constants GL_V2F, GL_V3F, GL_C4UB_V2F, GL_C4UB_V3F, GL_C3F_V3F, GL_N3F_V3F, GL_C4F_N3F_V3F, GL_T2F_V3F, GL_T4F_V4F, GL_T2F_C4UB_V3F, GL_T2F_C3F_V3F, GL_T2F_N3F_V3F, GL_T2F_C4F_N3F_V3F, and GL_T4F_C4F_N3F_V4F are accepted. stride Specifies the offset in bytes between each aggregate array element.
 OpenGL/glintro(3) -- Introduction to OpenGL
    SGI has implemented the following extensions to OpenGL. Note that the set of supported extensions varies from machine to machine; see below for more information.
 f90/glio_group(3) -- Defines a group of processes to be associated with a global file.
    UNICOS/mk and IRIX systems
 OpenGL/glisasyncmarkersgix(3) -- determine if a marker is reserved or in use
    marker Specifies a potential value for a reserved or in-use marker.
 OpenGL/glisenabled(3) -- test whether a capability is enabled
    cap Specifies a symbolic constant indicating a GL capability.
 OpenGL/glislist(3) -- determine if a name corresponds to a display-list
    list Specifies a potential display-list name.
 OpenGL/glistexture(3) -- determine if a name corresponds to a texture
    texture Specifies a value that may be the name of a texture.
 OpenGL/glistextureext(3) -- determine if a name corresponds to a texture
    texture A value which might be the name of a texture.
 OpenGL/gllight(3) -- set light source parameters
    light Specifies a light. The number of lights depends on the implementation, but at least eight lights are supported. They are identified by symbolic names of the form GL_LIGHTi where 0 < i < GL_MAX_LIGHTS. pname Specifies a single-valued light source parameter for light. GL_SPOT_EXPONENT, GL_SPOT_CUTOFF, GL_CONSTANT_ATTENUATION, GL_LINEAR_ATTENUATION, and GL_QUADRATIC_ATTENUATION are accepted. param Specifies the value that parameter pname of light source light will be set to....
 OpenGL/gllightenv(3) -- specify fragment lighting environment
    pname Must be GL_LIGHT_ENV_MODE_SGIX param Can be one of three values: GL_REPLACE, GL_MODULATE, or GL_ADD
 OpenGL/gllightmodel(3) -- set the lighting model parameters
    pname Specifies a single-valued lighting model parameter. GL_LIGHT_MODEL_LOCAL_VIEWER, GL_LIGHT_MODEL_COLOR_CONTROL, and GL_LIGHT_MODEL_TWO_SIDE are accepted. param Specifies the value that param will be set to.
 OpenGL/gllinestipple(3) -- specify the line stipple pattern
    factor Specifies a multiplier for each bit in the line stipple pattern. If factor is 3, for example, each bit in the pattern is used three times before the next bit in the pattern is used. factor is clamped to the range [1, 256] and defaults to 1. pattern Specifies a 16-bit integer whose bit pattern determines which fragments of a line will be drawn when the line is rasterized. Bit zero is used first; the default pattern is all 1's....
 OpenGL/gllinewidth(3) -- specify the width of rasterized lines
    width Specifies the width of rasterized lines. The initial value is 1.
 OpenGL/gllistbase(3) -- set the display-list base for glCallLists
    base Specifies an integer offset that will be added to glCallLists offsets to generate display-list names. The initial value is 0.
 OpenGL/gllistparametersgix(3) -- specify display list parameters
    list Specifies the integer name of the display list whose parameters are to be set. pname Specifies the symbolic name for a display list parameter. Must be GL_LIST_PRIORITY_SGIX. param Specifies a single value for the selected display list parameter. If pname is GL_LIST_PRIORITY_SGIX, then the value must be a display list priority in the range [0.0, 1.0].
 OpenGL/glloadidentity(3) -- replace the current matrix with the identity matrix
    glLoadIdentity replaces the current matrix with the identity matrix. It is semantically equivalent to calling glLoadMatrix with the identity matrix ( ) 1 0 0 0 | | | 0 1 0 0 | | | 0 0 1 0 | | ( 0 0 0 1 ) but in some cases it is more efficient.
 OpenGL/glloadmatrix(3) -- replace the current matrix with the specified matrix
    m Specifies a pointer to 16 consecutive values, which are used as the elements of a 4 x 4 column-major matrix.
 OpenGL/glloadname(3) -- load a name onto the name stack
    name Specifies a name that will replace the top value on the name stack.
 OpenGL/gllogicop(3) -- specify a logical pixel operation for color index rendering
    opcode Specifies a symbolic constant that selects a logical operation. The following symbols are accepted: GL_CLEAR, GL_SET, GL_COPY, GL_COPY_INVERTED, GL_NOOP, GL_INVERT, GL_AND, GL_NAND, GL_OR, GL_NOR, GL_XOR, GL_EQUIV, GL_AND_REVERSE, GL_AND_INVERTED, GL_OR_REVERSE, and GL_OR_INVERTED. The initial value is GL_COPY.
 OpenGL/glmap1(3) -- define a one-dimensional evaluator
    target Specifies the kind of values that are generated by the evaluator. Symbolic constants GL_MAP1_VERTEX_3, GL_MAP1_VERTEX_4, GL_MAP1_INDEX, GL_MAP1_COLOR_4, GL_MAP1_NORMAL, GL_MAP1_TEXTURE_COORD_1, GL_MAP1_TEXTURE_COORD_2, GL_MAP1_TEXTURE_COORD_3, and GL_MAP1_TEXTURE_COORD_4 are accepted. u1, u2 Specify a linear mapping of u, as presented to glEvalCoord1, to ^, the variable that is evaluated by the equations specified by this command. stride Specifies the number of floats or doubles between t...
 OpenGL/glmap2(3) -- define a two-dimensional evaluator
    target Specifies the kind of values that are generated by the evaluator. Symbolic constants GL_MAP2_VERTEX_3, GL_MAP2_VERTEX_4, GL_MAP2_INDEX, GL_MAP2_COLOR_4, GL_MAP2_NORMAL, GL_MAP2_TEXTURE_COORD_1, GL_MAP2_TEXTURE_COORD_2, GL_MAP2_TEXTURE_COORD_3, and GL_MAP2_TEXTURE_COORD_4 are accepted. u1, u2 Specify a linear mapping of u, as presented to glEvalCoord2, to ^, one of the two variables that are evaluated by the equations specified by this command. Initially, u1 is 0 and u2 is 1. ustride Speci...
 OpenGL/glmapgrid(3) -- two-dimensional mesh
    un Specifies the number of partitions in the grid range interval [u1, u2]. Must be positive. u1, u2 Specify the mappings for integer grid domain values i = 0 and i = un. vn Specifies the number of partitions in the grid range interval [v1, v2] (glMapGrid2 only). v1, v2 Specify the mappings for integer grid domain values j = 0 and j = vn (glMapGrid2 only).
 OpenGL/glmaterial(3) -- specify material parameters for the lighting model
    face Specifies which face or faces are being updated. Must be one of GL_FRONT, GL_BACK, or GL_FRONT_AND_BACK. pname Specifies the single-valued material parameter of the face or faces that is being updated. Must be GL_SHININESS. param Specifies the value that parameter GL_SHININESS will be set to.
 OpenGL/glmatrixmode(3) -- specify which matrix is the current matrix
    mode Specifies which matrix stack is the target for subsequent matrix operations. Three values are accepted: GL_MODELVIEW, GL_PROJECTION, and GL_TEXTURE. The initial value is GL_MODELVIEW. Additionally, if the GL_ARB_imaging extension is supported, GL_COLOR is also accepted.
 OpenGL/glminmax(3) -- define minmax table
    target The minmax table whose parameters are to be set. Must be GL_MINMAX. internalformat The format of entries in the minmax table. Must be one of GL_ALPHA, GL_ALPHA4, GL_ALPHA8, GL_ALPHA12, GL_ALPHA16, GL_LUMINANCE, GL_LUMINANCE4, GL_LUMINANCE8, GL_LUMINANCE12, GL_LUMINANCE16, GL_LUMINANCE_ALPHA, GL_LUMINANCE4_ALPHA4, GL_LUMINANCE6_ALPHA2, GL_LUMINANCE8_ALPHA8, GL_LUMINANCE12_ALPHA4, GL_LUMINANCE12_ALPHA12, GL_LUMINANCE16_ALPHA16, GL_R3_G3_B2, GL_RGB, GL_RGB4, GL_RGB5, GL_RGB8, GL_RGB10, GL_RG...
 OpenGL/glminmaxext(3) -- define minmax table
    target The minmax table whose parameters are to be set. Must be GL_MINMAX_EXT. internalformat The format of entries in the minmax table. Must be one of GL_ALPHA, GL_ALPHA4_EXT, GL_ALPHA8_EXT, GL_ALPHA12_EXT, GL_ALPHA16_EXT, GL_LUMINANCE, GL_LUMINANCE4_EXT, GL_LUMINANCE8_EXT, GL_LUMINANCE12_EXT, GL_LUMINANCE16_EXT, GL_LUMINANCE_ALPHA, GL_LUMINANCE4_ALPHA4_EXT, GL_LUMINANCE6_ALPHA2_EXT, GL_LUMINANCE8_ALPHA8_EXT, GL_LUMINANCE12_ALPHA4_EXT, GL_LUMINANCE12_ALPHA12_EXT, GL_LUMINANCE16_ALPHA16_EXT, GL_...
 OpenGL/glmultmatrix(3) -- multiply the current matrix with the specified matrix
    m Points to 16 consecutive values that are used as the elements of a 4 x 4 column-major matrix.
 OpenGL/glnewlist(3) -- create or replace a display list
    list Specifies the display-list name. mode Specifies the compilation mode, which can be GL_COMPILE or GL_COMPILE_AND_EXECUTE.
 OpenGL/glnormal(3) -- set the current normal vector
    nx, ny, nz Specify the x, y, and z coordinates of the new current normal. The initial value of the current normal is the unit vector, (0, 0, 1).
 OpenGL/glnormalpointer(3) -- define an array of normals
    type Specifies the data type of each coordinate in the array. Symbolic constants GL_BYTE, GL_SHORT, GL_INT, GL_FLOAT, and GL_DOUBLE are accepted. The initial value is GL_FLOAT. stride Specifies the byte offset between consecutive normals. If stride is 0- the initial value-the normals are understood to be tightly packed in the array. The initial value is 0. pointer Specifies a pointer to the first coordinate of the first normal in the array. The initial value is 0....
 OpenGL/glnormalpointerext(3) -- define a array of normals
    type Specifies the the data type of each coordinate in the array. Symbolic constants GL_BYTE, GL_SHORT, GL_INT, GL_FLOAT, or GL_DOUBLE_EXT are accepted. stride Specifies the byte offset between consecutive normals. count Specifies the number of normals, counting from the first, that are static. pointer Specifies a pointer to the first coordinate of the first normal in the array.
 Tcl/glob(3) -- Return names of files that match patterns
    This command performs file name ``globbing'' in a fashion similar to the csh shell. It returns a list of the files whose names match any of the pattern arguments. If the initial arguments to glob start with - then they are treated as | switches. The following switches are currently supported: -nocomplain Allows an empty list to be returned without error; | without this switch an error is returned if the result | list would be empty. -- Marks the end of switches. The argument following this | o...
 glob(3g) -- generate pathnames matching a pattern
    The structure type glob_t is defined in the header <glob.h> and includes at least the following members: MemberType MemberName Description _______________________________________________________________ size_t gl_offs Slots to reserve at start of gl_pathv. char ** gl_pathv Pointer to list of matched pathnames. size_t gl_pathc Count of paths matched by pattern. The argument pattern is a pointer to a pathname pattern to be expanded. The glob function matches all...
 Tcl/global(3) -- Access global variables
    This command is ignored unless a Tcl procedure is being interpreted. If so then it declares the given varname's to be global variables rather than local ones. For the duration of the current procedure (and only while executing in the current procedure), any reference to any of the varnames will refer to the global variable by the same name.
 OpenGL/glortho(3) -- multiply the current matrix with an orthographic matrix
    left, right Specify the coordinates for the left and right vertical clipping planes. bottom, top Specify the coordinates for the bottom and top horizontal clipping planes. near, far Specify the distances to the nearer and farther depth clipping planes. These values are negative if the plane is to be behind the viewer.
 OpenGL/glpassthrough(3) -- place a marker in the feedback buffer
    token Specifies a marker value to be placed in the feedback buffer following a GL_PASS_THROUGH_TOKEN.
 OpenGL/glpixelmap(3) -- set up pixel transfer maps
    map Specifies a symbolic map name. Must be one of the following: GL_PIXEL_MAP_I_TO_I, GL_PIXEL_MAP_S_TO_S, GL_PIXEL_MAP_I_TO_R, GL_PIXEL_MAP_I_TO_G, GL_PIXEL_MAP_I_TO_B, GL_PIXEL_MAP_I_TO_A, GL_PIXEL_MAP_R_TO_R, GL_PIXEL_MAP_G_TO_G, GL_PIXEL_MAP_B_TO_B, or GL_PIXEL_MAP_A_TO_A. mapsize Specifies the size of the map being defined. values Specifies an array of mapsize values.
 OpenGL/glpixelstore(3) -- set pixel storage modes
    pname Specifies the symbolic name of the parameter to be set. Twelve values affect the packing of pixel data into memory: GL_PACK_SWAP_BYTES, GL_PACK_LSB_FIRST, GL_PACK_ROW_LENGTH, GL_PACK_IMAGE_HEIGHT, GL_PACK_IMAGE_DEPTH_SGIS, GL_PACK_SKIP_PIXELS, GL_PACK_SKIP_ROWS, GL_PACK_SKIP_IMAGES, GL_PACK_SKIP_VOLUMES_SGIS, GL_PACK_ALIGNMENT, GL_PACK_SUBSAMPLE_RATE_SGIX, and GL_PACK_RESAMPLE_SGIX. Twelve more affect the unpacking of pixel data from memory: GL_UNPACK_SWAP_BYTES, GL_UNPACK_LSB_FIRST, GL_UN...
 OpenGL/glpixeltexgen(3) -- affects the generation of texture coordinates from pixel groups
    mode Specifies a mode of generating texture coordinates from pixel groups. Must be one of the following: GL_NONE, GL_RGBA, GL_RGB, GL_ALPHA. GL_PIXEL_TEX_GEN_ALPHA_REPLACE_SGIX, GL_PIXEL_TEX_GEN_ALPHA_NO_REPLACE_SGIX, GL_PIXEL_TEX_GEN_ALPHA_MS_SGIX, or GL_PIXEL_TEX_GEN_ALPHA_LS_SGIX. The default value is GL_NONE.
 OpenGL/glpixeltexgenparameter(3) -- affects the generation of texture coordinates in pixel operations
    pname Specifies the symbolic name of the parameter to be set, which must be either GL_PIXEL_FRAGMENT_RGB_SOURCE_SGIS or GL_PIXEL_FRAGMENT_ALPHA_SOURCE_SGIS. param Specifies a symbolic constant, which must be either GL_CURRENT_RASTER_COLOR or GL_PIXEL_GROUP_COLOR_SGIS.
 OpenGL/glpixeltransfer(3) -- set pixel transfer modes
    pname Specifies the symbolic name of the pixel transfer parameter to be set. Must be one of the following: GL_MAP_COLOR, GL_MAP_STENCIL, GL_INDEX_SHIFT, GL_INDEX_OFFSET, GL_RED_SCALE, GL_RED_BIAS, GL_GREEN_SCALE, GL_GREEN_BIAS, GL_BLUE_SCALE, GL_BLUE_BIAS, GL_ALPHA_SCALE, GL_ALPHA_BIAS, GL_DEPTH_SCALE, or GL_DEPTH_BIAS. Additionally, if the GL_ARB_imaging extension is supported, the following symbolic names are accepted: GL_POST_COLOR_MATRIX_RED_SCALE, GL_POST_COLOR_MATRIX_GREEN_SCALE, GL_POST_C...
 OpenGL/glpixelzoom(3) -- specify the pixel zoom factors
    xfactor, yfactor Specify the x and y zoom factors for pixel write operations.
 OpenGL/glpointparametersgis(3) -- set point parameters
    pname The symbolic name of a point parameter. One of GL_POINT_SIZE_MIN_SGIS or GL_POINT_SIZE_MAX_SGIS or GL_POINT_FADE_THRESHOLD_SIZE_SGIS. param The parameter value.
 OpenGL/glpointsize(3) -- specify the diameter of rasterized points
    size Specifies the diameter of rasterized points. The initial value is 1.
 OpenGL/glpollasyncsgix(3) -- poll for completion of an asynchronous command
    markerp Returns a marker for a completed asynchronous command.
 OpenGL/glpolygonmode(3) -- select a polygon rasterization mode
    face Specifies the polygons that mode applies to. Must be GL_FRONT for front-facing polygons, GL_BACK for back-facing polygons, or GL_FRONT_AND_BACK for front- and back-facing polygons. mode Specifies how polygons will be rasterized. Accepted values are GL_POINT, GL_LINE, and GL_FILL. The initial value is GL_FILL for both front- and back-facing polygons.
 OpenGL/glpolygonoffset(3) -- set the scale and units used to calculate depth values
    factor Specifies a scale factor that is used to create a variable depth offset for each polygon. The initial value is 0. units Is multiplied by an implementation-specific value to create a constant depth offset. The initial value is 0.
 OpenGL/glpolygonoffsetext(3) -- set parameters used to offset polygon depth
    factor specifies a slope scale factor. bias specifies a constant bias. The depth values for each subsequent polygon rendered in GL_FILL mode will be offset by the the slope scale factor times the maximum absolute depth slope of the polygon, plus the bias.
 OpenGL/glpolygonstipple(3) -- set the polygon stippling pattern
    mask Specifies a pointer to a 32 x 32 stipple pattern that will be unpacked from memory in the same way that glDrawPixels unpacks pixels.
 OpenGL/glprioritizetextures(3) -- set texture residence priority
    n Specifies the number of textures to be prioritized. textures Specifies an array containing the names of the textures to be prioritized. priorities Specifies an array containing the texture priorities. A priority given in an element of priorities applies to the texture named by the corresponding element of textures.
 OpenGL/glprioritizetexturesext(3) -- set texture residence priority
    n The number of textures to be prioritized. textures An array containing the names of the textures to be prioritized. priorities An array containing the texture priorities. A priority given in an element of priorities applies to the texture named by the corresponding element of textures.
 OpenGL/glpushattrib(3) -- push and pop the server attribute stack
    mask Specifies a mask that indicates which attributes to save. Values for mask are listed below.
 OpenGL/glpushclientattrib(3) -- push and pop the client attribute stack
    mask Specifies a mask that indicates which attributes to save. Values for mask are listed below.
 OpenGL/glpushmatrix(3) -- push and pop the current matrix stack
    void glPopMatrix( void )
 OpenGL/glpushname(3) -- push and pop the name stack
    name Specifies a name that will be pushed onto the name stack.
 OpenGL/glrasterpos(3) -- specify the raster position for pixel operations
    void glRasterPos2dv( const GLdouble *v ) void glRasterPos2fv( const GLfloat *v ) void glRasterPos2iv( const GLint *v ) void glRasterPos2sv( const GLshort *v ) void glRasterPos3dv( const GLdouble *v ) void glRasterPos3fv( const GLfloat *v ) void glRasterPos3iv( const GLint *v ) void glRasterPos3sv( const GLshort *v ) void glRasterPos4dv( const GLdouble *v ) void glRasterPos4fv( const GLfloat *v ) void glRasterPos4iv( const GLint *v ) void glRasterPos4sv( const GLshort *v )...
 OpenGL/glreadbuffer(3) -- select a color buffer source for pixels
    mode Specifies a color buffer. Accepted values are GL_FRONT_LEFT, GL_FRONT_RIGHT, GL_BACK_LEFT, GL_BACK_RIGHT, GL_FRONT, GL_BACK, GL_LEFT, GL_RIGHT, and GL_AUXi, where i is between 0 and GL_AUX_BUFFERS -1.
 OpenGL/glreadpixels(3) -- read a block of pixels from the frame buffer
    x, y Specify the window coordinates of the first pixel that is read from the frame buffer. This location is the lower left corner of a rectangular block of pixels. width, height Specify the dimensions of the pixel rectangle. width and height of one correspond to a single pixel. format Specifies the format of the pixel data. The following symbolic values are accepted: GL_COLOR_INDEX, GL_STENCIL_INDEX, GL_DEPTH_COMPONENT, GL_RED, GL_GREEN, GL_BLUE, GL_ALPHA, GL_RGB, GL_BGR, GL_RGBA, GL_BGRA, GL_AB...
 OpenGL/glrect(3) -- draw a rectangle
    x1, y1 Specify one vertex of a rectangle. x2, y2 Specify the opposite vertex of the rectangle.
 OpenGL/glreferenceplanesgix(3) -- define a reference plane for coplanar geometry
    equation Specifies a four-element array containing the plane equation coefficients of a reference plane which will be used to generate depth values for pixel fragments. The coefficients of x, y, and z are the first three elements of the array, respectively, and the constant term is the fourth. The plane equation is specified in object coordinates. The default is equivalent to (0,0,1,0) in window coordinates....
 OpenGL/glrendermode(3) -- set rasterization mode
    mode Specifies the rasterization mode. Three values are accepted: GL_RENDER, GL_SELECT, and GL_FEEDBACK. The initial value is GL_RENDER.
 OpenGL/glresethistogram(3) -- reset histogram table entries to zero
    target Must be GL_HISTOGRAM.
 OpenGL/glresethistogramext(3) -- reset histogram table entries to zero
    target Must be GL_HISTOGRAM_EXT.
 OpenGL/glresetminmax(3) -- reset minmax table entries to initial values
    target Must be GL_MINMAX.
 OpenGL/glresetminmaxext(3) -- reset minmax table entries to initial values
    target Must be GL_MINMAX_EXT.
 standard/glresources(3) -- X resources used by GL programs
    These resources control the behavior and appearance of the popup menus displayed by defpup(3G). Some IRIX 4.0 programs use menus that look the same, but aren't controlled by exactly the same resources. Two examples of programs with similar-looking, but non-GL, menus would be workspace(1) and wsh(1). menu.overFirst Menu.OverFirst If this resource is specified and is set to "True" then when the popop menu is first drawn, it will be placed so that the first menu item is automatically selected. S...
 OpenGL/glrotate(3) -- multiply the current matrix by a rotation matrix
    angle Specifies the angle of rotation, in degrees. x, y, z Specify the x, y, and z coordinates of a vector, respectively.
 OpenGL/glsamplemasksgis(3) -- define mask to modify multisampled pixel fragments
    value Specifies coverage of the modification mask. Clamped to the range [0, 1]; zero implies no coverage, and one implies full coverage. invert GL_FALSE to use the modification mask implied by value; GL_TRUE to use the bitwise inverse of that mask.
 OpenGL/glsamplepatternsgis(3) -- set pattern for multisampling
    pattern A symbolic constant that indicates the sampling pattern to be used when multisampling is enabled. The allowable values are GL_1PASS_SGIS, GL_2PASS_0_SGIS, GL_2PASS_1_SGIS, GL_4PASS_0_SGIS, GL_4PASS_1_SGIS, GL_4PASS_2_SGIS, and GL_4PASS_3_SGIS.
 OpenGL/glscale(3) -- multiply the current matrix by a general scaling matrix
    x, y, z Specify scale factors along the x, y, and z axes, respectively.
 OpenGL/glscissor(3) -- define the scissor box
    x, y Specify the lower left corner of the scissor box. Initially (0, 0). width, height Specify the width and height of the scissor box. When a GL context is first attached to a window, width and height are set to the dimensions of that window.
 OpenGL/glselectbuffer(3) -- establish a buffer for selection mode values
    size Specifies the size of buffer. buffer Returns the selection data.
 OpenGL/glseparablefilter2d(3) -- define a separable two-dimensional convolution filter
    target Must be GL_SEPARABLE_2D. internalformat The internal format of the convolution filter kernel. The allowable values are GL_ALPHA, GL_ALPHA4, GL_ALPHA8, GL_ALPHA12, GL_ALPHA16, GL_LUMINANCE, GL_LUMINANCE4, GL_LUMINANCE8, GL_LUMINANCE12, GL_LUMINANCE16, GL_LUMINANCE_ALPHA, GL_LUMINANCE4_ALPHA4, GL_LUMINANCE6_ALPHA2, GL_LUMINANCE8_ALPHA8, GL_LUMINANCE12_ALPHA4, GL_LUMINANCE12_ALPHA12, GL_LUMINANCE16_ALPHA16, GL_INTENSITY, GL_INTENSITY4, GL_INTENSITY8, GL_INTENSITY12, GL_INTENSITY16, GL_R3_G3_...
 OpenGL/glseparablefilter2dext(3) -- define a separable two-dimensional convolution filter
    target Must be GL_SEPARABLE_2D_EXT. internalformat The internal format of the convolution filter kernel. The allowable values are GL_LUMINANCE, GL_LUMINANCE_ALPHA, GL_INTENSITY_EXT, GL_RGB, and GL_RGBA. width The number of elements in the pixel array referenced by row. (This is the width of the separable filter kernel.) height The number of elements in the pixel array referenced by column. (This is the height of the separable filter kernel.) format The format of the pixel data in row and column....
 OpenGL/glshademodel(3) -- select flat or smooth shading
    mode Specifies a symbolic value representing a shading technique. Accepted values are GL_FLAT and GL_SMOOTH. The initial value is GL_SMOOTH.
 OpenGL/glsharpentexfuncsgis(3) -- specify sharpen texture scaling function
    target The target to which the scaling function will be applied. Must be one of GL_TEXTURE_1D, GL_TEXTURE_2D, or GL_TEXTURE_3D_EXT. n The number of scaling function samples in points. points An array of scaling function samples, each of which is a (level- of-detail, function-value) pair.
 OpenGL-GLS/glsintro(3) -- Introduction to the OpenGL Stream Codec
    The GLS API and encodings are subject to change during the OpenGL ARB multivendor standardization process for GLS, which is not yet complete. Due to the multivendor standardization process, the GLS API and binary stream encodings that are supported in this release are NOT compatible with the GLS API and binary stream encodings that were supported in IRIX 6.2. Page 7 glsIntro(3G) OpenGL Stream Codec glsIntro(3G) The GLS text stream encoding supported in this release is compatible with the GLS tex...
 OpenGL/glspriteparametersgix(3) -- set sprite parameters
    pname The parameter to be set. Must be GL_SPRITE_MODE_SGIX. param The parameter value. Must be one of GL_SPRITE_AXIAL_SGIX or GL_SPRITE_OBJECT_ALIGNED_SGIX or GL_SPRITE_EYE_ALIGNED_SGIX.
 OpenGL/glstencilfunc(3) -- set function and reference value for stencil testing
    func Specifies the test function. Eight tokens are valid: GL_NEVER, GL_LESS, GL_LEQUAL, GL_GREATER, GL_GEQUAL, GL_EQUAL, GL_NOTEQUAL, and GL_ALWAYS. The initial value is GL_ALWAYS. ref Specifies the reference value for the stencil test. ref is clamped n to the range [0,2 -1], where n is the number of bitplanes in the stencil buffer. The initial value is 0. mask Specifies a mask that is ANDed with both the reference value and the stored stencil value when the test is done. The initial value is al...
 OpenGL/glstencilmask(3) -- control the writing of individual bits in the stencil planes
    mask Specifies a bit mask to enable and disable writing of individual bits in the stencil planes. Initially, the mask is all 1's.
 OpenGL/glstencilop(3) -- set stencil test actions
    fail Specifies the action to take when the stencil test fails. Six symbolic constants are accepted: GL_KEEP, GL_ZERO, GL_REPLACE, GL_INCR, GL_DECR, and GL_INVERT. The initial value is GL_KEEP. zfail Specifies the stencil action when the stencil test passes, but the depth test fails. zfail accepts the same symbolic constants as fail. The initial value is GL_KEEP. zpass Specifies the stencil action when both the stencil test and the depth test pass, or when the stencil test passes and either there...
 OpenGL/gltagsamplebuffersgix(3) -- mark all samples of a multisample buffer
    When using a multisample buffer on some systems (see Machine Dependencies below), glTagSampleBufferSGIX can be used with some restrictions as a faster alternative to clearing the depth buffer using glClear. On these system, each sample in the multisample buffer carries a tag that can be either set or cleared. glTagSampleBufferSGIX sets the tags of all the samples. When a tag of a sample is set, a depth test against that sample always succeeds. Note, however, that the stencil test (if enabled) st...
 OpenGL/gltexcoord(3) -- set the current texture coordinates
    s, t, r, q Specify s, t, r, and q texture coordinates. Not all parameters are present in all forms of the command.
 OpenGL/gltexcoordpointer(3) -- define an array of texture coordinates
    size Specifies the number of coordinates per array element. Must be 1, 2, 3 or 4. The initial value is 4. type Specifies the data type of each texture coordinate. Symbolic constants GL_SHORT, GL_INT, GL_FLOAT, or GL_DOUBLE are accepted. The initial value is GL_FLOAT. stride Specifies the byte offset between consecutive array elements. If stride is 0, the array elements are understood to be tightly packed. The initial value is 0. pointer Specifies a pointer to the first coordinate of the first el...
 OpenGL/gltexcoordpointerext(3) -- define an array of texture coordinates
    size Specifies the number of coordinates per array element. It must be 1, 2, 3 or 4. type Specifies the data type of each texture coordinate. Symbolic constants GL_SHORT, GL_INT, GL_FLOAT, or GL_DOUBLE_EXT, are accepted. stride Specifies the byte offset between consecutive array elements. If stride is zero the array elements are understood to be tightly packed. count Specifies the number of array elements, counting from the first, that are static. pointer Specifies a pointer to the first coordin...
 OpenGL/gltexenv(3) -- set texture environment parameters
    target Specifies a texture environment. Must be GL_TEXTURE_ENV. pname Specifies the symbolic name of a single-valued texture environment parameter. Must be GL_TEXTURE_ENV_MODE. param Specifies a single symbolic constant, one of GL_MODULATE, GL_DECAL, GL_BLEND, GL_REPLACE, GL_REPLACE_EXT, or GL_ADD.
 OpenGL/gltexfilterfuncsgis(3) -- specify user-defined texture filtering function
    target Specifies the texture for which filter weights will be defined. The allowable values are GL_TEXTURE_1D and GL_TEXTURE_2D. filter Specifies the filter whose weights will be defined. Must be GL_FILTER4_SGIS. n The number of filter weight values in weights. weights Specifies an array of floating-point values which define the filter weights.
 OpenGL/gltexgen(3) -- control the generation of texture coordinates
    coord Specifies a texture coordinate. Must be one of GL_S, GL_T, GL_R, or GL_Q. pname Specifies the symbolic name of the texture-coordinate generation function. Must be GL_TEXTURE_GEN_MODE. param Specifies a single-valued texture generation parameter, one of GL_OBJECT_LINEAR, GL_EYE_LINEAR, or GL_SPHERE_MAP.
 OpenGL/glteximage1d(3) -- specify a one-dimensional texture image
    target Specifies the target texture. Must be GL_TEXTURE_1D or GL_PROXY_TEXTURE_1D. level Specifies the level-of-detail number. Level 0 is the base image level. Level n is the nth mipmap reduction image. internalformat Specifies the number of color components in the texture. Must be 1, 2, 3, or 4, or one of the following symbolic constants: GL_ALPHA, GL_ALPHA4, GL_ALPHA8, GL_ALPHA12, GL_ALPHA16, GL_LUMINANCE, GL_LUMINANCE4, GL_LUMINANCE8, GL_LUMINANCE12, GL_LUMINANCE16, GL_LUMINANCE_ALPHA, GL_LUM...
 OpenGL/glteximage2d(3) -- specify a two-dimensional texture image
    target Specifies the target texture. Must be GL_TEXTURE_2D or GL_PROXY_TEXTURE_2D. level Specifies the level-of-detail number. Level 0 is the base image level. Level n is the nth mipmap reduction image. internalformat Specifies the number of color components in the texture. Must be 1, 2, 3, or 4, or one of the following symbolic constants: GL_ALPHA, GL_ALPHA4, GL_ALPHA8, GL_ALPHA12, GL_ALPHA16, GL_LUMINANCE, GL_LUMINANCE4, GL_LUMINANCE8, GL_LUMINANCE12, GL_LUMINANCE16, GL_LUMINANCE_ALPHA, GL_LUM...
 OpenGL/glteximage3d(3) -- specify a three-dimensional texture image
    target Specifies the target texture. Must be GL_TEXTURE_3D or GL_PROXY_TEXTURE_3D. level Specifies the level-of-detail number. Level 0 is the th base image level. Level n is the n mipmap reduction image. internalformat Specifies the number of color components in the texture. Must be 1, 2, 3, or 4, or one of the following symbolic constants: GL_ALPHA, GL_ALPHA4, GL_ALPHA8, GL_ALPHA12, GL_ALPHA16, GL_LUMINANCE, GL_LUMINANCE4, GL_LUMINANCE8, GL_LUMINANCE12, GL_LUMINANCE16, GL_LUMINANCE_ALPHA, GL_LU...
 OpenGL/glteximage3dext(3) -- specify a three-dimensional texture image
    target Specifies the target texture. Must be GL_TEXTURE_3D_EXT or GL_PROXY_TEXTURE_3D_EXT. level Specifies the level-of-detail number. Level 0 is the base image level. Level n is the nth mipmap reduction image. internalformat Specifies the internal storage format of the texture image. it must be one of the following symbolic constants: GL_ALPHA, GL_ALPHA4_EXT, GL_ALPHA8_EXT, GL_ALPHA12_EXT, GL_ALPHA16_EXT, GL_LUMINANCE, GL_LUMINANCE4_EXT, GL_LUMINANCE8_EXT, GL_LUMINANCE12_EXT, GL_LUMINANCE16_EXT...
 OpenGL/glteximage4dext(3) -- specify a four-dimensional texture image
    target Specifies the target texture. Must be GL_TEXTURE_4D_SGIS or GL_PROXY_TEXTURE_4D_SGIS. level Specifies the level-of-detail number. Level 0 is the base image level. Level n is the nth mipmap reduction image. internalformat Specifies the internal storage format of the texture image. it must be one of the following symbolic constants: GL_ALPHA, GL_ALPHA4_EXT, GL_ALPHA8_EXT, GL_ALPHA12_EXT, GL_ALPHA16_EXT, GL_LUMINANCE, GL_LUMINANCE4_EXT, GL_LUMINANCE8_EXT, GL_LUMINANCE12_EXT, GL_LUMINANCE16_E...
 OpenGL/gltexparameter(3) -- set texture parameters
    target Specifies the target texture, which must be either GL_TEXTURE_1D, GL_TEXTURE_2D, GL_DETAIL_TEXTURE_2D_SGIS, or GL_TEXTURE_3D_EXT. GL_TEXTURE_4D_SGIS. pname Specifies the symbolic name of a single-valued texture parameter. pname can be one of the following: GL_TEXTURE_MIN_FILTER, GL_TEXTURE_MAG_FILTER, GL_TEXTURE_MIN_LOD, GL_TEXTURE_MAX_LOD, GL_TEXTURE_BASE_LEVEL, GL_TEXTURE_MAX_LEVEL, GL_TEXTURE_WRAP_S, GL_TEXTURE_WRAP_T, GL_TEXTURE_WRAP_R, GL_TEXTURE_WRAP_Q_SGIS, GL_TEXTURE_PRIORITY, GL_...
 OpenGL/gltexsubimage1d(3) -- specify a one-dimensional texture subimage
    target Specifies the target texture. Must be GL_TEXTURE_1D. level Specifies the level-of-detail number. Level 0 is the base image level. Level n is the nth mipmap reduction image. xoffset Specifies a texel offset in the x direction within the texture array. width Specifies the width of the texture subimage. format Specifies the format of the pixel data. The following symbolic values are accepted: GL_COLOR_INDEX, GL_RED, GL_GREEN, GL_BLUE, GL_ALPHA, GL_RGB, GL_BGR, GL_RGBA, GL_BGRA, GL_ABGR_EXT, ...
 OpenGL/gltexsubimage1dext(3) -- specify a one-dimensional texture subimage
    target Specifies the target texture. Must be GL_TEXTURE_1D. level Specifies the level-of-detail number. Level 0 is the base image level. Level n is the nth mipmap reduction image. xoffset Specifies a texel offset in the x direction within the texture array. width Specifies the width of the texture subimage. format Specifies the format of the pixel data. The following symbolic values are accepted: GL_COLOR_INDEX, GL_RED, GL_GREEN, GL_BLUE, GL_ALPHA, GL_RGB, GL_RGBA, GL_ABGR_EXT, GL_LUMINANCE, and...
 OpenGL/gltexsubimage2d(3) -- specify a two-dimensional texture subimage
    target Specifies the target texture. Must be GL_TEXTURE_2D. level Specifies the level-of-detail number. Level 0 is the base image level. Level n is the nth mipmap reduction image. xoffset Specifies a texel offset in the x direction within the texture array. yoffset Specifies a texel offset in the y direction within the texture array. width Specifies the width of the texture subimage. height Specifies the height of the texture subimage. format Specifies the format of the pixel data. The following...
 OpenGL/gltexsubimage2dext(3) -- specify a two-dimensional texture subimage
    target Specifies the target texture. Must be GL_TEXTURE_2D or GL_DETAIL_TEXTURE_2D_SGIS. level Specifies the level-of-detail number. Level 0 is the base image level. Level n is the nth mipmap reduction image. xoffset Specifies a texel offset in the x direction within the texture array. yoffset Specifies a texel offset in the y direction within the texture array. width Specifies the width of the texture subimage. height Specifies the height of the texture subimage. format Specifies the format of ...
 OpenGL/gltexsubimage3d(3) -- specify a three-dimensional texture subimage
    target Specifies the target texture. Must be GL_TEXTURE_3D. level Specifies the level-of-detail number. Level 0 is the base image level. Level n is the nth mipmap reduction image. xoffset Specifies a texel offset in the x direction within the texture array. yoffset Specifies a texel offset in the y direction within the texture array. zoffset Specifies a texel offset in the z direction within the texture array. width Specifies the width of the texture subimage. height Specifies the height of the ...
 OpenGL/gltexsubimage3dext(3) -- specify a three-dimensional texture subimage
    target Specifies the target texture. Must be GL_TEXTURE_3D_EXT. level Specifies the level-of-detail number. Level 0 is the base image level. Level n is the nth mipmap reduction image. xoffset Specifies a texel offset in the x direction within the texture array. yoffset Specifies a texel offset in the y direction within the texture array. zoffset Specifies a texel offset in the z direction within the texture array. width Specifies the width of the texture subimage. height Specifies the height of ...
 OpenGL/gltexsubimage4dext(3) -- specify a four-dimensional texture subimage
    target Specifies the target texture. Must be GL_TEXTURE_4D_SGIS. level Specifies the level-of-detail number. Level 0 is the base image level. Level n is the nth mipmap reduction image. xoffset Specifies a texel offset in the x direction within the texture array. yoffset Specifies a texel offset in the y direction within the texture array. zoffset Specifies a texel offset in the z direction within the texture array. woffset Specifies a texel offset in the w direction within the texture array. wid...
 OpenGL/gltexturecolormasksgis(3) -- enable and disable the storing of texture element color components
    red, green, blue, alpha Specify whether red, green, blue, alpha, luminance, or intensity components will or will not be stored when defining a texture image. The initial values are all GL_TRUE, indicating that all color components determined by the internal format of the texture image will be stored.
 OpenGL/gltranslate(3) -- multiply the current matrix by a translation matrix
    x, y, z Specify the x, y, and z coordinates of a translation vector.
 OpenGL/glubegincurve(3) -- delimit a NURBS curve definition
    nurb Specifies the NURBS object (created with gluNewNurbsRenderer).
 OpenGL/glubeginpolygon(3) -- delimit a polygon description
    tess Specifies the tessellation object (created with gluNewTess).
 OpenGL/glubeginsurface(3) -- delimit a NURBS surface definition
    nurb Specifies the NURBS object (created with gluNewNurbsRenderer).
 OpenGL/glubegintrim(3) -- delimit a NURBS trimming loop definition
    nurb Specifies the NURBS object (created with gluNewNurbsRenderer).
 OpenGL/glubuild1dmipmaplevels(3) -- builds a subset of one-dimensional mipmap levels
    target Specifies the target texture. Must be GL_TEXTURE_1D. internalFormat Requests the internal storage format of the texture image. Must be 1, 2, 3, or 4 or one of the following symbolic constants: GL_ALPHA, GL_ALPHA4, GL_ALPHA8, GL_ALPHA12, GL_ALPHA16, GL_LUMINANCE, GL_LUMINANCE4, GL_LUMINANCE8, GL_LUMINANCE12, GL_LUMINANCE16, GL_LUMINANCE_ALPHA, GL_LUMINANCE4_ALPHA4, GL_LUMINANCE6_ALPHA2, GL_LUMINANCE8_ALPHA8, GL_LUMINANCE12_ALPHA4, GL_LUMINANCE12_ALPHA12, GL_LUMINANCE16_ALPHA16, GL_INTENSIT...
 OpenGL/glubuild1dmipmaps(3) -- builds a one-dimensional mipmap
    target Specifies the target texture. Must be GL_TEXTURE_1D. internalFormat Requests the internal storage format of the texture image. Must be 1, 2, 3, 4, or one of the following symbolic constants: GL_ALPHA, GL_ALPHA4, GL_ALPHA8, GL_ALPHA12, GL_ALPHA16, GL_LUMINANCE, GL_LUMINANCE4, GL_LUMINANCE8, GL_LUMINANCE12, GL_LUMINANCE16, GL_LUMINANCE_ALPHA, GL_LUMINANCE4_ALPHA4, GL_LUMINANCE6_ALPHA2, GL_LUMINANCE8_ALPHA8, GL_LUMINANCE12_ALPHA4, GL_LUMINANCE12_ALPHA12, GL_LUMINANCE16_ALPHA16, GL_INTENSITY,...
 OpenGL/glubuild2dmipmaplevels(3) -- builds a subset of two-dimensional mipmap levels
    target Specifies the target texture. Must be GL_TEXTURE_2D. internalFormat Requests the internal storage format of the texture image. Must be 1, 2, 3, 4, or one of the following symbolic constants: GL_ALPHA, GL_ALPHA4, GL_ALPHA8, GL_ALPHA12, GL_ALPHA16, GL_LUMINANCE, GL_LUMINANCE4, GL_LUMINANCE8, GL_LUMINANCE12, GL_LUMINANCE16, GL_LUMINANCE_ALPHA, GL_LUMINANCE4_ALPHA4, GL_LUMINANCE6_ALPHA2, GL_LUMINANCE8_ALPHA8, GL_LUMINANCE12_ALPHA4, GL_LUMINANCE12_ALPHA12, GL_LUMINANCE16_ALPHA16, GL_INTENSITY,...
 OpenGL/glubuild2dmipmaps(3) -- builds a two-dimensional mipmap
    target Specifies the target texture. Must be GL_TEXTURE_2D. internalFormat Requests the internal storage format of the texture image. Must be 1, 2, 3, 4, or one of the following symbolic constants: GL_ALPHA, GL_ALPHA4, GL_ALPHA8, GL_ALPHA12, GL_ALPHA16, GL_LUMINANCE, GL_LUMINANCE4, GL_LUMINANCE8, GL_LUMINANCE12, GL_LUMINANCE16, GL_LUMINANCE_ALPHA, GL_LUMINANCE4_ALPHA4, GL_LUMINANCE6_ALPHA2, GL_LUMINANCE8_ALPHA8, GL_LUMINANCE12_ALPHA4, GL_LUMINANCE12_ALPHA12, GL_LUMINANCE16_ALPHA16, GL_INTENSITY,...
 OpenGL/glubuild3dmipmaplevels(3) -- builds a subset of three-dimensional mipmap levels
    target Specifies the target texture. Must be GL_TEXTURE_3D. internalFormat Requests the internal storage format of the texture image. Must be 1, 2, 3, 4, or one of the following symbolic constants: GL_ALPHA, GL_ALPHA4, GL_ALPHA8, GL_ALPHA12, GL_ALPHA16, GL_LUMINANCE, GL_LUMINANCE4, GL_LUMINANCE8, GL_LUMINANCE12, GL_LUMINANCE16, GL_LUMINANCE_ALPHA, GL_LUMINANCE4_ALPHA4, GL_LUMINANCE6_ALPHA2, GL_LUMINANCE8_ALPHA8, GL_LUMINANCE12_ALPHA4, GL_LUMINANCE12_ALPHA12, GL_LUMINANCE16_ALPHA16, GL_INTENSITY,...
 OpenGL/glubuild3dmipmaps(3) -- builds a three-dimensional mipmap
    target Specifies the target texture. Must be GL_TEXTURE_3D. internalFormat Requests the internal storage format of the texture image. Must be 1, 2, 3, 4, or one of the following symbolic constants: GL_ALPHA, GL_ALPHA4, GL_ALPHA8, GL_ALPHA12, GL_ALPHA16, GL_LUMINANCE, GL_LUMINANCE4, GL_LUMINANCE8, GL_LUMINANCE12, GL_LUMINANCE16, GL_LUMINANCE_ALPHA, GL_LUMINANCE4_ALPHA4, GL_LUMINANCE6_ALPHA2, GL_LUMINANCE8_ALPHA8, GL_LUMINANCE12_ALPHA4, GL_LUMINANCE12_ALPHA12, GL_LUMINANCE16_ALPHA16, GL_INTENSITY,...
 OpenGL/glucheckextension(3) -- determines if an extension name is supported
    extName Specifies an extension name. extString Specifies a space-separated list of extension names supported.
 OpenGL/glucylinder(3) -- draw a cylinder
    quad Specifies the quadrics object (created with gluNewQuadric). base Specifies the radius of the cylinder at z = 0. top Specifies the radius of the cylinder at z = height. height Specifies the height of the cylinder. slices Specifies the number of subdivisions around the z axis. stacks Specifies the number of subdivisions along the z axis.
 OpenGL/gludeletenurbsrenderer(3) -- destroy a NURBS object
    nurb Specifies the NURBS object to be destroyed.
 OpenGL/gludeletequadric(3) -- destroy a quadrics object
    quad Specifies the quadrics object to be destroyed.
 OpenGL/gludeletetess(3) -- destroy a tessellation object
    tess Specifies the tessellation object to destroy.
 OpenGL/gludisk(3) -- draw a disk
    quad Specifies the quadrics object (created with gluNewQuadric). inner Specifies the inner radius of the disk (may be 0). outer Specifies the outer radius of the disk. slices Specifies the number of subdivisions around the z axis. loops Specifies the number of concentric rings about the origin into which the disk is subdivided.
 OpenGL/gluerrorstring(3) -- produce an error string from a GL or GLU error code
    error Specifies a GL or GLU error code.
 OpenGL/glugetnurbsproperty(3) -- get a NURBS property
    nurb Specifies the NURBS object (created with gluNewNurbsRenderer). property Specifies the property whose value is to be fetched. Valid values are GLU_CULLING, GLU_SAMPLING_TOLERANCE, GLU_DISPLAY_MODE, GLU_AUTO_LOAD_MATRIX, GLU_PARAMETRIC_TOLERANCE, GLU_SAMPLING_METHOD, GLU_U_STEP, GLU_V_STEP and GLU_NURBS_MODE. data Specifies a pointer to the location into which the value of the named property is written....
 OpenGL/glugetstring(3) -- return a string describing the GLU version or GLU extensions
    name Specifies a symbolic constant, one of GLU_VERSION, or GLU_EXTENSIONS.
 OpenGL/glugettessproperty(3) -- get a tessellation object property
    tess Specifies the tessellation object (created with gluNewTess). which Specifies the property whose value is to be fetched. Valid values are GLU_TESS_WINDING_RULE, GLU_TESS_BOUNDARY_ONLY, and GLU_TESS_TOLERANCE. data Specifies a pointer to the location into which the value of the named property is written.
 OpenGL/gluloadsamplingmatrices(3) -- load NURBS sampling and culling matrices
    nurb Specifies the NURBS object (created with gluNewNurbsRenderer). model Specifies a modelview matrix (as from a glGetFloatv call). perspective Specifies a projection matrix (as from a glGetFloatv call). view Specifies a viewport (as from a glGetIntegerv call).
 OpenGL/glulookat(3) -- define a viewing transformation
    eyeX, eyeY, eyeZ Specifies the position of the eye point. centerX, centerY, centerZ Specifies the position of the reference point. upX, upY, upZ Specifies the direction of the up vector.
 OpenGL/glunewnurbsrenderer(3) -- create a NURBS object
    gluNewNurbsRenderer creates and returns a pointer to a new NURBS object. This object must be referred to when calling NURBS rendering and control functions. A return value of 0 means that there is not enough memory to allocate the object.
 OpenGL/glunewquadric(3) -- create a quadrics object
    gluNewQuadric creates and returns a pointer to a new quadrics object. This object must be referred to when calling quadrics rendering and control functions. A return value of 0 means that there is not enough memory to allocate the object.
 OpenGL/glunewtess(3) -- create a tessellation object
    gluNewTess creates and returns a pointer to a new tessellation object. This object must be referred to when calling tessellation functions. A return value of 0 means that there is not enough memory to allocate the object.
 OpenGL/glunextcontour(3) -- mark the beginning of another contour
    tess Specifies the tessellation object (created with gluNewTess). type Specifies the type of the contour being defined. Valid values are GLU_EXTERIOR, GLU_INTERIOR, GLU_UNKNOWN, GLU_CCW, and GLU_CW.
 OpenGL/glunurbscallback(3) -- define a callback for a NURBS object
    nurb Specifies the NURBS object (created with gluNewNurbsRenderer). which Specifies the callback being defined. Valid values are GLU_NURBS_BEGIN, GLU_NURBS_VERTEX, GLU_NURBS_NORMAL, GLU_NURBS_COLOR, GLU_NURBS_TEXTURE_COORD, GLU_NURBS_END, GLU_NURBS_BEGIN_DATA, GLU_NURBS_VERTEX_DATA, GLU_NURBS_NORMAL_DATA, GLU_NURBS_COLOR_DATA, GLU_NURBS_TEXTURE_COORD_DATA, GLU_NURBS_END_DATA, and GLU_NURBS_ERROR. CallBackFunc Specifies the function that the callback calls....
 OpenGL/glunurbscallbackdata(3) -- set a user data pointer
    nurb Specifies the NURBS object (created with gluNewNurbsRenderer). userData Specifies a pointer to the user's data.
 OpenGL/glunurbscallbackdataext(3) -- set a user data pointer
    nurb Specifies the NURBS object (created with gluNewNurbsRenderer). userData Specifies a pointer to the user's data.
 OpenGL/glunurbscurve(3) -- define the shape of a NURBS curve
    nurb Specifies the NURBS object (created with gluNewNurbsRenderer). knotCount Specifies the number of knots in knots. knotCount equals the number of control points plus the order. knots Specifies an array of knotCount nondecreasing knot values. stride Specifies the offset (as a number of single-precision floating-point values) between successive curve control points. control Specifies a pointer to an array of control points. The coordinates must agree with type, specified below. order Specifies ...
 OpenGL/glunurbsproperty(3) -- set a NURBS property
    nurb Specifies the NURBS object (created with gluNewNurbsRenderer). property Specifies the property to be set. Valid values are GLU_SAMPLING_TOLERANCE, GLU_DISPLAY_MODE, GLU_CULLING, GLU_AUTO_LOAD_MATRIX, GLU_PARAMETRIC_TOLERANCE, GLU_SAMPLING_METHOD, GLU_U_STEP, GLU_V_STEP, or GLU_NURBS_MODE. value Specifies the value of the indicated property. It may be a numeric value, or one of GLU_OUTLINE_POLYGON, GLU_FILL, GLU_OUTLINE_PATCH, GL_TRUE, GL_FALSE, GLU_PATH_LENGTH, GLU_PARAMETRIC_ERROR, GLU_DOM...
 OpenGL/glunurbssurface(3) -- define the shape of a NURBS surface
    nurb Specifies the NURBS object (created with gluNewNurbsRenderer). sKnotCount Specifies the number of knots in the parametric u direction. sKnots Specifies an array of sKnotCount nondecreasing knot values in the parametric u direction. tKnotCount Specifies the number of knots in the parametric v direction. tKnots Specifies an array of tKnotCount nondecreasing knot values in the parametric v direction. sStride Specifies the offset (as a number of single-precision floating point values) between s...
 OpenGL/gluortho2d(3) -- define a 2D orthographic projection matrix
    left, right Specify the coordinates for the left and right vertical clipping planes. bottom, top Specify the coordinates for the bottom and top horizontal clipping planes.
 OpenGL/glupartialdisk(3) -- draw an arc of a disk
    quad Specifies a quadrics object (created with gluNewQuadric). inner Specifies the inner radius of the partial disk (can be 0). outer Specifies the outer radius of the partial disk. slices Specifies the number of subdivisions around the z axis. loops Specifies the number of concentric rings about the origin into which the partial disk is subdivided. start Specifies the starting angle, in degrees, of the disk portion. sweep Specifies the sweep angle, in degrees, of the disk portion....
 OpenGL/gluperspective(3) -- set up a perspective projection matrix
    fovy Specifies the field of view angle, in degrees, in the y direction. aspect Specifies the aspect ratio that determines the field of view in the x direction. The aspect ratio is the ratio of x (width) to y (height). zNear Specifies the distance from the viewer to the near clipping plane (always positive). zFar Specifies the distance from the viewer to the far clipping plane (always positive).
 OpenGL/glupickmatrix(3) -- define a picking region
    x, y Specify the center of a picking region in window coordinates. delX, delY Specify the width and height, respectively, of the picking region in window coordinates. viewport Specifies the current viewport (as from a glGetIntegerv call).
 OpenGL/gluproject(3) -- map object coordinates to window coordinates
    objX, objY, objZ Specify the object coordinates. model Specifies the current modelview matrix (as from a glGetDoublev call). proj Specifies the current projection matrix (as from a glGetDoublev call). view Specifies the current viewport (as from a glGetIntegerv call). winX, winY, winZ Return the computed window coordinates.
 OpenGL/glupwlcurve(3) -- describe a piecewise linear NURBS trimming curve
    nurb Specifies the NURBS object (created with gluNewNurbsRenderer). count Specifies the number of points on the curve. data Specifies an array containing the curve points. stride Specifies the offset (a number of single-precision floating-point values) between points on the curve. type Specifies the type of curve. Must be either GLU_MAP1_TRIM_2 or GLU_MAP1_TRIM_3.
 OpenGL/gluquadriccallback(3) -- define a callback for a quadrics object
    quad Specifies the quadrics object (created with gluNewQuadric). which Specifies the callback being defined. The only valid value is GLU_ERROR. CallBackFunc Specifies the function to be called.
 OpenGL/gluquadricdrawstyle(3) -- specify the draw style desired for quadrics
    quad Specifies the quadrics object (created with gluNewQuadric). draw Specifies the desired draw style. Valid values are GLU_FILL, GLU_LINE, GLU_SILHOUETTE, and GLU_POINT.
 OpenGL/gluquadricnormals(3) -- specify what kind of normals are desired for quadrics
    quad Specifes the quadrics object (created with gluNewQuadric). normal Specifies the desired type of normals. Valid values are GLU_NONE, GLU_FLAT, and GLU_SMOOTH.
 OpenGL/gluquadricorientation(3) -- specify inside/outside orientation for quadrics
    quad Specifies the quadrics object (created with gluNewQuadric). orientation Specifies the desired orientation. Valid values are GLU_OUTSIDE and GLU_INSIDE.
 OpenGL/gluquadrictexture(3) -- specify if texturing is desired for quadrics
    quad Specifies the quadrics object (created with gluNewQuadric). texture Specifies a flag indicating if texture coordinates should be generated.
 OpenGL/gluscaleimage(3) -- scale an image to an arbitrary size
    format Specifies the format of the pixel data. The following symbolic values are valid: GL_COLOR_INDEX, GL_STENCIL_INDEX, GL_DEPTH_COMPONENT, GL_RED, GL_GREEN, GL_BLUE, GL_ALPHA, GL_RGB, GL_RGBA, GL_BGR, GL_BGRA, GL_LUMINANCE, and GL_LUMINANCE_ALPHA. wIn, hIn Specify in pixels the width and height, respectively, of the source image. typeIn Specifies the data type for dataIn. Must be one of GL_UNSIGNED_BYTE, GL_BYTE, GL_BITMAP, GL_UNSIGNED_SHORT, GL_SHORT, GL_UNSIGNED_INT, GL_INT, GL_FLOAT, GL_UN...
 OpenGL/glusphere(3) -- draw a sphere
    quad Specifies the quadrics object (created with gluNewQuadric). radius Specifies the radius of the sphere. slices Specifies the number of subdivisions around the z axis (similar to lines of longitude). stacks Specifies the number of subdivisions along the z axis (similar to lines of latitude).
 OpenGL/glutessbegincontour(3) -- delimit a contour description
    tess Specifies the tessellation object (created with gluNewTess).
 OpenGL/glutessbeginpolygon(3) -- delimit a polygon description
    tess Specifies the tessellation object (created with gluNewTess). data Specifies a pointer to user polygon data.
 OpenGL/glutesscallback(3) -- define a callback for a tessellation object
    tess Specifies the tessellation object (created with gluNewTess). which Specifies the callback being defined. The following values are valid: GLU_TESS_BEGIN, GLU_TESS_BEGIN_DATA, GLU_TESS_EDGE_FLAG, GLU_TESS_EDGE_FLAG_DATA, GLU_TESS_VERTEX, GLU_TESS_VERTEX_DATA, GLU_TESS_END, GLU_TESS_END_DATA, GLU_TESS_COMBINE, GLU_TESS_COMBINE_DATA, GLU_TESS_ERROR, and GLU_TESS_ERROR_DATA. CallBackFunc Specifies the function to be called....
 OpenGL/glutessendpolygon(3) -- delimit a polygon description
    tess Specifies the tessellation object (created with gluNewTess).
 OpenGL/glutessnormal(3) -- specify a normal for a polygon
    tess Specifies the tessellation object (created with gluNewTess). valueX Specifies the first component of the normal. valueY Specifies the second component of the normal. valueZ Specifies the third component of the normal.
 OpenGL/glutessproperty(3) -- set a tessellation object property
    tess Specifies the tessellation object (created with gluNewTess). which Specifies the property to be set. Valid values are GLU_TESS_WINDING_RULE, GLU_TESS_BOUNDARY_ONLY, GLU_TESS_TOLERANCE. data Specifies the value of the indicated property.
 OpenGL/glutessvertex(3) -- specify a vertex on a polygon
    tess Specifies the tessellation object (created with gluNewTess). location Specifies the location of the vertex. data Specifies an opaque pointer passed back to the program with the vertex callback (as specified by gluTessCallback).
 OpenGL/gluunproject(3) -- map window coordinates to object coordinates
    winX, winY, winZ Specify the window coordinates to be mapped. model Specifies the modelview matrix (as from a glGetDoublev call). proj Specifies the projection matrix (as from a glGetDoublev call). view Specifies the viewport (as from a glGetIntegerv call). objX, objY, objZ Returns the computed object coordinates.
 OpenGL/gluunproject4(3) -- map window and clip coordinates to object coordinates
    winX, winY, winZ Specify the window coordinates to be mapped. clipW Specify the clip w coordinate to be mapped. model Specifies the modelview matrix (as from a glGetDoublev call). proj Specifies the projection matrix (as from a glGetDoublev call). view Specifies the viewport (as from a glGetIntegerv call). near, far Specifies the near and far planes (as from a glGetDoublev call). objX, objY, objZ, objW Returns the computed object coordinates....
 OpenGL/glvertex(3) -- specify a vertex
    x, y, z, w Specify x, y, z, and w coordinates of a vertex. Not all parameters are present in all forms of the command. Page 1 glVertex(3G) OpenGL Reference glVertex(3G)
 OpenGL/glvertexpointer(3) -- define an array of vertex data
    size Specifies the number of coordinates per vertex; must be 2, 3, or 4. The initial value is 4. type Specifies the data type of each coordinate in the array. Symbolic constants GL_SHORT, GL_INT, GL_FLOAT, and GL_DOUBLE are accepted. The initial value is GL_FLOAT. stride Specifies the byte offset between consecutive vertices. If stride is 0, the vertices are understood to be tightly packed in the array. The initial value is 0. pointer Specifies a pointer to the first coordinate of the first vert...
 OpenGL/glvertexpointerext(3) -- define an array of vertex data
    size Specifies the number of coordinates per vertex, must be 2,3, or 4. type Specifies the data type of each coordinate in the array. Symbolic constants GL_SHORT, GL_INT, GL_FLOAT, or GL_DOUBLE_EXT are accepted. stride Specifies the byte offset between consecutive vertices. If stride is 0 the vertices are understood to be tightly packed in the array. count Specifies the number of vertices, counting from the first, that are static. pointer Specifies a pointer to the first coordinate of the first ...
 OpenGL/glviewport(3) -- set the viewport
    x, y Specify the lower left corner of the viewport rectangle, in pixels. The initial value is (0,0). width, height Specify the width and height of the viewport. When a GL context is first attached to a window, width and height are set to the dimensions of that window.
 OpenGL/glxassociatedmpbuffersgix(3) -- associate a DMbuffer with a GLX pixel buffer
    dpy A connection to an X server. pbuffer The GLX pixel buffer target of the associate operation. params A parameter list that describes the format of the images in the DMbuffer that is to be associated with the pixel buffer. dmbuffer The DMbuffer that will be used as the front left color buffer.
 OpenGL/glxbindchanneltowindowsgix(3) -- bind or unbind a window and a channel
    dpy Specifies the connection to the X server. screen Specifies the screen of the X server. channel Specifies the video channel number. window Specifies the window that is to be bound to channel
 OpenGL/glxbindhyperpipesgix(3) -- bind a rendering context with a hyperpipe configuration
    dpy Specifies the connection to the X server. hpId Specifies the hyperpipe id.
 OpenGL/glxbindswapbarriersgix(3) -- synchronize buffer swaps with other screens
    dpy Specifies the connection to the X server. drawable Specifies any GLX drawable in the swap group. barrier Specifies the barrier.
 OpenGL/glxchannelrectsgix(3) -- specify area of frame buffer to resize to video resolution
    dpy Specifies the connection to the X server. screen Specifies the screen of the X server. channel Specifies the video channel number. x, y, w, h The origin and size of the area of the window that will be converted to the output resolution of the video channel. (x,y) is relative to the bottom left corner of channel specified by the current video combination.
 OpenGL/glxchannelrectsyncsgix(3) -- configures the system to update video input areas on complete swap buffers of bound xwids
    dpy Specifies the connection to the X server. screen Specifies the screen of the X server. channel Specifies the video channel number. synctype Specifies if video input area is updated on swap buffer or frame boundaries, use one of the following constants GLX_SYNC_SWAP_SGIX GLX_SYNC_FRAME_SGIX
 OpenGL/glxchoosefbconfig(3) -- return a list of GLX frame buffer configurations that match the specified attributes
    dpy Specifies the connection to the X server. screen Specifies the screen number. attribList Specifies a list of attribute/value pairs. The last attribute must be None. nitems Returns the number of elements in the list returned by glXChooseFBConfig.
 OpenGL/glxchoosefbconfigsgix(3) -- return a list of GLX frame buffer configurations that match the specified attributes
    dpy Specifies the connection to the X server. screen Specifies the screen number. attrib_list Specifies a list of attribute/value pairs. The last attribute must be None. nitems Returns the number of elements in the list returned by glXChooseFBConfigSGIX.
 OpenGL/glxchoosevisual(3) -- return a visual that matches specified attributes
    dpy Specifies the connection to the X server. screen Specifies the screen number. attribList Specifies a list of boolean attributes and integer attribute/value pairs. The last attribute must be None.
 OpenGL/glxcopycontext(3) -- copy state from one rendering context to another
    dpy Specifies the connection to the X server. src Specifies the source context. dst Specifies the destination context. mask Specifies which portions of src state are to be copied to dst.
 OpenGL/glxcreatecontext(3) -- create a new GLX rendering context
    dpy Specifies the connection to the X server. vis Specifies the visual that defines the frame buffer resources available to the rendering context. It is a pointer to an XVisualInfo structure, not a visual ID or a pointer to a Visual. shareList Specifies the context with which to share display lists. NULL indicates that no sharing is to take place. direct Specifies whether rendering is to be done with a direct connection to the graphics system if possible (True) or through the X server (False)....
 OpenGL/glxcreatecontextwithconfigsgix(3) -- create a new GLX rendering context with specified frame buffer configuration
    dpy Specifies the connection to the X server. config Specifies the GLX frame buffer configuration that defines the frame buffer resources available to the rendering context. render_type Specifies the type of rendering context desired. Must be one of GLX_RGBA_TYPE_SGIX or GLX_COLOR_INDEX_TYPE_SGIX. share_list Specifies the context with which to share display lists and texture objects. NULL indicates that no sharing is to take place. direct Specifies whether rendering is to be done with a direct c...
 OpenGL/glxcreateglxpbuffersgix(3) -- create a GLX pixel buffer
    dpy Specifies the connection to the X server. config Specifies the GLXFBConfig that defines the configuration of the pixel buffer. width Specifies the width of the pixel buffer. height Specifies the height of the pixel buffer. attrib_list Specifies the attributes for the pixel buffer.
 OpenGL/glxcreateglxpixmap(3) -- create an off-screen GLX rendering area
    dpy Specifies the connection to the X server. vis Specifies the visual that defines the structure of the rendering area. It is a pointer to an XVisualInfo structure, not a visual ID or a pointer to a Visual. pixmap Specifies the X pixmap that will be used as the front left color buffer of the off-screen rendering area.
 OpenGL/glxcreateglxpixmapwithconfigsgix(3) -- create an off-screen GLX rendering area with specified frame buffer configuration
    dpy Specifies the connection to the X server. config Specifies the GLX frame buffer configuration that defines the structure of the rendering area. pixmap Specifies the X pixmap that will be used as the front left color buffer of the off-screen rendering area.
 OpenGL/glxcreateglxvideosourcesgix(3) -- create a GLX handle for a video input stream
    dpy A connection to an X server. screen The X screen number of the screen on which the GLX video source should be created. svr A connection to a Video Library video server. path A Video Library video transfer path. nodeClass The class of the VLNode specified by node. node A VLNode which must be a VL_DRAIN node on the video transfer path path.
 OpenGL/glxcreatenewcontext(3) -- create a new GLX rendering context
    dpy Specifies the connection to the X server. config Specifies the GLXFBConfig structure with the desired attributes for the context. render_type Specifies the type of the context to be created. Must be one of GLX_RGBA_TYPE or GLX_COLOR_INDEX_TYPE. share_list Specifies the context with which to share display lists. NULL indicates that no sharing is to take place. share_list Specifies whether rendering is to be done with a direct connection to the graphics system if possible (True) or through the...
 OpenGL/glxcreatepbuffer(3) -- create an off-screen rendering area
    dpy Specifies the connection to the X server. config Specifies a GLXFBConfig structure with the desired attributes for the window. attrib_list Specifies a list of attribute value pairs, which must be terminated with None, or NULL. Accepted attributes are GLX_PBUFFER_WIDTH, GLX_PBUFFER_HEIGHT, GLX_PRESERVED_CONTENTS, and GLX_LARGEST_PBUFFER.
 OpenGL/glxcreatepixmap(3) -- create an off-screen rendering area
    dpy Specifies the connection to the X server. config Specifies a GLXFBConfig structure with the desired attributes for the rendering area. pixmap Specifies the X pixmap to be used as the rendering area. attrib_list Currently unused. This must be set to NULL, or be an empty list (i.e., one in which the first element is None).
 OpenGL/glxcreatewindow(3) -- create an on-screen rendering area
    dpy Specifies the connection to the X server. config Specifies a GLXFBConfig structure with the desired attributes for the window. win Specifies the X window to be used as the rendering area. attrib_list Currently unused. This must be set to NULL, or be an empty list (i.e. one in which the first element is None).
 OpenGL/glxdestroycontext(3) -- destroy a GLX context
    dpy Specifies the connection to the X server. ctx Specifies the GLX context to be destroyed.
 OpenGL/glxdestroyglxpbuffersgix(3) -- destroy a GLX pixel buffer
    dpy Specifies the connection to the X server. pbuf Specifies the GLX pixel buffer to be destroyed.
 OpenGL/glxdestroyglxpixmap(3) -- destroy a GLX pixmap
    dpy Specifies the connection to the X server. pix Specifies the GLX pixmap to be destroyed.
 OpenGL/glxdestroyglxvideosourcesgix(3) -- destroy a GLX video source
    dpy The connection to the X server on which the GLX video source was created. videosource The GLX video source to be destroyed.
 OpenGL/glxdestroyhyperpipeconfigsgix(3) -- destroy a hyperpipe configuration
    dpy Specifies the connection to the X server. hpId The hyperpipe id of the configuration that is to be destroyed.
 OpenGL/glxdestroypbuffer(3) -- destroy an off-screen rendering area
    dpy Specifies the connection to the X server. pbuf Specifies the GLXPbuffer to be destroyed.
 OpenGL/glxdestroypixmap(3) -- destroy an off-screen rendering area
    dpy Specifies the connection to the X server. pix Specifies the GLXPixmap to be destroyed.
 OpenGL/glxdestroywindow(3) -- destroy an on-screen rendering area
    dpy Specifies the connection to the X server. win Specifies the GLXWindow to be destroyed.
 OpenGL/glxfreecontextext(3) -- free client-side memory for imported context
    dpy Specifies the connection to the X server. gc Specifies a GLX rendering context.
 OpenGL/glxgetclientstring(3) -- return a string describing the client
    dpy Specifies the connection to the X server. name Specifies which string is returned. One of GLX_VENDOR, GLX_VERSION, or GLX_EXTENSIONS.
 OpenGL/glxgetconfig(3) -- Get configuration information for GL rendering into an X window
    GLXgetconfig takes the display, screen, and configuration information and returns the data needed to create and render GL into an X window. The "sdesc" input parameter is a null terminated array of "GLXconfig" triples, describing the configuration needed for GL rendering. The return value is a complete description of the actual configuration available. This is useful to check what configuration was available, but it is also needed as an argument to GLXlink(3G). It can be freed with free(3) w...
 standard/glxgetconfig(3) -- Get configuration information for GL rendering into an X window
    GLXgetconfig takes the display, screen, and configuration information and returns the data needed to create and render GL into an X window. The "sdesc" input parameter is a null terminated array of "GLXconfig" triples, describing the configuration needed for GL rendering. The return value is a complete description of the actual configuration available. This is useful to check what configuration was available, but it is also needed as an argument to GLXlink(3G). It can be freed with free(3) w...
 OpenGL/glxgetcontextidext(3) -- get the XID for a context.
    gc Specifies a GLX rendering context.
 OpenGL/glxgetcurrentcontext(3) -- return the current context
    glXGetCurrentContext returns the current context, as specified by glXMakeCurrent. If there is no current context, NULL is returned. glXGetCurrentContext returns client-side information. It does not make a round trip to the server.
 OpenGL/glxgetcurrentdisplay(3) -- get display for current context
    glXGetCurrentDisplay returns the display for the current context. If no context is current, NULL is returned. glXGetCurrentDisplay returns client-side information. It does not make a round-trip to the server, and therefore does not flush any pending events.
 OpenGL/glxgetcurrentdisplayext(3) -- returns the display for the current context
    If there is no current context glXGetCurrentDisplayEXT returns NULL; otherwise, the display for the current context is returned. The display parameter specifies the X connection for which the context was created. No round trip is forced to the server. Unlike most X calls that return a value, glXGetCurrentDisplayEXT does not flush any pending events.
 OpenGL/glxgetcurrentdrawable(3) -- return the current drawable
    glXGetCurrentDrawable returns the current drawable, as specified by glXMakeCurrent or by the draw parameter of glXMakeCurrentReadSGI. If there is no current drawable, None is returned. glXGetCurrentDrawable returns client-side information. It does not make a round trip to the server.
 OpenGL/glxgetcurrentreaddrawable(3) -- return the current drawable
    glXGetCurrentReadDrawable returns the current read drawable, as specified by read parameter of glXMakeContextCurrent. If there is no current drawable, None is returned. glXGetCurrentReadDrawable returns client-side information. It does not make a round-trip to the server.
 OpenGL/glxgetfbconfigattrib(3) -- return information about a GLX frame buffer configuraton
    dpy Specifies the connection to the X server. config Specifies the GLX frame buffer configuration to be queried. attribute Specifies the attribute to be returned. value Returns the requested value.
 OpenGL/glxgetfbconfigattribsgix(3) -- return information about a GLX frame buffer configuraton
    dpy Specifies the connection to the X server. config Specifies the GLX frame buffer configuration to be queried. attribute Specifies the attribute to be returned. value Returns the requested value.
 OpenGL/glxgetfbconfigfromvisualsgix(3) -- return frame buffer configuration that is associated with visual
    dpy Specifies the connection to the X server. vis Specifies the visual that defines the frame buffer resources. It is a pointer to an XVisualInfo structure, not a visual ID or a pointer to a Visual.
 OpenGL/glxgetfbconfigs(3) -- list all GLX frame buffer configurations for a given screen
    dpy Specifies the connection to the X server. screen Specifies the screen number. nelements Returns the number of GLXFBConfigs returned.
 OpenGL/glxgetselectedevent(3) -- returns GLX events that are selected for a window or a GLX pixel buffer
    dpy Specifies the connection to the X server. drawable Specifies a GLX drawable. Must be a GLX pixel buffer or a window. event_mask Returns the events that are selected for drawable.
 OpenGL/glxgetselectedeventsgix(3) -- returns GLX events which are selected for a window or a GLX pixel buffer
    dpy Specifies the connection to the X server. drawable Specifies a GLX drawable. Must be a GLX pixel buffer or a window. mask Returns the events which are selected for drawable.
 OpenGL/glxgetvideosyncsgi(3) -- obtain value of vertical retrace counter
    count Pointer to variable which receives the value of the vertical retrace counter of the graphics pipeline associated with the current context.
 OpenGL/glxgetvisualfromfbconfig(3) -- return visual that is associated with the frame buffer configuration
    dpy Specifies the connection to the X server. config Specifies the GLX frame buffer configuration.
 OpenGL/glxgetvisualfromfbconfigsgix(3) -- return visual that is associated with the frame buffer configuration
    dpy Specifies the connection to the X server. config Specifies the GLX frame buffer configuration.
 OpenGL/glxhyperpipeconfigsgix(3) -- Configure a hyperpipe
    dpy Specifies the connection to the X server. networkId Specifies the physical hyperpipe network id. npipes Specifies the number of pipes in the configuration. cfg An array of participating pipes. hpId Returns the hyperpipe id assigned to this configuration.
 OpenGL/glximportcontextext(3) -- import another process's indirect rendering context.
    dpy Specifies the connection to the X server. contextID Specifies a GLX rendering context.
 OpenGL/glxintro(3) -- Introduction to OpenGL in the X window system
    Below is a minimal example of creating an RGBA-format, X window that's compatible with OpenGL using GLX 1.3 commands. The window is cleared to yellow when the program runs. The program does minimal error checking; all return values should be checked. #include #include #include #include int singleBufferAttributess[] = { GLX_DRAWABLE_TYPE, GLX_WINDOW_BIT, GLX_RENDER_TYPE, GLX_RGBA_BIT, GLX_RED_SIZE, 1, /* Request a single buffered color buffer */ GLX_GREE...
 OpenGL/glxisdirect(3) -- indicate whether direct rendering is enabled
    dpy Specifies the connection to the X server. ctx Specifies the GLX context that is being queried.
 OpenGL/glxjoinswapgroupsgix(3) -- synchronize buffer swaps with other drawables
    dpy Specifies the connection to the X server. drawable Specifies the GLX drawable to be added to the swap group. member Specifies a GLX drawable already in the swap group.
 standard/glxlink(3) -- Configure X window for GL rendering
    Call GLXlink to inform the GL that you intend to render GL into an X window. The "conf" argument should be the same argument which was returned from GLXgetconfig. The entries with "mode" of GLX_WINDOW in the "conf" array must have the value field set to the X window id's of the windows which were created.
 OpenGL/glxmakecontextcurrent(3) -- attach a GLX context to a GLX drawable
    dpy Specifies the connection to the X server. draw Specifies a GLX drawable that to render into. Must be an XID representing a GLXWindow, GLXPixmap, or GLXPbuffer. read Specifies a GLX drawable that to read from. Must be an XID representing a GLXWindow, GLXPixmap, or GLXPbuffer. gc Specifies the GLX context to be bound to read and gc.
 OpenGL/glxmakecurrent(3) -- attach a GLX context to a window or a GLX pixmap
    dpy Specifies the connection to the X server. drawable Specifies a GLX drawable. Must be either an X window ID or a GLX pixmap ID. ctx Specifies a GLX rendering context that is to be attached to drawable.
 OpenGL/glxmakecurrentreadsgi(3) -- attach a GLX context to separate read and write drawables
    dpy Specifies the connection to the X server. draw A GLX drawable that receives the results of OpenGL drawing operations. read A GLX drawable that provides pixels for glReadPixels and glCopyPixels operations. gc A GLX rendering context to be attached to draw and read.
 OpenGL/glxquerychanneldeltassgix(3) -- returns the precision constraints for any frame buffer area that is to be resized to match the video resolutio
    dpy Specifies the connection to the X server. screen Specifies the screen of the X server. channel Specifies the video channel number. dx, dy, dw, dh Precision deltas for the origin and size of the area specified by glXChannelRectSGIX
 OpenGL/glxquerychannelrectsgix(3) -- returns area of frame buffer that is to be resized to match video resolution
    dpy Specifies the connection to the X server. screen Specifies the screen of the X server. channel Specifies the video channel number. x, y, w, h The origin and size of the area of the frame buffer that is being converted to the output resolution of the video channel. (x,y) is relative to the bottom left corner of channel as specified by the current video combination.
 OpenGL/glxquerycontext(3) -- query context information
    dpy Specifies the connection to the X server. ctx Specifies a GLX rendering context. attribute Specifies that a context parameter should be retrieved. Must be one of GLX_FBCONFIG_ID, GLX_RENDER_TYPE, or GLX_SCREEN. value Contains the return value for attribute.
 OpenGL/glxquerycontextinfoext(3) -- returns information about a GLX rendering context
    dpy Specifies the connection to the X server. ctx Specifies a GLX rendering context. attribute Specifies the context attribute to be returned. value Returns the requested value.
 OpenGL/glxquerydrawable(3) -- returns an attribute associated with a GLX drawable
    dpy Specifies the connection to the X server. draw Specifies the GLX drawable to be queried. attribute Specifies the attribute to be returned. value Returns the requested value.
 OpenGL/glxqueryextension(3) -- indicate whether the GLX extension is supported
    dpy Specifies the connection to the X server. errorBase Returns the base error code of the GLX server extension. eventBase Returns the base event code of the GLX server extension.
 OpenGL/glxqueryextensionsstring(3) -- return list of supported extensions
    dpy Specifies the connection to the X server. screen Specifies the screen number.
 OpenGL/glxqueryglxpbuffersgix(3) -- returns information about a GLX pixel buffer
    dpy Specifies the connection to the X server. pbuf Specifies the GLX pixel buffer to be queried. attribute Specifies the attribute to be returned. value Returns the requested value.
 OpenGL/glxqueryhyperpipeconfigsgix(3) -- Query the details of a hyperpipe configuration
    dpy Specifies the connection to the X server. hpId The hyperpipe id to be queried. Hyperpipe ids are assigned incrementally starting from 0. npipes Returns the number of elements in the array GLXHyperpipeConfigSGIX *.
 OpenGL/glxqueryhyperpipenetworksgix(3) -- query the physical connectivity of the hardware
    dpy Specifies the connection to the X server. npipes Returns the number of elements in the array GLXHyperpipeNetworkSGIX *.
 OpenGL/glxquerymaxswapbarrierssgix(3) -- query number of barriers supported on a screen
    dpy Specifies the connection to the X server. screen Specifies a window on the screen. max Returns the number of barriers.
 OpenGL/glxqueryserverstring(3) -- return string describing the server
    dpy Specifies the connection to the X server. screen Specifies the screen number. name Specifies which string is returned: one of GLX_VENDOR, GLX_VERSION, or GLX_EXTENSIONS.
 OpenGL/glxqueryversion(3) -- return the version numbers of the GLX extension
    dpy Specifies the connection to the X server. major Returns the major version number of the GLX server extension. minor Returns the minor version number of the GLX server extension.
 OpenGL/glxselectevent(3) -- select GLX events for a window or a GLX pixel buffer
    dpy Specifies the connection to the X server. drawable Specifies a GLX drawable. Must be a GLX pixel buffer or a window. event_mask Specifies the events to be returned for drawable.
 OpenGL/glxselecteventsgix(3) -- select GLX events for a window or a GLX pixel buffer
    dpy Specifies the connection to the X server. drawable Specifies a GLX drawable. Must be a GLX pixel buffer or a window. mask Specifies the events to returned for drawable.
 OpenGL/glxswapbuffers(3) -- exchange front and back buffers
    dpy Specifies the connection to the X server. drawable Specifies the drawable whose buffers are to be swapped.
 OpenGL/glxswapintervalsgi(3) -- set a minimum time between buffer swaps
    interval Specifies the minimum number of retraces between buffer swaps invoked by glXSwapBuffers.
 standard/glxunlink(3) -- End GL rendering in an X window
    When GLXlink is called, a certain amount of system resources are allocated to support GL rendering in that window. When all rendering to that window is finished, calling GLXunlink will release those resources. The "xWindow" argument to GLXunlink should be the GLX_NORMAL window. Once the normal window is unlinked, any windows which were also linked to auxiliary (i.e. popup or overlay) GLXunlink is a signal that you never intend to do GL drawing in that window again. If more drawing will be done...
 OpenGL/glxusexfont(3) -- create bitmap display lists from an X font
    font Specifies the font from which character glyphs are to be taken. first Specifies the index of the first glyph to be taken. count Specifies the number of glyphs to be taken. listBase Specifies the index of the first display list to be generated.
 OpenGL/glxwaitgl(3) -- complete GL execution prior to subsequent X calls
    GL rendering calls made prior to glXWaitGL are guaranteed to be executed before X rendering calls made after glXWaitGL. Although this same result can be achieved using glFinish, glXWaitGL does not require a round trip to the server, and it is therefore more efficient in cases where client and server are on separate machines. glXWaitGL is ignored if there is no current GLX context.
 OpenGL/glxwaitvideosyncsgi(3) -- wait for vertical retrace
    divisor remainder glXWaitVideoSyncSGI puts the calling process to sleep until the value of the vertical retrace counter modulo divisor equals remainder. count Pointer to variable which receives the value of the vertical retrace counter when the calling process wakes up.
 OpenGL/glxwaitx(3) -- complete X execution prior to subsequent GL calls
    X rendering calls made prior to glXWaitX are guaranteed to be executed before GL rendering calls made after glXWaitX. Although the same result can be achieved using XSync, glXWaitX does not require a round trip to the server, and it is therefore more efficient in cases where client and server are on separate machines. glXWaitX is ignored if there is no current GLX context.
 standard/glxwinset(3) -- Begin GL rendering in an X window
    If GLXwinset succeeds, all subsequent GL rendering calls will occur in "xWindow." If the window is on a remote machine, the DGL will be used to do the drawing. All GL rendering and display list commands will work in the window. gconfig(3G) will have no effect in this window. GLXlink(3G) is used instead to pre-configure the window. drawmode(3G) is also illegal, but by asking for overlay planes with GLXgetconfig(3G), and linking in an overlay window with GLXlink(3G), GLXwinset will draw into the...
 gmatch(3g) -- shell global pattern matching
    gmatch checks whether the null-terminated string str matches the nullterminated pattern string pattern. See the sh(1) section ``File Name Generation'' for a discussion of pattern matching. gmatch returns nonzero if the pattern matches the string, zero if the pattern doesn't. A backslash (`\') is used as an escape character in pattern strings.
 Tk/grab(3) -- Confine pointer and keyboard events to a window sub-tree
    This command implements simple pointer and keyboard grabs for Tk. Tk's grabs are different than the grabs described in the Xlib documentation. When a grab is set for a particular window, Tk restricts all pointer events to the grab window and its descendants in Tk's window hierarchy. Whenever the pointer is within the grab window's subtree, the pointer will behave exactly the same as if there had been no grab at all and all events will be reported in the normal fashion. When the pointer is out...
 grantpt(3c) -- grant access to the slave pseudo-terminal device
    The function grantpt changes the mode and ownership of the slave pseudoterminal device associated with its master pseudo-terminal counter part. fildes is the file descriptor returned from a successful open of the master pseudo-terminal device. A setuid root program [see setuid(2)] is invoked to change the permissions. The user ID of the slave is set to the effective owner of the calling process and the group ID is set to a reserved group. ...
 standard/greset(3) -- resets graphics state
    none
 standard/grgbcolor(3) -- gets the current RGB color values
    red expects a pointer to the location into which you want the system to copy the current red value. green expects a pointer to the location into which you want the system to copy the current green value. blue expects a pointer to the location into which you want the system to copy the current blue value.
 standard/grgbcursor(3) -- obsolete routine
    This routine is obsolete. It continues to function only on IRIS-4D B and G models to provide backwards compatibility. All new development should use its replacement, getcursor.
 standard/grgbmask(3) -- returns the current RGB writemask
    redm expects a pointer to the location into which you want the system to copy the current red writemask value. greenm expects a pointer to the location into which you want the system to copy the current green writemask value. bluem expects a pointer to the location into which you want the system to copy the current blue writemask value.
 grio_action_list(3x) -- atomically execute a list of bandwidth reserve/unreserve actions
    grio_action_list tries to atomically execute a list of bandwidth reserve/unreserve actions as specified in grior_list. num is the total number of actions in the list. The actions are considered to be atomic in the sense that all the actions in the list are executed together. No other action can interfere with the actions in the list once the first action in the list has been initiated. The contents of the list of structures pointed to by grior_list includes the following members: gr_action The t...
 grio_associate_file(3x) -- associate a grio stream id with a specific file
    grio_associate_file marks the file indicated by fd so that when the current process accesses the file it will receive the I/O at the rate guaranteed by the grio stream stream_id.
 grio_query_fs(3x) -- determine the bandwidth remaining on a file system
    grio_query_fs returns the amount of bandwidth available on the file system specified by fs_dev. This bandwidth is expressed as the number of bytes per second that the file system can provide. This ratio can be used as a quick check to determine if the desired bandwidth will be available from a given file system, before calling grio_reserve_file(3X) or grio_reserve_fs(3X). The ggd daemon is queried about the remaining file system bandwidth....
 grio_reserve_file(3x) -- request a guaranteed rate I/O reservation on a file
    grio_reserve_file tries to obtain the I/O-rate guarantee specified by the griop structure on the file associated with fd. The contents of the structure pointed to by griop includes the following members: gr_start Start time of the guarantee in seconds since January 1, 1970. gr_duration Duration of the guarantee in seconds. gr_optime The length of the rate guarantee time quantum in microseconds. gr_opsize The amount of data guaranteed to be read/written within the time quantum. gr_stream_id This ...
 grio_reserve_fs(3x) -- request a guaranteed rate I/O reservation on a file system
    grio_reserve_fs tries to obtain the I/O-rate guarantee specified by the griorp structure on the file system built on the device specified by fs_dev. The contents of the structure pointed to by griorp includes the following members: gr_start Start time of the guarantee in seconds since January 1, 1970. gr_duration Duration of the guarantee in seconds. gr_optime The length of the rate guarantee time quantum in microseconds. gr_opsize The amount of data guaranteed to be read/written within the time...
 grio_unreserve_bw(3x) -- remove an I/O rate guarantee reservation
    grio_unreserve_bw removes the I/O-rate guarantee associated with the stream id specified by grio_stream_id.
 standard/gselect(3) -- puts the system in selecting mode
    buffer expects the buffer into which you want the system to save the contents of the names stack. A name is a 16-bit number, that you load on the name stack just before you called a drawing routine. numname expects the maximum number of names that you want the system to save. This number must not exceed the number of elements in buffer.
 standard/gsync(3) -- waits for a vertical retrace period
    none
 standard/gversion(3) -- returns graphics hardware and library version information
    v expects a pointer to the location into which to copy a string. Reserve at least a 12 character buffer. FUNCTION RETURN VALUE There is no longer any use for the returned value of this function; it will always be zero.
 handle(3x) -- file handle operations
    These functions provide a way to perform certain filesystem operations without using a file descriptor to access filesystem objects. They are intended for use by a limited set of system utilities such as backup programs. They are supported only by the XFS filesystem. Device management capabilities or root privileges are required to use open_by_handle() readlink_by_handle(), attr_multi_by_handle(), attr_list_by_handle(), and fssetdm_by_handle(). Link with the -ldm library to access these function...
 Tcl/handles(3) -- Dynamic, handle addressable tables.
    The Tcl handle facility provides a way to manage table entries that may be referenced by a textual handle from Tcl code. This is provided for applications that need to create data structures in one command, return a reference (i.e. pointer) to that particular data structure and then access that data structure in other commands. An example application is file handles. Page 1 Handles(3Tcl) Handles(3Tcl) A handle consists of a base name, which is some unique, meaningful name, such as `file' and a ...
 Tcl/hash(3) -- procedures to manage hash tables
    Tcl_HashTable *tablePtr (in) Address of hash table structure (for all procedures but Tcl_InitHashTable, this must have been initialized by previous call to Tcl_InitHashTable). int keyType (in) Kind of keys to use for new hash table. Must be either TCL_STRING_KEYS, TCL_ONE_WORD_KEYS, or an integer value greater than 1. Page 1 Tcl_Hash(3Tcl) Tcl_Hash(3Tcl) char *key (in) Key to use for probe into table. Exact form depends on keyType used to create table. int *newPtr (out) The word at *newPtr is se...
 hash(3) -- procedures to manage hash tables
    Tcl_HashTable *tablePtr (in) Address of hash table structure (for all procedures but Tcl_InitHashTable, this must have been initialized by previous call to Tcl_InitHashTable). int keyType (in) Kind of keys to use for new hash table. Must be either TCL_STRING_KEYS, TCL_ONE_WORD_KEYS, or an integer value greater than 1. Page 1 Tcl_Hash(3Tcl) Tcl_Hash(3Tcl) char *key (in) Key to use for probe into table. Exact form depends on keyType used to create table. int *newPtr (out) The word at *newPtr is se...
 libblas/hemm(3) -- BLAS level three Hermitian Matrix Product FORTRAN 77 SYNOPSIS subroutine zhemm( side,uplo,m,n,alpha,a,lda,b,ld
    zhemm and chemm perform one of the matrix-matrix operations C := alpha*A*B + beta*C, or C := alpha*B*A + beta*C, where alpha and beta are scalars, A is an hermitian matrix and B and C are m by n matrices.
 libblas/her2k(3) -- BLAS level three Hermitian Rank 2K Update FORTRAN 77 SYNOPSIS subroutine zher2k( uplo,trans,n,k,alpha,a,lda,b,
    zher2k and cher2k perform one of the hermitian rank 2k operations C := alpha*A*conjg( B' ) + conjg( alpha )*B*conjg( A' ) + beta*C, or C := alpha*conjg( A' )*B + conjg( alpha )*conjg( B' )*A + beta*C, where alpha and beta are scalars with beta real, C is an n by n hermitian matrix and A and B are n by k matrices in the first case and k by n matrices in the second case. Page 1 _HER2K(3F) _HER2K(3F) PARAMETERS uplo On entry, uplo specifies whether the matrix is an upper or lower triangular mat...
 libblas/herk(3) -- BLAS level three Hermitian Rank K Update FORTRAN 77 SYNOPSIS subroutine zherk(uplo,trans,n,k,alpha,a,lda,beta,
    zherk and cherk perform one of the matrix-matrix operations C := alpha*A*conjg( A' ) + beta*C, or C := alpha*conjg( A' )*A + beta*C, where alpha and beta are real scalars, C is an n by n hermitian matrix and A is an n by k matrix in the first case and a k by n matrix in the second case. Page 1 _HERK(3F) _HERK(3F)
 standard/histogram(3) -- modifies pixel transfers to compute a histogram
    op one of the symbolic constants: (parameters that affect lrectread, lrectwrite, rectcopy pixel transfers) HIST_ENABLE, default value:0. Enable hgram in lrectread, lrectwrite and rectcopy pixel transfers. Value specifies the number of equally spaced bins in the histogram. Valid values: 1 to 4096. HIST_DISABLE, disable hgram. HIST_CLEAR, clear every histogram bin to value value specifies the number of equally spaced bins in histogram if op is HIST_ENABLE. Valid values: 1 to 4096. specifies the va...
 Tcl/history(3) -- Manipulate the history list
    The history command performs one of several operations related to recently-executed commands recorded in a history list. Each of these recorded commands is referred to as an ``event''. When specifying an event to the history command, the following forms may be used: [1] A number: if positive, it refers to the event with that number (all events are numbered starting at 1). If the number is negative, it selects an event relative to the current event (-1 refers to the previous event, -2 to the on...
 complib/HQR(3) -- EISPACK routine. This subroutine finds the eigenvalues of a REAL UPPER Hessenberg matrix by the QR method.
    On INPUT NM must be set to the row dimension of two-dimensional array parameters as declared in the calling program dimension statement. N is the order of the matrix. LOW and IGH are integers determined by the balancing subroutine BALANC. If BALANC has not been used, set LOW=1, IGH=N. H contains the upper Hessenberg matrix. Information about the transformations used in the reduction to Hessenberg form by ELMHES or ORTHES, if performed, is stored in the remaining triangle under the Hessenberg mat...
 complib/HQR2(3) -- EISPACK routine. This subroutine finds the eigenvalues and eigenvectors of a REAL UPPER Hessenberg matrix by t
    On INPUT NM must be set to the row dimension of two-dimensional array parameters as declared in the calling program dimension statement. N is the order of the matrix. LOW and IGH are integers determined by the balancing subroutine BALANC. If BALANC has not been used, set LOW=1, IGH=N. H contains the upper Hessenberg matrix. Z contains the transformation matrix produced by ELTRAN after the reduction by ELMHES, or by ORTRAN after the reduction by ORTHES, if performed. If the eigenvectors of the He...
 hsearch(3c) -- manage hash search tables
    hsearch is a hash-table search routine generalized from Knuth (6.4) Algorithm D. It returns a pointer into a hash table indicating the location at which an entry can be found. The comparison function used by hsearch is strcmp [see string(3C)]. item is a structure of type ENTRY (defined in the search.h header file) containing two pointers: item.key points to the comparison key, and...
 complib/HTRIB3(3) -- EISPACK routine. This subroutine forms the eigenvectors of a COMPLEX HERMITIAN matrix by back transforming tho
    On INPUT NM must be set to the row dimension of two-dimensional array parameters as declared in the calling program dimension statement. N is the order of the matrix. A contains information about the unitary transformations used in the reduction by HTRID3. TAU contains further information about the transformations. M IS the number of eigenvectors to be back transformed. ZR contains the eigenvectors to be back transformed in its first M columns. On OUTPUT ZR and ZI contain the real and imaginary ...
 complib/HTRIBK(3) -- EISPACK routine. This subroutine forms the eigenvectors of a COMPLEX HERMITIAN matrix by back transforming tho
    On INPUT NM must be set to the row dimension of two-dimensional array parameters as declared in the calling program dimension statement. N is the order of the matrix. AR and AI contain information about the unitary trans- formations used in the reduction by HTRIDI in their full lower triangles except for the diagonal of AR. TAU contains further information about the transformations. M is the number of eigenvectors to be back transformed. ZR contains the eigenvectors to be back transformed in its...
 complib/HTRID3(3) -- EISPACK routine. This subroutine reduces a COMPLEX HERMITIAN matrix, stored as a single square array, to a rea
    On INPUT NM must be set to the row dimension of two-dimensional array parameters as declared in the calling program dimension statement. N is the order of the matrix. A contains the lower triangle of the complex hermitian input matrix. The real parts of the matrix elements are stored in the full lower triangle of A, and the imaginary parts are stored in the transposed positions of the strict upper triangle of A. No storage is required for the zero imaginary parts of the diagonal elements. On OUT...
 complib/HTRIDI(3) -- EISPACK routine. This subroutine reduces a COMPLEX HERMITIAN matrix to a real symmetric tridiagonal matrix usi
    On INPUT NM must be set to the row dimension of two-dimensional array parameters as declared in the calling program dimension statement. N is the order of the matrix. AR and AI contain the real and imaginary parts, respectively, of the complex hermitian input matrix. Only the lower triangle of the matrix need be supplied. On OUTPUT AR and AI contain information about the unitary trans- formations used in the reduction in their full lower triangles. Their strict upper triangles and the diagonal o...
 f90/huge(3) -- Returns the largest number in the integer or real numeric model
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 OpenGL/hyperpipe(3) -- hyperpipe extension
    The main functions are: glXQueryHyperpipeNetworkSGIX - query the physical hyperpipe network. glXHyperpipeConfigSGIX - configure the hyperpipe network. glXQueryHyperpipeConfigSGIX - query a particular hyperpipe configuration. glXDestroyHyperpipeConfigSGIX - destroy a hyperpipe configuration. glXBindHyperpipeSGIX - bind a process and rendering context to a hyperpipe configuration.
 standard/hypot(3) -- Euclidean distance, complex absolute value
    hypot(x,y), fhypot(x,y), hypotf(x,y), hypotl(x,y), cabs(x,y), fcabs(x,y), cabsf(x,y), and cabsl(x,y) return sqrt(x*x+y*y) computed in such a way that overflow will not happen, and underflow occurs only if the final result deserves it. fhypot, hypotf, fcabs, and cabsf are the same functions as hypot and cabs but for the float data type. hypotl, and cabsl are the same functions as hypot and cabs but for the long double data type....
 perl5/I18N::Collate(3) -- compare 8-bit scalar data according to the current locale *** WARNING: starting from the Perl version 5.003_06
    This module provides you with objects that will collate according to your national character set, provided that the POSIX setlocale() function is supported on your system. You can compare $s1 and $s2 above with $s1 le $s2 to extract the data itself, you'll need a dereference: $$s1 This module uses POSIX::setlocale(). The basic collation conversion is done by strxfrm() which terminates at NUL characters being a decent C routine. collate_xfrm() handles embedded NUL characters gracefully. The avai...
 f90/iachar(3) -- Returns the position of a character in the ASCII collating sequence
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/iand(3) -- FORTRAN bitwise boolean functions
    bool is the general name for the bit field manipulation intrinsic functions and subroutines from the FORTRAN Military Standard (MIL-STD1753). and, or and xor return the value of the binary operations on their arguments. not is a unary operator returning the one's complement of its argument. ior, iand, not, ieor - return the same results as and, or, not, and xor. lshift and rshift return the value of the first argument shifted left or right, respectively, the number of times specified by the sec...
 f90/ibclr(3) -- FORTRAN bitwise boolean functions
    bool is the general name for the bit field manipulation intrinsic functions and subroutines from the FORTRAN Military Standard (MIL-STD1753). and, or and xor return the value of the binary operations on their arguments. not is a unary operator returning the one's complement of its argument. ior, iand, not, ieor - return the same results as and, or, not, and xor. lshift and rshift return the value of the first argument shifted left or right, respectively, the number of times specified by the sec...
 f90/ibits(3) -- FORTRAN bitwise boolean functions
    bool is the general name for the bit field manipulation intrinsic functions and subroutines from the FORTRAN Military Standard (MIL-STD1753). and, or and xor return the value of the binary operations on their arguments. not is a unary operator returning the one's complement of its argument. ior, iand, not, ieor - return the same results as and, or, not, and xor. lshift and rshift return the value of the first argument shifted left or right, respectively, the number of times specified by the sec...
 f90/ibset(3) -- FORTRAN bitwise boolean functions
    bool is the general name for the bit field manipulation intrinsic functions and subroutines from the FORTRAN Military Standard (MIL-STD1753). and, or and xor return the value of the binary operations on their arguments. not is a unary operator returning the one's complement of its argument. ior, iand, not, ieor - return the same results as and, or, not, and xor. lshift and rshift return the value of the first argument shifted left or right, respectively, the number of times specified by the sec...
 complib/icmax1(3) -- find the index of the element whose real part has maximum absolute value
    ICMAX1 finds the index of the element whose real part has maximum absolute value. Based on ICAMAX from Level 1 BLAS. The change is to use the 'genuine' absolute value. Contributed by Nick Higham for use with CLACON.
 standard/iconsize(3) -- specifies the icon size of a window
    x expects the width (in pixels) for the icon. y expects the height (in pixels) for the icon.
 standard/icontitle(3) -- assigns the icon title for the current graphics window.
    name expects a pointer to the string containing the icon title.
 iconv(3c) -- code conversion function
    The iconv() converts a string of characters from one codeset, in a input buffer, into a sequence of corresponding characters in another codeset in a output buffer. The cd is a conversion descriptor that was returned by the preceding iconv_open() function call which specifies the correct codeset converter. The inbuf points to a variable that points to the beginning of the input buffer that has the characters to be converted, and the variable pointed by in...
 iconv_close(3c) -- code conversion deallocation function
    The iconv_close() function deallocates the conversion descriptor cd. It deallocates all other associated resources allocated by iconv_open() also. If a file descriptor is used to implement the type iconv_t, that file descriptor will be closed. The iconv_close() function may fail under the following conditions and set errno to the suitable value. [EBADF] The...
 iconv_open(3c) -- code conversion allocation function
    The iconv_open() function returns a conversion descriptor that points to the suitable codeset converter. It describes a conversion from the codeset specified by the string pointed to by the fromcode argument to the codeset specified by the string pointed to by the tocode argument. A conversion descriptor can be used in a process until that process closes it. If a file descriptor is used to implement conversion descriptors, the FD_CLOEXEC flag...
 ftn/idate(3) -- return date or time in numerical form
    Idate returns the current date in the variables imon, iday, and iyear. The order is: mon, day, year. Month will be in the range 1-12. Year will be returned as the last two digits. Itime returns the current time in iarray. The order is: hour, minute, second.
 Tk/idtowindow(3) -- Find Tk's window information for an X window
    Display *display (in) X display containing the window. Window window (in) X id for window.
 f90/ieee_binary_scale(3) -- Returns y multiplied by 2**n
    UNICOS/mk and IRIX systems CRAY T90 systems that support IEEE floating-point arithmetic
 f90/ieee_class(3) -- Returns the class to which x belongs
    UNICOS/mk and IRIX systems CRAY T90 systems that support IEEE floating-point arithmetic
 f90/ieee_copy_sign(3) -- Returns x with the sign of y
    UNICOS/mk and IRIX systems CRAY T90 systems that support IEEE floating-point arithmetic
 f90/ieee_exponent(3) -- Returns the unbiased exponent of x
    UNICOS/mk and IRIX systems CRAY T90 systems that support IEEE floating-point arithmetic
 f90/ieee_finite(3) -- Tests for x being greater than negative infinity and less than positive infinity.
    UNICOS/mk and IRIX systems CRAY T90 systems that support IEEE floating-point arithmetic
 f90/ieee_int(3) -- Converts x to an integral value
    UNICOS/mk and IRIX systems CRAY T90 systems that support IEEE floating-point arithmetic
 f90/ieee_is_nan(3) -- Tests for x being a NaN
    UNICOS/mk and IRIX systems CRAY T90 systems that support IEEE floating-point arithmetic
 f90/ieee_next_after(3) -- Returns the next representable neighbor of x in the direction toward y
    UNICOS/mk and IRIX systems CRAY T90 systems that support IEEE floating-point arithmetic
 f90/ieee_real(3) -- Converts x to a real value
    UNICOS/mk and IRIX systems CRAY T90 systems that support IEEE floating-point arithmetic
 f90/ieee_remainder(3) -- Returns the remainder of x divided by y
    UNICOS/mk and IRIX systems CRAY T90 systems that support IEEE floating-point arithmetic
 f90/ieee_unordered(3) -- Tests for x or y being a NaN
    UNICOS/mk and IRIX systems CRAY T90 systems that support IEEE floating-point arithmetic
 f90/ieor(3) -- FORTRAN bitwise boolean functions
    bool is the general name for the bit field manipulation intrinsic functions and subroutines from the FORTRAN Military Standard (MIL-STD1753). and, or and xor return the value of the binary operations on their arguments. not is a unary operator returning the one's complement of its argument. ior, iand, not, ieor - return the same results as and, or, not, and xor. lshift and rshift return the value of the first argument shifted left or right, respectively, the number of times specified by the sec...
 Tcl/if(3) -- Execute scripts conditionally
    The if command evaluates expr1 as an expression (in the same way that expr evaluates its argument). The value of the expression must be a boolean (a numeric value, where 0 is false and anything is true, or a | string value such as true or yes for true and false or no for false); if it is true then body1 is executed by passing it to the Tcl interpreter. Otherwise expr2 is evaluated as an expression and if it is true then body2 is executed, and so on. If none of the expressions evaluates to true t...
 ifl/IFL(3) -- overview of Image Format Library
    The Image Format Library characterizes images according to the common attributes described in the following sections. Page 3 IFL(3) Image Format Library C++ Reference Manual IFL(3)
 ifl/iflAlias(3) -- Alias format image file
    iflFile, ilFileImg PPPPaaaaggggeeee 1111
 ifl/iflBitArray(3) -- limited subscriptable bit array class
    #include
 ifl/iflBMP(3) -- Windows bitmap format image file
    This Image Format Library provides support to read/write image files stored in Windows Bitmap Image File (BMP) format. The default extension for image files in the BMP format is '.bmp'. When you create a file with that extension IFL will assume you want the BMP format, unless you override it with the iflFormat parameter. In addition to all the standard iflFile methods, this format supprts an number of format specific operations via the getItem() and setItem() methods. The tag values supported ...
 ifl/iflClassList(3) -- class inheritance chain
    #include
 ifl/iflColormap(3) -- class for defining colormaps
    #include
 ifl/iflColorModelChans(3) -- color model utilities
    The iflColorModelChans() function is provided to return the number of channels associated with a color model; it is standalone and is not a member function of any object. Given a color model cm, this function returns the number of channels associated with it. For example, for the iflRGB color model, a value of 3 will be returned; for the iflMinWhite color model a value of 1 will be returned. A value of zero is returned if the color model is iflMultiSpectral. The iflColorModelHasAlpha() function ...
 ifl/iflConfig(3) -- class for pixel abstraction
    #include
 ifl/iflDatabase(3) -- access to image file format database
    #include
 ifl/iflDataSize(3) -- convenience functions for using IFL data types
    These functions operate on IFL data types and are provided for convenience. Each function is standalone and is not a member function of any object. The data types used in the IFL are specified by the enumerated type, iflType, as defined in . The following IFL data types are valid: iflBit, iflUChar, iflChar, iflUShort, iflShort, iflUInt, iflInt, iflFloat, iflDouble. iflDataClosestType() returns the data type closest to the desired type in the set specified by the mask of data type...
 ifl/iflDictionary(3) -- implements a dictionary of named elements
    #include
 ifl/iflError(3) -- error handling
    These functions are used to report errors and control how those errors are handled in the IFL environment. These facilities can also be used to generate debugging messages. The routines are grouped into three functional areas: error reporting, error handling, and status code translation.
 ifl/iflFile(3) -- abstraction for image file access
    #include
 ifl/iflFileConfig(3) -- iflFile configuration descriptor
    #include
 ifl/iflFileDesc(3) -- IFL's image file descriptor
    #include
 ifl/iflFIT(3) -- FIT file format
    This FIT image file format is an SGI internally-developed format, it was primarly intended as a programming example, but like most image formats has taken on a life of its own. The FIT format supports the full flexibility of the IFL model: all data types, color models, orders, orientations and page sizes are supported. The FIT format can be especially useful with mutli-spectral imagery with large number of channels as it supports paging in the channel dimension. It can also be a handy format for...
 ifl/iflFormat(3) -- abstraction of an image file format
    #include
 ifl/iflGeoTIFF(3) -- GeoTIFF support for IFL TIFF files
    The GeoTIFF file format is an extension to the TIFF format. To minimize the amount of recoding needed for existing GeoTIFF applications, access to the GeoTIFF extensions are made through the GTIF structure supplied by the freeware GeoTIFF library. Therefore, the IFL GeoTIFF support consists only of the capability to create GTIF structures from an open iflFile object. iflGTIFNew() GTIF* iflGTIFNew(iflFile* file) Construct a GTIF structure for file. If file is not a TIFF file, then NULL is returne...
 ifl/iflGIF(3) -- GIF format image file
    This Image Format Library provides support to read/write image files stored in Compuserve Graphics Image File (GIF) format. The default extension for image files in the GIF format is '.gif'. When you create a file with that extension IFL will assume you want the GIF format, unless you override it with the iflFormat parameter. In addition to all the standard iflFile methods, this format supprts an number of format specific operations via the getItem() and setItem() methods. The tag values suppo...
 ifl/iflHashTable(3) -- base classes from which hash table implementations may be derived
    #include
 ifl/iflJFIF(3) -- a JFIF formatted image file
    This IFL format provides support for reading and writing image files with the JFIF format, Version 4. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. This format implements JPEG image compression and decompression. JPEG is intended for compressing "real-world" scenes; cartoons and other non-realistic images are not its strong suit. JPEG is lossy, meaning that the output image is not necessarily identical to the input image. Hence you must not use JPEG if you have to h...
 ifl/iflList(3) -- simple doubly-linked list
    #include
 ifl/iflListItem(3) -- an element of an doubly linked list (iflList or iflMultiList)
    #include
 ifl/iflListIter(3) -- iterators for iflList and iflMultiList
    #include
 ifl/iflLut(3) -- base class for defining look-up tables
    #include
 ifl/iflMinMax(3) -- simple min/max template functions
    This header defines a set of simple inline functions to determine the minimum or maximum of two input values. iflMin() returns the minimum of a and b. iflMax() returns the maximum of a and b. There are also overloaded versions that return the min of 3 or 4 paramters. Since these are template function they can be used with any data type that < and > make sense on. PPPPaaaaggggeeee 1111...
 ifl/iflMT(3) -- a multi-track movie file
    Movie files consist of image and audio data, which are stored in parallel tracks. A movie file may consist of multiple tracks of data, and each track may contain either image or audio information. A movie file's multi-track structure is very useful in multi-media applications where visual output in one track has to be synchronized with audio output in another. This structure, which allows related data to be grouped together while remaining in separate and distinct tracks, makes movie files a lo...
 ifl/iflName(3) -- named element in an iflDictionary
    #include
 ifl/iflNITF(3) -- NITF file format
    The Image Format Library (IFL) provides support for reading and writing image files with the National Imagery Transmission Format (NITF), Version 2.0. The format has been designed for transmitting the contents of a briefing boards from one location to another. As such, it contains support for storing both imagery and its annotations. The IFL interface is used to directly access the imagery sections, while the segment interface, described below, is used to access the remaining objects contained w...
 ifl/iflPCD(3) -- Kodak Photo CD Image Pac file format
    iflFile, iflPCDO PPPPaaaaggggeeee 2222
 ifl/iflPCDO(3) -- Kodak Photo CD Overview Pac file format
    iflFile, iflPCD PPPPaaaaggggeeee 1111
 ifl/iflPixel(3) -- class for pixel abstraction
    #include
 ifl/iflPNG(3) -- a PNG formatted image file
    The Image Format Library provides support for reading and writing image files with the Portable Network Graphics format (PNG), revision 0.88. This file format is suitable for archiving multicolor and monochromatic image data. As specified by the PNG Compression field, iflPNG can support several compression algorithms. Currently only the zlib deflate/inflate is defined. Note that it is not possible to specify that no compression should be performed but the degree of compression can be controlled ...
 ifl/iflPPM(3) -- PPM file format
    This IFL format provides support for reading and writing image files with the Portable Bitmap format (PPM). This file format is suitable for archiving multicolor and monochromatic image data. It includes the formats PPM, PGM, PBM, PNM, RPPM, RPGM, RPBM, and RPNM. The default extensions for image files in the PPM format are '.ppm', When you create a file with one of these extensions IFL will assume you want the PPM format, unless you override it with the iflFormat parameter. In addition to all ...
 ifl/iflRaw(3) -- raw image file format
    iflFile, ilFileImg PPPPaaaaggggeeee 4444
 ifl/iflSGI(3) -- SGI format image file
    iflFile, ilFileImg PPPPaaaaggggeeee 1111
 ifl/iflSGIColormap(3) -- default SGI colormap
    #include
 ifl/iflSize(3) -- defines the size of an IL image
    #include
 ifl/iflSOFTIMAGE(3) -- SOFTIMAGE format image file
    This Image Format Library provides support to read/write image files stored in SOFTIMAGE format.
 ifl/iflTIFF(3) -- a TIFF formatted image file
    The Image Format Library provides support for reading and writing image files with the Tag Image File format (TIFF), Revision 6.0. This file format is suitable for archiving multicolor and monochromatic image data. As specified by the TIFF Compression field, iflTIFF supports several compression algorithms, including: no compression, Group 3 Facsimile compression, Group 4 Facsimile compression, Lemple-Ziv & Welch compression, PackBits compression, and JPEG compression. iflTIFF also uses the follo...
 ifl/iflTile2D(3) -- defines a simple 2-D rectangle
    #include
 ifl/iflTile3D(3) -- defines a simple 3-D rectangle
    #include
 ifl/iflTileIter(3) -- tile iterator
    #include
 ifl/iflTypeNames(3) -- convenience functions IFL enumerated types to strings
    These functions operate on various IFL enumerated type values and are provided for convenience. Each function is stand-alone and is not a member function of any object. The enumerated types used in the IFL are defined in . Any values beyond those defined in the header file will be translated as "unknown". To translate an iflDataType value to it's string equivalent, use iflDataTypeName() The IFL data types will be translated as follows: iflBit bit iflUChar unsigned char iflChar...
 ifl/iflXBM(3) -- XBM format image file
    iflFile, ilFileImg PPPPaaaaggggeeee 1111
 ifl/iflXPM(3) -- XPM format image file
    iflFile, ilFileImg PPPPaaaaggggeeee 1111
 ifl/iflYUV(3) -- YUV format image file
    This Image Format Library provides support to read/write image files stored in YUV format. Supports 8-bit CCIR-601 NSTC/PAL YUV format in fields/frames. The CCIR601 active video sizes supported are: NTSC 720 pixels x 486 lines (frame format) 720 pixels x 243 lines (field format) PAL 720 pixels x 576 lines (frame format) 720 pixels x 288 lines (field format) When creating YUV formatted files, the file name must specify the particular standard to follow and the format for the output image. The for...
 complib/iir1d(3) -- 1D recursive convolution in the time domain. FORTRAN SPECIFICATION subroutine SIIR1D( in_put, incinp, i0_inp,
    SIIR1D, DIIR1D CIIR1D and ZIIR1D compute a 1D convolution in the time domain : O(j) = (1/F(0)) * { I(j) - Sum[ O(i) * F(j-i) ] }, for i=1,...,(j-1)
 complib/iir2d(3) -- 2D Convolution in the time domain. FORTRAN SPECIFICATION subroutine SIIR2D( f, incf, ldf, ifx0, n_fx, ify0, n_
    SIIR2D, DIIR2D, CIIR2D and ZIIR2D compute a 2D convolution in the time domain: h(i,j) = beta * h(i,j) + alpha * Sum.Sum[ f(k,l) * g(i-k,j-l) ]
 complib/iirm1d(3) -- N 1D convolutions in the time domain. FORTRAN SPECIFICATION subroutine SIIRM1D( f, incf, ldf, ifx0, n_fx, ny,
    SIIRM1D, DIIRM1D, CIIRM1D and DIIRM1D compute N 1D convolutions in the time domain : h(i,j) = beta * h(i,j) + alpha * Sum[ f(k,j) * g(i-k) ] with j=1,...,N _IIRM1D can be used instead of _IIR2D when the 2D filter can be decomposed into the convolution of two 1D filters. For example: ------------------ ------------------ ------------------ | 0.25 -.50 0.25 | | 0. -.50 0. | | 0. 0. 0. | | -.50 1.00 -.50 | = | 0. 1.00 0. | (*) | -.50 1.00 -.50 | | 0.25 -.50 0.25 | | 0. -.50 0. | | 0. 0. 0. | |_____...
 complib/ilaenv(3) -- i called from the LAPACK routines to choose problem-dependent parameters for the local environment
    ILAENV is called from the LAPACK routines to choose problem-dependent parameters for the local environment. See ISPEC for a description of the parameters. This version provides a set of parameters which should give good, but not optimal, performance on many of the currently available computers. Users are encouraged to modify this subroutine to set the tuning parameters for their particular machine using the option and problem size information in the arguments. This routine will not function corr...
 standard/ilbuffer(3) -- allocates framebuffer space to hold temporary image processing results
    buffers the number of 12bit-per-component screen-sized buffers requested FUNCTION RETURN VALUE The returned value of the function is the number of buffers granted.
 standard/ildraw(3) -- selects a previously allocted ilbuffer as the drawing destination
    buffer expects a value from 1 to the number of buffers returned by ilbuffer(buffers);
 ftn/imag(3) -- FORTRAN imaginary part of complex argument
    aimag returns the imaginary part of its single-precision complex argument. dimag returns the double-precision imaginary part of its double-complex argument. qimag returns the real*16 imaginary part of its complex*32 argument. The generic form imag may be used with impunity as its argument will determine the type of the returned value. PPPPaaaaggggeeee 1111
 Tk/image(3) -- Create and manipulate images
    The image command is used to create, delete, and query images. It can take several different forms, depending on the option argument. The legal forms are: image create type ?name? ?option value ...? Creates a new image and returns its name. type specifies the type of the image, which must be one of the types currently defined (e.g., bitmap). name specifies the name for the image; if it is omitted then Tk picks a name of the form imagex, where x is an integer. There may be any number of option-va...
 standard/imakebackground(3) -- registers the screen background process
    none
 Tk/imgchanged(3) -- notify widgets that image needs to be redrawn
    Tk_ImageMaster imageMaster (in) Token for image, which was passed to image's createProc when the image was created. int x (in) X-coordinate of upper-left corner of region that needs redisplay (measured from upperleft corner of image). int y (in) Y-coordinate of upper-left corner of region that needs redisplay (measured from upperleft corner of image). int width (in) Width of region that needs to be redrawn, in pixels. int height (in) Height of region that needs to be redrawn, in pixels. int ima...
 complib/IMTQL1(3) -- EISPACK routine. This subroutine finds the eigenvalues of a SYMMETRIC TRIDIAGONAL matrix by the implicit QL me
    On INPUT N is the order of the matrix. D contains the diagonal elements of the input matrix. E contains the subdiagonal elements of the input matrix in its last N-1 positions. E(1) is arbitrary. On OUTPUT D contains the eigenvalues in ascending order. If an error exit is made, the eigenvalues are correct and ordered for indices 1,2,...IERR-1, but may not be the smallest eigenvalues. E has been destroyed. IERR is set to ZERO for normal return, J if the J-th eigenvalue has not been determined afte...
 complib/IMTQL2(3) -- EISPACK routine. This subroutine finds the eigenvalues and eigenvectors of a SYMMETRIC TRIDIAGONAL matrix by t
    On INPUT NM must be set to the row dimension of two-dimensional array parameters as declared in the calling program dimension statement. N is the order of the matrix. D contains the diagonal elements of the input matrix. E contains the subdiagonal elements of the input matrix in its last N-1 positions. E(1) is arbitrary. Z contains the transformation matrix produced in the reduction by TRED2, if performed. If the eigenvectors of the tridiagonal matrix are desired, Z must contain the identity mat...
 complib/IMTQLV(3) -- EISPACK routine. This subroutine is a variant of IMTQL1.
    This subroutine finds the eigenvalues of a SYMMETRIC TRIDIAGONAL matrix by the implicit QL method and associates with them their corresponding submatrix indices. On INPUT N is the order of the matrix. D contains the diagonal elements of the input matrix. E contains the subdiagonal elements of the input matrix in its last N-1 positions. E(1) is arbitrary. E2 contains the squares of the corresponding elements of E. E2(1) is arbitrary. On OUTPUT D and E are unaltered. Elements of E2, corresponding ...
 Tcl/incr(3) -- Increment the value of a variable
    Increments the value stored in the variable whose name is varName. The value of the variable must be an integer. If increment is supplied then its value (which must be an integer) is added to the value of variable varName; otherwise 1 is added to varName. The new value is stored as a decimal string in variable varName and also returned as result.
 Tcl/incrTcl(3) -- Object-oriented extensions to Tcl
    [incr Tcl] provides object-oriented extensions to Tcl, much as C++ provides object-oriented extensions to C. The emphasis of this work, however, is not to create a whiz-bang object-oriented programming environment. Rather, it is to support more structured programming practices in Tcl without changing the flavor of the language. More than anything else, [incr Tcl] provides a means of encapsulating related procedures together with their shared data in a local namespace that is hidden from the outs...
 f90/index(3) -- return location of FORTRAN substring
    The result of index is an integer value indicating the position in the first argument of the first substring which is identical to the second argument. The result of index('ABCDEF','CD'), for example, would be 3. If no substring of the first argument matches the second argument, the result is zero. index returns the result type integer*2 if the -i2 compile option is in effect; otherwise, the result type is integer*4. Page 1 INDEX(3I) Last changed: 1-6-98...
 ftn/index(3) -- return location of FORTRAN substring
    The result of index is an integer value indicating the position in the first argument of the first substring which is identical to the second argument. The result of index('ABCDEF','CD'), for example, would be 3. If no substring of the first argument matches the second argument, the result is zero. index returns the result type integer*2 if the -i2 compile option is in effect; otherwise, the result type is integer*4. Page 1 INDEX(3I) Last changed: 1-6-98...
 inet(3c) -- Internet address manipulation routines
    The routines inet_aton, inet_addr and inet_network interpret character strings representing numbers expressed in the Internet standard "." (dot) notation. The inet_aton routine interprets the specified character string as an Internet address, placing the address into the structure provided. It returns 1 if the string was successfully interpreted, or 0 if the string is invalid. The inet_addr and inet_network functions return numbers suitable for use as Internet addresses and Internet network nu...
 inet(3n) -- Internet address manipulation
    The routines inet_addr and inet_network each interpret character strings representing numbers expressed in the Internet standard `.' notation, returning numbers suitable for use as Internet addresses and Internet network numbers, respectively. The routine inet_makeaddr takes an Internet network number and a local network address and constructs an Internet address from it. The routines ine...
 Tcl/info(3) -- Return information about the state of the Tcl interpreter
    This command provides information about various internals of the Tcl interpreter. The legal option's (which may be abbreviated) are: info args procname Returns a list containing the names of the arguments to procedure procname, in order. Procname must be the name of a Tcl command procedure. info body procname Returns the body of procedure procname. Procname must be the name of a Tcl command procedure. info cmdcount Returns a count of the total number of commands that have been invoked in this i...
 initgroups(3c) -- initialize group access list
    initgroups and BSDinitgroups read through the group file (/etc/group) and set up, using the appropriate version of the setgroups call, the group access list for the user specified in name. The basegid is automatically included in the groups list. Typically this value is the group number from the password file. The difference between initgroups and BSDinitgroups is the type of the basegid parameter. Both of these routines use the sysconf(_SC_NGROUPS_MAX) system call to determine the maximum numbe...
 standard/initnames(3) -- initializes the name stack
    none
 insque(3c) -- insert/remove element from a queue
    insque and remque manipulate queues built from doubly linked lists. Each element in the queue must be in the following form: struct qelem { struct qelem *q_forw; struct qelem *q_back; char q_data[]; }; insque inserts elem in a queue immediately after pred. If ...
 perl5/integer(3) -- Perl pragma to compute arithmetic in integer instead of double
    This tells the compiler that it's okay to use integer operations from here to the end of the enclosing BLOCK. On many machines, this doesn't matter a great deal for most computations, but on those without floating point hardware, it can make a big difference. See the section on Pragmatic Modules in the perlmod manpage. PPPPaaaaggggeeee 1111
 Tk/internatom(3) -- manage cache of X atoms
    Tk_Window tkwin (in) Token for window. Used to map atom or name relative to a particular display. char *name (in) String name for which atom is desired. Atom atom (in) Atom for which corresponding string name is desired.
 Tcl/interp(3) -- client-visible fields of interpreter structures
    The Tcl_CreateInterp procedure returns a pointer to a Tcl_Interp structure. This pointer is then passed into other Tcl procedures to process commands in the interpreter and perform other operations on the interpreter. Interpreter structures contain many many fields that are used by Tcl, but only three that may be accessed by clients: result, freeProc, and errorLine. The result and freeProc fields are used to return results or error messages from commands. This information is returned by command ...
 standard/intro(3) -- buffering, formatting and input/output
    The C++ iostream package declared in iostream.h and other header files consists primarily of a collection of classes. Although originally intended only to support input/output, the package now supports related activities such as incore formatting. This package is a mostly sourcecompatible extension of the earlier stream I/O package, described in The C++ Programming Language by Bjarne Stroustrup. In the iostream man pages, character refers to a value that can be held...
 c++/intro(3) -- buffering, formatting and input/output
    The C++ iostream package declared in iostream.h and other header files consists primarily of a collection of classes. Although originally intended only to support input/output, the package now supports related activities such as incore formatting. This package is a mostly sourcecompatible extension of the earlier stream I/O package, described in The C++ Programming Language by Bjarne Stroustrup. In the iostream man pages, character refers to a value that can be held...
 intro(3) -- buffering, formatting and input/output
    The C++ iostream package declared in iostream.h and other header files consists primarily of a collection of classes. Although originally intended only to support input/output, the package now supports related activities such as incore formatting. This package is a mostly sourcecompatible extension of the earlier stream I/O package, described in The C++ Programming Language by Bjarne Stroustrup. In the iostream man pages, character refers to a value that can be held...
 intro(3n) -- introduction to SVR4 networking functions and libraries
    In the Network Services library, netbuf is a structure used in various TLI functions to send and receive data and information. netbuf is defined in sys/tiuser.h, and includes the following members: struct netbuf { unsigned int maxlen; /* The physical size of the b
 f90/intro_conversion(3) -- Introduction to conversion routines
    These Fortran-callable subroutines perform conversion of data residing in Cray Research systems memory. Conversion subprograms are listed under the following types of routines: * Foreign data conversion * Numeric conversion * ASCII conversion * IEEE conversion * Other conversion For more information regarding foreign data conversion, see the Application Programmer's I/O Guide, publication SG-2168. The USCCTC and USCCTI routines are available on IRIX systems. Both routines are documented on the ...
 f90/intro_ffio(3) -- Describes performance options available with the FFIO layers
    The Flexible File I/O (FFIO) system lets the user specify a commaseparated list of layers through which I/O data is to be passed. This is done by providing a value for the spec argument to the -F option on the assign(1) command. This specifies a class of processing to be done on the data. The following C routines are used with FFIO: * fffcntl(3C): performs functions on files opened using FFIO * fflistio(3C): initiates a list of I/O requests using FFIO * ffiolock(3C): locks and unlocks function c...
 f90/intro_intrin(3) -- Introduction to intrinsic procedures
    Intrinsic procedures are predefined by the computer programming language. They are invoked in the same way that other procedures are invoked. The Fortran 90 standard defines intrinsic procedures, and the CF90 and MIPSpro 7 Fortran 90 compilers include other intrinsics as extensions to the standard. There are four classes of Fortran intrinsic procedures as defined by the Fortran 90 standard: inquiry functions, elemental functions, transformational functions, and subroutines. Additional intrinsics...
 f90/intro_libm(3) -- Introduction to math library routines
    The math routines are listed with the other intrinsic procedures in alphabetical order, usually by generic function name. Generic function names are function calls that cause the compiler to compile automatically the appropriate data type version of a routine, based on the type of the input data. For example, a call to the generic function LOG with a type of input data of complex compiles as CLOG. In general, on UNICOS systems, real functions have no prefix; integer functions are prefixed with I...
 f90/intro_pxf(3) -- Introduction to PXF POSIX library
    The POSIX FORTRAN 77 Language Interfaces Standard IEEE Std 1003.9- 1992 (POSIX.a) defines a standardized interface for accessing the system services of IEEE Std 1003.1-1990 (POSIX.1), and supports routines to access constructs not directly accessible with FORTRAN 77. Only a subset of the routines described in this standard are currently available on Cray Research systems. For some routines, only a portion of the functionality described by the standard is currently implemented. Many of the servic...
 f90/int_mult_upper(3) -- Multiplies integers and returns the uppermost bits
    C/C++: UNICOS/mk systems and UNICOS systems with IEEE floating-point hardware Fortran: UNICOS/mk systems, IRIX systems, and CRAY T90 systems that support IEEE floating-point arithmetic
 complib/INVIT(3) -- EISPACK routine. This subroutine finds those eigenvectors of a REAL UPPER Hessenberg matrix corresponding to s
    On INPUT NM must be set to the row dimension of two-dimensional array parameters as declared in the calling program dimension statement. N is the order of the matrix. A contains the Hessenberg matrix. WR and WI contain the real and imaginary parts, respectively, of the eigenvalues of the matrix. The eigenvalues MUST be stored in a manner IDENTICAL to that of subroutine HQR, which recognizes possible splitting of the matrix. SELECT specifies the eigenvectors to be found. The eigenvector correspon...
 perl5/IO(3) -- load various IO modules
    IO provides a simple mechanism to load all of the IO modules at one go. Currently this includes: IO::Handle IO::Seekable IO::File IO::Pipe IO::Socket For more information on any of these modules, please see its respective documentation. PPPPaaaaggggeeee 1111
 perl5/IO::File(3) -- supply object methods for filehandles
    IO::File inherits from IO::Handle and IO::Seekable. It extends these classes with methods that are specific to file handles.
 perl5/IO::Handle(3) -- supply object methods for I/O handles
    IO::Handle is the base class for all other IO handle classes. It is not intended that objects of IO::Handle would be created directly, but instead IO::Handle is inherited from by several other classes in the IO hierarchy. If you are reading this documentation, looking for a replacement for the FileHandle package, then I suggest you read the documentation for IO::File A IO::Handle object is a reference to a symbol (see the Symbol package)...
 perl5/IO::Pipe(3) -- supply object methods for pipes
    IO::Pipe provides an interface to createing pipes between processes.
 perl5/IO::Seekable(3) -- supply seek based methods for I/O objects
    IO::Seekable does not have a constuctor of its own as is intended to be inherited by other IO::Handle based objects. It provides methods which allow seeking of the file descriptors. If the C functions fgetpos() and fsetpos() are available, then IO::File::getpos returns an opaque value that represents the current position of the IO::File, and IO::File::setpos uses that value to return to a previously visited position. See the perlfunc manpage for complete descriptions of each of the following sup...
 perl5/IO::Select(3) -- OO interface to the select system call
    The IO::Select package implements an object approach to the system select function call. It allows the user to see what IO handles, see the IO::Handle manpage, are ready for reading, writing or have an error condition pending.
 perl5/IO::Socket(3) -- Object interface to socket communications
    IO::Socket provides an object interface to creating and using sockets. It is built upon the the IO::Handle manpage interface and inherits all the methods defined by the IO::Handle manpage. IO::Socket only defines methods for those operations which are common to all types of socket. Operations which are specified to a socket in a particular domain have methods defined in sub classes of IO::Socket IO::Socket will export all functions (and constants) defined by the Socket manpage....
 f90/ior(3) -- FORTRAN bitwise boolean functions
    bool is the general name for the bit field manipulation intrinsic functions and subroutines from the FORTRAN Military Standard (MIL-STD1753). and, or and xor return the value of the binary operations on their arguments. not is a unary operator returning the one's complement of its argument. ior, iand, not, ieor - return the same results as and, or, not, and xor. lshift and rshift return the value of the first argument shifted left or right, respectively, the number of times specified by the sec...
 c++/ios(3) -- input/output formatting
    The stream classes derived from class ios provide a high level interface that supports transferring formatted and unformatted information into and out of streambufs. This manual page describes the operations common to both input and output. Several enumerations are declared in class ios, open_mode, io_state, seek_dir, and format flags, to avoid polluting the global name space. The i<...
 io_ss(3) -- SpeedShop I/O tracing library
    The SpeedShop Performance Tools contain an I/O tracing library, -lio_ss, which provides tracing for various I/O system calls. The library provides intercept functions for calls to open, creat, read, write, close, dup, and pipe. The tracing library defines both strong and weak symbols for each of these calls, and, at initialization time, uses dlopen and dlsym to find the standard libc addresses for the real functions. Programs that attempt to provide their own versions for any of these routines m...
 perl5/IPC::Open2(3) -- open a process for both reading and writing
    The open2() function spawns the given $cmd and connects $rdr for reading and $wtr for writing. It's what you think should work when you try open(HANDLE, "|cmd args|"); The write filehandle will have autoflush turned on. If $rdr is a string (that is, a bareword filehandle rather than a glob or a reference) and it begins with ">&", then the child will send output directly to that file handle. If $wtr is a string that begins with "<&", then WTR will be closed in the parent, and the child wil...
 perl5/IPC::Open3(3) -- open a process for reading, writing, and error handling
    Extremely similar to open2(), open3() spawns the given $cmd and connects RDRFH for reading, WTRFH for writing, and ERRFH for errors. If ERRFH is '', or the same as RDRFH, then STDOUT and STDERR of the child are on the same file handle. The WTRFH will have autoflush turned on. If WTRFH begins with "<&", then WTRFH will be closed in the parent, and the child will read from it directly. If RDRFH or ERRFH begins with ">&", then the child will send output directly to that file handle. In both c...
 f90/ipxfargc(3) -- Returns the number of command-line arguments excluding the command name
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/ipxfwstopsig(3) -- Returns part of the lower bits of signal number that terminates child process
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/ipxfwtermsig(3) -- Returns lower bit of signal that terminates a child process
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 isastream(3c) -- test a file descriptor
    The function isastream() determines if a file descriptor represents a STREAMS file. fildes refers to an open file.
 isencrypt(3g) -- determine whether a character buffer is encrypted
    isencrypt uses heuristics to determine whether a buffer of characters is encrypted. It requires two arguments: a pointer to an array of characters and the number of characters in the buffer. isencrypt assumes that the file is not encrypted if all the characters in the first block are ASCII characters. If there are non-ASCII characters in the first ninbuf characters, isencrypt assumes that the buffer is encrypted if ...
 f90/ishell(3) -- Executes a UNICOS shell command
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/ishft(3) -- FORTRAN bitwise boolean functions
    bool is the general name for the bit field manipulation intrinsic functions and subroutines from the FORTRAN Military Standard (MIL-STD1753). and, or and xor return the value of the binary operations on their arguments. not is a unary operator returning the one's complement of its argument. ior, iand, not, ieor - return the same results as and, or, not, and xor. lshift and rshift return the value of the first argument shifted left or right, respectively, the number of times specified by the sec...
 f90/ishftc(3) -- FORTRAN bitwise boolean functions
    bool is the general name for the bit field manipulation intrinsic functions and subroutines from the FORTRAN Military Standard (MIL-STD1753). and, or and xor return the value of the binary operations on their arguments. not is a unary operator returning the one's complement of its argument. ior, iand, not, ieor - return the same results as and, or, not, and xor. lshift and rshift return the value of the first argument shifted left or right, respectively, the number of times specified by the sec...
 standard/ismex(3) -- obsolete routine
    none FUNCTION RETURN VALUE This routine returns TRUE
 isnan(3c) -- determine type of floating-point number
    (Note that the long double routines are only valid for the MIPSpro compilers.) Long double functions have been renamed to be compliant with the ANSI-C standard, however to be backward compatible, they may still be called with the double precision function name prefixed with a q. (Exception: function isnanl may be called with the name isnanq.) isnan, isnand, isnanf, and isnanl return true (1) if the argument dsrc or fsrc is a Na...
 standard/isobj(3) -- returns whether an object exists
    obj expects the object identifier that you want to test. FUNCTION RETURN VALUE There are two possible return values for this function: TRUE indicates that object obj exists. FALSE indicates that object obj does not exist.
 standard/isqueued(3) -- returns whether the specified device is enabled for queuing
    dev expects the identifier for the device you want to test (e.g., MOUSEX or BPADX). FUNCTION RETURN VALUE The returned value for this function is a boolean value: TRUE indicates that dev is enabled for queueing. FALSE indicates that dev is not enabled for queueing.
 standard/istag(3) -- returns whether a tag exists in the current open object
    t expects the tag identifier that you want to test. FUNCTION RETURN VALUE There are two possible return values for this function: TRUE indicates that tag t exists in the current open object. FALSE indicates that tag t does not exist in the current open object. The return value is undefined if no object is currently open for editing.
 standard/istexloaded(3) -- returns whether the texture with the passed id is resident in texture memory
    target expects the texture resource to which the texture function definition is to be bound. There is one appropriate resource, TX_TEXTURE_0. id expects the id of the texture that is being queried. FUNCTION RETURN VALUE The returned value for this function is either 0 or 1. 0 indicates that the texture is not resident in texture memory. 1 indicates that the texture is resident in texture memory.
 c++/istream(3) -- formatted and unformatted input
    istreams support interpretation of characters fetched from an associated streambuf. These are commonly referred to as input or extraction operations. The istream member functions and related functions are described below. In the following descriptions assume that - ins is an istream. - inswa is an istream_withassign. - insp is a istream...
 complib/izmax1(3) -- find the index of the element whose real part has maximum absolute value
    IZMAX1 finds the index of the element whose real part has maximum absolute value. Based on IZAMAX from Level 1 BLAS. The change is to use the 'genuine' absolute value. Contributed by Nick Higham for use with ZLACON.
 Tcl/join(3) -- Create a string by joining together list elements
    The list argument must be a valid Tcl list. This command returns the string formed by joining all of the elements of list together with joinString separating each adjacent pair of elements. The joinString argument defaults to a space character.
 standard/keepaspect(3) -- specifies the aspect ratio of a graphics window
    x expects the horizontal proportion of the aspect ratio. The value must be between 1 and 32767 (0x7fff), inclusive. y expects the vertical proportion of the aspect ratio. The value must be between 1 and 32767 (0x7fff), inclusive.
 Tcl/keylist(3) -- Keyed list management routines.
    These routines perform operations on keyed lists. See the Extended Tcl man page for a description of keyed lists.
 kill(3b) -- send signal to a process (4.3BSD)
    kill sends the signal sig to a process, specified by the process number pid. Sig may be one of the signals specified in sigvec(3B), or it may be 0, in which case error checking is performed but no signal is actually sent. This can be used to check the validity of pid. The sending and receiving processes must have the same effective user ID, otherwise this call is restricted to the super-user. A single exception is the signal SIGCONT, which may always be sent to any descendant of the current proc...
 killpg(3b) -- send signal to a process group (4.3BSD)
    killpg sends the signal sig to the process group pgrp. See sigvec(3B) for a list of signals. The sending process and members of the process group must have the same effective user ID, or the sender must be the super-user. As a single special case the continue signal SIGCONT may be sent to any process that is a descendant of the current process.
 f90/kind(3) -- Returns the value of the kind type parameter of x
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 l3tol(3c) -- convert between 3-byte integers and long integers
    l3tol converts a list of n three-byte integers packed into a character string pointed to by cp into a list of long integers pointed to by lp. ltol3 performs the reverse conversion from long integers (lp) to threebyte integers (cp). These functions are useful for file-system maintenance where the block numbers are three bytes long.
 Tk/label(3) -- Create and manipulate label widgets
    anchor font image takeFocus | background foreground justify text | bitmap highlightBackground padX textVariable | borderWidth highlightColor padY underline | cursor highlightThickness relief wrapLength See the ``options'' manual entry for details on the standard options. WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS Name: height Class: Height Command-Line Switch:-height Specifies a desired height for the label. If an image or bitmap is being displayed in the label then the value is in screen units (i.e. any of the ...
 standard/lampon(3) -- control the keyboard display lights
    lamps expects a mask that specifies which lamps to manipulate. The four low-order bits control the lamps labeled L1 through L4. If a bit is set, then the corresponding keyboard lamp is turned on or off.
 complib/lapack(3) -- Downers Grove, IL 60515-5702 Oxford OX2 8DR Germany USA England Tel: +1 708 971 2337 Tel: +44 865 511245 Tel:
    LAPACK has been funded in part by NSF, DOE, and DARPA, with developmental support from NAG Ltd., Cray Research, and many friends and colleagues around the world. Ed Anderson, Zhao-jun Bai, Chris Bischof, Jim Demmel, Jack Dongarra, Jeremy Du Croz, Anne Greenbaum, Sven Hammarling, Alan McKenney, Susan Ostrouchov, and Danny Sorensen ( l l l l ) ( a -a a -a ) 1/4 * ( p p -p -p ) Page 2 LAPACK(3F) LAPACK(3F) ( a -a -a a ) ( c c -c -c ) ( k -k -k k )...
 Tcl/lappend(3) -- Append list elements onto a variable
    This command treats the variable given by varName as a list and appends each of the value arguments to that list as a separate element, with spaces between elements. If varName doesn't exist, it is created as a list with elements given by the value arguments. Lappend is similar to append except that the values are appended as list elements rather than raw text. This command provides a relatively efficient way to build up large lists. For example, ``lappend a $b'' is much more efficient than `...
 f90/lbound(3) -- Returns all the lower bounds or a specified lower bound of an array
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 Tk/lbsingsel(3) -- Allow only one selected element in listbox(es)
    This command is a Tcl procedure provided as part of the Tk script library. It takes as arguments the path names of one or more listbox widgets, or the value Listbox. For each named widget, tk_listboxSingleSelect modifies the bindings of the widget so that only a single element may be selected at a time (the normal configuration allows multiple elements to be selected). If the keyword Listbox is among the window arguments, then the class bindings for listboxes are changed so that all listboxes ha...
 standard/lcharstr(3) -- draws a string of characters
    str expects a pointer to the memory containing a sequence of character id's. type expects one of the following symbolic constants defined in : STR_B Each character id is represented by a single unsigned byte. STR_2B Each character id is represented by two, consecutive unsigned bytes. STR_3B Each character id is represented by three, consecutive unsigned bytes. STR_4B Each character id is represented by four, consecutive unsigned bytes. STR_16 Each character id is represented by a 16-bi...
 standard/ldahread(3) -- read the archive header of a member of an archive file
    If TYPE(ldptr) is the archive file magic number, ldahread reads the archive header of the common object file currently associated with ldptr into the area of memory beginning at arhead. ldahread returns SUCCESS or FAILURE. If TYPE(ldptr) does not represent an archive file or if it cannot read the archive header, ldahread fails. The program must be loaded with the object file access routine library libmld.a....
 standard/ldclose(3) -- close a common object file
    ldopen(3X) and ldclose provide uniform access to simple object files and object files that are members of archive files. An archive of common object files can be processed as if it is a series of simple common object files. If TYPE(ldptr) does not represent an archive file, ldclose closes the file and frees the memory allocated to the LDFILE structure associated with ldptr. If TYPE(ldptr) is the magic number for an archive file and if archive has more files, ldclose reinitializes OFFSET(ldptr) t...
 standard/ldfhread(3) -- read the file header of a common object file
    ldfhread reads the file header of the common object file currently associated with ldptr . It reads the file header into the area of memory beginning at filehead. ldfhread returns SUCCESS or FAILURE. If ldfhread cannot read the file header, it fails. Usually, ldfhread can be avoided by using the macro HEADER(ldptr) defined in (see ldfcn(4)). Note that the information in HEADER is swapped, if necessary. The information in any field, fieldname, of the file header can be accessed using HE...
 standard/ldgetaux(3) -- retrieve an auxiliary entry, given an index
    ldgetaux returns a pointer to an auxiliary table entry associated with iaux. The AUXU is contained in a static buffer. Because the buffer can be overwritten by later calls to ldgetaux, it must be copied by the caller if the aux is to be saved or changed. Note that auxiliary entries are not swapped as this routine cannot detect what manifestation of the AUXU union is retrieved. If LDAUXSWAP(ldptr, ldf) is non-zero, a further call to swap_aux is required. Before calling the swap_aux routine, the c...
 standard/ldgetname(3) -- retrieve symbol name for object file symbol table entry
    ldgetname returns a pointer to the name associated with symbol as a string. The string is contained in a static buffer. Because the buffer can be overwritten by later calls to ldgetname, the caller must copy the buffer if the name is to be saved. If the name cannot be retrieved, ldgetname returns NULL (defined in ) for an object file. This occurs when: o the string table cannot be found o the name's offset into the string table is beyond the end of the string table Typically, ldgetname...
 standard/ldgetpd(3) -- retrieve procedure descriptor given a procedure descriptor index
    ldgetpd returns a SUCCESS or FAILURE depending on whether the procedure descriptor with index ipd can be accessed. If it can be accessed, the structure pointed to by ppd is filled with the contents of the corresponding procedure descriptor. The isym, iline, and iopt fields of the procedure descriptor are updated to be used in further LD routine calls. The adr field is updated from the symbol referenced by the isym field. The PDR cannot be retrieved when: o The procedure descriptor table cannot b...
 standard/ldgetsymstr(3) -- get a symbol type string
    ldgetsymstr puts, in the caller-provided buffer, a string with whatever type information is available on the symbol passed in. There is no mechanism to prevent buffer overflow, so it is best to provide a large buffer. 2048 bytes should be 10 or 20 times the size of any reasonable string. The string put in buffer is terminated by a null(0) byte by ldgetsymstr. Both a symbol index (as is supplied to ldtbread ) and a pSYMR pointer pointing to the data for the indexed symbol (previously filled by a ...
 standard/ldlread(3) -- manipulate line number entries of a common object file function
    ldlread searches the line number entries of the common object file currently associated with ldptr. ldlread begins its search with the line number entry for the beginning of a function and confines its search to the line numbers associated with a single function. The function is identified by fcnindx, which is the index of its local symbols entry in the object file symbol table. ldlread reads the entry with the smallest line number equal to or greater than linenum into linent. ldlinit and ldlite...
 standard/ldlseek(3) -- seek to line number entries of a section of a common object file
    ldlseek seeks to the line number entries of the section specified by sectindx of the common object file currently associated with ldptr. ldnlseek seeks to the line number entries of the section specified by sectname. ldlseek and ldnlseek return SUCCESS or FAILURE. NOTE: Line numbers are not associated with sections in the MIPS symbol table; therefore, the second argument is ignored, but maintained for historical purposes. If they cannot seek to the specified line number entries, both routines fa...
 standard/ldohseek(3) -- seek to the optional file header of a common object file
    ldohseek seeks to the optional file header of the common object file currently associated with ldptr. ldohseek returns SUCCESS or FAILURE. If the object file has no optional header or if it cannot seek to the optional header, ldohseek fails. The program must be loaded with the object file access routine library libmld.a.
 standard/ldopen(3) -- open a common object file for reading
    ldopen and ldclose(3X) provide uniform access to simple object files and to object files that are members of archive files. An archive of common object files can be processed as if it were a series of simple common object files. If ldptr has the value NULL, ldopen opens filename, allocates and initializes the LDFILE structure, and returns a pointer to the structure to the calling program. If ldptr is valid and TYPE(ldptr) is the archive magic number, ldopen reinitializes the LDFILE structure for...
 standard/ldreadst(3) -- read symbolt table information
    ldreadst reads in the portions of the symbol table implied by the flags argument. A flags argument of -1 reads in the entire symbol table. Since the other symbol table routines, for example ldtbread, ensure that the relevant portions of the symbol table have been read in, you need not call ldreadst to use the other routines. ldreadst(ldptr,-1) would simply ensure the whole symbol table is read in at once, which is not necessary. ldreadst is useful, however. One can test for the existence of symb...
 standard/ldrseek(3) -- seek to relocation entries of a section of a common object file
    ldrseek seeks to the relocation entries of the section specified by sectindx of the common object file currently associated with ldptr. ldnrseek seeks to the relocation entries of the section specified by sectname. ldrseek and ldnrseek return SUCCESS or FAILURE. If sectindx is greater than the number of sections in the object file, ldrseek fails; if there is no section name corresponding with sectname, ldnrseek fails. If the specified section has no relocation entries or if it cannot seek to the...
 standard/ldshread(3) -- read an indexed/named section header of a common object file
    ldshread reads the section header specified by sectindx of the common object file currently associated with ldptr into the area of memory beginning at secthead. ldnshread reads the section header specified by sectname into the area of memory beginning at secthead. ldshread and ldnshread return SUCCESS or FAILURE. If sectindx is greater than the number of sections in the object file, ldshread fails; If there is no section name corresponding with sectname, ldnshread fails. If it cannot read the sp...
 standard/ldsseek(3) -- seek to an indexed/named section of a common object file
    ldsseek seeks to the section specified by sectindx of the common object file currently associated with ldptr. ldnsseek seeks to the section specified by sectname. ldsseek and ldnsseek return SUCCESS or FAILURE. If sectindx is greater than the number of sections in the object file, ldsseek fails; if there is no section name corresponding with sectname, ldnsseek fails. If there is no section data for the specified section or if it cannot seek to the specified section, either function fails. NOTE: ...
 standard/ldtbindex(3) -- compute the index of a symbol table entry of a common object file
    ldtbindex returns the (long) index of the symbol table entry at the current position of the common object file associated with ldptr. The index returned by ldtbindex can be used in later calls to ldtbread(3X). ldtbindex returns the index of the last ldtbread. If there are no symbols in the object file or if the object file is not positioned at the beginning of a symbol table entry, ldtbindex fails and returns BADINDEX (-1). NOTE: The first symbol in the symbol table has an index of zero. The pro...
 standard/ldtbread(3) -- read an indexed symbol table entry of a common object file
    ldtbread reads the symbol table entry specified by symindex of the common object file currently associated with ldptr into the area of memory beginning at symbol. ldtbread returns SUCCESS or FAILURE. If symindex is greater than the number of symbols in the object file or if it cannot read the specified symbol table entry, ldtbread fails. The local and external symbols are concatenated into a linear list. Symbols are accessible from symnum zero to SYMHEADER(ldptr).isymMax+SYMHEADER(ldptr).iextMax...
 standard/ldtbseek(3) -- seek to the symbol table of a common object file
    ldtbseek seeks to the symbol table of the object file currently associated with ldptr. ldtbseek returns SUCCESS or FAILURE. If the symbol table has been stripped from the object file or if it cannot seek to the symbol table, ldtbseek fails. The program must be loaded with the object file access routine library libmld.a.
 f90/leadz(3) -- Counts number of leading 0 bits
    C/C++: UNICOS and UNICOS/mk systems Fortran: UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 standard/leftbuffer(3) -- enables and disables drawing to the left/right buffer
    bool is either TRUE or FALSE. TRUE enables updating the left/right buffer. FALSE disables updating the left/right buffer. By default, leftbuffer is TRUE and rightbuffer is FALSE.
 f90/len(3) -- return length of Fortran string
    len returns the length of string ch. Page 1 LEN(3I) Last changed: 1-6-98
 ftn/len(3) -- return length of Fortran string
    len returns the length of string ch. Page 1 LEN(3I) Last changed: 1-6-98
 f90/length(3) -- Returns the number of words transferred
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/len_trim(3) -- Returns the length of the character argument without counting trailing blank characters
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 perl5/less(3) -- perl pragma to request less of something from the compiler
    Currently unimplemented, this may someday be a compiler directive to make certain trade-offs, such as perhaps use less 'memory'; use less 'CPU'; use less 'fat'; PPPPaaaaggggeeee 1111
 lfmt(3c) -- display error message in standard format and pass to logging and monitoring services
    lfmt retrieves a format string from a locale-specific message database (unless MM_NOGET is specified) and uses it for printf style formatting of args. The output is displayed on stream. If stream is NULL, no output is displayed. lfmt encapsulates the output in the standard error message format (unless MM_NOSTD is specified, in which case the output is simply printf-like). lf...
 f90/lge(3) -- FORTRAN string comparison intrinsic functions
    These functions return .TRUE. if the inequality holds and .FALSE. otherwise. They return the result type logical*2 if the $log2 compile option is in effect; otherwise, the result type is logical*4. Page 1 LGE(3I) Last changed: 1-6-98
 perl5/lib(3) -- manipulate @INC at compile time
    This is a small simple module which simplifies the manipulation of @INC at compile time. It is typically used to add extra directories to perl's search path so that later use or require statements will find modules which are not located on perl's default search path. ADDING DIRECTORIES TO @INC The parameters to use lib are added to the start of the perl search path. Saying use lib LIST; is almost the same as saying BEGIN { unshift(@INC, LIST) } For each directory in LIST (called $dir here) the...
 ftn/libexc(3) -- call stack trace library
    The libexc library provides the functionality for user-level call stack unwind. trace_back_stack is used to unwind the call stack at the time it's called. The first argument sets the number of stack frames to be unwound. If it's set to zero the unwind continues up to main or up to _nsproc/_fork for child processes. The second argument is the array that contains the addresses of the callers in the stack after the unwind is completed. The third argument contains the names of the functions in the...
 libexc/libexc(3) -- call stack trace library
    The libexc library provides the functionality for user-level call stack unwind. trace_back_stack is used to unwind the call stack at the time it's called. The first argument sets the number of stack frames to be unwound. If it's set to zero the unwind continues up to main or up to _nsproc/_fork for child processes. The second argument is the array that contains the addresses of the callers in the stack after the unwind is completed. The third argument contains the names of the functions in the...
 standard/libfastm(3) -- fast transcendental library
    
 ifl/libpbm(3) -- functions to support portable bitmap programs
    KEYWORD MATCHING int pm_keymatch( char* str, char* keyword, int minchars ) Does a case-insensitive match of str against keyword. str can be a leading sunstring of keyword, but at least minchars must be present.
 libperfex(3c) -- A procedural interface to processor event counters
    These routines provide simple access to the hardware event counters. The arguments e0 and e1 are int types specifying which events to count. For descriptions of the counters themselves, see the perfex(1) or the r10k_counters(5) man page. The counts are returned in the long long arguments c0 and c1. The print_counters routine prints the counts to standard error. Two events which must be counted on the same hardware counter will cause a conflicting counters error. The arguments e0 and e1 can be ov...
 ifl/libpgm(3) -- functions to support portable graymap programs
    TYPES AND CONSTANTS typedef ... gray; #define PGM_MAXMAXVAL ... extern gray pgm_pbmmaxval; Each gray should contain only the values between 0 and PGM_MAXMAXVAL. pgm_pbmmaxval is the maxval used when a PGM program reads a PBM file. Normally it is 1; however, for some programs, a larger value gives better results. #define PGM_FORMAT ... #define RPGM_FORMAT ... #define PGM_TYPE PGM_FORMAT int PGM_FORMAT_TYPE( int format ) For distinguishing different file formats and types....
 ifl/libppm(3) -- functions to support portable pixmap programs
    TYPES AND CONSTANTS typedef ... pixel; typedef ... pixval; #define PPM_MAXMAXVAL ... extern pixval ppm_pbmmaxval; Each pixel contains three pixvals, each of which should contain only the values between 0 and PPM_MAXMAXVAL. ppm_pbmmaxval is the maxval used when a PPM program reads a PBM file. Normally it is 1; however, for some programs, a larger value gives better results. #define PPM_FORMAT ... #define RPPM_FORMAT ... #define PPM_TYPE PPM_FORMAT int PPM_FORMAT_TYPE( int format ) For distinguish...
 Tcl/library(3) -- standard library of Tcl procedures
    Tcl includes a library of Tcl procedures for commonly-needed functions. The procedures defined in the Tcl library are generic ones suitable for use by many different applications. The location of the Tcl library is returned by the info library command. In addition to the Tcl library, each application will normally have its own library of support procedures as well; the location of this library is normally given by the value of the $app_library global variable, where app is the name of the applic...
 standard/libsphere(3) -- the Sphere Library
    The Sphere Library renders spheres by issuing GL calls. sphdraw draws a sphere. sphmode sets various attributes that affect the speed and quality of spheres rendered by sphdraw. sphrotmatrix allows you to control the orientation of spheres by providing a rotation matrix. sphgnpolys returns the number of polygons per sphere, in the mode currently selected by sphmode. sphobj operates like sphdraw, except that, instead of immediately rendering a sphere, it creates and returns a GL object, which can...
 libt6(3n) -- TSIX trusted IPC library (part of libc in Trusted IRIX)
    libt6 constitutes the TSIX Application Program Interface (API). It is a library of routines that an application uses to control attribute transport during trusted interprocess communication. In Trusted IRIX, the functions defined by TSIG for libt6 have been incorporated into libc. The routines in the library are recommended over the underlying system call interfaces for portability because they shield the application from operating system, communication protocol, and I...
 ifl/libtiff(3) -- introduction to libtiff, a library for reading and writing TIFF files
    libtiff is a library for reading and writing data files encoded with the Tag Image File format, Revision 6.0 (or revision 5.0 or revision 4.0). This file format is suitable for archiving multi-color and monochromatic image data. The library supports several compression algorithms, as indicated by the Compression field, including: no compression (1), CCITT 1D Huffman compression (2), CCITT Group 3 Facsimile compression (3), CCITT Group 4 Facsimile compression (4), Lempel-Ziv & Welch compression (...
 Tcl/lindex(3) -- Retrieve an element from a list
    This command treats list as a Tcl list and returns the index'th element from it (0 refers to the first element of the list). In extracting the element, lindex observes the same rules concerning braces and quotes and backslashes as the Tcl command interpreter; however, variable substitution and command substitution do not occur. If index is negative or greater than or equal to the number of elements in value, then an empty string is returned. If index has the value end, it refers to the | last e...
 standard/linesmooth(3) -- specify antialiasing of lines
    mode expects one of two values: SML_OFF, defeats antialiasing of lines (default). SML_ON enables antialiasing of lines. SML_ON can be modified by either or both of two additional symbolic constants: SML_SMOOTHER indicates that a higher quality filter should be used during line drawing. This filter typically requires that more pixels be modified, and therefore potentially reduces the rate at which antialiased lines are rendered. SML_END_CORRECT indicates that the endpoints of antialiased lines sh...
 standard/linewidth(3) -- specifies width of lines
    n is the width of the line. The width is measured in pixels and is 1 by default.
 Tcl/linkvar(3) -- link Tcl variable to C variable
    Tcl_Interp *interp (in) Interpreter that contains varName. Also used by Tcl_LinkVar to return error messages. char *varName (in) Name of global variable. char *addr (in) Address of C variable that is to be linked to varName. int type (in) Type of C variable. Must be one of TCL_LINK_INT, TCL_LINK_DOUBLE, TCL_LINK_BOOLEAN, or TCL_LINK_STRING, optionally OR'ed with TCL_LINK_READ_ONLY to make Tcl variable read-only....
 link_addr(3c) -- elementary address specification routines for link level access
    The routine link_addr interprets character strings representing linklevel addresses, returning binary information suitable for use in system calls. The routine link_ntoa takes a link-level address and returns a string representing some of the information present, including the link level address itself, and the interface name or number, if present. This facility is experimental and is still subject to change. For link_addr, the string may contain an optional network interface identifier of the f...
 Tcl/linsert(3) -- Insert elements into a list
    This command produces a new list from list by inserting all of the element arguments just before the indexth element of list. Each element argument will become a separate element of the new list. If index is less than or equal to zero, then the new elements are inserted at the beginning of the list. If index has the value end, or if it is greater | than or equal to the number of elements in the list, then the new elements are appended to the list....
 lio_listio(3) -- linked asynchronous I/O operations
    The lio_listio function allows the calling process to initiate a list of I/O requests with a single function call. The lio_listio64() function is identical to lio_listio() except that it takes an array of aiocb64_t * (see ). This structure allows for the specification of a file offset greater than 2 Gigabytes. The mode argument takes a value of either LIO_WAIT or LIO_NOWAIT and determines whether the function returns when the I/O operations have been completed, or as soon as the operation...
 Tcl/list(3) -- Create a list
    This command returns a list comprised of all the args, or an empty string| if no args are specified. Braces and backslashes get added as necessary, so that the index command may be used on the result to re-extract the original arguments, and also so that eval may be used to execute the resulting list, with arg1 comprising the command's name and the other args comprising its arguments. List produces slightly different results than concat: concat removes one level of grouping before forming the l...
 Tk/listbox(3) -- Create and manipulate listbox widgets
    background font relief takeFocus | borderWidth height selectBackground width | cursor highlightBackground selectBorderWidth xScrollCommand | exportSelection highlightColor selectForeground yScrollCommand | foreground highlightThickness setGrid See the ``options'' manual entry for details on the standard options. WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS Name: height Class: Height Command-Line Switch:-height Specifies the desired height for the window, in lines. If zero or | less, then the desired height for the...
 listen(3n) -- listen for connections on a socket
    To accept connections, a socket is first created with socket, a backlog for incoming connections is specified with listen and then the connections are accepted with accept. The listen call applies only to sockets of type SOCK_STREAM or SOCK_SEQPACKET. The backlog parameter defines the maximum length the queue of pending connections may grow to. If a connect...
 Tcl/llength(3) -- Count the number of elements in a list
    Treats list as a list and returns a decimal string giving the number of elements in it.
 standard/lmbind(3) -- selects a new material, light source, or lighting model
    target expects one of these symbolic constants: MATERIAL, BACKMATERIAL, LIGHT0, LIGHT1, LIGHT2, LIGHT3, LIGHT4, LIGHT5, LIGHT6, LIGHT7, or LMODEL. index expects the name of a material (if target is MATERIAL or BACKMATERIAL), a light source (if target is one of LIGHT0 through LIGHT7), or a lighting model (if target is LMODEL). Name is the index passed to lmdef when the material, light source, or lighting model was defined....
 standard/lmcolor(3) -- change the effect of color commands while lighting is active
    mode the name of the mode to be used. Possible modes are: LMC_COLOR, RGB color commands will set the current color. If a color is the last thing sent before a vertex the vertex will be colored. If a normal is the last thing sent before a vertex the vertex will be lighted. LMC_COLOR is the default mode. LMC_EMISSION, RGB color commands will set the EMISSION color property of the current material. LMC_AMBIENT, RGB color commands will set the AMBIENT color property of the current material. LMC_DIFF...
 standard/lmdef(3) -- defines or modifies a material, light source, or lighting model
    deftype expects the category in which to create a new definition, or the category of the definition to be modified. There are three categories, each with its own symbolic constants: DEFMATERIAL indicates that a material is being defined or modified. DEFLIGHT indicates that a light source is being defined or modified. DEFLMODEL indicates that a lighting model is being defined or modified. index expects the index into the table of stored definitions. There is a unique definitions table for each ca...
 lmsgi(3) -- SGI FLEXlm library
    This manual page describes the SGI interface to liblmsgi.a, the SGI extension to Globetrotter Software's FLEXlm library. This library supports the interfaces provided by FLEXlm as well as the functions described here. The SGI interface defines a small set of functions for licensing your software using the FLEXlm, and consists of the following calls: license_init license_chk_out license_chk_in license_timer license_set_attr license_expdate license_errstr license_status license_free get_job When ...
 standard/loadmatrix(3) -- loads a transformation matrix
    m expects the transformation matrix to be loaded.
 standard/loadname(3) -- loads a name onto the name stack
    name expects the name which is to be loaded onto the name stack.
 f90/loc(3) -- return the address of an object
    The returned value will be the address of arg.
 ftn/loc(3) -- return the address of an object
    The returned value will be the address of arg.
 perl5/locale(3) -- Perl pragma to use and avoid POSIX locales for built-in operations
    This pragma tells the compiler to enable (or disable) the use of POSIX locales for built-in operations (LC_CTYPE for regular expressions, and LC_COLLATE for string comparison). Each "use locale" or "no locale" affects statements to the end of the enclosing BLOCK. PPPPaaaaggggeeee 1111
 localeconv(3c) -- get numeric formatting information
    localeconv sets the components of an object with type struct lconv (defined in locale.h) with the values appropriate for the formatting of numeric quantities (monetary and otherwise) according to the rules of the current locale [see setlocale(3C)]. The definition of struct lconv is given below (the values for the fields in the C locale are given in...
 lockf(3c) -- record locking on files
    The lockf command will allow sections of a file to be locked; advisory or mandatory write locks depending on the mode bits of the file [see chmod(2)]. Locking calls from other processes which attempt to lock the locked file section will either return an error value or be put to sleep until the resource becomes unlocked. All the locks for a process are removed when the process terminates. [See fcntl(2) for more information about record locking.] Fildes is an open file descriptor. The file descrip...
 ftn/log(3) -- exponential, logarithm, power
    The long double and single-precision routines listed above are only available in the standard math library, -lm, and in -lmx. The exp family return the exponential function of x, e**x. The expm1 family return exp(x)-1 accurately even for tiny x. The log functions return the natural logarithm of x. The log10 functions return the base 10 logarithm of x. Page 1 EXP(3M) EXP(3M) The log1p family return log(1+x) accurately even for tiny x. pow(x,y), its single-precision counterpart powf(x,y), and its ...
 ftn/log10(3) -- exponential, logarithm, power
    The long double and single-precision routines listed above are only available in the standard math library, -lm, and in -lmx. The exp family return the exponential function of x, e**x. The expm1 family return exp(x)-1 accurately even for tiny x. The log functions return the natural logarithm of x. The log10 functions return the base 10 logarithm of x. EXP(3M) EXP(3M) The log1p family return log(1+x) accurately even for tiny x. pow(x,y), its single-precision counterpart powf(x,y), and its long do...
 f90/logical(3) -- Converts between kinds of logical
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 standard/logicop(3) -- specifies a logical operation for pixel writes
    opcode expects one of the 16 possible logical operations. Symbol Operation LO_ZERO 0 LO_AND src AND dst LO_ANDR src AND (NOT dst) LO_SRC src LO_ANDI (NOT src) AND dst LO_DST dst LO_XOR src XOR dst LO_OR src OR dst LO_NOR NOT (src OR dst) LO_XNOR NOT (src XOR dst) LO_NDST NOT dst LO_ORR src OR (NOT dst) LO_NSRC NOT src LO_ORI (NOT src) OR dst LO_NAND NOT (src AND dst) LO_ONE 1 Only the lower 4 bits of opcode are used. The values of LO_SRC and LO_DST have been chosen so that expressing an operatio...
 standard/lookat(3) -- defines a viewing transformation
    vx expects the x coordinate of the viewing point. vy expects the y coordinate of the viewing point. vz expects the z coordinate of the viewing point. px expects the x coordinate of the reference point. py expects the y coordinate of the reference point. pz expects the z coordinate of the reference point. twist expects the angle of rotation.
 Tk/lower(3) -- Change a window's position in the stacking order
    If the belowThis argument is omitted then the command lowers window so that it is below all of its siblings in the stacking order (it will be obscured by any siblings that overlap it and will not obscure any siblings). If belowThis is specified then it must be the path name of a window that is either a sibling of window or the descendant of a sibling of window. In this case the lower command will insert window into the stacking order just below belowThis (or the ancestor of belowThis that is a s...
 Tcl/lrange(3) -- Return one or more adjacent elements from a list
    List must be a valid Tcl list. This command will return a new list consisting of elements first through last, inclusive. First or last may | be end (or any abbreviation of it) to refer to the last element of the list. If first is less than zero, it is treated as if it were zero. If last is greater than or equal to the number of elements in the list, then it is treated as if it were end. If first is greater than last then an empty string is returned. Note: ``lrange list first first'' does not a...
 standard/lrectread(3) -- reads a rectangular array of pixels into CPU memory
    x1 expects the x coordinate of the lower-left corner of the rectangle that you want to read. y1 expects the y coordinate of the lower-left corner of the rectangle that you want to read. x2 expects the x coordinate of the upper-right corner of the rectangle that you want to read. y2 expects the y coordinate of the upper-right corner of the rectangle that you want to read. parray expects the array to receive the pixels that you want to read. FUNCTION RETURN VALUE The returned value of this functio...
 standard/lrectwrite(3) -- draws a rectangular array of pixels into the frame buffer
    x1 expects the lower-left x coordinate of the rectangular region. y1 expects the lower-left y coordinate of the rectangular region. x2 expects the upper-right x coordinate of the rectangular region. y2 expects the upper-right y coordinate of the rectangular region. parray expects the array which contains the values of the pixels to be drawn. For RGBA values, pack the bits thusly: 0xAABBGGRR, where: AA contains the alpha value, BB contains the blue value, GG contains the green value, and RR conta...
 Tcl/lreplace(3) -- Replace elements in a list with new elements
    Lreplace returns a new list formed by replacing one or more elements of list with the element arguments. First gives the index in list of the first element to be replaced (0 refers to the first element). If first is less than zero then it refers to the first element of list; the element indicated by first must exist in the list. Last gives the index in list of the last element to be replaced; it must be greater than or equal to first. First or last may be end (or any abbreviation of it) to | ref...
 standard/lrgbrange(3) -- sets the range of RGB colors used for depth-cueing
    rmin expects the minimum value to be stored in the red bitplanes. gmin expects the minimum value to be stored in the green bitplanes. bmin expects the minimum value to be stored in the blue bitplanes. rmax expects the maximum value to be stored in the red bitplanes. gmax expects the maximum value to be stored in the green bitplanes. bmax expects the maximum value to be stored in the blue bitplanes. znear expects the nearer screen z, to which the maximum colors are mapped. zfar expects the farthe...
 complib/lsame(3) -- return .TRUE
    LSAME returns .TRUE. if CA is the same letter as CB regardless of case.
 complib/lsamen(3) -- test if the first N letters of CA are the same as the first N letters of CB, regardless of case
    LSAMEN tests if the first N letters of CA are the same as the first N letters of CB, regardless of case. LSAMEN returns .TRUE. if CA and CB are equivalent except for case and .FALSE. otherwise. LSAMEN also returns .FALSE. if LEN( CA ) or LEN( CB ) is less than N.
 standard/lsbackup(3) -- controls whether the ends of a line segment are colored
    b expects either TRUE or FALSE. TRUE forces the last pixel of a line segment to be colored. FALSE allows the linestyle to depend whether the last pixel of a line segment to be colored.
 Tcl/lsearch(3) -- See if a list contains a particular element
    This command searches the elements of list to see if one of them matches pattern. If so, the command returns the index of the first matching element. If not, the command returns -1. The mode argument indicates | how the elements of the list are to be matched against pattern and it | must have one of the following values: -exact The list element must contain exactly the same string as pattern. | -glob Pattern is a glob-style pattern which is matched against each list | element using the same rule...
 lsearch(3c) -- linear search and update
    lsearch is a linear search routine generalized from Knuth (6.1) Algorithm S. It returns a pointer into a table indicating where a datum may be found. If the datum does not occur, it is added at the end of the table. Key points to the datum to be sought in the table. Base points to the first element in the table. Nmemb points to an integer containing the current number of elements in the table. The integer is incremented if the datum is added to the table. Size is the size of the key in bytes (si...
 standard/lsetdepth(3) -- sets the depth range
    near expects the screen coordinate of the near clipping plane. far expects the screen coordinate of the far clipping plane.
 standard/lshaderange(3) -- sets range of color indices used for depth-cueing
    lowin expects the low-intensity color map index. highin expects the high-intensity color map index. znear expects the nearer screen z, to which highin is mapped. zfar expects the farther screen z, to which lowin is mapped.
 Tcl/lsort(3) -- Sort the elements of a list
    This command sorts the elements of list, returning a new list in sorted order. By default ASCII sorting is used with the result returned in increasing order. However, any of the following switches may be | specified before list to control the sorting process (unique | abbreviations are accepted): -ascii Use string comparison with ASCII collation order. | This is the default. -integer Convert list elements to integers and use integer | comparison. -real Convert list elements to floating-point val...
 standard/lsrepeat(3) -- sets a repeat factor for the current linestyle
    factor expects the repeat factor of the linestyle pattern. The valid range of factor is 1 through 255.
 standard/lstrwidth(3) -- returns the width of the specified text string
    type expects one of the following symbolic constants defined in : STR_B Each character is represented by a single unsigned byte. STR_2B Each character is represented by two, consecutive unsigned bytes. The first byte is most significant. STR_3B Each character is represented by three, consecutive unsigned bytes. The first byte is most significant. The last byte is least significant. STR_4B Each character is represented by four, consecutive unsigned bytes. The first byte is most significa...
 mac_cleared(3c) -- report on user's clearance
    mac_cleared and mac_clearedlbl return a value indicating whether the user is cleared for the label pointed to by the input argument lblstr or macp, respectively. The user's clearance range is defined by the structure pointed to by the input argument clp. If the user is cleared, MAC_CLEARED is returned. mac_cleared is equivalent to mac_cleared_ps(clp, lblstr). mac_clearedlbl is equivalent to mac_cleared_pl(clp, macp). mac_cleared_fl checks MAC clearance for setting labels on 'f'iles given a '...
 mac_demld(3c) -- unset the moldiness of a MAC label
    mac_demld returns a copy of the MAC label pointed by lp, unsetting the moldy status of the copy if appropriate.
 mac_dominate(3c) -- compare two MAC labels for the dominates/equal relationship
    mac_dominate compares the two MAC labels pointed to by the input arguments lp1 and lp2. mac_equal compares the two labels for equality.
 mac_dup(3c) -- produce a duplicate copy of a MAC label
    mac_dup duplicates the MAC label pointed to by the input argument lp and returns a pointer to the newly allocated copy.
 mac_free(3c) -- free allocated memory
    Free memory allocated by POSIX MAC interface calls. This routine is present for POSIX compliance, it is simply a wrapper for free(3c).
 mac_from_msen(3c) -- convert independent sensitivity or integrity labels to mac_t
    mac_from_msen Return a mac_t constructed from the given msen label, substituting MINT_EQUAL_LABEL for the needed mint component. mac_from_mint Return a mac_t constructed from the given mint label, substituting MSEN_EQUAL_LABEL for the needed msen component. mac_from_msen_mint Return a mac_t constructed from the given msen and mint labels.
 mac_from_text(3c) -- convert a POSIX MAC string from/to mac_t
    These routines convert MAC labels from/to a mac_t, the structure representing an object's MAC attributes in the POSIX P1003.1e specifications.
 mac_get_fd(3c) -- get the MAC label associated with an open file
    mac_get_fd returns a mac_t, a pointer to an allocated struct mac_label associated with the open file referred to by fd. If _POSIX_MAC is in effect, then the process must have MAC read access to the object. mac_set_fd sets the MAC label for the open file referred to by fd from the mac_t pointed to by macp. The effective UID of the process must match the owner of the object or the process must have appropriate privilege to set the access MAC on the object. If _POSIX_CAP is in effect, then the appr...
 mac_get_file(3c) -- get or set the MAC label for a pathname
    mac_get_file returns a mac_t, a pointer to an allocated struct mac_label associated with the pathname pointed to by path. If _POSIX_MAC is in effect, then the process must have MAC read access to the object. mac_set_file sets the MAC label of the specified pathname. The MAC label is first checked for validity by mac_valid(3c). The effective UID of the process must match the owner of the object or the process must have appropriate privilege to set the MAC label of path. If _POSIX_CAP is in effect...
 mac_get_proc(3c) -- get or set the MAC label of this process
    mac_get_proc returns a mac_t, a pointer to an allocated struct mac_label which is the MAC label for this process. mac_set_proc sets the MAC label of the process. The MAC label is first checked for validity by mac_valid(3c). The process must have CAP_MAC_RELABEL_SUBJ capability in its effective set to change its MAC label.
 mac_is_moldy(3c) -- get the moldiness of a MAC label
    mac_is_moldy tells its caller whether or not the MAC label pointed to by lp is moldy.
 mac_set_moldy(3c) -- set the moldiness of a MAC label
    mac_set_moldy returns a copy of the MAC label pointed by lp, setting the moldy status of the copy if appropriate.
 mac_size(3c) -- get the size of a MAC, MSEN, or MINT label
    mac_size returns the size in bytes of the MAC label pointed to by the input argument lp.
 mac_valid(3c) -- validate a MAC, MSEN, or MINT label
    mac_valid Check that the format of a MAC label is valid. msen_valid Check that the format of an MSEN label is valid. mint_valid Check that the format of a MINT label is valid.
 Tk/maintgeom(3) -- maintain geometry of one window relative to another
    Tk_Window slave (in) Window whose geometry is to be controlled. Tk_Window master (in) Window relative to which slave's geometry will be controlled. int x (in) Desired x-coordinate of slave in master, measured in pixels from the inside of master's left border to the outside of slave's left border. int y (in) Desired y-coordinate of slave in master, measured in pixels from the inside of master's top border to the outside of slave's top border. int width (in) Desired width for slave, in pixels...
 Tk/mainwin(3) -- find the main window for an application
    Tcl_Interp *interp (in/out) Interpreter associated with the application.
 makecontext(3c) -- manipulate user contexts
    These functions are useful for implementing user-level context switching between multiple threads of control within a process. makecontext modifies the context specified by ucp, which has been initialized using getcontext; when this context is resumed using swapcontext or setcontext [see getcontext(2)], program execution continues by calling ...
 standard/makeobj(3) -- creates an object
    obj expects the numeric identifier for the object being defined.
 standard/maketag(3) -- numbers a routine in the display list
    t expects a numeric identifier, or tag, which the system places between two list items. A tag locates display list items for editing.
 ftn/malloc(3) -- WorkShop memory allocation library
    The WorkShop Performance Tools contain a malloc library, -lmalloc_cv, which provides tracing and error detection around calls to the various malloc routines. The library provides an intercept layer for calls to malloc, free, realloc, memalign, and valloc; the intercept allows tracing of all calls with the WorkShop performance tools. Calls to malloc, free, and realloc are passed through to whatever memory allocation library the program is linked with. Calls to calloc are actually not intercepted,...
 malloc(3c) -- main memory allocator
    malloc and free provide a simple general-purpose memory allocation package. malloc returns a pointer to a block of at least size bytes suitably aligned for any use. The argument to free is a pointer to a block previously allocated by malloc; after free is performed this space is made available for further allocation, but its contents are left undisturbed. Undefined results will occur if the space allocated by malloc is overrun or if some random value is passed as the argument to free. malloc all...
 malloc(3x) -- fast main memory allocator
    malloc and free provide a simple general-purpose memory allocation package, which is more flexible than the malloc(3c) package and, depending on an application's usage, may provide better performance. It is found in the library ``libmalloc.so'', and is loaded if the option ``-lmalloc'' is used with cc(1) or ld(1). malloc returns a pointer to a block of at least size bytes suitably aligned for any use. The argument to free is a pointer to a block pre...
 malloc_cv(3) -- WorkShop memory allocation library
    The WorkShop Performance Tools contain a malloc library, -lmalloc_cv, which provides tracing and error detection around calls to the various malloc routines. The library provides an intercept layer for calls to malloc, free, realloc, memalign, and valloc; the intercept allows tracing of all calls with the WorkShop performance tools. Calls to malloc, free, and realloc are passed through to whatever memory allocation library the program is linked with. Calls to calloc are actually not intercepted,...
 malloc_ss(3) -- SpeedShop memory allocation library
    The SpeedShop Performance Tools contain a malloc library, -lmalloc_ss, which provides tracing and error detection around calls to the various malloc routines. The library provides an intercept layer for calls to malloc, free, realloc, memalign, and valloc; the intercept allows tracing of all calls with the SpeedShop performance tools. Calls to malloc, free, and realloc are passed through to whatever memory allocation library the program is linked with. Calls to calloc are actually not intercepte...
 Tk/managegeom(3) -- arrange to handle geometry requests for a window
    Tk_Window tkwin (in) Token for window to be managed. | Tk_GeomMgr *mgrPtr (in) Pointer to data structure | containing information about the| geometry manager, or NULL to | indicate that tkwin's geometry | shouldn't be managed anymore. | The data structure pointed to by| mgrPtr must be static: Tk keeps| a reference to it as long as the| window is managed. ClientData clientData (in) Arbitrary one-word value to pass| to geometry manager callbacks....
 c++/manip(3) -- iostream out of band manipulations
    Manipulators are values that may be "inserted into" or "extracted from" streams to achieve some effect (other than to insert or extract a value representation), with a convenient syntax. They enable one to embed a function call in an expression containing a series of insertions or extractions. For example, the predefined manipulator for ostreams, flush, can be used as follows: cout << flush to flush cout. Several iostream classes supply manipulators: see ios(3C++), istream(3C++), and ostream...
 standard/mapcolor(3) -- changes a color map entry
    i expects the index into the color map. red expects an intensity value in the range 0 to 255 for red to be associated with the index. green expects an intensity value in the range 0 to 255 for green to be associated with the index. blue expects an intensity value in the range 0 to 255 for blue to be associated with the index.
 ftn/maplun(3) -- returns the integer file descriptor for a Fortran logical unit number
    This function returns the file descriptor given a Fortran logical unit number.
 standard/mapw(3) -- maps a point on the screen into a line in 3-D world coordinates
    vobj expects a viewing object containing the transformations that map the current displayed objects to the screen. sx expects the x coordinate of the screen point to be mapped. sy expects the y coordinate of the screen point to be mapped. wx1 returns the x world coordinate of one endpoint of a line. wy1 returns the y world coordinate of one endpoint of a line. wz1 returns the z world coordinate of one endpoint of a line. wx2 returns the x world coordinate of the remaining endpoint of a line. wy2...
 standard/mapw2(3) -- maps a point on the screen into 2-D world coordinates
    vobj expects the transformations that map the displayed objects to world coordinates. sx expects the x coordinate of the screen point to be mapped. sy expects the y coordinate of the screen point to be mapped. wx returns the corresponding x world coordinate. wy returns the corresponding y world coordinate.
 Tk/mapwindow(3) -- map or unmap a window
    Tk_Window tkwin (in) Token for window.
 f90/mask(3) -- Returns a bit mask
    C/C++: UNICOS and UNICOS/mk systems Fortran: UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 standard/math(3) -- introduction to mathematical library functions
    Beginning with IRIX 6.2, libm now supports the following vector intrinsics: /* single precision vector routines */ vacosf( float *x, float *y, long count, long stridex, long stridey ) vasinf( float *x, float *y, long count, long stridex, long stridey ) vatanf( float *x, float *y, long count, long stridex, long stridey ) vcosf( float *x, float *y, long count, long stridex, long stridey ) vexpf( float *x, float *y, long count, long stridex, long stridey ) vlogf( float *x, float *y, long count, lon...
 perl5/Math::BigFloat(3) -- Arbitrary length float math package
    All basic math operations are overloaded if you declare your big floats as $float = new Math::BigFloat "2.123123123123123123123123123123123"; number format canonical strings have the form /[+-]\d+E[+-]\d+/ . Input values can have inbedded whitespace. Error returns 'NaN' An input parameter was "Not a Number" or divide by zero or sqrt of negative number. Division is computed to max($div_scale,length(dividend)+length(divisor)) digits by default. Also used for default sqrt scale....
 perl5/Math::BigInt(3) -- Arbitrary size integer math package
    All basic math operations are overloaded if you declare your big integers as $i = new Math::BigInt '123 456 789 123 456 789'; Canonical notation Big integer value are strings of the form /^[+-]\d+$/ with leading zeros suppressed. Input Input values to these routines may be strings of the form /^\s*[+- ]?[\d\s]+$/. Output Output values always always in canonical form Actual math is done in an internal format consisting of an array whose first element is the sign (/^[+-]$/) and whose remaini...
 perl5/Math::Complex(3) -- complex numbers and associated mathematical functions
    This package lets you create and manipulate complex numbers. By default, Perl limits itself to real numbers, but an extra use statement brings full complex support, along with a full set of mathematical functions typically associated with and/or extended to complex numbers. If you wonder what complex numbers are, they were invented to be able to solve the following equation: x*x = -1 and by definition, the solution is noted i (engineers use j instead since i usually denotes an intensity, but the...
 perl5/Math::Trig(3) -- trigonometric functions
    Math::Trig defines many trigonometric functions not defined by the core Perl which defines only the sin() and cos(). The constant pi is also defined as are a few convenience functions for angle conversions.
 standard/matherr(3) -- error-handling function
    matherr is invoked by the following functions in libmx.a when errors are detected: acos acosf acosh asin asinf asinh atan atanf atan2 atan2f atanh cbrt cos cosf cosh coshf drem erf erfc exp expf expm1 expm1f fmod fmodf gamma hypot hypotf j0 j1 jn lgamma log logf log10 log10f log1p log1pf pow powf sin sinf sinh sinhf sqrt sqrtf tan tanf tanh tanhf y0 y1 yn Note that to use matherr, libmx.a needs to be linked with the program. Users may define their own routines for handling errors by including a ...
 f90/matmul(3) -- Performs matrix multiplication of numeric or logical matrices
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/max(3) -- FORTRAN maximum-value functions
    The maximum-value functions return the largest of their arguments. There may be any number of arguments, but they must all be of the same type. max0 returns the integer form of the maximum value of its integer arguments; amax0, the real form of its integer arguments; max1, the integer form of its real arguments; amax1, the real form of its real arguments; dmax1, the double-precision form of its double-precision arguments; imax1, the integer*2 form of its real*4 arguments; jmax1, the integer*4 fo...
 ftn/max(3) -- FORTRAN maximum-value functions
    The maximum-value functions return the largest of their arguments. There may be any number of arguments, but they must all be of the same type. max0 returns the integer form of the maximum value of its integer arguments; amax0, the real form of its integer arguments; max1, the integer form of its real arguments; amax1, the real form of its real arguments; dmax1, the double-precision form of its double-precision arguments; imax1, the integer*2 form of its real*4 arguments; jmax1, the integer*4 fo...
 f90/maxexponent(3) -- Returns the maximum exponent in the numeric model
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/maxloc(3) -- Returns the location of a maximum value in an array
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 standard/maxsize(3) -- specifies the maximum size of a graphics window
    x expects the maximum width of a graphics window. The width is measured in pixels. y expects the maximum height of a graphics window. The height is measured in pixels.
 f90/maxval(3) -- Returns the maximum value in an array
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 mbchar(3c) -- multibyte character handling
    Multibyte characters are used to represent characters in an extended character set. This is needed for locales where 8 bits are not enough to represent all the characters in the character set. The multibyte character handling functions provide the means of translating multibyte characters into wide characters and back again. Wide characters have type wchar_t (defined in stdlib.h), which is an integral type whose range of values can represent distinct cod...
 mbstring(3c) -- multibyte string functions
    mbstowcs converts a sequence of multibyte characters from the array pointed to by s into a sequence of corresponding wide character codes and stores these codes into the array pointed to by pwcs, stopping after n codes are stored or a code with value zero (a converted null character) is stored. If pwcs is a null pointer, mbstowcs returns the length required to convert the entire array regardless of the value of n, but no values are stored. wc...
 ftn/mclock(3) -- return Fortran time accounting
    mclock returns time accounting information about the current process and its child processes. The value returned is the sum of the current process's user time and the user and system times of all child processes.
 mdbm(3c) -- 0mdbm: mdbm_open, mdbm_close, mdbm_fetch, mdbm_store, mdbm_delete, mdbm_first, mdbm_firstkey, mdbm_next, mdbm_
    The mdbm routines are used to store key/content pairs in a high performance mapped hash file. Mdbm databases use fixed size pages, but the page size can be set on first open. The database does per page writer locking, and readers can detect and automaticly deal with writers. This allows for scalable multiple simultaneous readers and writers to be operating on the same mdbm file at the same time. Core functions are built into libc, the rest of them require linking with libmdbm. The functions in l...
 midi/mdClosePort(3d) -- open and close MDports
    mdOpenInPort and mdOpenOutPort create an MDport for a specified interface. An MDport maintains the state of the communications path between the application and a MIDI interface. An MDport is passed as the first argument to most MIDI library routines. The name parameter contains the name of the MIDI interface to which the newly opened port is connected. The mdGetName(3dm) function returns strings which can be used as valid values of name. If NULL is passed in for name, the default MIDI interface ...
 midi/mdCountReaders(3d) -- count applications using a MIDI device
    mdCountReaders and mdCountWriters return the number of applications reading or writing from the device connected to the given MIDI port.
 midi/mdFree(3d) -- control memory allocation for the MIDI library
    mdMalloc and mdFree are pointers to memory allocation functions used by the MIDI library. The default implementations use the amalloc(3P) library to implement an arena separate from the main heap used by malloc(3C). This allows memory performance in the MIDI library to be maintained in the presence of high malloc usage by an application. mdMalloc is used by mdReceive(3dm) to allocate storage for incoming MIDI system exclusive messages. mdFree is used by the application to release that storage. m...
 midi/mdGetDefault(3d) -- return the name of the default input or output interface
    mdGetDefault returns a string containing the name of either the default input or the default output interface. If a value of MD_GET_INPUT is passed in the argument inout, the default input interface name is returned. If the value MD_GET_OUTPUT is passed, the default output interface name is returned. Space for the string is allocated by the function; the caller is responsible for deallocating the string (via free(3)) when finished....
 midi/mdGetName(3d) -- return a MIDI interface name
    mdGetName returns a pointer to the interface name associated with index. If index does not correspond to a configured MIDI interface, mdGetName returns NULL. The range of valid values for index is dynamic and extends from 0 to one less than number of configured interfaces (which is returned by mdInit(3dm)). The return value of mdGetName can be used as an argument for any routines which expect an interface name, such as mdOpenInPort(3dm) and mdOpenOutPort(3dm). This routine is also commonly used ...
 midi/mdGetStatus(3d) -- manipulate MIDI messages
    These routines routines are obsolete and are retained only for backwards compatibility. They can be replaced with the following definitions: #define mdGetStatus(msg) (msg[0] & MD_STATUSMASK) #define mdGetChannel(msg) (msg[0] & MD_CHANNELMASK) #define mdGetByte1(msg) (msg[1]) #define mdGetByte2(msg) (msg[2]) #define mdSetStatus(msg,x) (msg[0] = (x) | mdGetChannel(msg)) #define mdSetChannel(msg,x) (msg[0] = mdGetStatus(msg) | (x)) #define mdSetByte1(msg, x) (msg[1] = (x)) #define mdSetByte2(msg, x...
 midi/mdInit(3d) -- initialize MIDI system and register new interfaces
    mdInit initializes the MIDI library and returns the current number of configured MIDI interfaces. mdInit must be called before the application calls any other MIDI library routines. mdInit returns 0 if no interfaces are configured. An application may call mdInit multiple times to update the MIDI library's internal list of available ports. Any interfaces configured after the initial call to mdInit will be inaccessible by the application until mdInit is called again; long-running applications whi...
 midi/mdIntro(3d) -- Introduction to the Silicon Graphics MIDI Library (libmd)
    The Silicon Graphics MIDI library (libmd) provides a programming interface for applications which wish to receive and transmit messages through MIDI interfaces. MIDI (an acronym for the Musical Instrument Digital Interface) is an industry-standard mechanism for connecting to and communicating with a variety of devices. Although it was originally designed primarily for use with electronic music instruments (such as synthesizers and drum machines), MIDI is now used in conjunction with a wide varie...
 midi/mdPanic(3d) -- flush MIDI output and transmit (obsolete)
    mdPanic is an obsolete routine which sends ALL NOTES OFF and RESET ALL CONTROLLERS messages on all channels. The following program illustrates the prefered method of silencing stuck notes (the code is also available in /usr/share/src/dmedia/midi/simple/panic.c if the MIDI example code is installed). #include #include long long stamp = 0; char *usage = "Usage: panic [-f] [-a | interface name]" /* * Transmit ALL NOTES OFF, ALL SOUND OFF, and RESET ALL CONTROLLERS * mess...
 midi/mdPause(3d) -- 0mdPause- discard any queued messages and return stamp of last event
    mdPause immediately halts output on a port and discards any queued events. It returns the stamp of the last MIDI message sent (which is the same as the value returned by mdTell(3dm)).
 midi/mdPrintEvent(3d) -- Generate a descriptive string for MIDI events
    mdPrintEvent can be used to format events in a buffer for printing. buf is a user allocated character into which the formatted string will be written. evbuf points to the array MDevents whose descriptions are to be generated, and count indicates how many of the events should be described. In order to avoid overflowing buf, the programmer should insure that the buffer can accomodate 80 bytes of description per message. The message format is: timestamp : channel : status type (string) : byte 1 : b...
 midi/mdReceive(3d) -- Accept MIDI events from a port
    mdReceive reads MIDI events from the MIDI interface associated with port into the evbuf array. evbuf must be allocated by the user and must contain space for count MDevent structures. For most events, the actual MIDI event is stored in the msg array of the MDevent, and the stamp field is set to a stamp value whose format is determined by the port's stamping mode (see mdSetStampMode). In addition, when a system exclusive event is received, the MIDI library allocates a block of memory for the sys...
 midi/mdSend(3d) -- send out MIDI data
    mdSend writes MIDI events to the interface indicated by port. buf points to a user-allocated array containing at least count MDevent structures. mdSend will always transmit count events; it will block if necessary waiting for the interface event queue to drain. The event structure contains the MIDI message to be transmitted in the msg field (see mdIntro(3dm) for details on the MDevent structure). If the application wishes to transmit a system exclusive message, it should set msg[0] to MD_SYSEX (...
 midi/mdSetOrigin(3d) -- control origin time for synchronization
    mdSetOrigin sets an Unadjusted System Time or UST (see syssgi(2)) that is used for all time based calculations on the port. By default, the origin time for a port is the time that it was opened. It may be reset with mdSetOrigin. mdSetOrigin takes as an argument a 64 bit UST, which represents the time that you wish to calculate time stamps from. If 0 is used, mdSetOrigin uses the current UST. If the time used is greater than the current system time (eg, in the future where we will all be famous f...
 midi/mdSetStampMode(3d) -- control time stamping for an MDport
    mdSetStampMode controls the interpretation of the stamp field in an MDevent by the port. The available interpretation modes are MD_NOSTAMP, MD_DELTASTAMP, MD_RELATIVESTAMP, MD_RELATIVETICKS and MD_DELTATICKS. If an output port is in MD_NOSTAMP mode, the interface will ignore the stamp and transmit the event immediately. On input, events are stamped with the UST (unadjusted system time) corresponding to the arrival time of the final byte in the message. In MD_DELTASTAMP mode, the stamp contains t...
 midi/mdSetStartPoint(3d) -- Define initial MIDI-stamp and UST time values
    mdSetStartPoint defines the start point on the MIDI time line. It takes two arguments, a UST time and a midi stamp value. The timeline is defined such that at the specified UST time, the midi stamp is set to the specified value.
 midi/mdSetTempo(3d) -- set tempo and division for a port
    mdSetDivision and mdSetTempo specify the conversion from MIDI clock ticks to real time values for the MDport. These functions are only applicable when a port is in one of the tick modes (MD_RELATIVETICK or MD_DELTATICK); they should not be called with ports in the other stamping modes. The following equation expresses relation of tempo, division, temposcale, and tick duration: tempo (usecs/beat) tick duration (usecs/tick) = ---------------------------------- division (ticks/beat) * temposcale md...
 midi/mdSetTemporalBuffering(3d) -- obsolete routines for controlling temporal buffering
    mdSetTemporalBuffering and mdGetTemporalBuffering are obsolete and should no longer be used. PPPPaaaaggggeeee 1111
 midi/mdTell(3d) -- Return the MIDI port-specific timing information
    mdTell returns the relative stamp or tick of the last message sent on the port. mdTellNow returns a relative stamp or tick corresponding to the current time, regardless of when the last event was transmitted. For both routines, the returned value will be expressed in either ticks or nanoseconds, depending on whether the stamp mode of the port is a TICK or STAMP mode (see mdSetStampMode(3dm)). The value will be relative to the port's origin regardless of whether the stamp mode is DELTA or RELATI...
 MediaViewer(3) -- a ViewKit class for viewing media files and data
    #include
 Tcl/memory(3) -- Validated memory allocation interface.
    A pointer to the Tcl interpreter. The filename of the caller of Tcl_ValidateAllMemory. The line number of the caller of Tcl_ValidateAllMemory. File to display list of active memory.
 memory(3c) -- memory operations
    These functions operate as efficiently as possible on memory areas (arrays of bytes bounded by a count, not terminated by a null character). They do not check for the overflow of any receiving memory area. memccpy copies bytes from memory area s2 into s1, stopping after the first occurrence of c (converted to an unsigned char) has been copied, or after n bytes have been copied, whichever comes first. It returns a pointer to the byte after ...
 Tk/menu(3) -- Create and manipulate menu widgets
    activeBackground background disabledForegroundrelief | activeBorderWidth borderWidth fonttakeFocus activeForeground cursor foreground See the ``options'' manual entry for details on the standard options. WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS Name: postCommand Class: Command Command-Line Switch:-postcommand If this option is specified then it provides a Tcl command to execute each time the menu is posted. The command is invoked by the post widget command before posting the menu. Name: selectColor Class: Back...
 Tk/menubar(3) -- Obsolete support for menu bars
    These procedures were used in Tk 3.6 and earlier releases to help manage | pulldown menus and to implement keyboard traversal of menus. In Tk 4.0 | and later releases they are no longer needed. Stubs for these procedures| have been retained for backward compatibility, but they have no effect. | You should remove calls to these procedures from your code, since | eventually the procedures will go away....
 Tk/menubutton(3) -- Create and manipulate menubutton widgets
    activeBackground cursor highlightThickness takeFocus | activeForeground disabledForeground image text | anchor font justify textVariable | background foreground padX underline | bitmap highlightBackground padY wrapLength | borderWidth highlightColor relief See the ``options'' manual entry for details on the standard options. WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS Name: height Class: Height Command-Line Switch:-height Specifies a desired height for the menubutton. If an image or bitmap is being displayed in t...
 f90/merge(3) -- Chooses an alternative value according to the value of a mask
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 Tk/message(3) -- Create and manipulate message widgets
    anchor font highlightThickness takeFocus | background foreground padX text | borderWidth highlightBackground padY textVariable | cursor highlightColor relief width See the ``options'' manual entry for details on the standard options. WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS Name: aspect Class: Aspect Command-Line Switch:-aspect Specifies a non-negative integer value indicating desired aspect ratio for the text. The aspect ratio is specified as 100*width/height. 100 means the text should be as wide as it is tal...
 migration(3c) -- user migration operations
    migr_range_migrate migrates a range of memory to the node where the MLD specified by mld_handle has been placed. migr_policy_args_init fills a migration parameter structure with default values. migr_range_migrate will fail and memory may not be successfully migrated if one or more of the following are true: EFAULT Arguments could ...
 f90/min(3) -- FORTRAN minimum-value functions
    The minimum-value functions return the minimum of their arguments. There may be any number of arguments, but they must all be of the same type. min0 returns the integer form of the minimum value of its integer arguments; amin0, the real form of its integer arguments; min1, the integer form of its real arguments; amin1, the real form of its real arguments; dmin1, the double-precision form of its double-precision arguments; qmin1, the real*16 form of its real*16 arguments; imin1, the integer*2 for...
 ftn/min(3) -- FORTRAN minimum-value functions
    The minimum-value functions return the minimum of their arguments. There may be any number of arguments, but they must all be of the same type. min0 returns the integer form of the minimum value of its integer arguments; amin0, the real form of its integer arguments; min1, the integer form of its real arguments; amin1, the real form of its real arguments; dmin1, the double-precision form of its double-precision arguments; qmin1, the real*16 form of its real*16 arguments; imin1, the integer*2 for...
 f90/minexponent(3) -- Returns the minimum (most negative) exponent of a real number in the numeric model
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 complib/MINFIT(3) -- EISPACK routine. This subroutine determines, towards the solution of the linear T system AX=B, the singular va
    On INPUT NM must be set to the row dimension of two-dimensional array parameters as declared in the calling program dimension statement. Note that NM must be at least as large as the maximum of M and N. M is the number of rows of A and B. N is the number of columns of A and the order of V. A contains the rectangular coefficient matrix of the system. IP is the number of columns of B. IP can be zero. B contains the constant column matrix of the system if IP is not zero. Otherwise B is not referenc...
 f90/minloc(3) -- Returns the location of a minimum value in an array
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 standard/minmax(3) -- modifies pixel transfers to compute the minimum and maximum pixel values
    op one of the symbolic constants: (parameters that affect lrectread, lrectwrite, rectcopy pixel transfers) MINMAX_ENABLE enables the computaton of minimum and maximum pixels in lrectread, lrectwrite and rectcopy pixel transfers. Value is ignored. MINMAX_DISABLE disables the collection of minmax data. MINMAX_INIT initializes the minmax data. value is ignored.
 standard/minsize(3) -- specifies the minimum size of a graphics window
    x expects the minimum width of a graphics window. The width is measured in pixels. The lowest legal value for this parameter is 1. y expects the minimum height of a graphics window. The height is measured in pixels. The lowest legal value for this parameter is 1.
 mint_dom(3c) -- compare two MINT labels for the dominates/equal relationship
    mint_dom compares the two MINT labels pointed to by the input arguments lp1 and lp2. mint_equal compares the two labels for equality.
 mint_free(3c) -- free allocated memory
    Free memory allocated by mint_from_text(3C), mint_from_mac(3C), and mint_to_text(3C) calls.
 mint_from_mac(3c) -- extract a sensitivity label from a mac_t
    mint_from_mac returns an MINT label extracted from the MAC label specified in m.
 mint_from_text(3c) -- convert a MINT string from/to mint_t
    These routines convert a textual name of a mandatory integrity (MINT) label from/to a mint_t - a pointer to a structure representing the mandatory integrity component of a MAC label. mint_from_text translates a textual description of a MINT label into a mint_t and returns the result. mint_to_text translates a mint_t into a character string describing the MINT label. Both of these routines allocate storage for the information returned. The allocated storage for both can be released when no longer...
 f90/minval(3) -- Returns the minimum value in an array
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 mkdirp(3g) -- create, remove directories in a path
    mkdirp creates all the missing directories in the given path with the given mode. [See chmod(2) for the values of mode.] rmdirp removes directories in path d. This removal starts at the end of the path and moves back toward the root as far as possible. If an error occurs, the remaining path is stored in d1. rmdirp returns a 0 only if it is able to remove every directory in the path....
 mktemp(3c) -- make a unique file name
    Mktemp replaces the contents of the string pointed to by template by a unique file name, and returns the address of template. The string in template should look like a file name with six trailing Xs; mktemp will replace the Xs with a string that can be used to create a unique file name. Mkstemp makes the same replacement to the template but returns a file descriptor for the template file open for reading and writing. Mkstemp avoids the race between testing whether the file exists and opening it ...
 mktime(3c) -- converts a tm structure to a calendar time
    mktime converts the time represented by the tm structure pointed to by timeptr into a calendar time (the number of seconds since 00:00:00 UTC, January 1, 1970). The tm structure has the following format. struct tm { int tm_sec; /* seconds after the minute [0, 61] */ int tm_min; /* mi...
 mld(3c) -- memory locality domain operations
    mld_create creates a memory locality domain. The argument radius is not currently used and is normally zero. The argument size is a hint specifying approximately how much physical memory in bytes will be required for this MLD. If this argument is set to MLD_DEFAULTSIZE then at the time of mld placement the kernel will make an estimate of the memory to be used based on the current total address space in use by the process and the number of mlds. mld_de...
 mldset(3c) -- mldset operations
    mldset_create creates a memory locality domain set. mldset_destroy destroys a memory locality domain set. mldset_place places a memory locality domain set mldset_create will fail and no MLD set will not be created if one or more of the following are true: EFAULT Arguments could not be copied into kernel space. EFAULT T...
 mlock(3c) -- lock or unlock pages in memory
    mlock locks the pages associated with the address range (addr, addr + len) into memory. The super-user can lock as many pages as it wishes, other users are limited to a per process maximum {PLOCK_MAX}. Locks established with mlock are not inherited by a child process after a fork. munlock unlocks the pages associated with the address range (addr, addr + len), regardless of the number of times the pages were locked. Page locks establi...
 mlockall(3c) -- lock or unlock address space
    mlockall locks all pages mapped in the address space of the calling process into memory, including: text, data, stack and mmaped regions. Locked pages are immune to all routine swapping. The value of flags determines whether the pages to be locked are those currently mapped by the address space, those that will be mapped in the future, or both: MCL_CURRENT Lock current mappings MCL_FUTURE Lock future mappings m
 standard/mmode(3) -- sets the current matrix mode
    m expects a symbolic constant, one of: MSINGLE puts the system into single-matrix mode. In single-matrix mode, all modeling, viewing, and projection transformations are done using a single matrix that combines all these transformations. This is the default matrix mode. MVIEWING puts the system into multi-matrix mode. In this mode, separate ModelView, Projection, and Texture matrices are maintained. The ModelView matrix is modified by all matrix operations, except for perspective, ortho, ortho2, ...
 ftn/mod(3) -- FORTRAN remaindering intrinsic functions
    mod returns the integer remainder of its first argument divided by its second argument. imod returns the integer*2 remainder of its two integer*2 arguments. jmod returns the integer*4 remainder of its two integer*4 arguments. amod, dmod, and qmod return, respectively, the real, double-precision, and real*16 whole number remainder of the integer division of their two arguments. The generic version mod will return the data type of its arguments. The result of these intrinsics is undefined when the...
 f90/models(3) -- Describes mathematical representation models for CF90 and MIPSpro 7 Fortran 90 compiler intrinsic procedures
    Fortran 90
 f90/modulo(3) -- Modulo function
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 Xvc/moninfo(3) -- Monitor characteristics database
    moninfo describes the characteristics of CRT monitors. The information included in this file is used by the XSGIvc X extension for video control; the information allows the extension to determine whether the monitor connected to a video channel has the capability to operate a given video format and to provide responses to general queries. The format of each entry in the moninfo file consists of the monitor type name followed by a series of assignment statements describing monitor characteristics...
 standard/monitor(3) -- prepare execution profile
    NOTE: These functions have been moved from the standard C library to the libprof library. If a program needs to access these routines it must either use the -p option on the compiler/linker or explicitly link with the -lprof linker option. These functions have been changed to work correctly with dynamic shared objects (dsos). Use of the option -p during compilation and linking automatically generates calls to the monitor and moncontrol functions. You need to call these functions explicitly only ...
 standard/monobuffer(3) -- configures the framebuffer for monoscopic viewing
    none
 mount(3) -- keep track of remotely mounted filesystems
    Program number: MOUNTPROG, MOUNTPROG_SGI XDR routines: bool_t xdr_exportbody(XDR *, struct exports *) bool_t xdr_exports(XDR *, struct exports **); bool_t xdr_fhandle(XDR *, fhandle_t *); bool_t xdr_fhstatus(XDR *, struct fhstatus *); bool_t xdr_groups(XDR *, struct groups *); bool_t xdr_mountbody(XDR *, mountlist *); bool_t xdr_mountlist(XDR *, mountlist **); bool_t xdr_path(XDR *, char **); /* sgi_mount only */ bool_t xdr_exportlist(XDR *, struct exportlist **); bool_t xdr_exportentry(XDR *, s...
 standard/move(3) -- move curses window cursor
    With these routines, the cursor associated with the window is moved to line y and column x. This routine does not move the physical cursor of the terminal until refresh is called. The position specified is relative to the upper left-hand corner of the window, which is (0,0).
 Tk/movetoplev(3) -- Adjust the position of a top-level window
    Tk_Window tkwin (in) Token for top-level window to move. int x (in) New x-coordinate for the top-left pixel of tkwin's border, or the top-left pixel of the decorative border supplied for tkwin by the window manager, if there is one. int y (in) New y-coordinate for the top-left pixel of tkwin's border, or the top-left pixel of the decorative border supplied for tkwin by the window manager, if there is one....
 standard/mp(3) -- C multiprocessing utility functions
    These routines give some measure of control over the parallelism used in C programs. They should not be needed by most users, but will help to tune specific applications. Page 2 MP(3C) MP(3C) mp_block puts all slave threads to sleep via blockproc(2). This frees the processors for use by other jobs. This is useful if it is known that the slaves will not be needed for some time, and the machine is being shared by several users. Calls to mp_block may not be nested; a warning is issued if an attempt...
 ftn/mp(3) -- C multiprocessing utility functions
    These routines give some measure of control over the parallelism used in C programs. They should not be needed by most users, but will help to tune specific applications. Page 2 MP(3C) MP(3C) mp_block puts all slave threads to sleep via blockproc(2). This frees the processors for use by other jobs. This is useful if it is known that the slaves will not be needed for some time, and the machine is being shared by several users. Calls to mp_block may not be nested; a warning is issued if an attempt...
 mpconf(3c) -- multiprocessing control and information
    mpconf provides control/information for miscellaneous multi-processor services. The arguments arg1, arg2, arg3 are provided for commanddependent use. As specified by cmd, the following commands are available: _MIPS_MP_NPROCESSORS Returns the number of processors physically configured. _MIPS_MP_NAPROCESSORS Returns the number of processors that are available to schedule unrestricted processes. _MIPS_MP_ISPROCESSOR_AVAIL The processor number given by arg1, interpreted as an 'int...
 mpool(3) -- shared memory buffer pool
    Mpool is the library interface intended to provide page oriented buffer management of files. The buffers may be shared between processes. The function mpool_open initializes a memory pool. The key argument is the byte string used to negotiate between multiple processes wishing to share buffers. If the file buffers are mapped in shared memory, all processes using the same key will share the buffers. If key is NULL, the buffers are mapped into private memory. The fd argument is a file descriptor f...
 mq_close(3c) -- close a message queue descriptor
    mq_close closes the connection between message queue descriptor, mqd, and its associated queue. The descriptor, mqd, should have been obtained from a prior call to mq_open(3c). No messages are added or removed from the queue. If multiple threads within a common process (i.e., sprocs, pthreads) are sharing mqd, a single call to mq_close will close the message queue for all threads within the calling process. If the process has a notifica...
 mq_getattr(3c) -- get attributes of a message queue
    mq_getattr saves the attributes and status information of the message queue named by mqd into the mq_attr structure at address mqstat. The following fields of the mq_attr structure are updated after a successful call to mq_getattr: long mq_flags; /* message queue flags */ long mq_maxmsg; /* ma
 mq_notify(3c) -- register message notification request
    mq_notify registers a message notification request with the message queue named by mqd. A message notification is an asynchronous event which informs a process of a message that has arrived on a previously empty queue. A message queue transition from empty to non-empty will result in a notification delivery to the process that registered the request. There can be only one message notification registered with a queue at any given time. If the sigev_notify member of notific...
 mq_open(3c) -- open/create a message queue
    mq_open is used to open or to create and open a message queue. It returns a message queue descriptor that is used as the handle for other operations on the queue. mq_name points to a path name that is constructed using the standard filename conventions. The oflag argument is used to specify send, receive or send/receive access to the queue. It is also used to specify creation of the queue. The following oflags may be selected (the first three flags are mutually exclusive): O...
 mq_receive(3c) -- receive a message from a queue
    mq_receive removes a message, of size msglen bytes, from the message queue named by the mqd descriptor, and copies it to the buffer at address msgptr. Messages are removed in priority order with higher priority messages removed before the lower priority messages. The larger the numerical value of the priority, the more important the message. If the argument msgprio is not NULL, the priority of the message removed is stored at address msgprio. Messages of equal priority...
 mq_send(3c) -- send a message to a queue
    mq_send sends the message at address msgptr, of size msglen bytes, to the message queue named by mqd. The message is queued in priority order, as specified by msgprio. The larger the numerical value of the priority, the more important the message. Messages with same priorities are queued in FIFO order. The value of msgprio must be less than {MQ_PRIO_MAX}. A message queue is full when the number of the messages queued equals the value the of mq_maxmsg ...
 mq_setattr(3c) -- set attributes of a message queue
    mq_setattr sets the attributes, specified in the mq_attr structure pointed to by mqstat, of the message queue described by mqd. The attributes of the queue specified by the following fields of the mq_attr structure are updated after a successful call to mq_setattr: mq_flags If the O_NONBLOCK flag is set, then the mq_send and mq_receive functions do not block when operating on t...
 mq_unlink(3c) -- remove a message queue
    mq_unlink removes the message queue named by the pathname, mq_name. If one or more processes has the message queue opened, the queue will be removed after all the processes close the queue. When all the references to the queue are gone the space occupied by the queue is released. After a successful call to unlink, the queue, mq_name, will not be accessible by any process that does not already have access to the queue, by a call to mq_open(3c). mq_<...
 standard/msalpha(3) -- specifies treatment of alpha values during multisample rendering
    mode is a symbolic constant. MSA_MASK and MSA_MASK_ONE indicates that alpha values are to be converted to multisample mask values just prior to the alpha test. MSA_ALPHA indicates that no such conversion is to be done. The default is MSA_ALPHA.
 msen_dom(3c) -- compare two MSEN labels for the dominates/equal relationship
    msen_dom compares the two MSEN labels pointed to by the input arguments lp1 and lp2. msen_equal compares the two labels for equality.
 msen_free(3c) -- free allocated memory
    Free memory allocated by msen_from_text(3C), msen_from_mac(3C), and msen_to_text(3C) calls.
 msen_from_mac(3c) -- extract a sensitivity label from a mac_t
    msen_from_mac returns an MSEN label extracted from the MAC label specified in m.
 msen_from_text(3c) -- convert a MSEN string from/to msen_t
    These routines convert a textual name of a mandatory sensitvity (MSEN) label from/to a msen_t - a pointer to a structure representing the mandatory sensitivity component of a MAC label. msen_from_text translates a textual description of a MSEN label into a msen_t and returns the result. msen_to_text translates a msen_t into a character string describing the MSEN label. Both of these routines allocate storage for the information returned. The allocated storage for both can be released when no lon...
 standard/msmask(3) -- specifies a multisample mask
    mask is a value between 0 and 1 inclusive, indicating what fraction of the multisamples at each pixel are to be updated. The default is 1. inverse specifies whether an inverse mask should be created.
 standard/mspattern(3) -- specifies a multisample sample pattern
    pattern is one of several enumerated values: MSP_DEFAULT MSP_2PASS_0 MSP_2PASS_1 MSP_4PASS_0 MSP_4PASS_1 MSP_4PASS_2 MSP_4PASS_3
 standard/mssize(3) -- specifies multisample buffer configuration
    samples is the number of samples to be stored at each framebuffer pixel location. The default is zero. zsize is the number of bits per depth component desired in the multisample buffer. ssize is the number of bits per stencil field desired in the multisample buffer.
 standard/mswapbuffers(3) -- swap multiple framebuffers simultaneously
    fbuf Expects a bitfield comprised of the logical OR of one or more of the following symbols: DUALDRAW indicates that the framebuffers of two pipes are alternately swapped. This is known as Hyper-Pipline or Cyclops mode. NORMALDRAW indicates that the normal framebuffer is to be swapped. OVERDRAW indicates that the overlay framebuffer is to be swapped. UNDERDRAW indicates that the underlay framebuffer is to be swapped....
 standard/multimap(3) -- organizes the color map as a number of smaller maps
    none
 standard/multisample(3) -- specifies the use of the multisample buffer
    bool is either TRUE or FALSE, indicating whether rendering is to make use of the multisample buffer or not. By default multisample is TRUE.
 standard/multmatrix(3) -- premultiplies the current transformation matrix
    m expects the matrix that is to premultiply the current matrix.
 movie/mvAddTrack(3d) -- add or remove tracks in a movie
    A movie contains a number of separate, parallel tracks, each of which contains one type of data. A movie may contain any number of tracks. These functions are used to add tracks to newly created movies, remove tracks from existing movies, and find tracks in an existing movie. The type MVid is used both for movies and for tracks so that the generic tag functions (see mvParams(3dm)) can work on movies and tracks. mvAddTrack adds a new track to a movie and returns the MVid for that track. The mediu...
 movie/mvBindWindow(3d) -- functions to associate movies with and dissociate movies from playback windows
    movieid The specified movie instance. dpy The X display on which the movie instance will appear. win The X window in which the movie will appear. ctxt The OpenGL graphics context for the movie.
 f90/mvbits(3) -- FORTRAN bitwise boolean functions
    bool is the general name for the bit field manipulation intrinsic functions and subroutines from the FORTRAN Military Standard (MIL-STD1753). and, or and xor return the value of the binary operations on their arguments. not is a unary operator returning the one's complement of its argument. ior, iand, not, ieor - return the same results as and, or, not, and xor. lshift and rshift return the value of the first argument shifted left or right, respectively, the number of times specified by the sec...
 movie/mvClose(3d) -- write, close, and destroy movie instances
    These are the functions that are used to write, close, and destroy movie instances. mvWrite flushes all changes that have been made to a movie and makes sure that they are written to the file. DM_SUCCESS or DM_FAILURE is returned. Note that not all file formats support all editing features. For example, track gaps (also known as "Empty Edits") are currently only supported in QuickTime files. mvWrite will return failure upon attempting to wr...
 movie/mvConvertTime(3d) -- Convert times from one timescale to another.
    For information one how to interpret a time, timeScale pair, please see the ``Time and Timescale'' section of mvIntro. mvConvertTime is a convenience function to convert time between time scales. time is passed in with the old time scale (oldScale) and the new time scale (newScale). The value returned is a time, measured in newScale.
 movie/mvCreate(3d) -- create new movie instances
    These are the functions that are used to create new movie instances. A movie instance is a handle that allows you to read, write, edit, and play a movie file. It contains information about the different tracks (audio and image) in a movie. mvCreateFile, mvCreateFD, and mvCreateMem all create a new empty movie, initialized with the parameters params (see mvSetMovieDefaults(3dm)). The actual parameters set for the movie are returned in paramsUsedOrNULL (see mvParams(3dm)). Any movie that was alrea...
 movie/mvCurrentTime(3d) -- Set/get the time which is currently playing
    mvSetCurrentTime(3dm) tells the Movie Playback Library what the current time in the movie is. This call causes the playback to jump to that time in the movie. If curTime is less than 0 or greater than the value returned by mvGetEstMovieDuration(timeScale), then DM_FAILURE is returned and the movie errno is set to MV_TIME_OUT_OF_RANGE. mvGetCurrentTime(3dm) returns the current time being played. If the movie is stopped, this is the time corresponding to the currently displayed image. If the movie...
 movie/mvDeleteFramesAtTime(3d) -- edit/manipulate a movie track
    These functions edit tracks. They are medium-neutral and can be used for all tracks. mvDeleteFramesAtTime This function deletes a segment of the track. track is the track id of the track to be edited. time is the time for the beginning of the segment to be deleted. If this time is beyond the track duration, an error is set and DM_FAILURE is returned. duration is the duration of the segment to be deleted. If the end of the segment to be deleted, as indicated by time and...
 movie/mvEditByFrame(3d) -- edit/manipulate a movie track
    mvReadFrames reads frameCount frames from the track, starting with frameIndex, and places them in buffer. The value returned is DM_SUCCESS or DM_FAILURE. For image tracks the image returned in the buffer pointed to by buffer are of pixel packing DM_IMAGE_PACKING_XBGR, interlacing DM_IMAGE_NONINTERLACED, and orientation DM_
 movie/mvEnableAudio(3d) -- Enable/disable audio playback for a movie instance
    mvSetEnableAudio(3dm) enables or disables all audio playback for a movie. To play audio, specify DM_TRUE for the onoff parameter; to mute audio, specify DM_FALSE. If the movie has no sound track, or the system does not have audio capability, this call has no effect. The default is DM_TRUE. You may play or mute audio regardless of whether or not the specified movie is currently playing. mvGetEnableAudio(3dm) returns the current audio playba...
 movie/mvEnableVideo(3d) -- Enable/disable video playback for a movie instance
    mvSetEnableVideo(3dm) enables or disables all video playback for a movie. To play audio, specify DM_TRUE for the onoff parameter; to turn off the video, specify DM_FALSE. If the movie has no IMAGE track, or is not currently bound to a visual port or window, this call has no effect. The default is DM_TRUE. You may disable or enable the video regardless of whether or not the specified movie is currently playing. mvGetEnableVideo(3dm) returns...
 movie/mvEvent(3d) -- Movie Playback Library event handling functions
    These calls initialize and provide access to the Movie Playback Library event queues. There is one queue to which events are sent for all movies. Also, each movie provides an event queue which receives events for only that movie. An application should choose to either use the per/movie event queues or the global event queue. Mixing the use of these is unwise as events are sent to both queues and the application will see events twice. Without exception, in the following, each statement about a gi...
 movie/mvExportFlattenedFile(3d) -- export a movie to a given file format
    srcMovie The movie that contains the content to be exported. This may be an arbitrarily complex movie, with multiple image tracks and multiple audio tracks. dstFileName The pathname of the output file that will be created. dstFileFormat Specifies what type of file to create (in parameter MV_FILE_FORMAT), plus any format-specific details. Valid MV_FILE_FORMATs include MV_FORMAT_QT, MV_FORMAT_MPEG1, MV_FORMAT_AVI, MV_FORMAT_DIF, and MV_FORMAT_SGI_3. Page 1 mvExportFlattenedFile(3dm) mvExportFlatte...
 movie/mvFindTrack(3d) -- find tracks in a movie
    These functions are used to find tracks in a movie instance. mvFindTrackByIndex returns the track indexed by trackIndex in returnTrack. An application can search for all of the tracks in a movie by first using mvGetNumTracks to find the number of tracks and then calling mvFindTrackByIndex with trackIndex ranging from zero to the number of tracks minus one. The medium of the track can be found by calling mvGetTrackMedium(3dm). mvFindTrackByMedium is used to get a handle for a track of medium medi...
 movie/mvGetActualFrameRate(3d) -- Obtain playback frame rate information for a movie
    mvGetActualFrameRate(3dm) returns the frame rate which the Movie Playback Library has actually achieved for the specified movie, computed over the last second of playback. The return value of mvGetActualFrameRate(3dm) is always equal to or less than the movie's current speed. The movie's current speed is its natural frame rate, as stored in the movie file, multiplied by the absolute value of the play speed setting. (The return value of mvGetActualFrameRate(3dm) is always >= 0 regardless of the...
 movie/mvGetAudioWidth(3d) -- get and set the parameters of a an audio track
    All of the data accessed by these functions can also be accessed using mvGetParamsmvGetAudioWidth returns the number of bits used to store each audio sample. The movie library supports 8-bit and 16-bit audio samples. mvGetAudioRate returns the number of samples per second. mvGetAudioChannels returns the number of audio channels, 1 for mono and 2 for stereo. mvGetAudioFormat returns the format used to store each sample: either DM_AUDIO_TWOS_COMPL...
 movie/mvGetBitrate(3d) -- get the stored bitrate of a movie file or track
    mvGetBitrate returns the bitrate of the track or movie. It is only defined on movies for MPEG movies. If the bitrate is the token for "variable," this function will return 0. For tracks, it returns the bitrate parameter set on the track.
 movie/mvGetBoundary(3d) -- get timing information about movie or track
    Each track is made up of frames, each of which can be typed. Current frame types supported are key frames (MV_FRAMETYPE_KEY) or delta frames (MV_FRAMETYPE_DELTA). Frames can be grouped into chunks and/or edit atoms. mvGetMovieBoundary and mvGetTrackBoundary allow the user to get at this information. Valid values for MVdirection are: MV_FORWARD and MV_BACKWA...
 movie/mvGetErrno(3d) -- return information for Movie Library error codes
    mvGetErrno(3dm) returns the error code set by the last Movie Library function that returned an error (DM_FAILURE). mvGetErrorStr(3dm) returns an error string corresponding to error. mvClearErrno(3dm) sets the error code stored in the Movie Library to zero. If the value of dmGetErrno(3dm) does not match one of the error codes outlined in moviefile.h, it will match one of the system error codes outlined in . Besides error codes which are returned by Movie Li...
 movie/mvGetFileFormat(3d) -- get and set the properties of a movie
    All of the data accessed by these functions can also be accessed using mvGetParamsmvGetFileFormat returns the format in which the movie is stored, which will one of MV_FORMAT_SGI_3 (Silicon Graphics format), MV_FORMAT_QT (QuickTime (tm) format), MV_FORMAT_MPEG1 (MPEG format), or MV_FORMAT_AVI (Microsoft AVI format). mvGetLoopMode gets the default looping mode ...
 movie/mvGetImageWidth(3d) -- get and set the properties of a an image track
    All of the data accessed by these functions can also be accessed using mvGetParamsmvGetImageWidth returns the x size (in pixels) of the images stored in the track. mvGetImageHeight returns the y size (in pixels) of the images stored in the track. mvGetImageRate returns the number of frames per second that are shown when playing the movie. mvGetImageRate returns the default frequency for key frames when frames are being added and compressed in the movie library using a compression scheme that sup...
 movie/mvGetMovieGLContextState(3d) -- set/get the GLContextState of a movie
    When mvRenderMovieToOpenGL is called, the movie library disables some of the unused GL extensions in order to optimize the pixel path for drawing. Between two successive calls to mvRenderMovieToOpenGL, the movie library, by default, goes through the disabling routines to make sure that the pixel path is in the state that it needs to be in while it is drawing and restores the graphics states when it is done drawing . However, the overhead in changing the graphics states can be rather expensive. I...
 movie/mvGetMoviePlayVolume(3d) -- get and set the volume of a movie or track
    These functions are used to get and set the volume of a movie or track. mvSetMoviePlayVolume takes a movie id and a float volume between 0 and 1.0. The Movie Playback Library's engine will scale the volume of all the audio tracks in the movie by volume during playback. mvGetMoviePlayVolume returns the current volume of movie. If no volume is set with mvSetMoviePlayVolume the default volume of 1.0 is returned. mvSetTrackPlayVolume takes a track id and a float volume between 0 and 1.0. This funct...
 movie/mvGetMoviePreviewTime(3d) -- get and set movie times for special purposes
    These functions allow certain information about a movie's current time, selection, still ``gallery,'' or movie ``preview'' to be accessed or stored with a movie. The movie current time is a time and timescale stored with a movie so that the next time the movie is opened, the movie can automatically be started at the same location it was at in the previous editing/viewing session. mvGetMovieCurrentTime allows the user to query for a movie's current time (which will be returned in the timeSc...
 movie/mvGetNumTracks(3d) -- determine number of tracks in a movie instance
    Function to determine the number of tracks in a movie instance. mvGetNumTracks returns the total number of tracks in the movie. This includes any tracks that existed when the movie was opened and any that have been added since. Whenever a track is added or removed, this number will change.
 movie/mvGetTrackDataFieldInfo(3d) -- get track data info
    The data to describe a single image in an image track may be made up of two fields. In a QuickTime file, an auxillary table can be stored in the meta data to describe the sizes and relative positions of these fields. These functions allow users to get at field information. Currently, this feature is only supported on QuickTime files. mvTrackDataHasFieldInfo This function must be called to determine whether a chunk of data has field information. The function returns DM_TRUE if field information i...
 movie/mvGetTrackDuration(3d) -- get and set movie/track offset and duration.
    For information one how to interpret a time, timeScale pair, please see the ``Time and Timescale'' section of mvIntro(3dm). These function in the movie library are provided to allow the user to get or set information about a movie's time properties, such as a track's duration, and a track's starting time.
 movie/mvGetTrackEnable(3d) -- Enable/Disable a track
    Each track in a movie can be enabled or disabled. Most functions that operate on the movie as a whole take this flag into account. Most movie editing functions, like mvDeleteMovieAtTime, take an argument that determines whether to operate on the whole movie or only on the enabled tracks. All rendering functions, like mvRenderMovieToOpenGL, only operate on enabled tracks. When a track is created, it is enabled by default. mvSetTrackEnable This function sets the enable flag for the track passed in...
 movie/mvGetTrackLayer(3d) -- set/get the layer of a track
    The ``layer'' value (a signed integer) of a track determines its rendering order with respect to other tracks. For visual tracks (e.g. image tracks), tracks with smaller (ie, more negative) ``layer'' value are rendered on top of (possibly obscuring) tracks with bigger (ie, more positive) ``layer'' value. For aural tracks (e.g. audio tracks), this value is ignored during rendering. If a there is more than one track in a single layer, the tracks are rendered in an order determined by the tra...
 movie/mvGetTrackLength(3d) -- get and set the properties of a track
    All of the data accessed by these functions can also be accessed using mvGetParamsmvGetTrackLength returns the number of frames playable at the frame rate of a track. For some compression schemes, MPEG in particular, a movie file can be opened in one of two modes, with prescan or without prescan. Movies opened without prescan do not have a defined length for their tracks. mvGetScannedLength provides a way to get at the length currently known to the movie library for a certain track. Currently, t...
 movie/mvGetTrackMaxDataSize(3d) -- convenience function to get the max data size of a track
    These are convenience functions to allow applications that are sensitive to memory allocation to preallocate the worst case data size. mvGetTrackMaxDataSize returns in size the maximum data size of all the chunks in the data. mvGetTrackMaxFieldDataSize returns in size the maximum size of a field among all the fields with field information in a track.
 movie/mvGetTrackTimeScale(3d) -- get and set a movie or track timescale.
    For information one how to interpret a time, timeScale pair, please see the ``Time and Timescale'' section of mvIntro. These function in the movie library are provided to allow the user to get or set the default timescale for either a track or a movie. TRACK TIMESCALE AND MOVIE TIMESCALE mvGetTrackTimeScale allows the user to learn what timescale the movie library is using internally to represent track edits. It allows an application to know the finest resolution at which edits can be made to ...
 movie/mvGetTrackUserDataListHandle(3d) -- get user data dmParams of the track/movie
    These functions return a pointer to the user data dmParams, which you can then examine and modify using dmParamsGet* and dmParamsSet*. You should not free this pointer, as it is owned by the movie library. The params set in this fashion will be stored in the file when it is written, if the file format supports user data. Note that currently, the QuickTime file format is the only file format that supports user data....
 movie/mvGrabRelease(3d) -- provide safe usage of graphics libraries from Movie Playback Library clients
    mvGrabOpenGL(3dm) tells the Movie Playback Library that your application wishes to use OpenGL. These functions temporarily suspend display of all movie instances until you call mvReleaseOpenGL(3dm). mvGrabOpenGL(3dm) does not stop playback; instead, it merely suspends the display of images on the workstation screen. Internally, the Movie Playback Library uses the sproc(2) system call to provide asynchronous playback in a separate execution thread. Multiple threads in the same process may have ac...
 movie/mvHwAccel(3d) -- Set/get movie hardware acceleration
    mvSetMovieHwAcceleration(3dm) should be used to tell the Movie Playback Library to use hardware acceleration when available for a given movie. mvSetMovieHwAcceleration(3dm) must not be called while a movie is currently bound to a window (or port). Calling this routine with a tryHw value of DM_TRUE does NOT insure that hardware acceleration will actually be used. An application can determine whether or not acceleration is actually used by calling mvGetMovieHwAcceleration(3dm). B...
 movie/mvInsertFramesAtTime(3d) -- edit/manipulate a movie track
    mvInsertFramesAtTime inserts a series of data chunks into the track. time is the time at which the new segment is to be inserted. If the time specified is beyond the duration of the track, an empty segment will first be inserted to cover the time between the duration of the track and the time specified by the user. duration is the duration for which the inserted segment is to last. timescale is the timescale for time and duration. buffer is a pointer to a buffer of uncompressed data to be insert...
 movie/mvIntro(3d) -- introduction to the Movie Libraries SYNOPSIS (Movie File Library) #include -lmoviefile SY
    While movie data is stored in tracks, there are a few properties that are available on a per-movie basis. For example, mvGetMovieDuration queries for the overall length of the movie. Additionally, there are functions that control how the movie is rendered or played back (see mvGetMovieRect), functions to obtain information about the file (see mvGetFileFormat), and functions to store and retrieve additional information about how to preview a file (eg, mvGetMoviePreviewTime), and textual informati...
 movie/mvIs(3d) -- identify movie instances
    mvIsMovieFile, mvIsMovieFD, and mvIsMovieMem test whether a movie instance is present in a file, a file descriptor, or in memory. Only movies in supported formats (SGI, QuickTime, MPEG1, and AVI) are recognized. They return DM_TRUE if a movie is present, and DM_FALSE if not.
 movie/mvIsAppendOnly(3d) -- see if a movie instance is append-only
    In some circumstances an application may not be allowed to read or edit a movie while appending frames to its tracks; this is currently the case for MPEG-1 movies. In general, mvIsAppendOnly should be called after a movie is created to determine whether or not reading and editing calls are allowed. mvIsAppendOnly returns DM_TRUE if the movie is append-only and DM_FALSE if it is not....
 movie/mvIsReadOnly(3d) -- see if a movie instance is read-only
    In some circumstances an application may not be allowed to modify a movie even if the movie is opened O_RDWR. Reasons for this include incomplete support of certain file formats or lack of necessary compression functionality. The call mvIsReadOnly should be called after a movie has been opened to determine whether or not calls which modify the movie will be allowed. mvIsReadOnly returns DM_TRUE if the movie is read-only and DM_FALSE if it is ...
 movie/mvMapBetweenTracks(3d) -- convert frame numbers between tracks
    Different tracks in a movie have different rates of presentation. Frame number 10 of an image track may be presented at the same time as frame number 220500 in an audio track. This function is used to find corresponding frame numbers in different tracks. The tracks are named by fromTrack and toTrack. The frame number of track fromTrack in fromFrameIndex is converted to a frame number for track toTrack and placed in toFrameIndex. The starting times for frames in different tracks may not coincide ...
 movie/mvMatrix(3d) -- Matrix manipulation of movie and track
    This set of functions manipulate the 2-dimension matrix associated with each movie and track. MVmatrix2d is a 3 by 3 2-dimensional array. These matrices affects how visual tracks are laid out with respect to each other. It also affects how the movie is laid out on the screen. These matrices have no effects on aural tracks. mvSetMovieMatrix2d sets the movie matrix of movie to matrix. mvSetMovieMatrix2dIdentity is a convenience function that sets the movie matrix of movie to an identity matrix. mv...
 movie/mvMovieEdit(3d) -- edit movie/tracks
    These functions edit movies. All of them take the enabledTracksOnly flag as one of the parameters. If enabledTracksOnly == DM_TRUE, only enabled tracks will be affected by the edit. Otherwise, all tracks in the movie will be affected. A track can be enabled/disabled by calling mvSetTrackEnable(3dm), and a track's enable state can be checked by calling mvGetTrackEnable(3dm). Note that not all file formats support writing out movies with edit lists. Currently, the only file form...
 movie/mvMovieRect(3d) -- Set/get movie rectangle
    An MVrect is defined as: typedef struct { int left, bottom; int right, top; } MVrect; The movie rectangle governs how the movie is to be rendered to the screen when mvRenderMovieToOpenGL is called. The values of the movie rectangle are expressed in screen coordinates. The movie library uses this to set the viewport for the rendering context. The image of the movie library is resized to fit into the movie rect. The bounding rectangle is the rectangle in the movie coordinate space that encloses al...
 movie/mvNumMoviesHint(3d) -- number of simultaneously-playing movies
    mvSetNumMoviesHint(3dm) advises the Movie Playback Library of the number of movie instances which you are likely to ever play back at once. If possible, this hint is used by the Movie Playback Library to properly allocate internal system resources. mvSetNumMoviesHint(3dm), if used, must be called before any other Movie Playback Library function. mvGetNumMoviesHint(3dm) returns the number of movies which the Movie Playback Library is likely to be able to play at once. This number is not a guarant...
 movie/mvOpen(3d) -- open movie instances
    mvOpenFile, mvOpenFD, and mvOpenMem read an existing movie and create a movie instance in memory that holds information about it. A movie instance is a handle that allows you to read, write, edit, and play a movie file. It contains information about the different tracks in a movie. These operations are defined for three different storage media (file name, file descriptor, and memory). mvOpenFile is used to read files on disk. fileName gives the name of the file to open, and oflag must have eithe...
 movie/mvOptimize(3d) -- optimize a movie file for playback after editing operations, or create a flattened movie file
    To play back optimally, the audio data and the image data should be interleaved and stored in a movie file sequentially, so that the file can be read without seeking back and forth. Making changes to a movie can cause the data to be out of order. For example, inserting samples into a track places the new samples at the end of the file, although the header information at the beginning of the file may indicate that the inserted samples are to be played in the middle of the movie. The reason for do...
 video/mvp(3d) -- Multiport Video Processor for the O2 system
    Basic Program Structure The basic MVP VL application has the following components. All of these calls are described in the following sections with further information available in both the VL manpages and the Digital Media Programmer's Guide. Preliminary path set up: vlOpenVideo open the video server. Page 3 mvp(3dm) mvp(3dm) vlGetDeviceList discover which devices and nodes are connected to this system. vlGetNode get the source and drain nodes. vlCreatePath create a video path with the source a...
 movie/mvParams(3d) -- get and set the parameters of a movie or track
    mvGetParams returns the parameter list associated with a movie or track. For movies, the parameter list contains the file format, looping mode, etc. For tracks, the parameter list contains information about the format of the data in the track. The parameter list pointer returned points into the internal data structures of the movie. Any values from it that are to be kept should be copied, because the movie library may change the structures if the movie is changed or closed. Do not call dmParamsD...
 movie/mvPlay(3d) -- Start and stop movie playback
    mvPlay(3dm) begins movie playback. The Movie Playback Library does not change any playback parameters associated with the movie, such as speed and direction of playback. For example, if you change the speed of movie playback, then call mvPlay(3dm), the movie plays at the speed you had just set. If the movie is already playing, mvPlay(3dm) has no effect. mvStop(3dm) stops movie playback. If you have requested MV_EVENT_STOP events, the Movie Playback Library will s...
 movie/mvPlayEveryFrame(3d) -- Make movies play against time base, or without dropping frames
    mvSetPlayEveryFrame(3dm) allows you to decide whether a movie should play in real-time against a clock base, or should play back all frames. To play back every frame in sequence without dropping intervening frames, call mvSetPlayEveryFrame with a value of DM_TRUE for the sync parameter. To play back movies at the current speed, dropping frames if necessary to keep up with the movie's time base, call mvSetPlayEveryFrame(3dm) with a value of DM_FALSE for the...
 movie/mvPlayLoop(3d) -- Set/get movie playback loop mode, limit, and count.
    mvSetPlayLoopMode(3dm) determines whether Movie Playback Library should play the specified movie once, loop repeatedly, or swing forwards and backwards. This call will override, for playback purposes only, any looping information which may be present in the movie file. For file formats which support loop mode information, Movie Playback Library obtains the default setting from the movie file. For other file formats, the default is MV_LOOP_NONE. mvGetPlayLoopMode(3dm...
 movie/mvPlaySpeed(3d) -- Control rate of playback for a movie instance
    mvSetPlaySpeed(3dm) changes the movie play speed, expressed as a fraction of the movie's natural image frame rate. This frame rate is stored in the movie file (SGI and QuickTime only) and it may be determined by calling mvGetImageRate(3dm). For example, if you call mvSetPlaySpeed(3dm) with a value of 2.0, the movie plays twice as fast as it normally would. For movies with audio, the Movie Playback Library attempts to resample the audio to match the requested playback speed. This changes the pit...
 movie/mvPort(3d) -- Functions to handle generic playback ports
    Generic playback ports provide the application with more direct control over the playback configuration than the mvBindOpenGLWindow(3dm) interface. For example, applications that need to play movies in double-buffered windows should use open and bind an MV_PORT_GFX port while an application that desires to play only the audio from a movie should use an MV_PORT_AUDIO port. Applications that desire to play movies to video-out should open and bind MV_PORT_VIDEO. Page 1 mvPort(3dm) mvPort(3dm) Use m...
 movie/mvPrimaryAudio(3d) -- Set/get the movie instance with control over the audio hardware
    mvSetPrimaryAudio(3dm) tells the Movie Playback Library to favor a particular movie's audio sampling rate for playback. The preferred audio sample rate of a movie is the sample rate of the movie's first audio track. You may designate a movie as primary regardless of whether or not it is currently playing. The default value for the primary audio movie is MV_PRIMARY_AUDIO_NOTSET. When the primary audio movie is set to something other th...
 movie/mvQuery(3d) -- query information about file formats
    querytype is an integer value token representing the type of query being made. arg1,...arg4 are integer value tokens representing the query selectors and/or subtypes. The number of meaningful arguments to the mvQuery routines varies with the querytype.
 movie/mvReadCompressedImage(3d) -- read and write compressed images in a movie
    These functions are similar to the ones in mvEditByFrame(3dm) that read and write frames in a movie track, but these functions read and write the uncompressed data in an image track. This can save on compression/decompression time for applications that deal directly with compressed image data. mvGetCompressedImageSize return the number of bytes that image number frameIndex requires. mvReadCompressedImage reads image number frameIndex into buffer. If the frame number is out of range or if it corr...
 movie/mvReadTrackData(3d) -- manipulate data in track
    Each instance in track time corresponds to a certain block of physical data. For example, an image track is made up of bytes that describe images. The relationship between these two are covered by functions described in mvTrackData(3dm). Functions described in this page allow users to have access to such physical blocks. These are low-level functions that most applications will not need. They are only useful for applications that need to access low-level information like file offsets and raw com...
 movie/mvReadTrackDataFields(3d) -- read and insert field based data
    The data to describe a single image in an image track may be made up of two fields. In a QuickTime file, an auxillary table can be stored in the meta data area to describe the sizes and relative positions of these fields. When field information is available, mvReadTrackDataFields can be used to read each field into its own buffer. mvInsertTrackDataFields may be used to insert field data in separate buffers into a track. This feature is only fully supported for QuickTime files. mvReadTrackDataFie...
 movie/mvRenderAudio(3d) -- Multi-track, timebased access of audio data from movies.
    mvRenderMovieToAudioBuffer renders the movie's enabled audio tracks starting at time renderTime for renderDuration time ticks in the given scale and direction into the provided memory buffer. If the direction is MV_BACKWARD, the audio frames will be reversed in time, starting at renderTime and ending with renderTime - renderDuration. The buffer will be filled with audio frames in the format specified by formatParams. This parameter list should include DM_A...
 movie/mvRenderToOpenGL(3d) -- display of visual data from movies and tracks
    The movie and track rendering routines provide a way for applications to access or display the data stored in movies. These routines are intended to replace mvReadFrames(), which is still provided for backwards compatibility. mvRenderMovieToOpenGL This function renders a movie at an instance in time to the current OpenGL/X context. Only enabled tracks are rendered (see also mvSetTrackEnable(3dm)). The position at which the movie is to be drawn is determined by the movie rectangle (which can be s...
 movie/mvResizeWindow(3d) -- Notify Movie Playback Library of window size changes #include #include
    OSF/Motif is a trademark of the Open Software Foundation, Inc.
 movie/mvSetImageDefaults(3d) -- set default parameters for tracks
    mvSetImageDefaults sets up the default image parameters for an image track to be inserted in to a movie of format format. mvSetAudioDefaults sets up the default image parameters for an image track to be inserted in to a movie of format format. These functions should be used in place of dmSetImageDefaults and dmSetAudioDefaults before adding an track to a movie with mvAddTrack.
 movie/mvShowCurrentFrame(3d) -- Display current movie frame on screen for a movie instance
    mvShowCurrentTime(3dm) displays the current movie frame on screen for the specified movie. You should call mvShowCurrentTime(3dm) in response to X Expose events. In addition, if you have disabled Movie Playack Library frame display (see mvSetEnableVideo(3dm)), mvShowCurrentTime(3dm) you should call mvShowCurrentTime(3dm) in response to Movie Playback Library MV_EVENT_FRAME events. You may call mvShowCurrentTime(3dm) for a movie regardless of whether or not the...
 movie/mvStartEndFrame(3d) -- Set/get the frame or time at which movie playback should start/end
    mvSetStartFrame(3dm) sets the image frame at which you would like the Movie Playback Library to start playback for the specified movie. The default value for this option is zero (i.e., the first image frame of the movie). mvSetEndFrame(3dm) chooses the image frame at which you would like the Movie Playback Library to stop playback for the specified movie. The default value for this option is the last image frame in the movie. The last image frame is one less than the duration of the movie divide...
 movie/mvSync(3d) -- Intra-application synchronization support
    The Movie Playback Library playback engine represents synchronization information using the MVsyncInfo structure. The structure describes two times which are synchronous. The ust is an Unadjusted System Time (in nanoseconds) and movieTime (along with its timeScale) typically represents an instant in a movie or some other media to which or from which one is expressing synchronization. The way to read an MVsyncInfo is to say that the given movieTime will be displayed, played, or presented at the g...
 movie/mvTrackData(3d) -- retrieve information about track data
    Each instance in time correspond to some chunk of data in the file, unless it belongs to an empty segment. Functions in this page provide information about these chunks of data referenced by a track. mvGetNumDataIndex This function returns the number of data chunks referenced by a track. mvGetTrackDataIndexAtTime track is the id of the track. time is the time instance the user wishes to query. timescale is the time scale for time. index contains the returned index. If index==-1, then the time wh...
 movie/mvTrackDataParams(3d) -- manipulate data in track
    Each chunk of data in the file is described by a set of DMparams. The following functions allow applications to access these params. To retrieve the index of the DMparams that describes a certain chunk of data, use mvGetTrackDataIndexAtTime(3dm). mvGetTrackNumDataParams returns the number of data params in the list of the track. mvAddTrackDataParams adds a data description parameter to the list of parameters in a track. The function returns an index into the list at which point the new params we...
 movie/mvVideoDisplay(3d) -- Set/get movie video display mode.
    The Movie Playback Library supports 3 video display modes that specify how movies of non-standard sizes should be displayed on video devices (e.g. when they are bound to MV_PORT_VIDEO).
 movie/mvVideoStillFrame(3d) -- Set/get movie video output still frame
    Because of temporal differences between fields, still frames derived from interlaced video often "shimmer" or "jitter". An application can counter this effect by setting the movie's video still frame to DM_TRUE. When the video still frame is set to DM_TRUE, the Movie Playback Library will send 2 copies of either the first or second field (and zero copies of the other field) for a still frame. The Movie Library chooses which field is sent so as to minimize jitter. When the video still frame ...
 movie/mvView(3d) -- Change the location and size of the region for movie display inside a GL window
    mSetViewOffset(3dm) sets the offset for the view for rendering movie frames in an OpenGL window, relative to the origin of the window. You use the glcoordsystem parameter to determine the screen coordinate system for the y offset. If glcoordsystem is DM_TRUE, Movie Playback Library assumes the OpenGL screen coordinate system with (0, 0) in lower left. If it is DM_FALSE, Movie Library assumes the X coordinate system with (0, 0) in upper left. mvQueryViewOffs...
 movie/mvViewBackground(3d) -- Set background color of playback region for a movie instance
    mvSetViewBackground(3dm) sets the color for the background region of a movie instance. The values for each color component can be in the range from 0-255. The default background color is SGI light gray, RGB (170, 170, 170). mvGetViewBackground(3dm) returns the current background color components. You may call these functions for a specified movie instance regardless of whether or not the movie is playing. You may only call these functions for a specified movie while it is bound to a window (see ...
 m_fork(3p) -- parallel programming primitives
    The m_fork routine creates n-1 processes that execute the given func in parallel with the calling process. The processes are created using the sproc(2) system call, and share all attributes (virtual address space, file descriptors, uid, etc.). Once the processes are all created, they each start executing the subprogram func taking up to six arguments as passed to m_fork. The arguments passed must not be larger than pointers in size, i.e. floating point numbers must be passed by reference. The pr...
 standard/n(3) -- specifies a normal
    vector expects the address of an array containing three floating point numbers. These numbers are used to set the value for the current vertex normal.
 Tk/nameofimg(3) -- Return name of image.
    Tk_ImageMaster *masterPtr (in) Token for image, which was passed to image manager's createProc when the image was created.
 ndbm(3c) -- data base subroutines
    These functions maintain key/content pairs in a data base. The ndbm functions will handle very large (a billion blocks) databases and will access a keyed item in one or two file system accesses. The ndbm64 functions are identical to the ndbm routines except that they can be used to operate on databases larger than 2 Gigabytes. This package replaces the earlier dbm(3B) library, which managed only a single database. Keys and contents are described by the datum typedef. A datum specifies a string o...
 perl5/NDBM_File(3) -- Tied access to ndbm files
    See the tie entry in the perlfunc manpage PPPPaaaaggggeeee 1111
 f90/nearest(3) -- Returns the nearest different machine representable number in a given direction
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/neqv(3) -- Computes logical difference
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 perl5/Net::hostent(3) -- by-name interface to Perl's built-in gethost*() functions
    This module's default exports override the core gethostbyname() and gethostbyaddr() functions, replacing them with versions that return "Net::hostent" objects. This object has methods that return the similarly named structure field name from the C's hostent structure from netdb.h; namely name, aliases, addrtype, length, and addr_list. The aliases and addr_list methods return array reference, the rest scalars. The addr method is equivalent to the zeroth element in the addr_list array referenc...
 perl5/Net::netent(3) -- by-name interface to Perl's built-in getnet*() functions
    This module's default exports override the core getnetbyname() and getnetbyaddr() functions, replacing them with versions that return "Net::netent" objects. This object has methods that return the similarly named structure field name from the C's netent structure from netdb.h; namely name, aliases, addrtype, and net. The aliases method returns an array reference, the rest scalars. You may also import all the structure fields directly into your namespace as regular variables using the :FIELDS...
 perl5/Net::Ping(3) -- check a remote host for reachability
    This module contains methods to test the reachability of remote hosts on a network. A ping object is first created with optional parameters, a variable number of hosts may be pinged multiple times and then the connection is closed. You may choose one of three different protocols to use for the ping. With the "tcp" protocol the ping() method attempts to establish a connection to the remote host's echo port. If the connection is successfully established, the remote host is considered reachable....
 perl5/Net::protoent(3) -- by-name interface to Perl's built-in getproto*() functions
    This module's default exports override the core getprotoent(), getprotobyname(), and getnetbyport() functions, replacing them with versions that return "Net::protoent" objects. They take default second arguments of "tcp". This object has methods that return the similarly named structure field name from the C's protoent structure from netdb.h; namely name, aliases, and proto. The aliases method returns an array reference, the rest scalars. You may also import all the structure fields direct...
 perl5/Net::servent(3) -- by-name interface to Perl's built-in getserv*() functions
    This module's default exports override the core getservent(), getservbyname(), and getnetbyport() functions, replacing them with versions that return "Net::servent" objects. They take default second arguments of "tcp". This object has methods that return the similarly named structure field name from the C's servent structure from netdb.h; namely name, aliases, port, and proto. The aliases method returns an array reference, the rest scalars. You may also import all the structure fields dire...
 netdir(3n) -- transport name-to-address translation
    These routines provide a generic interface for name-to-address mapping that will work with a all transport protocols. This interface provides a generic way for programs to convert transport specific addresses into common structures and back again. The netdir_getbyname routine maps the machine name and service name in the nd_hostserv structure to a collection of addresses of the type understood by the transport identified ...
 standard/newpup(3) -- allocates and initializes a structure for a new menu
    none FUNCTION RETURN VALUE The returned value of this function is a menu identifier.
 standard/newtag(3) -- creates a new tag within an object relative to an existing tag
    newtg expects an identifier for the tag that will be created. oldtg expects an existing tag. It will be used as a reference point for inserting newtg. offst expects the number of positions beyond oldtg where newtg. will be placed.
 standard/nlist(3) -- get entries from name list
    NOTE: The nlist function has moved to the Elf library (-lelf). Programs that need to use nlist must be linked with the -lelf option (in IRIX4, nlist was in -lmld). nlist examines a section with Elf section type SHT_SYMTAB or SHT_DYNSYM (whichever comes first in the Elf file) in the given Elf file and selectively extracts a list of values. The name list consists of an array of structures containing names, types and values. The list is terminated with a structure containing a NULL (a NULL pointer)...
 nl_langinfo(3c) -- language information
    nl_langinfo returns a pointer to a null-terminated string containing information relevant to a particular language or cultural area defined in the program's locale. The manifest constant names and values of item are defined by langinfo.h. For example: nl_langinfo (ABDAY_1); would return a pointer to the string ``Dim'' if the identified language was French and a French ...
 standard/nmode(3) -- specify renormalization of normals
    mode expects a symbolic constant. There are two defined constants for this parameter: NAUTO causes normals to be renormalized only if the current ModelView matrix is not orthonormal. (default) NNORMALIZE causes normals to always be renormalized, regardless of the current ModelView matrix.
 standard/noborder(3) -- specifies a window without any borders
    none
 standard/noise(3) -- filters valuator (mouse, cursor, and GL timer) motion
    v expects a valuator. A valuator is a single-value input device. delta expects the number of units of change required before the valuator v can make a new queue entry.
 standard/noport(3) -- specifies that a program does not need screen space
    none
 standard/normal(3) -- obsolete routine
    narray expects the address of an array containing three floating point numbers. These numbers are used to set the value for the current vertex normal.
 f90/not(3) -- FORTRAN bitwise boolean functions
    bool is the general name for the bit field manipulation intrinsic functions and subroutines from the FORTRAN Military Standard (MIL-STD1753). and, or and xor return the value of the binary operations on their arguments. not is a unary operator returning the one's complement of its argument. ior, iand, not, ieor - return the same results as and, or, not, and xor. lshift and rshift return the value of the first argument shifted left or right, respectively, the number of times specified by the sec...
 libblas/nrm2(3) -- BLAS level ONE Euclidean norm functions.
    DNRM2, SNRM2, ZDNRM2, CSNRM2 compute the Euclidean norm of the vector X of length N and increment INCX. nrm2 <--- Sqrt ( Sum( X(i)**2 ) ) DNRM2 and SNRM2 nrm2 <--- Sqrt ( Sum( conjg( X(i) ) * X(i) ) ) DZNRM2 and SCNRM2
 ns_lookup(3c) -- lookup interface to name service daemon
    ns_lookup, ns_list and ns_close are part of the public interface to the UNS name service daemon, nsd(1M). Ordinarily they are called through name service library routines such as getpwnam(3C) and gethostbyname(3N). When ns_lookup is called with a particular domain, table and key, it first will mmap in a global shared cache database corresponding to the table name and attempt to look up the key. The mdbm database cache information is stored in the passed map structure. If the lookup fails then th...
 f90/numblks(3) -- Returns the current size of a file in 4096-byte blocks
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/numeric(3) -- 0- return scalar values related to parameters of an associated model
    These Fortran 90 inquiry functions return scalar values that describe parameters of a model which represents numbers of the type and type parameters of argument x; the value of the argument need not be defined, if a pointer it may be disassociated, if an array it need not be allocated. It must be of integer or real type. The digits function returns an integer with the number of significant digits in the model for x. The epsilon function returns the difference between 1 and the next nearest repre...
 standard/nurbscurve(3) -- controls the shape of a NURBS curve
    knot_count number of knots in knot_list. knot_count equals the number of control points plus the order. knot_list array of knot_count non-decreasing knot values. offset offset (in bytes) between successive curve control points. ctlarray pointer to an array of control points. The coordinates must agree with the type specified below. order order of the NURBS curve. order equals degree + 1, hence, a cubic curve has an order of 4. The maximum order is given by getgdesc (GD_NURBS_ORDER). type type of...
 standard/nurbssurface(3) -- controls the shape of a NURBS surface
    s_knot_count expects the number of knots in the parametric s direction. s_knot expects an array of s_knot_count non-decreasing knot values in the parametric s direction. t_knot_count expects the number of knots in the parametric t direction. t_knot expects an array of t_knot_count non-decreasing knot values in the parametric t direction. s_offset expects the offset (in bytes) between successive control points in the parametric s direction in ctlarray. t_offset expects the offset (in bytes) betwe...
 complib/o32fft(3) -- o32 vs. n32/64 FFT library differences
    fft sfft1dui, sfft1du, sfft2dui, sfft2du, sfft3dui, sfft3du, dfft1dui, dfft1du, dfft2dui, dfft2du, dfft3dui, dfft3du cfft1d, cfftm1d, cfft2d, cfft3d, cfft1di, cfftm1di, cfft2di, cfft3di, zfft1d, zfftm1d, zfft2d, zfft3d, zfft1di, zfftm1di, zfft2di, zfft3di, scfft1du, csfft1du, scfft1dui, dzfft1du, zdfft1du, dzfft1dui, scfftm1du, csfftm1du, scfftm1dui, dzfftm1du, zdfftm1du, dzfftm1dui, scfft2du, csfft2du, scfft2dui, dzfft2du, zdfft2du, dzfft2dui, scfft3du, csfft3du, scfft3dui, dzfft3du, zdfft3du, ...
 standard/objdelete(3) -- deletes routines from an object
    tag1 expects the tag indicating where the deletion is to be started from. tag2 expects the tag indicating where the deletion should stop.
 standard/objinsert(3) -- inserts routines in an object at a specified location
    t expects a tag within the object definition that is to be edited.
 standard/objreplace(3) -- overwrites existing display list routines with new ones
    t expects a tag within the object definition that is to be edited.
 perl5/ODBM_File(3) -- Tied access to odbm files
    See the tie entry in the perlfunc manpage PPPPaaaaggggeeee 1111
 f90/omp_lock(3) -- Set of procedures to manipulate locks
    IRIX systems
 f90/omp_nested(3) -- Manipulates or reports status of nested parallelism
    IRIX systems
 f90/omp_threads(3) -- Runtime library procedures used to set, call or return numbers of threads
    IRIX systems
 standard/onemap(3) -- organizes the color map as one large map
    none
 perl5/Opcode(3) -- Disable named opcodes when compiling perl code
    Perl code is always compiled into an internal format before execution. Evaluating perl code (e.g. via "eval" or "do 'file'") causes the code to be compiled into an internal format and then, provided there was no error in the compilation, executed. The internal format is based on many distinct opcodes. By default no opmask is in effect and any code can be compiled. The Opcode module allow you to define an operator mask to be in effect when perl next compiles any code. Attempting to compile ...
 Tcl/open(3) -- Open a file
    This command opens a file and returns an identifier that may be used in future invocations of commands like read, puts, and close. FileName gives the name of the file to open; if it starts with a tilde then tilde substitution is performed as described for Tcl_TildeSubst. If the first character of fileName is ``|'' then the remaining characters of fileName are treated as a command pipeline to invoke, in the same style as for exec. In this case, the identifier returned by open may be used to wri...
 openproj(3c) -- create/destroy a PROJ token
    The opendir function is used to create a PROJ token. The closedir function is used to destroy it when it is no longer needed. The getprojuser family of functions (including projid, projname, getprojall, getprojuser, getdfltprojuser and validateproj) is used to extract information from the project and projid files. Because these functions open, read, and close the project and projid files, they can be inefficient if it is necessary to use them repeatedly in the same program. Therefore, a second s...
 perl5/ops(3) -- Perl pragma to restrict unsafe operations when compiling
    Since the ops pragma currently has an irreversable global effect, it is only of significant practical use with the -M option on the command line. See the the Opcode manpage module for information about opcodes, optags, opmasks and important information about safety.
 Tk/option(3) -- Add/retrieve window options to/from the option database
    The option command allows you to add entries to the Tk option database or to retrieve options from the database. The add form of the command adds a new option to the database. Pattern contains the option being specified, and consists of names and/or classes separated by asterisks or dots, in the usual X format. Value contains a text string to associate with pattern; this is the value that will be returned in calls to Tk_GetOption or by invocations of the option get command. If priority is specif...
 Tk/optionmenu(3) -- Create an option menubutton and its menu
    This procedure creates an option menubutton whose name is w, plus an associated menu. Together they allow the user to select one of the values given by the value arguments. The current value will be stored in the global variable whose name is given by varName and it will also be displayed as the label in the option menubutton. The user can click on the menubutton to display a menu containing all of the values and thereby select a new value. Once a new value is selected, it will be stored in the ...
 Tk/options(3) -- Standard options supported by widgets
    class, name, standard option, switch PPPPaaaaggggeeee 11110000
 f90/or(3) -- FORTRAN bitwise boolean functions
    bool is the general name for the bit field manipulation intrinsic functions and subroutines from the FORTRAN Military Standard (MIL-STD1753). and, or and xor return the value of the binary operations on their arguments. not is a unary operator returning the one's complement of its argument. ior, iand, not, ieor - return the same results as and, or, not, and xor. lshift and rshift return the value of the first argument shifted left or right, respectively, the number of times specified by the sec...
 complib/ORTBAK(3) -- EISPACK routine. This subroutine forms the eigenvectors of a REAL GENERAL matrix by back transforming those of
    On INPUT NM must be set to the row dimension of two-dimensional array parameters as declared in the calling program dimension statement. LOW and IGH are integers determined by the balancing subroutine BALANC. If BALANC has not been used, set LOW=1 and IGH equal to the order of the matrix. A contains information about the orthogonal trans- formations used in the reduction by ORTHES in its strict lower triangle. ORT contains further information about the trans- formations used in the reduction by ...
 complib/ORTHES(3) -- EISPACK routine. Given a REAL GENERAL matrix, this subroutine reduces a submatrix situated in rows and columns
    On INPUT NM must be set to the row dimension of two-dimensional array parameters as declared in the calling program dimension statement. N is the order of the matrix. LOW and IGH are integers determined by the balancing subroutine BALANC. If BALANC has not been used, set LOW=1, IGH=N. A contains the input matrix. On OUTPUT A contains the Hessenberg matrix. Information about the orthogonal transformations used in the reduction is stored in the remaining triangle under the Hessenberg matrix. ORT c...
 standard/ortho(3) -- define an orthographic projection transformation
    left expects the coordinate for the left vertical clipping plane. right expects the coordinate for the right vertical clipping plane. bottom expects the coordinate for the bottom horizontal clipping plane. top expects the coordinate for the top horizontal clipping plane. near expects the distance to the nearer depth clipping plane. far expects the distance to the farther depth clipping plane.
 complib/ORTRAN(3) -- EISPACK routine. This subroutine accumulates the orthogonal similarity transformations used in the reduction o
    On INPUT NM must be set to the row dimension of two-dimensional array parameters as declared in the calling program dimension statement. N is the order of the matrix. LOW and IGH are integers determined by the balancing subroutine BALANC. If BALANC has not been used, set LOW=1, IGH=N. A contains information about the orthogonal trans- formations used in the reduction by ORTHES in its strict lower triangle. ORT contains further information about the trans- formations used in the reduction by ORTH...
 oserror(3c) -- get/set system error
    Most system calls and many system library functions set a global error value errno when they encounter an error. For single threaded applications a global is sufficient. For multi-threaded applications a global error value loses much of its meaning, since multiple threads may be updating the same value at the same time. When a process turns multi-threaded (by calling sproc(2)) a per-thread location to store the error value is created. sproc(2) and intr
 c++/ostream(3) -- formatted and unformatted output
    ostreams support insertion (storing) into a streambuf. These are commonly referred to as output operations. The ostream member functions and related functions are described below. In the following descriptions, assume: - outs is an ostream. - outswa is an ostream_withassign. - outsp is an ostream*. - c is a char. - ptr is...
 standard/overlay(3) -- overlap and manipulate overlapped curses windows
    The overlay and overwrite routines overlay srcwin on top of dstwin. scrwin and dstwin are not required to be the same size; only text where the two windows overlap is copied. The difference is that overlay is non-destructive (blanks are not copied) whereas overwrite is destructive. The copywin routine provides a finer granularity of control over the overlay an...
 perl5/overload(3) -- Package for overloading perl operations
    Overloading of operators is a subject not to be taken lightly. Neither its precise implementation, syntax, nor semantics are 100% endorsed by Larry Wall. So any of these may be changed at some point in the future.
 Tk/ownselect(3) -- make a window the owner of the primary selection
    Tk_Window tkwin (in) Window that is to become new selection owner. Atom selection (in) The name of the selection to be | owned, such as XA_PRIMARY. Tk_LostSelProc *proc (in) Procedure to invoke when tkwin loses selection ownership later. ClientData clientData (in) Arbitrary one-word value to pass to proc.
 p2open(3g) -- open, close pipes to and from a command
    p2open forks and execs a shell running the command line pointed to by cmd. On return, fp[0] points to a FILE pointer to write the command's standard input and fp[1] points to a FILE pointer to read from the command's standard output. In this way the program has control over the input and output of the command. The function returns 0 if successful; otherwise it returns -1. p2close is used to close the file pointers...
 f90/pack(3) -- Geometry manager that packs around edges of cavity
    The pack command is used to communicate with the packer, a geometry manager that arranges the children of a parent by packing them in order around the edges of the parent. The pack command can have any of several forms, depending on the option argument: pack slave ?slave ...? ?options? If the first argument to pack is a window name (any value starting with ``.''), then the command is processed in the same way as pack configure. pack configure slave ?slave ...? ?options? The arguments consist o...
 Tk/pack(3) -- Geometry manager that packs around edges of cavity
    The pack command is used to communicate with the packer, a geometry manager that arranges the children of a parent by packing them in order around the edges of the parent. The pack command can have any of several forms, depending on the option argument: pack slave ?slave ...? ?options? If the first argument to pack is a window name (any value starting with ``.''), then the command is processed in the same way as pack configure. pack configure slave ?slave ...? ?options? The arguments consist o...
 Tk/pack-old(3) -- Obsolete syntax for packer geometry manager
    Note: this manual entry describes the syntax for the pack command as it existed before Tk version 3.3. Although this syntax continues to be supported for backward compatibility, it is obsolete and should not be used anymore. At some point in the future it may cease to be supported. The packer is a geometry manager that arranges the children of a parent by packing them in order around the edges of the parent. The first child is placed against one side of the window, occupying the entire span of t...
 standard/pagecolor(3) -- sets the color of the textport background
    pcolor expects an index into the current color map.
 Tk/palette(3) -- Modify the Tk color palette
    The tk_setPalette procedure changes the color scheme for Tk. It does this by modifying the colors of existing widgets and by changing the option database so that future widgets will use the new color scheme. If tk_setPalette is invoked with a single argument, the argument is the name of a color to use as the normal background color; tk_setPalette will compute a complete color palette from this background color. Alternatively, the arguments to tk_setPalette may consist of any number of name-value...
 Tk/parseargv(3) -- process command-line options
    Tcl_Interp *interp (in) Interpreter to use for returning error messages. Tk_Window tkwin (in) Window to use when arguments specify Tk options. If NULL, then no Tk options will be processed. int argcPtr (in/out) Pointer to number of arguments in argv; gets modified to hold number of unprocessed arguments that remain after the call. char **argv (in/out) Command line arguments passed to main program. Modified to hold unprocessed arguments that remain after the call. Tk_ArgvInfo *argTable (in) Array...
 standard/passthrough(3) -- passes a single token through the Geometry Pipeline
    token expects an integer which is used to mark specific sections in input data so that when it is returned from the feedback buffer the data is easier to decipher.
 standard/patch(3) -- draws a surface patch
    geomx expects the 4x4 matrix which contains the x coordinates of the 16 control points of the patch. geomy expects the 4x4 matrix which contains the y coordinates of the 16 control points of the patch. geomz expects the 4x4 matrix which contains the z coordinates of the 16 control points of the patch.
 standard/patchbasis(3) -- sets current basis matrices
    uid expects the basis that defines how the control points determine the shape of the patch in the "u" direction. vid expects the basis that defines how the control points determine the shape of the patch in the "v" direction.
 standard/patchcurves(3) -- sets the number of curves used to represent a patch
    ucurves expects the number of curve segments that will be drawn in the "u" direction. vcurves expects the number of curve segments that will be drawn in the "v" direction.
 standard/patchprecision(3) -- sets the precision at which curves are drawn in a patch
    usegs expects the number of line segments used to draw a curve in the "u" direction. vsegs expects the number of line segments used to draw a curve in the "v" direction.
 pathfind(3g) -- search for named file in named directories
    pathfind searches the directories named in path for the file name. The directories named in path are separated by colons. mode is a string of option letters chosen from the set rwxfbcdpugks: Letter Meaning __________________________ r readable w writable x executable f normal file b block special c character special d directory p FIFO (pipe) u set user ID bit g set group ID bit k sticky bit s size non...
 standard/pclos(3) -- closes a filled polygon
    none
 pcreate(3c) -- create a process
    pcreate in all its forms creates a new process and runs the requested program. These routines are equivalent to a fork(2) and exec(2) pair except that the caller incurs only a small logical swap space penalty compared to fork. pcreate (using sproc(2)) requires that the calling process have enough virtual space left (see setrlimit(2)) to create a temporary 32K stack for the new ...
 standard/pdr(3) -- specifies the next point of a polygon
    x expects the x coordinate of the next defining point for the polygon. y expects the y coordinate of the next defining point for the polygon. z expects the z coordinate of the next defining point for the polygon.
 ftn/perror(3) -- get system error messages
    Perror will write a message to fortran logical unit 0 appropriate to the last detected system error. String will be written preceding the standard error message. Gerror returns the system error message in character variable string. Gerror may be called either as a subroutine or as a function. Ierrno will return the error number of the last detected system error. This number is updated only when an error actually occurs. Most routines and I/O statements that might generate such errors return an e...
 perror(3c) -- print system error messages
    perror produces a message on the standard error output (file descriptor 2), describing the last error encountered during a call to a system or library function. The argument string s is printed first, then a colon and a blank, then the message and a newline. (However, if s is a null pointer or points to a null string, the colon is not printed.) To be of most use, the argument string should include the name of the program that incurred the error. The error number is taken from t...
 standard/perspective(3) -- defines a perspective projection transformation
    fovy expects the field-of-view angle in the y direction. The field of view is the range of the area that is being viewed. fovy must be > 2 or an error results. aspect expects the aspect ratio which determines the field of view in the x direction. The aspect ratio is the ratio of x (width) to y (height). near expects the distance from the viewer to the closest clipping plane (always positive). far expects the distance from the viewer to the farthest clipping plane (always positive)....
 pfmt(3c) -- display error message in standard format
    pfmt pfmt uses a format string for printf style formatting of args. The output is displayed on stream. pfmt encapsulates the output in the standard error message format. If the environment variable NOMSGLABEL is set it will turn off message labels. Another environment variable NOMSGSEVERITY will also turn off message severity. These two variable can be set to turn off part of pfmt's er...
 Tk/photo(3) -- Full-color images
    A photo is an image whose pixels can display any color or be transparent. A photo image is stored internally in full color (24 bits per pixel), and is displayed using dithering if necessary. Image data for a photo image can be obtained from a file or a string, or it can be supplied from C code through a procedural interface. At present, only GIF and PPM/PGM formats are supported, but an interface exists to allow additional image file formats to be added easily. A photo image is transparent in re...
 standard/pick(3) -- puts the system in picking mode
    buffer expects the array to use for storing names. numnames expects the maximum number of names to store. This must not exceed the number of elements in buffer.
 standard/picksize(3) -- sets the dimensions of the picking region
    deltax expects the new width of the picking region. deltay expects the new height of the picking region.
 Tcl/pid(3) -- Retrieve process id(s)
    If the fileId argument is given then it should normally refer to a process pipeline created with the open command. In this case the pid command will return a list whose elements are the process identifiers of all the processes in the pipeline, in order. The list will be empty if fileId refers to an open file that isn't a process pipeline. If no fileId argument is given then pid returns the process identifier of the current process. All process identifiers are returned as decimal strings....
 standard/pixelmap(3) -- define pixel transfer LUTs
    map specifies a symbolic map name. Must be one of the following: MAP_I_TO_I, MAP_I_TO_R, MAP_I_TO_G, MAP_I_TO_B, MAP_I_TO_A, MAP_R_TO_R, MAP_G_TO_G, MAP_B_TO_B, MAP_A_TO_A size expects the size of the map, valid sizes are 256 or 4096. values the LUT itself.
 standard/pixeltransfer(3) -- sets pixel/texel transfer modes
    mode expects the symbolic name of the pixel transfer parameter being set. value expects the value of the pixel transfer parameter being set.
 standard/pixmode(3) -- specify pixel transfer mode parameters
    mode One of the symbolic constants: (parameters that affect read, write, and copy transfers) PM_SHIFT, default value: 0. Number of bit positions that pixel data are to be shifted. Positive shifts are left for write and copy, right for read. Valid values: 0, +-1, +-4, +-8, +-12, +- 16, +-24 PM_EXPAND, default value: 0. Enable (1) or disable (0) expansion of single-bit pixel data to one of two 32-bit pixel values. Valid values: 0, 1 PM_C0, default value: 0. Expansion value (32-bit packed color) ch...
 Tk/place(3) -- Geometry manager for fixed or rubber-sheet placement
    The placer is a geometry manager for Tk. It provides simple fixed placement of windows, where you specify the exact size and location of one window, called the slave, within another window, called the master. The placer also provides rubber-sheet placement, where you specify the size and location of the slave in terms of the dimensions of the master, so that the slave changes size and location in response to changes in the size of the master. Lastly, the placer allows you to mix these styles of ...
 pm(3c) -- Policy Module operations
    pm_create creates a policy module. pm_create_simple creates a policy module with some predefined defaults. pm_filldefault fills a policy_set with predefined default values. pm_destroy destroys a policy module. pm_attach connects a policy module to a virtual address space range. pm_setdefault sets the defaul...
 pminfo(3c) -- retrieve placement information
    The above two interfaces can be used to get placement information of a process's address space. It has to be done from the context of that process. __pm_get_page_info takes an address range in terms of base_addr and length. pginfo_buf is an array of pm_pginfo_t structures passed by the caller. On completion of the system call pginfo_buf contains the placement information for every page in the address range that has been faulted in. The vaddr field of pm_pg...
 standard/pmv(3) -- specifies the first point of a polygon
    x expects the x coordinate of the first point if a polygon. y expects the y coordinate of the first point of a polygon. z expects the z coordinate of the first point of a polygon.
 standard/pnt(3) -- draws a point
    x expects the x coordinate of the point to be drawn. y expects the y coordinate of the point to be drawn. z expects the z coordinate of the point to be drawn.
 standard/pntsize(3) -- specifies size of points
    n is the size of the point. The size is measured in pixels and is one by default.
 standard/pntsmooth(3) -- specify antialiasing of points
    mode expects one of two values: SMP_OFF defeats antialiasing of points (default). SMP_ON enables antialiasing of points. It can be modified by an optional symbolic constant: SMP_SMOOTHER indicates that a higher quality filter should be used during point drawing. This filter typically requires that more pixels be modified, and therefore potentially reduces the rate at which antialiased points are rendered. The constant SMP_SMOOTHER is specified by bitwise ORing it, or by adding it, to SMP_ON. For...
 perl5/Pod::Html(3) -- module to convert pod files to HTML
    Converts files from pod format (see the perlpod manpage) to HTML format. It can automatically generate indexes and cross-references, and it keeps a cache of things it knows how to cross-reference.
 perl5/Pod::Text(3) -- convert POD data to formatted ASCII text
    Pod::Text is a module that can convert documentation in the POD format (such as can be found throughout the Perl distribution) into formatted ASCII. Termcap is optionally supported for boldface/underline, and can enabled via $Pod::Text::termcap=1. If termcap has not been enabled, then backspaces will be used to simulate bold and underlined text. A separate pod2text program is included that is primarily a wrapper for Pod::Text. The single function pod2text() can take the optional options -a for a...
 standard/polarview(3) -- defines the viewer's position in polar coordinates
    dist expects the distance from the viewpoint to the world space origin. azim expects the azimuthal angle in the x-y plane, measured from the y axis. The azimuth angle is the viewing angle of the observer. inc expects the angle of incidence in the y-z plane, measured from the z axis. The incidence angle is the angle of the viewport relative to the z axis. twist expects the amount that the viewpoint is to be rotated around the line of sight using the right-hand rule....
 standard/polf(3) -- draws a filled polygon
    n expects the number of vertices in the polygon. parray expects the array containing the vertices of the polygon.
 standard/poly(3) -- outlines a polygon
    n expects the number of vertices in the polygon. parray expects the array containing the vertices of the polygon.
 standard/polymode(3) -- control the rendering of polygons
    mode Expects one of the symbolic constants: PYM_POINT, draw only points at the vertices. PYM_LINE, draw lines from vertex to vertex. PYM_FILL, fill the polygon interior. PYM_HOLLOW, fill only interior pixels at the boundaries.
 standard/polysmooth(3) -- specify antialiasing of polygons
    mode Expects one of the symbolic constants: PYSM_OFF: do not antialias polygons. (default) PYSM_ON: compute coverage values for all perimeter polygon pixels in such a way as to not change the size of the polygon. PYSM_SHRINK: Compute coverage values for all perimeter polygon pixels in such a way as to shrink the polygon slightly.
 standard/popattributes(3) -- pops the attribute stack
    none
 f90/popcnt(3) -- Counts number of set bits
    C/C++: UNICOS and UNICOS/mk systems Fortran: UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 popen(3s) -- initiate pipe to/from a process
    popen creates a pipe between the calling program and the command to be executed. The arguments to popen are pointers to null-terminated strings. Command consists of a shell command line. Type is an I/O mode, either r for reading or w for writing. The value returned is a stream pointer such that one can write to the standard input of the command, if the I/O mode is w, by writing to the file stream; and one can read from the standard output of the command, if the I/O mode is r, by reading from the...
 standard/popmatrix(3) -- pops the transformation matrix stack
    none
 standard/popname(3) -- pops a name off the name stack
    none
 f90/poppar(3) -- Computes bit population parity
    C/C++: UNICOS and UNICOS/mk systems Fortran: UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 Tk/popup(3) -- Post a popup menu
    This procedure posts a menu at a given position on the screen and configures Tk so that the menu and its cascaded children can be traversed with the mouse or the keyboard. Menu is the name of a menu widget and x and y are the root coordinates at which to display the menu. If entry is omitted or an empty string, the menu's upper left corner is positioned at the given point. Otherwise entry gives the index of an entry in menu and the menu will be positioned so that the entry is positioned over th...
 standard/popviewport(3) -- pops the viewport stack
    none
 perl5/POSIX(3) -- Perl interface to IEEE Std 1003.1
    The POSIX module permits you to access all (or nearly all) the standard POSIX 1003.1 identifiers. Many of these identifiers have been given Perl-ish interfaces. Things which are #defines in C, like EINTR or O_NDELAY, are automatically exported into your namespace. All functions are only exported if you ask for them explicitly. Most likely people will prefer to use the fully-qualified function names. This document gives a condensed list of the features available in the POSIX module. Consult your ...
 f90/precision(3) -- Returns the decimal precision of a number in the real number model
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 standard/prefposition(3) -- specifies the preferred location and size of a graphics window
    x1 expects the x coordinate position (in pixels) of the point at which one corner of the window is to be. x2 expects the x coordinate position (in pixels) of the point at which the opposite corner of the window is to be. y1 expects the y coordinate position (in pixels) of the point at which one corner of the window is to be. y2 expects the y coordinate position (in pixels) of the point at which the opposite corner of the window is to be....
 standard/prefsize(3) -- specifies the preferred size of a graphics window
    x expects the width of the graphics window. The width is measured in pixels. y expects the height of the graphics window. The height is measured in pixels.
 f90/present(3) -- Determines whether an optional argument is present
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 Tk/preserve(3) -- avoid freeing storage while it's being used
    ClientData clientData (in) Token describing structure to be freed or reallocated. Usually a pointer to memory for structure. Tk_FreeProc *freeProc (in) Procedure to invoke to free clientData.
 Tcl/printdbl(3) -- Convert floating value to string
    Tcl_Interp *interp (in) Interpreter that controls the conversion. double value (in) Floating-point value to be converted. char *dst (out) Where to store string representing value. Must have at least TCL_DOUBLE_SPACE characters of storage.
 printf(3s) -- print formatted output
    printf places output on the standard output stream stdout. fprintf places output on strm. sprintf places output, followed by a null character (\0), in consecutive bytes starting at s. It is the user's responsibility to ensure that enough storage is available. snprintf places output, followed by a null character (\0), in consecutive bytes starting at s. If more than len by...
 prio(3x) -- Priority IO operations.
    prioSetBandwidth tries to allocate bandwidth: bytesec in bytes per second on a file descriptor fd. mode specifies the allocation direction, which can be one of PRIO_READ_ALLOCATE, PRIO_WRITE_ALLOCATE, PRIO_READWRITE_ALLOCATE. The allocation mode must match the file opening mode. If a read direction allocation is requested, the file must have been opened for read; if a write direction allocation is requested, the file must have been opened for write. Otherwise, prioSetBandwidth will fail. If anot...
 Tcl/proc(3) -- Create a Tcl procedure
    The proc command creates a new Tcl procedure named name, replacing any existing command or procedure there may have been by that name. Whenever the new command is invoked, the contents of body will be executed by the Tcl interpreter. Args specifies the formal arguments to the procedure. It consists of a list, possibly empty, each of whose elements specifies one argument. Each argument specifier is also a list with either one or two fields. If there is only a single field in the specifier then it...
 f90/product(3) -- Forms the product of array elements
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 projid(3c) -- get project ID information
    The projid, projname and getprojall functions are used to obtain information from the projid file. The projid function searches the projid file for the project name and returns the corresponding numeric project ID. The projname function searches the projid file for the project ID prid and stores the corresponding ASCII name in the buffer buf, up to a maximum of len-1 characters. The resulting string will always be null-terminated. The fprojid and fprojname functions are variants of projid and pr...
 psignal(3c) -- system signal messages
    psignal and psiginfo produce messages on the standard error output describing a signal. sig is a signal that may have been passed as the first argument to a signal handler. pinfo is a pointer to a siginfo structure that may have been passed as the second argument to an enhanced signal handler [see sigaction(2)]. The argument string s is printed first, then a colon and a blank, then the message and a newl...
 complib/psldlt(3) -- parallel sparse symmetric linear system solver
    void PSLDLT_Preprocess ( int token, int n, int pointers[], int indices[], int *nonz, double *ops ); void PSLDLT_Factor ( int token, int n, int pointers[], int indices[], double values[] ); void PSLDLT_Solve ( int token, double x[], double b[] ); Page 3 PSLDLT(3F) PSLDLT(3F) void PSLDLT_Destroy ( int token ); void PSLDLT_Ordering ( int token, int method );
 complib/psldu(3) -- parallel sparse unsymmetric linear system solver
    void PSLDU_Preprocess ( int token, int n, int pointers[], int indices[], int *nonz, double *ops ); void PSLDU_Factor ( int token, int n, int pointers[], int indices[], double values[] ); void PSLDU_Solve ( int token, double x[], Page 3 PSLDU(3F) PSLDU(3F) double b[] ); void PSLDU_Destroy ( int token ); void PSLDU_Ordering ( int token, int method );
 pthread_atfork(3p) -- register fork() handlers
    The pthread_atfork() function registers three functions which are invoked when any thread calls fork(). If prepare is not NULL it must be a function that will be called prior to the actual fork() in the parent context. Similarly, parent and child, if not NULL, will be called after fork() in the contexts of the parent and child respectively. Multiple calls to pthread_atfork() are possible; prepare handlers are run in the opposite order to which they were registered and parent and child handlers i...
 pthread_attr_init(3p) -- initialize thread attributes
    A thread attributes object is a collection of values which specify how a thread is created [see pthread_create()]. Changes to the attribute values of the object do not affect threads already created using the object. Size and location of the stack may be specified as well as the detached state [see pthread_detach()] and scheduling attributes [see pthread_attr_setscope() and pthread_attr_setinheritsched(3P)]. The pthread_attr_init() function initializes the thread attributes object specified by a...
 pthread_attr_setguardsize(3p) -- get or set the thread guardsize attribute
    The guardsize attribute controls the size of the guard area for the created thread's stack. The guardsize attribute provides protection against overflow of the stack pointer. If a thread's stack is created with guard protection, the implementation allocates extra memory at the overflow end of the stack as a buffer against stack overflow of the stack pointer. If an application overflows into this buffer an error results (possibly in a SIGSEGV signal being delivered to the thread). The guardsize...
 pthread_attr_setinheritsched(3p) -- thread scheduling inheritance attributes
    By default, a newly created thread has its scheduling attributes initialized from the attributes object used to create it (or from defaults if none is specified) [see pthread_create()]. As an alternative, the new thread may inherit the current scheduling attributes from the thread which creates it. The scheduling attributes which may be inherited are the scheduling policy [see pthread_attr_setschedpolicy()] and scheduling parameters [see pthread_attr_setschedparam()]. The pthread_attr_setinherit...
 pthread_attr_setschedparam(3p) -- manage thread scheduling priority attributes
    Scheduling parameters exist to implement scheduling policies [see pthread_attr_setschedpolicy()]. The sched_priority member of the sched_param structure is a positive integer number (higher values indicate greater importance). Priority limits should be retrieved using the interfaces sched_get_priority_min() and sched_get_priority_max(). The default scheduling priority is the minimum for the policy. A portable application should not assume more than 32 distinct priorities. The pthread_attr_setsch...
 pthread_attr_setschedpolicy(3p) -- manage scheduling policy attributes
    A scheduling policy defines how threads are selected to run and for how long they run before an alternative thread may be chosen to run. There are four policies: SCHED_FIFO (first-in-first-out), SCHED_RR (roundrobin), SCHED_TS (time-share) and SCHED_OTHER. The default scheduling policy attribute value for POSIX threads is SCHED_RR. Each policy uses thread priorities [see pthread_attr_setschedparam()] as part of their selection criteria. Scheduling scope [see pthread_attr_setscope()] determines t...
 pthread_attr_setscope(3p) -- thread scheduling scope attributes
    The pthread_attr_setscope() function sets the thread scheduling scope attribute in the object attr to the value scope. Possible values for scope are PTHREAD_SCOPE_SYSTEM, PTHREAD_SCOPE_BOUND_NP and PTHREAD_SCOPE_PROCESS. The scheduling scope for the attribute object attr, is returned via the oscope parameter of pthread_attr_getscope(). The default scheduling scope is PTHREAD_SCOPE_PROCESS. Threads created with system scope have a direct effect on scheduling by the kernel [see pthread_attr_setsch...
 pthread_cancel(3p) -- request cancellation of a thread
    The pthread_cancel() function requests that the thread identified by thread be cancelled. Cancellation state [see pthread_setcancelstate()] and type [see pthread_setcanceltype()] determine whether the request is acted upon immediately or at some time in the future; pthread_cancel() does not wait, it merely issues the request. When thread does act on the request, it will terminate as if it had called pthread_exit() with a return status of PTHREAD_CANCELED....
 pthread_cleanup_push(3p) -- manage thread cleanup handlers
    A thread may register cleanup handlers which are automatically called on behalf of the thread when it terminates either through cancellation [see pthread_cancel()], explicitly exiting [see pthread_exit()] or by returning from its start function [see pthread_create()]. Handlers are run in order: most recently registered first. Handlers have strict scoping rules: the push and pop must be in the same C lexical scope; that is, the pop operation must match the push operation in the same C statement b...
 pthread_condattr_init(3p) -- initialize/destroy a condition variable attribute object
    The function pthread_condattr_init() initializes the condition variable attribute object referenced by attr to the default attribute values. The default sharing value is PTHREAD_PROCESS_PRIVATE. Once a condition variable attribute object is used to initialize one or more mutexes, any function that affects the attribute object will not affect the previously initialized mutexes. pthread_condattr_destroy() uninitializes the condition variable attribute structure referenced by attr. This may include...
 pthread_condattr_setpshared(3p) -- set and get
    The pthread_condattr_getpshared() function obtains the value of the process-shared attribute from the attributes object referenced by attr. The pthread_condattr_setpshared() function is used to set the process- shared attribute in an initialized attributes object referenced by attr. The process-shared attribute is set to PTHREAD_PROCESS_SHARED to permit a condition variable to be operated upon by any thread that has access to the memory where the condition variable is allocated, even if the cond...
 pthread_cond_wait(3p) -- condition variables
    Condition variables provide high performance synchronization primitives to wait for or wake up threads waiting for certain conditions to be satisfied. Functions are provided to wait on a condition variable and to wake up (signal) threads that are waiting on the condition variable.
 pthread_create(3p) -- create and start a thread
    The pthread_create() function creates a thread with the attributes specified by attr, starting execution at the function named start with the argument value arg. A null value of attr causes the thread to be created with default attributes. The thread identity is saved in the location pointed to by the thread argument. A new thread inherits its per-thread signal mask from its creator. No signals are pending on the thread when it starts. The thread runs until it returns from its start function, ca...
 pthread_detach(3p) -- detach a thread
    The pthread_detach() function causes the thread identified by thread to be detached. This means that storage created by the library on behalf of the thread will be reclaimed when the thread terminates. A detached thread cannot be the target of pthread_join(). A thread can be created in detached state using pthread_attr_setdetachstate(). It can also be implicitly detached using pthread_join().
 pthread_equal(3p) -- compare thread identifiers
    The pthread_equal() function compares the thread identifiers thread1 and thread2.
 pthread_exit(3p) -- terminate the calling thread
    The pthread_exit() function terminates the calling thread. If the thread is not detached, then the value retval may be retrieved by pthread_join(). If a thread returns from its start function [see pthread_create()] it acts as if it had called pthread_exit() with retval as the value returned. A thread implicitly exits when it acts on a cancellation request [see pthread_cancel()]. When a thread exits it pops and executes any cancellation handlers which are still active [see pthread_cleanup_push()]...
 pthread_join(3p) -- wait for thread termination
    The pthread_join() function waits for the thread identified by thread to terminate. If retval is not zero, then it will be set to the exit value of the thread [see pthread_exit(), pthread_cancel()]. Only one thread may wait for another at one time. A detached thread [see pthread_detach()] may not be joined. A successful join will automatically detach the target thread. However, pthread_join() is a cancellation point and if the joiner is cancelled, the target thread remains undetached and can be ...
 pthread_key_create(3p) -- thread-specific data key creation
    The pthread_key_create() function creates a key that can be used by all threads in the process to get and set thread-specific data. The newly created key is returned in the memory pointed to by key. After a new key is created, all active threads have the value NULL associated with that key. After a new thread is created, the value NULL is associated with all keys for that thread. An optional destructor function may be associated with each key. Upon thread exit [see pthread_exit()], if a key has ...
 pthread_key_delete(3p) -- thread-specific data key deletion
    The pthread_key_delete() function deletes a key that was previously returned by pthread_key_create(). When key is deleted, the associated destructor (if any) is not called by pthread_key_delete() nor will it be called upon thread exit [see pthread_exit()]. It is the responsibility of the user program to free up any storage that is referenced by key. The use of key after the call to pthread_key_delete() will result in undefined behavior....
 pthread_kill(3p) -- deliver a signal to a thread
    The pthread_kill() function is used to request that a signal be sent to the specified thread. If sig is zero, error checking is performed, but no signal is actually sent.
 pthread_mutexattr_init(3p) -- initialize/destroy a mutex attribute object
    The function pthread_mutexattr_init() initializes the mutex attribute object referenced by attr to the default attribute values. The default sharing value is PTHREAD_PROCESS_PRIVATE. The default priority protocol is PTHREAD_PRIO_NONE. The default mutex type is PTHREAD_MUTEX_DEFAULT. Once a mutex attribute object is used to initialize one or more mutexes, any function that affects the attribute object will not affect the previously initialized mutexes. pthread_mutexattr_destroy() uninitializes th...
 pthread_mutexattr_setprotocol(3p) -- set/get a mutex attribute object's priority and protocol
    These functions manipulate a mutex attribute object referenced by attr which has been previously created by pthread_mutexattr_init(). The function pthread_mutexattr_setprotocol() defines the thread priority protocol to be followed when acquiring and holding mutexes. The protocol value may be one of PTHREAD_PRIO_NONE, PTHREAD_PRIO_INHERIT, or PTHREAD_PRIO_PROTECT. The function pthread_mutexattr_getprotocol() stores into the memory referenced by oprotocol the thread priority protocol associated wi...
 pthread_mutexattr_setpshared(3p) -- set and get
    The pthread_mutexattr_getpshared() function obtains the value of the process-shared attribute from the attributes object referenced by attr. The pthread_mutexattr_setpshared() function is used to set the process- shared attribute in an initialized attributes object referenced by attr. The process-shared attribute is set to PTHREAD_PROCESS_SHARED to permit a mutex to be operated upon by any thread that has access to the memory where the mutex is allocated, even if the mutex is allocated in memory...
 pthread_mutexattr_settype(3p) -- set/get a mutex attribute object's type
    These functions manipulate a mutex attribute object referenced by attr which has been previously created by pthread_mutexattr_init(). The function pthread_mutexattr_settype() defines the type of mutex. The type value may be one of PTHREAD_MUTEX_NORMAL, PTHREAD_MUTEX_ERRORCHECK, PTHREAD_MUTEX_RECURSIVE, PTHREAD_MUTEX_SPINBLOCK_NP, or PTHREAD_MUTEX_DEFAULT. The function pthread_mutexattr_gettype() stores into the memory referenced by type the mutex type associated with the named mutex attribute ob...
 pthread_mutex_lock(3p) -- mutual exclusion locks
    Mutual exclusion locks (mutexes) are used to serialize the execution of threads through critical sections of code which access shared data. A successful call for a mutex lock via pthread_mutex_lock() or pthread_mutex_trylock() will cause another thread that tries to acquire the same mutex via pthread_mutex_lock() to wait until the owning thread calls pthread_mutex_unlock(). The wait could mean that the thread is blocked immediately or if the mutex type is PTHREAD_MUTEX_SPINBLOCK_NP, the thread w...
 pthread_mutex_setprioceiling(3p) -- set/get a mutex's priority ceiling
    The pthread_mutex_getprioceiling() function returns the current priority ceiling of the named mutex. The pthread_mutex_setprioceiling() function acquires the named mutex, then changes the mutex's priority ceiling and releases the mutex. The value of prioceiling must be between the values returned by sched_get_priority_min() and sched_get_priority_max(), inclusive. If successful, the previous value of the mutex priority ceiling is returned in old_ceiling....
 pthread_once(3p) -- thread-safe initialization
    The pthread_once() function ensures that the function init is called exactly once for all callers using the once initialization variable. This variable is initialized with the constant PTHREAD_ONCE_INIT. While init is being executed all callers of pthread_once() will wait. If a thread is cancelled while executing the init function [see pthread_setcancelstate()], then pthread_once() will permit another thread (possibly waiting) to make the call....
 pthread_rwlockattr_init(3p) -- initialize/destroy
    The function pthread_rwlockattr_init() initializes the read-write lock attribute object referenced by attr to the default attribute values. The default sharing value is PTHREAD_PROCESS_PRIVATE. Once a read-write lock attribute object is used to initialize one or more read-write locks, any function that affects the attribute object will not affect the previously initialized read-write locks. pthread_rwlockattr_destroy() uninitializes the read-write lock attribute structure referenced by attr....
 pthread_rwlockattr_setpshared(3p) -- set/get a
    These functions manipulate the initialized read-write lock attribute object attr [see pthread_rwlockattr_init()]. The function pthread_rwlockattr_setpshared() sets the process-shared attribute value of the read-write lock. The attribute value may be PTHREAD_PROCESS_PRIVATE or PTHREAD_PROCESS_SHARED. The function pthread_rwlockattr_getpshared() returns the process-shared attribute value of attr via opshared. The default value is PTHREAD_PROCESS_PRIVATE. A read-write lock with a process-shared att...
 pthread_rwlock_init(3p) -- initialize/destroy a readwrite lock object
    Read-write locks may be initialized either dynamically, by calling pthread_rwlock_init(), or statically, via the macro PTHREAD_RWLOCK_INITIALIZER. The personality of the read-write lock is determined by the attribute structure attr passed with the call to pthread_rwlock_init(). These attributes are set by calls to pthread_rwlockattr_init() and the various pthread read-write lock attribute functions. If attr is null (or the read-write lock is statically initialized), the default attributes are us...
 pthread_rwlock_rdlock(3p) -- lock a read-write lock object for reading
    Read-write locks allow a thread to exclusively lock some shared data while updating that data, or allow any number of threads to have simultaneous read-only access to the data. The pthread_rwlock_rdlock() and pthread_rwlock_tryrdlock() functions apply a read lock to the readwrite lock object referenced by rwlock. The calling thread will only acquire the lock if a writer does not own the lock. A thread that calls pthread_rwlock_rdlock() will block until it can gain the read-write lock for reading...
 pthread_rwlock_unlock(3p) -- unlock a read-write lock object
    Read-write locks allow a thread to exclusively lock some shared data while updating that data, or allow any number of threads to have simultaneous read-only access to the data. The pthread_rwlock_unlock() function releases a read or write lock held on the read-write lock object referenced by rwlock. If this function is called to release a read lock and there are other read locks currently held on the lock object, the lock object remains in the read locked state. If this function is called to rel...
 pthread_rwlock_wrlock(3p) -- lock a read-write lock object for writing
    Read-write locks allow a thread to exclusively lock some shared data while updating that data, or allow any number of threads to have simultaneous read-only access to the data. The pthread_rwlock_wrlock() and pthread_rwlock_trywrlock() functions apply a write lock to the readwrite lock object referenced by rwlock. The calling thread will only acquire the lock if no other thread (reader or writer) holds the lock. A thread that calls pthread_rwlock_wrlock() will block until it can gain the read-wr...
 pthread_self(3p) -- identify a thread
    The pthread_self() function identifies the calling thread. This is the same identifier that the creating thread obtains from pthread_create().
 pthread_setcancelstate(3p) -- manage cancelability of a thread
    The cancelability of a thread determines when, if ever, it acts upon cancellation requests [see pthread_cancel(), and pthread_exit()]. Cancellation state may be either PTHREAD_CANCEL_ENABLE or PTHREAD_CANCEL_DISABLE. If it is PTHREAD_CANCEL_DISABLE, then cancellation requests are blocked (held pending) indefinitely. If the state is PTHREAD_CANCEL_ENABLE, the cancellation type is the governing factor. Cancellation type may be either PTHREAD_CANCEL_ASYNCHRONOUS or PTHREAD_CANCEL_DEFERRED. The type...
 pthread_setconcurrency(3p) -- modify scheduling concurrency
    Threads which are created with the PTHREAD_SCOPE_PROCESS attribute (which is the default) [see pthread_attr_setscope()], are scheduled on a number of kernel execution vehicles. By default the number of execution vehicles used is adjusted by the library as the application runs and is called the concurrency level. This is different from the traditional notion of concurrency because it includes any threads blocked by the application in the kernel (for example to do IO). The library raises or lowers...
 pthread_setrunon_np(3p) -- thread CPU scheduling affinity
    Executing threads run on the most eligible CPU determined by the kernel. This choice may be changed for threads with the PTHREAD_SCOPE_SYSTEM or PTHREAD_SCOPE_BOUND_NP attribute using the pthread_setrunon_np() interface. This interface requests that the calling thread execute exclusively on the named cpu. The CPU should be chosen in the same way as for sysmp() interface with the MP_MUSTRUN command. To further control execution the MP_RESTRICT and MP_ISOLATE sysmp() commands can be used as usual....
 pthread_setschedparam(3p) -- change thread scheduling
    The pthread_setschedparam() function changes the scheduling policy and parameters of the thread identified by thread to the values specified by policy and param. Changing the scheduling characteristics of an existing thread is similar to creating the thread with those attributes [see pthread_attr_setschedpolicy() and pthread_attr_setschedparam()]. Only the assigned thread priority is changed - a temporary priority elevation obtained by acquiring a mutex is not affected [see pthread_mutexattr_set...
 pthread_setspecific(3p) -- thread-specific data management
    The pthread_setspecific() function associates a thread-specific value with key. Different threads may bind different values to the same key. The pthread_getspecific() function returns the calling thread's value that is bound to the specified key. The affect of calling either of these functions using a value for key not obtained from a pthread_key_create() call or after key has been deleted with pthread_key_delete() is undefined....
 pthread_sigmask(3p) -- examine and change blocked signals
    The pthread_sigmask() function manipulates the set of signals which are blocked from delivery to the calling thread. A non-NULL set specifies the set of signals to use in modifying the currently active set. The incoming signals may be added to, deleted from or completely replace the active set, as specified by the operation parameter which may have the following values: SIG_BLOCK Add specified signals to those in current mask. SIG_UNBLOCK Remove the specified signals from the current mask. SIG_S...
 ptsname(3c) -- get name of the slave pseudo-terminal device
    The function ptsname() returns the name of the slave pseudo-terminal device associated with a master pseudo-terminal device. fildes is a file descriptor returned from a successful open of the master device.
 publickey(3n) -- retrieve public or secret key
    getpublickey and getsecretkey get public and secret keys for netname from the publickey(4) database. getsecretkey has an extra argument, passwd, used to decrypt the encrypted secret key stored in the database. Both routines return 1 if they are successful in finding the key, 0 otherwise. The keys are returned as NULL-terminated, hexadecimal strings. If the ...
 standard/pupmode(3) -- obsolete routines
    none
 standard/pushattributes(3) -- pushes down the attribute stack
    none
 standard/pushmatrix(3) -- pushes down the transformation matrix stack
    none
 standard/pushname(3) -- pushes a new name on the name stack
    name expects the name which is to be added onto the name stack.
 standard/pushviewport(3) -- pushes down the viewport stack
    none
 ftn/putc(3) -- write a character to a fortran logical unit
    These funtions write a character to the file associated with a fortran logical unit bypassing normal fortran I/O. Putc writes to logical unit 6, normally connected to the control terminal output. The value of each function will be zero unless some error occurred; a system error code otherwise. See perror(3F).
 putc(3s) -- put character or word on a stream
    Fputc and putc write the character c onto the output stream indicated by stream at the position indicated by the associated file pointer (if defined), advancing this pointer to the next character position. For files which cannot be positioned, or which have been opened in append mode (see fopen(3s)), the character is appended to the output stream. putchar(c) is defined as putc(c, stdout). Each of these functions is available in the C library. In addition, putc and putchar are macros defined in <...
 ftn/putenv(3) -- change or add Fortran environment variable
    String contains a character string in the form name=value. Putenv makes the value of the environment variable name equal to value by altering or creating an environment variable.
 putenv(3c) -- change or add value to environment
    string points to a string of the form ``name=value.'' putenv makes the value of the environment variable name equal to value by altering an existing variable or creating a new one. In either case, the string pointed to by string becomes part of the environment, so altering the string will change the environment. The space used by string is no longer used once a new string-defining name is passed to putenv. Because of this limitation, string should be decl...
 putpwent(3c) -- write password file entry
    putpwent is the inverse of getpwent(3C). Given a pointer to a passwd structure created by getpwent (or getpwuid or getpwnam), putpwent writes a line on the stream f, which matches the format of /etc/passwd.
 Tcl/puts(3) -- Write to a file
    Writes the characters given by string to the file given by fileId. FileId must have been the return value from a previous call to open, or it may be stdout or stderr to refer to one of the standard I/O channels; it must refer to a file that was opened for writing. If no fileId is specified then it defaults to stdout. Puts normally outputs a newline character after string, but this feature may be suppressed by specifying the -nonewline switch. Output to files is buffered internally by Tcl; the fl...
 puts(3s) -- put a string on a stream
    puts writes the null-terminated string pointed to by s ,followed by a new-line character, to the standard output stream stdout. fputs writes the null-terminated string pointed to by s to the named output stream. Neither function writes the terminating null character.
 putspent(3c) -- write shadow password file entry
    The putspent routine is the inverse of getspent. Given a pointer to a spwd structure created by the getspent routine (or the getspnam routine), the putspent routine writes a line on the stream fp, which matches the format of /etc/shadow. If the sp_min, sp_max, sp_lstchg, sp_...
 putwc(3s) -- put wchar_t character on a stream
    putwc transforms the wchar_t character c into EUC, and writes it to the output stream (at the position where the file pointer, if defined, is pointing). The putwchar(c) is defined as putwc(c, stdout). putwc and putwchar are macros. fputwc behaves like putwc, but is a function rather than a macro....
 putws(3s) -- put a wchar_t string on a stream
    putws transforms the wchar_t null-terminated wchar_t string pointed to by s into a byte string in EUC, and writes the string followed by a newline character to stdout. fputws transforms the wchar_t null-terminated wchar_t string pointed to by s into a byte string in EUC, and writes the string to the named output stream. Neither function writes the terminating wch...
 Tcl/pwd(3) -- Return the current working directory
    Returns the path name of the current working directory.
 standard/pwlcurve(3) -- describes a piecewise linear trimming curve for NURBS surfaces
    n expects the number of points on the curve data_array expects an array containing the curve points byte_size expects the offset (in bytes) between points on the curve type expects a value indicating the point type. Currently, the only data type supported is N_ST, corresponding to pairs of s-t coordinates. The offset parameter is used in case the curve points are part of an array of larger structure elements. pwlcurve searches for the n-th coordinate pair beginning at data_array + n * byte_size....
 f90/pxfaccess(3) -- Checks the accessibility of a named file
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/pxfalarm(3) -- Schedule alarm signal
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/pxfchdir(3) -- Changes the current directory to a specified directory
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/pxfchmod(3) -- Sets file modes for a named file
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/pxfchown(3) -- Changes the owner and group of a file
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/pxfchroot(3) -- Changes the root directory to a specified directory
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/pxfclearenv(3) -- Clears all environment variables
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/pxfconst(3) -- Returns the value associated with symbolic constants
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/pxfcreat(3) -- Creates a new file or rewrites an existing file
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/pxfctermid(3) -- Generates terminal pathname
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/pxfdirectory(3) -- Performs directory operations
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/pxfestrget(3) -- Accesses a single string element of a structure component that is an array
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/pxfexecv(3) -- Executes a new process image file
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/pxffastexit(3) -- Terminates a Fortran program
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/pxffcntl(3) -- Provides a subset of fcntl(2) functionality, except the third argument is always an integer
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/pxffileno(3) -- Returns the file descriptor for a specified unit
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/pxffork(3) -- Creates a process
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/pxfgetarg(3) -- Returns a command-line argument
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/pxfgetcwd(3) -- Gets the pathname of the working directory
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/pxfgetegid(3) -- Gets the effective group ID
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/pxfgetenv(3) -- Returns a value for the environment name
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/pxfgeteuid(3) -- Gets effective user ID
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/pxfgetgid(3) -- Gets the real group ID
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/pxfgetgrgid(3) -- Gets group information using the group ID
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/pxfgetgrnam(3) -- Gets group information using the group name
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/pxfgetgroups(3) -- Gets supplementary group IDs
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/pxfgetlogin(3) -- Gets user name
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/pxfgetpgrp(3) -- 0PXFGETPGRP -Gets the process group ID
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/pxfgetpid(3) -- Gets the process ID
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/pxfgetppid(3) -- Gets the parent process ID
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/pxfgetpwnam(3) -- Gets password information about login name
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/pxfgetpwuid(3) -- Gets password information by using user ID
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/pxfgetuid(3) -- Gets the real user ID
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/pxfintget(3) -- Allows values stored in individual components of a structure to be extracted and used
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/pxfintset(3) -- Allows components of a structure to be set or modified
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/pxfisatty(3) -- Determines if file descriptor corresponds to a valid file descriptor
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/pxfisblk(3) -- Tests for block special file
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/pxfischr(3) -- Tests for character special file
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/pxfisdir(3) -- Tests for directory file
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/pxfisfifo(3) -- Tests for pipe or a FIFO special file
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/pxfisreg(3) -- Tests for regular file
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/pxfkill(3) -- Sends a signal to a process or group of processes
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/pxflink(3) -- Creates a link to a file
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/pxflocaltime(3) -- Converts to local time
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/pxfopen(3) -- Provides a Fortran interface to the open(2) system call
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/pxfpause(3) -- Suspends process execution until signal
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/pxfrename(3) -- Renames a file
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/pxfrmdir(3) -- Removes a directory entry
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/pxfsetenv(3) -- Sets environment variable pair
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/pxfsetgid(3) -- Sets group ID
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/pxfsetpgid(3) -- Set process group ID
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/pxfsetsid(3) -- Creates a new session for a calling process
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/pxfsetuid(3) -- Sets user ID
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/pxfsigaddset(3) -- Adds an individual signal to the specified signal set
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/pxfsigdelset(3) -- Deletes an individual signal in the specified signal set
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/pxfsigemptyset(3) -- Initializes signal set such that all signals defined in POSIX standard are excluded
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/pxfsigfillset(3) -- Initializes signal set such that all signals defined in POSIX standard are included
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/pxfsigismember(3) -- Determines if the specified signal is a member of the specified signal set
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/pxfsigpending(3) -- Examines pending signals
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/pxfsigprocmask(3) -- Examines and changes blocked signals
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/pxfsigsuspend(3) -- Waits for a signal
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/pxfsleep(3) -- Delays process execution
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/pxfstat(3) -- Retrieves the file status
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/pxfstrget(3) -- Allows values stored in individual components of a structure to be extracted and used
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/pxfstrset(3) -- Allows values stored in individual components of a structure to be set
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/pxfstructcopy(3) -- Copies structure
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/pxfstructcreate(3) -- Creates an instance of the desired structure and returns a nonzero handle in the argument jhandle
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/pxfstructfree(3) -- Deletes the instance of the structure referenced by jhandle
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/pxfsysconf(3) -- Retrieves the value of configurable system variables
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/pxftime(3) -- Gets system time
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/pxftimes(3) -- Gets process times
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/pxfucompare(3) -- Compares unsigned integers
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/pxfumask(3) -- Sets the file creation mask
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/pxfuname(3) -- Retrieves the operating system name
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/pxfunlink(3) -- Removes a directory entry
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/pxfutime(3) -- Sets access and modification times of a file
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/pxfwait(3) -- Obtains information about a calling process' child process
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/pxfwifexited(3) -- Determines if child process exited with exit
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/pxfwifsignaled(3) -- Determines if the child process terminated because of a signal
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/pxfwifstopped(3) -- Determines if a child process has stopped
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 complib/PYTHAG(3) -- EISPACK auxiliary routine.
    Finds sqrt(a**2+b**2) without overflow or destructive underflow. PPPPaaaaggggeeee 1111
 p_class(3c) -- utilities for dns queries
    Routines for interpreting and recording query and reply messages with Internet domain name servers. p_class returns an alphanumeric mnemonic for a given class value. Similarly, p_type returns a mnemonic for the given type value. p_time returns a human-readable string for a given ttl (time-to-live.) p_rr prints a resource record in human-readable form. The resource record, cp , is contained in the message msg. p_cdname is a wrapper for dn_expand(3). It will uncompress and print a compressed domai...
 standard/qcontrol(3) -- administers event queue
    cmd specifies which operation to perform. icnt expects the number of elements in idata. If the operation only returns data, set icnt to zero. idata expects an array containing the data to be used by cmd. If icnt is zero, then idata can be NULL. ocnt expects the number of elements in odata. If the operation does not return data, set ocnt to zero. odata expects the array into which you want the system to write the values returned by cmd. If ocnt is zero, then odata can be NULL. FUNCTION RETURN VAL...
 standard/qdevice(3) -- queues a device
    dev expects the device whose state is to be changed so that it will enter events into the event queue.
 standard/qenter(3) -- creates an event queue entry
    dev expects the device number to be entered into the event queue. val expects the value to be entered into the event queue.
 standard/qgetfd(3) -- get the read file descriptor associated with the event queue
    none FUNCTION RETURN VALUE The returned function value is the read file descriptor associated with the event queue. If there is an error, the returned value is a negative integer whose absolute value is an error value defined in .
 standard/qread(3) -- reads the first entry in the event queue
    data expects a pointer to the location that is to receive the data the event queue. FUNCTION RETURN VALUE The returned function value is the identifier for the device read.
 standard/qreset(3) -- empties the event queue
    none
 ftn/qsort(3) -- quick sort
    One dimensional array contains the elements to be sorted. len is the number of elements in the array. isize is the size of an element, typically - 4 for integer and real 8 for double precision or complex 16 for double complex (length of character object) for character arrays Compar is the name of a user supplied integer*2 function that will determine the sorting order. This function will be called with 2 arguments that will be elements of array. The function must return - negative if arg 1 is co...
 qsort(3c) -- quicker sort
    qsort is an implementation of the quicker-sort algorithm. It sorts a table of data in place. The contents of the table are sorted in ascending order according to the user-supplied comparison function. base points to the element at the base of the table. nel is the number of elements in the table. width specifies the size of each element in bytes. compar is the name of the comparison function, which is called with two arguments that point to the elements being compared. The functio...
 standard/qtest(3) -- checks the contents of the event queue
    none
 complib/QZHES(3) -- EISPACK routine. This subroutine is the first step of the QZ algorithm for solving generalized matrix eigenval
    This subroutine accepts a pair of REAL GENERAL matrices and reduces one of them to upper Hessenberg form and the other to upper triangular form using orthogonal transformations. It is usually followed by QZIT, QZVAL and, possibly, QZVEC. On Input NM must be set to the row dimension of two-dimensional array parameters as declared in the calling program dimension statement. N is the order of the matrices. A contains a real general matrix. B contains a real general matrix. MATZ should be set to .TR...
 complib/QZIT(3) -- EISPACK routine. This subroutine is the second step of
    This subroutine accepts a pair of REAL matrices, one of them in upper Hessenberg form and the other in upper triangular form. It reduces the Hessenberg matrix to quasi-triangular form using orthogonal transformations while maintaining the triangular form of the other matrix. It is usually preceded by QZHES and followed by QZVAL and, possibly, QZVEC. On Input NM must be set to the row dimension of two-dimensional array parameters as declared in the calling program dimension statement. N is the or...
 complib/QZVAL(3) -- EISPACK routine. This subroutine is the third step of
    On Input This subroutine accepts a pair of REAL matrices, one of them in quasi-triangular form and the other in upper triangular form. It reduces the quasi-triangular matrix further, so that any remaining 2-by-2 blocks correspond to pairs of complex eigenvalues, and returns quantities whose ratios give the generalized eigenvalues. It is usually preceded by QZHES and QZIT and may be followed by QZVEC. NM must be set to the row dimension of two-dimensional array parameters as declared in the calli...
 complib/QZVEC(3) -- EISPACK routine. This subroutine is the optional fourth step of the QZ algorithm for solving generalized matri
    This subroutine accepts a pair of REAL matrices, one of them in quasitriangular form (in which each 2-by-2 block corresponds to a pair of complex eigenvalues) and the other in upper triangular form. It computes the eigenvectors of the triangular problem and transforms the results back to the original coordinate system. It is usually preceded by QZHES, QZIT, and QZVAL. On Input NM must be set to the row dimension of two-dimensional array parameters as declared in the calling program dimension sta...
 Tk/radiobutton(3) -- Create and manipulate radiobutton widgets
    activeBackground cursor highlightThickness takeFocus | activeForeground disabledForeground image text | anchor font justify textVariable | background foreground padX underline | bitmap highlightColor padY wrapLength | borderWidth highlightBackground relief See the ``options'' manual entry for details on the standard options. WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS Name: command Class: Command Command-Line Switch:-command Specifies a Tcl command to associate with the button. This command is typically invoked w...
 f90/radix(3) -- Returns the base number from the real or integer number models
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 Tk/raise(3) -- Change a window's position in the stacking order
    If the aboveThis argument is omitted then the command raises window so that it is above all of its siblings in the stacking order (it will not be obscured by any siblings and will obscure any siblings that overlap it). If aboveThis is specified then it must be the path name of a window that is either a sibling of window or the descendant of a sibling of window. In this case the raise command will insert window into the stacking order just above aboveThis (or the ancestor of aboveThis that is a s...
 raise(3c) -- send signal to executing program
    raise sends the signal sig to the calling thread. This is functionally equivalent to calling pthread_kill(pthread_self(), sig).
 f90/ran(3) -- pseudo random number generator
    ran generates successive pseudo-random numbers in the range from 0 to 1. ran uses its integer argument calculate the return value. The argument is modified by ran so that successive invocations of ran with the same integer variable will yield different values. It is not recommended to invoke ran with a constant since the storage area holding the constant will be modified.
 ftn/ran(3) -- pseudo random number generator
    ran generates successive pseudo-random numbers in the range from 0 to 1. ran uses its integer argument calculate the return value. The argument is modified by ran so that successive invocations of ran with the same integer variable will yield different values. It is not recommended to invoke ran with a constant since the storage area holding the constant will be modified.
 ftn/rand(3) -- random number generator
    Irand generates successive pseudo-random integers in the range from 0 to 2**15-1. rand generates pseudo-random numbers distributed in [0, 1.0]. Srand uses its integer argument to re-initialize the seed for successive invocations of irand and rand.
 rand(3c) -- simple random-number generator
    rand uses a multiplicative congruent random-number generator with period 2^32 that returns successive pseudo-random numbers in the range from 0 to (2^15)-1. The function srand uses the argument seed as a seed for a new sequence of pseudo-random numbers to be returned by subsequent calls to the function rand. If the function srand is then called with the same seed value, the sequence of pseudo-random numbers will be repeated. If the function <...
 f90/random(3) -- 0- generate pseudorandom numbers from a seed
    The Fortran 90 subroutine random_number returns a sequence of pseudorandom numbers in harvest. The argument must be of real type and of intent out. It can be a scalar or an array variable, and is set to contain pseudorandom numbers from a uniform distribution in the range greater than or equal to zero and less than one. The random_seed subroutine allows an inquiry to be made about the size or value of the seed array, and also allows the seed to be reset. Its optional arguments have the following...
 random(3c) -- better random number generator; routines for changing generators
    Random uses a non-linear additive feedback random number generator employing a default table of size 31 long integers to return successive pseudo-random numbers in the range from 0 to (2**31)-1. The period of this random number generator is very large, approximately 16*((2**31)-1). Random/srandom have (almost) the same calling sequence and initialization properties as rand/srand. The difference is that rand(3C) produces a much less random sequence - in fact, the low dozen bits generated by rand ...
 f90/random_number(3) -- Returns pseudorandom numbers
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/random_seed(3) -- Restarts or queries the pseudorandom number generator
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/range(3) -- Returns the decimal exponent range of a number according to the real or integer model
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 complib/RATQR(3) -- EISPACK routine. This subroutine finds the algebraically smallest or largest eigenvalues of a SYMMETRIC TRIDIA
    On Input N is the order of the matrix. EPS1 is a theoretical absolute error tolerance for the computed eigenvalues. If the input EPS1 is non-positive, or indeed smaller than its default value, it is reset at each iteration to the respective default value, namely, the product of the relative machine precision and the magnitude of the current eigenvalue iterate. The theoretical absolute error in the K-th eigenvalue is usually not greater than K times EPS1. D contains the diagonal elements of the i...
 complib/RCFFT2(3) -- Calculate a real-to-complex Fourier synthesis/analysis.
    
 rcmd(3c) -- routines for returning a stream to a remote command
    Rcmd is a routine used by the super-user to execute a command on a remote machine using an authentication scheme based on reserved port numbers. Rresvport is a routine which returns a descriptor to a socket with an address in the privileged port space. Ruserok is a routine used by servers to authenticate clients requesting service with rcmd. All three functions are present in the same file and are used by the rshd(1M) server (among others). Rcmd looks up the host *ahost using gethostbyname(3N), ...
 standard/rcrv(3) -- draws a rational curve
    geom expects the array containing the four control points of the curve segment.
 standard/rcrvn(3) -- draws a series of curve segments
    n expects the number of control points to be used in drawing the curve. geom expects the matrix containing the control points of the curve segments.
 standard/rdr(3) -- relative draw
    dx expects the distance from the x coordinate of the current graphics position to the x coordinate of the new point. dy expects the distance from the y coordinate of the current graphics position to the y coordinate of the new point. dz expects the distance from the z coordinate of the current graphics position to the z coordinate of the new point.
 Tcl/read(3) -- Read from a file
    In the first form, all of the remaining bytes are read from the file given by fileId; they are returned as the result of the command. If the -nonewline switch is specified then the last character of the file is discarded if it is a newline. In the second form, the extra argument specifies how many bytes to read; exactly this many bytes will be read and returned, unless there are fewer than numBytes bytes left in the file; in this case, all the remaining bytes are returned. FileId must be stdin o...
 standard/readcomponent(3) -- sets the component source within the framebuffer source for pixels that various routines read, useful primaril
    src expects a symbolic constant that identifies the pixel component that is to be used: RC_ABGR Indicates that all 4 frame buffer components, ABGR should be transferred. This is the default. RC_ALPHA selects the alpha channel of the current framebuffer selected by readsource. RC_BLUE selects the blue channel of the current framebuffer selected by readsource. RC_GREEN selects the green channel of the current framebuffer selected by readsource. RC_RED selects the red channel of the current framebu...
 standard/readdisplay(3) -- reads a rectangular screen region, returning displayed pixel colors in a packed RGB format.
    x1 expects the x screen coordinate of one corner of the rectangle. y1 expects the y screen coordinate of one corner of the rectangle. x2 expects the x screen coordinate of the opposite corner of the rectangle. y2 expects the y screen coordinate of the opposite corner of the rectangle. These coordinates are relative to the lower-left pixel on the screen, whose coordinates are 0,0. It does not matter whether x1 is greater than or less than x2, nor y1 greater than or less than y2. The rectangle spe...
 standard/readpixels(3) -- returns values of specific pixels
    n expects the number of pixels to be read by the function. colors expects the array in which the pixel values are to be stored. FUNCTION RETURN VALUE The returned value of this function is the number of pixels actually read. A returned function value of 0 indicates an error, that the starting point is not a valid character position.
 standard/readrgb(3) -- gets values of specific pixels
    n expects the number of pixels to be read by the function. red expects the array in which the pixel red values will be stored. green expects the array in which the pixel green values will be stored. blue expects the array in which the pixel blue values will be stored. FUNCTION RETURN VALUE The returned value of this function is the number of pixels actually read. A returned function value of 0 indicates an error, namely, that the starting point is not a valid character position....
 standard/readsource(3) -- sets the source for pixels that various routines read
    src expects a symbolic constant that identifies the pixel source that is to be used: SRC_AUTO selects the front color buffer when the current framebuffer, as specified by drawmode, is in single buffer mode. It selects the back color buffer when the current framebuffer is in double buffer mode. This is the default. SRC_FRONT selects the front color buffer of the current framebuffer, as specified by drawmode. This source is valid for both single buffer and double buffer operation. SRC_BACK selects...
 f90/real(3) -- explicit FORTRAN type conversion
    These functions perform conversion from one data type to another. The function int converts to integer from its integer, real*4, double precision, real*16, complex, double complex, or complex*32 argument. If the argument is real, integer, real*4, double precision, or real*16 int returns the integer whose magnitude is the largest integer that does not exceed the magnitude of the argument and whose sign is the same as the sign of the argument (i.e. truncation). For complex the above rule is applie...
 realpath(3c) -- returns the real file name
    realpath resolves all links, symbolic links, and references to ``.'' and ``..'' in file_name and stores it in resolved_name. It can handle both relative and absolute path names. For absolute path names and the relative names whose resolved name cannot be expressed relatively (for example, ../../reldir), it returns the resolved absolute name. resolved_name should point to a buffer (MAXPATHLEN) bytes in l...
 complib/REBAK(3) -- EISPACK routine. This subroutine forms the eigenvectors of a generalized SYMMETRIC eigensystem by back transfo
    On Input NM must be set to the row dimension of two-dimensional array parameters as declared in the calling program dimension statement. N is the order of the matrix system. B contains information about the similarity transformation (Cholesky decomposition) used in the reduction by REDUC in its strict lower triangle. DL contains further information about the transformation. M is the number of eigenvectors to be back transformed. Z contains the eigenvectors to be back transformed in its first M c...
 complib/REBAKB(3) -- EISPACK routine. This subroutine forms the eigenvectors of a generalized SYMMETRIC eigensystem by back transfo
    On Input NM must be set to the row dimension of two-dimensional array parameters as declared in the calling program dimension statement. N is the order of the matrix system. B contains information about the similarity transformation (cholesky decomposition) used in the reduction by REDUC2 in its strict lower triangle. DL contains further information about the transformation. M is the number of eigenvectors to be back transformed. Z contains the eigenvectors to be back transformed in its first M ...
 recno(3) -- record number database access method
    The routine dbopen is the library interface to database files. One of the supported file formats is record number files. The general description of the database access methods is in dbopen(3), this manual page describes only the recno specific information. The record number data structure is either variable or fixed-length records stored in a flat-file format, accessed by the logical record number. The existence of record number five implies the existence of records one through four, and the del...
 Tcl/recordeval(3) -- save command on history list before evaluating
    Tcl_Interp *interp (in) Tcl interpreter in which to evaluate command. char *cmd (in) Command (or sequence of commands) to execute. int flags (in) An OR'ed combination of flag bits. | TCL_NO_EVAL means record the command | but don't evaluate it. TCL_EVAL_GLOBAL| means evaluate the command at global | level instead of the current stack | level.
 standard/rect(3) -- outlines a rectangular region
    x1 expects the x coordinate of one of the corners of the rectangle. y1 expects the y coordinate of one of the corners of the rectangle. x2 expects the x coordinate of the opposite corner of the rectangle. y2 expects the y coordinate of the opposite corner of the rectangle.
 standard/rectcopy(3) -- copies a rectangle of pixels with an optional zoom
    x1 expects the x coordinate of one corner of the rectangle. y1 expects the y coordinate of one corner of the rectangle. x2 expects the x coordinate of the opposite corner of the rectangle. y2 expects the y coordinate of the opposite corner of the rectangle. newx expects the x coordinate of the lower-left corner of the new position of the rectangle. newy expects the y coordinate of the lower-left corner of the new position of the rectangle....
 standard/rectf(3) -- fills a rectangular area
    x1 expects the x coordinate of one corner of the rectangle that is to be drawn. y1 expects the y coordinate of one corner of the rectangle that is to be drawn. x2 expects the x coordinate of the opposite corner of the rectangle that is to be drawn. y2 expects the y coordinate of the opposite corner of the rectangle that is to be drawn.
 standard/rectread(3) -- reads a rectangular array of pixels into CPU memory
    x1 expects the x coordinate of the lower-left corner of the rectangle that you want to read. y1 expects the y coordinate of the lower-left corner of the rectangle that you want to read. x2 expects the x coordinate of the upper-right corner of the rectangle that you want to read. y2 expects the y coordinate of the upper-right corner of the rectangle that you want to read. parray expects the array to receive the pixels that you want to read. FUNCTION RETURN VALUE The returned value of this functio...
 standard/rectwrite(3) -- draws a rectangular array of pixels into the frame buffer
    x1 expects the lower-left x coordinate of the rectangular region. y1 expects the lower-left y coordinate of the rectangular region. x2 expects the upper-right x coordinate of the rectangular region. y2 expects the upper-right y coordinate of the rectangular region. parray expects the array which contains the values of the pixels to be drawn. For RGBA values, pack the bits thusly: 0xAABBGGRR, where: AA contains the alpha value, BB contains the blue value, GG contains the green value, and RR conta...
 standard/rectzoom(3) -- specifies the zoom for rectangular pixel copies and writes
    xfactor expects the multiplier of the rectangle in the x direction. yfactor expects the multiplier of the rectangle in the y direction.
 recv(3n) -- receive a message from a socket
    s is a socket created with socket. recv, recvfrom, and recvmsg are used to receive messages from another socket. recv may be used only on a connected socket [see connect(3N)], while recvfrom and recvmsg may be used to receive data on a socket whether it is in a connected state or not. If from is not a NULL pointer, the source address...
 complib/REDUC(3) -- EISPACK routine. This subroutine reduces the generalized SYMMETRIC eigenproblem Ax=(LAMBDA)Bx, where B is POSI
    On Input NM must be set to the row dimension of two-dimensional array parameters as declared in the calling program dimension statement. N is the order of the matrices A and B. If the Cholesky factor L of B is already available, N should be prefixed with a minus sign. A and B contain the real symmetric input matrices. Only the full upper triangles of the matrices need be supplied. If N is negative, the strict lower triangle of B contains, instead, the strict lower triangle of its Cholesky factor...
 complib/REDUC2(3) -- EISPACK routine. This subroutine reduces the generalized SYMMETRIC eigenproblems ABx=(LAMBDA)x OR BAy=(LAMBDA)
    On Input NM must be set to the row dimension of two-dimensional array parameters as declared in the calling program dimension statement. N is the order of the matrices A and B. If the Cholesky factor L of B is already available, N should be prefixed with a minus sign. A AND B contain the real symmetric input matrices. Only the full upper triangles of the matrices need be supplied. If N is negative, the strict lower triangle of B contains, instead, the strict lower triangle of its Cholesky factor...
 regcmp(3g) -- compile and execute regular expression
    regcmp compiles a regular expression (consisting of the concatenated arguments) and returns a pointer to the compiled form. malloc(3C) is used to create space for the compiled form. It is the user's responsibility to free unneeded space so allocated. A NULL return from regcmp indicates an incorrect argument. regcmp(1) has been written to generally preclude the need for this routine at execution time. re...
 regcomp(3g) -- regular expression matching
    The structure type regex_t contains the following members: MEMBER MEANING _____________________________________________________________ int re_magic RE magic number size_t re_nsub number of parenthesized subexpressions const char *re_endp end pointer for REG_PEND struct re_guts *re_g internal RE data structure The structure type regmatch_t contains the following members: MEMBER MEANING ___________________________________________________________ regoff_t rm_so Byte offset from start of string to ...
 Tcl/regexp(3) -- Match a regular expression against a string
    Determines whether the regular expression exp matches part or all of string and returns 1 if it does, 0 if it doesn't. If additional arguments are specified after string then they are treated as the names of variables in which to return information about which part(s) of string matched exp. MatchVar will be set to the range of string that matched all of exp. The first subMatchVar will contain the characters in string that matched the leftmost parenthesized subexpression within exp, the next sub...
 regexpr(3g) -- regular expression compile and match routines
    These routines are used to compile regular expressions and match the compiled expressions against lines. The regular expressions compiled are in the form used by ed. The syntax of the compile routine is as follows: compile (instring, expbuf, endbuf) The parameter instring is a null-terminated string representing the regular expression. The parameter expbuf points to the place w...
 regex_bsd(3c) -- regular expression handler
    Re_comp compiles a string into an internal form suitable for pattern matching. Re_exec checks the argument string against the last string passed to re_comp. Re_comp returns 0 if the string s was compiled successfully; otherwise a string containing an error message is returned. If re_comp is passed 0 or a null string, it returns without changing the currently compiled regular expression. Re_exec returns 1 if the string s matches the last compiled regular expression, 0 if the string s failed to ma...
 Tk/reginterp(3) -- make an interpreter accessible with ``send'' command
    Tcl_Interp *interp (in) Interpreter to register in display associated with tkwin. Also used to return errors if registration failed. char *name (in) Name under which to register interpreter. Must be unique among all registered interpreters for tkwin's display. May not contain the character ``|''. Tk_Window tkwin (in) Token for window. Used only to find a display in which to register interp.
 registerinethost(3c) -- allocate internet address for workstation
    Registerinethost sends an internet address allocation request to registrar(1M) on NIS master via the yp_update(3R) call. This routine should be used only when NIS is enabled in the network. The arguments for the routine are: name The host name to be registered. This name must be unique in the NIS domain. network The internet network number to be used in the allocation. If the netmask is supplied, this argument should be an internet address so that the netmask can be applied on. netmask The inter...
 Tcl/regsub(3) -- Perform substitutions based on regular expression pattern matching
    This command matches the regular expression exp against string, and it | copies string to the variable whose name is given by varName. If there | is a match, then while copying string to varName the portion of string | that matched exp is replaced with subSpec. If subSpec contains a ``&'' or ``\0'', then it is replaced in the substitution with the portion of string that matched exp. If subSpec contains a ``\n'', where n is a digit between 1 and 9, then it is replaced in the substitution ...
 remove(3c) -- remove file
    remove causes the file or empty directory whose name is the string pointed to by path to be no longer accessible by that name. A subsequent attempt to open that file using that name will fail, unless the file is created anew. For files, remove is identical to unlink. For directories, remove is identical to rmdir. See rmdir(2) and unlink(2) for a detailed list of failure conditi...
 ftn/rename(3) -- Rename or delete a command
    Rename the command that used to be called oldName so that it is now called newName. If newName is an empty string then oldName is deleted. The rename command returns an empty string as result.
 Tcl/rename(3) -- Rename or delete a command
    Rename the command that used to be called oldName so that it is now called newName. If newName is an empty string then oldName is deleted. The rename command returns an empty string as result.
 renamehost(3c) -- rename the existing hostname in NIS hosts database
    Renamehost sends an host rename request to registrar(1M) on NIS master via the yp_update(3R) call. The result is that the new host name will be associated with the original internet address. This routine should be used only when NIS is enabled in the network. This function call can not only change the hostname, but also modify the aliases. The arguments for the routine are: oldname The original host name. newname The new host name for the internet address. This new name should not be already use...
 f90/repeat(3) -- Concatenates several copies of a string
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 standard/resetls(3) -- controls the continuity of linestyles
    b expects either TRUE or FALSE. TRUE causes the linestyle to be reset at the beginning of each line segment. FALSE causes the linestyle to be continued across the segments of a line.
 f90/reshape(3) -- Constructs an array of a specified shape
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 standard/reshapeviewport(3) -- sets the viewport to the dimensions of the current graphics window
    none
 resolver(3c) -- resolver routines
    These routines are used for making, sending, and interpreting query and reply messages with Internet domain name servers. Global configuration and state information that is used by the resolver routines is kept in the structure _res. Most of the values have reasonable defaults and can be ignored. Options stored in _res.options are defined in resolv.h and are as follows. Options are stored as a simple bit mask containing the bitwise ``or'' of the options enabled. RES_INIT True if the initial na...
 Tk/restack(3) -- Change a window's position in the stacking order
    Tk_Window tkwin (in) Token for window to restack. int aboveBelow (in) Indicates new position of tkwin relative to other; must be Above or Below. Tk_Window other (in) Tkwin will be repositioned just above or below this window. Must be a sibling of tkwin or a descendant of a sibling. If NULL then tkwin is restacked above or below all siblings.
 Tk/restrictev(3) -- filter and selectively delay X events
    Tk_RestrictProc *proc (in) Predicate procedure to call to filter incoming X events. NULL means do not restrict events at all. char *arg (in) Arbitrary argument to pass to proc. char **prevArgPtr (in/out) Pointer to place to save argument to previous restrict procedure.
 res_hnok(3c) -- name service record validity routines
    Helper functions that determine the validity of a few types of nameservice related records. Functions return 1 for valid, 0 for invalid. res_hnok determines if the given argument is a valid hostname. res_ownok is similar, but allows for "*" in the first label. For example: *.sgi.com. This is appropriate for A or MX record owners. res_mailok allows for any printable characters in the first label. The rest of the name must look like a valid hostname. Useful for SOA RNAMEs and RP RNAMEs. Finally,...
 res_isourserver(3c) -- resolver query utilities
    Helper functions for resolver code development. res_isourserver returns 1 if argument appears in current list of the clients name servers, returns 0 if not. res_nameinquery looks for (name, type, class) in the query section of packet (buf, eom). Returns: -1 format error, 0 not found, or >0 found. res_queriesmatch looks for a 1:1 mapping of (name, type, class) in packets (buf1, eom1) and (buf2, eom2). Returns: -1 format error, 0 not a 1:1 mapping, and >0 is a 1:1 mapping. res_querydomain performs...
 res_send_setqhook(3c) -- interface to resolver hooks
    res_send_setqhook , ( res_send_setrhook ) allow for a function hook to be implemented at the beginning (end) of the resolution query process, res_send(3). The hook function takes the form: res_sendhookact proc(struct sockaddr_in **nsap, char **buf, int *buflen, char *ans, int anssiz, int *resplen) where res_sendhookact is a typedef: (see /usr/include/resolv.h) typedef enum { res_goahead, res_nextns, res_modified, res_done, res_error } res_sendhookact; The resolver library will walk through the c...
 Tcl/return(3) -- Return from a procedure
    Return immediately from the current procedure (or top-level command or source command), with string as the return value. If string is not specified then an empty string will be returned as result.
 rexec(3c) -- return stream to a remote command
    Rexec looks up the host *ahost using gethostbyname(3N), returning -1 if the host does not exist. Otherwise *ahost is set to the standard name of the host. If a username and password are both specified, then these are used to authenticate to the foreign host; otherwise the environment and then the user's .netrc file in his home directory are searched for appropriate information. If all this fails, the user is prompted for the information. The port inport specifies which well-known DARPA Internet...
 complib/RG(3) -- EISPACK routine. This subroutine calls the recommended sequence of subroutines from the eigensystem subroutine
    On Input NM must be set to the row dimension of the two-dimensional array parameters as declared in the calling program dimension statement. N is the order of the matrix A. A contains the real general matrix. MATZ is an integer variable set equal to zero if only eigenvalues are desired. Otherwise it is set to any non-zero integer for both eigenvalues and eigenvectors. On Output WR and WI contain the real and imaginary parts, respectively, of the eigenvalues. Complex conjugate pairs of eigenvalue...
 standard/rgbcolor(3) -- sets the current color in RGB mode
    red expects the value indicating the intensity of the red component. green expects the value indicating the intensity of the green component. blue expects the value indicating the intensity of the blue component.
 standard/rgbcursor(3) -- obsolete routine
    This routine is obsolete. It continues to function only on IRIS-4D B and G models to provide backwards compatibility. All new development should use its replacement, setcursor.
 standard/rgbmode(3) -- sets a rendering and display mode that bypasses the color map
    none
 standard/rgbrange(3) -- obsolete routine
    rmin expects the minimum value to be stored in the red bitplanes. gmin expects the minimum value to be stored in the green bitplanes. bmin expects the minimum value to be stored in the blue bitplanes. rmax expects the maximum value to be stored in the red bitplanes. gmax expects the maximum value to be stored in the green bitplanes. bmax expects the maximum value to be stored in the blue bitplanes. z1 expects the minimum z value that is to be used as criteria for linear mapping. z2 expects the m...
 standard/rgbsize(3) -- single-color component buffer.
    planes is the number of bit planes requested to be configured as color planes for each single-color component. Only positive values are accepted. The default is machine dependent, usually 8 or 12.
 standard/rgbwritemask(3) -- grants write access to a subset of available bitplanes
    red expects the mask for the corresponding red bitplanes. green expects the mask for the corresponding green bitplanes. blue expects the mask for the corresponding blue bitplanes.
 complib/RGG(3) -- EISPACK routine. This subroutine calls the recommended sequence of subroutines from the eigensystem subroutine
    On Input NM must be set to the row dimension of the two-dimensional array parameters as declared in the calling program dimension statement. N is the order of the matrices A and B. A contains a real general matrix. B contains a real general matrix. MATZ is an integer variable set equal to zero if only eigenvalues are desired. Otherwise it is set to any non-zero integer for both eigenvalues and eigenvectors. On Output ALFR and ALFI contain the real and imaginary parts, respectively, of the numera...
 standard/rightbuffer(3) -- enables and disables drawing to the left/right buffer
    bool is either TRUE or FALSE. TRUE enables updating the left/right buffer. FALSE disables updating the left/right buffer. By default, leftbuffer is TRUE and rightbuffer is FALSE.
 standard/ringbell(3) -- rings the keyboard bell
    none
 rmtops(3) -- remote tape drive access routines
    Rmtops provides a simple means of transparently accessing tape drives on remote machines over a network, via rsh(1) and rmt(1M). This version of the library expects the remote rmt program to be version 2, which is fairly widespread. These routines are used like their corresponding system calls, but allow the user to open up a tape drive on a remote system on which he or she has an account and the appropriate remote permissions. rmtaccess() always returns 0 in the remote case, since the protocol ...
 standard/rmv(3) -- relative move
    dx expects the distance from the x coordinate of the current graphics position to the x coordinate of the new graphics position. dy expects the distance from the y coordinate of the current graphics position to the y coordinate of the new graphics position. dz expects the distance from the z coordinate of the current graphics position to the z coordinate of the new graphics position.
 f90/rnl(3) -- Manipulates characters recognized by NAMELIST
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/rnlecho(3) -- Specifies output unit for NAMELIST error messages and echo lines
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/rnlskip(3) -- Takes appropriate action when an undesired NAMELIST group is encountered
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/rnltype(3) -- Determines action if type mismatch occurs across equal sign on NAMELIST input record
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 rnusers(3) -- return information about users on remote machines
    Rnusers returns the number of users logged on to host (-1 if it cannot determine that number). Rusers fills the utmpidlearr structure with data about host, and returns 0 if successful. The relevant structures are: struct utmparr { /* RUSERSVERS_ORIG */ struct utmp **uta_arr; int uta_cnt }; struct utmpidle { struct utmp ui_utmp; unsigned ui_idle; }; struct utmpidlearr { /* RUSERSVERS_IDLE */ struct utmpidle **uia_arr; int uia_cnt };...
 libblas/rot(3) -- BLAS level ONE rotation subroutines
    DROTG and SROTG compute C and S, the Cosine and Sine of the rotation, given the coordinates of a transformed vector (da, db) or (sa, sb). DROT and SROT apply a plane rotation (Cosine = C, Sine = S) to N points whose coordinates are defined by the DX (SX) and DY (SY) vectors.
 standard/rotate(3) -- rotates the current matrix
    a expects the angle of rotation. axis expects the relative axis of rotation. There are three character literal values for this parameter: 'x' indicates the x-axis. 'y' indicates the y-axis. 'z' indicates the z-axis.
 libblas/rotm(3) -- BLAS Level-1. Applies a modified Givens rotation. FORTRAN SYNOPSIS subroutine drotm( n, x, incx, y, incy, para
    n (input) Number of planar points to be rotated. If n<=0, the routine returns without any computattion. x (input/output) On input, x contains the x-coordinate of each planar point to be rotated. On output, x contains the x-coordinate of each rotated planar point. incx (input) Increment between elemnents of x. If incx=0, the results will be unpredictable. y (input/output) On input, y contains the y-coordinate of each planer point to be rotated. On output, y contains the y-coordinate of each rotat...
 libblas/rotmg(3) -- BLAS Level-1. Compute the elements of a modified Givens plane rotation. FORTRAN SYNOPSIS subroutine drotmg( d1
    d1 (input/output) On input, this value is the first diagonal element of the scaling matrix D. On first call to DROTMG or SROTMG, this value is typically 1.0. Subsequent calls typically use the value from the previous call. On output, this value is the first diagonal element of the updated scaling matrix D'. d2 (input/output) On input, this value is the second diagonal element of the scaling matrix D. On first call to DROTMG or SROTMG, this value is typically 1.0. Subsequent calls typically use ...
 ftn/round(3) -- FORTRAN nearest integer functions
    anint returns the nearest whole real number to its real argument (i.e., int(a+0.5) if a > 0, int(a-0.5) otherwise). dnint does the same for its double-precision argument, qnint does the same for its real*16 argument. anint is the generic form of anint, dnint, and qnint, performing the same operation and returning the data type of its argument. Page 1 ROUND(3F) ROUND(3F) nint returns the nearest integer to its real argument. inint returns the nearest integer*2 to its real*4 argument. jnint return...
 standard/rpatch(3) -- draws a rational surface patch
    geomx expects a 4x4 matrix containing the x coordinates of the 16 control points of the patch. geomy expects a 4x4 matrix containing the y coordinates of the 16 control points of the patch. geomz expects a 4x4 matrix containing the z coordinates of the 16 control points of the patch. geomw expects a 4x4 matrix containing the w coordinates of the 16 control points of the patch.
 rpc(3c) -- Remote Procedure Call (RPC) library routines
    xdr(3R), IRIX Network Programming Guide. PPPPaaaaggggeeee 11118888
 rpc(3n) -- library routines for remote procedure calls
    /etc/netconfig
 rpcbind(3n) -- library routines for RPC bind service
    rpc_clnt_calls(3N), rpc_svc_calls(3N), rpcbind(1M), rpcinfo(1M) PPPPaaaaggggeeee 2222
 rpc_clnt_au(3n) -- library routines for client side remote procedure call authentication
    rpc(3N), rpc_clnt_create(3N), rpc_clnt_calls(3N) PPPPaaaaggggeeee 2222
 rpc_clnt_cl(3n) -- library routines for client side calls
    printf(3S), rpc(3N), rpc_clnt_auth(3N), rpc_clnt_create(3N) PPPPaaaaggggeeee 3333
 rpc_clnt_cr(3n) -- library routines for dealing with creation and manipulation of CLIENT handles
    rpcbind(1M), rpc(3N), rpc_clnt_auth(3N), rpc_clnt_calls(3N) PPPPaaaaggggeeee 4444
 rpc_svc_cls(3n) -- library routines for registering servers
    rpcbind(1M), rpcbind(3N), rpc(3N), rpc_svc_err(3N), rpc_svc_create(3N), rpc_svc_reg(3N) PPPPaaaaggggeeee 2222
 rpc_svc_cr(3n) -- library routines for dealing with the creation of server handles
    rpcbind(1M), rpc(3N), rpc_svc_calls(3N), rpc_svc_err(3N), rpc_svc_reg(3N) PPPPaaaaggggeeee 3333
 rpc_svc_err(3n) -- library routines for server side remote procedure call errors
    rpc(3N), rpc_svc_calls(3N), rpc_svc_create(3N), rpc_svc_reg(3N) PPPPaaaaggggeeee 2222
 rpc_svc_reg(3n) -- library routines for RPC servers
    poll(2), rpc(3N), rpc_svc_calls(3N), rpc_svc_create(3N), rpc_svc_err(3N) PPPPaaaaggggeeee 2222
 rpc_xdr(3n) -- XDR library routines for remote procedure calls
    rpc(3N) PPPPaaaaggggeeee 2222
 standard/rpdr(3) -- relative polygon draw
    dx expects the distance from the x coordinate of the current graphics position to the x coordinate of the next corner of the polygon. dy expects the distance from the y coordinate of the current graphics position to the y coordinate of the next corner of the polygon. dz expects the distance from the z coordinate of the current graphics position to the z coordinate of the next corner of the polygon....
 standard/rpmv(3) -- relative polygon move
    dx expects the distance from the x coordinate of the current graphics position to the x coordinate of the first point in a polygon. dy expects the distance from the y coordinate of the current graphics position to the y coordinate of the first point in a polygon. dz expects the distance from the z coordinate of the current graphics position to the z coordinate of the first point in a polygon.
 rquota(3) -- implement quotas on remote machines
    The rquota() protocol inquires about quotas on remote machines. It is used in conjunction with NFS, since NFS itself does not implement quotas.
 f90/rrspacing(3) -- Returns the reciprocal of the relative spacing of numeric model numbers near the argument value
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 complib/RS(3) -- EISPACK routine. This subroutine calls the recommended sequence of subroutines from the eigensystem subroutine
    On Input NM must be set to the row dimension of the two-dimensional array parameters as declared in the calling program dimension statement. N is the order of the matrix A. A contains the real symmetric matrix. MATZ is an integer variable set equal to zero if only eigenvalues are desired. Otherwise it is set to any non-zero integer for both eigenvalues and eigenvectors. On Output W contains the eigenvalues in ascending order. Z contains the eigenvectors if MATZ is not zero. IERR is an integer ou...
 complib/RSB(3) -- EISPACK routine. This subroutine calls the recommended sequence of subroutines from the eigensystem subroutine
    On Input NM must be set to the row dimension of the two-dimensional array parameters as declared in the calling program dimension statement. N is the order of the matrix A. MB is the half band width of the matrix, defined as the number of adjacent diagonals, including the principal diagonal, required to specify the non-zero portion of the lower triangle of the matrix. A contains the lower triangle of the real symmetric band matrix. Its lowest subdiagonal is stored in the last N+1-MB positions of...
 complib/RSG(3) -- EISPACK routine. This subroutine calls the recommended sequence of subroutines from the eigensystem subroutine
    On Input NM must be set to the row dimension of the two-dimensional array parameters as declared in the calling program dimension statement. N is the order of the matrices A and B. A contains a real symmetric matrix. B contains a positive definite real symmetric matrix. MATZ is an integer variable set equal to zero if only eigenvalues are desired. Otherwise it is set to any non-zero integer for both eigenvalues and eigenvectors. On Output W contains the eigenvalues in ascending order. Z contains...
 complib/RSGAB(3) -- EISPACK routine. This subroutine calls the recommended sequence of subroutines from the eigensystem subroutine
    On Input NM must be set to the row dimension of the two-dimensional array parameters as declared in the calling program dimension statement. N is the order of the matrices A and B. A contains a real symmetric matrix. B contains a positive definite real symmetric matrix. MATZ is an integer variable set equal to zero if only eigenvalues are desired. Otherwise it is set to any non-zero integer for both eigenvalues and eigenvectors. On Output W contains the eigenvalues in ascending order. Z contains...
 complib/RSGBA(3) -- EISPACK routine. This subroutine calls the recommended sequence of subroutines from the eigensystem subroutine
    On Input NM must be set to the row dimension of the two-dimensional array parameters as declared in the calling program dimension statement. N is the order of the matrices A and B. A contains a real symmetric matrix. B contains a positive definite real symmetric matrix. MATZ is an integer variable set equal to zero if only eigenvalues are desired. Otherwise it is set to any non-zero integer for both eigenvalues and eigenvectors. On Output W contains the eigenvalues in ascending order. Z contains...
 complib/RSM(3) -- EISPACK routine. This subroutine calls the recommended sequence of subroutines from the eigensystem subroutine
    ON INPUT NM MUST BE SET TO THE ROW DIMENSION OF THE TWO-DIMENSIONAL ARRAY PARAMETERS AS DECLARED IN THE CALLING PROGRAM DIMENSION STATEMENT. N IS THE ORDER OF THE MATRIX A. A CONTAINS THE REAL SYMMETRIC MATRIX. M THE EIGENVECTORS CORRESPONDING TO THE FIRST M EIGENVALUES ARE TO BE COMPUTED. IF M = 0 THEN NO EIGENVECTORS ARE COMPUTED. IF M = N THEN ALL OF THE EIGENVECTORS ARE COMPUTED. ON OUTPUT W CONTAINS ALL N EIGENVALUES IN ASCENDING ORDER. Z CONTAINS THE ORTHONORMAL EIGENVECTORS ASSOCIATED WIT...
 complib/RSP(3) -- EISPACK routine. This subroutine calls the recommended sequence of subroutines from the eigensystem subroutine
    On Input NM must be set to the row dimension of the two-dimensional array parameters as declared in the calling program dimension statement. N is the order of the matrix A. NV is an integer variable set equal to the dimension of the array A as specified for A in the calling program. NV must not be less than N*(N+1)/2. A contains the lower triangle of the real symmetric packed matrix stored row-wise. MATZ is an integer variable set equal to zero if only eigenvalues are desired. Otherwise it is se...
 complib/RST(3) -- EISPACK routine. This subroutine calls the recommended sequence of subroutines from the eigensystem subroutine
    On Input NM must be set to the row dimension of the two-dimensional array parameters as declared in the calling program dimension statement. N is the order of the matrix. W contains the diagonal elements of the real symmetric tridiagonal matrix. E contains the subdiagonal elements of the matrix in its last N-1 POSITIONS. E(1) is arbitrary. MATZ is an integer variable set equal to zero if only eigenvalues are desired. Otherwise it is set to any non-zero integer for both eigenvalues and eigenvecto...
 complib/RT(3) -- EISPACK routine. This subroutine calls the recommended sequence of subroutines from the eigensystem subroutine
    On Input NM must be set to the row dimension of the two-dimensional array parameters as declared in the calling program dimension statement. N is the order of the matrix A. A contains the special real tridiagonal matrix in its first three columns. The subdiagonal elements are stored in the last N-1 positions of the first column, the diagonal elements in the second column, and the superdiagonal elements in the first N-1 positions of the third column. elements A(1,1) and A(N,3) are arbitrary. MATZ...
 f90/rtc(3) -- Returns clock register contents
    C/C++: UNICOS and UNICOS/mk systems Fortran: UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 rtmon_log_user_tstamp(3) -- REACT/Pro user timestamp logging
    This function is available with -lrtmon or -lrtmonstubs. Linking with rtmonstubs will cause this call to have no effect. rtmon_log_user_tstamp(evt, qual1, qual2, qual3, qual4) logs event evt. event_t is an unsigned short allowing 64K events. All events logged by users with rtmon_log_user_tstamp are offset by 40000. The range 60000- 64K is reserved for kernel events providing 20K events for user logging. As an example: if a user logs event 17 with rtmon_log_user_tstamp(17, value1, value2, 0, 0), ...
 rwall(3) -- write to specified remote machines
    Rwall causes host to print the string msg to all its users. It returns 0 if successful.
 perl5/Safe(3) -- Compile and execute code in restricted compartments
    The Safe extension module allows the creation of compartments in which perl code can be evaluated. Each compartment has a new namespace The "root" of the namespace (i.e. "main::") is changed to a different package and code evaluated in the compartment cannot refer to variables outside this namespace, even with run-time glob lookups and other tricks. Code which is compiled outside the compartment can choose to place variables into (or share variables with) the compartment's namespace and onl...
 sat_eventtostr(3) -- convert an audit event index to/from an audit event string
    sat_eventtostr returns a human-readable string which represents the audit event passed to it in event. The value returned points to a static character array. event must be a positive integer less than SAT_NTYPES (defined in ). sat_strtoevent returns a machine-readable event index which represents the string passed to it in evstr. The string returned by sat_eventtostr and passed to sat_strtoevent is a member of the set of known event names. For a complete list of known event names, run...
 sat_intrp_pathname(3) -- Portable interface to interpret sat_pathname structs.
    sat_intrp_pathname takes a pointer to a buffer (buf) containing the disk image of a sat_pathname structure. It unpacks the variable length portions of the struct from buf and returns them in the specified arguments. A pointer to the data following the pathname information is returned in buf. The sat_pathname structure includes the following fields: ino_t sat_inode; /* inode number of file */ dev_t sat_device; /* device no. of mounted file system */ uid_t sat_fileown; /* file owner */ gid_t sat_f...
 sat_read_file_info(3) -- Portable interfaces to read audit file headers
    sat_read_file_info reads an audit file header into a convenient struct for examining its contents. Translation from older versions of audit files is handled transparently by the library routines. The file header is read from file descriptor in and processed into the fheader struct. If out is non-NULL, the data read from in is written back to out. The data written is the disk image, not a processed struct. The sat_file_info structure pointed to by fheader includes the following fields: int sat_ma...
 sat_read_header_info(3) -- Portable interfaces to read audit record headers
    sat_read_header_info reads an audit record header into a convenient struct for examining its contents (the disk format is neither convenient nor obvious). Translation from older versions of audit files is handled transparently by the library routines. The record header is read from file descriptor in and processed into the struct pointed to by header. The file_major, file_minor are the file version to translate from, obtained from the file header using the sat_read_file_info(3C) call. The sat_hd...
 sat_write_filehdr(3) -- write audit file header, write close time to audit file header
    sat_write_filehdr writes an audit file header to the file referenced by fd . sat_close_filehdr writes out the close time to the audit file referenced by fd .
 complib/sbdsqr(3) -- compute the singular value decomposition (SVD) of a real N-by-N (upper or lower) bidiagonal matrix B
    SBDSQR computes the singular value decomposition (SVD) of a real N-by-N (upper or lower) bidiagonal matrix B: B = Q * S * P' (P' denotes the transpose of P), where S is a diagonal matrix with non-negative diagonal elements (the singular values of B), and Q and P are orthogonal matrices. The routine computes S, and optionally computes U * Q, P' * VT, or Q' * C, for given real input matrices U, VT, and C. See "Computing Small Singular Values of Bidiagonal Matrices With Guaranteed High Relativ...
 libblas/sbmv(3) -- BLAS Level Two (Symmetric/Hermitian)
    dsbmv , ssbmv , dhbmv and chbmv perform the matrix-vector operation y := alpha*A*x + beta*y, where alpha and beta are scalars, x and y are n element vectors and A is an n by n symmetric/hermitian band matrix, with k super-diagonals.
 standard/sbox(3) -- draw a screen-aligned rectangle
    x1 expects the x coordinate of a corner of the box. y1 expects the y coordinate of a corner of the box. x2 expects the x coordinate of the opposite corner of the box. y2 expects the y coordinate of the opposite corner of the box.
 standard/sboxf(3) -- draw a filled screen-aligned rectangle
    x1 expects the x coordinate of a corner of the filled box. y1 expects the y coordinate of a corner of the filled box. x2 expects the x coordinate of the opposite corner of the filled box. y2 expects the y coordinate of the opposite corner of the filled box.
 c++/sbuf.prot(3) -- interface for derived classes
    streambufs implement the buffer abstraction described in sbuf.pub(3C++). However, the streambuf class itself contains only basic members for manipulating the characters and normally a class derived from streambuf will be used. This man page describes the interface needed by programmers who are coding a derived class. Broadly speaking there are two kinds of member functions described here. The...
 c++/sbuf.pub(3) -- public interface of character buffering class
    The streambuf class supports buffers into which characters can be inserted (put) or from which characters can be fetched (gotten). Abstractly, such a buffer is a sequence of characters together with one or two pointers (a get and/or a put pointer) that define the location at which characters are to be inserted or fetched. The pointers should be thought of as pointing between characters rather than at them. This makes it easier to understand the boundary conditions (a p...
 libblas/scal(3) -- BLAS level ONE scaling subroutines FORTRAN 77 SYNOPSIS subroutine dscal( n, a, x, incx ) integer incx, n doubl
    dscal, sscal, zscal, cscal, zdscal, and csscal scale the vector x of length n and increment incx by the constant a. For dscal, sscal, zscal and cscal the constant a is of the same type as the vector x. zdscal and csscal scale a "complex" vector by "real" constant.
 standard/scale(3) -- Create and manipulate scale widgets
    activeBackground font highlightThickness repeatInterval| background foreground orient takeFocus | borderWidth highlightBackground relief troughColor | cursor highlightColor repeatDelay See the ``options'' manual entry for details on the standard options. WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS Name: bigIncrement Class: BigIncrement Command-Line Switch:-bigincrement Some interactions with the scale cause its value to change by | ``large'' increments; this option specifies the size of the large | increments. ...
 f90/scale(3) -- Create and manipulate scale widgets
    activeBackground font highlightThickness repeatInterval| background foreground orient takeFocus | borderWidth highlightBackground relief troughColor | cursor highlightColor repeatDelay See the ``options'' manual entry for details on the standard options. WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS Name: bigIncrement Class: BigIncrement Command-Line Switch:-bigincrement Some interactions with the scale cause its value to change by | ``large'' increments; this option specifies the size of the large | increments. ...
 Tk/scale(3) -- Create and manipulate scale widgets
    activeBackground font highlightThickness repeatInterval| background foreground orient takeFocus | borderWidth highlightBackground relief troughColor | cursor highlightColor repeatDelay See the ``options'' manual entry for details on the standard options. WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS Name: bigIncrement Class: BigIncrement Command-Line Switch:-bigincrement Some interactions with the scale cause its value to change by | ``large'' increments; this option specifies the size of the large | increments. ...
 f90/scan(3) -- Parse string using conversion specifiers in the style of sscanf
    This command parses fields from an input string in the same fashion as the ANSI C sscanf procedure and returns a count of the number of | conversions performed, or -1 if the end of the input string is reached | before any conversions have been performed. String gives the input to be parsed and format indicates how to parse it, using % conversion specifiers as in sscanf. Each varName gives the name of a variable; when a field is scanned from string the result is converted back into a string and a...
 Tcl/scan(3) -- Parse string using conversion specifiers in the style of sscanf
    This command parses fields from an input string in the same fashion as the ANSI C sscanf procedure and returns a count of the number of | conversions performed, or -1 if the end of the input string is reached | before any conversions have been performed. String gives the input to be parsed and format indicates how to parse it, using % conversion specifiers as in sscanf. Each varName gives the name of a variable; when a field is scanned from string the result is converted back into a string and a...
 scandir(3c) -- scan a directory
    The inclusion of selects the System V versions of these routines. For the 4.3BSD versions, include . Scandir reads the directory dirname and builds an array of pointers to directory entries using malloc(3C). It returns the number of entries in the array and a pointer to the array through namelist. The select parameter is a pointer to a user-supplied subroutine which is called by scandir to select which entries are to be included in the array. The select routine is passed a ...
 scanf(3s) -- convert formatted input
    scanf reads from the standard input stream, stdin. fscanf reads from the stream strm. sscanf reads from the character string s. Each function reads characters, interprets them according to a format, and stores the results in its arguments. Each expects, as arguments, a control string, format, described below and a set of pointer arguments indicating where the converted input should be stored. If there are insufficient arguments fo...
 complib/scfftm1du(3) -- Multiple 1D, Real to Complex, Direct Fast Fourier Transforms.
    scfftm1du and dzfftm1du compute the complex Fourier transform of P real sequences of N samples each. The k-th index F(k) of the Transform of an N sample sequence f(i) is equal to: F(k) = Sum ( W^(i*k) * f(i) ), for i =0, ..., (N-1) W = exp( (Sign*2*sqrt(-1)*PI) / N ) The Fourier transforms are computed in-place so the input sequence is overwritten by the Fourier transform output. As the input sequences have real values, only half of the results are computed since the (N-k)-th sample of the trans...
 complib/scfftm1dui(3) -- initialize the coefficient array for real-tocomplex Multiple 1D FFT modules.
    Initialize, the coefficient array which is used in the Multiple 1D FFT modules. This array contains the different twiddle factors and the factorization of N into prime numbers. As the FFT modules scfftm1d or dzfftm1d only read the coeff array, it may be reused as long as necessary once it has been initialized. In C, if ptr is NULL, scfftm1dui or dzfftm1dui returns a pointer to an allocated buffer. SCFFTM1DUI should be used to initialize the coefficient array before any call to SCFFTM1DU DZFFTM1D...
 complib/SCHDC(3) -- SCHDC computes the Cholesky decomposition of a positive definite matrix. A pivoting option allows the user to
    On Entry A REAL(LDA,P). A contains the matrix whose decomposition is to be computed. Only the upper half of A need be stored. The lower part of the array A is not referenced. LDA INTEGER. LDA is the leading dimension of the array A. P INTEGER. P is the order of the matrix. WORK REAL. WORK is a work array. JPVT INTEGER(P). JPVT contains integers that control the selection of the pivot elements, if pivoting has been requested. Each diagonal element A(K,K) is placed in one of three classes accordin...
 complib/SCHDD(3) -- SCHDD downdates an augmented Cholesky decomposition or the triangular factor of an augmented QR decomposition.
    On Entry R REAL(LDR,P), where LDR .GE. P. R contains the upper triangular matrix that is to be downdated. The part of R below the diagonal is not referenced. LDR INTEGER. LDR is the leading dimension of the array R. P INTEGER. P is the order of the matrix R. Page 1 SCHDD(3F) SCHDD(3F) X REAL(P). X contains the row vector that is to be removed from R. X is not altered by SCHDD. Z REAL(LDZ,NZ), where LDZ .GE. P. Z is an array of NZ P-vectors which are to be downdated along with R. LDZ INTEGER. LDZ...
 complib/SCHEX(3) -- SCHEX updates the Cholesky factorization A = TRANS(R)*R of a positive definite matrix A of order P under diago
    On Entry R REAL(LDR,P), where LDR .GE. P. R contains the upper triangular factor that is to be updated. Elements of R below the diagonal are not referenced. LDR INTEGER. LDR is the leading dimension of the array R. P INTEGER. P is the order of the matrix R. K INTEGER. K is the first column to be permuted. L INTEGER. L is the last column to be permuted. L must be strictly greater than K. Z REAL(LDZ,NZ), where LDZ.GE.P. Z is an array of NZ P-vectors into which the transformation U is multiplied. Z...
 complib/SCHUD(3) -- SCHUD updates an augmented Cholesky decomposition of the triangular part of an augmented QR decomposition. Spe
    On Entry R REAL(LDR,P), where LDR .GE. P. R contains the upper triangular matrix that is to be updated. The part of R below the diagonal is not referenced. LDR INTEGER. LDR is the leading dimension of the array R. P INTEGER. P is the order of the matrix R. X REAL(P). X contains the row to be added to R. X is not altered by SCHUD. Page 1 SCHUD(3F) SCHUD(3F) Z REAL(LDZ,NZ), where LDZ .GE. P. Z is an array containing NZ P-vectors to be updated with R. LDZ INTEGER. LDZ is the leading dimension of th...
 standard/sclear(3) -- clear the stencil planes to a specified value
    sval expects the integer value that is to be written to every stencil location
 standard/scrbox(3) -- control the screen box
    arg Expects one of the symbolic constants: SB_RESET: initialize screen box limits and disable the updating of screen box limits. (default) SB_TRACK: track scan-converted geometry and characters and update the scrbox limits accordingly. SB_HOLD: disable update of screen box limits; hold current values.
 standard/screenspace(3) -- map world space to absolute screen coordinates
    none
 standard/scrmask(3) -- defines a rectangular screen clipping mask
    left expects the window coordinate of the left-most pixel column within the mask region. right expects the window coordinate of the right-most pixel column within the mask region. bottom expects the window coordinate of the lowest pixel row within the mask region. top expects the window coordinate of the highest pixel row within the mask region.
 standard/scrnattach(3) -- attaches the input focus to a screen
    gsnr expects a screen number or the symbolic constant, INFOCUSSCRN. FUNCTION RETURN VALUE The function returns the screen that previously had input focus, or -1 if there was an error (e.g., gsnr is not a valid screen number).
 standard/scrnselect(3) -- selects the screen upon which new windows are placed
    gsnr expects the number of a screen controlled by the currently selected graphics server. FUNCTION RETURN VALUE The function returns the previously selected screen, or -1 if there was an error (e.g., gsnr is not a valid screen number).
 Tk/scrollbar(3) -- Create and manipulate scrollbar widgets
    activeBackground highlightBackground orient takeFocus | background highlightColor relief troughColor | borderWidth highlightThickness repeatDelay | cursor jump repeatInterval See the ``options'' manual entry for details on the standard options. WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS Name: activeRelief Class: ActiveRelief Command-Line Switch:-activerelief Specifies the relief to use when displaying the element that is | active, if any. Elements other than the active element are always | displayed with a raise...
 standard/scrsubdivide(3) -- subdivide lines and polygons to a screen-space limit
    mode Specify whether and how lines and polygons are to be subdivided. Options are: SS_OFF: do not subdivide. (default) SS_DEPTH: subdivide based on z values in screen-coordinates. params Expects an array that contains parameter specifications for the subdivision mode that has been selected. The values provided in the params array are ignored when the mode is SS_OFF. SS_DEPTH expects three values in the params array: maxz, minsize, and maxsize. maxz specifies the distance, in screencoordinates, b...
 complib/scsum1(3) -- take the sum of the absolute values of a complex vector and returns a single precision result
    SCSUM1 takes the sum of the absolute values of a complex vector and returns a single precision result. Based on SCASUM from the Level 1 BLAS. The change is to use the 'genuine' absolute value. Contributed by Nick Higham for use with CLACON.
 perl5/SDBM_File(3) -- Tied access to sdbm files
    See the tie entry in the perlfunc manpage PPPPaaaaggggeeee 1111
 complib/sdfft1du(3) -- 1D Real to Complex Fast Fourier Transform. FORTRAN SPECIFICATION subroutine DFFT1DU( job, n, sequence, inc, wo
    DFFT1DU and SFFT1DU compute the 1 dimensional Fourier transform of a real periodic sequence. NOTE: These routines are provided only for compatibility with previous releases of complib.
 complib/sdfft1dui(3) -- 1D FFT Real to Complex workspace initialization routines. FORTRAN SPECIFICATION subroutine SFFT1DUI( n, worksp
    SFFT1DUI and DFFT1DUI initialize the array WORKSPACE which is used in SFFT1DU and DFFT1DU. The prime factorization of N, together with a tabulation of the trigonometric functions are computed and stored in WORKSPACE. NOTE: These routines are provided only for compatibility with previous releases of complib.
 complib/sdfft2du(3) -- 2D Real to Complex Fast Fourier Transform. FORTRAN SPECIFICATION subroutine DFFT2DU( job, n1, n2, sequence, ld
    DFFT2DU and SFFT2DU compute the 2 dimensional complex Fourier transform of a real periodic sequence. NOTE: These routines are provided only for compatibility with previous releases of complib.
 complib/sdfft2dui(3) -- 2D FFT Real to Complex workspace initialization routines. FORTRAN SPECIFICATION subroutine SFFT2DUI( n1, n2, w
    SFFT2DUI and DFFT2DUI initialize the array WORKSPACE which is used in SFFT2DU and DFFT2DU. The prime factorizations of N1 and N2, together with a tabulation of the trigonometric functions are computed and stored in WORKSPACE. NOTE: These routines are provided only for compatibility with previous releases of complib.
 complib/sdfft3du(3) -- 3D Real to Complex Fast Fourier Transform. FORTRAN SPECIFICATION subroutine DFFT3DU( job, n1, n2, n3, sequence
    JOB - INTEGER On entry specifies whether to perform a forward or backward Fast Fourier Transform: JOB = -1, forward FFT JOB = 1, backward FFT Unchanged on exit. N1 - INTEGER. On entry, N1 specifies the number of elements in the first dimension of the sequence. Unchanged on exit. N2 - INTEGER. On entry, N2 specifies the number of elements in the second dimension of the sequence. Unchanged on exit. N3 - INTEGER. On entry, N3 specifies the number of elements in the third dimension of the sequence. ...
 complib/sdfft3dui(3) -- 3D FFT Real to Complex workspace initialization routines. FORTRAN SPECIFICATION subroutine SFFT3DUI( n1, n2, n
    SFFT3DUI and DFFT3DUI initialize the array WORKSPACE which is used in SFFT3DU and DFFT3DU. The prime factorizations of N1, N2 and N3, together with a tabulation of the trigonometric functions are computed and stored in WORKSPACE. NOTE: These routines are provided only for compatibility with previous releases of complib.
 complib/sdfftm1du(3) -- Multiple 1D, Real to Complex Fast Fourier Transform. FORTRAN SPECIFICATION subroutine DFFTM1DU( job, n, p, seq
    DFFTM1DU and SFFTM1DU compute the complex Fourier transform of P real periodic sequences of N samples each. NOTE: These routines are provided only for compatibility with previous releases of complib.
 complib/sdfftm1dui(3) -- Multiple 1D, FFT Real to Complex workspace initialization routines. FORTRAN SPECIFICATION subroutine SFFTM1DUI
    SFFTM1DUI and DFFTM1DUI initialize the array WORKSPACE which is used in SFFTM1DU and DFFTM1DU. The prime factorization of N, together with a tabulation of the trigonometric functions, are computed and stored in WORKSPACE. NOTE: These routines are provided only for compatibility with previous releases of complib.
 complib/sdisna(3) -- compute the reciprocal condition numbers for the eigenvectors of a real symmetric or complex Hermitian matrix
    SDISNA computes the reciprocal condition numbers for the eigenvectors of a real symmetric or complex Hermitian matrix or for the left or right singular vectors of a general m-by-n matrix. The reciprocal condition number is the 'gap' between the corresponding eigenvalue or singular value and the nearest other one. The bound on the error, measured by angle in radians, in the I-th computed vector is given by SLAMCH( 'E' ) * ( ANORM / SEP( I ) ) where ANORM = 2-norm(A) = max( abs( D(j) ) ). SEP(...
 perl5/Search::Dict(3) -- search for key in dictionary file
    Sets file position in FILEHANDLE to be first line greater than or equal (stringwise) to $key. Returns the new file position, or -1 if an error occurs. The flags specify dictionary order and case folding: If $dict is true, search by dictionary order (ignore anything but word characters and whitespace). If $fold is true, ignore case. PPPPaaaaggggeeee 1111
 complib/second(3) -- 0REAL FUNCTION SECOND( )
    This particular version of SECOND is part of the LAPACK distribution contained in the COMPLIB.SGIMATH library. Page 1 SECOND(3F) Last changed: 2-24-98
 f90/second(3) -- 0REAL FUNCTION SECOND( )
    This particular version of SECOND is part of the LAPACK distribution contained in the COMPLIB.SGIMATH library. Page 1 SECOND(3F) Last changed: 2-24-98
 f90/secondr(3) -- Returns elapsed wall-clock time in seconds
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 secure_rpc(3n) -- library routines for secure remote procedure calls
    RPC library routines allow C programs to make procedure calls on other machines across the network. First, the client calls a procedure to send a data packet to the server. Upon receipt of the packet, the server calls a dispatch routine to perform the requested service, and then sends back a reply. RPC supports various authentication flavors. Among them are: AUTH_NONE (none) no authentication. AUTH_SYS Traditional UNIXr-style authentication. AU<...
 Tcl/seek(3) -- Change the access position for an open file
    Change the current access position for fileId. FileId must have been the return value from a previous call to open, or it may be stdin, stdout, or stderr to refer to one of the standard I/O channels. The offset and origin arguments specify the position at which the next read or write will occur for fileId. Offset must be an integer (which may be negative) and origin must be one of the following: start The new access position will be offset bytes from the start of the file. current The new access...
 f90/selected(3) -- 0- return a kind type parameter given a decimal exponent range or precision.
    The Fortran 90 transformational function selected_int_kind returns the kind type parameter of an integer type that can represent the range of values n such that -10**r < n < 10**r. If no such kind exists, the result is -1. If more than one kind meets the criteria, the result is the kind type parameter of the kind with the smallest decimal exponent range. Both r and the result are scalars of integer type. The selected_real_kind function is similar, but returns the kind type parameter of a real ty...
 f90/selected_int_kind(3) -- Returns an integer kind type parameter
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/selected_real_kind(3) -- Returns the real kind type parameter
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 Tk/selection(3) -- Manipulate the X selection
    This command provides a Tcl interface to the X selection mechanism and implements the full selection functionality described in the X InterClient Communication Conventions Manual (ICCCM). The first argument to selection determines the format of the rest of the arguments and the behavior of the command. The following forms are currently supported: selection clear ?-displayof window? ?-selection selection? If selection exists anywhere on window's display, clear it so that | no window owns the sel...
 perl5/SelectSaver(3) -- save and restore selected file handle
    A SelectSaver object contains a reference to the file handle that was selected when it was created. If its new method gets an extra parameter, then that parameter is selected; otherwise, the selected file handle remains unchanged. When a SelectSaver is destroyed, it re-selects the file handle that was selected when it was created. PPPPaaaaggggeeee 1111
 perl5/SelfLoader(3) -- load functions only on demand
    This module tells its users that functions in the FOOBAR package are to be autoloaded from after the __DATA__ token. See also the section on Autoloading in the perlsub manpage.
 sem_close(3c) -- close a posix named semaphore
    sem_close closes the connection to the named semaphore located at address sem. The address sem may reside anywhere in the calling processes address space, but the process must have read and write access to sem. If multiple threads within a common process (i.e., sprocs, pthreads) are sharing sem, a single call to sem_close will close the named semaphore for all threads within the calling process. Once a named semaphore has been closed, subsequent op...
 sem_destroy(3c) -- deinitialize a posix unnamed semaphore
    sem_destroy deinitializes the unnamed semaphore located at address sem. The address sem may reside anywhere in the calling processes address space, but the process must have read and write access to sem. Once an unnamed semaphore has been deinitialized, semaphore operations performed on it will fail until the semaphore has been reinitialized. sem_destroy will fail if one or more of the following are true: [EINVAL] The semaphore located ...
 sem_getvalue(3c) -- get the value of a posix named or unnamed semaphore
    sem_getvalue obtains the current value of the semaphore located at address sem, and stores it at address value. The returned value should be viewed as a snapshot only, useful for debugging. If the number stored at value is positive, then the semaphore is available. If the number stored at value is zero, then the semaphore is not available. If the number stored at value is negative, then the semaphore is not available and the absolute value of the number represent...
 sem_init(3c) -- initialize a posix unnamed semaphore
    sem_init initializes the unnamed semaphore located at address sem. The address sem may reside anywhere in the calling processes address space, but if the semaphore is intended to be shared across process boundaries, sem must reside in shared memory. The pshared argument is used to specify whether the semaphore is intended to be shared across process boundaries or only used locally by threads of execution within a common process. If pshared is set to zero, then the semaphore ...
 sem_mode(3c) -- set the operation mode of a POSIX unnamed semaphore
    sem_mode is used to change the operation mode of the specified POSIX unnamed semaphore sem. Changing a semaphore's default operation mode allows applications to enable two levels of debug tracing, and apply retry spinning. Semaphore types other than POSIX unnamed semaphores are not supported by this function. sem_mode is an IRIX extension to the POSIX interfaces and is not part of the IEEE 1003.1b Standard. The operation mode is selected by setting cmd ...
 sem_open(3c) -- open a posix named semaphore
    sem_open opens a semaphore named by the character string at address name. The oflag parameter is used when creating a semaphore, supporting the following bit flags: O_CREAT If the semaphore already exists, this flag has no effect, except as noted under O_EXCL below. Otherwise, the semaphore is created. The initial value of the semaphore may be specified by value, where value is any non-negative number less than {SEM_VALUE_MAX} [see sy
 sem_post(3c) -- release a posix named or unnamed semaphore
    sem_post atomically increments the value of the semaphore located at address sem. If any processes are blocked on the semaphore, the highest priority process waiting the longest is unblocked and made runnable. The address sem may reside anywhere in the calling processes address space, but the process must have read and write access to sem. sem_post will fail if the following is true: [EINVAL] The semaphore located at address sem is not a valid posix name...
 sem_print(3c) -- print the state of a POSIX semaphore
    sem_print obtains all the semaphore state of sem and writes it as a formatted string to fd. The string is prefixed with a user specified label. Semaphore types other than shared POSIX unnamed semaphores are not supported by this function. sem_print is an IRIX extension to the POSIX interfaces and is not part of the IEEE 1003.1b Standard. sem_print will fail if one or more of the following are true: [EINVAL] The specified sem...
 sem_unlink(3c) -- deletes a posix named semaphore
    sem_unlink deletes the semaphore, named by the character string at address name, from the file namespace. The named semaphore and its state will persist after the call to sem_unlink, if one or more processes still reference the semaphore. Once the last reference has been dropped, the semaphore ceases to exist [see sem_close(2)]. sem_unlink will fail if one or more of the following are true: [...
 sem_wait(3c) -- acquire a posix named or unnamed semaphore
    sem_wait atomically decrements the value of the semaphore located at address sem. If the semaphore's value is less than zero after the decrement, the calling process blocks on the semaphore. Otherwise, the calling process continues without blocking. A process blocked on a semaphore remains blocked until either another process posts the semaphore via sem_post, or the sem_wait operation is interrupted by a signal. sem_t...
 Tk/send(3) -- Execute a command in a different application
    This command arranges for cmd (and args) to be executed in the application named by app. It returns the result or error from that command execution. App may be the name of any application whose main window is on the display containing the sender's main window; it need not be within the same process. If no arg arguments are present, then the command to be executed is contained entirely within the cmd argument. If one or more args are present, they are concatenated to form the command to be execu...
 send(3n) -- send a message from a socket
    s is a socket created with socket. send, sendto, and sendmsg are used to transmit a message to another socket. send may be used only when the socket is in a connected state, while sendto and sendmsg may be used at any time. The address of the target is given by to with tolen specifying its size. The length of the message is given by len. If the message is too long to pass atomi...
 Tcl/set(3) -- Read and write variables
    Returns the value of variable varName. If value is specified, then set the value of varName to value, creating a new variable if one doesn't already exist, and return its value. If varName contains an open parenthesis and ends with a close parenthesis, then it refers to an array element: the characters before the first open parenthesis are the name of the array, and the characters between the parentheses are the index within the array. Otherwise varName refers to a scalar variable. If no proced...
 Tk/setappname(3) -- Set the name of an application for ``send'' commands
    Tk_Window tkwin (in) Token for window in application. Used only to select a particular application. char *name (in) Name under which to register the application.
 standard/setbell(3) -- sets the duration of the beep of the keyboard bell
    durat expects a value indicating the length of time the keyboad bell will sound. 0 no beep. 1 short beep. 2 long beep.
 setbuf(3s) -- assign buffering to a stream logical unit FORTRAN SYNOPSIS #include character *(BUFSIZ+8) buf intege
    The three types of buffering available are unbuffered, fully buffered, and line buffered. When an output stream unit is unbuffered, information appears on the destination file or terminal as soon as written; when it is fully buffered many characters are saved up and written as a block; when it is line buffered characters are saved up until a newline is encountered or input is read from stdin. Fflush(3S) flush(3F) may be used to force the block out early. By default, output to a terminal is line ...
 setcat(3c) -- define default catalog
    The routine setcat defines the default message catalog to be used by subsequent calls to gettxt, lfmt, or pfmt that do not explicitly specify a message catalog. catalog must be limited to 14 characters. These characters must be selected from a set of all characters values, excluding \0 (null) and the ASCII codes for / (slash) and : (colon). setcat assumes that the catalog exists. No checking is done on the...
 Tk/setclass(3) -- set or retrieve a window's class
    Tk_Window tkwin (in) Token for window. char *class (in) New class name for window.
 Tk/setcmodel(3) -- access color model for screen
    Tk_Window tkwin (in) Token for window. Tk_ColorModel model (in) New model to use for window's screen.
 standard/setcursor(3) -- sets the cursor characteristics
    index expects an index into the predefined definition table. color argument ignored. wtm argument ignored.
 standard/setdblights(3) -- sets the lights on the dial and button box
    mask expects 32 packed bits indicating which lights you want turned on.
 standard/setdepth(3) -- obsolete routine
    near expects the screen coordinate of the near clipping plane. far expects the screen coordinate of the far clipping plane.
 seteuid(3c) -- set user and group IDs
    seteuid (setegid) sets the effective user ID (group ID) of the current process. setruid (setrgid) sets the real user ID (group ID) of the current process. These calls are only permitted to the super-user or if the argument is the real or effective ID.
 Tk/setgrid(3) -- control the grid for interactive resizing
    Tk_Window tkwin (in) Token for window. int reqWidth (in) Width in grid units that corresponds to the pixel dimension tkwin has requested via Tk_GeometryRequest. int reqHeight (in) Height in grid units that corresponds to the pixel dimension tkwin has requested via Tk_GeometryRequest. int widthInc (in) Width of one grid unit, in pixels. int heightInc (in) Height of one grid unit, in pixels.
 sethostresorder(3c) -- specify order of host-address resolution services
    The gethostbyname(3N) and gethostbyaddr(3N) routines can access three types of host-address databases: o the hosts file, /etc/hosts, o Sun's network information service (NIS) and o the Berkeley Internet Name Domain service ("BIND name server"). sethostresorder allows a program to specify the order of services to resolve Internet addresses and hostnames from these databases. sethostresorder should be called before the first time gethostbyname and gethostbyaddr are called. The order argument is...
 setjmp(3c) -- non-local gotos
    These functions are useful for dealing with errors and interrupts encountered in a low-level subroutine of a program. All varieties of setjmp save their stack environment in env (whose type, jmp_buf, is defined in the header file) for later use by all varieties of longjmp. If the return is from a direct invocation, all setjmps return the value 0. If the return is from a call to any of the longjmps, all setjmp routines return a nonzero value. All longjmps restore the environment saved ...
 setlabel(3c) -- define the label for pfmt and lfmt.
    The routine setlabel defines the label for messages produced in standard format by subsequent calls to lfmt, vlfmt, pfmt, and vpfmt. label is a character string no more than 25 characters in length. No label is defined before setlabel is called. A null pointer or an empty string passed as argument will reset the definition of the label....
 standard/setlinestyle(3) -- selects a linestyle pattern
    index expects an index into the linestyle table.
 setlocale(3c) -- modify and query a program's locale
    setlocale selects the appropriate piece of the program's locale as specified by the category and locale arguments. The category argument may have the following values: LC_CTYPE, LC_NUMERIC, LC_TIME, LC_COLLATE, LC_MONETARY, LC_MESSAGES and LC_ALL. These names are defined in the l...
 standard/setmap(3) -- selects one of the small color maps provided by multimap mode
    mapnum expects the number of the small color map to be used.
 standard/setmonitor(3) -- sets the monitor type
    mtype expects a symbolic constant that identifies the video format to be provided. There are several constants defined for this parameter: HZ30 selects a 30Hz interlaced video format. HZ30_SG selects a 30 Hz interlaced with sync on green video format. HZ50 selects a 50 Hz noninterlaced video format. HZ60 selects a 60 Hz noninterlaced video format. HZ70 selects a 70 Hz noninterlaced video format. HZ72 selects a 72 Hz noninterlaced video format. HZ76 selects a 76 Hz noninterlaced video format. IRI...
 standard/setnurbsproperty(3) -- sets a property for the display of trimmed NURBS surfaces
    property expects the name of the property to be set. value expects the value to which the named property will be set.
 standard/setpattern(3) -- selects a pattern for filling polygons and rectangles
    index expects the index into the table of defined patterns.
 standard/setpup(3) -- sets the display characteristics of a given pop up menu entry
    pup expects the menu identifier of the menu whose entries you want to change. The menu identifier is the returned function value of the menu creation call to either newpup or defpup. entry expects the position of the entry in the menu, indexed from 1. mode expects a symbolic constant that indicates the display characteristics you want to apply to the chosen entry. You can specify more than one at a time by adding or logically or-ing these values together. For this parameter there are four define...
 Tcl/setreclmt(3) -- set maximum allowable nesting depth in interpreter
    Tcl_Interp *interp (in) Interpreter whose recursion limit is to be set. Must be greater than zero. int depth (in) New limit for nested calls to Tcl_Eval for interp.
 Tcl/setresult(3) -- manipulate Tcl result string
    Tcl_Interp *interp (out) Interpreter whose result is to be modified. char *string (in) String value to become result for interp or to be appended to existing result. Tcl_FreeProc *freeProc (in) Address of procedure to call to release storage at string, or TCL_STATIC, TCL_DYNAMIC, or TCL_VOLATILE.
 standard/setshade(3) -- obsolete routine
    none
 standard/setvaluator(3) -- assigns an initial value and a range to a valuator
    v expects the device number for the valuator being set. init expects the initial value to be assigned to the valuator. vmin expects the minimum value that the device can assume. vmax expects the maximum value that the device can assume.
 Tcl/setvar(3) -- manipulate Tcl variables
    Tcl_Interp *interp (in) Interpreter containing variable. char *varName (in) Name of variable. May refer to a scalar variable or an element of an array variable. If the name | references an element of an array, | then it must be in writable memory: | Tcl will make temporary modifications | to it while looking up the name. char *newValue (in) New value for variable. int flags (in) OR-ed combination of bits providing additional information for operation. See below for valid values. char *name1 (in)...
 standard/setvideo(3) -- set and get video registers
    reg expects the name of the register to access. value expects the value which is to be placed into reg. FUNCTION RETURN VALUE The returned value of getvideo is the value read from register reg, or -1. -1 indicates that reg is not a valid register or that you queried a video register on a system without that particular board installed.
 Tk/setvisual(3) -- change visual characteristics of window
    Tk_Window tkwin (in) Token for window. Visual *visual (in) New visual type to use for tkwin. int depth (in) Number of bits per pixel desired for tkwin. Colormap colormap (in) New colormap for tkwin, which must be compatible with visual and depth.
 f90/set_exponent(3) -- Sets exponent part of a number
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/set_ieee_exception(3) -- Sets floating-point exception indicator
    UNICOS/mk and IRIX systems CRAY T90 systems that support IEEE floating-point arithmetic
 f90/set_ieee_exceptions(3) -- Restores the caller's floating-point status prior to exiting a procedure
    UNICOS/mk and IRIX systems CRAY T90 systems that support IEEE floating-point arithmetic
 f90/set_ieee_interrupts(3) -- Restores floating-point interrupt status before exiting a procedure
    UNICOS/mk and IRIX systems CRAY T90 systems that support IEEE floating-point arithmetic
 f90/set_ieee_rounding_mode(3) -- state and restores the floating-point rounding mode before exiting a procedure
    UNICOS/mk and IRIX systems CRAY T90 systems that support IEEE arithmetic
 f90/set_ieee_status(3) -- Restores floating-point status
    UNICOS/mk and IRIX systems CRAY T90 systems that support IEEE floating-point arithmetic
 complib/sgbbrd(3) -- reduce a real general m-by-n band matrix A to upper bidiagonal form B by an orthogonal transformation
    SGBBRD reduces a real general m-by-n band matrix A to upper bidiagonal form B by an orthogonal transformation: Q' * A * P = B. The routine computes B, and optionally forms Q or P', or computes Q'*C for a given matrix C.
 complib/SGBCO(3) -- SBGCO factors a real band matrix by Gaussian elimination and estimates the condition of the matrix. If RCOND i
    On Entry ABD REAL(LDA, N) contains the matrix in band storage. The columns of the matrix are stored in the columns of ABD and the diagonals of the matrix are stored in rows ML+1 through 2*ML+MU+1 of ABD . See the comments below for details. LDA INTEGER the leading dimension of the array ABD . LDA must be .GE. 2*ML + MU + 1 . N INTEGER the order of the original matrix. ML INTEGER number of diagonals below the main diagonal. 0 .LE. ML .LT. N . MU INTEGER number of diagonals above the main diagonal...
 complib/sgbcon(3) -- general band matrix A, in either the 1-norm or the infinity-norm,
    SGBCON estimates the reciprocal of the condition number of a real general band matrix A, in either the 1-norm or the infinity-norm, using the LU factorization computed by SGBTRF. An estimate is obtained for norm(inv(A)), and the reciprocal of the condition number is computed as RCOND = 1 / ( norm(A) * norm(inv(A)) ).
 complib/SGBDI(3) -- SGBDI computes the determinant of a band matrix using the factors computed by SBGCO or SGBFA. If the inverse i
    On Entry ABD REAL(LDA, N) the output from SBGCO or SGBFA. LDA INTEGER the leading dimension of the array ABD . N INTEGER the order of the original matrix. ML INTEGER number of diagonals below the main diagonal. MU INTEGER number of diagonals above the main diagonal. IPVT INTEGER(N) the pivot vector from SBGCO or SGBFA. On Return DET REAL(2) determinant of original matrix. Determinant = DET(1) * 10.0**DET(2) with 1.0 .LE. ABS(DET(1)) .LT. 10.0 or DET(1) = 0.0 . LINPACK. This version dated 08/14/7...
 complib/sgbequ(3) -- compute row and column scalings intended to equilibrate an Mby-N band matrix A and reduce its condition number
    SGBEQU computes row and column scalings intended to equilibrate an M-by-N band matrix A and reduce its condition number. R returns the row scale factors and C the column scale factors, chosen to try to make the largest element in each row and column of the matrix B with elements B(i,j)=R(i)*A(i,j)*C(j) have absolute value 1. R(i) and C(j) are restricted to be between SMLNUM = smallest safe number and BIGNUM = largest safe number. Use of these scaling factors is not guaranteed to reduce the condi...
 complib/SGBFA(3) -- SGBFA factors a real band matrix by elimination. SGBFA is usually called by SBGCO, but it can be called direct
    On Entry ABD REAL(LDA, N) contains the matrix in band storage. The columns of the matrix are stored in the columns of ABD and the diagonals of the matrix are stored in rows ML+1 through 2*ML+MU+1 of ABD . See the comments below for details. LDA INTEGER the leading dimension of the array ABD . LDA must be .GE. 2*ML + MU + 1 . N INTEGER the order of the original matrix. ML INTEGER number of diagonals below the main diagonal. 0 .LE. ML .LT. N . MU INTEGER number of diagonals above the main diagonal...
 complib/sgbrfs(3) -- improve the computed solution to a system of linear equations when the coefficient matrix is banded, and provi
    SGBRFS improves the computed solution to a system of linear equations when the coefficient matrix is banded, and provides error bounds and backward error estimates for the solution.
 complib/SGBSL(3) -- SGBSL solves the real band system A * X = B or TRANS(A) * X = B using the factors computed by SBGCO or SGBFA.
    On Entry ABD REAL(LDA, N) the output from SBGCO or SGBFA. LDA INTEGER the leading dimension of the array ABD . N INTEGER the order of the original matrix. ML INTEGER number of diagonals below the main diagonal. MU INTEGER number of diagonals above the main diagonal. IPVT INTEGER(N) the pivot vector from SBGCO or SGBFA. B REAL(N) the right hand side vector. JOB INTEGER = 0 to solve A*X = B , = nonzero to solve TRANS(A)*X = B , where TRANS(A) is the transpose. On Return B the solution vector X . E...
 complib/sgbsv(3) -- compute the solution to a real system of linear equations A * X = B, where A is a band matrix of order N with
    SGBSV computes the solution to a real system of linear equations A * X = B, where A is a band matrix of order N with KL subdiagonals and KU superdiagonals, and X and B are N-by-NRHS matrices. The LU decomposition with partial pivoting and row interchanges is used to factor A as A = L * U, where L is a product of permutation and unit lower triangular matrices with KL subdiagonals, and U is upper triangular with KL+KU superdiagonals. The factored form of A is then used to solve the system of equat...
 complib/sgbsvx(3) -- system of linear equations A * X = B, A**T * X = B, or A**H * X = B,
    SGBSVX uses the LU factorization to compute the solution to a real system of linear equations A * X = B, A**T * X = B, or A**H * X = B, where A is a band matrix of order N with KL subdiagonals and KU superdiagonals, and X and B are N-by-NRHS matrices. Error bounds on the solution and a condition estimate are also provided.
 complib/sgbtf2(3) -- compute an LU factorization of a real m-by-n band matrix A using partial pivoting with row interchanges
    SGBTF2 computes an LU factorization of a real m-by-n band matrix A using partial pivoting with row interchanges. This is the unblocked version of the algorithm, calling Level 2 BLAS.
 complib/sgbtrf(3) -- compute an LU factorization of a real m-by-n band matrix A using partial pivoting with row interchanges
    SGBTRF computes an LU factorization of a real m-by-n band matrix A using partial pivoting with row interchanges. This is the blocked version of the algorithm, calling Level 3 BLAS.
 complib/sgbtrs(3) -- solve a system of linear equations A * X = B or A' * X = B with a general band matrix A using the LU factoriza
    SGBTRS solves a system of linear equations A * X = B or A' * X = B with a general band matrix A using the LU factorization computed by SGBTRF.
 complib/sgebak(3) -- form the right or left eigenvectors of a real general matrix by backward transformation on the computed eigenv
    SGEBAK forms the right or left eigenvectors of a real general matrix by backward transformation on the computed eigenvectors of the balanced matrix output by SGEBAL.
 complib/sgebal(3) -- balance a general real matrix A
    SGEBAL balances a general real matrix A. This involves, first, permuting A by a similarity transformation to isolate eigenvalues in the first 1 to ILO-1 and last IHI+1 to N elements on the diagonal; and second, applying a diagonal similarity transformation to rows and columns ILO to IHI to make the rows and columns as close in norm as possible. Both steps are optional. Balancing may reduce the 1-norm of the matrix, and improve the accuracy of the computed eigenvalues and/or eigenvectors....
 complib/sgebd2(3) -- reduce a real general m by n matrix A to upper or lower bidiagonal form B by an orthogonal transformation
    SGEBD2 reduces a real general m by n matrix A to upper or lower bidiagonal form B by an orthogonal transformation: Q' * A * P = B. If m >= n, B is upper bidiagonal; if m < n, B is lower bidiagonal.
 complib/sgebrd(3) -- reduce a general real M-by-N matrix A to upper or lower bidiagonal form B by an orthogonal transformation
    SGEBRD reduces a general real M-by-N matrix A to upper or lower bidiagonal form B by an orthogonal transformation: Q**T * A * P = B. If m >= n, B is upper bidiagonal; if m < n, B is lower bidiagonal.
 complib/SGECO(3) -- SGECO factors a real matrix by Gaussian elimination and estimates the condition of the matrix. If RCOND is not
    On Entry A REAL(LDA, N) the matrix to be factored. LDA INTEGER the leading dimension of the array A . N INTEGER the order of the matrix A . On Return A an upper triangular matrix and the multipliers which were used to obtain it. The factorization can be written A = L*U , where L is a product of permutation and unit lower triangular matrices and U is upper triangular. IPVT INTEGER(N) an integer vector of pivot indices. RCOND REAL an estimate of the reciprocal condition of A . For the system A*X =...
 complib/sgecon(3) -- real matrix A, in either the 1-norm or the infinity-norm, using the LU factorization computed by SGETRF
    SGECON estimates the reciprocal of the condition number of a general real matrix A, in either the 1-norm or the infinity-norm, using the LU factorization computed by SGETRF. An estimate is obtained for norm(inv(A)), and the reciprocal of the condition number is computed as RCOND = 1 / ( norm(A) * norm(inv(A)) ).
 complib/SGEDI(3) -- SGEDI computes the determinant and inverse of a matrix using the factors computed by SGECO or SGEFA.
    On Entry A REAL(LDA, N) the output from SGECO or SGEFA. LDA INTEGER the leading dimension of the array A . N INTEGER the order of the matrix A . IPVT INTEGER(N) the pivot vector from SGECO or SGEFA. WORK REAL(N) work vector. Contents destroyed. JOB INTEGER = 11 both determinant and inverse. = 01 inverse only. = 10 determinant only. On Return A inverse of original matrix if requested. Otherwise unchanged. DET REAL(2) determinant of original matrix if requested. Otherwise not referenced. Determina...
 complib/sgeequ(3) -- compute row and column scalings intended to equilibrate an Mby-N matrix A and reduce its condition number
    SGEEQU computes row and column scalings intended to equilibrate an M-by-N matrix A and reduce its condition number. R returns the row scale factors and C the column scale factors, chosen to try to make the largest element in each row and column of the matrix B with elements B(i,j)=R(i)*A(i,j)*C(j) have absolute value 1. R(i) and C(j) are restricted to be between SMLNUM = smallest safe number and BIGNUM = largest safe number. Use of these scaling factors is not guaranteed to reduce the condition ...
 complib/sgees(3) -- compute for an N-by-N real nonsymmetric matrix A, the eigenvalues, the real Schur form T, and, optionally, the
    SGEES computes for an N-by-N real nonsymmetric matrix A, the eigenvalues, the real Schur form T, and, optionally, the matrix of Schur vectors Z. This gives the Schur factorization A = Z*T*(Z**T). Optionally, it also orders the eigenvalues on the diagonal of the real Schur form so that selected eigenvalues are at the top left. The leading columns of Z then form an orthonormal basis for the invariant subspace corresponding to the selected eigenvalues. A matrix is in real Schur form if it is upper ...
 complib/sgeesx(3) -- compute for an N-by-N real nonsymmetric matrix A, the eigenvalues, the real Schur form T, and, optionally, the
    SGEESX computes for an N-by-N real nonsymmetric matrix A, the eigenvalues, the real Schur form T, and, optionally, the matrix of Schur vectors Z. This gives the Schur factorization A = Z*T*(Z**T). Optionally, it also orders the eigenvalues on the diagonal of the real Schur form so that selected eigenvalues are at the top left; computes a reciprocal condition number for the average of the selected eigenvalues (RCONDE); and computes a reciprocal condition number for the right invariant subspace co...
 complib/sgeev(3) -- compute for an N-by-N real nonsymmetric matrix A, the eigenvalues and, optionally, the left and/or right eigen
    SGEEV computes for an N-by-N real nonsymmetric matrix A, the eigenvalues and, optionally, the left and/or right eigenvectors. The right eigenvector v(j) of A satisfies A * v(j) = lambda(j) * v(j) where lambda(j) is its eigenvalue. The left eigenvector u(j) of A satisfies u(j)**H * A = lambda(j) * u(j)**H where u(j)**H denotes the conjugate transpose of u(j). The computed eigenvectors are normalized to have Euclidean norm equal to 1 and largest component real....
 complib/sgeevx(3) -- compute for an N-by-N real nonsymmetric matrix A, the eigenvalues and, optionally, the left and/or right eigen
    SGEEVX computes for an N-by-N real nonsymmetric matrix A, the eigenvalues and, optionally, the left and/or right eigenvectors. Optionally also, it computes a balancing transformation to improve the conditioning of the eigenvalues and eigenvectors (ILO, IHI, SCALE, and ABNRM), reciprocal condition numbers for the eigenvalues (RCONDE), and reciprocal condition numbers for the right eigenvectors (RCONDV). The right eigenvector v(j) of A satisfies A * v(j) = lambda(j) * v(j) where lambda(j) is its e...
 complib/SGEFA(3) -- SGEFA factors a real matrix by Gaussian elimination. SGEFA is usually called by SGECO, but it can be called di
    On Entry A REAL(LDA, N) the matrix to be factored. LDA INTEGER the leading dimension of the array A . N INTEGER the order of the matrix A . On Return A an upper triangular matrix and the multipliers which were used to obtain it. The factorization can be written A = L*U , where L is a product of permutation and unit lower triangular matrices and U is upper triangular. IPVT INTEGER(N) an integer vector of pivot indices. INFO INTEGER = 0 normal value. = K if U(K,K) .EQ. 0.0 . This is not an error c...
 complib/sgegs(3) -- compute for a pair of N-by-N real nonsymmetric matrices A, B
    SGEGS computes for a pair of N-by-N real nonsymmetric matrices A, B: the generalized eigenvalues (alphar +/- alphai*i, beta), the real Schur form (A, B), and optionally left and/or right Schur vectors (VSL and VSR). (If only the generalized eigenvalues are needed, use the driver SGEGV instead.) A generalized eigenvalue for a pair of matrices (A,B) is, roughly speaking, a scalar w or a ratio alpha/beta = w, such that A - w*B is singular. It is usually represented as the pair (alpha,beta), as ther...
 complib/sgegv(3) -- the generalized eigenvalues (alphar +/- alphai*i, beta), and optionally, the left and/or right generalized eig
    SGEGV computes for a pair of n-by-n real nonsymmetric matrices A and B, the generalized eigenvalues (alphar +/- alphai*i, beta), and optionally, the left and/or right generalized eigenvectors (VL and VR). A generalized eigenvalue for a pair of matrices (A,B) is, roughly speaking, a scalar w or a ratio alpha/beta = w, such that A - w*B is singular. It is usually represented as the pair (alpha,beta), as there is a reasonable interpretation for beta=0, and even for both being zero. A good beginning...
 complib/sgehd2(3) -- reduce a real general matrix A to upper Hessenberg form H by an orthogonal similarity transformation
    SGEHD2 reduces a real general matrix A to upper Hessenberg form H by an orthogonal similarity transformation: Q' * A * Q = H .
 complib/sgehrd(3) -- reduce a real general matrix A to upper Hessenberg form H by an orthogonal similarity transformation
    SGEHRD reduces a real general matrix A to upper Hessenberg form H by an orthogonal similarity transformation: Q' * A * Q = H .
 complib/sgelq2(3) -- compute an LQ factorization of a real m by n matrix A
    SGELQ2 computes an LQ factorization of a real m by n matrix A: A = L * Q.
 complib/sgelqf(3) -- compute an LQ factorization of a real M-by-N matrix A
    SGELQF computes an LQ factorization of a real M-by-N matrix A: A = L * Q.
 complib/sgels(3) -- involving an M-by-N matrix A, or its transpose, using a QR or LQ factorization of A
    SGELS solves overdetermined or underdetermined real linear systems involving an M-by-N matrix A, or its transpose, using a QR or LQ factorization of A. It is assumed that A has full rank. The following options are provided: 1. If TRANS = 'N' and m >= n: find the least squares solution of an overdetermined system, i.e., solve the least squares problem minimize || B - A*X ||. 2. If TRANS = 'N' and m < n: find the minimum norm solution of an underdetermined system A * X = B. 3. If TRANS = 'T'...
 complib/sgelss(3) -- compute the minimum norm solution to a real linear least squares problem
    SGELSS computes the minimum norm solution to a real linear least squares problem: Minimize 2-norm(| b - A*x |). using the singular value decomposition (SVD) of A. A is an M-by-N matrix which may be rank-deficient. Several right hand side vectors b and solution vectors x can be handled in a single call; they are stored as the columns of the M-by-NRHS right hand side matrix B and the N-by-NRHS solution matrix X. The effective rank of A is determined by treating as zero those singular values which ...
 complib/sgelsx(3) -- compute the minimum-norm solution to a real linear least squares problem
    SGELSX computes the minimum-norm solution to a real linear least squares problem: minimize || A * X - B || using a complete orthogonal factorization of A. A is an M-by-N matrix which may be rank-deficient. Several right hand side vectors b and solution vectors x can be handled in a single call; they are stored as the columns of the M-by-NRHS right hand side matrix B and the N-by-NRHS solution matrix X. The routine first computes a QR factorization with column pivoting: A * P = Q * [ R11 R12 ] [ ...
 complib/sgeql2(3) -- compute a QL factorization of a real m by n matrix A
    SGEQL2 computes a QL factorization of a real m by n matrix A: A = Q * L.
 complib/sgeqlf(3) -- compute a QL factorization of a real M-by-N matrix A
    SGEQLF computes a QL factorization of a real M-by-N matrix A: A = Q * L.
 complib/sgeqpf(3) -- compute a QR factorization with column pivoting of a real M-by-N matrix A
    SGEQPF computes a QR factorization with column pivoting of a real M-by-N matrix A: A*P = Q*R.
 complib/sgeqr2(3) -- compute a QR factorization of a real m by n matrix A
    SGEQR2 computes a QR factorization of a real m by n matrix A: A = Q * R.
 complib/sgeqrf(3) -- compute a QR factorization of a real M-by-N matrix A
    SGEQRF computes a QR factorization of a real M-by-N matrix A: A = Q * R.
 complib/sgerfs(3) -- improve the computed solution to a system of linear equations and provides error bounds and backward error est
    SGERFS improves the computed solution to a system of linear equations and provides error bounds and backward error estimates for the solution.
 complib/sgerq2(3) -- compute an RQ factorization of a real m by n matrix A
    SGERQ2 computes an RQ factorization of a real m by n matrix A: A = R * Q.
 complib/sgerqf(3) -- compute an RQ factorization of a real M-by-N matrix A
    SGERQF computes an RQ factorization of a real M-by-N matrix A: A = R * Q.
 complib/SGESL(3) -- SGESL solves the real system A * X = B or TRANS(A) * X = B using the factors computed by SGECO or SGEFA.
    On Entry A REAL(LDA, N) the output from SGECO or SGEFA. LDA INTEGER the leading dimension of the array A . N INTEGER the order of the matrix A . IPVT INTEGER(N) the pivot vector from SGECO or SGEFA. B REAL(N) the right hand side vector. JOB INTEGER = 0 to solve A*X = B , = nonzero to solve TRANS(A)*X = B where TRANS(A) is the transpose. On Return B the solution vector X . Error Condition A division by zero will occur if the input factor contains a zero on the diagonal. Technically, this indicate...
 complib/sgesv(3) -- = B,
    SGESV computes the solution to a real system of linear equations A * X = B, where A is an N-by-N matrix and X and B are N-by-NRHS matrices. The LU decomposition with partial pivoting and row interchanges is used to factor A as A = P * L * U, where P is a permutation matrix, L is unit lower triangular, and U is upper triangular. The factored form of A is then used to solve the system of equations A * X = B....
 complib/sgesvd(3) -- compute the singular value decomposition (SVD) of a real M-by-N matrix A, optionally computing the left and/or
    SGESVD computes the singular value decomposition (SVD) of a real M-by-N matrix A, optionally computing the left and/or right singular vectors. The SVD is written A = U * SIGMA * transpose(V) where SIGMA is an M-by-N matrix which is zero except for its min(m,n) diagonal elements, U is an M-by-M orthogonal matrix, and V is an N-by-N orthogonal matrix. The diagonal elements of SIGMA are the singular values of A; they are real and non-negative, and are returned in descending order. The first min(m,n...
 complib/sgesvx(3) -- system of linear equations A * X = B,
    SGESVX uses the LU factorization to compute the solution to a real system of linear equations A * X = B, where A is an N-by-N matrix and X and B are N-by-NRHS matrices. Error bounds on the solution and a condition estimate are also provided.
 complib/sgetf2(3) -- compute an LU factorization of a general m-by-n matrix A using partial pivoting with row interchanges
    SGETF2 computes an LU factorization of a general m-by-n matrix A using partial pivoting with row interchanges. The factorization has the form A = P * L * U where P is a permutation matrix, L is lower triangular with unit diagonal elements (lower trapezoidal if m > n), and U is upper triangular (upper trapezoidal if m < n). This is the right-looking Level 2 BLAS version of the algorithm.
 complib/sgetrf(3) -- compute an LU factorization of a general M-by-N matrix A using partial pivoting with row interchanges
    SGETRF computes an LU factorization of a general M-by-N matrix A using partial pivoting with row interchanges. The factorization has the form A = P * L * U where P is a permutation matrix, L is lower triangular with unit diagonal elements (lower trapezoidal if m > n), and U is upper triangular (upper trapezoidal if m < n). This is the right-looking Level 3 BLAS version of the algorithm.
 complib/sgetri(3) -- compute the inverse of a matrix using the LU factorization computed by SGETRF
    SGETRI computes the inverse of a matrix using the LU factorization computed by SGETRF. This method inverts U and then computes inv(A) by solving the system inv(A)*L = inv(U) for inv(A).
 complib/sgetrs(3) -- a general N-by-N matrix A using the LU factorization computed by SGETRF
    SGETRS solves a system of linear equations A * X = B or A' * X = B with a general N-by-N matrix A using the LU factorization computed by SGETRF.
 complib/sggbak(3) -- form the right or left eigenvectors of a real generalized eigenvalue problem A*x = lambda*B*x, by backward tra
    SGGBAK forms the right or left eigenvectors of a real generalized eigenvalue problem A*x = lambda*B*x, by backward transformation on the computed eigenvectors of the balanced pair of matrices output by SGGBAL.
 complib/sggbal(3) -- balance a pair of general real matrices (A,B)
    SGGBAL balances a pair of general real matrices (A,B). This involves, first, permuting A and B by similarity transformations to isolate eigenvalues in the first 1 to ILO$-$1 and last IHI+1 to N elements on the diagonal; and second, applying a diagonal similarity transformation to rows and columns ILO to IHI to make the rows and columns as close in norm as possible. Both steps are optional. Balancing may reduce the 1-norm of the matrices, and improve the accuracy of the computed eigenvalues and/o...
 complib/sggglm(3) -- solve a general Gauss-Markov linear model (GLM) problem
    SGGGLM solves a general Gauss-Markov linear model (GLM) problem: minimize || y ||_2 subject to d = A*x + B*y x where A is an N-by-M matrix, B is an N-by-P matrix, and d is a given Nvector. It is assumed that M <= N <= M+P, and rank(A) = M and rank( A B ) = N. Under these assumptions, the constrained equation is always consistent, and there is a unique solution x and a minimal 2-norm solution y, which is obtained using a generalized QR factorization of A and B. In particular, if matrix B is squar...
 complib/sgghrd(3) -- reduce a pair of real matrices (A,B) to generalized upper Hessenberg form using orthogonal transformations, wh
    SGGHRD reduces a pair of real matrices (A,B) to generalized upper Hessenberg form using orthogonal transformations, where A is a general matrix and B is upper triangular: Q' * A * Z = H and Q' * B * Z = T, where H is upper Hessenberg, T is upper triangular, and Q and Z are orthogonal, and ' means transpose. The orthogonal matrices Q and Z are determined as products of Givens rotations. They may either be formed explicitly, or they may be postmultiplied into input matrices Q1 and Z1, so that Q...
 complib/sgglse(3) -- solve the linear equality-constrained least squares (LSE) problem
    SGGLSE solves the linear equality-constrained least squares (LSE) problem: minimize || c - A*x ||_2 subject to B*x = d where A is an M-by-N matrix, B is a P-by-N matrix, c is a given M-vector, and d is a given P-vector. It is assumed that P <= N <= M+P, and rank(B) = P and rank( ( A ) ) = N. ( ( B ) ) These conditions ensure that the LSE problem has a unique solution, which is obtained using a GRQ factorization of the matrices B and A....
 complib/sggqrf(3) -- an N-by-P matrix B
    SGGQRF computes a generalized QR factorization of an N-by-M matrix A and an N-by-P matrix B: A = Q*R, B = Q*T*Z, where Q is an N-by-N orthogonal matrix, Z is a P-by-P orthogonal matrix, and R and T assume one of the forms: if N >= M, R = ( R11 ) M , or if N < M, R = ( R11 R12 ) N, ( 0 ) N-M N M-N M where R11 is upper triangular, and if N <= P, T = ( 0 T12 ) N, or if N > P, T = ( T11 ) N-P, P-N N ( T21 ) P P where T12 or T21 is upper triangular. In particular, if B is square and nonsingular, the ...
 complib/sggrqf(3) -- a P-by-N matrix B
    SGGRQF computes a generalized RQ factorization of an M-by-N matrix A and a P-by-N matrix B: A = R*Q, B = Z*T*Q, where Q is an N-by-N orthogonal matrix, Z is a P-by-P orthogonal matrix, and R and T assume one of the forms: if M <= N, R = ( 0 R12 ) M, or if M > N, R = ( R11 ) M-N, N-M M ( R21 ) N N where R12 or R21 is upper triangular, and if P >= N, T = ( T11 ) N , or if P < N, T = ( T11 T12 ) P, ( 0 ) P-N P N-P N where T11 is upper triangular. In particular, if B is square and nonsingular, the G...
 complib/sggsvd(3) -- an M-by-N real matrix A and P-by-N real matrix B
    SGGSVD computes the generalized singular value decomposition (GSVD) of an M-by-N real matrix A and P-by-N real matrix B: U'*A*Q = D1*( 0 R ), V'*B*Q = D2*( 0 R ) where U, V and Q are orthogonal matrices, and Z' is the transpose of Z. Let K+L = the effective numerical rank of the matrix (A',B')', then R is a K+L-by-K+L nonsingular upper triangular matrix, D1 and D2 are M-by(K+L) and P-by-(K+L) "diagonal" matrices and of the following structures, respectively: If M-K-L >= 0, K L D1 = K ( I...
 complib/sggsvp(3) -- U'*A*Q = K ( 0 A12 A13 ) if M-K-L >= 0
    SGGSVP computes orthogonal matrices U, V and Q such that L ( 0 0 A23 ) M-K-L ( 0 0 0 ) N-K-L K L = K ( 0 A12 A13 ) if M-K-L < 0; M-K ( 0 0 A23 ) N-K-L K L V'*B*Q = L ( 0 0 B13 ) P-L ( 0 0 0 ) where the K-by-K matrix A12 and L-by-L matrix B13 are nonsingular upper triangular; A23 is L-by-L upper triangular if M-K-L >= 0, otherwise A23 is (M-K)-by-L upper trapezoidal. K+L = the effective numerical rank of the (M+P)-by-N matrix (A',B')'. Z' denotes the transpose of Z. This decomposition is the...
 libdl/sgidladd(3) -- open a shared object and add its variables to the name space.
    sgidladd is a facility for dynamically loading shared objects. Unlike dlopen(3)(without RTLD_GLOBAL), the shared object loaded (and all it's dependent shared objects), are added to the list of shared objects just as if they had been specified at the time the program had been linked, or as if the _RLD_LIST (see rld(1)) envariable had been used. That is to say, all the names in the shared object become available to satisfy references in shared objects during lazy text resolution (the DSOs are glo...
 libdl/sgidlopen_version(3) -- open a shared object with the specified interface version.
    sgidlopen_version is a facility for dynamically loading shared objects similar to dlopen (3). However, unlike dlopen, the interface version of the shared object is specified so that the dynamic linker tries to map in the shared object with matching interface version. Please See ld(1) and dso(5) "How are multiple versions of DSOs supported?" for information on the version string. flags must be either LL_NONE or LL_EXACT_MATCH. LL_EXACT_MATCH means that only the exact version mentioned in versio...
 libdl/sgigetdsoversion(3) -- gets the interface version of a shared object
    sgigetdsoversion returns a pointer to the the interface version string of the shared object with the -soname the same as the argument pathname. If there is no shared object with that soname sgigetdsoversion returns 0 (NULL). The returned string pointer is valid until the shared object named by pathname is dlclose(3)d. The string space pointed to by the return value must not be free(3)ed. Link with -lc to use this function. Version strings are described in detail in dso(5) in the answer to the qu...
 complib/sgimath(3) -- Scientific and Mathematical Library
    Many of the routines in complib.sgimath are available from: netlib@research.att.com. mail netlib@research.att.com send index The Internet address "netlib@research.att.com" refers to a gateway machine, 192.20.225.2, at AT&T Bell Labs in Murray Hill, New Jersey. This address should be understood on all the major networks. For systems having only uucp connections, use uunet!research!netlib. In this case, someone will be paying for long distance 1200bps phone calls, so keep Page 1 COMPLIB.SGIMATH(...
 sgi_getcapabilitybyname(3c) -- get the default and allowed capability sets for a named user
    Return the default and allowed capability sets for the user name. The routine uses the NIS map capability.byname if NIS is active, otherwise it uses the local capabilities file, /etc/capability.
 sgi_getclearancebyname(3c) -- get the default and allowed mac label range for a named user
    Return the default and allowed mac label ranges for the user name. The routine uses the NIS map clearance.byname if NIS is active, otherwise it uses the local clearance file, /etc/clearance.
 complib/sgtcon(3) -- estimate the reciprocal of the condition number of a real tridiagonal matrix A using the LU factorization as c
    SGTCON estimates the reciprocal of the condition number of a real tridiagonal matrix A using the LU factorization as computed by SGTTRF. An estimate is obtained for norm(inv(A)), and the reciprocal of the condition number is computed as RCOND = 1 / (ANORM * norm(inv(A))).
 complib/sgtrfs(3) -- improve the computed solution to a system of linear equations when the coefficient matrix is tridiagonal, and
    SGTRFS improves the computed solution to a system of linear equations when the coefficient matrix is tridiagonal, and provides error bounds and backward error estimates for the solution.
 complib/SGTSL(3) -- SGTSL given a general tridiagonal matrix and a right hand side will find the solution.
    On Entry N INTEGER is the order of the tridiagonal matrix. C REAL(N) is the subdiagonal of the tridiagonal matrix. C(2) through C(N) should contain the subdiagonal. On output, C is destroyed. D REAL(N) is the diagonal of the tridiagonal matrix. On output, D is destroyed. E REAL(N) is the superdiagonal of the tridiagonal matrix. E(1) through E(N-1) should contain the superdiagonal. On output, E is destroyed. B REAL(N) is the right hand side vector. On Return B is the solution vector. INFO INTEGER...
 complib/sgtsv(3) -- solve the equation A*X = B,
    SGTSV solves the equation where A is an N-by-N tridiagonal matrix, by Gaussian elimination with partial pivoting. Note that the equation A'*X = B may be solved by interchanging the order of the arguments DU and DL.
 complib/sgtsvx(3) -- system of linear equations A * X = B or A**T * X = B,
    SGTSVX uses the LU factorization to compute the solution to a real system of linear equations A * X = B or A**T * X = B, where A is a tridiagonal matrix of order N and X and B are N-by-NRHS matrices. Error bounds on the solution and a condition estimate are also provided.
 complib/sgttrf(3) -- compute an LU factorization of a real tridiagonal matrix A using elimination with partial pivoting and row int
    SGTTRF computes an LU factorization of a real tridiagonal matrix A using elimination with partial pivoting and row interchanges. The factorization has the form A = L * U where L is a product of permutation and unit lower bidiagonal matrices and U is upper triangular with nonzeros in only the main diagonal and first two superdiagonals.
 complib/sgttrs(3) -- solve one of the systems of equations A*X = B or A'*X = B,
    SGTTRS solves one of the systems of equations A*X = B or A'*X = B, with a tridiagonal matrix A using the LU factorization computed by SGTTRF.
 standard/shademodel(3) -- selects the shading model
    model expects one of two possible flags: FLAT, tells the system to assign the same color to each pixel of lines and polygons during scan conversion. GOURAUD, tells the system to interpolate color from vertex to vertex when scan converting lines, and to interpolate color throughout the area of filled polygons when they are scan converted. This is the default shading model.
 standard/shaderange(3) -- obsolete routine
    lowin expects the low-intensity color map index. highin expects the high-intensity color map index. z1 expects the low z value to be mapped to. z2 expects the high z value to be mapped to.
 f90/shape(3) -- Returns the shape of an array or a scalar
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 perl5/Shell(3) -- run shell commands transparently within perl
    Date: Thu, 22 Sep 94 16:18:16 -0700 Message-Id: <9409222318.AA17072@scalpel.netlabs.com> To: perl5-porters@isu.edu From: Larry Wall Subject: a new module I just wrote Here's one that'll whack your mind a little out. #!/usr/bin/perl use Shell; $foo = echo("howdy", "", "world"); print $foo; $passwd = cat("
 complib/shgeqz(3) -- w(i) B ) = 0 In addition, the pair A,B may be reduced to generalized Schur form
    SHGEQZ implements a single-/double-shift version of the QZ method for finding the generalized eigenvalues B is upper triangular, and A is block upper triangular, where the diagonal blocks are either 1-by-1 or 2-by-2, the 2-by-2 blocks having complex generalized eigenvalues (see the description of the argument JOB.) If JOB='S', then the pair (A,B) is simultaneously reduced to Schur form by applying one orthogonal tranformation (usually called Q) on the left and another (usually called Z) on the...
 f90/shift(3) -- Performs a left circular shift
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/shifta(3) -- Performs an arithmetic shift
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/shiftl(3) -- Performs a left shift with zero fill
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/shiftr(3) -- Performs a right shift with zero fill
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 complib/shsein(3) -- use inverse iteration to find specified right and/or left eigenvectors of a real upper Hessenberg matrix H
    SHSEIN uses inverse iteration to find specified right and/or left eigenvectors of a real upper Hessenberg matrix H. The right eigenvector x and the left eigenvector y of the matrix H corresponding to an eigenvalue w are defined by: H * x = w * x, y**h * H = w * y**h where y**h denotes the conjugate transpose of the vector y.
 complib/shseqr(3) -- compute the eigenvalues of a real upper Hessenberg matrix H and, optionally, the matrices T and Z from the Sch
    SHSEQR computes the eigenvalues of a real upper Hessenberg matrix H and, optionally, the matrices T and Z from the Schur decomposition H = Z T Z**T, where T is an upper quasi-triangular matrix (the Schur form), and Z is the orthogonal matrix of Schur vectors. Optionally Z may be postmultiplied into an input orthogonal matrix Q, so that this routine can give the Schur factorization of a matrix A which has been reduced to the Hessenberg form H by the orthogonal matrix Q: A = Q*H*Q**T = (QZ)*T*(QZ)...
 shutdown(3n) -- shut down part of a full-duplex connection
    The shutdown call shuts down all or part of a full-duplex connection on the socket associated with s. If how is 0, then further receives will be disallowed. If how is 1, then further sends will be disallowed. If how is 2, then further sends and receives will be disallowed.
 sigblock(3b) -- block signals from delivery to process (4.3BSD)
    sigblock causes the signals specified in mask to be added to the set of signals currently being blocked from delivery. Signals are blocked if the corresponding bit in mask is a 1 (numbering the bits from 1 to 32); the macro sigmask is provided to construct the mask for a given signum. It is not possible to block SIGKILL, SIGSTOP, or SIGCONT; this restriction is imposed silently by the system.
 standard/sigfpe(3) -- floating-point exception handler package
    The floating-point accelerator may raise floating-point exceptions, signal SIGFPE, due to five conditions: _OVERFL(overflow), _UNDERFL(underflow), _DIVZERO(divide-by-zero), _INEXACT(inexact result), or _INVALID(invalid operand, e.g., infinity). Usually these conditions are masked, and do not cause a floating-point exception. Instead, a default value is substituted for the result of the operation, and the program continues silently. This event may be intercepted by causing an exception to be rais...
 ftn/sign(3) -- FORTRAN transfer-of-sign intrinsic function
    isign returns the magnitude of its first argument with the sign of its second argument. It accepts either integer*2 or integer*4 arguments and the result is the same type. iisign and jisign take integer*2 and integer*4 arguments, respectively. sign, dsign, and qsign are isign's real, double-precision, and real*16 counterparts, respectively. If the value of the first argument of isign, sign, dsign, or qsign is zero, the result is zero. The generic version is sign and will devolve to the appropri...
 signal(3b) -- simplified software signal facilities (4.3BSD)
    signal is a simplified interface to the more general sigvec(3B) facility. A signal is generated by some abnormal event, initiated by a user at a terminal (quit, interrupt, stop), by a program error (bus error, etc.), by request of another program (kill), or when a process is stopped because it wishes to access its control terminal while in the background (see termio(7)). Signals are optionally generated when a process resumes after being stopped, when the status of child processes changes, or wh...
 sigpause(3b) -- atomically release blocked signals and wait for interrupt (4.3BSD)
    sigpause assigns mask to the set of masked signals and then waits for a signal to arrive; upon return the original set of masked signals is restored after executing the handler(s) (if any) installed for the awakening signal(s). mask is usually 0 to indicate that no signals are now to be blocked. The macro sigmask is provided to construct the mask for a given signal number. Sigpause always terminates by being interrupted, returning -1 with the global integer errno set to EINTR. In normal usage, a...
 sigqueue(3) -- queue a signal to a process (POSIX)
    The function sigqueue() causes the signal specified by signo to be sent with the value specified by value to the process specified by pid. If signo is zero (the null signal), error checking is performed, but no signal is actually sent. The null signal can be used to check the validity of pid. The conditions required for a process to have permission to queue a signal to another process are the same as for the kill(2) function. If the signal specified in signo is currently blocked for the receivin...
 sigsetmask(3b) -- set current signal mask (4.3BSD)
    sigsetmask sets the current signal mask (those signals that are blocked from delivery). Signals are blocked if the corresponding bit in mask is a 1 (numbering the bits from 1 to 32); the macro sigmask is provided to construct the mask for a given signum. The system quietly disallows SIGKILL, SIGSTOP, or SIGCONT to be blocked.
 sigsetops(3) -- signal set
    These library calls modify or return information about the disposition of the signal mask pointed to by set. The system defines a set of signals that may be delivered to a process. Signal delivery resembles the occurrence of a hardware interrupt: the signal is blocked from further occurrence, the current process context is saved, and a new one is built. A global signal mask defines the set of signals currently blocked from delivery to a process; it may be changed with a sigprocmask(2) call. The ...
 perl5/sigtrap(3) -- Perl pragma to enable simple signal handling
    The sigtrap pragma is a simple interface to installing signal handlers. You can have it install one of two handlers supplied by sigtrap itself (one which provides a Perl stack trace and one which simply die()s), or alternately you can supply your own handler for it to install. It can be told only to install a handler for signals which are either untrapped or ignored. It has a couple of lists of signals to trap, plus you can supply your own list of signals. The arguments passed to the use stateme...
 sigvec(3b) -- 4.3BSD software signal facilities
    sigvec specifies and reports on the way individual signals are to be handled in the calling process. If vec is non-zero, it alters the way the signal will be treated - default behavior, ignored, or handled via a routine - and the signal mask to be used when delivering the signal if a handler is installed. If ovec is non-zero, the previous handling information for the signal is returned to the user. In this way (a NULL vec and a non-NULL ovec) the user can inquire as to the current handling of a ...
 sigwait(3) -- wait for queued signals (POSIX)
    The sigwait() function selects a pending signal from set and returns it in the storage pointed to by sig. If multiple signals from set are pending, then the one with the lowest numerical value is selected. If no signals in set are pending then the call will block until one becomes pending, The signals defined by set must be blocked at the time of the call to sigwait() in order to avoid conflicts with installed signal handlers. If the signals in set are not blocked then the system will either del...
 f90/sin(3) -- trigonometric functions and their inverses
    The single-precision and long double-precision routines listed above are only available in the standard math library, -lm, and in -lmx. sin, cos and tan return trigonometric functions of radian arguments x for double data types. fsin, fcos and ftan, and their ANSI-named counterparts sinf, cosf and tanf return trigonometric functions of radian Page 1 TRIG(3M) TRIG(3M) arguments x for float data types. sinl, cosl and tanl do the same for long double data types. The asin routines return the arc sin...
 ftn/sin(3) -- trigonometric functions and their inverses
    The single-precision and long double-precision routines listed above are only available in the standard math library, -lm, and in -lmx. sin, cos and tan return trigonometric functions of radian arguments x for double data types. fsin, fcos and ftan, and their ANSI-named counterparts sinf, cosf and tanf return trigonometric functions of radian Page 1 TRIG(3M) TRIG(3M) arguments x for float data types. sinl, cosl and tanl do the same for long double data types. The asin routines return the arc sin...
 standard/singlebuffer(3) -- writes and displays all bitplanes
    none
 standard/sinh(3) -- hyperbolic functions
    The long double and single-precision routines listed above are only available in the standard math library, -lm and in -lmx. These functions compute the designated hyperbolic functions for double, float, and long double arguments.
 ftn/sinh(3) -- hyperbolic functions
    The long double and single-precision routines listed above are only available in the standard math library, -lm and in -lmx. These functions compute the designated hyperbolic functions for double, float, and long double arguments.
 f90/size(3) -- Returns the total number of elements in an array
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 complib/slabad(3) -- take as input the values computed by SLAMCH for underflow and overflow, and returns the square root of each of
    SLABAD takes as input the values computed by SLAMCH for underflow and overflow, and returns the square root of each of these values if the log of LARGE is sufficiently large. This subroutine is intended to identify machines with a large exponent range, such as the Crays, and redefine the underflow and overflow limits to be the square roots of the values computed by SLAMCH. This subroutine is needed because SLAMCH does not compensate for poor arithmetic in the upper half of the exponent range, as...
 complib/slabrd(3) -- reduce the first NB rows and columns of a real general m by n matrix A to upper or lower bidiagonal form by an
    SLABRD reduces the first NB rows and columns of a real general m by n matrix A to upper or lower bidiagonal form by an orthogonal transformation Q' * A * P, and returns the matrices X and Y which are needed to apply the transformation to the unreduced part of A. If m >= n, A is reduced to upper bidiagonal form; if m < n, to lower bidiagonal form. This is an auxiliary routine called by SGEBRD
 complib/slacon(3) -- estimate the 1-norm of a square, real matrix A
    SLACON estimates the 1-norm of a square, real matrix A. Reverse communication is used for evaluating matrix-vector products.
 complib/slacpy(3) -- copie all or part of a two-dimensional matrix A to another matrix B
    SLACPY copies all or part of a two-dimensional matrix A to another matrix B.
 complib/sladiv(3) -- --------- c + i*d The algorithm is due to Robert L
    SLADIV performs complex division in real arithmetic in D. Knuth, The art of Computer Programming, Vol.2, p.195
 complib/slae2(3) -- compute the eigenvalues of a 2-by-2 symmetric matrix [ A B ] [ B C ]
    SLAE2 computes the eigenvalues of a 2-by-2 symmetric matrix [ A B ] [ B C ]. On return, RT1 is the eigenvalue of larger absolute value, and RT2 is the eigenvalue of smaller absolute value.
 complib/slaebz(3) -- contain the iteration loops which compute and use the function N(w), which is the count of eigenvalues of a sy
    SLAEBZ contains the iteration loops which compute and use the function N(w), which is the count of eigenvalues of a symmetric tridiagonal matrix T less than or equal to its argument w. It performs a choice of two types of loops: IJOB=1, followed by IJOB=2: It takes as input a list of intervals and returns a list of sufficiently small intervals whose union contains the same eigenvalues as the union of the original intervals. The input intervals are (AB(j,1),AB(j,2)], j=1,...,MINP. The output inte...
 complib/slaed0(3) -- compute all eigenvalues and corresponding eigenvectors of a symmetric tridiagonal matrix using the divide and
    SLAED0 computes all eigenvalues and corresponding eigenvectors of a symmetric tridiagonal matrix using the divide and conquer method.
 complib/slaed1(3) -- modification by a rank-one symmetric matrix
    SLAED1 computes the updated eigensystem of a diagonal matrix after modification by a rank-one symmetric matrix. This routine is used only for the eigenproblem which requires all eigenvalues and eigenvectors of a tridiagonal matrix. SLAED7 handles the case in which eigenvalues only or eigenvalues and eigenvectors of a full symmetric matrix (which was reduced to tridiagonal form) are desired. T = Q(in) ( D(in) + RHO * Z*Z' ) Q'(in) = Q(out) * D(out) * Q'(out) where Z = Q'u, u is a vector of le...
 complib/slaed2(3) -- merge the two sets of eigenvalues together into a single sorted set
    SLAED2 merges the two sets of eigenvalues together into a single sorted set. Then it tries to deflate the size of the problem. There are two ways in which deflation can occur: when two or more eigenvalues are close together or if there is a tiny entry in the Z vector. For each such occurrence the order of the related secular equation problem is reduced by one.
 complib/slaed3(3) -- find the roots of the secular equation, as defined by the values in D, W, and RHO, between KSTART and KSTOP
    SLAED3 finds the roots of the secular equation, as defined by the values in D, W, and RHO, between KSTART and KSTOP. It makes the appropriate calls to SLAED4 and then updates the eigenvectors by multiplying the matrix of eigenvectors of the pair of eigensystems being combined by the matrix of eigenvectors of the K-by-K system which is solved here. This code makes very mild assumptions about floating point arithmetic. It will work on machines with a guard digit in add/subtract, or on those binary...
 complib/slaed4(3) -- rank-one modification to a diagonal matrix whose elements are given in the array d, and that D(i) < D(j) for i
    This subroutine computes the I-th updated eigenvalue of a symmetric rank-one modification to a diagonal matrix whose elements are given in the array d, and that no loss in generality. The rank-one modified system is thus diag( D ) + RHO * Z * Z_transpose. where we assume the Euclidean norm of Z is 1. The method consists of approximating the rational functions in the secular equation by simpler interpolating rational functions....
 complib/slaed5(3) -- modification of a 2-by-2 diagonal matrix diag( D ) + RHO The diagonal elements in the array D are assumed to s
    This subroutine computes the I-th eigenvalue of a symmetric rank-one modification of a 2-by-2 diagonal matrix We also assume RHO > 0 and that the Euclidean norm of the vector Z is one.
 complib/slaed6(3) -- d(2)-x d(3)-x It is assumed that if ORGATI = .true
    SLAED6 computes the positive or negative root (closest to the origin) of z(1) z(2) z(3) f(x) = rho + --------- + ---------- + --------- d(1)-x d(2)-x d(3)-x otherwise it is between d(1) and d(2) This routine will be called by SLAED4 when necessary. In most cases, the root sought is the smallest in magnitude, though it might not be in some extremely rare situations.
 complib/slaed7(3) -- modification by a rank-one symmetric matrix
    SLAED7 computes the updated eigensystem of a diagonal matrix after modification by a rank-one symmetric matrix. This routine is used only for the eigenproblem which requires all eigenvalues and optionally eigenvectors of a dense symmetric matrix that has been reduced to tridiagonal form. SLAED1 handles the case in which all eigenvalues and eigenvectors of a symmetric tridiagonal matrix are desired. T = Q(in) ( D(in) + RHO * Z*Z' ) Q'(in) = Q(out) * D(out) * Q'(out) where Z = Q'u, u is a vect...
 complib/slaed8(3) -- merge the two sets of eigenvalues together into a single sorted set
    SLAED8 merges the two sets of eigenvalues together into a single sorted set. Then it tries to deflate the size of the problem. There are two ways in which deflation can occur: when two or more eigenvalues are close together or if there is a tiny element in the Z vector. For each such occurrence the order of the related secular equation problem is reduced by one.
 complib/slaed9(3) -- find the roots of the secular equation, as defined by the values in D, Z, and RHO, between KSTART and KSTOP
    SLAED9 finds the roots of the secular equation, as defined by the values in D, Z, and RHO, between KSTART and KSTOP. It makes the appropriate calls to SLAED4 and then stores the new matrix of eigenvectors for use in calculating the next level of Z vectors.
 complib/slaeda(3) -- compute the Z vector corresponding to the merge step in the CURLVLth step of the merge process with TLVLS step
    SLAEDA computes the Z vector corresponding to the merge step in the CURLVLth step of the merge process with TLVLS steps for the CURPBMth problem.
 complib/slaein(3) -- use inverse iteration to find a right or left eigenvector corresponding to the eigenvalue (WR,WI) of a real up
    SLAEIN uses inverse iteration to find a right or left eigenvector corresponding to the eigenvalue (WR,WI) of a real upper Hessenberg matrix H.
 complib/slaev2(3) -- compute the eigendecomposition of a 2-by-2 symmetric matrix [ A B ] [ B C ]
    SLAEV2 computes the eigendecomposition of a 2-by-2 symmetric matrix [ A B ] [ B C ]. On return, RT1 is the eigenvalue of larger absolute value, RT2 is the eigenvalue of smaller absolute value, and (CS1,SN1) is the unit right eigenvector for RT1, giving the decomposition [ CS1 SN1 ] [ A B ] [ CS1 -SN1 ] = [ RT1 0 ] [-SN1 CS1 ] [ B C ] [ SN1 CS1 ] [ 0 RT2 ].
 complib/slaexc(3) -- upper quasi-triangular matrix T by an orthogonal similarity transformation
    SLAEXC swaps adjacent diagonal blocks T11 and T22 of order 1 or 2 in an upper quasi-triangular matrix T by an orthogonal similarity transformation. T must be in Schur canonical form, that is, block upper triangular with 1-by-1 and 2-by-2 diagonal blocks; each 2-by-2 diagonal block has its diagonal elemnts equal and its off-diagonal elements of opposite sign.
 complib/slag2(3) -- w B, with scaling as necessary to avoid over-/underflow
    SLAG2 computes the eigenvalues of a 2 x 2 generalized eigenvalue problem A - w B, with scaling as necessary to avoid over-/underflow. The scaling factor "s" results in a modified eigenvalue equation s A - w B where s is a non-negative scaling factor chosen so that w, w B, and s A do not overflow and, if possible, do not underflow, either.
 complib/slags2(3) -- compute 2-by-2 orthogonal matrices U, V and Q, such that if ( UPPER ) then U'*A*Q = U'*( A1 A2 )*Q = ( x 0 ) (
    SLAGS2 computes 2-by-2 orthogonal matrices U, V and Q, such that if ( UPPER ) then
 complib/slagtf(3) -- lambda*I = PLU,
    SLAGTF factorizes the matrix (T - lambda*I), where T is an n by n tridiagonal matrix and lambda is a scalar, as where P is a permutation matrix, L is a unit lower tridiagonal matrix with at most one non-zero sub-diagonal elements per column and U is an upper triangular matrix with at most two non-zero super-diagonal elements per column. The factorization is obtained by Gaussian elimination with partial pivoting and implicit row scaling. The parameter LAMBDA is included in the routine so that SLA...
 complib/slagtm(3) -- perform a matrix-vector product of the form B := alpha * A * X + beta * B where A is a tridiagonal matrix of o
    SLAGTM performs a matrix-vector product of the form
 complib/slagts(3) -- lambda*I)'*x = y,
    SLAGTS may be used to solve one of the systems of equations where T is an n by n tridiagonal matrix, for x, following the factorization of (T - lambda*I) as (T - lambda*I) = P*L*U , by routine SLAGTF. The choice of equation to be solved is controlled by the argument JOB, and in each case there is an option to perturb zero or very small diagonal elements of U, this option being intended for use in applications such as inverse iteration....
 complib/slahqr(3) -- i an auxiliary routine called by SHSEQR to update the eigenvalues and Schur decomposition already computed by
    SLAHQR is an auxiliary routine called by SHSEQR to update the eigenvalues and Schur decomposition already computed by SHSEQR, by dealing with the Hessenberg submatrix in rows and columns ILO to IHI.
 complib/slahrd(3) -- matrix A so that elements below the k-th subdiagonal are zero
    SLAHRD reduces the first NB columns of a real general n-by-(n-k+1) matrix A so that elements below the k-th subdiagonal are zero. The reduction is performed by an orthogonal similarity transformation Q' * A * Q. The routine returns the matrices V and T which determine Q as a block reflector I - V*T*V', and also the matrix Y = A * V * T. This is an auxiliary routine called by SGEHRD.
 complib/slaic1(3) -- applie one step of incremental condition estimation in its simplest version
    SLAIC1 applies one step of incremental condition estimation in its simplest version: Let x, twonorm(x) = 1, be an approximate singular vector of an j-by-j lower triangular matrix L, such that twonorm(L*x) = sest Then SLAIC1 computes sestpr, s, c such that the vector [ s*x ] xhat = [ c ] is an approximate singular vector of [ L 0 ] Lhat = [ w' gamma ] in the sense that twonorm(Lhat*xhat) = sestpr. Depending on JOB, an estimate for the largest or smallest singular value is computed. Note that [s ...
 complib/slaln2(3) -- w D) X = s B with possible scaling ("s") and perturbation of A
    SLALN2 solves a system of the form (ca A - w D ) X = s B or (ca A' - w D) X = s B with possible scaling ("s") and perturbation of A. (A' means A-transpose.) A is an NA x NA real matrix, ca is a real scalar, D is an NA x NA real diagonal matrix, w is a real or complex value, and X and B are NA x 1 matrices -- real if w is real, complex if w is complex. NA may be 1 or 2. If w is complex, X and B are represented as NA x 2 matrices, the first column of each being the real part and the second bei...
 complib/slamch(3) -- determine single precision machine parameters
    SLAMCH determines single precision machine parameters.
 complib/slamrg(3) -- will create a permutation list which will merge the elements of A (which is composed of two independently sort
    SLAMRG will create a permutation list which will merge the elements of A (which is composed of two independently sorted sets) into a single set which is sorted in ascending order.
 complib/slangb(3) -- return the value of the one norm, or the Frobenius norm, or the infinity norm, or the element of largest absol
    SLANGB returns the value of the one norm, or the Frobenius norm, or the infinity norm, or the element of largest absolute value of an n by n band matrix A, with kl sub-diagonals and ku super-diagonals.
 complib/slange(3) -- return the value of the one norm, or the Frobenius norm, or the infinity norm, or the element of largest absol
    SLANGE returns the value of the one norm, or the Frobenius norm, or the infinity norm, or the element of largest absolute value of a real matrix A.
 complib/slangt(3) -- return the value of the one norm, or the Frobenius norm, or the infinity norm, or the element of largest absol
    SLANGT returns the value of the one norm, or the Frobenius norm, or the infinity norm, or the element of largest absolute value of a real tridiagonal matrix A.
 complib/slanhs(3) -- return the value of the one norm, or the Frobenius norm, or the infinity norm, or the element of largest absol
    SLANHS returns the value of the one norm, or the Frobenius norm, or the infinity norm, or the element of largest absolute value of a Hessenberg matrix A.
 complib/slansb(3) -- return the value of the one norm, or the Frobenius norm, or the infinity norm, or the element of largest absol
    SLANSB returns the value of the one norm, or the Frobenius norm, or the infinity norm, or the element of largest absolute value of an n by n symmetric band matrix A, with k super-diagonals.
 complib/slansp(3) -- return the value of the one norm, or the Frobenius norm, or the infinity norm, or the element of largest absol
    SLANSP returns the value of the one norm, or the Frobenius norm, or the infinity norm, or the element of largest absolute value of a real symmetric matrix A, supplied in packed form.
 complib/slanst(3) -- return the value of the one norm, or the Frobenius norm, or the infinity norm, or the element of largest absol
    SLANST returns the value of the one norm, or the Frobenius norm, or the infinity norm, or the element of largest absolute value of a real symmetric tridiagonal matrix A.
 complib/slansy(3) -- return the value of the one norm, or the Frobenius norm, or the infinity norm, or the element of largest absol
    SLANSY returns the value of the one norm, or the Frobenius norm, or the infinity norm, or the element of largest absolute value of a real symmetric matrix A.
 complib/slantb(3) -- return the value of the one norm, or the Frobenius norm, or the infinity norm, or the element of largest absol
    SLANTB returns the value of the one norm, or the Frobenius norm, or the infinity norm, or the element of largest absolute value of an n by n triangular band matrix A, with ( k + 1 ) diagonals.
 complib/slantp(3) -- return the value of the one norm, or the Frobenius norm, or the infinity norm, or the element of largest absol
    SLANTP returns the value of the one norm, or the Frobenius norm, or the infinity norm, or the element of largest absolute value of a triangular matrix A, supplied in packed form.
 complib/slantr(3) -- return the value of the one norm, or the Frobenius norm, or the infinity norm, or the element of largest absol
    SLANTR returns the value of the one norm, or the Frobenius norm, or the infinity norm, or the element of largest absolute value of a trapezoidal or triangular matrix A.
 complib/slanv2(3) -- compute the Schur factorization of a real 2-by-2 nonsymmetric matrix in standard form
    SLANV2 computes the Schur factorization of a real 2-by-2 nonsymmetric matrix in standard form: [ A B ] = [ CS -SN ] [ AA BB ] [ CS SN ] [ C D ] [ SN CS ] [ CC DD ] [-SN CS ] where either 1) CC = 0 so that AA and DD are real eigenvalues of the matrix, or 2) AA = DD and BB*CC < 0, so that AA + or - sqrt(BB*CC) are complex conjugate eigenvalues.
 complib/slapll(3) -- two column vectors X and Y, let A = ( X Y )
    Given two column vectors X and Y, let The subroutine first computes the QR factorization of A = Q*R, and then computes the SVD of the 2-by-2 upper triangular matrix R. The smaller singular value of R is returned in SSMIN, which is used as the measurement of the linear dependency of the vectors X and Y.
 complib/slapmt(3) -- rearrange the columns of the M by N matrix X as specified by the permutation K(1),K(2),...,K(N) of the integer
    SLAPMT rearranges the columns of the M by N matrix X as specified by the permutation K(1),K(2),...,K(N) of the integers 1,...,N. If FORWRD = .TRUE., forward permutation: X(*,K(J)) is moved X(*,J) for J = 1,2,...,N. If FORWRD = .FALSE., backward permutation: X(*,J) is moved to X(*,K(J)) for J = 1,2,...,N.
 complib/slapy2(3) -- return sqrt(x**2+y**2), taking care not to cause unnecessary overflow
    SLAPY2 returns sqrt(x**2+y**2), taking care not to cause unnecessary overflow.
 complib/slapy3(3) -- return sqrt(x**2+y**2+z**2), taking care not to cause unnecessary overflow
    SLAPY3 returns sqrt(x**2+y**2+z**2), taking care not to cause unnecessary overflow.
 complib/slaqgb(3) -- equilibrate a general M by N band matrix A with KL subdiagonals and KU superdiagonals using the row and scalin
    SLAQGB equilibrates a general M by N band matrix A with KL subdiagonals and KU superdiagonals using the row and scaling factors in the vectors R and C.
 complib/slaqge(3) -- equilibrate a general M by N matrix A using the row and scaling factors in the vectors R and C
    SLAQGE equilibrates a general M by N matrix A using the row and scaling factors in the vectors R and C.
 complib/slaqsb(3) -- equilibrate a symmetric band matrix A using the scaling factors in the vector S
    SLAQSB equilibrates a symmetric band matrix A using the scaling factors in the vector S.
 complib/slaqsp(3) -- equilibrate a symmetric matrix A using the scaling factors in the vector S
    SLAQSP equilibrates a symmetric matrix A using the scaling factors in the vector S.
 complib/slaqsy(3) -- equilibrate a symmetric matrix A using the scaling factors in the vector S
    SLAQSY equilibrates a symmetric matrix A using the scaling factors in the vector S.
 complib/slaqtr(3) -- solve the real quasi-triangular system op(T)*p = scale*c, if LREAL = .TRUE
    SLAQTR solves the real quasi-triangular system or the complex quasi-triangular systems op(T + iB)*(p+iq) = scale*(c+id), if LREAL = .FALSE. in real arithmetic, where T is upper quasi-triangular. If LREAL = .FALSE., then the first diagonal block of T must be 1 by 1, B is the specially structured matrix B = [ b(1) b(2) ... b(n) ] [ w ] [ w ] [ . ] [ w ] op(A) = A or A', A' denotes the conjugate transpose of matrix A. On input, X = [ c ]. On output, X = [ p ]. [ d ] [ q ] This subroutine is desig...
 complib/slar2v(3) -- sequence of 2-by-2 real symmetric matrices, defined by the elements of the vectors x, y and z
    SLAR2V applies a vector of real plane rotations from both sides to a sequence of 2-by-2 real symmetric matrices, defined by the elements of the vectors x, y and z. For i = 1,2,...,n ( x(i) z(i) ) := ( c(i) s(i) ) ( x(i) z(i) ) ( c(i) -s(i) ) ( z(i) y(i) ) ( -s(i) c(i) ) ( z(i) y(i) ) ( s(i) c(i) )
 complib/slarf(3) -- applie a real elementary reflector H to a real m by n matrix C, from either the left or the right
    SLARF applies a real elementary reflector H to a real m by n matrix C, from either the left or the right. H is represented in the form H = I - tau * v * v' where tau is a real scalar and v is a real vector. If tau = 0, then H is taken to be the unit matrix.
 complib/slarfb(3) -- applie a real block reflector H or its transpose H' to a real m by n matrix C, from either the left or the rig
    SLARFB applies a real block reflector H or its transpose H' to a real m by n matrix C, from either the left or the right.
 complib/slarfg(3) -- generate a real elementary reflector H of order n, such that H * ( alpha ) = ( beta ), H' * H = I
    SLARFG generates a real elementary reflector H of order n, such that ( x ) ( 0 ) where alpha and beta are scalars, and x is an (n-1)-element real vector. H is represented in the form H = I - tau * ( 1 ) * ( 1 v' ) , ( v ) where tau is a real scalar and v is a real (n-1)-element vector. If the elements of x are all zero, then tau = 0 and H is taken to be the unit matrix. Otherwise 1 <= tau <= 2.
 complib/slarft(3) -- form the triangular factor T of a real block reflector H of order n, which is defined as a product of k elemen
    SLARFT forms the triangular factor T of a real block reflector H of order n, which is defined as a product of k elementary reflectors. If DIRECT = 'F', H = H(1) H(2) . . . H(k) and T is upper triangular; If DIRECT = 'B', H = H(k) . . . H(2) H(1) and T is lower triangular. If STOREV = 'C', the vector which defines the elementary reflector H(i) is stored in the i-th column of the array V, and H = I - V * T * V' If STOREV = 'R', the vector which defines the elementary reflector H(i) is sto...
 complib/slarfx(3) -- applie a real elementary reflector H to a real m by n matrix C, from either the left or the right
    SLARFX applies a real elementary reflector H to a real m by n matrix C, from either the left or the right. H is represented in the form H = I - tau * v * v' where tau is a real scalar and v is a real vector. If tau = 0, then H is taken to be the unit matrix This version uses inline code if H has order < 11.
 complib/slargv(3) -- generate a vector of real plane rotations, determined by elements of the real vectors x and y
    SLARGV generates a vector of real plane rotations, determined by elements of the real vectors x and y. For i = 1,2,...,n ( c(i) s(i) ) ( x(i) ) = ( a(i) ) ( -s(i) c(i) ) ( y(i) ) = ( 0 )
 complib/slarnv(3) -- return a vector of n random real numbers from a uniform or normal distribution
    SLARNV returns a vector of n random real numbers from a uniform or normal distribution.
 complib/slartg(3) -- generate a plane rotation so that [ CS SN ]
    SLARTG generate a plane rotation so that [ -SN CS ] [ G ] [ 0 ] This is a slower, more accurate version of the BLAS1 routine SROTG, with the following other differences: F and G are unchanged on return. If G=0, then CS=1 and SN=0. If F=0 and (G .ne. 0), then CS=0 and SN=1 without doing any floating point operations (saves work in SBDSQR when there are zeros on the diagonal). If F exceeds G in magnitude, CS will be positive....
 complib/slartv(3) -- applie a vector of real plane rotations to elements of the real vectors x and y
    SLARTV applies a vector of real plane rotations to elements of the real vectors x and y. For i = 1,2,...,n ( x(i) ) := ( c(i) s(i) ) ( x(i) ) ( y(i) ) ( -s(i) c(i) ) ( y(i) )
 complib/slaruv(3) -- return a vector of n random real numbers from a uniform (0,1)
    SLARUV returns a vector of n random real numbers from a uniform (0,1) distribution (n <= 128). This is an auxiliary routine called by SLARNV and CLARNV.
 complib/slas2(3) -- compute the singular values of the 2-by-2 matrix [ F G ] [ 0 H ]
    SLAS2 computes the singular values of the 2-by-2 matrix [ F G ] [ 0 H ]. On return, SSMIN is the smaller singular value and SSMAX is the larger singular value.
 complib/slascl(3) -- multiplie the M by N real matrix A by the real scalar CTO/CFROM
    SLASCL multiplies the M by N real matrix A by the real scalar CTO/CFROM. This is done without over/underflow as long as the final result CTO*A(I,J)/CFROM does not over/underflow. TYPE specifies that A may be full, upper triangular, lower triangular, upper Hessenberg, or banded.
 complib/slaset(3) -- initialize an m-by-n matrix A to BETA on the diagonal and ALPHA on the offdiagonals
    SLASET initializes an m-by-n matrix A to BETA on the diagonal and ALPHA on the offdiagonals.
 complib/slasq1(3) -- matrix with diagonal D and off-diagonal E
    SLASQ1 computes the singular values of a real N-by-N bidiagonal matrix with diagonal D and off-diagonal E. The singular values are computed to high relative accuracy, barring over/underflow or denormalization. The algorithm is described in "Accurate singular values and differential qd algorithms," by K. V. Fernando and B. N. Parlett, Numer. Math., Vol-67, No. 2, pp. 191-230,1994. See also "Implementation of differential qd algorithms," by K. V. Fernando and B. N. Parlett, Technical Report, D...
 complib/slasq2(3) -- SLASQ2 computes the singular values of a real N-by-N unreduced bidiagonal matrix with squared diagonal element
    SLASQ2 computes the singular values of a real N-by-N unreduced bidiagonal matrix with squared diagonal elements in Q and squared off-diagonal elements in E. The singular values are computed to relative accuracy TOL, barring over/underflow or denormalization.
 complib/slasq3(3) -- SLASQ3 is the workhorse of the whole bidiagonal SVD algorithm
    SLASQ3 is the workhorse of the whole bidiagonal SVD algorithm. This can be described as the differential qd with shifts.
 complib/slasq4(3) -- SLASQ4 estimates TAU, the smallest eigenvalue of a matrix
    SLASQ4 estimates TAU, the smallest eigenvalue of a matrix. This routine improves the input value of SUP which is an upper bound for the smallest eigenvalue for this matrix .
 complib/slasr(3) -- where A is an m by n real matrix and P is an orthogonal matrix,
    SLASR performs the transformation consisting of a sequence of plane rotations determined by the parameters PIVOT and DIRECT as follows ( z = m when SIDE = 'L' or 'l' and z = n when SIDE = 'R' or 'r' ): When DIRECT = 'F' or 'f' ( Forward sequence ) then P = P( z - 1 )*...*P( 2 )*P( 1 ), and when DIRECT = 'B' or 'b' ( Backward sequence ) then P = P( 1 )*P( 2 )*...*P( z - 1 ), where P( k ) is a plane rotation matrix for the following planes: when PIVOT = 'V' or 'v' ( Variable pi...
 complib/slasrt(3) -- the numbers in D in increasing order (if ID = 'I') or in decreasing order (if ID = 'D' )
    Sort the numbers in D in increasing order (if ID = 'I') or in decreasing order (if ID = 'D' ). Use Quick Sort, reverting to Insertion sort on arrays of size <= 20. Dimension of STACK limits N to about 2**32.
 complib/slassq(3) -- 1 )**2 +...+ x( n )**2 + ( scale**2 )*sumsq,
    SLASSQ returns the values scl and smsq such that where x( i ) = X( 1 + ( i - 1 )*INCX ). The value of sumsq is assumed to be non-negative and scl returns the value scl = max( scale, abs( x( i ) ) ). scale and sumsq must be supplied in SCALE and SUMSQ and scl and smsq are overwritten on SCALE and SUMSQ respectively. The routine makes only one pass through the vector x.
 complib/slasv2(3) -- compute the singular value decomposition of a 2-by-2 triangular matrix [ F G ] [ 0 H ]
    SLASV2 computes the singular value decomposition of a 2-by-2 triangular matrix [ F G ] [ 0 H ]. On return, abs(SSMAX) is the larger singular value, abs(SSMIN) is the smaller singular value, and (CSL,SNL) and (CSR,SNR) are the left and right singular vectors for abs(SSMAX), giving the decomposition [ CSL SNL ] [ F G ] [ CSR -SNR ] = [ SSMAX 0 ] [-SNL CSL ] [ 0 H ] [ SNR CSR ] [ 0 SSMIN ].
 complib/slaswp(3) -- perform a series of row interchanges on the matrix A
    SLASWP performs a series of row interchanges on the matrix A. One row interchange is initiated for each of rows K1 through K2 of A.
 complib/slasy2(3) -- + ISGN*X*op(TR) = SCALE*B,
    SLASY2 solves for the N1 by N2 matrix X, 1 <= N1,N2 <= 2, in where TL is N1 by N1, TR is N2 by N2, B is N1 by N2, and ISGN = 1 or -1. op(T) = T or T', where T' denotes the transpose of T.
 complib/slasyf(3) -- using the Bunch-Kaufman diagonal pivoting method
    SLASYF computes a partial factorization of a real symmetric matrix A using the Bunch-Kaufman diagonal pivoting method. The partial factorization has the form: A = ( I U12 ) ( A11 0 ) ( I 0 ) if UPLO = 'U', or: ( 0 U22 ) ( 0 D ) ( U12' U22' ) A = ( L11 0 ) ( D 0 ) ( L11' L21' ) if UPLO = 'L' ( L21 I ) ( 0 A22 ) ( 0 I ) where the order of D is at most NB. The actual order is returned in the argument KB, and is either NB or NB-1, or N if N <= NB. SLASYF is an auxiliary routine called by SSY...
 complib/slatbs(3) -- solve one of the triangular systems A *x = s*b or A'*x = s*b with scaling to prevent overflow, where A is an u
    SLATBS solves one of the triangular systems are n-element vectors, and s is a scaling factor, usually less than or equal to 1, chosen so that the components of x will be less than the overflow threshold. If the unscaled problem will not cause overflow, the Level 2 BLAS routine STBSV is called. If the matrix A is singular (A(j,j) = 0 for some j), then s is set to 0 and a non-trivial solution to A*x = 0 is returned....
 complib/slatps(3) -- solve one of the triangular systems A *x = s*b or A'*x = s*b with scaling to prevent overflow, where A is an u
    SLATPS solves one of the triangular systems transpose of A, x and b are n-element vectors, and s is a scaling factor, usually less than or equal to 1, chosen so that the components of x will be less than the overflow threshold. If the unscaled problem will not cause overflow, the Level 2 BLAS routine STPSV is called. If the matrix A is singular (A(j,j) = 0 for some j), then s is set to 0 and a non-trivial solution to A*x = 0 is returned....
 complib/slatrd(3) -- reduce NB rows and columns of a real symmetric matrix A to symmetric tridiagonal form by an orthogonal similar
    SLATRD reduces NB rows and columns of a real symmetric matrix A to symmetric tridiagonal form by an orthogonal similarity transformation Q' * A * Q, and returns the matrices V and W which are needed to apply the transformation to the unreduced part of A. If UPLO = 'U', SLATRD reduces the last NB rows and columns of a matrix, of which the upper triangle is supplied; if UPLO = 'L', SLATRD reduces the first NB rows and columns of a matrix, of which the lower triangle is supplied. This is an au...
 complib/slatrs(3) -- solve one of the triangular systems A *x = s*b or A'*x = s*b with scaling to prevent overflow
    SLATRS solves one of the triangular systems triangular matrix, A' denotes the transpose of A, x and b are n-element vectors, and s is a scaling factor, usually less than or equal to 1, chosen so that the components of x will be less than the overflow threshold. If the unscaled problem will not cause overflow, the Level 2 BLAS routine STRSV is called. If the matrix A is singular (A(j,j) = 0 for some j), then s is set to 0 and a non-trivial solution to A*x = 0 is returned....
 complib/slatzm(3) -- applie a Householder matrix generated by STZRQF to a matrix
    SLATZM applies a Householder matrix generated by STZRQF to a matrix. Let P = I - tau*u*u', u = ( 1 ), ( v ) where v is an (m-1) vector if SIDE = 'L', or a (n-1) vector if SIDE = 'R'. If SIDE equals 'L', let C = [ C1 ] 1 [ C2 ] m-1 n Then C is overwritten by P*C. If SIDE equals 'R', let C = [ C1, C2 ] m 1 n-1 Then C is overwritten by C*P.
 complib/slauu2(3) -- compute the product U * U' or L' * L, where the triangular factor U or L is stored in the upper or lower trian
    SLAUU2 computes the product U * U' or L' * L, where the triangular factor U or L is stored in the upper or lower triangular part of the array A. If UPLO = 'U' or 'u' then the upper triangle of the result is stored, overwriting the factor U in A. If UPLO = 'L' or 'l' then the lower triangle of the result is stored, overwriting the factor L in A. This is the unblocked form of the algorithm, calling Level 2 BLAS....
 complib/slauum(3) -- compute the product U * U' or L' * L, where the triangular factor U or L is stored in the upper or lower trian
    SLAUUM computes the product U * U' or L' * L, where the triangular factor U or L is stored in the upper or lower triangular part of the array A. If UPLO = 'U' or 'u' then the upper triangle of the result is stored, overwriting the factor U in A. If UPLO = 'L' or 'l' then the lower triangle of the result is stored, overwriting the factor L in A. This is the blocked form of the algorithm, calling Level 3 BLAS....
 ftn/sleep(3) -- delay execution for a given number of milliseconds
    intms(in) Number of milliseconds to sleep.
 Tk/sleep(3) -- delay execution for a given number of milliseconds
    intms(in) Number of milliseconds to sleep.
 sleep(3c) -- suspend execution for interval
    The current thread is suspended from execution for the number of seconds specified by the argument. The actual suspension time may be less than that requested because any caught signal will terminate the sleep following execution of that signal's catching routine. Also, the suspension time may be longer than requested by an arbitrary amount due to the scheduling of other activity in the system. The value returned by sleep will be the ``unslept'' amount (the requested time minus the time actua...
 standard/smoothline(3) -- obsolete routine
    mode expects 1 to turn on antialiasing or 0 to turn it off.
 perl5/Socket(3) -- load the C socket.h defines and structure manipulators
    This module is just a translation of the C socket.h file. Unlike the old mechanism of requiring a translated socket.ph file, this uses the h2xs program (see the Perl source distribution) and your native C compiler. This means that it has a far more likely chance of getting the numbers right. This includes all of the commonly used pound-defines like AF_INET, SOCK_STREAM, etc. In addition, some structure manipulation functions are available: inet_aton HOSTNAME Takes a string giving the name of a h...
 socket(3n) -- create an endpoint for communication
    socket creates an endpoint for communication and returns a descriptor. The domain parameter specifies a communications domain within which communication will take place; this selects the protocol family which should be used. The protocol family generally is the same as the address family for the addresses supplied in later operations on the socket. These families are defined in the include file sys/socket.h. There must be an entry in the n...
 socketpair(3n) -- create a pair of connected sockets
    The socketpair library call creates an unnamed pair of connected sockets in the specified address family d, of the specified type, and using the optionally specified protocol. The descriptors used in referencing the new sockets are returned in sv[0] and sv[1]. The two sockets are indistinguishable.
 complib/solvers(3) -- SGI developed linear equations solvers.
    SOLVERS - SGI developed linear equations solvers.
 complib/sopgtr(3) -- product of n-1 elementary reflectors H(i) of order n, as returned by SSPTRD using packed storage
    SOPGTR generates a real orthogonal matrix Q which is defined as the product of n-1 elementary reflectors H(i) of order n, as returned by SSPTRD using packed storage: if UPLO = 'U', Q = H(n-1) . . . H(2) H(1), if UPLO = 'L', Q = H(1) H(2) . . . H(n-1).
 complib/sopmtr(3) -- overwrite the general real M-by-N matrix C with SIDE = 'L' SIDE = 'R' TRANS = 'N'
    SOPMTR overwrites the general real M-by-N matrix C with TRANS = 'T': Q**T * C C * Q**T where Q is a real orthogonal matrix of order nq, with nq = m if SIDE = 'L' and nq = n if SIDE = 'R'. Q is defined as the product of nq-1 elementary reflectors, as returned by SSPTRD using packed storage: if UPLO = 'U', Q = H(nq-1) . . . H(2) H(1); if UPLO = 'L', Q = H(1) H(2) . . . H(nq-1).
 complib/sorg2l(3) -- generate an m by n real matrix Q with orthonormal columns,
    SORG2L generates an m by n real matrix Q with orthonormal columns, which is defined as the last n columns of a product of k elementary reflectors of order m Q = H(k) . . . H(2) H(1) as returned by SGEQLF.
 complib/sorg2r(3) -- generate an m by n real matrix Q with orthonormal columns,
    SORG2R generates an m by n real matrix Q with orthonormal columns, which is defined as the first n columns of a product of k elementary reflectors of order m Q = H(1) H(2) . . . H(k) as returned by SGEQRF.
 complib/sorgbr(3) -- generate one of the real orthogonal matrices Q or P**T determined by SGEBRD when reducing a real matrix A to b
    SORGBR generates one of the real orthogonal matrices Q or P**T determined by SGEBRD when reducing a real matrix A to bidiagonal form: A = Q * B * P**T. Q and P**T are defined as products of elementary reflectors H(i) or G(i) respectively. If VECT = 'Q', A is assumed to have been an M-by-K matrix, and Q is of order M: if m >= k, Q = H(1) H(2) . . . H(k) and SORGBR returns the first n columns of Q, where m >= n >= k; if m < k, Q = H(1) H(2) . . . H(m-1) and SORGBR returns Q as an M-by-M matrix. ...
 complib/sorghr(3) -- product of IHI-ILO elementary reflectors of order N, as returned by SGEHRD
    SORGHR generates a real orthogonal matrix Q which is defined as the product of IHI-ILO elementary reflectors of order N, as returned by SGEHRD: Q = H(ilo) H(ilo+1) . . . H(ihi-1).
 complib/sorgl2(3) -- generate an m by n real matrix Q with orthonormal rows,
    SORGL2 generates an m by n real matrix Q with orthonormal rows, which is defined as the first m rows of a product of k elementary reflectors of order n Q = H(k) . . . H(2) H(1) as returned by SGELQF.
 complib/sorglq(3) -- generate an M-by-N real matrix Q with orthonormal rows,
    SORGLQ generates an M-by-N real matrix Q with orthonormal rows, which is defined as the first M rows of a product of K elementary reflectors of order N Q = H(k) . . . H(2) H(1) as returned by SGELQF.
 complib/sorgql(3) -- generate an M-by-N real matrix Q with orthonormal columns,
    SORGQL generates an M-by-N real matrix Q with orthonormal columns, which is defined as the last N columns of a product of K elementary reflectors of order M Q = H(k) . . . H(2) H(1) as returned by SGEQLF.
 complib/sorgqr(3) -- generate an M-by-N real matrix Q with orthonormal columns,
    SORGQR generates an M-by-N real matrix Q with orthonormal columns, which is defined as the first N columns of a product of K elementary reflectors of order M Q = H(1) H(2) . . . H(k) as returned by SGEQRF.
 complib/sorgr2(3) -- generate an m by n real matrix Q with orthonormal rows,
    SORGR2 generates an m by n real matrix Q with orthonormal rows, which is defined as the last m rows of a product of k elementary reflectors of order n Q = H(1) H(2) . . . H(k) as returned by SGERQF.
 complib/sorgrq(3) -- generate an M-by-N real matrix Q with orthonormal rows,
    SORGRQ generates an M-by-N real matrix Q with orthonormal rows, which is defined as the last M rows of a product of K elementary reflectors of order N Q = H(1) H(2) . . . H(k) as returned by SGERQF.
 complib/sorgtr(3) -- product of n-1 elementary reflectors of order N, as returned by SSYTRD
    SORGTR generates a real orthogonal matrix Q which is defined as the product of n-1 elementary reflectors of order N, as returned by SSYTRD: if UPLO = 'U', Q = H(n-1) . . . H(2) H(1), if UPLO = 'L', Q = H(1) H(2) . . . H(n-1).
 complib/sorm2l(3) -- overwrite the general real m by n matrix C with Q * C if SIDE = 'L' and TRANS = 'N', or Q'* C if SIDE = 'L' an
    SORM2L overwrites the general real m by n matrix C with where Q is a real orthogonal matrix defined as the product of k elementary reflectors Q = H(k) . . . H(2) H(1) as returned by SGEQLF. Q is of order m if SIDE = 'L' and of order n if SIDE = 'R'.
 complib/sorm2r(3) -- overwrite the general real m by n matrix C with Q * C if SIDE = 'L' and TRANS = 'N', or Q'* C if SIDE = 'L' an
    SORM2R overwrites the general real m by n matrix C with where Q is a real orthogonal matrix defined as the product of k elementary reflectors Q = H(1) H(2) . . . H(k) as returned by SGEQRF. Q is of order m if SIDE = 'L' and of order n if SIDE = 'R'.
 complib/sormbr(3) -- VECT = 'Q', SORMBR overwrites the general real M-by-N matrix C with SIDE = 'L' SIDE = 'R' TRANS = 'N'
    If VECT = 'Q', SORMBR overwrites the general real M-by-N matrix C with SIDE = 'L' SIDE = 'R' TRANS = 'N': Q * C C * Q TRANS = 'T': Q**T * C C * Q**T If VECT = 'P', SORMBR overwrites the general real M-by-N matrix C with SIDE = 'L' SIDE = 'R' TRANS = 'N': P * C C * P TRANS = 'T': P**T * C C * P**T Here Q and P**T are the orthogonal matrices determined by SGEBRD when reducing a real matrix A to bidiagonal form: A = Q * B * P**T. Q and P**T are defined as products of elementary ...
 complib/sormhr(3) -- overwrite the general real M-by-N matrix C with SIDE = 'L' SIDE = 'R' TRANS = 'N'
    SORMHR overwrites the general real M-by-N matrix C with TRANS = 'T': Q**T * C C * Q**T where Q is a real orthogonal matrix of order nq, with nq = m if SIDE = 'L' and nq = n if SIDE = 'R'. Q is defined as the product of IHI-ILO elementary reflectors, as returned by SGEHRD: Q = H(ilo) H(ilo+1) . . . H(ihi-1).
 complib/sorml2(3) -- overwrite the general real m by n matrix C with Q * C if SIDE = 'L' and TRANS = 'N', or Q'* C if SIDE = 'L' an
    SORML2 overwrites the general real m by n matrix C with where Q is a real orthogonal matrix defined as the product of k elementary reflectors Q = H(k) . . . H(2) H(1) as returned by SGELQF. Q is of order m if SIDE = 'L' and of order n if SIDE = 'R'.
 complib/sormlq(3) -- overwrite the general real M-by-N matrix C with SIDE = 'L' SIDE = 'R' TRANS = 'N'
    SORMLQ overwrites the general real M-by-N matrix C with TRANS = 'T': Q**T * C C * Q**T where Q is a real orthogonal matrix defined as the product of k elementary reflectors Q = H(k) . . . H(2) H(1) as returned by SGELQF. Q is of order M if SIDE = 'L' and of order N if SIDE = 'R'.
 complib/sormql(3) -- overwrite the general real M-by-N matrix C with SIDE = 'L' SIDE = 'R' TRANS = 'N'
    SORMQL overwrites the general real M-by-N matrix C with TRANS = 'T': Q**T * C C * Q**T where Q is a real orthogonal matrix defined as the product of k elementary reflectors Q = H(k) . . . H(2) H(1) as returned by SGEQLF. Q is of order M if SIDE = 'L' and of order N if SIDE = 'R'.
 complib/sormqr(3) -- overwrite the general real M-by-N matrix C with SIDE = 'L' SIDE = 'R' TRANS = 'N'
    SORMQR overwrites the general real M-by-N matrix C with TRANS = 'T': Q**T * C C * Q**T where Q is a real orthogonal matrix defined as the product of k elementary reflectors Q = H(1) H(2) . . . H(k) as returned by SGEQRF. Q is of order M if SIDE = 'L' and of order N if SIDE = 'R'.
 complib/sormr2(3) -- overwrite the general real m by n matrix C with Q * C if SIDE = 'L' and TRANS = 'N', or Q'* C if SIDE = 'L' an
    SORMR2 overwrites the general real m by n matrix C with where Q is a real orthogonal matrix defined as the product of k elementary reflectors Q = H(1) H(2) . . . H(k) as returned by SGERQF. Q is of order m if SIDE = 'L' and of order n if SIDE = 'R'.
 complib/sormrq(3) -- overwrite the general real M-by-N matrix C with SIDE = 'L' SIDE = 'R' TRANS = 'N'
    SORMRQ overwrites the general real M-by-N matrix C with TRANS = 'T': Q**T * C C * Q**T where Q is a real orthogonal matrix defined as the product of k elementary reflectors Q = H(1) H(2) . . . H(k) as returned by SGERQF. Q is of order M if SIDE = 'L' and of order N if SIDE = 'R'.
 complib/sormtr(3) -- overwrite the general real M-by-N matrix C with SIDE = 'L' SIDE = 'R' TRANS = 'N'
    SORMTR overwrites the general real M-by-N matrix C with TRANS = 'T': Q**T * C C * Q**T where Q is a real orthogonal matrix of order nq, with nq = m if SIDE = 'L' and nq = n if SIDE = 'R'. Q is defined as the product of nq-1 elementary reflectors, as returned by SSYTRD: if UPLO = 'U', Q = H(nq-1) . . . H(2) H(1); if UPLO = 'L', Q = H(1) H(2) . . . H(nq-1).
 Tcl/source(3) -- Evaluate a file as a Tcl script
    Read file fileName and pass the contents to the Tcl interpreter as a script to evaluate in the normal fashion. The return value from source is the return value of the last command executed from the file. If an error occurs in evaluating the contents of the file then the source command will return that error. If a return command is invoked from within the file then the remainder of the file will be skipped and the source command will return normally with the result from the return command. If fil...
 f90/spacing(3) -- Returns the absolute spacing of real model numbers near the argument value
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 complib/SPBCO(3) -- SPBCO factors a real symmetric positive definite matrix stored in band form and estimates the condition of the
    On Entry ABD REAL(LDA, N) the matrix to be factored. The columns of the upper triangle are stored in the columns of ABD and the diagonals of the upper triangle are stored in the rows of ABD . See the comments below for details. LDA INTEGER the leading dimension of the array ABD . LDA must be .GE. M + 1 . N INTEGER the order of the matrix A . M INTEGER the number of diagonals above the main diagonal. 0 .LE. M .LT. N . On Return ABD an upper triangular matrix R , stored in band form, so that A = T...
 complib/spbcon(3) -- estimate the reciprocal of the condition number (in the 1-norm) of a real symmetric positive definite band mat
    SPBCON estimates the reciprocal of the condition number (in the 1-norm) of a real symmetric positive definite band matrix using the Cholesky factorization A = U**T*U or A = L*L**T computed by SPBTRF. An estimate is obtained for norm(inv(A)), and the reciprocal of the condition number is computed as RCOND = 1 / (ANORM * norm(inv(A))).
 complib/SPBDI(3) -- SPBDI computes the determinant of a real symmetric positive definite band matrix using the factors computed by
    On Entry ABD REAL(LDA, N) the output from SPBCO or SPBFA. LDA INTEGER the leading dimension of the array ABD . N INTEGER the order of the matrix A . M INTEGER the number of diagonals above the main diagonal. On Return DET REAL(2) determinant of original matrix in the form Determinant = DET(1) * 10.0**DET(2) with 1.0 .LE. DET(1) .LT. 10.0 or DET(1) .EQ. 0.0 . LINPACK. This version dated 08/14/78 . Cleve Moler, University of New Mexico, Argonne National Lab. PPPPaaaaggggeeee 1111...
 complib/spbequ(3) -- compute row and column scalings intended to equilibrate a symmetric positive definite band matrix A and reduce
    SPBEQU computes row and column scalings intended to equilibrate a symmetric positive definite band matrix A and reduce its condition number (with respect to the two-norm). S contains the scale factors, S(i) = 1/sqrt(A(i,i)), chosen so that the scaled matrix B with elements B(i,j) = S(i)*A(i,j)*S(j) has ones on the diagonal. This choice of S puts the condition number of B within a factor N of the smallest possible condition number over all possible diagonal scalings....
 complib/SPBFA(3) -- SPBFA factors a real symmetric positive definite matrix stored in band form. SPBFA is usually called by SPBCO,
    On Entry ABD REAL(LDA, N) the matrix to be factored. The columns of the upper triangle are stored in the columns of ABD and the diagonals of the upper triangle are stored in the rows of ABD . See the comments below for details. LDA INTEGER the leading dimension of the array ABD . LDA must be .GE. M + 1 . N INTEGER the order of the matrix A . M INTEGER the number of diagonals above the main diagonal. 0 .LE. M .LT. N . On Return ABD an upper triangular matrix R , stored in band form, so that A = T...
 complib/spbrfs(3) -- when the coefficient matrix is symmetric positive definite and banded, and provides error bounds and backward
    SPBRFS improves the computed solution to a system of linear equations when the coefficient matrix is symmetric positive definite and banded, and provides error bounds and backward error estimates for the solution.
 complib/SPBSL(3) -- SPBSL solves the real symmetric positive definite band system A*X = B using the factors computed by SPBCO or S
    On Entry ABD REAL(LDA, N) the output from SPBCO or SPBFA. LDA INTEGER the leading dimension of the array ABD . N INTEGER the order of the matrix A . M INTEGER the number of diagonals above the main diagonal. B REAL(N) the right hand side vector. On Return B the solution vector X . Error Condition A division by zero will occur if the input factor contains a zero on the diagonal. Technically, this indicates singularity, but it is usually caused by improper subroutine arguments. It will not occur i...
 complib/spbstf(3) -- compute a split Cholesky factorization of a real symmetric positive definite band matrix A
    SPBSTF computes a split Cholesky factorization of a real symmetric positive definite band matrix A. This routine is designed to be used in conjunction with SSBGST. The factorization has the form A = S**T*S where S is a band matrix of the same bandwidth as A and the following structure: S = ( U ) ( M L ) where U is upper triangular of order m = (n+kd)/2, and L is lower triangular of order n-m.
 complib/spbsv(3) -- = B,
    SPBSV computes the solution to a real system of linear equations A * X = B, where A is an N-by-N symmetric positive definite band matrix and X and B are N-by-NRHS matrices. The Cholesky decomposition is used to factor A as A = U**T * U, if UPLO = 'U', or A = L * L**T, if UPLO = 'L', where U is an upper triangular band matrix, and L is a lower triangular band matrix, with the same number of superdiagonals or subdiagonals as A. The factored form of A is then used to solve the system of equatio...
 complib/spbsvx(3) -- compute the solution to a real system of linear equations A * X = B,
    SPBSVX uses the Cholesky factorization A = U**T*U or A = L*L**T to compute the solution to a real system of linear equations A * X = B, where A is an N-by-N symmetric positive definite band matrix and X and B are N-by-NRHS matrices. Error bounds on the solution and a condition estimate are also provided.
 complib/spbtf2(3) -- compute the Cholesky factorization of a real symmetric positive definite band matrix A
    SPBTF2 computes the Cholesky factorization of a real symmetric positive definite band matrix A. The factorization has the form A = U' * U , if UPLO = 'U', or A = L * L', if UPLO = 'L', where U is an upper triangular matrix, U' is the transpose of U, and L is lower triangular. This is the unblocked version of the algorithm, calling Level 2 BLAS.
 complib/spbtrf(3) -- compute the Cholesky factorization of a real symmetric positive definite band matrix A
    SPBTRF computes the Cholesky factorization of a real symmetric positive definite band matrix A. The factorization has the form A = U**T * U, if UPLO = 'U', or A = L * L**T, if UPLO = 'L', where U is an upper triangular matrix and L is lower triangular.
 complib/spbtrs(3) -- solve a system of linear equations A*X = B with a symmetric positive definite band matrix A using the Cholesky
    SPBTRS solves a system of linear equations A*X = B with a symmetric positive definite band matrix A using the Cholesky factorization A = U**T*U or A = L*L**T computed by SPBTRF.
 standard/spclos(3) -- obsolete routine
    none
 standard/sphbitmap(3) -- delimit specification of bitmapped spheres
    none
 standard/sphcolor(3) -- set the diffuse r, g, b color components of bitmapped spheres.
    clr the specification of the diffuse color for bitmap spheres
 standard/sphdraw(3) -- draw a sphere
    params a 4-element array of floats containing the size and location of a sphere. The first 3 elements are the x, y and z coordinates of the sphere center, followed by the sphere radius. FUNCTION RETURN VALUE This function returns -1 if an error occurs, otherwise 0.
 standard/sphfree(3) -- free all internal sphere objects in the Sphere Library's internal cache
    none
 standard/sphgnpolys(3) -- return the number of polygons for the current set of sphere attributes.
    none FUNCTION RETURN VALUE The return value is the number of polygons in current sphere.
 standard/sphmode(3) -- set sphere attributes
    attribute the sphere attribute to set value the value to which the attribute is to be set FUNCTION RETURN VALUE Returns -1 if an invalid attribute or value is specified, 0 otherwise.
 standard/sphobj(3) -- create a GL object containing a sphere
    objid the integer object identifier of the requested sphere FUNCTION RETURN VALUE none
 standard/sphrotmatrix(3) -- orient spheres
    mat the rotation matrix to specify the orientation of the sphere
 standard/splf(3) -- draws a shaded filled polygon
    n expects the number of vertices in the polygon. There can be no more than 256 vertices in a single polygon. parray expects an array containing the vertices of a polygon. iarray expects the array containing the color map indices which determine the intensities of the vertices of the polygon
 Tcl/split(3) -- Split a string into a proper Tcl list
    Returns a list created by splitting string at each character that is in the splitChars argument. Each element of the result list will consist of the characters from string that lie between instances of the characters in splitChars. Empty list elements will be generated if string contains adjacent characters in splitChars, or if the first or last character of string is in splitChars. If splitChars is an empty string then each character of string becomes a separate element of the result list. Spli...
 Tcl/splitlist(3) -- manipulate Tcl lists
    Tcl_Interp *interp (out) Interpreter to use for error | reporting. If NULL, then no error | message is left. char *list (in) Pointer to a string with proper list structure. int *argcPtr (out) Filled in with number of elements in list. char ***argvPtr (out) *argvPtr will be filled in with the address of an array of pointers to the strings that are the extracted elements of list. There will be *argcPtr valid entries in the array, followed by a NULL entry. int argc (in) Number of elements in argv. ...
 libblas/spmv(3) -- BLAS Level Two (Symmetric/Hermitian)
    dspmv , sspmv , dhpmv and chpmv perform matrix-vector operation y := alpha*A*x + beta*y, where alpha and beta are scalars, x and y are n element vectors and A is an n by n symmetric/hermitian matrix, supplied in packed form.
 complib/SPOCO(3) -- SPOCO factors a real symmetric positive definite matrix and estimates the condition of the matrix. If RCOND is
    On Entry A REAL(LDA, N) the symmetric matrix to be factored. Only the diagonal and upper triangle are used. LDA INTEGER the leading dimension of the array A . N INTEGER the order of the matrix A . On Return A an upper triangular matrix R so that A = TRANS(R)*R where TRANS(R) is the transpose. The strict lower triangle is unaltered. If INFO .NE. 0 , the factorization is not complete. RCOND REAL an estimate of the reciprocal condition of A . For the system A*X = B , relative perturbations in A and...
 complib/spocon(3) -- estimate the reciprocal of the condition number (in the 1-norm) of a real symmetric positive definite matrix u
    SPOCON estimates the reciprocal of the condition number (in the 1-norm) of a real symmetric positive definite matrix using the Cholesky factorization A = U**T*U or A = L*L**T computed by SPOTRF. An estimate is obtained for norm(inv(A)), and the reciprocal of the condition number is computed as RCOND = 1 / (ANORM * norm(inv(A))).
 complib/SPODI(3) -- SPODI computes the determinant and inverse of a certain real symmetric positive definite matrix (see below) us
    On Entry A REAL(LDA, N) the output A from SPOCO or SPOFA or the output X from SQRDC. LDA INTEGER the leading dimension of the array A . N INTEGER the order of the matrix A . JOB INTEGER = 11 both determinant and inverse. = 01 inverse only. = 10 determinant only. On Return A If SPOCO or SPOFA was used to factor A , then SPODI produces the upper half of INVERSE(A) . If SQRDC was used to decompose X , then SPODI produces the upper half of INVERSE(TRANS(X)*X), where TRANS(X) is the transpose. Elemen...
 complib/spoequ(3) -- compute row and column scalings intended to equilibrate a symmetric positive definite matrix A and reduce its
    SPOEQU computes row and column scalings intended to equilibrate a symmetric positive definite matrix A and reduce its condition number (with respect to the two-norm). S contains the scale factors, S(i) = 1/sqrt(A(i,i)), chosen so that the scaled matrix B with elements B(i,j) = S(i)*A(i,j)*S(j) has ones on the diagonal. This choice of S puts the condition number of B within a factor N of the smallest possible condition number over all possible diagonal scalings....
 complib/SPOFA(3) -- SPOFA factors a real symmetric positive definite matrix. SPOFA is usually called by SPOCO, but it can be calle
    On Entry A REAL(LDA, N) the symmetric matrix to be factored. Only the diagonal and upper triangle are used. LDA INTEGER the leading dimension of the array A . N INTEGER the order of the matrix A . On Return A an upper triangular matrix R so that A = TRANS(R)*R where TRANS(R) is the transpose. The strict lower triangle is unaltered. If INFO .NE. 0 , the factorization is not complete. INFO INTEGER = 0 for normal return. = K signals an error condition. The leading minor of order K is not positive d...
 complib/sporfs(3) -- when the coefficient matrix is symmetric positive definite,
    SPORFS improves the computed solution to a system of linear equations when the coefficient matrix is symmetric positive definite, and provides error bounds and backward error estimates for the solution.
 complib/SPOSL(3) -- SPOSL solves the real symmetric positive definite system A * X = B using the factors computed by SPOCO or SPOF
    On Entry A REAL(LDA, N) the output from SPOCO or SPOFA. LDA INTEGER the leading dimension of the array A . N INTEGER the order of the matrix A . B REAL(N) the right hand side vector. On Return B the solution vector X . Error Condition A division by zero will occur if the input factor contains a zero on the diagonal. Technically, this indicates singularity, but it is usually caused by improper subroutine arguments. It will not occur if the subroutines are called correctly and INFO .EQ. 0 . To com...
 complib/sposv(3) -- = B,
    SPOSV computes the solution to a real system of linear equations A * X = B, where A is an N-by-N symmetric positive definite matrix and X and B are N-by-NRHS matrices. The Cholesky decomposition is used to factor A as A = U**T* U, if UPLO = 'U', or A = L * L**T, if UPLO = 'L', where U is an upper triangular matrix and L is a lower triangular matrix. The factored form of A is then used to solve the system of equations A * X = B....
 complib/sposvx(3) -- compute the solution to a real system of linear equations A * X = B,
    SPOSVX uses the Cholesky factorization A = U**T*U or A = L*L**T to compute the solution to a real system of linear equations A * X = B, where A is an N-by-N symmetric positive definite matrix and X and B are N-by-NRHS matrices. Error bounds on the solution and a condition estimate are also provided.
 complib/spotf2(3) -- compute the Cholesky factorization of a real symmetric positive definite matrix A
    SPOTF2 computes the Cholesky factorization of a real symmetric positive definite matrix A. The factorization has the form A = U' * U , if UPLO = 'U', or A = L * L', if UPLO = 'L', where U is an upper triangular matrix and L is lower triangular. This is the unblocked version of the algorithm, calling Level 2 BLAS.
 complib/spotrf(3) -- compute the Cholesky factorization of a real symmetric positive definite matrix A
    SPOTRF computes the Cholesky factorization of a real symmetric positive definite matrix A. The factorization has the form A = U**T * U, if UPLO = 'U', or A = L * L**T, if UPLO = 'L', where U is an upper triangular matrix and L is lower triangular. This is the block version of the algorithm, calling Level 3 BLAS.
 complib/spotri(3) -- compute the inverse of a real symmetric positive definite matrix A using the Cholesky factorization A = U**T*U
    SPOTRI computes the inverse of a real symmetric positive definite matrix A using the Cholesky factorization A = U**T*U or A = L*L**T computed by SPOTRF.
 complib/spotrs(3) -- solve a system of linear equations A*X = B with a symmetric positive definite matrix A using the Cholesky fact
    SPOTRS solves a system of linear equations A*X = B with a symmetric positive definite matrix A using the Cholesky factorization A = U**T*U or A = L*L**T computed by SPOTRF.
 complib/SPPCO(3) -- SPPCO factors a real symmetric positive definite matrix stored in packed form and estimates the condition of t
    On Entry AP REAL (N*(N+1)/2) the packed form of a symmetric matrix A . The columns of the upper triangle are stored sequentially in a one-dimensional array of length N*(N+1)/2 . See comments below for details. N INTEGER the order of the matrix A . On Return AP an upper triangular matrix R , stored in packed form, so that A = TRANS(R)*R . If INFO .NE. 0 , the factorization is not complete. RCOND REAL an estimate of the reciprocal condition of A . For the system A*X = B , relative perturbations in...
 complib/sppcon(3) -- estimate the reciprocal of the condition number (in the 1-norm) of a real symmetric positive definite packed m
    SPPCON estimates the reciprocal of the condition number (in the 1-norm) of a real symmetric positive definite packed matrix using the Cholesky factorization A = U**T*U or A = L*L**T computed by SPPTRF. An estimate is obtained for norm(inv(A)), and the reciprocal of the condition number is computed as RCOND = 1 / (ANORM * norm(inv(A))).
 complib/SPPDI(3) -- SPPDI computes the determinant and inverse of a real symmetric positive definite matrix using the factors comp
    On Entry AP REAL (N*(N+1)/2) the output from SPPCO or SPPFA. N INTEGER the order of the matrix A . JOB INTEGER = 11 both determinant and inverse. = 01 inverse only. = 10 determinant only. On Return AP the upper triangular half of the inverse . The strict lower triangle is unaltered. DET REAL(2) determinant of original matrix if requested. Otherwise not referenced. Determinant = DET(1) * 10.0**DET(2) with 1.0 .LE. DET(1) .LT. 10.0 or DET(1) .EQ. 0.0 . Error Condition A division by zero will occur...
 complib/sppequ(3) -- compute row and column scalings intended to equilibrate a symmetric positive definite matrix A in packed stora
    SPPEQU computes row and column scalings intended to equilibrate a symmetric positive definite matrix A in packed storage and reduce its condition number (with respect to the two-norm). S contains the scale factors, S(i)=1/sqrt(A(i,i)), chosen so that the scaled matrix B with elements B(i,j)=S(i)*A(i,j)*S(j) has ones on the diagonal. This choice of S puts the condition number of B within a factor N of the smallest possible condition number over all possible diagonal scalings....
 complib/SPPFA(3) -- SPPFA factors a real symmetric positive definite matrix stored in packed form. SPPFA is usually called by SPPC
    On Entry AP REAL (N*(N+1)/2) the packed form of a symmetric matrix A . The columns of the upper triangle are stored sequentially in a one-dimensional array of length N*(N+1)/2 . See comments below for details. N INTEGER the order of the matrix A . On Return AP an upper triangular matrix R , stored in packed form, so that A = TRANS(R)*R . INFO INTEGER = 0 for normal return. = K if the leading minor of order K is not positive definite. Packed Storage The following program segment will pack the upp...
 complib/spprfs(3) -- when the coefficient matrix is symmetric positive definite and packed, and provides error bounds and backward
    SPPRFS improves the computed solution to a system of linear equations when the coefficient matrix is symmetric positive definite and packed, and provides error bounds and backward error estimates for the solution.
 complib/SPPSL(3) -- SPPSL solves the real symmetric positive definite system A * X = B using the factors computed by SPPCO or SPPF
    On Entry AP REAL (N*(N+1)/2) the output from SPPCO or SPPFA. N INTEGER the order of the matrix A . B REAL(N) the right hand side vector. On Return B the solution vector X . Error Condition A division by zero will occur if the input factor contains a zero on the diagonal. Technically, this indicates singularity, but it is usually caused by improper subroutine arguments. It will not occur if the subroutines are called correctly and INFO .EQ. 0 . To compute INVERSE(A) * C where C is a matrix with P...
 complib/sppsv(3) -- = B,
    SPPSV computes the solution to a real system of linear equations A * X = B, where A is an N-by-N symmetric positive definite matrix stored in packed format and X and B are N-by-NRHS matrices. The Cholesky decomposition is used to factor A as A = U**T* U, if UPLO = 'U', or A = L * L**T, if UPLO = 'L', where U is an upper triangular matrix and L is a lower triangular matrix. The factored form of A is then used to solve the system of equations A * X = B....
 complib/sppsvx(3) -- compute the solution to a real system of linear equations A * X = B,
    SPPSVX uses the Cholesky factorization A = U**T*U or A = L*L**T to compute the solution to a real system of linear equations A * X = B, where A is an N-by-N symmetric positive definite matrix stored in packed format and X and B are N-by-NRHS matrices. Error bounds on the solution and a condition estimate are also provided.
 complib/spptrf(3) -- compute the Cholesky factorization of a real symmetric positive definite matrix A stored in packed format
    SPPTRF computes the Cholesky factorization of a real symmetric positive definite matrix A stored in packed format. The factorization has the form A = U**T * U, if UPLO = 'U', or A = L * L**T, if UPLO = 'L', where U is an upper triangular matrix and L is lower triangular.
 complib/spptri(3) -- compute the inverse of a real symmetric positive definite matrix A using the Cholesky factorization A = U**T*U
    SPPTRI computes the inverse of a real symmetric positive definite matrix A using the Cholesky factorization A = U**T*U or A = L*L**T computed by SPPTRF.
 complib/spptrs(3) -- solve a system of linear equations A*X = B with a symmetric positive definite matrix A in packed storage using
    SPPTRS solves a system of linear equations A*X = B with a symmetric positive definite matrix A in packed storage using the Cholesky factorization A = U**T*U or A = L*L**T computed by SPPTRF.
 libblas/spr(3) -- BLAS Level Two Symmetric Packed Matrix Rank 1 Update FORTRAN 77 SYNOPSIS subroutine dspr( uplo, n, alpha, x, i
    dspr and sspr perform the symmetric rank 1 operation A := alpha*x*x' + A, zhpr and chpr perform the hermitian rank 1 operation A := alpha*x*conjg( x' ) + A, where alpha is a real/complex scalar, x is an n element vector and A is an n by n symmetric/hermitian matrix, supplied in packed form.
 libblas/spr2(3) -- BLAS Level Two Symmetric Packed Matrix Rank 2 Update FORTRAN 77 SYNOPSIS subroutine dspr2( uplo, n, alpha, n,
    dspr2 and sspr2 perform the symmetric rank 2 operation A := alpha*x*y' + alpha*y*x' + A, zhpr2 and chpr2 perform the hermitian rank 2 operation A := alpha*x*conjg( y' ) + conjg( alpha )*y*conjg( x' ) + A, where alpha is a real/complex scalar, x is an n element vector and A is an n by n symmetric/hermitian matrix, supplied in packed form.
 spray(3n) -- scatter data in order to check the network
    The spray protocol sends packets to a given machine to test the speed and reliability of communications with that machine. The spray protocol is not a C function interface, per se, but can be accessed using the generic remote procedure calling interface clnt_call() [see rpc_clnt_calls(3N)]. The protocol sends a packet to the called host. The host acknowledges receipt of the packet. The protocol counts the number of acknowledgments and c...
 f90/spread(3) -- Constructs an array from several copies of an actual argument
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 complib/sprod1du(3) -- Compute the product of a 1D Fourier transform with a 1D filter.
    sprod1du and dprod1du compute the product of the Fourier transforms of a real sequence of N samples with the Fourier transforms of a real filter. Note, the product of the Fourier transforms of two sequences is equal to the Fourier transform of their convolution.
 complib/sprod2du(3) -- Compute the product of a 2D Fourier transforms with a 2D filter.
    sprod2du and dprod2du compute the product of the Fourier transforms of 2D real sequence (size N1xN2) with the Fourier transform of 2D real filter. Note, the product of the Fourier transforms of two sequences is equal to the Fourier transform of their convolution.
 complib/sprod3du(3) -- Compute the product of a 3D Fourier transforms with a 3D filter.
    sprod3du and dprod3du compute the product of the Fourier transforms of 3D real sequence (size N1xN2xN3) with the Fourier transform of 3D real filter. Note, the product of the Fourier transforms of two sequences is equal to the Fourier transform of their convolution.
 complib/sprodm1du(3) -- Compute the product of Multiple 1D Fourier transforms with Multiple 1D filters.
    sprodm1du and dprodm1du compute the product of the Fourier transforms of P real sequences of N samples with the Fourier transforms of P real filters. Note, the product of the Fourier transforms of two sequences is equal to the Fourier transform of their convolution.
 complib/sptcon(3) -- compute the reciprocal of the condition number (in the 1-norm) of a real symmetric positive definite tridiagon
    SPTCON computes the reciprocal of the condition number (in the 1-norm) of a real symmetric positive definite tridiagonal matrix using the factorization A = L*D*L**T or A = U**T*D*U computed by SPTTRF. Norm(inv(A)) is computed by a direct method, and the reciprocal of the condition number is computed as RCOND = 1 / (ANORM * norm(inv(A))).
 complib/spteqr(3) -- compute all eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a symmetric positive definite tridiagonal matrix by f
    SPTEQR computes all eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a symmetric positive definite tridiagonal matrix by first factoring the matrix using SPTTRF, and then calling SBDSQR to compute the singular values of the bidiagonal factor. This routine computes the eigenvalues of the positive definite tridiagonal matrix to high relative accuracy. This means that if the eigenvalues range over many orders of magnitude in size, then the small eigenvalues and corresponding eigenvectors will be comput...
 complib/sptrfs(3) -- improve the computed solution to a system of linear equations when the coefficient matrix is symmetric positiv
    SPTRFS improves the computed solution to a system of linear equations when the coefficient matrix is symmetric positive definite and tridiagonal, and provides error bounds and backward error estimates for the solution.
 complib/SPTSL(3) -- SPTSL given a positive definite tridiagonal matrix and a right hand side will find the solution.
    On Entry N INTEGER is the order of the tridiagonal matrix. D REAL(N) is the diagonal of the tridiagonal matrix. On output, D is destroyed. E REAL(N) is the offdiagonal of the tridiagonal matrix. E(1) through E(N-1) should contain the offdiagonal. B REAL(N) is the right hand side vector. On Return B contains the solution. LINPACK. This version dated 08/14/78 . Jack Dongarra, Argonne National Laboratory. No externals Fortran MOD PPPPaaaaggggeeee 1111...
 complib/sptsv(3) -- and X and B are N-by-NRHS matrices
    SPTSV computes the solution to a real system of linear equations A*X = B, where A is an N-by-N symmetric positive definite tridiagonal matrix, and X and B are N-by-NRHS matrices. A is factored as A = L*D*L**T, and the factored form of A is then used to solve the system of equations.
 complib/sptsvx(3) -- positive definite tridiagonal matrix and X and B are N-by-NRHS matrices
    SPTSVX uses the factorization A = L*D*L**T to compute the solution to a real system of linear equations A*X = B, where A is an N-by-N symmetric positive definite tridiagonal matrix and X and B are N-by-NRHS matrices. Error bounds on the solution and a condition estimate are also provided.
 complib/spttrf(3) -- compute the factorization of a real symmetric positive definite tridiagonal matrix A
    SPTTRF computes the factorization of a real symmetric positive definite tridiagonal matrix A. If the subdiagonal elements of A are supplied in the array E, the factorization has the form A = L*D*L**T, where D is diagonal and L is unit lower bidiagonal; if the superdiagonal elements of A are supplied, it has the form A = U**T*D*U, where U is unit upper bidiagonal. (The two forms are equivalent if A is real.)...
 complib/spttrs(3) -- solve a system of linear equations A * X = B with a symmetric positive definite tridiagonal matrix A using the
    SPTTRS solves a system of linear equations A * X = B with a symmetric positive definite tridiagonal matrix A using the factorization A = L*D*L**T or A = U**T*D*U computed by SPTTRF. (The two forms are equivalent if A is real.)
 complib/SQRDC(3) -- SQRDC uses Householder transformations to compute the QR
    On Entry X REAL(LDX,P), where LDX .GE. N. X contains the matrix whose decomposition is to be computed. LDX INTEGER. LDX is the leading dimension of the array X. N INTEGER. N is the number of rows of the matrix X. P INTEGER. P is the number of columns of the matrix X. JPVT INTEGER(P). JPVT contains integers that control the selection of the pivot columns. The K-th column X(K) of X is placed in one of three classes according to the value of JPVT(K). If JPVT(K) .GT. 0, then X(K) is an initial colum...
 complib/SQRSL(3) -- SQRSL applies the output of SQRDC to compute coordinate transformations, projections, and least squares soluti
    On Entry X REAL(LDX,P) X contains the output of SQRDC. LDX INTEGER LDX is the leading dimension of the array X. N INTEGER N is the number of rows of the matrix XK. It must have the same value as N in SQRDC. K INTEGER K is the number of columns of the matrix XK. K must not be greater than MIN(N,P), where P is the same as in the calling sequence to SQRDC. QRAUX REAL(P) QRAUX contains the auxiliary output from SQRDC. Y REAL(N) Y contains an N-vector that is to be manipulated by SQRSL. JOB INTEGER J...
 standard/sqrt(3) -- cube root, square root
    The single-precision and long double-precision routines listed above are only available in the standard math library, -lm, and in -lmx. The sqrt functions return the nonnegative square root of their single argument x. The function sqrt both accepts and returns values of type double. The functions fsqrt and sqrtf accept and return float values. The function sqrtl both accepts and returns values of type long double. A fast version of sqrt and fsqrt which are slightly less accurate are available in...
 f90/sqrt(3) -- cube root, square root
    The single-precision and long double-precision routines listed above are only available in the standard math library, -lm, and in -lmx. The sqrt functions return the nonnegative square root of their single argument x. The function sqrt both accepts and returns values of type double. The functions fsqrt and sqrtf accept and return float values. The function sqrtl both accepts and returns values of type long double. A fast version of sqrt and fsqrt which are slightly less accurate are available in...
 ftn/sqrt(3) -- cube root, square root
    The single-precision and long double-precision routines listed above are only available in the standard math library, -lm, and in -lmx. The sqrt functions return the nonnegative square root of their single argument x. The function sqrt both accepts and returns values of type double. The functions fsqrt and sqrtf accept and return float values. The function sqrtl both accepts and returns values of type long double. A fast version of sqrt and fsqrt which are slightly less accurate are available in...
 complib/srscl(3) -- multiplie an n-element real vector x by the real scalar 1/a
    SRSCL multiplies an n-element real vector x by the real scalar 1/a. This is done without overflow or underflow as long as the final result x/a does not overflow or underflow.
 ftn/ssapi(3) -- SpeedShop runtime library
    The SpeedShop Performance Tools work by invoking functions in the SpeedShop runtime library. This library may be explicitly linked with a user program, in which case the following named routines above may be invoked explicitly. To explicitly link with the SpeedShop runtime, add the option -lss to the link line used to build the program. Doing so will load the two SpeedShop libraries, libss.so and libssrt.so into the executable. ssrt_caliper_point is used to record a caliper point in the experime...
 ssapi(3) -- SpeedShop runtime library
    The SpeedShop Performance Tools work by invoking functions in the SpeedShop runtime library. This library may be explicitly linked with a user program, in which case the following named routines above may be invoked explicitly. To explicitly link with the SpeedShop runtime, add the option -lss to the link line used to build the program. Doing so will load the two SpeedShop libraries, libss.so and libssrt.so into the executable. ssrt_caliper_point is used to record a caliper point in the experime...
 complib/ssbev(3) -- compute all the eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a real symmetric band matrix A
    SSBEV computes all the eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a real symmetric band matrix A.
 complib/ssbevd(3) -- compute all the eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a real symmetric band matrix A
    SSBEVD computes all the eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a real symmetric band matrix A. If eigenvectors are desired, it uses a divide and conquer algorithm. The divide and conquer algorithm makes very mild assumptions about floating point arithmetic. It will work on machines with a guard digit in add/subtract, or on those binary machines without guard digits which subtract like the Cray X-MP, Cray Y-MP, Cray C-90, or Cray-2. It could conceivably fail on hexadecimal or decimal machin...
 complib/ssbevx(3) -- compute selected eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a real symmetric band matrix A
    SSBEVX computes selected eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a real symmetric band matrix A. Eigenvalues and eigenvectors can be selected by specifying either a range of values or a range of indices for the desired eigenvalues.
 complib/ssbgst(3) -- A*x = lambda*B*x to standard form C*y = lambda*y,
    SSBGST reduces a real symmetric-definite banded generalized eigenproblem A*x = lambda*B*x to standard form C*y = lambda*y, such that C has the same bandwidth as A. B must have been previously factorized as S**T*S by SPBSTF, using a split Cholesky factorization. A is overwritten by C = X**T*A*X, where X = S**(-1)*Q and Q is an orthogonal matrix chosen to preserve the bandwidth of A.
 complib/ssbgv(3) -- a real generalized symmetric-definite banded eigenproblem, of the form A*x=(lambda)*B*x
    SSBGV computes all the eigenvalues, and optionally, the eigenvectors of a real generalized symmetric-definite banded eigenproblem, of the form A*x=(lambda)*B*x. Here A and B are assumed to be symmetric and banded, and B is also positive definite.
 complib/ssbtrd(3) -- reduce a real symmetric band matrix A to symmetric tridiagonal form T by an orthogonal similarity transformati
    SSBTRD reduces a real symmetric band matrix A to symmetric tridiagonal form T by an orthogonal similarity transformation: Q**T * A * Q = T.
 c++/ssbuf(3) -- streambuf specialized to arrays
    A strstreambuf is a streambuf that uses an array of bytes (a string) to hold the sequence of characters. Given the convention that a char* should be interpreted as pointing just before the char it really points at, the mapping between the abstract get/put pointers (see sbuf.pub(3C++)) and char* pointers is direct. Moving the pointers corresponds exactly to incrementing...
 complib/sscal1d(3) -- scales a 1D real sequence.
    sscal1d and dscal1d scale a 1D real sequence of N samples. The Fourier Transforms are not normalized so the succession DirectInverse transform scales the input data by a factor equal to the size of the transform. sscal1d or dscal1d may be used to scale back the result.
 complib/sscal2d(3) -- scales 2D real sequence.
    sscal2d and dscal2d scale the 2D real sequence of N1xN2 sample. The Fourier Transforms are not normalized so the succession DirectInverse transform scales the input data by a factor equal to the size of the transform. So sscal2d or dscal2d may be used to scale back the result.
 complib/sscal3d(3) -- scales 3D real sequence.
    sscal3d and dscal3d scale the 3D real sequence of N1xN2xN3 samples. The Fourier Transforms are not normalized so the succession DirectInverse transform scales the input data by a factor equal to the size of the transform. So sscal3d or dscal3d may be used to scale back the result.
 complib/sscalm1d(3) -- scales Multiple 1D real sequences.
    sscalm1d and dscalm1d scale the P real sequences of N samples each. The Fourier Transforms are not normalized so the succession DirectInverse transform scales the input data by a factor equal to the size of the transform. Often sscalm1d or dscalm1d are used to scale back the result.
 ssdi(3c) -- consult configuration file and load DSO corresponding to the source for a given system database
    The ssdi_get_config_and_load function provides the means for an application to load the dynamic shared object (DSO) corresponding to a source for a given system database. A database is a collection of information related to users, groups, networks, etc. that the operating system expects to be maintained by user-level libraries. For example, information relating to users is encapsulated by the passw...
 complib/SSICO(3) -- SSICO factors a real symmetric matrix by elimination with symmetric pivoting and estimates the condition of th
    On Entry A REAL(LDA, N) the symmetric matrix to be factored. Only the diagonal and upper triangle are used. LDA INTEGER the leading dimension of the array A . N INTEGER the order of the matrix A . Output A a block diagonal matrix and the multipliers which were used to obtain it. The factorization can be written A = U*D*TRANS(U) where U is a product of permutation and unit upper triangular matrices , TRANS(U) is the transpose of U , and D is block diagonal with 1 by 1 and 2 by 2 blocks. KPVT INTE...
 complib/SSIDI(3) -- SSIDI computes the determinant, inertia and inverse of a real symmetric matrix using the factors from SSIFA.
    On Entry A REAL(LDA,N) the output from SSIFA. LDA INTEGER the leading dimension of the array A. N INTEGER the order of the matrix A. KPVT INTEGER(N) the pivot vector from SSIFA. WORK REAL(N) work vector. Contents destroyed. JOB INTEGER JOB has the decimal expansion ABC where If C .NE. 0, the inverse is computed, If B .NE. 0, the determinant is computed, If A .NE. 0, the inertia is computed. For example, JOB = 111 gives all three. On Return Variables not requested by JOB are not used. A contains ...
 complib/SSIFA(3) -- SSIFA factors a real symmetric matrix by elimination with symmetric pivoting. To solve A*X = B , follow SSIFA
    On Entry A REAL(LDA,N) the symmetric matrix to be factored. Only the diagonal and upper triangle are used. LDA INTEGER the leading dimension of the array A . N INTEGER the order of the matrix A . On Return A a block diagonal matrix and the multipliers which were used to obtain it. The factorization can be written A = U*D*TRANS(U) where U is a product of permutation and unit upper triangular matrices , TRANS(U) is the transpose of U , and D is block diagonal with 1 by 1 and 2 by 2 blocks. KPVT IN...
 ssignal(3c) -- software signals
    ssignal and gsignal implement a software facility similar to signal(2). This facility is used by the Standard C Library to enable users to indicate the disposition of error conditions, and is also made available to users for their own purposes. Software signals made available to users are associated with integers in the inclusive range 1 through 16. A call to ssignal associates a procedure, action, with the software signal sig; the software signal, sig, is raised by a call to gsignal. Raising a ...
 complib/SSISL(3) -- SSISL solves the real symmetric system A * X = B using the factors computed by SSIFA.
    On Entry A REAL(LDA,N) the output from SSIFA. LDA INTEGER the leading dimension of the array A . N INTEGER the order of the matrix A . KPVT INTEGER(N) the pivot vector from SSIFA. B REAL(N) the right hand side vector. On Return B the solution vector X . Error Condition A division by zero may occur if SSICO has set RCOND .EQ. 0.0 or SSIFA has set INFO .NE. 0 . To compute INVERSE(A) * C where C is a matrix with P columns CALL SSIFA(A,LDA,N,KPVT,INFO) IF (INFO .NE. 0) GO TO ... DO 10 J = 1, P CALL ...
 complib/SSPCO(3) -- SSPCO factors a real symmetric matrix stored in packed form by elimination with symmetric pivoting and estimat
    On Entry AP REAL (N*(N+1)/2) the packed form of a symmetric matrix A . The columns of the upper triangle are stored sequentially in a one-dimensional array of length N*(N+1)/2 . See comments below for details. N INTEGER the order of the matrix A . Output AP a block diagonal matrix and the multipliers which were used to obtain it stored in packed form. The factorization can be written A = U*D*TRANS(U) where U is a product of permutation and unit upper triangular matrices , TRANS(U) is the transpo...
 complib/sspcon(3) -- estimate the reciprocal of the condition number (in the 1-norm) of a real symmetric packed matrix A using the
    SSPCON estimates the reciprocal of the condition number (in the 1-norm) of a real symmetric packed matrix A using the factorization A = U*D*U**T or A = L*D*L**T computed by SSPTRF. An estimate is obtained for norm(inv(A)), and the reciprocal of the condition number is computed as RCOND = 1 / (ANORM * norm(inv(A))).
 complib/SSPDI(3) -- SSPDI computes the determinant, inertia and inverse of a real symmetric matrix using the factors from SSPFA, w
    On Entry AP REAL (N*(N+1)/2) the output from SSPFA. N INTEGER the order of the matrix A. KPVT INTEGER(N) the pivot vector from SSPFA. WORK REAL(N) work vector. Contents ignored. JOB INTEGER JOB has the decimal expansion ABC where If C .NE. 0, the inverse is computed, If B .NE. 0, the determinant is computed, If A .NE. 0, the inertia is computed. For example, JOB = 111 gives all three. On Return Variables not requested by JOB are not used. AP contains the upper triangle of the inverse of the orig...
 complib/sspev(3) -- compute all the eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a real symmetric matrix A in packed storage
    SSPEV computes all the eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a real symmetric matrix A in packed storage.
 complib/sspevd(3) -- compute all the eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a real symmetric matrix A in packed storage
    SSPEVD computes all the eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a real symmetric matrix A in packed storage. If eigenvectors are desired, it uses a divide and conquer algorithm. The divide and conquer algorithm makes very mild assumptions about floating point arithmetic. It will work on machines with a guard digit in add/subtract, or on those binary machines without guard digits which subtract like the Cray X-MP, Cray Y-MP, Cray C-90, or Cray-2. It could conceivably fail on hexadecimal or d...
 complib/sspevx(3) -- compute selected eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a real symmetric matrix A in packed storage
    SSPEVX computes selected eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a real symmetric matrix A in packed storage. Eigenvalues/vectors can be selected by specifying either a range of values or a range of indices for the desired eigenvalues.
 complib/SSPFA(3) -- SSPFA factors a real symmetric matrix stored in packed form by elimination with symmetric pivoting. To solve A
    On Entry AP REAL (N*(N+1)/2) the packed form of a symmetric matrix A . The columns of the upper triangle are stored sequentially in a one-dimensional array of length N*(N+1)/2 . See comments below for details. N INTEGER the order of the matrix A . Output AP a block diagonal matrix and the multipliers which were used to obtain it stored in packed form. The factorization can be written A = U*D*TRANS(U) where U is a product of permutation and unit upper triangular matrices , TRANS(U) is the transpo...
 complib/sspgst(3) -- reduce a real symmetric-definite generalized eigenproblem to standard form, using packed storage
    SSPGST reduces a real symmetric-definite generalized eigenproblem to standard form, using packed storage. If ITYPE = 1, the problem is A*x = lambda*B*x, and A is overwritten by inv(U**T)*A*inv(U) or inv(L)*A*inv(L**T) If ITYPE = 2 or 3, the problem is A*B*x = lambda*x or B*A*x = lambda*x, and A is overwritten by U*A*U**T or L**T*A*L. B must have been previously factorized as U**T*U or L*L**T by SPPTRF....
 complib/sspgv(3) -- a real generalized symmetric-definite eigenproblem, of the form A*x=(lambda)*B*x, A*Bx=(lambda)*x, or B*A*x=(l
    SSPGV computes all the eigenvalues and, optionally, the eigenvectors of a real generalized symmetric-definite eigenproblem, of the form A*x=(lambda)*B*x, A*Bx=(lambda)*x, or B*A*x=(lambda)*x. Here A and B are assumed to be symmetric, stored in packed format, and B is also positive definite.
 complib/ssprfs(3) -- improve the computed solution to a system of linear equations when the coefficient matrix is symmetric indefin
    SSPRFS improves the computed solution to a system of linear equations when the coefficient matrix is symmetric indefinite and packed, and provides error bounds and backward error estimates for the solution.
 complib/SSPSL(3) -- SSISL solves the real symmetric system A * X = B using the factors computed by SSPFA.
    On Entry AP REAL(N*(N+1)/2) the output from SSPFA. N INTEGER the order of the matrix A . KPVT INTEGER(N) the pivot vector from SSPFA. B REAL(N) the right hand side vector. On Return B the solution vector X . Error Condition A division by zero may occur if SSPCO has set RCOND .EQ. 0.0 or SSPFA has set INFO .NE. 0 . To compute INVERSE(A) * C where C is a matrix with P columns CALL SSPFA(AP,N,KPVT,INFO) IF (INFO .NE. 0) GO TO ... DO 10 J = 1, P CALL SSPSL(AP,N,KPVT,C(1,J)) 10 CONTINUE LINPACK. This...
 complib/sspsv(3) -- = B,
    SSPSV computes the solution to a real system of linear equations A * X = B, where A is an N-by-N symmetric matrix stored in packed format and X and B are N-by-NRHS matrices. The diagonal pivoting method is used to factor A as A = U * D * U**T, if UPLO = 'U', or A = L * D * L**T, if UPLO = 'L', where U (or L) is a product of permutation and unit upper (lower) triangular matrices, D is symmetric and block diagonal with 1-by-1 and 2-by-2 diagonal blocks. The factored form of A is then used to s...
 complib/sspsvx(3) -- X and B are N-by-NRHS matrices
    SSPSVX uses the diagonal pivoting factorization A = U*D*U**T or A = L*D*L**T to compute the solution to a real system of linear equations A * X = B, where A is an N-by-N symmetric matrix stored in packed format and X and B are N-by-NRHS matrices. Error bounds on the solution and a condition estimate are also provided.
 complib/ssptrd(3) -- reduce a real symmetric matrix A stored in packed form to symmetric tridiagonal form T by an orthogonal simila
    SSPTRD reduces a real symmetric matrix A stored in packed form to symmetric tridiagonal form T by an orthogonal similarity transformation: Q**T * A * Q = T.
 complib/ssptrf(3) -- packed format using the Bunch-Kaufman diagonal pivoting method
    SSPTRF computes the factorization of a real symmetric matrix A stored in packed format using the Bunch-Kaufman diagonal pivoting method: A = U*D*U**T or A = L*D*L**T where U (or L) is a product of permutation and unit upper (lower) triangular matrices, and D is symmetric and block diagonal with 1-by-1 and 2-by-2 diagonal blocks.
 complib/ssptri(3) -- compute the inverse of a real symmetric indefinite matrix A in packed storage using the factorization A = U*D*
    SSPTRI computes the inverse of a real symmetric indefinite matrix A in packed storage using the factorization A = U*D*U**T or A = L*D*L**T computed by SSPTRF.
 complib/ssptrs(3) -- solve a system of linear equations A*X = B with a real symmetric matrix A stored in packed format using the fa
    SSPTRS solves a system of linear equations A*X = B with a real symmetric matrix A stored in packed format using the factorization A = U*D*U**T or A = L*D*L**T computed by SSPTRF.
 complib/sstebz(3) -- compute the eigenvalues of a symmetric tridiagonal matrix T
    SSTEBZ computes the eigenvalues of a symmetric tridiagonal matrix T. The user may ask for all eigenvalues, all eigenvalues in the half-open interval (VL, VU], or the IL-th through IU-th eigenvalues. To avoid overflow, the matrix must be scaled so that its largest element is no greater than overflow**(1/2) * underflow**(1/4) in absolute value, and for greatest accuracy, it should not be much smaller than that. See W. Kahan "Accurate Eigenvalues of a Symmetric Tridiagonal Matrix", Report CS41, C...
 complib/sstedc(3) -- compute all eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a symmetric tridiagonal matrix using the divide and c
    SSTEDC computes all eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a symmetric tridiagonal matrix using the divide and conquer method. The eigenvectors of a full or band real symmetric matrix can also be found if SSYTRD or SSPTRD or SSBTRD has been used to reduce this matrix to tridiagonal form. This code makes very mild assumptions about floating point arithmetic. It will work on machines with a guard digit in add/subtract, or on those binary machines without guard digits which subtract like the ...
 complib/sstein(3) -- compute the eigenvectors of a real symmetric tridiagonal matrix T corresponding to specified eigenvalues, usin
    SSTEIN computes the eigenvectors of a real symmetric tridiagonal matrix T corresponding to specified eigenvalues, using inverse iteration. The maximum number of iterations allowed for each eigenvector is specified by an internal parameter MAXITS (currently set to 5).
 complib/ssteqr(3) -- compute all eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a symmetric tridiagonal matrix using the implicit QL
    SSTEQR computes all eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a symmetric tridiagonal matrix using the implicit QL or QR method. The eigenvectors of a full or band symmetric matrix can also be found if SSYTRD or SSPTRD or SSBTRD has been used to reduce this matrix to tridiagonal form.
 complib/ssterf(3) -- the Pal-Walker-Kahan variant of the QL or QR algorithm
    SSTERF computes all eigenvalues of a symmetric tridiagonal matrix using the Pal-Walker-Kahan variant of the QL or QR algorithm.
 complib/sstev(3) -- compute all eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a real symmetric tridiagonal matrix A
    SSTEV computes all eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a real symmetric tridiagonal matrix A.
 complib/sstevd(3) -- compute all eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a real symmetric tridiagonal matrix
    SSTEVD computes all eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a real symmetric tridiagonal matrix. If eigenvectors are desired, it uses a divide and conquer algorithm. The divide and conquer algorithm makes very mild assumptions about floating point arithmetic. It will work on machines with a guard digit in add/subtract, or on those binary machines without guard digits which subtract like the Cray X-MP, Cray Y-MP, Cray C-90, or Cray-2. It could conceivably fail on hexadecimal or decimal machi...
 complib/sstevx(3) -- compute selected eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a real symmetric tridiagonal matrix A
    SSTEVX computes selected eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a real symmetric tridiagonal matrix A. Eigenvalues and eigenvectors can be selected by specifying either a range of values or a range of indices for the desired eigenvalues.
 complib/SSVDC(3) -- SSVDC is a subroutine to reduce a real NxP matrix X by orthogonal transformations U and V to diagonal form. Th
    On Entry X REAL(LDX,P), where LDX .GE. N. X contains the matrix whose singular value decomposition is to be computed. X is destroyed by SSVDC. LDX INTEGER LDX is the leading dimension of the array X. N INTEGER N is the number of columns of the matrix X. P INTEGER P is the number of rows of the matrix X. LDU INTEGER LDU is the leading dimension of the array U. (See below). LDV INTEGER LDV is the leading dimension of the array V. (See below). WORK REAL(N) work is a scratch array. JOB INTEGER JOB c...
 complib/ssycon(3) -- estimate the reciprocal of the condition number (in the 1-norm) of a real symmetric matrix A using the factori
    SSYCON estimates the reciprocal of the condition number (in the 1-norm) of a real symmetric matrix A using the factorization A = U*D*U**T or A = L*D*L**T computed by SSYTRF. An estimate is obtained for norm(inv(A)), and the reciprocal of the condition number is computed as RCOND = 1 / (ANORM * norm(inv(A))).
 complib/ssyev(3) -- compute all eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a real symmetric matrix A
    SSYEV computes all eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a real symmetric matrix A.
 complib/ssyevd(3) -- compute all eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a real symmetric matrix A
    SSYEVD computes all eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a real symmetric matrix A. If eigenvectors are desired, it uses a divide and conquer algorithm. The divide and conquer algorithm makes very mild assumptions about floating point arithmetic. It will work on machines with a guard digit in add/subtract, or on those binary machines without guard digits which subtract like the Cray X-MP, Cray Y-MP, Cray C-90, or Cray-2. It could conceivably fail on hexadecimal or decimal machines withou...
 complib/ssyevx(3) -- compute selected eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a real symmetric matrix A
    SSYEVX computes selected eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a real symmetric matrix A. Eigenvalues and eigenvectors can be selected by specifying either a range of values or a range of indices for the desired eigenvalues.
 complib/ssygs2(3) -- reduce a real symmetric-definite generalized eigenproblem to standard form
    SSYGS2 reduces a real symmetric-definite generalized eigenproblem to standard form. If ITYPE = 1, the problem is A*x = lambda*B*x, and A is overwritten by inv(U')*A*inv(U) or inv(L)*A*inv(L') If ITYPE = 2 or 3, the problem is A*B*x = lambda*x or B*A*x = lambda*x, and A is overwritten by U*A*U` or L'*A*L. B must have been previously factorized as U'*U or L*L' by SPOTRF.
 complib/ssygst(3) -- reduce a real symmetric-definite generalized eigenproblem to standard form
    SSYGST reduces a real symmetric-definite generalized eigenproblem to standard form. If ITYPE = 1, the problem is A*x = lambda*B*x, and A is overwritten by inv(U**T)*A*inv(U) or inv(L)*A*inv(L**T) If ITYPE = 2 or 3, the problem is A*B*x = lambda*x or B*A*x = lambda*x, and A is overwritten by U*A*U**T or L**T*A*L. B must have been previously factorized as U**T*U or L*L**T by SPOTRF.
 complib/ssygv(3) -- a real generalized symmetric-definite eigenproblem, of the form A*x=(lambda)*B*x, A*Bx=(lambda)*x, or B*A*x=(l
    SSYGV computes all the eigenvalues, and optionally, the eigenvectors of a real generalized symmetric-definite eigenproblem, of the form A*x=(lambda)*B*x, A*Bx=(lambda)*x, or B*A*x=(lambda)*x. Here A and B are assumed to be symmetric and B is also positive definite.
 complib/ssyrfs(3) -- improve the computed solution to a system of linear equations when the coefficient matrix is symmetric indefin
    SSYRFS improves the computed solution to a system of linear equations when the coefficient matrix is symmetric indefinite, and provides error bounds and backward error estimates for the solution.
 complib/ssysv(3) -- = B,
    SSYSV computes the solution to a real system of linear equations A * X = B, where A is an N-by-N symmetric matrix and X and B are Nby-NRHS matrices. The diagonal pivoting method is used to factor A as A = U * D * U**T, if UPLO = 'U', or A = L * D * L**T, if UPLO = 'L', where U (or L) is a product of permutation and unit upper (lower) triangular matrices, and D is symmetric and block diagonal with 1-by-1 and 2-by-2 diagonal blocks. The factored form of A is then used to solve the system of eq...
 complib/ssysvx(3) -- to a real system of linear equations A * X = B,
    SSYSVX uses the diagonal pivoting factorization to compute the solution to a real system of linear equations A * X = B, where A is an N-by-N symmetric matrix and X and B are N-by-NRHS matrices. Error bounds on the solution and a condition estimate are also provided.
 complib/ssytd2(3) -- reduce a real symmetric matrix A to symmetric tridiagonal form T by an orthogonal similarity transformation
    SSYTD2 reduces a real symmetric matrix A to symmetric tridiagonal form T by an orthogonal similarity transformation: Q' * A * Q = T.
 complib/ssytf2(3) -- Bunch-Kaufman diagonal pivoting method
    SSYTF2 computes the factorization of a real symmetric matrix A using the Bunch-Kaufman diagonal pivoting method: A = U*D*U' or A = L*D*L' where U (or L) is a product of permutation and unit upper (lower) triangular matrices, U' is the transpose of U, and D is symmetric and block diagonal with 1-by-1 and 2-by-2 diagonal blocks. This is the unblocked version of the algorithm, calling Level 2 BLAS....
 complib/ssytrd(3) -- reduce a real symmetric matrix A to real symmetric tridiagonal form T by an orthogonal similarity transformati
    SSYTRD reduces a real symmetric matrix A to real symmetric tridiagonal form T by an orthogonal similarity transformation: Q**T * A * Q = T.
 complib/ssytrf(3) -- Bunch-Kaufman diagonal pivoting method
    SSYTRF computes the factorization of a real symmetric matrix A using the Bunch-Kaufman diagonal pivoting method. The form of the factorization is A = U*D*U**T or A = L*D*L**T where U (or L) is a product of permutation and unit upper (lower) triangular matrices, and D is symmetric and block diagonal with 1-by-1 and 2-by-2 diagonal blocks. This is the blocked version of the algorithm, calling Level 3 BLAS....
 complib/ssytri(3) -- compute the inverse of a real symmetric indefinite matrix A using the factorization A = U*D*U**T or A = L*D*L*
    SSYTRI computes the inverse of a real symmetric indefinite matrix A using the factorization A = U*D*U**T or A = L*D*L**T computed by SSYTRF.
 complib/ssytrs(3) -- solve a system of linear equations A*X = B with a real symmetric matrix A using the factorization A = U*D*U**T
    SSYTRS solves a system of linear equations A*X = B with a real symmetric matrix A using the factorization A = U*D*U**T or A = L*D*L**T computed by SSYTRF.
 standard/staux(3) -- routines that provide scalar interfaces to auxiliaries
    Auxiliary entries are unions with a fixed length of four bytes per entry. Much information is packed within the auxiliaries. Rather than have the compiler front-ends handle each type of auxiliary entry directly, the following set of routines provide a high-level scalar interface to the auxiliaries: st_auxbtadd Adds a type information record (TIR) to the auxiliaries. It sets the basic type (bt) to the argument and all other fields to zero. The index to this auxiliary entry is returned. st_auxbtsi...
 complib/stbcon(3) -- band matrix A, in either the 1-norm or the infinity-norm
    STBCON estimates the reciprocal of the condition number of a triangular band matrix A, in either the 1-norm or the infinity-norm. The norm of A is computed and an estimate is obtained for norm(inv(A)), then the reciprocal of the condition number is computed as RCOND = 1 / ( norm(A) * norm(inv(A)) ).
 complib/stbrfs(3) -- provide error bounds and backward error estimates for the solution to a system of linear equations with a tria
    STBRFS provides error bounds and backward error estimates for the solution to a system of linear equations with a triangular band coefficient matrix. The solution matrix X must be computed by STBTRS or some other means before entering this routine. STBRFS does not do iterative refinement because doing so cannot improve the backward error.
 complib/stbtrs(3) -- B,
    STBTRS solves a triangular system of the form where A is a triangular band matrix of order N, and B is an N-by NRHS matrix. A check is made to verify that A is nonsingular.
 standard/stcu(3) -- routines that provide a compilation unit symbol table interface
    The stcu routines provide an interface to objects that occur once per object rather than once per file descriptor (for example, external symbols, strings, and dense numbers). The routines provide access to the current chdr (compile time hdr), which represents the symbol table in running processes with pointers to symbol table sections rather than indices and offsets used in the disk file representation. A new symbol table can be created with st_cuinit. This routine creates and initializes a CHDR...
 stdio(3s) -- standard buffered input/output package
    The functions described in the entries of sub-class 3S of this manual constitute an efficient, user-level I/O buffering scheme. The in-line macros get handle characters quickly. The macros getchar and putchar, and the higher-level routines fgetc, fgets, fprintf, fputc, fputs, fread, fscanf, fwrite, gets, getw, printf, puts, putw, and scanf all use or act as if they use getc and putc; they can be freely intermixed. A file with associated buffering is called a stream and is declared to be a pointe...
 c++/stdiobuf(3) -- iostream specialized to stdio FILE
    Operations on a stdiobuf are reflected on the associated FILE. A stdiobuf is constructed in unbuffered mode, which causes all operations to be reflected immediately in the FILE. seekg()s and seekp()s are translated into fseek()s. setbuf() has its usual meaning; if it supplies a reserve area, buffering will be turned back on....
 stdipc(3c) -- standard interprocess communication package
    All interprocess communication facilities require the user to supply a key to be used by the msgget(2), semget(2), and shmget(2) system calls to obtain interprocess communication identifiers. One suggested method for forming a key is to use the ftok subroutine described below. Another way to compose keys is to include the project ID in the most significant byte and to use the remaining portion as a sequence number. There are many ...
 standard/stencil(3) -- alter the operating parameters of the stencil
    enable expects either TRUE or FALSE, enabling or disabling stencil operation. When stencil operation is disabled (the default), the values of the subsequent six parameters are ignored, ref expects a reference value used by the stencil compare function. func expects one of eight flags specifying the stencil comparison function. These flags are SF_NEVER, SF_LESS, SF_EQUAL, SF_LEQUAL, SF_GREATER, SF_NOTEQUAL, SF_GEQUAL, and SF_ALWAYS. mask expects a mask specifying which stencil bitplanes are signi...
 standard/stensize(3) -- specify the number of bit planes desired to comprise the stencil buffer
    planes is the number of bit planes requested to be configured as stencil planes. Only values 0 through 8 are accepted. The default is 0.
 standard/stepunit(3) -- specifies that a graphics window change size in discrete steps
    xunit expects the amount of change per unit in the x direction. The amount is measured in pixels. yunit expects the amount of change per unit in the y direction. The amount is measured in pixels.
 standard/stereobuffer(3) -- configures the framebuffer for stereoscopic viewing
    none
 standard/stfd(3) -- routines that provide access to per file descriptor section of the symbol table
    The stfd routines provide an interface to objects handled on a per file descriptor (or fd) level (for example, local symbols, auxiliaries, local strings, line numbers, optimization entries, procedure descriptor entries, and the file descriptors). These routines constitute a group because they deal with objects corresponding to fields in the FDR structure. Page 1 STFD(3X) STFD(3X) A fd can be activated by reading an existing one into memory or by creating a new one. The compilation unit routines ...
 standard/stfe(3) -- routines that provide a high-level interface to basic functions needed to access and add to the symbol table
    The stfe routines provide a high-level interface to the symbol table based on common needs of the compiler front-ends. st_filebegin Takes a file name and calls st_fdadd (see the stfd manual page). If it's a new file, a symbol is added to the symbol table for it and the user supplied routine, st_feinit, is called. This allows special once per file things to be initialized (for example, the C front-end adds basic type auxiliaries to each file's aux table so that all variables of that type can re...
 complib/stgevc(3) -- compute some or all of the right and/or left generalized eigenvectors of a pair of real upper triangular matri
    STGEVC computes some or all of the right and/or left generalized eigenvectors of a pair of real upper triangular matrices (A,B). The right generalized eigenvector x and the left generalized eigenvector y of (A,B) corresponding to a generalized eigenvalue w are defined by: (A - wB) * x = 0 and y**H * (A - wB) = 0 where y**H denotes the conjugate tranpose of y. If an eigenvalue w is determined by zero diagonal elements of both A and B, a unit vector is returned as the corresponding eigenvector. If...
 complib/stgsja(3) -- compute the generalized singular value decomposition (GSVD) of two real upper triangular (or trapezoidal) matr
    STGSJA computes the generalized singular value decomposition (GSVD) of two real upper triangular (or trapezoidal) matrices A and B. On entry, it is assumed that matrices A and B have the following forms, which may be obtained by the preprocessing subroutine SGGSVP from a general M-by-N matrix A and P-by-N matrix B: N-K-L K L A = K ( 0 A12 A13 ) if M-K-L >= 0; L ( 0 0 A23 ) M-K-L ( 0 0 0 ) N-K-L K L A = K ( 0 A12 A13 ) if M-K-L < 0; M-K ( 0 0 A23 ) N-K-L K L B = L ( 0 0 B13 ) P-L ( 0 0 0 ) where ...
 standard/stio(3) -- routines that provide a binary read/write interface to the MIPS symbol table
    The CHDRR structure (see and the stcu manual page) represents a symbol table in memory. A new CHDRR can be created by reading a symbol table in from disk. St_readbinary and st_readst read a symbol table in from disk. St_readbinary takes the file name of the symbol table and assumes the symbol table header (HDRR in ) occurs at the beginning of the file. St_readst assumes that its file number references a file positioned at the beginning of the symbol table header and t...
 complib/stpcon(3) -- triangular matrix A, in either the 1-norm or the infinity-norm
    STPCON estimates the reciprocal of the condition number of a packed triangular matrix A, in either the 1-norm or the infinity-norm. The norm of A is computed and an estimate is obtained for norm(inv(A)), then the reciprocal of the condition number is computed as RCOND = 1 / ( norm(A) * norm(inv(A)) ).
 complib/stprfs(3) -- provide error bounds and backward error estimates for the solution to a system of linear equations with a tria
    STPRFS provides error bounds and backward error estimates for the solution to a system of linear equations with a triangular packed coefficient matrix. The solution matrix X must be computed by STPTRS or some other means before entering this routine. STPRFS does not do iterative refinement because doing so cannot improve the backward error.
 standard/stprint(3) -- routines to print the symbol table
    The stprint routines and arrays provide an easy way to print the MIPS symbol table. (using st_current pchdr().) The arrays map constants to their ASCII equivalents. The constants can be found in symconst.h and represent languages (lang), symbol types (st), storage classes (sc), basic types (bt), and type qualifiers (tq). The st_dump routine prints an ASCII version of the symbol. If fd is NULL, the routine prints file fd and stdout. The flags can be a mask of a section of symbol table specified b...
 complib/stptri(3) -- compute the inverse of a real upper or lower triangular matrix A stored in packed format
    STPTRI computes the inverse of a real upper or lower triangular matrix A stored in packed format.
 complib/stptrs(3) -- B,
    STPTRS solves a triangular system of the form where A is a triangular matrix of order N stored in packed format, and B is an N-by-NRHS matrix. A check is made to verify that A is nonsingular.
 str(3g) -- string manipulations
    strfind returns the offset of the second string, as2, if it is a substring of string as1. strrspn returns a pointer to the first character in the string to be trimmed (all characters from the first character to the end of string are in tc). strtrns transforms str and copies it into result. Any character that appears in old is replaced with the character in the same position in new. The new result is returned....
 strccpy(3g) -- copy strings, compressing or expanding escape codes
    strccpy copies the input string, up to a null byte, to the output string, compressing the C-language escape sequences (for example, \n, \001) to the equivalent character. A null byte is appended to the output. The output argument must point to a space big enough to accommodate the result. If it is as big as the space pointed to by input it is guaranteed to be big enough. strccpy returns the output argument. strcad...
 ftn/strcmp(3) -- FORTRAN string comparison intrinsic functions
    These functions return .TRUE. if the inequality holds and .FALSE. otherwise. They return the result type logical*2 if the $log2 compile option is in effect; otherwise, the result type is logical*4. Page 1 string(3C) string(3C)
 complib/STRCO(3) -- STRCO estimates the condition of a real triangular matrix.
    On Entry T REAL(LDT,N) T contains the triangular matrix. The zero elements of the matrix are not referenced, and the corresponding elements of the array can be used to store other information. LDT INTEGER LDT is the leading dimension of the array T. N INTEGER N is the order of the system. JOB INTEGER = 0 T is lower triangular. = nonzero T is upper triangular. On Return RCOND REAL an estimate of the reciprocal condition of T . For the system T*X = B , relative perturbations in T and B of size EPS...
 strcoll(3c) -- string collation
    strcoll returns an integer greater than, equal to, or less than zero in direct correlation to whether string s1 is greater than, equal to, or less than the string s2. The comparison is based on strings interpreted as appropriate to the program's locale for category LC_COLLATE [see setlocale(3C)]. Both strcoll and strxfrm provide for locale-specific string sorting. str...
 complib/strcon(3) -- matrix A, in either the 1-norm or the infinity-norm
    STRCON estimates the reciprocal of the condition number of a triangular matrix A, in either the 1-norm or the infinity-norm. The norm of A is computed and an estimate is obtained for norm(inv(A)), then the reciprocal of the condition number is computed as RCOND = 1 / ( norm(A) * norm(inv(A)) ).
 complib/STRDI(3) -- STRDI computes the determinant and inverse of a real triangular matrix.
    On Entry T REAL(LDT,N) T contains the triangular matrix. The zero elements of the matrix are not referenced, and the corresponding elements of the array can be used to store other information. LDT INTEGER LDT is the leading dimension of the array T. N INTEGER N is the order of the system. JOB INTEGER = 010 no det, inverse of lower triangular. = 011 no det, inverse of upper triangular. = 100 det, no inverse. = 110 det, inverse of lower triangular. = 111 det, inverse of upper triangular. On Return...
 strerror(3c) -- get error message string
    strerror maps the error number in errnum to an error message string, and returns a pointer to that string. strerror uses the same set of error messages as perror. The returned string should not be overwritten.
 complib/strevc(3) -- real upper quasi-triangular matrix T
    STREVC computes some or all of the right and/or left eigenvectors of a real upper quasi-triangular matrix T. The right eigenvector x and the left eigenvector y of T corresponding to an eigenvalue w are defined by: T*x = w*x, y'*T = w*y' where y' denotes the conjugate transpose of the vector y. If all eigenvectors are requested, the routine may either return the matrices X and/or Y of right or left eigenvectors of T, or the products Q*X and/or Q*Y, where Q is an input orthogonal matrix. If T w...
 complib/strexc(3) -- reorder the real Schur factorization of a real matrix A = Q*T*Q**T, so that the diagonal block of T with row i
    STREXC reorders the real Schur factorization of a real matrix A = Q*T*Q**T, so that the diagonal block of T with row index IFST is moved to row ILST. The real Schur form T is reordered by an orthogonal similarity transformation Z**T*T*Z, and optionally the matrix Q of Schur vectors is updated by postmultiplying it with Z. T must be in Schur canonical form (as returned by SHSEQR), that is, block upper triangular with 1-by-1 and 2-by-2 diagonal blocks; each 2-by-2 diagonal block has its diagonal e...
 strfmon(3s) -- convert monetary value to string
    strfmon places characters into the array pointed to by s as controlled by the string pointed to by format. No more than maxsize bytes are placed into the array. The format is a character string that contains two types of objects: plain characters, which are simply copied to the output stream, and conversion specifications, each of which results in the fetching of zero or more arguments which are converted and formatted. The results are undefined if there are insufficient arg...
 strftime(3c) -- convert date and time to string
    strftime, ascftime, and cftime place characters into the array pointed to by s as controlled by the string pointed to by format. The format string consists of zero or more directives and ordinary characters. All ordinary characters (including the terminating null character) are copied unchanged into the array. For strftime, no more than maxsize characters are placed into the array. If format is (char *)0...
 perl5/strict(3) -- Perl pragma to restrict unsafe constructs
    If no import list is supplied, all possible restrictions are assumed. (This is the safest mode to operate in, but is sometimes too strict for casual programming.) Currently, there are three possible things to be strict about: "subs", "vars", and "refs". strict refs This generates a runtime error if you use symbolic references (see the perlref manpage). use strict 'refs'; $ref = \$foo; print $$ref; # ok $ref = "foo"; print $$ref; # runtime error; normally ok strict vars This generates ...
 Tk/strictmotif(3) -- Return value of tk_strictMotif variable
    Tk_Window tkwin (in) Token for window.
 Tcl/string(3) -- Manipulate strings
    Performs one of several string operations, depending on option. The legal options (which may be abbreviated) are: string compare string1 string2 Perform a character-by-character comparison of strings string1 and string2 in the same way as the C strcmp procedure. Return -1, 0, or 1, depending on whether string1 is lexicographically less than, equal to, or greater than string2. string first string1 string2 Search string2 for a sequence of characters that exactly match the characters in string1. If...
 string(3c) -- string operations
    The arguments s, s1, and s2 point to strings (arrays of characters terminated by a null character). The functions strcat, strncat, strcpy, strncpy, strtok_r, and strtok, all alter s1. These functions do not check for overflow of the array pointed to by s1, or for overlap between s1 and s2. If overflow of s1 occurs, or copying takes place when s1 and s2 overlap, the behavior is und...
 Tcl/strmatch(3) -- test whether a string matches a pattern
    char*string(in) String to test. char*pattern(in) Pattern to match against string. May contain special characters from the set *?\[].
 strptime(3c) -- date and time conversion
    strptime converts the character string pointed to by buf to values which are stored in the tm structure pointed to by tm, using the format specified by format. The format string consists of zero or more directives and ordinary characters. Each directive is composed of one of the following: one or more white-space characters (as specified by isspace(); an ordinary character (neither % nor a white-space character); or a conversion specification. Each conversion specificatio...
 complib/strrfs(3) -- provide error bounds and backward error estimates for the solution to a system of linear equations with a tria
    STRRFS provides error bounds and backward error estimates for the solution to a system of linear equations with a triangular coefficient matrix. The solution matrix X must be computed by STRTRS or some other means before entering this routine. STRRFS does not do iterative refinement because doing so cannot improve the backward error.
 complib/strsen(3) -- reorder the real Schur factorization of a real matrix A = Q*T*Q**T, so that a selected cluster of eigenvalues
    STRSEN reorders the real Schur factorization of a real matrix A = Q*T*Q**T, so that a selected cluster of eigenvalues appears in the leading diagonal blocks of the upper quasi-triangular matrix T, and the leading columns of Q form an orthonormal basis of the corresponding right invariant subspace. Optionally the routine computes the reciprocal condition numbers of the cluster of eigenvalues and/or the invariant subspace. T must be in Schur canonical form (as returned by SHSEQR), that is, block u...
 complib/STRSL(3) -- STRSL solves systems of the form T * X = B or TRANS(T) * X = B where T is a triangular matrix of order N. Here
    On Entry T REAL(LDT,N) T contains the matrix of the system. The zero elements of the matrix are not referenced, and the corresponding elements of the array can be used to store other information. LDT INTEGER LDT is the leading dimension of the array T. N INTEGER N is the order of the system. B REAL(N). B contains the right hand side of the system. JOB INTEGER JOB specifies what kind of system is to be solved. If JOB is 00 solve T*X=B, T lower triangular, 01 solve T*X=B, T upper triangular, 10 so...
 complib/strsna(3) -- and/or right eigenvectors of a real upper quasi-triangular matrix T (or of any matrix Q*T*Q**T with Q orthogon
    STRSNA estimates reciprocal condition numbers for specified eigenvalues and/or right eigenvectors of a real upper quasi-triangular matrix T (or of any matrix Q*T*Q**T with Q orthogonal). T must be in Schur canonical form (as returned by SHSEQR), that is, block upper triangular with 1-by-1 and 2-by-2 diagonal blocks; each 2-by-2 diagonal block has its diagonal elements equal and its off-diagonal elements of opposite sign....
 c++/strstream(3) -- iostream specialized to arrays
    strstream specializes iostream for ``incore'' operations, that is, storing and fetching from arrays of bytes. The streambuf associated with a strstream is a strstreambuf (see ssbuf(3C++)). In the following descriptions assume: - ss is a strstream. - iss is an istrstream. - oss is an <...
 complib/strsyl(3) -- solve the real Sylvester matrix equation
    STRSYL solves the real Sylvester matrix equation: op(A)*X + X*op(B) = scale*C or op(A)*X - X*op(B) = scale*C, where op(A) = A or A**T, and A and B are both upper quasi- triangular. A is M-by-M and B is N-by-N; the right hand side C and the solution X are M-by-N; and scale is an output scale factor, set <= 1 to avoid overflow in X. A and B must be in Schur canonical form (as returned by SHSEQR), that is, block upper triangular with 1-by-1 and 2-by-2 diagonal blocks; each 2- by-2 diagonal block ha...
 complib/strti2(3) -- compute the inverse of a real upper or lower triangular matrix
    STRTI2 computes the inverse of a real upper or lower triangular matrix. This is the Level 2 BLAS version of the algorithm.
 strtod(3c) -- double-precision number
    (Note that the long double routines are only valid for the MIPSpro compilers.) strtod returns as a double-precision floating-point number the value represented by the character string pointed to by nptr. Similarly, strtold returns as a long double-precision floating-point number the value represented by the character string pointed to by nptr. Each function scans the string up to the first unrecognized character. strtod and str...
 strtol(3c) -- convert string to integer
    strtol returns as a long integer the value represented by the character string pointed to by str. The string is scanned up to the first character inconsistent with the base. Leading ``white-space'' characters [as defined by isspace in ctype(3C)] are ignored. If the value of ptr is not (char **)NULL, a pointer to the character terminating the scan is returned in the location pointed to by ptr. If ...
 complib/strtri(3) -- compute the inverse of a real upper or lower triangular matrix A
    STRTRI computes the inverse of a real upper or lower triangular matrix A. This is the Level 3 BLAS version of the algorithm.
 complib/strtrs(3) -- B,
    STRTRS solves a triangular system of the form where A is a triangular matrix of order N, and B is an N-by-NRHS matrix. A check is made to verify that A is nonsingular.
 standard/strwidth(3) -- returns the width of the specified text string
    type expects the type of this string. See the man page for charstr for a description of the type argument. str expects the pointer to the string to be measured.
 strxfrm(3c) -- string transformation
    strxfrm transforms the string s2 and places the resulting string into the array s1. The transformation is such that if strcmp is applied to two transformed strings, it returns a value greater than, equal to, or less than zero, corresponding to the result of the strcoll function applied to the same two original strings. The transformation is based on the program's locale for category LC_COLLATE [see se
 complib/stzrqf(3) -- reduce the M-by-N ( M<=N ) real upper trapezoidal matrix A to upper triangular form by means of orthogonal tra
    STZRQF reduces the M-by-N ( M<=N ) real upper trapezoidal matrix A to upper triangular form by means of orthogonal transformations. The upper trapezoidal matrix A is factored as A = ( R 0 ) * Z, where Z is an N-by-N orthogonal matrix and R is an M-by-M upper triangular matrix.
 standard/subpixel(3) -- controls the placement of point, line, and polygon vertices
    b expects either FALSE or TRUE. FALSE forces screen vertices to the centers of pixels (default). TRUE positions screen vertices exactly.
 perl5/subs(3) -- Perl pragma to predeclare sub names
    This will predeclare all the subroutine whose names are in the list, allowing you to use them without parentheses even before they're declared. Unlike pragmas that affect the $^H hints variable, the use vars and use subs declarations are not BLOCK-scoped. They are thus effective for the entire file in which they appear. You may not rescind such declarations with no vars or no subs. See the section on Pragmatic Modules in the perlmod manpage and the section on strict subs in the strict manpage. ...
 Tcl/subst(3) -- Perform backslash, command, and variable substitutions
    This command performs variable substitutions, command substitutions, and backslash substitutions on its string argument and returns the fullysubstituted result. The substitutions are performed in exactly the same way as for Tcl commands. As a result, the string argument is actually substituted twice, once by the Tcl parser in the usual fashion for Tcl commands, and again by the subst command. If any of the -nobackslashes, -nocommands, or -novariables are specified, then the corresponding substit...
 standard/subtexload(3) -- load part or all of a texture defined with TX_FASTDEFINE
    target is the texture target to which the texture we are loading is bound. Currently this must be TX_TEXTURE_0. id is the id of the texture we are loading. s0 is the starting S coordinate of the subtexture to load. s1 is the ending S coordinate of the subtexture to load. t0 is the starting T coordinate of the subtexture to load. t1 is the ending T coordinate of the subtexture to load. nt is number of words in the subtexture array. texture is the long word aligned array of texels to load. flags i...
 f90/sum(3) -- Sums array elements
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 complib/SVD(3) -- EISPACK routine. This subroutine determines the singular value decomposition T A=USV of a REAL M by N rectangu
    On Input NM must be set to the row dimension of two-dimensional array parameters as declared in the calling program dimension statement. Note that NM must be at least as large as the maximum of M and N. M is the number of rows of A (and U). N is the number of columns of A (and U) and the order of V. A contains the rectangular input matrix to be decomposed. MATU should be set to .TRUE. if the U matrix in the decomposition is desired, and to .FALSE. otherwise. MATV should be set to .TRUE. if the V...
 swab(3c) -- swap bytes
    swab copies nbytes bytes pointed to by from to the array pointed to by to, exchanging adjacent even and odd bytes. Nbytes should be even and non-negative. If nbytes is odd and positive swab uses nbytes-1 instead. If nbytes is negative, swab does nothing. PPPPaaaaggggeeee 1111
 libblas/swap(3) -- BLAS level ONE swap subroutines FORTRAN 77 SYNOPSIS subroutine dswap( n, dx, incx, dy, incy ) integer incx, in
    dswap, sswap, zswap and cswap interchange n values of vector x and vector y. incx and incy specify the increment between two consecutive elements of respectively vector x and y.
 standard/swapbuffers(3) -- exchanges the front and back buffers of the normal framebuffer
    none
 standard/swapinterval(3) -- defines a minimum time between buffer swaps
    i expects the number of retraces to wait before swapping the front and back buffers. The default interval is 1.
 standard/swaptmesh(3) -- toggles the triangle mesh register pointer
    none
 standard/swinopen(3) -- creates a graphics subwindow
    parent expects the GID (graphics window identifier) of the window (or subwindow) in which you want to open a subwindow. The GID is the returned function value of a previous call to either swinopen or winopen. FUNCTION RETURN VALUE The returned value of this function is either a -1 or the graphics window identifier for the subwindow just created. Use this value to identify this subwindow to other graphics routines. A returned function value of -1 indicates that the system cannot create any more g...
 Tcl/switch(3) -- Evaluate one of several scripts, depending on a given value
    The switch command matches its string argument against each of the pattern arguments in order. As soon as it finds a pattern that matches string it evaluates the following body argument by passing it recursively to the Tcl interpreter and returns the result of that evaluation. If the last pattern argument is default then it matches anything. If no pattern argument matches string and no default is given, then the switch command returns an empty string. If the initial arguments to switch start wit...
 standard/swritemask(3) -- specify which stencil bits can be written
    mask expects a mask whose least-significant bits are used to control writing of the stencil bitplanes. Bitplanes corresponding to 1's in the mask can be written, those corresponding to 0's are readonly.
 Tcl/sybtcl(3) -- Sybase SQL Server access commands for Tcl
    sybconnect login-name password ?server? ?appname? Connect to a Sybase server using login-name and password. If server is specified, then an attempt will be made to login to the named Sybase server. If server is not specified, then the environment variable DSQUERY is used to determine a server; if DSQUERY is not set, sybconnect will try to connect to the Sybase server named SYBASE. If an appname is specified, then that value is passed to the server to display during a process list. A handle is re...
 perl5/Symbol(3) -- manipulate Perl symbols and their names
    Symbol::gensym creates an anonymous glob and returns a reference to it. Such a glob reference can be used as a file or directory handle. For backward compatibility with older implementations that didn't support anonymous globs, Symbol::ungensym is also provided. But it doesn't do anything. Symbol::qualify turns unqualified symbol names into qualified variable names (e.g. "myvar" -> "MyPackage::myvar"). If it is given a second parameter, qualify uses it as the default package; otherwise, it...
 libblas/symm(3) -- BLAS level three Symmetric Matrix Product FORTRAN 77 SYNOPSIS subroutine dsymm( side,uplo,m,n,alpha,a,lda,b,ld
    dsymm, ssymm, zsymm and csymm perform one of the matrix-matrix operations C := alpha*A*B + beta*C, or C := alpha*B*A + beta*C, where alpha and beta are scalars, A is a symmetric matrix and B and C are m by n matrices.
 libblas/symv(3) -- BLAS Level Two (Symmetric/Hermitian)Matrix
    dsymv , ssymv , dhemv and chemv perform the matrix-vector operation y := alpha*A*x + beta*y, where alpha and beta are scalars, x and y are n element vectors and A is an n by n symmetric/hermitian matrix.
 standard/sync(3) -- 0sync: __synchronize, __fetch_and_add, __fetch_and_sub, __fetch_and_or, __fetch_and_and, __fetch_and_xor, __fe
    The intrinsics described here provide a variety of primitive synchronization operations. Besides performing the particular synchronization operation, each of these intrinsics has two key properties: The function performed is guaranteed to be atomic (typically achieved by implementing the operation using a sequence of load-linked/storeconditional instructions in a loop). Associated with each instrinsic are certain memory barrier properties that restrict the movement of memory references to visibl...
 ftn/sync(3) -- 0sync: __synchronize, __fetch_and_add, __fetch_and_sub, __fetch_and_or, __fetch_and_and, __fetch_and_xor, __fe
    The intrinsics described here provide a variety of primitive synchronization operations. Besides performing the particular synchronization operation, each of these intrinsics has two key properties: The function performed is guaranteed to be atomic (typically achieved by implementing the operation using a sequence of load-linked/storeconditional instructions in a loop). Associated with each instrinsic are certain memory barrier properties that restrict the movement of memory references to visibl...
 libblas/syr(3) -- BLAS Level Two (Symmetric/Hermitian)Matrix Rank 1 Update FORTRAN 77 SYNOPSIS subroutine dsyr( uplo, n, alpha,
    dsyr and ssyr perform the symmetric rank 1 operation A := alpha*x*x' + A, zher and cher perform the hermitian rank 1 operation A := alpha*x*conjg( x' ) + A, where alpha is a real/complex scalar, x is an n element vector and A is an n by n symmetric/hermitian matrix.
 libblas/syr2(3) -- BLAS Level Two (Symmetric/Hermitian)Matrix Rank 2 Update FORTRAN 77 SYNOPSIS subroutine dsyr2( uplo, n, alpha,
    dsyr2 and ssyr2 perform the symmetric rank 2 operation A := alpha*x*y' + alpha*y*x' + A, zher2 and cher2 perform the hermitian rank 2 operation A := alpha*x*conjg( y' ) + conjg( alpha )*y*conjg( x' ) + A, where alpha is a scalar, x and y are n element vectors and A is an n by n symmetric/hermitian matrix.
 libblas/syr2k(3) -- BLAS level three Symmetric Rank 2K Update. FORTRAN 77 SYNOPSIS subroutine dsyr2k(uplo,trans,n,k,alpha,a,lda,b,
    dsyr2k , ssyr2k , zsyr2k and csyr2k perform one of the matrix-matrix operations C := alpha*A*B' + alpha*B*A' + beta*C, or C := alpha*A'*B + alpha*B'*A + beta*C, where alpha and beta are scalars, C is an n by n symmetric matrix and A and B are n by k matrices in the first case and k by n matrices in the second case.
 libblas/syrk(3) -- BLAS level three Symmetric Rank K Update. FORTRAN 77 SYNOPSIS subroutine dsyrk( uplo, trans, n, k, alpha, a, l
    dsyrk , ssyrk , zsyrk and csyrk perform one of the matrix-matrix operations C := alpha*A*A' + beta*C, or C := alpha*A'*A + beta*C, where alpha and beta are scalars, C is an n by n symmetric matrix and A is an n by k matrix in the first case and a k by n matrix in the second case.
 perl5/Sys::Hostname(3) -- Try every conceivable way to get hostname
    Attempts several methods of getting the system hostname and then caches the result. It tries syscall(SYS_gethostname), `hostname`, `uname -n`, and the file /com/host. If all that fails it croaks. All nulls, returns, and newlines are removed from the result.
 perl5/Sys::Syslog(3) -- Perl interface to the UNIX syslog(3) calls
    Sys::Syslog is an interface to the UNIX syslog(3) program. Call syslog() with a string priority and a list of printf() args just like syslog(3). Syslog provides the functions: openlog $ident, $logopt, $facility $ident is prepended to every message. $logopt contains one or more of the words pid, ndelay, cons, nowait. $facility specifies the part of the system syslog $priority, $format, @args If $priority permits, logs ($format, @args) printed as by printf(3V), with the addition that %m is replace...
 f90/sysclock(3) -- Returns real-time clock value and number of wraps
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 sysconf(3c) -- get configurable system variables
    The sysconf function provides a method for an application to determine the current value of a configurable system limit or option (variable). By using this function, applications can be more portable across different operating systems. The name argument represents the system variable to be queried. Some of the limits have a minimal value defined by POSIX or XPG4 which may have a higher value under IRIX. Some limits are fixed in the system and some may be altered by the syste...
 sysctl(3c) -- get or set system information
    The sysctl function retrieves system information. The information available from sysctl consists of integers, strings, and tables, and is a small subset of that available from the function of the same name in 4.4BSD-Lite. Unless explicitly noted below, sysctl returns a consistent snapshot of the data requested. Consistency is obtained by locking the destination buffer into memory so that the data may be copied out without blocking. The state is described using a ``Management Information Base''...
 sysid(3c) -- return pseudo-unique system identifier
    sysid provides a pseudo-unique system identifier that is generated from the true unique system identifier. If id is non-NULL, an ASCII representation of the identifier is placed in the array pointed to by id. This function is provided for backward compatibility.
 syslog(3c) -- control system log
    Syslog arranges to write message onto the system log maintained by syslogd(1M). The message is tagged with priority. The message looks like a printf(3S) string except that %m is replaced by the current error message (collected from errno). A trailing newline is added if needed. This message will be read by syslogd(1M) and written to the system console, log files, or forwarded to syslogd on another host as appropriate. Vsyslog is like syslog except that instead of being called with a variable num...
 ftn/system(3) -- issue a shell command from Fortran
    system causes its character argument to be given to sh(1) as input, as if the string had been typed at a terminal. The current process waits until the shell has completed.
 system(3s) -- issue a shell command
    system causes the string to be given to the shell [see sh(1)] as input, as if the string had been typed as a command at a terminal. The current process waits until the shell has completed, then returns the exit status of the shell in the format specified by waitpid(2). If string is a NULL pointer, system checks if /sbin/sh exists and is executable. If /sbin/sh is available, ...
 f90/system_clock(3) -- Returns integer data from a real-time clock
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 standard/t(3) -- specifies a texture coordinate tuple
    vector is a 2, 3, or 4 element array depending on whether you call the t2, t3, or t4 version of the routine. The elements of the array are the s, t, r and q texture coordinates in this order. The default for r is 0. The default for q is 1.
 t6alloc_blk(3n) -- Allocate a control block
    t6alloc_blk allocates a control block according to the attributes specified by mask.
 t6attr_alloc(3n) -- Allocate a control block with all attributes set
    t6attr_alloc allocates a control block and set all of the mask attributes defined by the TSIX(RE) 1.1 SAMP specification. Also note that t6attr_alloc(void) is equivalent to t6alloc_blk(T6M_ALL_ATTRS).
 t6clear_blk(3n) -- Clear a control block
    t6clear_blk marks attributes in the control block pointed to by t6ctl as invalid. The attributes so marked are specified by mask.
 t6cmp_attrs(3n) -- Compare two security attributes
    t6cmp_attrs compares a set of attributes specified by attr1 to the attributes in attr2. Also note that t6cmp_attrs(attr1, attr2) is equivalent to t6cmp_blk(attr1, attr2), and if the attributes T6_IL and T6_PROC_ATTR are used in comparing attribute blocks they will be ignored as they are not implemented.
 t6cmp_blk(3n) -- compare security attributes
    t6cmp_blk compares the two sets of attributes in set1 and set2. Also note that if the attributes T6_IL and T6_PROC_ATTR are used in comparing attribute blocks they will be ignored as they are not implemented.
 t6copy_attr(3n) -- copy security attributes
    t6copy_attr copies a set of attributes specified by attr1 into the buffers controlled by attr2. (Both attr1 and attr2 should have already been allocated by t6alloc_blk). See man pages for t6alloc_blk (3N) for more details. Also note that t6copy_attr(src, dest) is equivalent to t6copy_blk(src, dest).
 t6copy_blk(3n) -- copy security attributes
    t6copy_blk copies a set of attributes specified by attr1 into the buffers controlled by attr2. (Both attr1 and attr2 should have already been allocated by t6create_attr or t6attr_alloc.) See the man page t6alloc_blk(3N) for more details.
 t6create_attr(3n) -- Create a control block
    t6create_attr creates a control block according to the attributes specified by mask. Also note that t6create_attr(mask) is equivalent to t6alloc_blk(mask).
 t6dup_attr(3n) -- duplicate security attributes
    t6dup_attr allocates a new t6attr_t control structure and buffer space large enough to hold the set of security attributes in the t6attr_t control structure src which is passed in as an argument. It then copies that set of attributes specified by src into the newly allocated structure. Upon successful completion, the newly created t6attr_t handle is returned. Also note that t6dup_attr(src) is equivalent to t6dup_blk(src)....
 t6dup_blk(3n) -- Duplicate security attributes
    t6dup_blk allocates a new t6attr_t control structure and buffer space large enough to hold the set of security attributes in the t6attr_t control structure src which is passed in as an argument. It then copies that set of attributes specified by src into the newly allocated structure. Upon successful completion, the newly created t6attr_t handle is returned.
 t6ext_attr(3n) -- Activate extended security attributes or set policy on security attribute change
    t6ext_attr turns on extended security operations on the trusted IPC mechanism. fd is the descriptor associated with the IPC mechanism, and cmd must be ON to turn on extended operations, or OFF to turn them off. When first created, the trusted IPC mechanism appears the same as an untrusted IPC mechanism. It can be used in the same way to send and receive data as long as communications do not violate the security policies of the system. Between systems that support mandatory access control, for ex...
 t6free_attr(3n) -- Deallocate a control block
    t6free_attr deallocates the control block pointed to by t6ctl. Also note that t6free_attr(t6ctl) is equivalent to t6free_blk(t6ctl).
 t6free_blk(3n) -- Deallocate a control block
    t6free_blk deallocates the control block pointed to by t6ctl.
 t6get_attr(3n) -- Get or set security attributes
    t6get_attr() takes a control structure, t6ctl, and attribute type, attr_type, and returns a pointer to the requested attribute value (type) from the opaque control structure t6ctl. attr_type contains a number defined in that specifies what type of attribute that the caller is interested in getting. Only one type can be specified per call. Returned value by t6get_attr() should be type cast to the standard type that represents the type indicated by attr_type. t6set_attr() replaces ...
 t6get_endpt_mask(3n) -- get or set endpoint security attribute mask, get or set endpoint default security attributes
    The security extensions on the communication endpoint include a set of default security attributes that may be applied to outgoing data and an attribute mask that designates which attributes are taken from the endpoint's default attributes and which are taken from the process's effective attributes. By default, data written to an endpoint has associated with it the security attributes of the process that wrote the data. However, a privileged process may change the value of the default attribut...
 t6mls_socket(3n) -- Mark a socket as trusted.
    t6mls_socket marks a socket associated with file descriptor fd as trusted. By default, all sockets are untrusted. If the value of state is T6_ON, the socket is marked as trusted, meaning that security policy is not enforced on data being read by that socket. If the value of state is T6_OFF, the socket is marked as untrusted, meaning that security policy will again be enforced on data read by that socket....
 t6peek_attr(3n) -- examine the security attributes on the next or previous byte of data
    t6peek_attr allows a process to peek ahead at the security attributes of the next byte of data. fd is the descriptor of the trusted endpoint, attr_ptr specifies a structure in which to store those attributes the caller wishes to retrieve. new_attrs points to a mask that indicates which attributes were actually retrieved on return from t6peek_attr t6last_attr allows a process to retrieve the attributes of the last byte of data read from the indicated file descriptor. Its parameters are identical ...
 t6recvfrom(3n) -- Read security attributes and data from a trusted endpoint
    t6recvfrom receives data and its associated security attributes from a communication endpoint. The from and fromlen parameters are only used if you wish to receive the source address for the data. This may not be applicable for some trusted endpoints. If not used, these fields should be set to 0. If from is not a NULL pointer, the source address of the message is filled in. fromlen is a value-result parameter, initialized to the size of the buffer associated with from, and modified on return to ...
 t6rhdb_flush(3n) -- TSIX Remote Host DataBase flush
    t6rhdb_flush() will remove the entry pointed to by addr from the remote host database.
 t6rhdb_get_host(3n) -- TSIX Remote Host DataBase get host information
    t6rhdb_get_host returns information pointed to by addr of length size, into data.
 t6rhdb_put_host(3n) -- TSIX Remote Host DataBase get host information
    t6rhdb_put_host sets a host profile for the Remote Host DataBase, using the information supplied by caddr_t.
 t6rhdb_stat(3n) -- TSIX Remote Host DataBase statistics
    t6rhdb_stat is not supported, and silently fails.
 t6sendto(3n) -- Specify security attributes to send with data on a trusted endpoint
    t6sendto() allows a privileged process to specify the security attributes to send with an IPC message. A process may only specify those attributes for which it possesses the appropriate override privilege and need not specify a full set. Any unspecified attributes are supplied by the kernel. fd is a socket created with socket(3N). The address of the target is given by to with tolen specifying its size. The length of the message is given by len. The to pointer and to_len parameters are only used ...
 t6size_attr(3n) -- Get the size of a particular attribute from the control structure.
    t6size_attr returns the size of an attribute indicated by attr_type. If the t6attr_t control structure t6ctl is a NULL pointer, it returns either the size of a fixed-size attribute or the maximum size of a variable size attribute. If the attr_type is invalid, it returns 0. If the t6attr_t control structure t6ctl is not NULL, it either returns the size of a fixed-size attribute or the actual size occupied by a variable size attribute in the control structure t6ctl. If the attr_type is invalid or ...
 ftn/tan(3) -- trigonometric functions and their inverses
    The single-precision and long double-precision routines listed above are only available in the standard math library, -lm, and in -lmx. sin, cos and tan return trigonometric functions of radian arguments x for double data types. fsin, fcos and ftan, and their ANSI-named counterparts sinf, cosf and tanf return trigonometric functions of radian TRIG(3M) TRIG(3M) arguments x for float data types. sinl, cosl and tanl do the same for long double data types. The asin routines return the arc sine in th...
 ftn/tanh(3) -- hyperbolic functions
    The long double and single-precision routines listed above are only available in the standard math library, -lm and in -lmx. These functions compute the designated hyperbolic functions for double, float, and long double arguments.
 ftn/tapeio(3) -- FORTRAN tape device specific I/O routines
    tapeio is the general name for the set of I/O functions that operate on a tape device. topen, tclose, trewin, tskipf, and tstate return -1 on error, 0 if successful. tread and twrite return -1 on error, the number of bytes read (or written) on success. topen opens a tape unit for I/O. devnam is the name of the tape device. labled should be .true. if the tape is labeled. tlu is set to the logical unit number of the tape device used for subsequent calls. tclose closes a tape unit previously opened...
 taskblock(3p) -- routines to block/unblock tasks
    These routines provide a complete set of blocking/unblocking capabilities for tasks. Blocking is implemented via a counting semaphore in the system. Each call to taskblock decrements the count and, if it goes negative, the task is suspended. When taskunblock is called, the count is incremented, and if it goes positive (or zero), the task is restarted. This provides both a simple, race free synchronization ability between two tasks, as well as a much more powerful capability to synchronize multip...
 taskcreate(3p) -- create a new task
    Taskcreate causes a new task to be created for the calling process/task. The new task is created via the sproc(2) system call, requesting that all attributes (e.g. open files, current directory, uid, etc.) be shared. The new task differs from the calling task as described in sproc(2). The new task will be invoked as follows: entry(arg) void *arg; The sched parameter is currently unused and should be set to 0. No implicit synchronization is implied between tasks - they are free to run on any proc...
 taskctl(3p) -- operations on a task
    taskctl provides both information about tasks and the ability to control certain attributes of a task. option specifies one of the following:
 taskdestroy(3p) -- destroy a task
    Taskdestroy causes the named task to be destroyed. Any task within a process can destroy any other task in that process. Taskdestroy will fail and no task will be destroyed if the following is true: [EINVAL] The tid specified is not a valid task id for the calling process.
 libblas/tbmv(3) -- BLAS Level Two
    dtbmv, stbmv, ztbmv and ctbmv perform one of the matrix-vector operations x := A*x, or x := A'*x, or x := conjg( A' )*x, where x is an n element vector and A is an n by n unit, or non-unit, upper or lower triangular band matrix, with ( k + 1 ) diagonals. dtbsv, stbsv, ztbsv and ctbsv solve one of the systems of equations A*x = b, or A'*x = b, or conjg( A' )*x = b, where b and x are n element vectors and A is an n by n unit, or non-unit, upper or lower triangular band matrix, with ( k + 1 ) d...
 Tcl/tcl(3) -- Summary of Tcl language syntax.
    
 Tm/tclmotif(3) -- the binding of tcl to the Motif widget set.
    This system is based on Tk for the style of widget programming. This was because it provides a good model, but it also allows the Tcl programmer to move relatively easily between Tk and Motif programming. An alternative style of binding to Motif is used in the WKSH system, which performs a similar sort of role for the Korn Shell. The WKSH is much closer to the C API for Xt than is Tk. An intermediate style is provided by the Wafe binding of Xt-based widgets to tcl. The documentation is incomplet...
 Tcl/tclObjSrv(3) -- Tcl-library interface to the object server
    libtclObjSrv.so is a Tcl shared library with extensions for accessing the object server. It supports the get, set, create, remove, verify, search and DSsearch operations, as well as an info pseudo-op that returns information about the database. For each object class there is a command defined; the command name is the class name prefixed by a dot (.) character. The first parameter to the object commands is an option, one of: get, set, create, remove, verify, search, DSsearch, or info. For example...
 Tcl/tclvars(3) -- Variables used by Tcl
    arithmetic, error, environment, POSIX, precision, subprocess, variables PPPPaaaaggggeeee 3333
 Tcl/tclx(3) -- Extended Tcl: Extended command set for Tcl
    These commands provide access to many basic Unix facilities, including process handling, date and time processing, signal handling and the executing commands via the shell. alarm seconds Instructs the system to send a SIGALRM signal in the specified number of seconds. This is a floating point number, so fractions of a section may be specified. If seconds is 0.0, any previous alarm request is canceled. Only one alarm at a time may be active; the command returns the number of seconds left in the p...
 Tcl/tclxinit(3) -- Extended Tcl initialization.
    These functions are used to initialize Extended Tcl and applications based on Extended Tcl. IMPORTANT NOTE: libtclx.a must be specified on the link command line before libtcl.a. If the order is reversed, incorrect command line parsing code will be used. tclAppName The application name to be returned by the infox command. This should be a short mnemonic. This value maybe altered from the default by the application. tclAppLongname The application long name to be returned by the infox command. This...
 Tcl/tcl_main(3) -- main program for Tcl-based applications
    int argc (in) Number of elements in argv. char *argv[] (in) Array of strings containing command-line arguments. Tcl_AppInitProc *appInitProc (in) Address of an applicationspecific initialization procedure. The value for this argument is usually Tcl_AppInit.
 Tcl/tell(3) -- Return current access position for an open file
    Returns a decimal string giving the current access position in fileId. FileId must have been the return value from a previous call to open, or it may be stdin, stdout, or stderr to refer to one of the standard I/O channels.
 tell(3c) -- return the read/write file pointer
    filedes is a file descriptor returned from a creat, open, dup, fcntl, pipe, or ioctl, system call. tell and tell64 return the file pointer associated with filedes. The two differ in that tell returns an off_t and tell64 returns an off64_t. The 64-bit offset returned by tell64 is useful for 32 bit applications working with 64 bit files. This i...
 perl5/Term::Cap(3) -- Perl termcap interface
    These are low-level functions to extract and use capabilities from a terminal capability (termcap) database. The Tgetent function extracts the entry of the specified terminal type TERM (defaults to the environment variable TERM) from the database. It will look in the environment for a TERMCAP variable. If found, and the value does not begin with a slash, and the terminal type name is the same as the environment string TERM, the TERMCAP string is used instead of reading a termcap file. If it does...
 perl5/Term::Complete(3) -- Perl word completion module
    This routine provides word completion on the list of words in the array (or array ref). The tty driver is put into raw mode using the system command stty raw -echo and restored using stty -raw echo. The following command characters are defined: Attempts word completion. Cannot be changed. ^D Prints completion list. Defined by $Term::Complete::complete. ^U Erases the current input. Defined by $Term::Complete::kill. , Erases one character. Defined by $Term::Complete::erase1 and $Te...
 perl5/Term::ReadLine(3) -- Perl interface to various readline packages. If no real package is found, substitutes stubs instead of basic f
    This package is just a front end to some other packages. At the moment this description is written, the only such package is Term-ReadLine, available on CPAN near you. The real target of this stub package is to set up a common interface to whatever Readline emerges with time. Minimal set of supported functions All the supported functions should be called as methods, i.e., either as $term = new Term::ReadLine 'name'; or as $term->addhistory('row'); where $term is a return value of Term::ReadL...
 termios(3t) -- general terminal interface
    These functions describe a general terminal interface for controlling asynchronous communications ports. A more detailed overview of the terminal interface can be found in termio(7), which also describes an ioctl(2) interface that provides the same functionality. However, the function interface described here is the preferred user interface. Many of the functions described here have a termios_p argument that is a pointer to a termios structur...
 perl5/Test::Harness(3) -- run perl standard test scripts with statistics
    Perl test scripts print to standard output "ok N" for each single test, where N is an increasing sequence of integers. The first line output by a standard test script is "1..M" with M being the number of tests that should be run within the test script. Test::Harness::runtests(@tests) runs all the testscripts named as arguments and checks standard output for the expected "ok N" strings. After all tests have been performed, runtests() prints some performance statistics that are computed by t...
 test_and_set(3p) -- mutual exclusion operators
    test_and_set atomically reads the unsigned long pointed to by the first argument and updates the location with the value specified in the second argument. The read value is returned. test_then_and atomically reads the unsigned long pointed to by the first argument and updates the location with the value specified in the second argument bit-wise and'ed with the read value. The read value is returned. test_then...
 f90/test_ieee_exception(3) -- Returns the state of a floating-point exception
    UNICOS/mk and IRIX systems CRAY T90 systems that support IEEE floating-point arithmetic
 f90/test_ieee_interrupt(3) -- Returns the state of a floating-point interrupt
    UNICOS/mk and IRIX systems CRAY T90 systems that support IEEE floating-point arithmetic
 standard/tevbind(3) -- selects a texture environment
    target expects the texture resource to which the environment definition is to be bound. There is only one appropriate resource, TV_ENV0. index expects the name of the texture environment that is being bound. Name is the index passed to tevdef when the environment was defined.
 standard/tevdef(3) -- defines a texture mapping environment
    index expects the name of the environment being defined. Index 0 is reserved as a null definition, and cannot be redefined. np expects the number of symbols and floating point values in props, including the termination symbol TV_NULL. If np is zero, it is ignored. Operation over network connections is more efficient when np is correctly specified, however. props expects the array of floating point symbols and values that define the texture environment. props must contain a sequence of symbols, e...
 standard/texbind(3) -- selects a texture function
    target expects the texture resource to which the texture function definition is to be bound. There are three appropriate resources, TX_TEXTURE_0 , TX_TEXTURE_DETAIL and TX_TEXTURE_IDLE. index expects the name of the texture function that is being bound. Name is the index passed to texdef2d when the texture function was defined.
 standard/texdef(3) -- convert a 2-dimensional image into a texture
    index expects the name of the texture function being defined. Index 0 is reserved as a null definition, and cannot be redefined. nc expects the number of components per image pixel. 1, 2, 3, and 4 component textures and 8-bit and 16-bit components are supported. width expects the width of image in pixels. height expects the height of image in pixels. depth expects the depth of image in pixels. (texdef3d only). image expects a long-word-aligned array containing the pixel data. This texture image ...
 standard/texdef2d(3) -- convert a 2-dimensional image into a texture
    index expects the name of the texture function being defined. Index 0 is reserved as a null definition, and cannot be redefined. nc expects the number of components per image pixel. 1, 2, 3, and 4 component textures and 8-bit and 16-bit components are supported. width expects the width of image in pixels. height expects the height of image in pixels. depth expects the depth of image in pixels. (texdef3d only). image expects a long-word-aligned array containing the pixel data. This texture image ...
 standard/texdef3d(3) -- convert a 3-dimensional image into a texture
    index expects the name of the texture function being defined. Index 0 is reserved as a null definition, and cannot be redefined. nc expects the number of components per image pixel. 1, 2, 3, and 4 component textures and 8-bit and 16-bit components are supported. width expects the width of image in pixels. height expects the height of image in pixels. depth expects the depth of image in pixels. (texdef3d only). image expects a long-word-aligned array containing the pixel data. This texture image ...
 standard/texgen(3) -- specify automatic generation of texture coordinates
    coord Expects the name of the texture coordinate whose generation is to be defined, enabled, or disabled. One of: TX_S: The s texture coordinate TX_T: The t texture coordinate TX_R: The r texture coordinate TX_Q: The q texture coordinate mode Expects the mode of generation to be specified, or an indication that generation is to be either enabled or disabled. One of the symbolic constants: TG_CONTOUR: Use the plane equation specified in params to define a plane in eye-coordinates. Generate a text...
 Tk/text(3) -- Create and manipulate text widgets
    background highlightBackground insertOnTime selectBorderWidth| borderWidth highlightColor insertWidth selectForeground | cursor highlightThickness padX setGrid | exportSelection insertBackground padY takeFocus | font insertBorderWidth relief xScrollCommand foreground insertOffTime selectBackground yScrollCommand See the ``options'' manual entry for details on the standard options. WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS Name: height Class: Height Command-Line Switch:-height Specifies the desired height for th...
 perl5/Text::Abbrev(3) -- create an abbreviation table from a list
    Stores all unambiguous truncations of each element of LIST as keys key in the associative array referenced to by $hashref. The values are the original list elements.
 perl5/Text::ParseWords(3) -- parse text into an array of tokens
    "ewords() accepts a delimiter (which can be a regular expression) and a list of lines and then breaks those lines up into a list of words ignoring delimiters that appear inside quotes. The $keep argument is a boolean flag. If true, the quotes are kept with each word, otherwise quotes are stripped in the splitting process. $keep also defines whether unprotected backslashes are retained. A &shellwords() replacement is included to demonstrate the new package. This version differs from the origi...
 perl5/Text::Soundex(3) -- Implementation of the Soundex Algorithm as Described by Knuth
    This module implements the soundex algorithm as described by Donald Knuth in Volume 3 of The Art of Computer Programming. The algorithm is intended to hash words (in particular surnames) into a small space using a simple model which approximates the sound of the word when spoken by an English speaker. Each word is reduced to a four character string, the first character being an upper case letter and the remaining three being digits. If there is no soundex code representation for a string then th...
 perl5/Text::Tabs(3) -- expand and unexpand tabs per the unix expand(1) and unexpand(1)
    Text::Tabs does about what the unix utilities expan do. Given a line with tabs in it, expand will replace the tabs with the appropriate number of spaces. Given a line with or without tabs in it, unexpand will add tabs when it can save bytes by doing so. Invisible compression with plain ascii!
 perl5/Text::Wrap(3) -- line wrapping to form simple paragraphs
    Text::Wrap::wrap() is a very simple paragraph formatter. It formats a single paragraph at a time by breaking lines at word boundries. Indentation is controlled for the first line ($initial_tab) and all subsquent lines ($subsequent_tab) independently. $Text::Wrap::columns should be set to the full width of your output device.
 standard/textcolor(3) -- sets the color of text in the textport
    tcolor expects an index into the current color map.
 standard/textinit(3) -- initializes the textport
    none
 standard/textport(3) -- positions and sizes the textport
    left expects x screen coordinate for the left side of the textport. right expects x screen coordinate for the right side of the textport. bottom expects y screen coordinate for the bottom of the textport. top expects y screen coordinate for the top of the textport.
 standard/tie(3) -- ties two valuators to a button
    b expects a button. v1 expects a valuator. v2 expects a valuator.
 perl5/Tie::Hash(3) -- base class definitions for tied hashes
    This module provides some skeletal methods for hash-tying classes. See the perltie manpage for a list of the functions required in order to tie a hash to a package. The basic Tie::Hash package provides a new method, as well as methods TIEHASH, EXISTS and CLEAR. The Tie::StdHash package provides most methods required for hashes in the perltie manpage. It inherits from Tie::Hash, and causes tied hashes to behave exactly like standard hashes, allowing for selective overloading of methods. The new m...
 perl5/Tie::RefHash(3) -- use references as hash keys
    This module provides the ability to use references as hash keys if you first tie the hash variable to this module. It is implemented using the standard perl TIEHASH interface. Please see the tie entry in perlfunc(1) and perltie(1) for more information.
 perl5/Tie::Scalar(3) -- base class definitions for tied scalars
    This module provides some skeletal methods for scalar-tying classes. See the perltie manpage for a list of the functions required in tying a scalar to a package. The basic Tie::Scalar package provides a new method, as well as methods TIESCALAR, FETCH and STORE. The Tie::StdScalar package provides all the methods specified in the perltie manpage. It inherits from Tie::Scalar and causes scalars tied to it to behave exactly like the built-in scalars, allowing for selective overloading of methods. T...
 perl5/Tie::SubstrHash(3) -- Fixed-table-size, fixed-key-length hashing
    The Tie::SubstrHash package provides a hash-table-like interface to an array of determinate size, with constant key size and record size. Upon tying a new hash to this package, the developer must specify the size of the keys that will be used, the size of the value fields that the keys will index, and the size of the overall table (in terms of key-value pairs, not size in hard memory). These values will not change for the duration of the tied hash. The newly-allocated hash table may now have dat...
 ifl/TIFFbuffer(3) -- I/O buffering control routines
    The following routines are provided for client-control of the I/O buffers used by the library. Applications need never use these routines; they are provided only for ``intelligent clients'' that wish to optimize memory usage and/or eliminate potential copy operations that can occur when working with images that have data stored without compression. TIFFReadBufferSetup sets up the data buffer used to read raw (encoded) data from a file. If the specified pointer is NULL (zero), then a buffer of ...
 ifl/TIFFClose(3) -- close a previously opened TIFF file
    TIFFClose closes a file that was previously opened with TIFFOpen(3T). Any buffered data are flushed to the file, including the contents of the current directory (if modified); and all resources are reclaimed.
 ifl/TIFFcodec(3) -- codec-related utility routines
    libtiff supports a variety of compression schemes implemented by software codecs. Each codec adheres to a modular interface that provides for the decoding and encoding of image data; as well as some other methods for initialization, setup, cleanup, and the control of default strip and tile sizes. Codecs are identified by the associated value of the TIFF Compression tag; e.g. 5 for LZW compression. The TIFFRegisterCODEC routine can be used to augment or override the set of codecs available to an ...
 ifl/TIFFError(3) -- library error handling interface
    TIFFError invokes the library-wide error handling function to (normally) write an error message to the stderr. The fmt parameter is a printf(3S) format string, and any number arguments can be supplied. The module parameter, if non-zero, is printed before the message; it typically is used to identify the software module in which an error is detected. Applications that desire to capture control in the event of an error should use TIFFSetErrorHandler to override the default error handler. A NULL (0...
 ifl/TIFFFlush(3) -- flush pending writes to an open TIFF file
    TIFFFlush causes any pending writes for the specified file (including writes for the current directory) to be done. In normal operation this call is never needed- the library automatically does any flushing required. TIFFFlushData flushes any pending image data for the specified file to be written out; directory-related data are not flushed. In normal operation this call is never needed- the library automatically does any flushing required....
 ifl/TIFFGetField(3) -- get the value(s) of a tag in an open TIFF file
    TIFFGetField returns the value of a tag or pseudo-tag associated with the the current directory of the open TIFF file tif. (A pseudo-tag is a parameter that is used to control the operation of the TIFF library but whose value is not read or written to the underlying file.) The file must have been previously opened with TIFFOpen(3T). The tag is identified by tag, one of the values defined in the include file tiff.h (see also the table below). The type and number of values returned is dependent on...
 ifl/TIFFmemory(3) -- memory management-related functions for use with TIFF files
    These routines are provided for writing portable software that uses libtiff; they hide any memory-management related issues, such as dealing with segmented architectures found on 16-bit machines. _TIFFmalloc and _TIFFrealloc are used to dynamically allocate and reallocate memory used by libtiff; such as memory passed into the I/O routines. Memory allocated through these interfaces is released back to the system using the _TIFFfree routine. Memory allocated through one of the above interfaces can...
 ifl/TIFFOpen(3) -- open a TIFF file for reading or writing
    TIFFOpen opens a TIFF file whose name is filename and returns a handle to be used in subsequent calls to routines in libtiff. If the open operation fails, then zero is returned. The mode parameter specifies if the file is to be opened for reading (``r''), writing (``w''), or appending (``a'') and, optionally, whether to override certain default aspects of library operation (see below). When a file is opened for appending, existing data will not be touched; instead new data will be written ...
 ifl/TIFFPrintDirectory(3) -- print a description of a TIFF directory
    TIFFPrintDirectory prints a description of the current directory in the specified TIFF file to the standard I/O output stream fd. The flags parameter is used to control the level of detail of the printed information; it is a bit-or of the flags defined in tiffio.h: #define TIFFPRINT_NONE 0x0 /* no extra info */ #define TIFFPRINT_STRIPS 0x1 /* strips/tiles info */ #define TIFFPRINT_CURVES 0x2 /* color/gray response curves */ #define TIFFPRINT_COLORMAP 0x4 /* colormap */ #define TIFFPRINT_JPEGQTAB...
 ifl/TIFFquery(3) -- query routines
    The following routines return status information about an open TIFF file. TIFFCurrentDirectory returns the index of the current directory (directories are numbered starting at 0). This number is suitable for use with the TIFFSetDirectory routine. TIFFLastDirectory returns a non-zero value if the current directory is the last directory in the file; otherwise zero is returned. TIFFCurrentRow, TIFFCurrentStrip, and TIFFCurrentTile, return the current row, strip, and tile, respectively, that is bein...
 ifl/TIFFReadDirectory(3) -- get the contents of the next directory in an open TIFF file
    Read the next directory in the specified file and make it the current directory. Applications only need to call TIFFReadDirectory to read multiple subfiles in a single TIFF file- the first directory in a file is automatically read when TIFFOpen is called.
 ifl/TIFFReadEncodedStrip(3) -- read and decode a strip of data from an open TIFF file
    Read the specified strip of data and place up to size bytes of decompressed information in the (user supplied) data buffer.
 ifl/TIFFReadEncodedTile(3) -- read and decode a tile of data from an open TIFF file
    Read the specified tile of data and place up to size bytes of decompressed information in the (user supplied) data buffer.
 ifl/TIFFReadRawStrip(3) -- return the undecoded contents of a strip of data from an open TIFF file
    Read the contents of the specified strip into the (user supplied) data buffer. Note that the value of strip is a ``raw strip number.'' That is, the caller must take into account whether or not the data is organized in separate planes (PlanarConfiguration=2). To read a full strip of data the data buffer should typically be at least as large as the number returned by TIFFStripSize.
 ifl/TIFFReadRawTile(3) -- return an undecoded tile of data from an open TIFF file
    Read the contents of the specified tile into the (user supplied) data buffer. Note that the value of tile is a ``raw tile number.'' That is, the caller must take into account whether or not the data is organized in separate planes (PlanarConfiguration=2). TIFFComputeTile automatically does this when converting an (x,y,z,sample) coordinate quadruple to a tile number. To read a full tile of data the data buffer should typically be at least as large as the value returned by TIFFTileSize....
 ifl/TIFFReadRGBAImage(3) -- read and decode an image into a fixed-format raster
    TIFFReadRGBAImage reads a strip- or tile-based image into memory, storing the result in the user supplied raster. The raster is assumed to be an array of width times height 32-bit entries, where width must be less than or equal to the width of the image (height may be any non-zero size). If the raster dimensions are smaller than the image, the image data is cropped to the raster bounds. If the raster height is greater than that of the image, then the image data are placed in the lower part of th...
 ifl/TIFFReadScanline(3) -- read and decode a scanline of data from an open TIFF file
    Read the data for the specified row into the (user supplied) data buffer buf. The data are returned decompressed and, in the native byte- and bit-ordering, but are otherwise packed (see further below). The buffer must be large enough to hold an entire scanline of data. Applications should call the routine TIFFScanlineSize to find out the size (in bytes) of a scanline buffer. The row parameter is always used by TIFFReadScanline; the sample parameter is used only if data are organized in separate ...
 ifl/TIFFReadTile(3) -- read and decode a tile of data from an open TIFF file
    Return the data for the tile containing the specified coordinates. The data placed in buf are returned decompressed and, typically, in the native byte- and bit-ordering, but are otherwise packed (see further below). The buffer must be large enough to hold an entire tile of data. Applications should call the routine TIFFTileSize to find out the size (in bytes) of a tile buffer. The x and y parameters are always used by TIFFReadTile. The z parameter is used if the image is deeper than 1 slice (Ima...
 ifl/TIFFRGBAImage(3) -- read and decode an image into a raster
    The routines described here provide a high-level interface through which TIFF images may be read into memory. Images may be strip- or tile-based and have a variety of different characteristics: bits/sample, samples/pixel, photometric, etc. Decoding state is encapsulated in a TIFFRGBAImage structure making it possible to capture state for multiple images and quickly switch between them. The target raster format can be customized to a particular application's needs by installing custom routines t...
 ifl/TIFFSetDirectory(3) -- set the current directory for an open TIFF file
    TIFFSetDirectory changes the current directory and reads its contents with TIFFReadDirectory. The parameter dirnum specifies the subfile/directory as an integer number, with the first directory numbered zero. TIFFSetSubDirectory acts like TIFFSetDirectory, except the directory is specified as a file offset instead of an index; this is required for accessing subdirectories linked through a SubIFD tag....
 ifl/TIFFSetField(3) -- set the value(s) of a tag in a TIFF file open for writing
    TIFFSetField sets the value of a field or pseudo-tag in the current directory associated with the open TIFF file tif. (A pseudo-tag is a parameter that is used to control the operation of the TIFF library but whose value is not read or written to the underlying file.) The file must have been previously opened for writing with TIFFOpen(3T). The field is identified by tag, one of the values defined in the include file tiff.h (see also the table below). The actual value is specified using a variabl...
 ifl/TIFFsize(3) -- return the size of various items associated with an open TIFF file
    TIFFScanlineSize returns the size in bytes of a row of data as it would be returned in a call to TIFFReadScanline, or as it would be expected in a call to TIFFWriteScanline. TIFFRasterScanlineSize returns the size in bytes of a complete decoded and packed raster scanline. Note that this value may be different from the value returned by TIFFScanlineSize if data is stored as separate planes.
 ifl/TIFFstrip(3) -- strip-related utility routines
    TIFFDefaultStripSize returns the number of rows for a reasonable-sized strip according to the current settings of the ImageWidth, BitsPerSample, SamplesPerPixel, tags and any compression-specific requirements. If the estimate parameter, if non-zero, then it is taken as an estimate of the desired strip size and adjusted according to any compression-specific requirements. The value returned by this function is typically used to define the RowsPerStrip tag. In lieu of any unusual requirements TIFFD...
 ifl/TIFFswab(3) -- byte- and bit-swapping routines
    The following routines are used by the library to swap 16- and 32-bit data and to reverse the order of bits in bytes. TIFFSwabShort and TIFFSwabLong swap the bytes in a single 16-bit and 32- bit item, respectively. TIFFSwabArrayOfShort and TIFFSwabArrayOfLong swap the bytes in an array of 16-bit and 32-bit items, respectively. TIFFReverseBits replaces each byte in data with the equivalent bitreversed value. This operation is done with a lookup table, TIFFBitRevTable which is declared public. A s...
 ifl/TIFFtile(3) -- tile-related utility routines
    TIFFDefaultTileSize returns the pixel width and height of a reasonablesized tile; suitable for setting up the TileWidth and TileLength tags. If the tw and th values passed in are non-zero, then they are adjusted to reflect any compression-specific requirements. The returned width and height are constrained to be a multiple of 16 pixels to conform with the TIFF specification. TIFFTileSize returns the equivalent size for a tile of data as it would be returned in a call to TIFFReadTile or as it wou...
 ifl/TIFFWarning(3) -- library warning interface
    TIFFWarning invokes the library-wide warning handler function to (normally) write a warning message to the stderr. The fmt parameter is a printf(3S) format string, and any number arguments can be supplied. The module parameter is interpreted as a string that, if non-zero, should be printed before the message; it typically is used to identify the software module in which a warning is detected. Applications that desire to capture control in the event of a warning should use TIFFSetWarningHandler t...
 ifl/TIFFWriteDirectory(3) -- write the current directory in an open TIFF file
    Write the contents of the current directory to the file and setup to create a new subfile in the same file. Applications only need to call TIFFWriteDirectory when writing multiple subfiles to a single TIFF file. TIFFWriteDirectory is automatically called by TIFFClose and TIFFFlush to write a modified directory if the file is open for writing.
 ifl/TIFFWriteEncodedStrip(3) -- compress and write a strip of data to an open TIFF file
    Compress size bytes of raw data from buf and write the result to the specified strip; replacing any previously written data. Note that the value of strip is a ``raw strip number.'' That is, the caller must take into account whether or not the data are organized in separate places (PlanarConfiguration=2).
 ifl/TIFFWriteEncodedTile(3) -- compress and write a tile of data to an open TIFF file
    Compress size bytes of raw data from buf and append the result to the end of the specified tile. Note that the value of tile is a ``raw tile number.'' That is, the caller must take into account whether or not the data are organized in separate places (PlanarConfiguration=2). TIFFComputeTile automatically does this when converting an (x,y,z,sample) coordinate quadruple to a tile number.
 ifl/TIFFWriteRawStrip(3) -- write a strip of raw data to an open TIFF file
    Append size bytes of raw data to the specified strip.
 ifl/TIFFWriteRawTile(3) -- write a tile of raw data to an open TIFF file
    Append size bytes of raw data to the specified tile.
 ifl/TIFFWriteScanline(3) -- write a scanline to an open TIFF file
    Write data to a file at the specified row. The sample parameter is used only if data are organized in separate planes (PlanarConfiguration=2). The data are assumed to be uncompressed and in the native bit- and byteorder of the host machine. The data written to the file is compressed according to the compression scheme of the current TIFF directory (see further below). If the current scanline is past the end of the current subfile, the ImageLength field is automatically increased to include the s...
 Tcl/tildesubst(3) -- replace tilde with home directory in a file name
    Tcl_Interp *interp (in) Interpreter in which to report an error, if any. char *name (in) File name, which may start with a ``~''. Tcl_DString *bufferPtr If needed, this dynamic string is | used to store the new file name. At| the time of the call it should be | uninitialized or empty. The caller | must eventually call Tcl_DStringFree| to free up anything stored here.
 ftn/time(3) -- Time the execution of a script
    This command will call the Tcl interpreter count times to evaluate script (or once if count isn't specified). It will then return a string of the form 503 microseconds per iteration which indicates the average amount of time required per iteration, in microseconds. Time is measured in elapsed time, not CPU time.
 Tcl/time(3) -- Time the execution of a script
    This command will call the Tcl interpreter count times to evaluate script (or once if count isn't specified). It will then return a string of the form 503 microseconds per iteration which indicates the average amount of time required per iteration, in microseconds. Time is measured in elapsed time, not CPU time.
 perl5/Time::gmtime(3) -- by-name interface to Perl's built-in gmtime() function
    This module's default exports override the core gmtime() function, replacing it with a version that returns "Time::tm" objects. This object has methods that return the similarly named structure field name from the C's tm structure from time.h; namely sec, min, hour, mday, mon, year, wday, yday, and isdst. You may also import all the structure fields directly into your namespace as regular variables using the :FIELDS import tag. (Note that this still overrides your core functions.) Access the...
 perl5/Time::Local(3) -- efficiently compute time from local and GMT time
    These routines are quite efficient and yet are always guaranteed to agree with localtime() and gmtime(). We manage this by caching the start times of any months we've seen before. If we know the start time of the month, we can always calculate any time within the month. The start times themselves are guessed by successive approximation starting at the current time, since most dates seen in practice are close to the current date. Unlike algorithms that do a binary search (calling gmtime once for...
 perl5/Time::localtime(3) -- by-name interface to Perl's built-in localtime() function
    This module's default exports override the core localtime() function, replacing it with a version that returns "Time::tm" objects. This object has methods that return the similarly named structure field name from the C's tm structure from time.h; namely sec, min, hour, mday, mon, year, wday, yday, and isdst. You may also import all the structure fields directly into your namespace as regular variables using the :FIELDS import tag. (Note that this still overrides your core functions.) Access ...
 perl5/Time::tm(3) -- internal object used by Time::gmtime and Time::localtime
    This module is used internally as a base class by Time::localtime And Time::gmtime functions. It creates a Time::tm struct object which is addressable just like's C's tm structure from time.h; namely with sec, min, hour, mday, mon, year, wday, yday, and isdst. This class is an internal interface only.
 f90/timef(3) -- Returns elapsed wall-clock time in milliseconds since the previous call to TIMEF
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 Tk/timerhndlr(3) -- call a procedure at a given time
    int milliseconds (in) How many milliseconds to wait before invoking proc. Tk_TimerProc *proc (in) Procedure to invoke after milliseconds have elapsed. ClientData clientData (in) Arbitrary one-word value to pass to proc. Tk_TimerToken token (in) Token for previously-created timer handler (the return value from some previous call to Tk_CreateTimerHandler).
 timer_create(3c) -- create a posix timer
    timer_create creates an interval timer for the calling process based on the clock named by clock_id. The new timer ID is recorded at the memory address timerid, and is unique for the calling process until the timer is deleted. A process may create up to {TIMER_MAX} posix timers [see sysconf(3C)]. Supported clocks for clock_id are: CLOCK_REALTIME The system's notion of the current...
 timer_delete(3c) -- delete a posix timer
    timer_delete deletes the posix timer named by timerid, which was previously created by a call to timer_create. If the timer was already started, it is disarmed and no signals related to timerid will be delivered to the process. timer_delete will fail if the following is true: [EINVAL] The timerid does not name a valid posix timer....
 timer_getoverrun(3c) -- get the posix timer overrun count
    timer_getoverrun returns the current expiration notification overrun count for the posix timer named by timerid. An overrun count is the number of timer expiration notifications which were not delivered to the process due to an already pending signal from timerid. This overrun condition may occur because a given posix timer can only queue one signal to the process at any point in time. If the returned overrun count is positive, then the count represen...
 timer_gettime(3c) -- get the time remaining before posix timer expiration
    timer_gettime retrieves the time remaining before the posix timer named by timerid expires, as well as, the periodic timer interval between expirations and stores the information at memory address value. The it_value field of value contains the time remainder, while the it_interval field contains the periodic timer interval. If it_value contains zero after a successful return, then the tim...
 timer_settime(3c) -- set the expiration time for a posix timer
    timer_settime sets the expiration time for the posix timer named by timerid. The timespec_t it_value field of value is used to specify the desired timer expiration time. If the timer was previously set and has not expired, then the timer is reset to the specified it_value. In the event it_value is set to zero, the timer is disarmed. By default, posix timers interpret spec...
 complib/TINVIT(3) -- EISPACK routine. This subroutine finds those eigenvectors of a TRIDIAGONAL SYMMETRIC matrix corresponding to s
    On Input NM must be set to the row dimension of two-dimensional array parameters as declared in the calling program dimension statement. N is the order of the matrix. D contains the diagonal elements of the input matrix. E contains the subdiagonal elements of the input matrix in its last N-1 positions. E(1) is arbitrary. E2 contains the squares of the corresponding elements of E, with zeros corresponding to negligible elements of E. E(I) is considered negligible if it is not larger than the prod...
 f90/tiny(3) -- Returns the smallest positive value for a real argument
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 Tk/tk(3) -- Manipulate Tk internal state
    The tk command provides access to miscellaneous elements of Tk's internal state. Most of the information manipulated by this command pertains to the application as a whole, or to a screen or display, rather than to a particular window. The command can take any of a number of different forms depending on the option argument. The legal forms are: tk appname ?newName? If newName isn't specified, this command returns the name of the | application (the name that may be used in send commands to | co...
 Tk/tkerror(3) -- Command invoked to process background errors
    The tkerror command doesn't exist as built-in part of Tk. Instead, individual applications or users can define a tkerror command (e.g. as a Tcl procedure) if they wish to handle background errors. A background error is one that occurs in a command that didn't originate with the application. For example, if an error occurs while executing a command specified with a bind of after command, then it is a background error. For a non-background error, the error can simply be returned up through neste...
 Tk/tkvars(3) -- Variables used or set by Tk
    variables, version PPPPaaaaggggeeee 2222
 Tk/tkwait(3) -- Wait for variable to change or window to be destroyed
    The tkwait command waits for one of several things to happen, then it returns without taking any other actions. The return value is always an empty string. If the first argument is variable (or any abbreviation of it) then the second argument is the name of a global variable and the command waits for that variable to be modified. If the first argument is visibility (or any abbreviation of it) then the second argument is the name of a window and the tkwait command waits for a change in its visibi...
 Tk/tk_main(3) -- main program for Tk-based applications
    int argc (in) Number of elements in argv. char *argv[] (in) Array of strings containing command-line arguments. Tcl_AppInitProc *appInitProc (in) Address of an applicationspecific initialization procedure. The value for this argument is usually Tcl_AppInit.
 Tk/tk_name(3) -- convert between names and window tokens
    Tk_Window tkwin (in) Token for window. Tcl_Interp *interp (out) Interpreter to use for error reporting. char *pathName (in) Character string containing path name of window.
 standard/tlutbind(3) -- selects a texture look up table
    target expects the texture resource to which the texture function definition is to be bound. There is one appropriate resource TL_TLUT_0. index expects the name of the texture function that is being bound. Name is the index passed to texdef2d when the texture function was defined.
 standard/tlutdef(3) -- defines a texture look-up table
    index expects the name of the texture look-up table being defined. Index 0 is reserved as a null definition, and cannot be redefined. nc expects the number of components per table entry. len expects the length of table in table entries. table expects a long-word aligned array of packed nc, 8-bit, component table entries. np expects the number of symbols and floating point values in props, including the termination symbol TL_NULL. If np is zero, it is ignored. Operation over network connections i...
 Tm/tmarrowbutton(3) -- the ArrowButton widget class
    This is the tcl binding to the Motif ArrowButton widget.
 Tm/tmbulletinboard(3) -- the BulletinBoard widget class
    This is the tcl binding to the Motif BulletinBoard widget.
 Tm/tmcascadebutton(3) -- the CascadeButton widget class
    This is the tcl binding to the Motif CascadeButton widget.
 Tm/tmcommand(3) -- the Command widget class
    This is the tcl binding to the Motif Command widget.
 Tm/tmcontainer(3) -- the Container widget class
    This is the tcl binding to the Motif Container widget. This widget is only available in Motif 2.0 or later.
 Tm/tmcore(3) -- the Core widget class
    This is the tcl binding to the Xt Core widget.
 Tm/tmcstext(3) -- the CSText widget class
    This is the tcl binding to the Motif Compound String Text (CSText) widget. This widget is only available from Motif 2.0 on.
 Tm/tmdialogshell(3) -- the DialogShell widget class
    This is the tcl binding to the Motif DialogShell widget.
 Tm/tmdrawingarea(3) -- the DrawingArea widget class
    This is the tcl binding to the Motif DrawingArea widget.
 Tm/tmdrawnbutton(3) -- the DrawnButton widget class
    This is the tcl binding to the Motif DrawnButton widget.
 Tm/tmfileselectionbox(3) -- the FileSelectionBox widget class
    This is the tcl binding to the Motif FileSelectionBox widget and the FileSelectionBoxDialog convenience function.
 Tm/tmform(3) -- the Form widget class
    This is the tcl binding to the Motif Form widget and the Form Dialog convenience function.
 Tm/tmframe(3) -- the Frame widget class
    This is the tcl binding to the Motif Frame widget.
 Tm/tmlabel(3) -- the Label widget class
    This is the tcl binding to the Motif Label widget.
 Tm/tmlist(3) -- the List widget class
    This is the tcl binding to the Motif List widget.
 Tm/tmmainwindow(3) -- the MainWindow widget class
    This is the tcl binding to the Motif MainWindow widget.
 Tm/tmmanager(3) -- the Manager widget class
    This is the tcl binding to the Motif Manager widget.
 Tm/tmmessagebox(3) -- the MessageBox widget class
    This is the tcl binding to the Motif MessageBox widget and the MessageBox Dialog convenience functions.
 Tm/tmnotebook(3) -- the Notebook widget class
    This is the tcl binding to the Motif Notebook widget. This widget is only available for Motif 2.0 and later.
 Tm/tmpanedwindow(3) -- the PanedWindow widget class
    This is the tcl binding to the Motif PanedWindow widget.
 tmpfile(3s) -- create a temporary file
    tmpfile creates a temporary file, and returns a corresponding FILE pointer. The file is created on the temporary directory indicated by the string P_tmpdir in . However, if the variable TMPDIR is provided in the user's environment, the variable's value is the name of the desired temporary-file directory. If the directory specified by the variable TMPDIR is not accessible, the directory specified by the string P_tmpdir in will be used. If the file cannot be opened, a NULL poi...
 tmpnam(3s) -- create a name for a temporary file
    These functions generate file names that can safely be used for a temporary file. tmpnam always generates a file name using the path-prefix defined as P_tmpdir in the <stdio.h> header file. If s is NULL, tmpnam leaves its result in an internal static area and returns a pointer to that area. The next call to tmpnam will destroy the contents of the area. If s is not NULL, i...
 Tm/tmprimitive(3) -- the Primitive widget class
    This is the tcl binding to the Motif Primitive widget.
 Tm/tmpushbutton(3) -- the ArrowButton widget class
    This is the tcl binding to the Motif ArrowButton widget.
 Tm/tmroot(3) -- the toplevel widget ``.''
    This is the command that creates the root widget ``.''
 Tm/tmrowcolumn(3) -- the RowColumn widget class
    This is the tcl binding to the Motif RowColumn widget and convenience functions for special RowColumn widgets.
 Tm/tmscale(3) -- the Scale widget class
    This is the tcl binding to the Motif Scale widget.
 Tm/tmscrollbar(3) -- the ScrollBar widget class
    This is the tcl binding to the Motif ScrollBar widget.
 Tm/tmscrolledwindow(3) -- the ScrolledWindow widget class
    This is the tcl binding to the Motif ScrolledWindow widget.
 Tm/tmselectionbox(3) -- the SelectionBox widget class
    This is the tcl binding to the Motif SelectionBox widget and the SelectionBox Dialog convenience functions.
 Tm/tmsgigrid(3) -- the SGI Grid widget class
    This is the tcl binding to the SGI sgGrid widget.
 Tm/tmsgipanel(3) -- the SGI IconPanel widget class
    This is the tcl binding to the SGI ViewKit IconPanel widget.
 Tm/tmsgithumbwheel(3) -- the SGI sgThumbWheel widget class
    This is the tcl binding to the SGI ThumbWheel widget.
 Tm/tmspinbox(3) -- the SpinBox widget class
    This is the tcl binding to the Motif SpinBox widget.
 Tm/tmstring(3) -- the string to XmString conversion
    Motif uses a data type known as XmString. This is a compound string format, containing rendition information such as direction and font. XmStrings are used in a number of places, most notably in the label of a Label widget. In the conversion of a string to an XmString, the following format rules are applied: The string is treated as a list of words. Words in the list are concatenated with a single space between them, no matter what the original white space between them. Individual words may be q...
 Tm/tmtext(3) -- the Text widget class
    This is the tcl binding to the Motif Text widget.
 Tm/tmtogglebutton(3) -- the ToggleButton widget class
    This is the tcl binding to the Motif ToggleButton widget.
 Tm/tmtoplevelshell(3) -- any toplevel widget.
    This command creates additional toplevel shells.
 Tm/tmuil(3) -- the interface to the UIL system
    The extra methods supported for handling UIL files are mrmOpenHierarchy mrmCloseHierarchy mrmFetchWidget mrmFetchWidgetOverride mrmOpenHierarchy file_list This takes a list of files that are compiled UIL files (UID files) and opens the widget hierarchy. At most one widget hierarchy can be opened. This method is only available to the toplevel widget ``.'' mrmCloseHierarchy This closes the widget hierarchy opened by mrmOpenHierarchy. This method is only available to the toplevel widget ``.'' m...
 Tm/tmversion(3) -- Tcl variables for Tm versions
    This is a set of tcl variables with version information tmVersion the current tclMotif version XmVERSION the major version number of Motif XmREVISION the revision number of Motif XmVersion the combined major and revision number, made by XmVERSION*1000 + XmREVISION.
 Tk/toplevel(3) -- Create and manipulate toplevel widgets
    borderWidth highlightBackground highlightThickness takeFocus | cursor highlightColor relief See the ``options'' manual entry for details on the standard options. WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS Name: background | Class: Background | Command-Line Switch:-background | This option is the same as the standard background option except | that its value may also be specified as an empty string. In this | case, the widget will display no background or border, and no colors| will be consumed from its colormap ...
 libblas/tpmv(3) -- BLAS Level Two
    uplo On entry, uplo specifies whether the matrix is an upper or lower triangular matrix as follows: FORTRAN uplo = 'U' or 'u' A is an upper triangular matrix. uplo = 'L' or 'l' A is a lower triangular matrix. C uplo = UpperTriangle A is an upper triangular matrix. uplo = LowerTriangle A is a lower triangular matrix. Unchanged on exit. trans On entry, trans specifies the operation to be FORTRAN trans = 'N' or 'n' x := A*x / A*x = b. trans = 'T' or 't' x := A'*x / A'*x = b. trans...
 standard/tpon(3) -- control the visibility of the textport
    none
 complib/TQL1(3) -- EISPACK routine. This subroutine finds the eigenvalues of a SYMMETRIC TRIDIAGONAL matrix by the QL method.
    On Input N is the order of the matrix. D contains the diagonal elements of the input matrix. E contains the subdiagonal elements of the input matrix in its last N-1 positions. E(1) is arbitrary. On Output D contains the eigenvalues in ascending order. If an error exit is made, the eigenvalues are correct and ordered for indices 1,2,...IERR-1, but may not be the smallest eigenvalues. E has been destroyed. IERR is set to Zero for normal return, J if the J-th eigenvalue has not been determined afte...
 complib/TQL2(3) -- EISPACK routine. This subroutine finds the eigenvalues and eigenvectors of a SYMMETRIC TRIDIAGONAL matrix by t
    On Input NM must be set to the row dimension of two-dimensional array parameters as declared in the calling program dimension statement. N is the order of the matrix. D contains the diagonal elements of the input matrix. E contains the subdiagonal elements of the input matrix in its last N-1 positions. E(1) is arbitrary. Z contains the transformation matrix produced in the reduction by TRED2, if performed. If the eigenvectors of the tridiagonal matrix are desired, Z must contain the identity mat...
 complib/TQLRAT(3) -- EISPACK routine. This subroutine finds the eigenvalues of a SYMMETRIC TRIDIAGONAL matrix by the rational QL me
    On Input N is the order of the matrix. D contains the diagonal elements of the input matrix. E2 contains the squares of the subdiagonal elements of the input matrix in its last N-1 positions. E2(1) is arbitrary. On Output D contains the eigenvalues in ascending order. If an error exit is made, the eigenvalues are correct and ordered for indices 1,2,...IERR-1, but may not be the smallest eigenvalues. E2 has been destroyed. IERR is set to Zero for normal return, J if the J-th eigenvalue has not be...
 Tcl/trace(3) -- Monitor variable accesses
    This command causes Tcl commands to be executed whenever certain operations are invoked. At present, only variable tracing is implemented. The legal option's (which may be abbreviated) are: trace variable name ops command Arrange for command to be executed whenever variable name is accessed in one of the ways given by ops. Name may refer to a normal variable, an element of an array, or to an array as a whole (i.e. name may be just the name of an array, with no parenthesized index). If name refe...
 Tcl/tracevar(3) -- monitor accesses to a variable
    Tcl_Interp *interp (in) Interpreter containing variable. char *varName (in) Name of variable. May refer to a scalar variable, to an array variable with no index, or to an array variable with a parenthesized index. If | the name references an | element of an array, then | it must be in writable | memory: Tcl will make | temporary modifications to | it while looking up the | name. int flags (in) OR-ed combination of the values TCL_TRACE_READS, TCL_TRACE_WRITES, and TCL_TRACE_UNSETS, and TCL_GLOBAL...
 f90/transfer(3) -- Treats the first argument as if it is of the same type as the second argument
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 standard/translate(3) -- translates the current matrix
    x expects the x coordinate of a point. y expects the y coordinate of a point. z expects the z coordinate of a point.
 f90/transpose(3) -- Transposes an array of rank two
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 complib/TRBAK1(3) -- EISPACK routine. This subroutine forms the eigenvectors of a REAL SYMMETRIC matrix by back transforming those
    On Input NM must be set to the row dimension of two-dimensional array parameters as declared in the calling program dimension statement. N is the order of the matrix. A contains information about the orthogonal trans- formations used in the reduction by TRED1 in its strict lower triangle. E contains the subdiagonal elements of the tridiagonal matrix in its last N-1 positions. E(1) is arbitrary. M is the number of eigenvectors to be back transformed. Z contains the eigenvectors to be back transfo...
 complib/TRBAK3(3) -- EISPACK routine. This subroutine forms the eigenvectors of a REAL SYMMETRIC matrix by back transforming those
    On Input NM must be set to the row dimension of two-dimensional array parameters as declared in the calling program dimension statement. N is the order of the matrix. NV must be set to the dimension of the array parameter A as declared in the calling program dimension statement. A contains information about the orthogonal transformations used in the reduction by TRED3 in its first N*(N+1)/2 positions. M is the number of eigenvectors to be back transformed. Z contains the eigenvectors to be back ...
 complib/TRED1(3) -- EISPACK routine. This subroutine reduces a REAL SYMMETRIC matrix to a symmetric tridiagonal matrix using ortho
    On Input NM must be set to the row dimension of two-dimensional array parameters as declared in the calling program dimension statement. N is the order of the matrix. A contains the real symmetric input matrix. Only the lower triangle of the matrix need be supplied. On Output A contains information about the orthogonal trans- formations used in the reduction in its strict lower triangle. The full upper triangle of A is unaltered. D contains the diagonal elements of the tridiagonal matrix. E cont...
 complib/TRED2(3) -- EISPACK routine. This subroutine reduces a REAL SYMMETRIC matrix to a symmetric tridiagonal matrix using and a
    On Input NM must be set to the row dimension of two-dimensional array parameters as declared in the calling program dimension statement. N is the order of the matrix. A contains the real symmetric input matrix. Only the lower triangle of the matrix need be supplied. On Output D contains the diagonal elements of the tridiagonal matrix. E contains the subdiagonal elements of the tridiagonal matrix in its last N-1 positions. E(1) is set to zero. Z contains the orthogonal transformation matrix produ...
 complib/TRED3(3) -- EISPACK routine. This subroutine reduces a REAL
    On Input n is the order of the matrix. NV must be set to the dimension of the array parameter A as declared in the calling program dimension statement. A contains the lower triangle of the real symmetric input matrix, stored row-wise as a one-dimensional array, in its first N*(N+1)/2 positions. On Output A contains information about the orthogonal transformations used in the reduction. D contains the diagonal elements of the tridiagonal matrix. E contains the subdiagonal elements of the tridiago...
 complib/TRIDIB(3) -- EISPACK routine. This subroutine finds those eigenvalues of a TRIDIAGONAL SYMMETRIC matrix between specified b
    On Input N is the order of the matrix. EPS1 is an absolute error tolerance for the computed eigenvalues. If the input EPS1 is non-positive, it is reset for each submatrix to a default value, namely, minus the product of the relative machine precision and the 1-norm of the submatrix. D contains the diagonal elements of the input matrix. E contains the subdiagonal elements of the input matrix in its last N-1 positions. E(1) is arbitrary. E2 contains the squares of the corresponding elements of E. ...
 standard/trig(3) -- trigonometric functions and their inverses
    The single-precision and long double-precision routines listed above are only available in the standard math library, -lm, and in -lmx. sin, cos and tan return trigonometric functions of radian arguments x for double data types. fsin, fcos and ftan, and their ANSI-named counterparts sinf, cosf and tanf return trigonometric functions of radian Page 1 TRIG(3M) TRIG(3M) arguments x for float data types. sinl, cosl and tanl do the same for long double data types. The asin routines return the arc sin...
 f90/trim(3) -- Returns the character argument with trailing blank characters removed
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/trimlen(3) -- Returns the length of a character argument without counting trailing blanks
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 libblas/trmm(3) -- BLAS level three Matrix Product FORTRAN 77 SYNOPSIS subroutine dtrmm( side, uplo, transa, diag, m, n, alpha, a
    dtrmm, strmm, ztrmm and ctrmm perform one of the matrix-matrix operations B := alpha*op( A )*B, or B := alpha*B*op( A ) where alpha is a scalar, B is an m by n matrix, A is a unit, or non-unit, upper or lower triangular matrix and op( A ) is one of op( A ) = A or op( A ) = A' or op( A ) = conjg( A' ).
 libblas/trmv(3) -- BLAS Level Two
    dtrmv, strmv, ztrmv and ctrmv perform one of the matrix-vector operations x := A*x, or x := A'*x, or x := conjg( A' )*x, where x is an n element vector and A is an n by n unit, or non-unit, upper or lower triangular matrix. dtrsv, strsv, ztrsv and ctrsv solve one of the systems of equations A*x = b, or A'*x = b, or conjg( A' )*x = b, where b and x are n element vectors and A is an n by n unit, or non-unit, upper or lower triangular matrix. No test for singularity or nearsingularity is includ...
 libblas/trsm(3) -- BLAS level three Solution of Systems of Equations FORTRAN 77 SYNOPSIS subroutine dtrsm( side, uplo, transa, di
    dtrsm, strsm, ztrsm and ctrsm solve one of the matrix equations op( A )*X = alpha*B, or X*op( A ) = alpha*B, where alpha is a scalar, X and B are m by n matrices, A is a unit, or non-unit, upper or lower triangular matrix and op( A ) is one of op( A ) = A or op( A ) = A' or op( A ) = conjg( A' ). The matrix X is overwritten on B.
 tsearch(3c) -- manage binary search trees
    tsearch, tfind, tdelete, and twalk are routines for manipulating binary search trees. They are generalized from Knuth (6.2.2) Algorithms T and D. All comparisons are done with a user-supplied routine. This routine is called with two arguments, the pointers to the elements being compared. It returns an integer less than, equal to, or greater than 0, according to whether the first argument is to be considered less than, equal to or greater than the second argument. The comparison function need not...
 tserialio(3) -- timestamped serial port i/o
    The tserialio library provides millisecond accurate, timestamped access to a serial port. An application can measure the time at which each input byte arrived at a serial port to within plus or minus one millisecond. An application can also schedule bytes to go out a serial Page 1 TSERIALIO(3) TSERIALIO(3) port at a specified time in the future. The operating system will output each byte at the specified time with an accuracy of plus or minus one millisecond. Times are specified on the UST timel...
 tsix_get_mac(3n) -- get the MAC label of incoming data
    tsix_get_mac retrieves the MAC label associated with data incoming on fd, which must be associated with a socket. If tsix_get_mac is successful, that MAC label will be pointed to by lbl. The caller should call mac_free on the mac_t argument lbl, which was passed to tsix_get_mac. If _SC_IP_SECOPTS is not in effect, tsix_get_mac always returns success.
 tsix_get_solabel(3n) -- get the MAC label of a socket
    tsix_get_solabel retrieves the MAC label of an Internet-domain socket represented by fd. If tsix_get_solabel is successful, that MAC label will be pointed to by lbl. The caller should call mac_free on the mac_t argument lbl, which was passed to tsix_get_solabel. If _SC_IP_SECOPTS is not in effect, tsix_get_solabel always returns success.
 tsix_get_uid(3n) -- get the User ID of incoming data
    tsix_get_uid retrieves the User ID associated with data incoming on fd, which must be associated with a socket. If tsix_get_uid is successful, that User ID will be contained in the object pointed to by uidp. If _SC_IP_SECOPTS is not in effect, tsix_get_uid always returns success.
 tsix_off(3n) -- disable trusted networking
    tsix_off disables trusted operation on file descriptor fd, which must be associated with a socket. This causes the socket to be subject to normal system security policy regarding incoming data. This is the normal default for all sockets.
 tsix_on(3n) -- enable trusted networking
    tsix_on enables trusted operation on file descriptor fd, which must be associated with a socket. This causes the socket to ignore normal system security policy regarding incoming data.
 tsix_recvfrom_mac(3n) -- receive a message and a MAC label from a socket
    tsix_recvfrom_mac receives a message from a socket, additionally returning the MAC label associated with the data just received. tsix_recvfrom_mac is otherwise identical to recvfrom(2). If tsix_recvfrom_mac is successful, that MAC label will be pointed to by lbl.
 tsix_sendto_mac(3n) -- send a message with a specified MAC label
    tsix_sendto_mac transmits a message to another socket, temporarily overriding the default MAC label associated with that message with the MAC label pointed to by lbl. tsix_sendto_mac is otherwise identical to sendto(2).
 tsix_set_mac(3n) -- set the MAC label of outgoing data
    tsix_set_mac sets the MAC label of all outgoing communication on fd, which must be associated with a socket, to the MAC label pointed to by lbl.
 tsix_set_mac_byrhost(3n) -- set the MAC label of outgoing data
    tsix_set_mac_byrhost sets the MAC label of all outgoing communication on fd, which must be associated with a socket, to the default MAC label for that host. If lbl is not NULL, lbl will point to that MAC label upon successful execution of tsix_set_mac_byrhost.
 tsix_set_solabel(3n) -- set the MAC label of a socket
    tsix_set_solabel sets the MAC label of an Internet-domain socket represented by fd to the MAC label pointed to by lbl.
 tsix_set_uid(3n) -- set the User ID of outgoing data
    tsix_set_uid sets the User ID of all outgoing communication on fd , which must be associated with a socket, to the User ID contained in uid .
 complib/TSTURM(3) -- EISPACK routine. This subroutine finds those eigenvalues of a TRIDIAGONAL SYMMETRIC matrix which lie in a spec
    On Input NM must be set to the row dimension of two-dimensional array parameters as declared in the calling program dimension statement. N is the order of the matrix. EPS1 is an absolute error tolerance for the computed eigenvalues. It should be chosen commensurate with relative perturbations in the matrix elements of the order of the relative machine precision. If the input EPS1 is non-positive, it is reset for each submatrix to a default value, namely, minus the product of the relative machine...
 ftn/ttynam(3) -- find name of a terminal port
    Ttynam returns a blank padded path name of the terminal device associated with logical unit lunit. MAXLEN is the maximum length of the path name for the terminal device. Isatty returns .true. if lunit is associated with a terminal device, .false. otherwise.
 ttyname(3c) -- find name of a terminal
    ttyname returns a pointer to a string containing the null-terminated path name of the terminal device associated with file descriptor fildes. ttyname_r is a reentrant version of ttyname where buf and buflen give the location and maximum size of where the resultant string should be placed. The maximum length of the terminal name is {TTY_NAME_MAX}. sysconf(3C) may be used to determine this value. isa...
 ttyslot(3c) -- find the slot in the utmp file of the current user
    ttyslot returns the index of the current user's entry in the /var/adm/utmp file. This is accomplished by calling ttyname(3C) to determine which device the calling program has associated with the standard input, the standard output, or the error output (0, 1 or 2). This device name is then searched for in the /var/adm/utmp file.
 t_accept(3n) -- accept a connect request
    This function is issued by a transport user to accept a connect request. fd identifies the local transport endpoint where the connect indication arrived, resfd specifies the local transport endpoint where the connection is to be established, and call contains information required by the transport provider to complete the connection. call points to a t_call structure that contains the following members: struct ne<...
 t_alloc(3n) -- allocate a library structure
    The t_alloc function dynamically allocates memory for the various transport function argument structures as specified below. This function will allocate memory for the specified structure, and will also allocate memory for buffers referenced by the structure. The structure to allocate is specified by struct_type, and can be one of the following: T_BIND struct t_bind T_CALL str<...
 t_bind(3n) -- bind an address to a transport endpoint
    This function associates a protocol address with the transport endpoint specified by fd and activates that transport endpoint. In connection mode, the transport provider may begin accepting or requesting connections on the transport endpoint. In connectionless mode, the transport user may send or receive data units through the transport endpoint. The req and ret arguments point to a t_bind structure containing the following members: struct...
 t_close(3n) -- close a transport endpoint
    The t_close function informs the transport provider that the user is finished with the transport endpoint specified by fd, and frees any local library resources associated with the endpoint. In addition, t_close closes the file associated with the transport endpoint. t_close should be called from the T_UNBND state [see t_getstate(3N)]. However, this function does not check state information, ...
 t_connect(3n) -- establish a connection with another transport user
    This function enables a transport user to request a connection to the specified destination transport user. fd identifies the local transport endpoint where communication will be established, while sndcall and rcvcall point to a t_call structure that contains the following members: struct netbuf addr; struct netbuf opt; stru...
 t_error(3n) -- produce error message
    t_error produces a message on the standard error output which describes the last error encountered during a call to a transport function. The argument string errmsg is a user-supplied error message that gives context to the error. t_error prints the user-supplied error message followed by a colon and the standard transport function error message for the current value contained in t_errno. If t_errno is T...
 t_free(3n) -- free a library structure
    The t_free function frees memory previously allocated by t_alloc. This function will free memory for the specified structure, and will also free memory for buffers referenced by the structure. ptr points to one of the six structure types described for t_alloc, and struct_type identifies the type of that structure, which can be one of the following: T_BIND struct t_b...
 t_getinfo(3n) -- get protocol-specific service information
    This function returns the current characteristics of the underlying transport protocol associated with file descriptor fd. The info structure is used to return the same information returned by t_open. This function enables a transport user to access this information during any phase of communication. This argument points to a t_info structure, which contains the following members: long addr;/* max size of the transport pr...
 t_getprotaddr(3n) -- get protocol-specific service information
    The t_getprotaddr() function returns local and remote protocol addresses currently associated with the transport endpoint specified by fd. In boundaddr and peeraddr the user specified maxlen, which is the maximum size of the address buffer, and buf which points to the buffer where the address is to be placed. On return, the buf field of bounda
 t_getstate(3n) -- get the current state
    The t_getstate function returns the current state of the provider associated with the transport endpoint specified by fd. This function resides within both the X/Open compliant libxnet and the SVR4 compliant libnsl Network Services libraries. Network Services applications which require X/Open compliance must link-load with -lxnet. Network Services applications which require SVR4 compliance must linkload wit...
 t_listen(3n) -- listen for a connect request
    This function listens for a connect request from a calling transport user. fd identifies the local transport endpoint where connect indications arrive, and on return, call contains information describing the connect indication. call points to a t_call structure, which contains the following members: struct netbuf addr; truct netbuf opt; struc...
 t_look(3n) -- look at the current event on a transport endpoint
    This function returns the current event on the transport endpoint specified by fd. This function enables a transport provider to notify a transport user of an asynchronous event when the user is issuing functions in synchronous mode. Certain events require immediate notification of the user and are indicated by a specific error, TLOOK, on the current or next function to be executed. This function also enables a transport user to poll a transport endpoint periodically for asy...
 t_open(3n) -- establish a transport endpoint
    t_open must be called as the first step in the initialization of a transport endpoint. This function establishes a transport endpoint by opening a UNIX file that identifies a particular transport provider (that is, transport protocol) and returning a file descriptor that identifies that endpoint. For example, opening the file /dev/iso_cots identifies an OSI connection-oriented transport layer protocol as the transport provider. path ...
 t_optmgmt(3n) -- manage options for a transport endpoint
    The t_optmgmt function enables a transport user to retrieve, verify, or negotiate protocol options with the transport provider. fd identifies a bound transport endpoint. The req and ret arguments point to a t_optmgmt structure containing the following members: struct netbuf opt; long flags; The opt field identifies protocol options and the...
 t_rcv(3n) -- receive data or expedited data sent over a connection
    This function receives either normal or expedited data. fd identifies the local transport endpoint through which data will arrive, buf points to a receive buffer where user data will be placed, and nbytes specifies the size of the receive buffer. flags may be set on return from t_rcv and specifies optional flags as described below. By default, t_rcv operates in synchronous mode and will wait for data to arrive if none is cur...
 t_rcvconnect(3n) -- receive the confirmation from a connect request
    This function enables a calling transport user to determine the status of a previously sent connect request and is used in conjunction with t_connect to establish a connection in asynchronous mode. The connection will be established on successful completion of this function. fd identifies the local transport endpoint where communication will be established, and call contains information associated with the newly established connection. call p...
 t_rcvdis(3n) -- retrieve information from disconnect
    This function is used to identify the cause of a disconnect, and to retrieve any user data sent with the disconnect. fd identifies the local transport endpoint where the connection existed, and discon points to a t_discon structure containing the following members: struct netbuf udata; int reason; int sequence; netbu
 t_rcvrel(3n) -- acknowledge receipt of an orderly release indication
    This function is used to acknowledge receipt of an orderly release indication. fd identifies the local transport endpoint where the connection exists. After receipt of this indication, the user should not attempt to receive more data because such an attempt will block forever. However, the user may continue to send data over the connection if t_sndrel has not been issued by the user. This function is an optional service of the transport provider, and is only supported ...
 t_rcvudata(3n) -- receive a data unit
    This function is used in connectionless mode to receive a data unit from another transport user. fd identifies the local transport endpoint through which data will be received, unitdata holds information associated with the received data unit, and flags is set on return to indicate that the complete data unit was not received. unitdata points to a t_unitdata structure containing the following members:...
 t_rcvuderr(3n) -- receive a unit data error indication
    This function is used in connectionless mode to receive information concerning an error on a previously sent data unit, and should be issued only after a unit data error indication. It informs the transport user that a data unit with a specific destination address and protocol options produced an error. fd identifies the local transport endpoint through which the error report will be received, and uderr points to a t_uderr structure containing the following...
 t_snd(3n) -- send data or expedited data over a connection
    This function is used to send either normal or expedited data. fd identifies the local transport endpoint over which data should be sent, buf points to the user data, nbytes specifies the number of bytes of user data to be sent, and flags specifies any optional flags described below. By default, t_snd operates in synchronous mode and may wait if flow control restrictions prevent the data from being accepted by the local transport provid...
 t_snddis(3n) -- send user-initiated disconnect request
    This function is used to initiate an abortive release on an already established connection or to reject a connect request. fd identifies the local transport endpoint of the connection, and call specifies information associated with the abortive release. call points to a t_call structure that contains the following members: struct netbuf addr; struct netbuf op<...
 t_sndrel(3n) -- initiate an orderly release
    This function is used to initiate an orderly release of a transport connection and indicates to the transport provider that the transport user has no more data to send. fd identifies the local transport endpoint where the connection exists. After issuing t_sndrel, the user may not send any more data over the connection. However, a user may continue to receive data if an orderly release indication has not been received. This function is an optional service of the transp...
 t_sndudata(3n) -- send a data unit
    This function is used in connectionless mode to send a data unit to another transport user. fd identifies the local transport endpoint through which data will be sent, and unitdata points to a t_unitdata structure containing the following members: struct netbuf addr; struct netbuf opt; struct netbuf u...
 t_strerror(3n) -- produce an error message string
    t_strerror maps the error number in errnum that corresponds to an XTI error to a language-dependent error message string and returns a pointer to the string. The string pointed to will not be modified by the program, but may be overwritten by a subsequent call to the t_strerror function. The string is not terminated by a newline character. The language for error message strings written by t_strerro...
 t_sync(3n) -- synchronize transport library
    For the transport endpoint specified by fd, t_sync synchronizes the data structures managed by the transport library with information from the underlying transport provider. In doing so, it can convert a raw file descriptor [obtained via open(2), dup(2), or as a result of a fork(2) and exec(2)] to an initialized transport endpoint, assuming that file descriptor referenced a transport provider. This function also allows two coopera...
 t_unbind(3n) -- disable a transport endpoint
    The t_unbind function disables the transport endpoint specified by fd which was previously bound by t_bind(3N). On completion of this call, no further data or events destined for this transport endpoint will be accepted by the transport provider. This function resides within both the X/Open compliant libxnet and the SVR4 compliant libnsl Network Services libraries. Network Services applications which require X/Open ...
 ualarm(3c) -- generate a SIGALRM signal in ``useconds'' microseconds
    The ualarm() function causes the SIGALRM signal to be generated for the calling process after the number of real-time microseconds specified by the useconds argument has elapsed. When the interval argument is nonzero, repeated timeout notification occurs with a period in microseconds specified by the interval argument. If the notification signal, SIGALRM, is not caught or ignored, the calling process is terminated. The ualarm() function returns the number of microseconds remaining from the previ...
 f90/ubound(3) -- Returns all the upper bounds of an array or a specified upper bound
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 udmalib(3x) -- user-level access to DMA hardware
    On Challenge and Onyx systems, These routines form the basis for a simplified interface to DMA engines, usrdma(7m) devices. These routines are included in a program by compiling with the -ludma option. Currently, the only supported DMA engine is for VME on the Challenge/Onyx series. As DMA engines become available for other hardware platforms, support will be provided through this interface. An application would use the routines dma_open and dma_close to allocate and deallocate access to a DMA e...
 ufmCloseTypeface(3w) -- close a typeface
    ufmCloseTypeface closes an open typeface. Once a typeface is closed, you can no longer use the handle that was assigned to that typeface. typefaceHandle is a typeface handle that was returned by ufmOpenTypeface. That must be the handle of an open typeface.
 ufmFree(3w) -- free an area of memory that was allocated by UFM
    ufmFree frees the data the pointer ufmPointer points to. You must use the function ufmFree to free any objects that were allocated by the Universal Font Manager (UFM), unless an alternate UFM function is explicitly specified for the object. For example, your program should call ufmFree if it wants to free the memory allocated for a font path by ufmGetFontPath. If it wants to free character bi...
 ufmFreeBitmap(3w) -- free a character bitmap
    ufmFreeBitmap frees the memory ufmGetBitmap allocated for one or more data structures of the type ufmBitmap. When ufmGetBitmap allocates an array of one or more data structures of the type ufmBitmap, it returns the number of allocated data structures (nCharBitmaps) and the address of that array (charBitmaps). When you are finished with that array, you can free it by calling ufm...
 ufmFreeCharMetrics(3w) -- free character metrics
    ufmFreeCharMetrics frees the memory ufmGetCharMetrics allocated for one or more data structures of the type ufmCharMetrics. When ufmGetCharMetrics allocates an array of one or more data structures of the type ufmCharMetrics, it returns the number of allocated data structures (nCharMetrics) and the address of that array (charMetrics). When you...
 ufmFreeExactOutline(3w) -- free an exact character outline
    ufmFreeExactOutline frees the memory ufmGetExactOutline allocated for one or more data structures of the type ufmExactOutline. When ufmGetExactOutline allocates an array of one or more data structures of the type ufmExactOutline, it returns the number of allocated data structures (nOutlines) and the address of that array (outlines). ...
 ufmFreeFontInfo(3w) -- free font information
    ufmFreeFontInfo frees the memory ufmGetFontInfo allocated for a data structure of the type ufmFont. When ufmGetFontInfo allocates a data structure of the type ufmFont, it returns the address of that data structure (font). When you are finished with that data structure, you can free it by calling ufmFreeFontInfo with the addr...
 ufmFreeTypefaceInfo(3w) -- free typeface information
    ufmFreeTypefaceInfo frees the memory ufmGetTypefaceInfo allocated for a data structure of the type ufmTypeface. When ufmGetTypefaceInfo allocates a data structure of the type ufmTypeface, it returns the address of that data structure (typeface). When you are finished with that data structure, you can free it by calling ufm
 ufmFreeTypefaceList(3w) -- free a list of typefaces
    ufmFreeTypefaceList frees the memory ufmGetTypefaceList allocated for an array of the data structures of the type ufmTypeface. When ufmGetTypefaceList allocates an array of the data structures of the type ufmTypeface, it returns the number of allocated data structures (nTypefaces) and the address of that data structure (typefaces). W...
 ufmFreeTypefaceMetrics(3w) -- free typeface metrics
    ufmFreeTypefaceMetrics frees the memory ufmGetTypefaceMetrics allocated for a data structure of the type ufmTypefaceMetrics. When ufmGetTypefaceMetrics allocates a data structure of the type ufmTypefaceMetrics, it returns the address of that data structure (typefaceMetrics). When you are finished with that ...
 ufmFreeVectorOutline(3w) -- free a vector character outline
    ufmFreeVectorOutline frees the memory ufmGetVectorOutline allocated for one or more data structures of the type ufmVectorOutline. When ufmGetVectorOutline allocates an array of one or more data structures of the type ufmVectorOutline, it returns the number of allocated data structures (nOutlines) and the address of that arra...
 ufmGetBitmap(3w) -- get a character bitmap
    ufmGetBitmap gets bitmaps for specified characters. You can get a character bitmap only for those typefaces for which bitmap or outline font files were found, that is, those typefaces which have the bit ufmTypefaceBitmaps set to 1 in their data structures of the type ufmTypeface. nTypefaceHandles specifies the number of entries (typeface handles) in the array typefaceHandles. typefaceHandles specifies one or more handles for open typefaces. Use the function
 ufmGetCharMetrics(3w) -- get character metrics by character code
    ufmGetCharMetrics gets the scalable metrics for specified character codes from font metric files. If ufmGetCharMetrics does not find the metrics for a specified character code, it returns the metrics for the default character. Set nCharCodes to 0 if you want to get character metrics for all characters in a specified typeface. You can get scalable character metrics only for those typefaces which ...
 ufmGetCharMetricsByName(3w) -- get character metrics by name or CID code
    ufmGetCharMetricsByName gets the scalable metrics for specified character names or CID codes (character id codes for CID-keyed fonts) from font metric files. You can get scalable character metrics only for those typefaces which have the flag scalableMetrics set to 1 in their ufmTypeface data structures, that is, for those typefaces for which font metric files were found. nTypefaceHandles specifies the number of entries (typefac...
 ufmGetExactOutline(3w) -- get exact outlines for specified characters
    ufmGetExactOutline gets exact outlines for specified characters. You can get a character outline only for those typefaces which have the flag scalableMetrics set to 1 in their ufmTypeface data structures, that is, for those typefaces for which outline font files were found. nTypefaceHandles specifies the number of entries (typeface handles) in the array typefaceHandles. typefaceHandles is an array of handles for open typefaces. That array mus...
 ufmGetFontInfo(3w) -- get font information
    ufmGetFontInfo gets the information for a specified font. typefaceHandle specifies the handle for an open typeface. Use the function ufmOpenTypeface to open a typeface, and get a handle for that typeface. pixelSize specifies a font size in pixels. If you want to get the information for the outline font in a specified typeface, then specify 0 for the font pixel size. ufmGetFontI...
 ufmGetFontPath(3w) -- get the current UFM font path
    ufmGetFontPath gets the current Universal Font Manager (UFM) font path. ufmGetFontPath uses the argument fontPath to return a pointer to a nullterminated character string that represents the current UFM font path. That path is used by UFM to find font files. If an error is detected, ufmGetFontPath sets that pointer to NULL. The UFM font path contains one or more full-path...
 ufmGetTransformedBitmap(3w) -- get a transformed character bitmap
    ufmGetTransformedBitmap gets transformed bitmaps for specified characters. You can get a character bitmap only for those typefaces for which bitmap or outline font files were found, that is, those typefaces which have the bit ufmTypefaceBitmaps set to 1 in their data structures of the type ufmTypeface. nTypefaceHandles specifies the number of entries (typeface handles) in the array typefaceHandles. typefaceHandles specifies one...
 ufmGetTypefaceInfo(3w) -- get typeface information
    ufmGetTypefaceInfo gets the information for a specified typeface or font family, such as Helvetica. typefaceHandle specifies the handle for an open typeface. Use the function ufmOpenTypeface to open a typeface, and get a handle for that typeface. ufmGetTypefaceInfo uses the argument typeface to return a pointer to a data structure of the type uf...
 ufmGetTypefaceList(3w) -- get a list of typefaces
    ufmGetTypefaceList gets a list of available typefaces that satisfy specified requirements. By default, ufmGetTypefaceList gets a list of all available typefaces. propertiesMask has a bit flag for each property that can be used to select typefaces, such as the ufmFoundry, ufmFamilyName and ufmRelativeWeight properties. This mask is used to specify which properties should be used to produce ...
 ufmGetTypefaceMetrics(3w) -- get typeface metrics
    ufmGetTypefaceMetrics gets scalable metrics for a specified typeface from a font metric file. You can get scalable metrics for only those typefaces that have the flag scalableMetrics set to 1 in their typeface data structures, that is, for only those typefaces for which metric files were found. typefaceHandle specifies the handle for an open typeface. Use the function ufmOpenTypeface to op...
 ufmGetVectorOutline(3w) -- get vector outlines for specified characters
    ufmGetVectorOutline gets vector outlines for specified characters. You can get a character outline only for those typefaces which have the flag scalableMetrics set to 1 in their ufmTypeface data structures, that is, for those typefaces for which outline font files were found. nTypefaceHandles specifies the number of entries (typeface handles) in the array typefaceHandles. typefaceHandles is an array of handles for open typefaces. That arra...
 ufmGetVersion(3w) -- get the version of the Universal Font Manager (UFM)
    ufmGetVersion returns the major and minor version numbers of the Universal Font Manager (UFM). These numbers can be used to check whether a particular UFM feature is available. Since a program can be dynamically linked with various versions of UFM, it should check whether the UFM version numbers are sufficiently high to provide a function that was not supported in Version 1.0 of UFM. ufmGetVersion uses the argument maj...
 ufmOpenTypeface(3w) -- open a typeface
    ufmOpenTypeface opens a specified typeface, and returns a handle for that typeface. When you are finished with that typeface, use the function ufmCloseTypeface to close it. typefaceName specifies the name of a typeface. If you are not sure what to specify, get a list of name of available typefaces by calling the function ufmGetTypefaceList. ufmOpenTypeface use...
 ufmSetFontPath(3w) -- set the Universal Font Manager (UFM) font path
    ufmSetFontPath specifies a new value for the Universal Font Manager (UFM) font path in the form of a null-terminated string of characters. If you specify a character string of length zero or a null pointer, ufmSetFontPath will set the UFM font path to its default value. Specify either a null-terminated string of characters or a null pointer for the argument fontPath. You must specify full-path names of font direc...
 standard/underlay(3) -- allocates bitplanes for display of underlay colors
    planes expects the number of bitplanes to be allocated for underlay colors. Valid values are 0 (the default), 2, 4, and 8.
 ungetc(3s) -- push character back into input stream
    ungetc inserts the character c into the buffer associated with an input stream. Pushed-back characters will be returned by subsequent reads on that stream in the reverse order of their pushing. A successful intervening call (with the stream pointed to by stream) to a file positioning function (fseek(3S), fsetpos(3S) or rewind(3S)), discards any pushed-back characters. The external storage corresponding to the stream is unchanged. A successful call to ungetc clears the end-of-file indicator for t...
 ungetwc(3s) -- push wchar_t character back into input stream
    ungetwc inserts the wchar_t character c into the buffer associated with the input stream. That character, c, will be returned by the next getwc call on that stream. ungetwc returns c. One character of pushback is guaranteed, provided something has already been read from the stream and the stream is actually buffered. If c equals (wchar_t)EOF, ungetwc does nothing to th...
 f90/unit(3) -- Returns the status of a BUFFER IN or BUFFER OUT statement
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 perl5/UNIVERSAL(3) -- base class for ALL classes (blessed references)
    UNIVERSAL is the base class which all bless references will inherit from, see the perlobj manpage UNIVERSAL provides the following methods isa ( TYPE ) isa returns true if REF is blessed into package TYPE or inherits from package TYPE. isa can be called as either a static or object method call. can ( METHOD ) can checks if the object has a method called METHOD. If it does then a reference to the sub is returned. If it does not then undef is returned. can can be called as either a static or objec...
 Tcl/unknown(3) -- Handle attempts to use non-existent commands
    This command doesn't actually exist as part of Tcl, but Tcl will invoke it if it does exist. If the Tcl interpreter encounters a command name for which there is not a defined command, then Tcl checks for the existence of a command named unknown. If there is no such command, then the interpreter returns an error. If the unknown command exists, then it is invoked with arguments consisting of the fully-substituted name and arguments for the original non-existent command. The unknown command typica...
 unlockpt(3c) -- unlock a pseudo-terminal master/slave pair
    The function unlockpt() clears a lock flag associated with the slave pseudo-terminal device associated with its master pseudo-terminal counterpart so that the slave pseudo-terminal device can be opened. fildes is a file descriptor returned from a successful open of a master pseudo-terminal device.
 f90/unpack(3) -- Unpacks an array of rank one into an array under control of a mask
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 standard/unqdevice(3) -- disables the specified device from making entries in the event queue
    dev expects a device identifier
 unregisterhost(3c) -- remove the existing host entry in NIS hosts database
    Unregisterhost sends an host name unregister request to registrar(1M) on NIS master via the yp_update(3R) call. After successfully completed, the host name will no longer be in the NIS hosts database and its Internet address is freed. This routine should be used only when NIS is enabled in the network. The arguments for the routine are: name The host name of the entry to be deleted. passwd The root password of NIS master. If the NIS master does not have root password, simply pass a NULL. Unregis...
 Tcl/unset(3) -- Delete variables
    This command removes one or more variables. Each name is a variable name, specified in any of the ways acceptable to the set command. If a name refers to an element of an array then that element is removed without affecting the rest of the array. If a name consists of an array name with no parenthesized index, then the entire array is deleted. The unset command returns an empty string as result. An error occurs if any of the variables doesn't exist, and any variables after the non-existent one ...
 Tk/update(3) -- Process pending events and/or when-idle handlers
    This command is used to bring the entire application world ``up to date.'' It flushes all pending output to the display, waits for the server to process that output and return errors or events, handles all pending events of any sort (including when-idle handlers), and repeats this set of operations until there are no pending events, no pending when-idle handlers, no pending output to the server, and no operations still outstanding at the server. If the idletasks keyword is specified as an argu...
 Tcl/uplevel(3) -- Execute a script in a different stack frame
    All of the arg arguments are concatenated as if they had been passed to concat; the result is then evaluated in the variable context indicated by level. Uplevel returns the result of that evaluation. If level is an integer then it gives a distance (up the procedure calling stack) to move before executing the command. If level consists of # followed by a number then the number gives an absolute level number. If level is omitted then it defaults to 1. Level cannot be defaulted if the first command...
 Tcl/upvar(3) -- Create link to variable in a different stack frame
    This command arranges for one or more local variables in the current procedure to refer to variables in an enclosing procedure call or to global variables. Level may have any of the forms permitted for the uplevel command, and may be omitted if the first letter of the first otherVar isn't # or a digit (it defaults to 1). For each otherVar argument, upvar makes the variable by that name in the procedure frame given by level (or at global level, if level is #0) accessible in the current procedure...
 uscas(3p) -- compare and swap operator
    uscas emulates a hardware compare and swap instruction. It works on both single and multi-processor machines. The exact algorithm used depends on the chip and system type. uscas checks that the contents of destp are equal to old and if they are, atomically changes the contents of destp to new. If the contents are not the same, a zero is returned and the operation may be repeated. Note that even with one process performing this algorithm, the compare and swap operation may fail, so the caller mus...
 f90/uscctc(3) -- Converts EBCDIC character data to ASCII character data, and vice versa
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 usclosepollsema(3p) -- detach a file descriptor from a pollable semaphore
    usclosepollsema detaches the file descriptor associated with sema. In addition to closing the caller's file descriptor, it invalidates and closes any file descriptors used by other processes using the same semaphore and in the same share group as the caller (assuming of course that the share group is sharing file descriptors). usclosepollsema will fail if one or more of the following are true: [EBADF] The file descriptor for the semaphore has somehow been already invalidated. This implies a cor...
 usconfig(3p) -- semaphore and lock arena configuration operations
    usconfig is used to configure the use of semaphores and locks. Some of these options set configurable parameters to be used on the next usinit(3P), others give back information about a particular arena. In the discussion below, arguments to usconfig are numbered starting from 1, thus the first argument refers to cmd. Many of the options require an arena pointer which is the value returned by a successful call to usin
 uscpsema(3p) -- conditionally acquires a semaphore
    uscpsema attempts to acquire the semaphore specified by sema. If the semaphore is not available (its count is less than zero), uscpsema returns immediately with an indication that the semaphore is not available.
 usctllock(3p) -- lock control operations
    usctllock provides a variety of lock control operations as specified by cmd. Metering and debugging information is available only for locks allocated from an arena with a lock type of either US_DEBUG or US_DEBUGPLUS (see usconfig(3P)). Some cmds take a third argument referred to below as arg. The following cmds are available: CL_METERFETCH Fills the lockmeter_t structure pointed to by arg with the metering data associated with lock. CL_METERRESET Reinitializes the lockmeter_t structure associate...
 usctlsema(3p) -- semaphore control operations
    usctlsema provides a variety of semaphore control operations as specified by cmd. The following cmds are available: CS_METERON Enable metering for the semaphore specified by sema. The metering information gathered consists of the number of uspsema and uscpsema calls, the number of times the semaphore could immediately be acquired, the number of usvsema calls, the number of times usvsema was called and no process was queued waiting, the current number of processes waiting on the semaphore, and th...
 usdumplock(3p) -- dump out information about a specific lock
    usdumplock dumps information about lock in a readable form. This information is written to the file descriptor given by fd. The information printed includes where in memory the lock resides, whether it is locked or free, and the metering and debugging information (see usctllock(3P)). The argument str is simply printed as a string, and can be used to aid in identifying where usdumplock was called from....
 usdumpsema(3p) -- dump out information about a specific semaphore
    usdumpsema dumps information about sema in a readable form. This information is written to the file descriptor given by fd. The information printed includes where in memory the semaphore resides, what its count is, and the metering and debugging information (see usctlsema(3P)). The argument str is simply printed as a string, and can be used to aid in identifying where usdumpsema was called from.
 perl5/User::grent(3) -- by-name interface to Perl's built-in getgr*() functions
    This module's default exports override the core getgrent(), getgruid(), and getgrnam() functions, replacing them with versions that return "User::grent" objects. This object has methods that return the similarly named structure field name from the C's passwd structure from grp.h; namely name, passwd, gid, and members (not mem). The first three return scalars, the last an array reference. You may also import all the structure fields directly into your namespace as regular variables using the ...
 perl5/User::pwent(3) -- by-name interface to Perl's built-in getpw*() functions
    This module's default exports override the core getpwent(), getpwuid(), and getpwnam() functions, replacing them with versions that return "User::pwent" objects. This object has methods that return the similarly named structure field name from the C's passwd structure from pwd.h; namely name, passwd, uid, gid, quota, comment, gecos, dir, and shell. You may also import all the structure fields directly into your namespace as regular variables using the :FIELDS import tag. (Note that this stil...
 usfreelock(3p) -- free a lock
    usfreelock frees all memory associated with the lock specified by lock. usfreelock will cause unpredictable results if lock is not a valid lock.
 usfreepollsema(3p) -- free a pollable semaphore
    usfreepollsema frees the previously allocated pollable semaphore (via usnewpollsema(3P)) specified by sema. Before freeing a pollable semaphore all the file descriptors acquired for the semaphore must be closed. For processes in a single share group, all of which are sharing file descriptors, if one process calls usclospollsema(3P), all the file descriptors for all processes will be closed. If there are processes in the share group that are not sharing f...
 usfreesema(3p) -- free a semaphore
    usfreesema frees the previously allocated semaphore (via usnewsema(3P)) specified by sema. Semaphores allocated via usnewpollsema(3P) should be freed using usfreespollsema(3P).
 usgetinfo(3p) -- exchange information though an arena
    When unrelated processes decide to share an arena, it is often useful to be able to initially communicate the location of various data structures within the arena. A single word (doubleword in 64 bit mode) communication area is available inside the arena header block, accessible via the functions usgetinfo and usputinfo. Thus, a process that sets up the arena can initialize various locks, semaphores, and common data structures, and place a single pointer that any process that joins the arena can...
 usinit(3p) -- shared arena initialization
    usinit is used to initialize a shared arena from which related or unrelated processes may allocate and share semaphores, locks and memory. Locks, semaphores and memory can then be allocated using the usptr_t returned by usinit. More than one call can be made to usinit to create separate arenas of locks and semaphores. In fact, calls to usinit may be made on behalf of a process: when sproc(2) is called, an aren...
 usinitlock(3p) -- initializes a lock
    usinitlock initializes the lock specified by lock. All previous information associated with the lock (metering, debugging) is reinitialized. usinitlock should only be used for previously allocated locks. Locks are allocated using usnewlock(3P). usinitlock will cause unpredictable results if lock does not point to a valid lock.
 usinitsema(3p) -- initialize a semaphore
    usinitsema initializes the semaphore specified by sema. The count of the semaphore is set to the value specified by val. A value of 0 implies no available resources, and the first process that attempts a 'P' operation (via uspsema) will block. This can be viewed as a synchronizing semaphore, since the goal is to always have a process block until another has completed an operation that the first process requires. Positive values for val can be used for tracking a collection of resources. The si...
 usleep(3c) -- suspend execution for an interval
    The usleep() function suspends the current thread from execution for the number of microseconds specified by the seconds argument. Because of other activity, or because of the time spent in processing the call, the actual suspension time may be longer than the amount of time specified. The seconds argument must be less than 1,000,000. If the value of seconds is 0, the call has no effect. The usleep() function uses the high resolution sleep function: nanosleep() to suspend execution of a thread....
 usmalloc(3p) -- shared arena memory allocator
    These routines provide a simple general-purpose memory allocation package that allows the user to allocate from a shared arena (see usinit(3P)). All these functions are MP safe, multiple threads/processes may access them simultaneously and are guaranteed correct behavior. More than one call can be made to usinit(3P) to set up separate malloc arenas. The file name passed to usinit(3P) is used as a key to allow shared arenas to be created for use amongst unrelated processes. Once the arena is set ...
 usnewlock(3p) -- allocate and initialize a lock
    usnewlock allocates a lock from the arena designated by handle (returned from usinit(3P)) and initializes it and all associated data. There are different types of locks; by default the fastest lock type for the class of machine the process is running on is allocated. See usconfig(3P) for other specifiable lock types. Metering and debugging are only enabled if the locks are of the debugging type (see usconfig(3P). There is a limit of a maximum of 4096 locks per shared area (for hardware supported...
 usnewpollsema(3p) -- allocate and initialize a pollable semaphore
    usnewpollsema allocates a semaphore and initializes its count to the value specified by val. Initially, metering and debugging are off (and can be turned on through a call to usctlsema(3P)) and the history logging mechanism is set according to the global setting (see usconfig(3P)). The semaphore is allocated from the shared arena designated by handle as returned from usinit(3P). Pollable semaphores never block the caller. If the semaphore is unavailable when uspsema(3P) is called, the caller is ...
 usnewsema(3p) -- allocate and initialize a semaphore
    usnewsema allocates a semaphore and initializes its count to the value specified by val. Initially, metering and debugging are off (and can be turned on through a call to usctlsema(3P)) and the history logging mechanism is set according to the global setting (see usconfig(3P)). The semaphore is allocated from the shared arena designated by handle as returned from usinit(3P). A semaphore allocated via usnewsema is a blocking semaphore - if the semaphore is unavailable, the caller will block. A po...
 usopenpollsema(3p) -- attach a file descriptor to a pollable semaphore
    usopenpollsema attaches a file descriptor to a pollable semaphore. The returned file descriptor is used when calling poll(2) or select(2) to acquire the semaphore after an unsuccessful uspsema(3P). If the caller is the first process to call usopenpollsema on sema then a new semaphore device is allocated (see usema(7M)). The user and group id of the semaphore device take on the effective user/group id of the caller. The access mode is set to acc(see chmod(2)). Calls to usopenpollsema on the same ...
 uspsema(3p) -- acquire a semaphore
    uspsema decrements the count of the previously allocated semaphore specified by sema. If the count is then negative, the semaphore will logically block the calling process until the count is incremented due to a usvsema(3P) call made by another process. The count can be interpreted in the following way: if it is greater than zero, there are 'count' resources available, namely 'count' processes can call uspsema and not block; if the count is negative then the absolute value of count is the nu...
 ftn/ussetlock(3p) -- spinlock routines
    This set of routines provide a standard test and set facility. If the lock is free then it is atomically locked, and control is returned to the caller. If the lock is already locked, the caller either spins waiting for the lock or gets queued. The locks are based in user address space thus avoiding any system call overhead in the case where the lock is available. The actual algorithm used to implement these functions depends on whether the system is a multiprocessor or a single processor. In the...
 ussetlock(3p) -- spinlock routines
    This set of routines provide a standard test and set facility. If the lock is free then it is atomically locked, and control is returned to the caller. If the lock is already locked, the caller either spins waiting for the lock or gets queued. The locks are based in user address space thus avoiding any system call overhead in the case where the lock is available. The actual algorithm used to implement these functions depends on whether the system is a multiprocessor or a single processor. In the...
 ustestsema(3p) -- return the value of a semaphore
    ustestsema returns the current value of the semaphore specified by sema. This should be viewed as a snapshot only, useful for debugging.
 usvsema(3p) -- release a semaphore
    usvsema increments the count associated with sema. If there are any processes queued waiting for the semaphore the first one is awakened. usvsema uses the usema(7M) device to reactivate a suspended process. If the process to be awoken is no longer alive, usvsema will automatically attempt to awaken the next process waiting for the semaphore. In order to use a semaphore, the caller must have joined the shared arena out of which the semaphore is allocated (via usinit(3P)), and have a file descript...
 utimes(3c) -- set file times
    The utimes call uses the "accessed" and "updated" times in that order from the tvp vector to set the corresponding recorded times for file. The caller must be the owner of the file or the super-user. The "inodechanged" time of the file is set to the current time. This routine emulates the 4.3BSD utimes system call.
 uuid(3c) -- Universal Unique Identifier functions
    Universal Unique Identifiers are bit strings that may be generated independently on separate nodes (hosts) such that globally unique strings result without requiring the hosts to be in communication with each other to ensure uniqueness. They are a component of DCE that have been independently reimplemented in IRIX, but is in accordance with the DCE specification. This implementation is API compatible with the DCE implementation. The status parameter in all functions is set to uuid_s_ok if the fu...
 standard/v(3) -- transfers a
    vector expects a 2, 3, or 4 element array, depending on whether you call the v2, v3, or v4 version of the routine. The elements of the array are the coordinates of the vertex (point) that you want to transfer to the graphics pipe. Put the x coordinate in element 0, the y coordinate in element 1, the z coordinate in element 2 (for v3 and v4), and the w coordinate in element 3 (for v4).
 validateproj(3c) -- validate a project name for a user
    The validateproj function checks to see if user user is authorized for project proj. If so, the project ID corresponding to proj is returned. The fvalidateproj function is a variant of validateproj that uses a PROJ token to make it more efficient for repeated use. Otherwise its operation is identical. For more details on creating a PROJ token, see openproj(3C).
 ftn/varargs(3) -- allow variable number of arguments in argument list
    These utilities are used to provide f77 support for subroutines with variable number of arguments. In order to use these utilities, all variable argument subroutines must be declared in each source file before they are referenced or defined. This is done by adding a $varargs compiler directive at the beginning of the source file. For example: $varargs vasub1 vasub2 vasub3 where vasub1, vasub2, and vasub3 are the names of the variable argument subroutines which are referenced or defined in the cu...
 perl5/vars(3) -- Perl pragma to predeclare global variable names
    This will predeclare all the variables whose names are in the list, allowing you to use them under "use strict", and disabling any typo warnings. Unlike pragmas that affect the $^H hints variable, the use vars and use subs declarations are not BLOCK-scoped. They are thus effective for the entire file in which they appear. You may not rescind such declarations with no vars or no subs. Packages such as the AutoLoader and SelfLoader that delay loading of subroutines within packages can create pro...
 f90/verify(3) -- Verifies that a set of characters contains all characters in a string
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 standard/videocmd(3) -- initiates a command transfer sequence on a video peripheral
    cmd expects a command value which initiates a command transfer sequence on a video peripheral. The valid command tokens are: VP_INITNTSC_COMP initialize the Live Video Digitizer for a composite NTSC video source. VP_INITNTSC_RGB initialize the Live Video Digitizer for a RGB NTSC video source. VP_INITPAL_COMP initialize the Live Video Digitizer for a composite PAL video source. VP_INITPAL_RGB initialize the Live Video Digitizer for a RGB PAL video source....
 video/videolibrary(3d) -- IRIS Video Library for SGI workstations
    The IRIS Video Library (VL) provides a software interface for working with video devices and image data. It provides a programming interface to the various SGI video products.
 video/videosync(3d) -- information about USTs and video timing on SGI systems
    In various libraries on SGI systems such as the Video Library (VL), Unadjusted System Times (USTs) are used to indicate the time at which video fields or frames cross a jack (electrical input or output of the machine). Those USTs label a single point in time, yet the video field or frame occupies a sizeable range of time. Therefore, we must define a point, within the video waveform, which a video UST labels. This point is known as the video "synchronization point." The following rules define t...
 Vk/ViewKit(3) -- A class library that makes it easier to use Motif
    VkAction VkMsgService VkAlignmentGroup VkMsgWindow VkApp VkNLS VkBackground VkNameList VkBusyDialog VkNode VkCallbackObject VkOptionMenu VkCheckBox VkOutline VkCompletionField VkOutlineASB VkComponent VkPeriodic VkComponentList VkPie VkDialogManager VkPipe VkDoubleBuffer VkPopupMenu VkErrorDialog VkPrefCustom VkFatalErrorDialog VkPrefDialog VkFileSelectionDialog VkPrefEmpty VkForkIO VkPrefGroup VkGangedGroup VkPrefItem VkGenericDialog VkPrefLabel VkGetResource VkPrefList VkGraph VkPrefOption VkH...
 standard/viewport(3) -- allocates a rectangular area of the window for an image
    left is the x coordinate of the viewport left side. right is the x coordinate of the viewport right side. bottom is the y coordinate of the viewport bottom. top is the y coordinate of the viewport top.
 Vk/VkAction(3) -- Supports encapsulation of a command that can be undone
    Specifying do/undo Behavior virtual void doit(void); virtual void undoit(void);
 Vk/VkAlignmentGroup(3) -- Support for aligning widgets by size or position
    #include PUBLIC PROTOCOL SUMMARY Constructor/Destructor VkAlignmentGroup(void); virtual void ~VkAlignmentGroup(void);
 Vk/VkApp(3) -- Class used by all ViewKit applications to handle initialization
    #include PUBLIC PROTOCOL SUMMARY Constructors VkApp(char *appClassName, int *arg_c, char **arg_v, XrmOptionDescRec *optionList = NULL, int sizeOfOptionList = 0 ) VkApp(char *appClassName, int *arg_c, char **arg_v, ArgList argList, Cardinal argCount, void (*preRealizeFunction)(Widget w), XrmOptionDescRec *optionList, int sizeOfOptionList)
 Vk/VkBackground(3) -- Support for simple work procedure-based background tasks
    #include PUBLIC PROTOCOL SUMMARY Constructor/Destructor VkBackground(void); void ~VkBackground(void); Starting and Stopping void start(void); void stop(void);
 Vk/VkBusyDialog(3) -- Manage and display busy dialogs
    #include PUBLIC PROTOCOL SUMMARY Constructor/Destructor VkBusyDialog(const char* name); virtual void ~VkBusyDialog(void);
 Vk/VkCallbackObject(3) -- An abstract class that supports classes that use C++ member function callbacks
    Invoking Callbacks void callCallbacks(const char* const name, void *callData);
 Vk/VkCheckBox(3) -- A simple interface to a multi-choice preference panel
    #include PUBLIC PROTOCOL SUMMARY Constructor/Destructor VkCheckBox(const char* name, Widget parent); virtual void ~VkCheckBox(void);
 Vk/VkCmd(3) -- the simplest command class
    #include
 Vk/VkCmdFactory(3) -- produces VkCmd objects
    #include
 Vk/VkCmdManager(3) -- execute commands
    #include
 Vk/VkCmdRegistry(3) -- registry for named command classes
    #include
 Vk/VkColorChooserDialog(3) -- A dialog manager for color chooser dialogs
    #include PUBLIC PROTOCOL SUMMARY Constructor/Destructor VkColorChooserDialog(const char*); virtual ~VkColorChooserDialog(void); Manipulating the Colors XColor* getXColor(void); void setXColor(unsigned short, unsigned short, unsigned short); void setCurrentXColor(unsigned short, unsigned short, unsigned short); void setStoredXColor(unsigned short, unsigned short, unsigned short); The following functions do not follow the X model. They accept and return rgb values in th...
 Vk/VkCompletionField(3) -- A text input field that supports automatic name completion
    #include PUBLIC PROTOCOL SUMMARY Constructor/Destructor VkCompletionField(const char* name, Widget parent); virtual void ~VkCompletionField(void);
 Vk/VkComponent(3) -- Abstract base class for all ViewKit components
    #include PUBLIC PROTOCOL SUMMARY Displaying Components virtual void show() virtual void hide() void manage() void unmanage()
 Vk/VkComponentList(3) -- A simple list of VkComponent objects
    #include PUBLIC PROTOCOL SUMMARY Constructor/Destructor VkComponentList(void); virtual void ~VkComponentList(void);
 Vk/VkConfigureWM(3) -- Configure the window manager
    VkConfigureWM Sets window manager hints. PPPPaaaaggggeeee 1111
 Vk/VkCursorList(3) -- Support lists of cursors that can be used for animation
    This abstract base class manages a list of cursors and supports functions for cycling through the list. It is used as the basis of VkBusyCursor, which provides a sequence of animated busy cursors. To add alternate busy cursors to a ViewKit application, one can subclass VkCursorList, provide the desired sequence of Cursors, and install the new class with the VkApp object.
 Vk/VkCutPaste(3) -- A simple API for Cut/Copy/Drag/Drop
    #include PUBLIC PROTOCOL SUMMARY Constructor/Destructor VkCutPaste(Widget w); void ~VkCutPaste(void); Copy (Export) Methods void clear(Atom selection, Time time = CurrentTime); Boolean putCopy(Atom selection, Atom target, XtPointer data, unsigned long numBytes); Boolean putCopy(Atom selection, const char *targetName, XtPointer data, unsigned long numBytes); Boolean putReference(Atom selection, Atom target, XtPointer data, unsigned long numBytes); Boolean putReference(Atom selec...
 Vk/VkDeck(3) -- Container that makes one child at a time visible
    #include PUBLIC PROTOCOL SUMMARY Constructor/Destructor VkDeck(const char*,Widget); virtual ~VkDeck(void);
 Vk/VkDialogManager(3) -- An abstract manager class that caches and supports Motif dialogs
    #include PUBLIC PROTOCOL SUMMARY Destructor virtual void ~VkDialogManager(void);
 Vk/VkDoubleBuffer(3) -- Abstract class supports classes that draw doublebuffered graphics
    #include PUBLIC PROTOCOL SUMMARY Constructor/Destructor VkDoubleBuffer(const char* name, Widget parent); virtual void ~VkDoubleBuffer(void);
 Vk/VkErrorDialog(3) -- A dialog manager for error dialogs
    #include PUBLIC PROTOCOL SUMMARY Constructor/Destructor VkErrorDialog(const char* name); virtual void ~VkErrorDialog(void);
 Vk/VkEZ(3) -- A simple "widget wrapper" package to make using Motif easier
    EZ& operator=(int); EZ& operator=(float); EZ& operator=(const char *); Assignment operators assign integer, floating point, and character values to a widget. For example: EZ(text) = 12345; This example displays the integer 12345 in a text field. The following list describes the behavior of the integer assignment operator for each widget that supports it. XmToggle, XmToggleButtonGadget If the specified value is zero, turns the toggle off; if the specified value is non-zero, turns the toggle on Xm...
 Vk/VkFatalErrorDialog(3) -- Simple manager for fatal error dialogs
    #include PUBLIC PROTOCOL SUMMARY Constructor/Destructor VkFatalErrorDialog(const char* name); virtual void ~VkFatalErrorDialog(void);
 Vk/VkFileSelectionDialog(3) -- Dialog manager for file selection dialogs
    #include PUBLIC PROTOCOL SUMMARY Constructor/Destructor VkFileSelectionDialog(const char* name); virtual void ~VkFileSelectionDialog(void);
 VkFLM(3) -- FLEXlm License Management
    enterLicenseMessage disableLicenseWarnings disableThirtyDayLicenseWarnings thirtyDayMessage sixtyDayMessage ninetyDayMessage noLicenseMessage noLicenseServerMessage notEnoughLicensesMessage licenseExpiredMessage loseLicenseMessage warnLoseLicenseMessage regainLicenseMessage
 Vk/VkForkIO(3) -- Command-line interface to shell command component
    #include PUBLIC PROTOCOL SUMMARY Constructor/Destructor VkForkIO(const char* name, Widget parent, const char* prompt = NULL); virtual void ~VkForkIO(void);
 Vk/VkForkWindow(3) -- Window connected to a subprocess via VkForkIO
    #include PUBLIC PROTOCOL SUMMARY Constructor/Destructor VkForkWindow(const char* name, const char* prompt = NULL); virtual void ~VkForkWindow(void);
 Vk/VkFormat(3) -- Convenience function that prints into a buffer and returns it
    VkFormat passes its arguments to vsprintf, which writes to a buffer that is owned by VkFormat. What is written must not exceed BUFSIZ, as defined by stdio.h. The caller must not attempt to free the buffer returned by VkFormat. The buffer contents remain valid only until the next call to VkFormat. In particular, the buffer will remain valid across function calls only as long as those functions, and anything they call, do not also use VkFormat. (libvk uses its own internal ...
 Vk/VkGangedGroup(3) -- Utility class that supports ganged scrollbars and scales
    #include PUBLIC PROTOCOL SUMMARY Constructor/Destructor VkGangedGroup(void); virtual void ~VkGangedGroup(void);
 Vk/VkGenericDialog(3) -- An abstract class that supports custom dialog managers
    #include PUBLIC PROTOCOL SUMMARY Constructor/Destructor VkGenericDialog(const char* name); virtual void ~VkGenericDialog(void);
 Vk/VkGetResource(3) -- Convenience functions for retrieving resources
    char * VkGetResource(const char *name, const char *className); XtPointer VkGetResource(Widget w, const char *names, const char *classNames, const char *desiredType, const char *defaultValue);
 Vk/VkGraph(3) -- A component that displays directed graphs
    #include PUBLIC PROTOCOL SUMMARY Constructor/Destructor VkGraph(char* name, Widget parent); virtual void ~VkGraph(void);
 Vk/VkHelp(3) -- Description of ViewKit-supported on-line help facilities
    if an application wants to provide help its own way, everything is still automatic if the application is linked with a library that provides entry points that match the SGI help library. The help entry points are weak symbols in libvk, and must not be weak symbols in the application's help library. Because of the way the loader works (9/96), you must be careful that your help routines actually get loaded: o If your help library is a DSO, there is not problem. o If your help library is an archiv...
 Vk/VkHelpPane(3) -- A menu pane that interfaces to the ViewKit help system
    #include PUBLIC PROTOCOL SUMMARY Constructor/Destructor VkHelpPane(const char *name, VkMenuDesc *desc = NULL, XtPointer defaultClientData = NULL); VkHelpPane(Widget parent, const char *name, VkMenuDesc *desc = NULL, XtPointer defaultClientData = NULL); virtual void ~VkHelpPane(void);
 Vk/VkIconButton(3) -- Creates an XmPushButton from an Xpm description
    #include PUBLIC PROTOCOL SUMMARY Constructor/Destructor VkIconButton(char*,Widget,char**,Boolean); virtual ~VkIconButton(void);
 Vk/VkInfoDialog(3) -- A dialog manager for information dialogs
    #include PUBLIC PROTOCOL SUMMARY Constructor/Destructor VkInfoDialog(const char* name); virtual void ~VkInfoDialog(void);
 Vk/VkInput(3) -- Encapsulation class for input callbacks on file descriptors
    #include PUBLIC PROTOCOL SUMMARY Constructor/Destructor VkInput(void); virtual void ~VkInput(void);
 Vk/VkInterruptDialog(3) -- A dialog manager that support interrupts
    #include PUBLIC PROTOCOL SUMMARY Constructor/Destructor VkInterruptDialog(const char* name); virtual void ~VkInterruptDialog(void); Checking for Interrupts Boolean wasInterupted(void);
 VkLicense(3) -- One Line Description
    #include PUBLIC PROTOCOL SUMMARY Category -constructor-> VkLicense(char*,char*,long);
 Vk/VkListSearch(3) -- A utility class for implementing incremental search in a list
    VkListSearch is a utility class for implementing incremental search within a Motif scrolled list (XmScrolledList or SgScrolledList) or within a custom list-like widget. It takes a Motif text widget and a Motif list, and transparently implements the search behavior.
 Vk/VkMenu(3) -- Abstract base class for all ViewKit menu container objects
    #include PUBLIC PROTOCOL SUMMARY Adding Items VkMenuAction *addAction(const char *name, XtCallbackProc func, XtPointer data, int pos = -1); VkMenuAction *addAction(const char *name, XtCallbackProc func, XtCallbackProc undoCallabck, XtPointer data, int pos = -1); VkMenuActionWidget *addActionWidget(const char *name, XtCallbackProc func, XtPointer data, int pos = -1); VkMenuActionWidget *addActionWidget(const char *name, XtCallbackProc func, XtCallbackProc undoCallback, XtPointer dat...
 Vk/VkMenuAction(3) -- Class For all menu actions
    #include PUBLIC PROTOCOL SUMMARY Constructor/Destructor VkMenuAction(const char *name, XtCallbackProc callback = NULL, XtPointer clientData = NULL); VkMenuAction(const char *name, XtCallbackProc callback, XtCallbackProc undoCallback, XtPointer clientData = NULL); ~VkMenuAction(); Manipulating Menu Items virtual void undo();
 Vk/VkMenuActionObject(3) -- Support for menu commands represented as objects
    #include PUBLIC PROTOCOL SUMMARY Constructor/Destructor VkMenuActionObject(const char *name, XtPointer clientData = NULL); ~VkMenuActionObject();
 Vk/VkMenuActionWidget(3) -- Class For Widget-based Menu Actions
    #include PUBLIC PROTOCOL SUMMARY Constructor/Destructor VkMenuActionWidget(const char *name, XtCallbackProc callback = NULL, XtPointer clientData = NULL); VkMenuActionWidget(const char *name, XtCallbackProc callback, XtCallbackProc undoCallback, XtPointer clientData = NULL); ~VkMenuActionWidget();
 Vk/VkMenuBar(3) -- A ViewKit Menu Bar
    #include PUBLIC PROTOCOL SUMMARY Constructor/Destructor VkMenuBar(Boolean showHelpPane = TRUE); VkMenuBar(const char *name, Boolean showHelpPane = TRUE); VkMenuBar(VkMenuDesc *desc, XtPointer defaultCientData= NULL, Boolean showHelpPane = TRUE); VkMenuBar(const char *name, VkMenuDesc *name, XtPointer defaultCientData= NULL, Boolean showHelpPane = TRUE); virtual ~VkMenuBar();
 Vk/VkMenuConfirmFirstAction(3) -- A menu action that requires user confirmation
    #include PUBLIC PROTOCOL SUMMARY Constructor/Destructor VkMenuConfirmFirstAction(const char *name, XtCallbackProc doitCallback, XtPointer clientData); VkMenuConfirmFirstAction(const char *name, XtCallbackProc doitCallback, XtCallbackProc undoCallback , XtPointer clientData); ~VkMenuConfirmFirstAction(); Manipulating Menu Items virtual void undo();
 Vk/VkMenuItem(3) -- Abstract base class for all ViewKit menu classes
    #include PUBLIC PROTOCOL SUMMARY Manipulating Menu Items void activate(); void deactivate(); int remove(); void show(); void hide(); virtual void setLabel(const char * str); void setPosition(int pos);
 Vk/VkMenuLabel(3) -- A label that can appear in a menu
    #include PUBLIC PROTOCOL SUMMARY Constructor/Destructor VkMenuLabel(const char* itemName); virtual void ~VkMenuLabel(void);
 Vk/VkMenuSeparator(3) -- Class For All Menu Actions
    #include PUBLIC PROTOCOL SUMMARY Constructor/Destructor VkMenuSeparator(); ~VkMenuSeparator();
 Vk/VkMenuToggle(3) -- Class that support two-state actions in menus
    #include PUBLIC PROTOCOL SUMMARY Constructor/Destructor VkMenuToggle(const char *, XtCallbackProc, XtPointer); VkMenuToggle(const char *, XtCallbackProc, XtCallbackProc, XtPointer); ~VkMenuToggle(); Manipulating Menu Items void setVisualState(Boolean state); void setStateAndNotify(Boolean);
 Vk/VkMenuUndoManager(3) -- Support for an undo facility
    #include PUBLIC PROTOCOL SUMMARY Constructor/Destructor VkMenuUndoManager(const char *, XtCallbackProc, XtPointer); ~VkMenuUndoManager(); Manipulating Menu Items virtual void undo();
 Vk/VkMeter(3) -- Display a layered bar graph
    #include PUBLIC PROTOCOL SUMMARY Constructor/Destructor VkMeter(const char *name, Widget parent); virtual void ~VkMeter(void);
 Vk/VkModel(3) -- An abstract class that supports Model-View-Controller style applications
    #include PUBLIC PROTOCOL SUMMARY Destructor virtual void ~VkModel(void);
 Vk/VkModified(3) -- Base class for VkModifiedAttachment
    #include PUBLIC PROTOCOL SUMMARY Constructor/Destructor virtual void ~VkModified(void); VkModified(Boolean blankIsValue = False);
 Vk/VkModifiedAttachment(3) -- Attachment class for showing modified text widgets
    #include PUBLIC PROTOCOL SUMMARY Constructor/Destructor VkModifiedAttachment(Boolean blankIsValue = False, Boolean autoAdjust = True, Boolean incrementalChange = False); virtual void ~VkModifiedAttachment(void);
 Vk/VkMovieButton(3) -- A multimedia button component that plays a movie
    #include
 Vk/VkMoviePlayer(3) -- A multimedia Player component that plays a movie
    #include
 Vk/VkMsgApp(3) -- Class used by messaging applications to handle initialization
    #include PUBLIC PROTOCOL SUMMARY Constructor/Destructor VkMsgApp(char* appClassName, int* argc_c, char** arg_v, XrmOptionDescRec* optionList = NULL, int sizeOfOptionList = 0, const char* ptid = NULL, const char* sessid = NULL, Boolean noProtocol = False); virtual void ~VkMsgApp(void);
 Vk/VkMsgClient(3) -- ViewKit application interface to the ViewKit Message Facility
    VkMsgClient is the normal way application code interacts with the message facility. There are methods for sending and receiving messages, installing message actions, and registering interest in message patterns.
 Vk/VkMsgComponent(3) -- Abstract base class for all ViewKit message components
    #include PUBLIC PROTOCOL SUMMARY Constructor/Destructor VkMsgComponent(const char* name); virtual void ~VkMsgComponent(void);
 Vk/VkMsgFacility(3) -- ViewKit simple interface to the ToolTalk message service
    defaultSyncTimeout Default limit for synchronous requests (60 sec)
 Vk/VkMsgService(3) -- ViewKit object-oriented interface to the ToolTalk message service
    #include PUBLIC PROTOCOL SUMMARY Constructor/Destructor VkMsgService(Widget w, const char* ptid = NULL, const char* sessid = NULL); void ~VkMsgService(void);
 Vk/VkMsgWindow(3) -- Base class for all top-level messaging windows with menus
    #include PUBLIC PROTOCOL SUMMARY Constructor/Destructor VkMsgWindow(const char* name); virtual void ~VkMsgWindow(void);
 Vk/VkNameList(3) -- A class that supports and manipulates lists of strings
    VkNameList provides a convenient way to maintain a list of character strings. Strings can be added or removed individually, the list can be sorted or reversed, duplications can be removed, the best completion of a substring can be found, the most common occurrence can be computed, and so on. The list can also be automatically converted to a XmStringTable, making this a useful class for use with Motif widgets that require a list of compound strings. Some of the VkNameList operators allocate memor...
 Vk/VkNLS(3) -- Network Licensing support
    #include PUBLIC PROTOCOL SUMMARY Constructor/Destructor VkNLS(char* vendorID, long key, int productID, char* version, NLSCallback loseLicenseCallback = NULL, void *clientData=NULL); void ~VkNLS(void);
 Vk/VkNode(3) -- Base node class used by VkGraph
    #include PUBLIC PROTOCOL SUMMARY Constructor/Destructor VkNode(void); VkNode(const char *name,const char *label); VkNode(const char *name, VkNode *parent, const char *label); virtual void ~VkNode(void);
 Vk/VkOlNode(3) -- A utility class used by VkOutline
    The VkOlNode is an utility class for VkOutline, VkOutlineASB components. In addition to being helpful as a node in the outline tree, it provides ways for outline components to manage opening, closing, display attribute setting and searching. Some public methods documented here can be used by derived class implementors for VkOutline, VkOutlineASB. They can also be helpful to users of VkOutline::walkAllKeywords. A VkOlNode has a display string (name), a key used in searching and a hook - user defi...
 Vk/VkOptionMenu(3) -- An option menu for use with ViewKit menu items
    #include PUBLIC PROTOCOL SUMMARY Constructor/Destructor VkOptionMenu(VkMenuDesc *desc, XtPointer defaultClientData = NULL); VkOptionMenu(const char *name = "optionMenu", VkMenuDesc *desc = NULL, XtPointer defaultClientData = NULL); VkOptionMenu(Widget parent, VkMenuDesc *desc, XtPointer defaultClientData = NULL); VkOptionMenu(Widget parent, const char *name = "optionMenu", VkMenuDesc *desc = NULL, XtPointer defaultClientData = NULL); ~VkOptionMenu();...
 Vk/VkOutline(3) -- A simple outliner
    #include PUBLIC PROTOCOL SUMMARY Constructor/Destructor VkOutline (const char *name, Widget parent); virtual void ~VkOutline(void);
 Vk/VkOutlineASB(3) -- An outliner that uses the annotated scrollbar
    #include PUBLIC PROTOCOL SUMMARY Constructor/Destructor VkOutlineASB& VkOutlineASB(const char* name, Widget parent); virtual void ~VkOutlineASB(void);
 Vk/VkPeriodic(3) -- Support for performing actions at regular periodic intervals
    #include PUBLIC PROTOCOL SUMMARY Constructor/Destructor VkPeriodic(int interval); virtual void ~VkPeriodic(void); Starting and Stopping void start(void); void stop(void);
 Vk/VkPie(3) -- A simple pie chart component
    #include PUBLIC PROTOCOL SUMMARY Constructor/Destructor VkPie(const char *name, Widget parent) virtual void ~VkPie(void);
 Vk/VkPipe(3) -- Object-oriented interface to Unix pipes
    #include PUBLIC PROTOCOL SUMMARY Constructor/Destructor VkPipe(int& fd); void ~VkPipe(void);
 Vk/VkPixmap(3) -- Convenience functions that work with libXpm
    Widget w -- used by libXpm to derive necessary visual information. char **xpmPixmapDesc, **xpmInsensitivePixmapDesc -- is an xpm programmatic description. char *xpmBufferOrFile, *xpmInsensitiveBufferOrFile -- is a character string that is an xpm description in a buffer, or else a file name. char **resources -- specifies the resource to be set, such as XmNlabelPixmap or XmNselectPixmap. The default is XmNlabelPixmap....
 Vk/VkPopupMenu(3) -- A Popup menu class
    #include PUBLIC PROTOCOL SUMMARY Constructor/Destructor VkPopupMenu(VkMenuDesc *desc, XtPointer defaultClientData = NULL); VkPopupMenu(const char *name = "popupMenu", VkMenuDesc *desc = NULL, XtPointer defaultClientData = NULL); VkPopupMenu(Widget parent, VkMenuDesc *desc, XtPointer defaultClientData = NULL); VkPopupMenu(Widget parent, const char *name = "popupMenu", VkMenuDesc *desc = NULL, XtPointer defaultClientData = NULL); ~VkPopupMenu(); Displaying Menus" virtual vo...
 Vk/VkPrefCustom(3) -- Custom widget holder for preference package
    #include PUBLIC PROTOCOL SUMMARY Constructor/Destructor VkPrefCustom(const char* name); virtual void ~VkPrefCustom(void);
 Vk/VkPrefDialog(3) -- Preference dialog interface for preference package
    #include PUBLIC PROTOCOL SUMMARY Constructor/Destructor VkPrefDialog(const char* name, VkPrefItem* item = NULL); virtual void ~VkPrefDialog(void);
 Vk/VkPrefEmpty(3) -- Empty place holder for preference package (decorative)
    #include PUBLIC PROTOCOL SUMMARY Constructor/Destructor VkPrefEmpty(void); virtual void ~VkPrefEmpty(void);
 Vk/VkPrefGroup(3) -- Grouping interface for preference package
    #include PUBLIC PROTOCOL SUMMARY Constructor/Destructor VkPrefGroup(const char* name, Boolean horizOrientation = False, Boolean noLabel = False); virtual void ~VkPrefGroup(void);
 Vk/VkPrefItem(3) -- Abstract class that supports preference items
    #include PUBLIC PROTOCOL SUMMARY Access Functions virtual int type(void); virtual Boolean changed(void); virtual Dimension labelHeight(void); virtual Dimension baseHeight(void); virtual void setLabelHeight(Dimension height); virtual void setBaseHeight(Dimension height); Widget labelWidget(void); Activating/Deactivating virtual void activate(); virtual void deactivate();
 Vk/VkPrefLabel(3) -- Label for preference package (decorative)
    #include PUBLIC PROTOCOL SUMMARY Constructor/Destructor VkPrefLabel(const char* name); virtual void ~VkPrefLabel(void);
 Vk/VkPrefList(3) -- List-arrangement interface for preference package
    #include PUBLIC PROTOCOL SUMMARY Constructor/Destructor VkPrefList(const char* name); virtual void ~VkPrefList(void);
 Vk/VkPrefOption(3) -- Option menu preference field
    #include PUBLIC PROTOCOL SUMMARY Constructor/Destructor VkPrefOption(const char* name, int numEntries); virtual void ~VkPrefOption(void);
 Vk/VkPrefRadio(3) -- Radio box interface for preference package
    #include PUBLIC PROTOCOL SUMMARY Constructor/Destructor VkPrefRadio(const char* name, Boolean horizOrientation = False, Boolean noLabel = False); virtual void ~VkPrefRadio(void);
 Vk/VkPrefSeparator(3) -- Separator for preference package (decorative)
    #include PUBLIC PROTOCOL SUMMARY Constructor/Destructor VkPrefSeparator(const char* name); virtual void ~VkPrefSeparator(void);
 Vk/VkPrefText(3) -- Text input preference field
    #include PUBLIC PROTOCOL SUMMARY Constructor/Destructor VkPrefText(const char* name, int columns = 5); virtual void ~VkPrefText(void);
 Vk/VkPrefToggle(3) -- Toggle interface for preference package
    #include PUBLIC PROTOCOL SUMMARY Constructor/Destructor VkPrefToggle(const char* name, Boolean forceLabelFormat = False); virtual void ~VkPrefToggle(void);
 Vk/VkProgram(3) -- Object-oriented interface to subprogram execution
    #include PUBLIC PROTOCOL SUMMARY Constructor/Destructor VkProgram(const char* cmd, int killChildOnExit = 1); virtual void ~VkProgram(void);
 Vk/VkProgressDialog(3) -- A dialog manager supporting interruptible dialogs with a progress indicator
    #include PUBLIC PROTOCOL SUMMARY Constructor/Destructor VkProgressDialog(const char* name, Boolean showCancel = TRUE); virtual void ~VkProgressDialog(void);
 Vk/VkPromptDialog(3) -- A dialog manager for prompt dialogs
    #include PUBLIC PROTOCOL SUMMARY Constructor/Destructor VkPromptDialog(const char*); virtual ~VkPromptDialog(void);
 Vk/VkQuestionDialog(3) -- Dialog Manager class for question dialogs
    #include PUBLIC PROTOCOL SUMMARY Constructor/Destructor VkQuestionDialog(const char* name); virtual ~VkQuestionDialog(void);
 Vk/VkRadioBox(3) -- Simple support for a One-Of-Many selections
    #include PUBLIC PROTOCOL SUMMARY Constructor?Destructor VkRadioBox(const char* name, Widget parent); virtual ~VkRadioBox(void);
 Vk/VkRadioGroup(3) -- Support for radio behavior within any set of toggle buttons
    #include PUBLIC PROTOCOL SUMMARY Constructor/Destructor VkRadioGroup(void); virtual ~VkRadioGroup(void);
 Vk/VkRadioSubMenu(3) -- A menu pane with radio behavior
    #include PUBLIC PROTOCOL SUMMARY Constructor/Destructor VkRadioSubMenu(const char *name, VkMenuDesc *desc = NULL, XtPointer defaultClientData = 0); VkRadioSubMenu(Widget parent, const char *name, VkMenuDesc *desc = NULL, XtPointer defaultClientData = 0); ~VkRadioSubMenu();
 Vk/VkRepeatButton(3) -- A component for displaying repeating Motif buttons
    #include PUBLIC PROTOCOL SUMMARY Constructor/Destructor VkRepeatButton(char* name, Widget parent, VkRepeatButtonType type); virtual void ~VkRepeatButton(void);
 Vk/VkResizer(3) -- Attachment class for resizing and moving widgets
    #include PUBLIC PROTOCOL SUMMARY Constructor/Destructor VkResizer(Boolean autoAdjust = False, Boolean liveResize = False); virtual ~VkResizer(void);
 Vk/VkRunOnce(3) -- Allow an application to have only a single instance
    #include PUBLIC PROTOCOL SUMMARY Constructor/Destructor VkRunOnce(VkNameList *args, Boolean per_host); ~VkRunOnce();
 Vk/VkRunOnce2(3) -- Allow an application to have only a single instance
    #include PUBLIC PROTOCOL SUMMARY Constructor/Destructor VkRunOnce2(VkNameList *args, Boolean per_host); ~VkRunOnce2();
 Vk/VkScroll(3) -- Automatic scrolled window using the annotated scrollbar
    #include PUBLIC PROTOCOL SUMMARY Constructor/Destructor VkScroll(const char* name, Widget parent); virtual void ~VkScroll(void);
 Vk/VkSimpleWindow(3) -- Base class for all top-level windows
    #include PUBLIC PROTOCOL SUMMARY Constructor/Destructor VkSimpleWindow(const char *name, ArgList args = NULL, Cardinal argCount = 0); virtual ~VkSimpleWindow();
 Vk/VkSoApp(3) -- Class used by all Inventor ViewKit applications to handle initialization
    #include PUBLIC PROTOCOL SUMMARY Constructor/Destructor VkSoApp(char*,int*,char**,XrmOptionDescRec*,int); ~VkSoApp(void);
 Vk/VkSoMsgApp(3) -- Class used by all Inventor ViewKit messaging applications to handle initialization
    #include PUBLIC PROTOCOL SUMMARY Constructor/Destructor VkSoApp(char*,int*,char**,XrmOptionDescRec*,int); ~VkSoMsgApp(void);
 Vk/VkSubMenu(3) -- A container for pulldown or pull-right menu panes
    #include PUBLIC PROTOCOL SUMMARY Constructor/Destructor VkSubMenu(const char *name, VkMenuDesc *desc = NULL, XtPointer defaultClientData = NULL); VkSubMenu(Widget parent, const char *, VkMenuDesc *desc = NULL, XtPointer defaultClientData = NULL); virtual ~VkSubMenu(); Tear Off Control void showTearOff(Boolean showit);
 Vk/VkSubProcessRep(3) -- Object-oriented interface to a running subprocess
    #include PUBLIC PROTOCOL SUMMARY Constructor/Destructor static VkSubProcess create(char* cmd, int killChildOnExit, int redirectIn);
 Vk/VkTabbedDeck(3) -- Combines a VkTabPanel and a VkDeck
    #include PUBLIC PROTOCOL SUMMARY Constructor/Destructor VkTabbedDeck(const char*,Widget); virtual ~VkTabbedDeck(void);
 Vk/VkTabPanel(3) -- A component for displaying a tabular control panel
    #include PUBLIC PROTOCOL SUMMARY Constructor/Destructor VkTabPanel(char* name, Widget parent, Boolean horizOrientation = True, int tabHeight = 0); virtual void ~VkTabPanel(void);
 Vk/VkTextIO(3) -- Command-line interface text component
    #include PUBLIC PROTOCOL SUMMARY Constructor/Destructor VkTextIO(const char* name, Widget parent, const char* prompt = NULL); virtual void ~VkTextIO(void);
 Vk/VkTickMarks(3) -- A component for displaying a vertical set of tick marks
    #include PUBLIC PROTOCOL SUMMARY Constructor/Destructor VkTickMarks(char* name, Widget parent, Boolean labelsToLeft = True, Boolean noLabels = False, Boolean centerLabels = False); virtual void ~VkTickMarks(void);
 Vk/VkTrace(3) -- Utility routines for tracing ViewKit applications
    This package is a set of functions that can be used to generate time-stamped traces from within ViewKit applications. Traces are normal ASCII files, intended for human perusal. For normal VkApp applications, the user must insert all calls into the source, including initialization from within the application. For VkMsgApp applications, initialization, and some calls are already present. GLOBAL VARIABLE CONTROLS Tracing is controlled by global variables that should be set as early as possible with...
 Vk/VkVisual(3) -- convenience class for dealing with X11 visuals
    Dealing with the interaction between widgets and X11 visuals can get complicated. Some applications either get it wrong, or else stick with the default visual when another would be more appropriate. Code, even library code, that assumes default visual attributes is commonplace. Such an assumption is especially bad in a library, because libraries must work with applications that use non-default visuals. VkVisual() makes it easy for an application to set up the X11 visual information it needs. Usi...
 Vk/VkVuMeter(3) -- A component for displaying a segmented meter
    #include PUBLIC PROTOCOL SUMMARY Constructor/Destructor VkVuMeter(char* name, Widget parent); virtual void ~VkVuMeter(void);
 Vk/VkWarningDialog(3) -- Dialog manager class for warning dialogs
    #include PUBLIC PROTOCOL SUMMARY Constructor/Destructor VkWarningDialog(const char* name); virtual void ~VkWarningDialog(void);
 VkWebViewer(3) -- Web viewing component
    #include PUBLIC PROTOCOL SUMMARY Constructor/Destructor VkWebViewer(const char *, VkComponent); VkWebViewer(const char *, Widget); VkWebViewer(const char *); ~VkWebViewer();
 VkWebViewerBase(3) -- Web viewing component
    #include PUBLIC PROTOCOL SUMMARY Constructor/Destructor VkWebViewerBase(const char *, VkComponent) VkWebViewerBase(const char *, Widget) VkWebViewerBase(const char *) ~VkWebViewerBase();
 Vk/VkWidgetList(3) -- Supports operations on a list of widgets
    The VkWidgetList class provides a convenient way to maintain and manipulate lists of widgets. Widgets can be added and removed from the list, or accessed by index. The VkWidgetList adds a destroyCallback to each added widget to maintain the integrity of the list when widgets are destroyed.
 Vk/VkWindow(3) -- Base class for all top-level windows with menus
    #include PUBLIC PROTOCOL SUMMARY Constructor/Destructor VkWindow(const char *name, ArgList args = NULL, Cardinal argCount = 0); virtual ~VkWindow();
 video/vlbufferreset(3d) -- VL buffer state management routines
    svr Specifies the server handle. path Specifies the path handle. node Specifies the node handle. buffer Specifies the buffer handle. advice Specifies the advice for the buffer.
 video/vlcallbacks(3d) -- IRIS VL event handling routines
    svr Specifies the video server. fd a file descriptor that can be used with select(2). handler Pointer to a function to handle data valid on the file descriptor. pendingFunc Pointer to a function that will tell whether there is data that has been read from the file descriptor, but not passed to a handler function. If this is null, no data will be checked for before entering select(2). clientData Data for the use of the client callback. path The path for which a callback will be invoked, of VL_ANY...
 video/vlcreatebuffer(3d) -- IRIS VL buffer create and destroy routines
    vlCreateBuffer creates and returns a handle to a buffer which can then be registered with a path and used to send or receive video data. A VLBuffer consists of a list of frame-sized regions of memory each with an associated header block. Buffers are needed for transferring data to or from memory nodes. To receive a frame, the reader calls one of vlGetNextValid or vlGetLatestValid , and to free that frame calls vlPutFree. To send a frame, the writer calls vlGetNextFree, copies the data to be sent...
 video/vlcreatepath(3d) -- manage VL paths
    svr Specifies the server handle. vlDev Specifies the device handle. path Specifies the path handle. source Specifies the source node. drain Specifies the drain node.
 video/vlDMBufferGetValid(3d) -- VL DMbuffer management routines
    vlDMBufferGetValid returns a valid DMbuffer containing video data from the specified node and path. This call is used in video capture-type applications where a path is set up to route image data from a source video device node to drain memory node. The buffer that is returned contains one video image, either a field or a frame. dmBufferMapData can be used to get a pointer to the image in the buffer. The contents of the buffer should not be modified. vlDMBufferPutValid takes a valid DMbuffer and...
 video/vldmbuffersend(3d) -- send a DMbuffer to video out.
    vlDMBufferSend puts the DMbuffer on the specified paths output drain queue. Care must be taken not to overflow this queue by adding buffers faster than the video library can dequeue them and send them out. This call should be synchronized with VLTransferComplete events from the path which indicates a buffer has been sent out.
 video/vlDMGetParams(3d) -- get DMparams list for video subsystem
    vlDMGetParams queries the video subsystem for a list of parameters describing the characteristics of a specified node and path. This parameter list is required to create a DMbufferpool which can be used for video transfers on the same path and memory node. vlDMGetParams should be called after dmBufferSetPoolDefaults(3dm) and before dmBufferCreatePool(3dm).
 video/vldmpoolregister(3d) -- set up a DMbufferpool for video transfer
    vlDMPoolGetParams queries the video library for the parameters required to create a DMbufferpool which can be used for video transfers on the specified path and memory node. This routine should be called after dmBufferSetPoolDefaults(3dm) and before dmBufferCreatePool(3dm). vlDMPoolRegister associates the DMbufferpool with the given path and node. This is only necessary for paths where video is the source and memory is the drain. This call should be made before any transfer has begun on the spec...
 video/vleventrecv(3d) -- event handling routines
    vlPathGetFD returns the file descriptor associated with the specified path. This FD can be used in conjuction with a select(2) call for notification that events are available for the path. vlEventRecv returns the next event queued on the specified path. If no event is available vlEventRecv returns -1 and sets vlErrno to VLAgain. If the event is a VLTransferComplete event from a video source to a memory drain, the event will have a DMBuffer associated with it. This buffer must be obtained and rel...
 video/vlgetconnection(3d) -- manage the connectivity of a VL path
    svr Specifies the server handle. path Specifies the path handle. node Specifies the node to get connection information from. port Specifies the port to get connection information from. nodelist portlist On return, (nodelist[i], portlist[i]) specify the source or target connections to (node, port). n On entry, n points to an integer value specifying the size of the nodelist and portlist arrays. On exit, n is updated to reflect the actual number of connections returned....
 video/vlgetconnectioninfo(3d) -- get information about a video connection
    path Specifies the path. source Specifies the source node. drain Specifies the drain node.
 video/vlgetcontrol(3d) -- get or set control VL value
    svr The handle for the video server to use. path Specifies a handle to the path. node Specifies the node on which the control resides (VL_ANY specifies any node) value Specifies a pointer the control's values or return values. type Specifies the control type, as defined in
 video/vlgetcontrolinfo(3d) -- get and free information about VL controls
    svr Specifies the video server handle. path Specifies the path of interest. node Specifies the source or drain of interest. May be VL_ANY if either a source or drain control is acceptable, or if the control is not associated with either a source or drain. type Specifies the control type of interest. info Specifies a pointer to a VLControlInfo structure which was previously allocated by vlGetControlInfo....
 video/vlgetcontrollist(3d) -- get and free the list of valid VL controls for a path
    svr Specifies the server. path Specifies the path. list Specifies a pointer to a VLControlList structure which was previously allocated by vlGetControlList.
 video/vlgetdevice(3d) -- get VL device information
    If vlGetDeviceList is supplied with a pointer to a VLDevList struct, it fills in the struct with a list of available devices. The device information includes the number of devices available, and an array of VLDevice structs, each of which describes a device. The VLDevice struct contains the index of that device, the device name, the number of nodes available and a list of VLNodeInfo structs, describing the available nodes. The device names returned may be mapped to video products as follows: vin...
 video/vlGetFilled(3d) -- get the number of valid entries in a VLBuffer or given path.
    server expects the VL server to use path expects the VLPath for which you want a filled count node expects the VL_MEM VLNode on the path buffer expects the VLBuffer on the VLPath for which you want a filled count
 video/vlGetFrontierMSC(3d) -- get the frontier MSC associated with a particular VL_MEM node
    server expects the VL server to use path expects the VLPath for which you want a frontier MSC memNode expects the VL_MEM VLNode on the VLPath for which you want a frontier MSC
 video/vlgetnextvalid(3d) -- VL buffer management routines
    vlGetActiveRegion returns a pointer to the video frame data. The region is determined by the settings of the VL_OFFSET controls. The default is the region of valid video data. vlGetDMediaInfo returns a pointer to a DMediaInfo struct containing general information. vlGetImageInfo returns a pointer to a DMImageInfo struct containing image specific info. vlGetLatestValid returns the info struct of the most recently received frame. vlGetNextFree returns the info struct of the next free buffer. vlGet...
 video/vlgetnode(3d) -- VL node handling routines
    vlGetNode returns a handle to a VL node with the specified characteristics. The node handle can be used in subsequent calls to vlCreatePath(3dm) or vlSetControl(3dm). Nodes are used to construct paths which tell the system how to interconnect video data streams. The source and drain of a video stream, as well as intermediate filters affecting data flowing between them, are types of nodes. A path may have multiple drain nodes, and in some cases, multiple source nodes. Nodes have various controls ...
 video/vlGetPathDelay(3d) -- get the time delay between two jacks in a VLPath
    server expects the VL server to use path expects the VLPath for which you want a path delay node1 expects the VLNode (usually a VL_VIDEO or VL_SCREEN node) representing the first jack in which you are interested port1 VLPort for that node (VL_ANY for default port) node2 same, for second jack in which you are interested port2 VLPort for that node (VL_ANY for default port)
 video/vlgetstring(3d) -- returns a string describing the current VL connection.
    vlGetString returns a pointer to a static string describing some aspect of the current VL connection. This string must be free'd by the caller. The name parameter must be the following: VL_EXTENSIONS Returns a space-separated list of supported extensions to VL.
 video/vlGetUSTMSCPair(3d) -- get the time at which a field/frame came in or will go out
    server expects the VL server to use path expects the VL path containing the jack in which you are interested jackNode expects the VLNode (usually a VL_VIDEO or VL_SCREEN node) representing the jack in which you are interested. jackPort VLPort for that node (VL_ANY for default port) memNode expects the VL_MEM VLNode representing the buffer for which you want a UST/MSC pair. returnedPair expects a pointer to memory in which to return a UST/MSC pair...
 video/vlGetUSTPerMSC(3d) -- get the time spacing of fields/frames in a path
    server expects the VL server to use path expects the VLPath for which you want ust_per_msc memNode expects the VL_MEM VLNode for which you want ust_per_msc
 video/vlisstreamused(3d) -- determine if VL stream is used
    svr Specifies server. path Specifies path.
 video/vlmatchfloat(3d) -- VL fraction list utility functions
    given Specifies the fraction to be checked. In the case of vlMatchFloat it is a double, and in the others it is a pointer to a fraction. ranges Specifies the fraction range list to be compared against. nranges Specifies the number of fraction ranges in the list. lower Returns the nearest lower or equivalent fraction in the range. Page 1 VLMATCHFLOAT(3dm) VLMATCHFLOAT(3dm) higher Returns the nearest higher or equivalent fraction in the range. index_return Returns the index of lower....
 video/vlnextevent(3d) -- VL event handling routines
    svr Specifies the server. event Pointer to structure to return data in. mask bitmask of events to check for. type type of event.
 video/vlopenvideo(3d) -- open or close a connection to the VL server
    sName Server name to open. Must be NULL string. svr Handle to the server.
 video/vlperror(3d) -- VL error routines
    str String to be prefixed before error message. errnum VL error number.
 video/vlregisterbuffer(3d) -- set up a VL buffer for transfer
    vlRegisterBuffer associates the buffer with the given path and node. This should be done before any transfer is begun on a node that requires a ring buffer. vlDeregisterBuffer removes a registered buffer from the specified node and frees any resources associated with it. A buffer must not be deregistered while a transfer using it is in progress, as this will terminate the transfer and may have undesirable side effects....
 video/vlsavesystemdefaults(3d) -- manage default video settings
    svr Specifies the server handle.
 video/vlselectevents(3d) -- select VL events of interest
    svr Specifies video server. path Specifies path. eventMask Mask of events of interest.
 video/vlserverinfo(3d) -- extract information from an open video server handle
    VLServer An open server handle.
 video/vlsetconnection(3d) -- manage the connectivity of a VL path
    svr Specifies the server handle. path Specifies the path handle. srcnode Specifies the source node. srcport Specified the port on the source node drnnode Specifies the drain node. drnport Specifies the port on the drain node preempt Specifies whether paths may be preempted to establish the connection
 video/vlsetcontroltrigger(3d) -- frame-accurate setting of control VL values
    svr The handle for the video server to use. path Specifies a handle to the path. targetNode Specifies the node on which the control resides (VL_ANY specifies any node) triggerType Specifies the type of trigger used to trigger the control change. triggerData Specifies data specific to the given triggerType used to trigger the control change. refNode Specifies the memory node which provides the source of video fields type Specifies the control type, as defined in value Specifies a po...
 video/vlseterrorhandler(3d) -- set VL non-fatal or fatal error handler
    handler Specifies handler routine.
 video/vlsetuppaths(3d) -- setup VL paths
    svr Specifies the server. paths Specifies paths. count Specifies number of paths. ctrlUsage Specifies usage of controls. streamUsage Specifies usage of streams.
 video/vltransfer(3d) -- begin and end transfer on video path
    svr Specifies the video server. path Specifies the path. count Specifies the number of transfer descriptors in the array passed. If count = 0 then the continuous mode transfer operations are used. Transfers will continue using ring buffers, if necessary, until vlEndTransfer is called. xferDesc If count is non-zero, then xferDesc is an array of transfer descriptors. Each element of the array can specify a discrete, continuous, or automatic transfer. The contents of a descriptor are described belo...
 video/vlxeventrecv(3d) -- VL Event Receive library extension for O2 workstations (now obsolete)
    This API has been supplanted by a cross-platform API for video and DMbuffers. It is supported for backwards compatibility only. Please see vlintro(3dm). The VL Event Receive extension provides a mechanism for video applications to send and receive DMbuffers on the O2 system. These buffers can be used to move images between software subsystems, such as dmIC and OpenGL (see glIntro(3G)), without copying any data. The VL Event Receive extension consists of the following function calls: vlPathGetFD(...
 video/vl_camera(3d) -- unified camera controls via the video library
    vl_camera.h header file provides a machine independent interface to basic video camera controls. These controls can be used via the video library using the vlGetControl and vlSetControl function calls. Cameras currently supported are the IndyCam and DVC1. VL_CAMERA_VENDOR_ID (Vendor ID) This read-only controls returns the vendor ID string for the camera. The "SGI Digital Video Camera" string is prepended to all SGI cameras. VL_CAMERA_VERSION (Camera Version) Returns the Camera Version number. ...
 vme_dma_engine(3x) -- user-level access to VMEbus DMA engine
    These routines form the API for accessing the DMA engine on the VMEbus service provider. These routines are included in a program by compiling with the -ludma option. Currently, the API is supported on Origin and Onyx2 systems. vme_dma_engine_handle_alloc() allocates a handle of the DMA engine by the given pathname. If users specify VME_DMA_ENGINE_DEBUG in the flags field, more integrity checking will be done in the operations on the DMA engine. If the call is successful, the handle of the DMA e...
 vprintf(3s) -- print formatted output of a variable argument list
    vprintf, vfprintf, vsnprintf, and vsprintf are the same as printf, fprintf, snprintf, and sprintf respectively, except that instead of being called with a variable number of arguments, they are called with an argument list, arg, as defined by stdarg(5). The arg parameter must be initialized by the va_start macro (and possibly subsequent va_arg calls). The vprintf, vfprintf, vsnprintf, and vsprintf functions do not invoke the va_end macro....
 wait(3b) -- wait for child processes to stop or terminate
    These two routines are fully described in wait(2). When BSD compatibility mode is enabled (via the definition of _BSD_COMPAT) the only change is in the prototype declaration of these routines in sys/wait.h. Historically, many BSD derived programs pass as the status pointer, a pointer to a union wait, rather than a pointer to int. Since these programs would not properly compile if prototyping was in effect, when BSD compatibility mode is enabled, no prototypes are declared....
 wconv(3s) -- translate characters
    If the argument to towupper represents a lowercase letter of the ASCII or supplementary code sets, the result is the corresponding uppercase letter. If the argument to towlower represents an uppercase letter of the ASCII or supplementary code sets, the result is the corresponding lowercase letter. In the case of all other arguments, the return value is unchanged. The table used for translation is generated by wchrtbl(1M)....
 wcsftime(3c) -- convert date and time to wide character string
    wcsftime places wide-character codes into the array pointed to by wcs as controlled by the string pointed to by format. The format string consists of zero or more directives and ordinary characters. All ordinary characters (including the terminating null character) are copied unchanged into the array. For wcsftime, no more than maxsize characters are placed into the array. This function behaves as if the character string generated by str
 wcstod(3s) -- convert wide-character string to double-precision number
    wcstod returns as a double-precision floating-point number the value represented by the wide-character string pointed to by nptr. This function scans the string up to the first unrecognized character. wcstod recognizes an optional string of ``white-space'' characters [as defined by iswspace in wctype(3S)], then an optional sign, then a string of digits optionally containing a decimal-point character [as specified by ...
 wcstol(3s) -- convert wide character string to long integer, unsigned long integer, long long integer, unsigned long long in
    The wcstol, wcstoul, wcstoll, and wcstoull functions convert the initial portion of the wide character string pointed to by nptr to long int, unsigned long int, long long int, and unsigned long long int representation, respectively. First these functions decom...
 wcstring(3s) -- wchar_t string operations and type transformation
    The arguments s1, s2, and s point to wchar_t strings (that is, arrays of wchar_t characters terminated by a wchar_t null character). The functions wcscat, wscat, wcsncat, wsncat, wcscpy, wscpy, wcsncpy and wsncpy all modify s1. These functions do not check for an overflow condition of the array pointe...
 wctype(3s) -- classify ASCII and supplementary code set characters
    These functions classify character-coded wchar_t values by table lookup. Each is a predicate returning nonzero for true, zero for false. The lookup table is generated by wchrtbl(1M). Each of these functions operates on both ASCII and supplementary code sets unless otherwise indicated. iswalpha(c) c is an English letter. iswupper(c) c is an English uppercase letter. iswlower<...
 Tcl/while(3) -- Execute script repeatedly as long as a condition is met
    The while command evaluates test as an expression (in the same way that expr evaluates its argument). The value of the expression must a proper boolean value; if it is a true value then body is executed by passing it to the Tcl interpreter. Once body has been executed then test is evaluated again, and the process repeats until eventually test evaluates to a false boolean value. Continue commands may be executed inside body to terminate the current iteration of the loop, and break commands may be...
 widec(3s) -- multibyte character I/O routines
    The functions that the multibyte character library provides for wchar_t string operations correspond to those provided by stdio(3S) as shown in the table below: _____________________________________________________________ character-based byte-based character- and function function byte-based _____________________________________________________________ character I/O getwc getc getwchar getchar fgetwc fgetc ungetwc ungetc putwc putc putwchar putchar fputwc fputc ...
 standard/winattach(3) -- obsolete routine
    none
 standard/winclose(3) -- closes the identified graphics window
    gwid expects the identifier for the graphics window that you want closed.
 standard/winconstraints(3) -- binds window constraints to the current window
    none
 standard/windepth(3) -- measures how deep a window is in the window stack
    gwid expects the window identifier for the window you want to test. FUNCTION RETURN VALUE The returned value of this function is a number that you can use to determine that stacking order of windows on the screen.
 standard/window(3) -- defines a perspective projection transformation
    left expects x coordinate of left side of viewing volume. right expects x coordinate of right side of viewing volume. bottom expects y coordinate of bottom of viewing volume. top expects y coordinate of top of viewing volume. -near expects the z coordinate of the near clipping plane. -far expects the z coordinate of the far clipping plane.
 Tk/windowid(3) -- retrieve information from Tk's local data structure
    Tk_Window tkwin (in) Token for window.
 Tk/winfo(3) -- Return window-related information
    The winfo command is used to retrieve information about windows managed by Tk. It can take any of a number of different forms, depending on the option argument. The legal forms are: winfo atom ?-displayof window? name Returns a decimal string giving the integer identifier for the atom whose name is name. If no atom exists with the name name then a new one is created. If the -displayof option is given then the atom is | looked up on the display of window; otherwise it is looked up on | the displa...
 standard/winget(3) -- returns the identifier of the current graphics window
    none FUNCTION RETURN VALUE The returned value for this function is the identifier of the current graphics window.
 standard/winmove(3) -- moves the current graphics window by its lower-left corner
    orgx expects the x coordinate of the location to which you want to move the current graphics window. orgy expects the y coordinate of the location to which you want to move the current graphics window.
 standard/winopen(3) -- creates a graphics window
    name expects the window title that is displayed on the left hand side of the title bar for the window. If you do not want a title, pass a zero-length string. FUNCTION RETURN VALUE The returned value for this function is the graphics server and window identifier for the window just created. Use this value to identify the graphics window to other windowing functions. Only the lower 16 bits are significant, since a graphics window identifier is the value portion of a REDRAW event queue entry. If no...
 standard/winpop(3) -- moves the current graphics window in front of all other windows
    none
 standard/winposition(3) -- changes the size and position of the current graphics window
    x1 expects the x screen coordinate (in pixels) of the first corner of the new location for the current graphics window. The first corner of the new window is the corner diagonally opposite the second corner. x2 expects the x screen coordinate (in pixels) of the second corner of the new location for the current graphics window. y1 expects the y screen coordinate (in pixels) of the first corner of the new location for the current graphics window. y2 expects the y screen coordinate (in pixels) of t...
 standard/winpush(3) -- places the current graphics window behind all other windows
    none
 standard/winset(3) -- sets the current graphics window
    gwid expects a graphics window identifier.
 standard/wintitle(3) -- adds a title bar to the current graphics window
    name expects the title you want displayed in the title bar of the current graphics window.
 Tk/wm(3) -- Communicate with window manager
    The wm command is used to interact with window managers in order to control such things as the title for a window, its geometry, or the increments in terms of which it may be resized. The wm command can take any of a number of different forms, depending on the option argument. All of the forms expect at least one additional argument, window, which must be the path name of a top-level window. The legal forms for the wm command are: wm aspect window ?minNumer minDenom maxNumer maxDenom? If minNume...
 standard/wmpack(3) -- specifies RGBA writemask with a single packed integer
    pack expects a packed integer containing the RGBA (red, green, blue, alpha) values you want to assign as the current write mask. Expressed in hexadecimal, the format of the packed integer is 0xaabbggrr, where: aa is the alpha value, bb is the blue value, gg is the green value, and rr is the red value. RGBA component values range from 0 to 0xFF (255).
 f90/wnl(3) -- Provides user control of NAMELIST output format
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/wnlline(3) -- Allows each NAMELIST variable to begin on a new line
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 f90/wnllong(3) -- Selects NAMELIST output line length
    UNICOS, UNICOS/mk, and IRIX systems
 wordexp(3g) -- perform word expansions
    wordexp performs word expansions and places the list of expanded words into the structure pointed to by pwordexp. The words argument is a pointer to a string containing one or more words to be expanded. The expansions will be the same as would be performed by the shell if words were the part of a command line representing the arguments to a utility. Therefore, words must not contain an unquoted newline or any of the unquoted shell special characters: | & ; < > except in the ...
 standard/writemask(3) -- grants write permission to bitplanes
    wtm expects a mask whose bits control which bitplanes are available for drawing and which are read only. The mask contains one bit per available bitplane. If a bit is set in the writemask, the system writes the current color index into the corresponding bitplane. If a bit is set to zero in the writemask, the corresponding bitplane is read-only.
 standard/writepixels(3) -- paints a row of pixels on the screen
    n expects the number of pixels you want to paint. colors expects an array of color indices. The system reads n elements from this array and writes a pixel of the appropriate color for each.
 standard/writergb(3) -- paints a row of pixels on the screen
    n expects the number of pixels that you want to paint. red expects an array containing red values for the pixels you paint. You need a red value for each pixel you paint. green expects an array containing green values for the pixels you paint. You need a green value for each pixel you paint. blue expects an array containing blue values for the pixels you paint. You need a blue value for each pixel you paint....
 wsregexp(3w) -- Wide character based regular expression compile and match routines
    These functions are general purpose internationalized regular expression matching routines to be used in programs that perform regular expression matching. These functions are defined by the wsregexp.h header file. The function wsrecompile takes as input an internationalized regular expression as defined below (apart from the normal regular expressions as defined by regexp) and produces a compiled expression that ca...
 wstring(3w) -- wchar_t string operations and type transformation
    The arguments s1, s2, and s point to wchar_t strings (that is, arrays of wchar_t characters terminated by a wchar_t null character). wssize returns the number of wchar_t characters in s, not including the terminating wchar_t null character. wstok treats the wchar_t string s1 as a sequence of zero or more text tokens, separated by spans of one or more w
 xdr(3c) -- External Data Representation (XDR) library routines
    rpc(3R), IRIX Network Programming Guide. PPPPaaaaggggeeee 9999
 xdr(3n) -- library routines for external data representation
    xdr_admin(3N), xdr_complex(3N), xdr_create(3N), xdr_simple(3N), rpc(3N) PPPPaaaaggggeeee 1111
 xdr_admin(3n) -- library routines for external data representation
    rpc(3N), xdr_complex(3N), xdr_create(3N), xdr_simple(3N) PPPPaaaaggggeeee 2222
 xdr_complex(3n) -- library routines for external data representation
    rpc(3N), xdr_admin(3N), xdr_create(3N), xdr_simple(3N) PPPPaaaaggggeeee 3333
 xdr_create(3n) -- library routines for external data representation stream creation
    fclose(3S), read(2), rpc(3N), write(2), xdr_admin(3N), xdr_complex(3N), xdr_simple(3N) PPPPaaaaggggeeee 2222
 xdr_simple(3n) -- library routines for external data representation
    
 complib/xerbla(3) -- i an error handler for the LAPACK routines
    XERBLA is an error handler for the LAPACK routines. It is called by an LAPACK routine if an input parameter has an invalid value. A message is printed and execution stops. Installers may consider modifying the STOP statement in order to call system-specific exception-handling facilities.
 standard/xfpt(3) -- multiplies a point by the current matrix in feedback mode
    x expects the x coordinate of a point. y expects the y coordinate of a point. z expects the z coordinate of a point. Used only by the 3-D and 4-D versions of the routines; 0.0 is assumed by the others. w expects the w coordinate of a point Used only by the 4-D version of the routines; 1.0 is assumed by the others.
 libelfutil/xlate_address(3) -- do address translation
    xlate_address does the address translation needed by tools such as dbx(1) and dis(1). If address_in is an address that does not exist in the translation table the identity translation is returned through the pointers and XLATE_TB_STATUS_NO_ERROR is returned by the function. The data structure xlate_block is defined to contain Elf64_Addr xe_new_address; Elf64_Xword x...
 libelfutil/xlate_expand_reg_info(3) -- expand register instructions
    These are useful for programs like elfdump(1) to show the actual contents of the register location expressions. These are otherwise very useful. The functions and the values returned throught the pointers are identical except that xlate_reg_instr2 has an extra field in the definition. The extra field, sr_instr_offset, is the byte offset in the register instruction stream of the first byte of the particular register instruction. Aside from the additional field in the structure the functions are i...
 libelfutil/xlate_finish(3) -- close translation section
    This is used to close a handle on an Elf section containing translation information. consumer_table_ptr must be a valid open handle on an xlate consumer section. This releases all memory allocated by the xlate functions for this xlate_table_con (except as documented in calls that certain things must be free(3)d explicitly by the application)....
 libelfutil/xlate_get_info(3) -- get recorded overall info
    xlate_get_info is used to get basic values from the xlate section. con_table_ptr must be a valid open translate table handle. The other arguments are pointers passed in and the pointers are used to put values from the translation table header into the pointed-to data objects. See for the header field declarations. The memory that is pointed to by the pointer is what is actually changed. Other than con_table_ptr any of the pointers passed in may be the null pointer (0). xlate_get...
 libelfutil/xlate_get_reg_rule(3) -- get register information
    This is used by debuggers to find the pixie(1) shadow registers: registers which in the original non-pixied code were used but the which are now used by pixie. The original registers are now located in memory and the information here lets an app (debugger) find the original register values. The registers referred to here are, at this time, only the integer registers. The cost of calling xlate_get_reg_rule once is approximately the same as of calling xlate_get_all_reg_rules once so it is clearly ...
 libelfutil/xlate_init_fd(3) -- open translation section
    These are used to get (open) a handle on an Elf section containing translation information. The handle allows one to call any of the consumer functions. it is unspecified which xlate_init_fd takes as arguments: fd is an IRIX file-descriptor which must be open(2) for reading on an Elf object file. open_debug_table indicates which translation section to open. If XLATE_OPEN_STD_TABLE (0), then the first section with sh_type SHT_MIPS_XLATE is opened. If XLATE_OPEN_STD_TABLE (1), then the first secti...
 libelfutil/xlate_pro_add_info(3) -- set recorded overall info
    xlate_pro_add_info is used to set values into the xlate data stream. pro_table_ptr must be a valid open producer translate table handle. These values cannot be calculated by the library but must be supplied by the application. If xlate_pro_add_info is not called, 0 will be used as a default value for the corresponding fields of the xlate header in the created byte stream. data_moved Pass in the number of bytes the data section was moved (normally only pixie(1) moves data sections). The value is ...
 libelfutil/xlate_pro_add_range(3) -- add a translation range
    xlate_pro_add_range is used to put the translation ranges into the xlate data stream. pro_table_ptr must be a valid open producer translate table handle. new_address The low address in a range of text instructions in the output (post-transformation) text. new_range The number of bytes in the range. All byte counts must be a multiple of 4. old_address The low address in a range of text instructions in the input (pre-transformation) text. old_range The number of bytes in the range. All byte counts...
 libelfutil/xlate_pro_add_reg_info(3) -- add register change information
    xlate_pro_add_reg_info is used to put register information into the xlate data stream. The register information normally specifies how a debugger or other tool can get to registers which have been copied into shadow register locations so a transforming tool (pixie(1) normally) can use the registers for its own purposes. pro_table_ptr must be a valid open producer translate table handle. op Pass in an frame operation code in the set allowed. An example is DW_CFA_offset_extended. Makes no differen...
 libelfutil/xlate_pro_disk_header(3) -- get translation byte stream block count
    This function gets the total size and the number-of-blocks of either the standard or debug stream of data. Following this one calls xlate_pro_disk_block number-of-blocks times to get pointers the blocks of actual data bytes of the byte stream. The library does not write anything to disk. It is up to the application calling the library to write the information to disk (or to do whatever else is appropriate with the byte stream). xlate_pro_disk_header gets the size of the net translation table dat...
 libelfutil/xlate_pro_disk_next_block(3) -- get translation byte stream pointers
    This function gets pointers to the blocks making up the stream of data. The xlate functions do not write the stream to disk. Typically the transformation-tool will use libelf to write the bytes to disk. xlate_pro_disk_next_block gets the contents and size of the next block thru the pointer arguments. pro_table_ptr must be a valid open producer translate table handle and xlate_pro_disk_header must have been called to create the byte stream and count the number of blocks.. It is essential that if ...
 libelfutil/xlate_pro_finish(3) -- close translation handle
    This is used to close a handle on translation information data. producer_table_ptr must be a valid open xlate producer handle. This releases all memory allocated by xlate routines for this xlate_table_con (except as documented in xlate calls that certain things must be free(3)d explicitly by the application).
 libelfutil/xlate_pro_init(3) -- open translation section creator
    These are used to get (open) a handle which assists in producing a translation table section. The functions available do not themselves write anything to disk. Instead they create a byte stream which the calling application can write to an Elf file as appropriate. The handle allows one to call any of the producer functions. xlate_pro_init takes as arguments: returned_table_pointer is a pointer to a producer table handle. If the call to xlate_pro_init is successful, the handle pointed to is set a...
 Vk/Xpm(3) -- X Pixmap library
    
 ifl/XTIFFClose(3) -- close an extended TIFF file
    The XTIFFClose() function closes a previously opened extended TIFF file. This function should be called instead of TIFFClose() to close a TIFF object opened with XTIFFOpen() or XTIFFFdOpen().
 ifl/XTIFFOpen(3) -- open an extended TIFF file for reading or writing
    The XTIFFOpen() and XTIFFFdOpen() open a given TIFF file. For XTIFFOpen(), the file to open is given by filename. Like XTIFFOpen(), XTIFFdOpen() requires the name of the underlying file in filename, but assumes that the file has already been opened by the caller. The descriptor for this opened file is given by fd. The file can be opened for reading, writing or appending as given by mode values of 'r', 'w' or 'a' respectively. The XTIFFOpen() and XTIFFFdOpen() functions differ from their TI...
 ypclnt(3c) -- NIS client interface
    This package of functions provides an interface to the network information service (NIS) lookup service. The package can be loaded from the library, /usr/lib/libc.so.1. Refer to ypfiles(4) and ypserv(1M) for an overview of the NIS, including the definitions of map and domain , and a description of the various servers, databases, and commands that comprise the NIS. All input parameters names begin with in. Output parameters begin with out. Output parameters of type char ** should be addresses of ...
 yppasswd(3) -- update user password in NIS database
    If oldpass is indeed the old user password, this routine replaces the password entry with newpw. It returns 0 if successful.
 yp_update(3c) -- changes NIS information
    yp_update() is used to make changes to the NIS database. The syntax is the same as that of yp_match() except for the extra parameter ypop which may take on one of four values. If it is YPOP_CHANGE, then the data associated with the key will be changed to the new value. If the key is not found in the database, then yp_update() will return YPERR_KEY. If ypop has the value YPOP_INSERT, then the key-value pair will be inserted into the database. The error YPERR_KEY is returned if the key already exi...
 complib/zbdsqr(3) -- compute the singular value decomposition (SVD) of a real N-by-N (upper or lower) bidiagonal matrix B
    ZBDSQR computes the singular value decomposition (SVD) of a real N-by-N (upper or lower) bidiagonal matrix B: B = Q * S * P' (P' denotes the transpose of P), where S is a diagonal matrix with non-negative diagonal elements (the singular values of B), and Q and P are orthogonal matrices. The routine computes S, and optionally computes U * Q, P' * VT, or Q' * C, for given complex input matrices U, VT, and C. See "Computing Small Singular Values of Bidiagonal Matrices With Guaranteed High Rela...
 standard/zbsize(3) -- specifies the number of bit planes desired to comprise the Z buffer
    planes is the number of bit planes requested to be configured as Z buffer planes. Only positive values are accepted. The default is machine dependent, usually 24 or 32.
 standard/zbuffer(3) -- enable or disable z-buffer operation in the current framebuffer
    bool is either TRUE or FALSE. TRUE enables z-buffer operation. FALSE disables z-buffer operation.
 standard/zclear(3) -- initializes the z-buffer of the current framebuffer
    none
 standard/zdraw(3) -- enables or disables drawing to the z-buffer
    b expects one of two possible values: TRUE enables drawing of colors into the z-buffer. FALSE disables drawing of colors into the z-buffer.
 complib/zdrscl(3) -- multiplie an n-element complex vector x by the real scalar 1/a
    ZDRSCL multiplies an n-element complex vector x by the real scalar 1/a. This is done without overflow or underflow as long as the final result x/a does not overflow or underflow.
 standard/zfunction(3) -- specifies the function used for z-buffer comparison by the current framebuffer
    func expects one of eight possible flags used when comparing z values. The available flags are: ZF_NEVER, the z-buffer function never passes. ZF_LESS, the z-buffer function passes if the incoming pixel z value is less than the z value stored in the z-buffer bitplanes. ZF_EQUAL, the z-buffer function passes if the incoming pixel z value is equal to the z value stored in the z-buffer bitplanes. ZF_LEQUAL, the z-buffer function passes if the incoming pixel z value is less than or equal to the z val...
 complib/zgbbrd(3) -- reduce a complex general m-by-n band matrix A to real upper bidiagonal form B by a unitary transformation
    ZGBBRD reduces a complex general m-by-n band matrix A to real upper bidiagonal form B by a unitary transformation: Q' * A * P = B. The routine computes B, and optionally forms Q or P', or computes Q'*C for a given matrix C.
 complib/zgbcon(3) -- general band matrix A, in either the 1-norm or the infinity-norm,
    ZGBCON estimates the reciprocal of the condition number of a complex general band matrix A, in either the 1-norm or the infinity-norm, using the LU factorization computed by ZGBTRF. An estimate is obtained for norm(inv(A)), and the reciprocal of the condition number is computed as RCOND = 1 / ( norm(A) * norm(inv(A)) ).
 complib/zgbequ(3) -- compute row and column scalings intended to equilibrate an Mby-N band matrix A and reduce its condition number
    ZGBEQU computes row and column scalings intended to equilibrate an M-by-N band matrix A and reduce its condition number. R returns the row scale factors and C the column scale factors, chosen to try to make the largest element in each row and column of the matrix B with elements B(i,j)=R(i)*A(i,j)*C(j) have absolute value 1. R(i) and C(j) are restricted to be between SMLNUM = smallest safe number and BIGNUM = largest safe number. Use of these scaling factors is not guaranteed to reduce the condi...
 complib/zgbrfs(3) -- improve the computed solution to a system of linear equations when the coefficient matrix is banded, and provi
    ZGBRFS improves the computed solution to a system of linear equations when the coefficient matrix is banded, and provides error bounds and backward error estimates for the solution.
 complib/zgbsv(3) -- compute the solution to a complex system of linear equations A * X = B, where A is a band matrix of order N wi
    ZGBSV computes the solution to a complex system of linear equations A * X = B, where A is a band matrix of order N with KL subdiagonals and KU superdiagonals, and X and B are N-by-NRHS matrices. The LU decomposition with partial pivoting and row interchanges is used to factor A as A = L * U, where L is a product of permutation and unit lower triangular matrices with KL subdiagonals, and U is upper triangular with KL+KU superdiagonals. The factored form of A is then used to solve the system of eq...
 complib/zgbsvx(3) -- system of linear equations A * X = B, A**T * X = B, or A**H * X = B,
    ZGBSVX uses the LU factorization to compute the solution to a complex system of linear equations A * X = B, A**T * X = B, or A**H * X = B, where A is a band matrix of order N with KL subdiagonals and KU superdiagonals, and X and B are N-by-NRHS matrices. Error bounds on the solution and a condition estimate are also provided.
 complib/zgbtf2(3) -- compute an LU factorization of a complex m-by-n band matrix A using partial pivoting with row interchanges
    ZGBTF2 computes an LU factorization of a complex m-by-n band matrix A using partial pivoting with row interchanges. This is the unblocked version of the algorithm, calling Level 2 BLAS.
 complib/zgbtrf(3) -- compute an LU factorization of a complex m-by-n band matrix A using partial pivoting with row interchanges
    ZGBTRF computes an LU factorization of a complex m-by-n band matrix A using partial pivoting with row interchanges. This is the blocked version of the algorithm, calling Level 3 BLAS.
 complib/zgbtrs(3) -- solve a system of linear equations A * X = B, A**T * X = B, or A**H * X = B with a general band matrix A using
    ZGBTRS solves a system of linear equations A * X = B, A**T * X = B, or A**H * X = B with a general band matrix A using the LU factorization computed by ZGBTRF.
 complib/zgebak(3) -- form the right or left eigenvectors of a complex general matrix by backward transformation on the computed eig
    ZGEBAK forms the right or left eigenvectors of a complex general matrix by backward transformation on the computed eigenvectors of the balanced matrix output by ZGEBAL.
 complib/zgebal(3) -- balance a general complex matrix A
    ZGEBAL balances a general complex matrix A. This involves, first, permuting A by a similarity transformation to isolate eigenvalues in the first 1 to ILO-1 and last IHI+1 to N elements on the diagonal; and second, applying a diagonal similarity transformation to rows and columns ILO to IHI to make the rows and columns as close in norm as possible. Both steps are optional. Balancing may reduce the 1-norm of the matrix, and improve the accuracy of the computed eigenvalues and/or eigenvectors....
 complib/zgebd2(3) -- reduce a complex general m by n matrix A to upper or lower real bidiagonal form B by a unitary transformation
    ZGEBD2 reduces a complex general m by n matrix A to upper or lower real bidiagonal form B by a unitary transformation: Q' * A * P = B. If m >= n, B is upper bidiagonal; if m < n, B is lower bidiagonal.
 complib/zgebrd(3) -- reduce a general complex M-by-N matrix A to upper or lower bidiagonal form B by a unitary transformation
    ZGEBRD reduces a general complex M-by-N matrix A to upper or lower bidiagonal form B by a unitary transformation: Q**H * A * P = B. If m >= n, B is upper bidiagonal; if m < n, B is lower bidiagonal.
 complib/zgecon(3) -- complex matrix A, in either the 1-norm or the infinity-norm, using the LU factorization computed by ZGETRF
    ZGECON estimates the reciprocal of the condition number of a general complex matrix A, in either the 1-norm or the infinity-norm, using the LU factorization computed by ZGETRF. An estimate is obtained for norm(inv(A)), and the reciprocal of the condition number is computed as RCOND = 1 / ( norm(A) * norm(inv(A)) ).
 complib/zgeequ(3) -- compute row and column scalings intended to equilibrate an Mby-N matrix A and reduce its condition number
    ZGEEQU computes row and column scalings intended to equilibrate an M-by-N matrix A and reduce its condition number. R returns the row scale factors and C the column scale factors, chosen to try to make the largest element in each row and column of the matrix B with elements B(i,j)=R(i)*A(i,j)*C(j) have absolute value 1. R(i) and C(j) are restricted to be between SMLNUM = smallest safe number and BIGNUM = largest safe number. Use of these scaling factors is not guaranteed to reduce the condition ...
 complib/zgees(3) -- compute for an N-by-N complex nonsymmetric matrix A, the eigenvalues, the Schur form T, and, optionally, the m
    ZGEES computes for an N-by-N complex nonsymmetric matrix A, the eigenvalues, the Schur form T, and, optionally, the matrix of Schur vectors Z. This gives the Schur factorization A = Z*T*(Z**H). Optionally, it also orders the eigenvalues on the diagonal of the Schur form so that selected eigenvalues are at the top left. The leading columns of Z then form an orthonormal basis for the invariant subspace corresponding to the selected eigenvalues. A complex matrix is in Schur form if it is upper tria...
 complib/zgeesx(3) -- compute for an N-by-N complex nonsymmetric matrix A, the eigenvalues, the Schur form T, and, optionally, the m
    ZGEESX computes for an N-by-N complex nonsymmetric matrix A, the eigenvalues, the Schur form T, and, optionally, the matrix of Schur vectors Z. This gives the Schur factorization A = Z*T*(Z**H). Optionally, it also orders the eigenvalues on the diagonal of the Schur form so that selected eigenvalues are at the top left; computes a reciprocal condition number for the average of the selected eigenvalues (RCONDE); and computes a reciprocal condition number for the right invariant subspace correspon...
 complib/zgeev(3) -- compute for an N-by-N complex nonsymmetric matrix A, the eigenvalues and, optionally, the left and/or right ei
    ZGEEV computes for an N-by-N complex nonsymmetric matrix A, the eigenvalues and, optionally, the left and/or right eigenvectors. The right eigenvector v(j) of A satisfies A * v(j) = lambda(j) * v(j) where lambda(j) is its eigenvalue. The left eigenvector u(j) of A satisfies u(j)**H * A = lambda(j) * u(j)**H where u(j)**H denotes the conjugate transpose of u(j). The computed eigenvectors are normalized to have Euclidean norm equal to 1 and largest component real....
 complib/zgeevx(3) -- compute for an N-by-N complex nonsymmetric matrix A, the eigenvalues and, optionally, the left and/or right ei
    ZGEEVX computes for an N-by-N complex nonsymmetric matrix A, the eigenvalues and, optionally, the left and/or right eigenvectors. Optionally also, it computes a balancing transformation to improve the conditioning of the eigenvalues and eigenvectors (ILO, IHI, SCALE, and ABNRM), reciprocal condition numbers for the eigenvalues (RCONDE), and reciprocal condition numbers for the right eigenvectors (RCONDV). The right eigenvector v(j) of A satisfies A * v(j) = lambda(j) * v(j) where lambda(j) is it...
 complib/zgegs(3) -- compute for a pair of N-by-N complex nonsymmetric matrices A,
    DGEGS computes for a pair of N-by-N complex nonsymmetric matrices A, B: the generalized eigenvalues (alpha, beta), the complex Schur form (A, B), and optionally left and/or right Schur vectors (VSL and VSR). (If only the generalized eigenvalues are needed, use the driver ZGEGV instead.) A generalized eigenvalue for a pair of matrices (A,B) is, roughly speaking, a scalar w or a ratio alpha/beta = w, such that A - w*B is singular. It is usually represented as the pair (alpha,beta), as there is a r...
 complib/zgegv(3) -- B, the generalized eigenvalues (alpha, beta), and optionally,
    ZGEGV computes for a pair of N-by-N complex nonsymmetric matrices A and B, the generalized eigenvalues (alpha, beta), and optionally, the left and/or right generalized eigenvectors (VL and VR). A generalized eigenvalue for a pair of matrices (A,B) is, roughly speaking, a scalar w or a ratio alpha/beta = w, such that A - w*B is singular. It is usually represented as the pair (alpha,beta), as there is a reasonable interpretation for beta=0, and even for both being zero. A good beginning reference ...
 complib/zgehd2(3) -- reduce a complex general matrix A to upper Hessenberg form H by a unitary similarity transformation
    ZGEHD2 reduces a complex general matrix A to upper Hessenberg form H by a unitary similarity transformation: Q' * A * Q = H .
 complib/zgehrd(3) -- reduce a complex general matrix A to upper Hessenberg form H by a unitary similarity transformation
    ZGEHRD reduces a complex general matrix A to upper Hessenberg form H by a unitary similarity transformation: Q' * A * Q = H .
 complib/zgelq2(3) -- compute an LQ factorization of a complex m by n matrix A
    ZGELQ2 computes an LQ factorization of a complex m by n matrix A: A = L * Q.
 complib/zgelqf(3) -- compute an LQ factorization of a complex M-by-N matrix A
    ZGELQF computes an LQ factorization of a complex M-by-N matrix A: A = L * Q.
 complib/zgels(3) -- involving an M-by-N matrix A, or its conjugate-transpose, using a QR or LQ factorization of A
    ZGELS solves overdetermined or underdetermined complex linear systems involving an M-by-N matrix A, or its conjugate-transpose, using a QR or LQ factorization of A. It is assumed that A has full rank. The following options are provided: 1. If TRANS = 'N' and m >= n: find the least squares solution of an overdetermined system, i.e., solve the least squares problem minimize || B - A*X ||. 2. If TRANS = 'N' and m < n: find the minimum norm solution of an underdetermined system A * X = B. 3. If ...
 complib/zgelss(3) -- compute the minimum norm solution to a complex linear least squares problem
    ZGELSS computes the minimum norm solution to a complex linear least squares problem: Minimize 2-norm(| b - A*x |). using the singular value decomposition (SVD) of A. A is an M-by-N matrix which may be rank-deficient. Several right hand side vectors b and solution vectors x can be handled in a single call; they are stored as the columns of the M-by-NRHS right hand side matrix B and the N-by-NRHS solution matrix X. The effective rank of A is determined by treating as zero those singular values whi...
 complib/zgelsx(3) -- compute the minimum-norm solution to a complex linear least squares problem
    ZGELSX computes the minimum-norm solution to a complex linear least squares problem: minimize || A * X - B || using a complete orthogonal factorization of A. A is an M-by-N matrix which may be rank-deficient. Several right hand side vectors b and solution vectors x can be handled in a single call; they are stored as the columns of the M-by-NRHS right hand side matrix B and the N-by-NRHS solution matrix X. The routine first computes a QR factorization with column pivoting: A * P = Q * [ R11 R12 ]...
 complib/zgeql2(3) -- compute a QL factorization of a complex m by n matrix A
    ZGEQL2 computes a QL factorization of a complex m by n matrix A: A = Q * L.
 complib/zgeqlf(3) -- compute a QL factorization of a complex M-by-N matrix A
    ZGEQLF computes a QL factorization of a complex M-by-N matrix A: A = Q * L.
 complib/zgeqpf(3) -- compute a QR factorization with column pivoting of a complex Mby-N matrix A
    ZGEQPF computes a QR factorization with column pivoting of a complex Mby-N matrix A: A*P = Q*R.
 complib/zgeqr2(3) -- compute a QR factorization of a complex m by n matrix A
    ZGEQR2 computes a QR factorization of a complex m by n matrix A: A = Q * R.
 complib/zgeqrf(3) -- compute a QR factorization of a complex M-by-N matrix A
    ZGEQRF computes a QR factorization of a complex M-by-N matrix A: A = Q * R.
 complib/zgerfs(3) -- improve the computed solution to a system of linear equations and provides error bounds and backward error est
    ZGERFS improves the computed solution to a system of linear equations and provides error bounds and backward error estimates for the solution.
 complib/zgerq2(3) -- compute an RQ factorization of a complex m by n matrix A
    ZGERQ2 computes an RQ factorization of a complex m by n matrix A: A = R * Q.
 complib/zgerqf(3) -- compute an RQ factorization of a complex M-by-N matrix A
    ZGERQF computes an RQ factorization of a complex M-by-N matrix A: A = R * Q.
 complib/zgesv(3) -- X = B,
    ZGESV computes the solution to a complex system of linear equations A * X = B, where A is an N-by-N matrix and X and B are N-by-NRHS matrices. The LU decomposition with partial pivoting and row interchanges is used to factor A as A = P * L * U, where P is a permutation matrix, L is unit lower triangular, and U is upper triangular. The factored form of A is then used to solve the system of equations A * X = B....
 complib/zgesvd(3) -- compute the singular value decomposition (SVD) of a complex Mby-N matrix A, optionally computing the left and/
    ZGESVD computes the singular value decomposition (SVD) of a complex Mby-N matrix A, optionally computing the left and/or right singular vectors. The SVD is written A = U * SIGMA * conjugate-transpose(V) where SIGMA is an M-by-N matrix which is zero except for its min(m,n) diagonal elements, U is an M-by-M unitary matrix, and V is an N-by-N unitary matrix. The diagonal elements of SIGMA are the singular values of A; they are real and non-negative, and are returned in descending order. The first m...
 complib/zgesvx(3) -- system of linear equations A * X = B,
    ZGESVX uses the LU factorization to compute the solution to a complex system of linear equations A * X = B, where A is an N-by-N matrix and X and B are N-by-NRHS matrices. Error bounds on the solution and a condition estimate are also provided.
 complib/zgetf2(3) -- compute an LU factorization of a general m-by-n matrix A using partial pivoting with row interchanges
    ZGETF2 computes an LU factorization of a general m-by-n matrix A using partial pivoting with row interchanges. The factorization has the form A = P * L * U where P is a permutation matrix, L is lower triangular with unit diagonal elements (lower trapezoidal if m > n), and U is upper triangular (upper trapezoidal if m < n). This is the right-looking Level 2 BLAS version of the algorithm.
 complib/zgetrf(3) -- compute an LU factorization of a general M-by-N matrix A using partial pivoting with row interchanges
    ZGETRF computes an LU factorization of a general M-by-N matrix A using partial pivoting with row interchanges. The factorization has the form A = P * L * U where P is a permutation matrix, L is lower triangular with unit diagonal elements (lower trapezoidal if m > n), and U is upper triangular (upper trapezoidal if m < n). This is the right-looking Level 3 BLAS version of the algorithm.
 complib/zgetri(3) -- compute the inverse of a matrix using the LU factorization computed by ZGETRF
    ZGETRI computes the inverse of a matrix using the LU factorization computed by ZGETRF. This method inverts U and then computes inv(A) by solving the system inv(A)*L = inv(U) for inv(A).
 complib/zgetrs(3) -- A**H * X = B with a general N-by-N matrix A using the LU factorization computed by ZGETRF
    ZGETRS solves a system of linear equations A * X = B, A**T * X = B, or A**H * X = B with a general N-by-N matrix A using the LU factorization computed by ZGETRF.
 complib/zggbak(3) -- form the right or left eigenvectors of a complex generalized eigenvalue problem A*x = lambda*B*x, by backward
    ZGGBAK forms the right or left eigenvectors of a complex generalized eigenvalue problem A*x = lambda*B*x, by backward transformation on the computed eigenvectors of the balanced pair of matrices output by ZGGBAL.
 complib/zggbal(3) -- balance a pair of general complex matrices (A,B)
    ZGGBAL balances a pair of general complex matrices (A,B). This involves, first, permuting A and B by similarity transformations to isolate eigenvalues in the first 1 to ILO$-$1 and last IHI+1 to N elements on the diagonal; and second, applying a diagonal similarity transformation to rows and columns ILO to IHI to make the rows and columns as close in norm as possible. Both steps are optional. Balancing may reduce the 1-norm of the matrices, and improve the accuracy of the computed eigenvalues an...
 complib/zggglm(3) -- solve a general Gauss-Markov linear model (GLM) problem
    ZGGGLM solves a general Gauss-Markov linear model (GLM) problem: minimize || y ||_2 subject to d = A*x + B*y x where A is an N-by-M matrix, B is an N-by-P matrix, and d is a given Nvector. It is assumed that M <= N <= M+P, and rank(A) = M and rank( A B ) = N. Under these assumptions, the constrained equation is always consistent, and there is a unique solution x and a minimal 2-norm solution y, which is obtained using a generalized QR factorization of A and B. In particular, if matrix B is squar...
 complib/zgghrd(3) -- reduce a pair of complex matrices (A,B) to generalized upper Hessenberg form using unitary transformations, wh
    ZGGHRD reduces a pair of complex matrices (A,B) to generalized upper Hessenberg form using unitary transformations, where A is a general matrix and B is upper triangular: Q' * A * Z = H and Q' * B * Z = T, where H is upper Hessenberg, T is upper triangular, and Q and Z are unitary, and ' means conjugate transpose. The unitary matrices Q and Z are determined as products of Givens rotations. They may either be formed explicitly, or they may be postmultiplied into input matrices Q1 and Z1, so th...
 complib/zgglse(3) -- solve the linear equality-constrained least squares (LSE) problem
    ZGGLSE solves the linear equality-constrained least squares (LSE) problem: minimize || c - A*x ||_2 subject to B*x = d where A is an M-by-N matrix, B is a P-by-N matrix, c is a given M-vector, and d is a given P-vector. It is assumed that P <= N <= M+P, and rank(B) = P and rank( ( A ) ) = N. ( ( B ) ) These conditions ensure that the LSE problem has a unique solution, which is obtained using a GRQ factorization of the matrices B and A....
 complib/zggqrf(3) -- an N-by-P matrix B
    ZGGQRF computes a generalized QR factorization of an N-by-M matrix A and an N-by-P matrix B: A = Q*R, B = Q*T*Z, where Q is an N-by-N unitary matrix, Z is a P-by-P unitary matrix, and R and T assume one of the forms: if N >= M, R = ( R11 ) M , or if N < M, R = ( R11 R12 ) N, ( 0 ) N-M N M-N M where R11 is upper triangular, and if N <= P, T = ( 0 T12 ) N, or if N > P, T = ( T11 ) N-P, P-N N ( T21 ) P P where T12 or T21 is upper triangular. In particular, if B is square and nonsingular, the GQR fa...
 complib/zggrqf(3) -- a P-by-N matrix B
    ZGGRQF computes a generalized RQ factorization of an M-by-N matrix A and a P-by-N matrix B: A = R*Q, B = Z*T*Q, where Q is an N-by-N unitary matrix, Z is a P-by-P unitary matrix, and R and T assume one of the forms: if M <= N, R = ( 0 R12 ) M, or if M > N, R = ( R11 ) M-N, N-M M ( R21 ) N N where R12 or R21 is upper triangular, and if P >= N, T = ( T11 ) N , or if P < N, T = ( T11 T12 ) P, ( 0 ) P-N P N-P N where T11 is upper triangular. In particular, if B is square and nonsingular, the GRQ fac...
 complib/zggsvd(3) -- an M-by-N complex matrix A and P-by-N complex matrix B
    ZGGSVD computes the generalized singular value decomposition (GSVD) of an M-by-N complex matrix A and P-by-N complex matrix B: U'*A*Q = D1*( 0 R ), V'*B*Q = D2*( 0 R ) where U, V and Q are unitary matrices, and Z' means the conjugate transpose of Z. Let K+L = the effective numerical rank of the matrix (A',B')', then R is a (K+L)-by-(K+L) nonsingular upper triangular matrix, D1 and D2 are M-by-(K+L) and P-by-(K+L) "diagonal" matrices and of the following structures, respectively: If M-K-L...
 complib/zggsvp(3) -- U'*A*Q = K ( 0 A12 A13 ) if M-K-L >= 0
    ZGGSVP computes unitary matrices U, V and Q such that L ( 0 0 A23 ) M-K-L ( 0 0 0 ) N-K-L K L = K ( 0 A12 A13 ) if M-K-L < 0; M-K ( 0 0 A23 ) N-K-L K L V'*B*Q = L ( 0 0 B13 ) P-L ( 0 0 0 ) where the K-by-K matrix A12 and L-by-L matrix B13 are nonsingular upper triangular; A23 is L-by-L upper triangular if M-K-L >= 0, otherwise A23 is (M-K)-by-L upper trapezoidal. K+L = the effective numerical rank of the (M+P)-by-N matrix (A',B')'. Z' denotes the conjugate transpose of Z. This decomposition...
 complib/zgtcon(3) -- estimate the reciprocal of the condition number of a complex tridiagonal matrix A using the LU factorization a
    ZGTCON estimates the reciprocal of the condition number of a complex tridiagonal matrix A using the LU factorization as computed by ZGTTRF. An estimate is obtained for norm(inv(A)), and the reciprocal of the condition number is computed as RCOND = 1 / (ANORM * norm(inv(A))).
 complib/zgtrfs(3) -- improve the computed solution to a system of linear equations when the coefficient matrix is tridiagonal, and
    ZGTRFS improves the computed solution to a system of linear equations when the coefficient matrix is tridiagonal, and provides error bounds and backward error estimates for the solution.
 complib/zgtsv(3) -- solve the equation A*X = B,
    ZGTSV solves the equation where A is an N-by-N tridiagonal matrix, by Gaussian elimination with partial pivoting. Note that the equation A'*X = B may be solved by interchanging the order of the arguments DU and DL.
 complib/zgtsvx(3) -- system of linear equations A * X = B, A**T * X = B, or A**H * X = B,
    ZGTSVX uses the LU factorization to compute the solution to a complex system of linear equations A * X = B, A**T * X = B, or A**H * X = B, where A is a tridiagonal matrix of order N and X and B are N-by-NRHS matrices. Error bounds on the solution and a condition estimate are also provided.
 complib/zgttrf(3) -- compute an LU factorization of a complex tridiagonal matrix A using elimination with partial pivoting and row
    ZGTTRF computes an LU factorization of a complex tridiagonal matrix A using elimination with partial pivoting and row interchanges. The factorization has the form A = L * U where L is a product of permutation and unit lower bidiagonal matrices and U is upper triangular with nonzeros in only the main diagonal and first two superdiagonals.
 complib/zgttrs(3) -- or A**H * X = B,
    ZGTTRS solves one of the systems of equations A * X = B, A**T * X = B, or A**H * X = B, with a tridiagonal matrix A using the LU factorization computed by ZGTTRF.
 complib/zhbev(3) -- compute all the eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a complex Hermitian band matrix A
    ZHBEV computes all the eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a complex Hermitian band matrix A.
 complib/zhbevd(3) -- compute all the eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a complex Hermitian band matrix A
    ZHBEVD computes all the eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a complex Hermitian band matrix A. If eigenvectors are desired, it uses a divide and conquer algorithm. The divide and conquer algorithm makes very mild assumptions about floating point arithmetic. It will work on machines with a guard digit in add/subtract, or on those binary machines without guard digits which subtract like the Cray X-MP, Cray Y-MP, Cray C-90, or Cray-2. It could conceivably fail on hexadecimal or decimal mac...
 complib/zhbevx(3) -- compute selected eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a complex Hermitian band matrix A
    ZHBEVX computes selected eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a complex Hermitian band matrix A. Eigenvalues and eigenvectors can be selected by specifying either a range of values or a range of indices for the desired eigenvalues.
 complib/zhbgst(3) -- eigenproblem A*x = lambda*B*x to standard form C*y = lambda*y,
    ZHBGST reduces a complex Hermitian-definite banded generalized eigenproblem A*x = lambda*B*x to standard form C*y = lambda*y, such that C has the same bandwidth as A. B must have been previously factorized as S**H*S by ZPBSTF, using a split Cholesky factorization. A is overwritten by C = X**H*A*X, where X = S**(-1)*Q and Q is a unitary matrix chosen to preserve the bandwidth of A.
 complib/zhbgv(3) -- a complex generalized Hermitian-definite banded eigenproblem, of the form A*x=(lambda)*B*x
    ZHBGV computes all the eigenvalues, and optionally, the eigenvectors of a complex generalized Hermitian-definite banded eigenproblem, of the form A*x=(lambda)*B*x. Here A and B are assumed to be Hermitian and banded, and B is also positive definite.
 complib/zhbtrd(3) -- reduce a complex Hermitian band matrix A to real symmetric tridiagonal form T by a unitary similarity transfor
    ZHBTRD reduces a complex Hermitian band matrix A to real symmetric tridiagonal form T by a unitary similarity transformation: Q**H * A * Q = T.
 complib/zhecon(3) -- estimate the reciprocal of the condition number of a complex Hermitian matrix A using the factorization A = U*
    ZHECON estimates the reciprocal of the condition number of a complex Hermitian matrix A using the factorization A = U*D*U**H or A = L*D*L**H computed by ZHETRF. An estimate is obtained for norm(inv(A)), and the reciprocal of the condition number is computed as RCOND = 1 / (ANORM * norm(inv(A))).
 complib/zheev(3) -- compute all eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a complex Hermitian matrix A
    ZHEEV computes all eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a complex Hermitian matrix A.
 complib/zheevd(3) -- compute all eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a complex Hermitian matrix A
    ZHEEVD computes all eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a complex Hermitian matrix A. If eigenvectors are desired, it uses a divide and conquer algorithm. The divide and conquer algorithm makes very mild assumptions about floating point arithmetic. It will work on machines with a guard digit in add/subtract, or on those binary machines without guard digits which subtract like the Cray X-MP, Cray Y-MP, Cray C-90, or Cray-2. It could conceivably fail on hexadecimal or decimal machines wit...
 complib/zheevx(3) -- compute selected eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a complex Hermitian matrix A
    ZHEEVX computes selected eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a complex Hermitian matrix A. Eigenvalues and eigenvectors can be selected by specifying either a range of values or a range of indices for the desired eigenvalues.
 complib/zhegs2(3) -- reduce a complex Hermitian-definite generalized eigenproblem to standard form
    ZHEGS2 reduces a complex Hermitian-definite generalized eigenproblem to standard form. If ITYPE = 1, the problem is A*x = lambda*B*x, and A is overwritten by inv(U')*A*inv(U) or inv(L)*A*inv(L') If ITYPE = 2 or 3, the problem is A*B*x = lambda*x or B*A*x = lambda*x, and A is overwritten by U*A*U` or L'*A*L. B must have been previously factorized as U'*U or L*L' by ZPOTRF.
 complib/zhegst(3) -- reduce a complex Hermitian-definite generalized eigenproblem to standard form
    ZHEGST reduces a complex Hermitian-definite generalized eigenproblem to standard form. If ITYPE = 1, the problem is A*x = lambda*B*x, and A is overwritten by inv(U**H)*A*inv(U) or inv(L)*A*inv(L**H) If ITYPE = 2 or 3, the problem is A*B*x = lambda*x or B*A*x = lambda*x, and A is overwritten by U*A*U**H or L**H*A*L. B must have been previously factorized as U**H*U or L*L**H by ZPOTRF.
 complib/zhegv(3) -- a complex generalized Hermitian-definite eigenproblem, of the form A*x=(lambda)*B*x, A*Bx=(lambda)*x, or B*A*x
    ZHEGV computes all the eigenvalues, and optionally, the eigenvectors of a complex generalized Hermitian-definite eigenproblem, of the form A*x=(lambda)*B*x, A*Bx=(lambda)*x, or B*A*x=(lambda)*x. Here A and B are assumed to be Hermitian and B is also positive definite.
 complib/zherfs(3) -- improve the computed solution to a system of linear equations when the coefficient matrix is Hermitian indefin
    ZHERFS improves the computed solution to a system of linear equations when the coefficient matrix is Hermitian indefinite, and provides error bounds and backward error estimates for the solution.
 complib/zhesv(3) -- X = B,
    ZHESV computes the solution to a complex system of linear equations A * X = B, where A is an N-by-N Hermitian matrix and X and B are Nby-NRHS matrices. The diagonal pivoting method is used to factor A as A = U * D * U**H, if UPLO = 'U', or A = L * D * L**H, if UPLO = 'L', where U (or L) is a product of permutation and unit upper (lower) triangular matrices, and D is Hermitian and block diagonal with 1-by-1 and 2-by-2 diagonal blocks. The factored form of A is then used to solve the system of...
 complib/zhesvx(3) -- to a complex system of linear equations A * X = B,
    ZHESVX uses the diagonal pivoting factorization to compute the solution to a complex system of linear equations A * X = B, where A is an N-by-N Hermitian matrix and X and B are N-by-NRHS matrices. Error bounds on the solution and a condition estimate are also provided.
 complib/zhetd2(3) -- reduce a complex Hermitian matrix A to real symmetric tridiagonal form T by a unitary similarity transformatio
    ZHETD2 reduces a complex Hermitian matrix A to real symmetric tridiagonal form T by a unitary similarity transformation: Q' * A * Q = T.
 complib/zhetf2(3) -- the Bunch-Kaufman diagonal pivoting method
    ZHETF2 computes the factorization of a complex Hermitian matrix A using the Bunch-Kaufman diagonal pivoting method: A = U*D*U' or A = L*D*L' where U (or L) is a product of permutation and unit upper (lower) triangular matrices, U' is the conjugate transpose of U, and D is Hermitian and block diagonal with 1-by-1 and 2-by-2 diagonal blocks. This is the unblocked version of the algorithm, calling Level 2 BLAS....
 complib/zhetrd(3) -- reduce a complex Hermitian matrix A to real symmetric tridiagonal form T by a unitary similarity transformatio
    ZHETRD reduces a complex Hermitian matrix A to real symmetric tridiagonal form T by a unitary similarity transformation: Q**H * A * Q = T.
 complib/zhetrf(3) -- the Bunch-Kaufman diagonal pivoting method
    ZHETRF computes the factorization of a complex Hermitian matrix A using the Bunch-Kaufman diagonal pivoting method. The form of the factorization is A = U*D*U**H or A = L*D*L**H where U (or L) is a product of permutation and unit upper (lower) triangular matrices, and D is Hermitian and block diagonal with 1-by-1 and 2-by-2 diagonal blocks. This is the blocked version of the algorithm, calling Level 3 BLAS....
 complib/zhetri(3) -- compute the inverse of a complex Hermitian indefinite matrix A using the factorization A = U*D*U**H or A = L*D
    ZHETRI computes the inverse of a complex Hermitian indefinite matrix A using the factorization A = U*D*U**H or A = L*D*L**H computed by ZHETRF.
 complib/zhetrs(3) -- solve a system of linear equations A*X = B with a complex Hermitian matrix A using the factorization A = U*D*U
    ZHETRS solves a system of linear equations A*X = B with a complex Hermitian matrix A using the factorization A = U*D*U**H or A = L*D*L**H computed by ZHETRF.
 complib/zhgeqz(3) -- w(i) B ) = 0 If JOB='S', then the pair (A,B) is simultaneously reduced to Schur form (i.e., A and B are both u
    ZHGEQZ implements a single-shift version of the QZ method for finding the generalized eigenvalues w(i)=ALPHA(i)/BETA(i) of the equation A are then ALPHA(1),...,ALPHA(N), and of B are BETA(1),...,BETA(N). If JOB='S' and COMPQ and COMPZ are 'V' or 'I', then the unitary transformations used to reduce (A,B) are accumulated into the arrays Q and Z s.t.: Q(in) A(in) Z(in)* = Q(out) A(out) Z(out)* Q(in) B(in) Z(in)* = Q(out) B(out) Z(out)* Ref: C.B. Moler & G.W. Stewart, "An Algorithm for Genera...
 complib/zhpcon(3) -- estimate the reciprocal of the condition number of a complex Hermitian packed matrix A using the factorization
    ZHPCON estimates the reciprocal of the condition number of a complex Hermitian packed matrix A using the factorization A = U*D*U**H or A = L*D*L**H computed by ZHPTRF. An estimate is obtained for norm(inv(A)), and the reciprocal of the condition number is computed as RCOND = 1 / (ANORM * norm(inv(A))).
 complib/zhpev(3) -- compute all the eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a complex Hermitian matrix in packed storage
    ZHPEV computes all the eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a complex Hermitian matrix in packed storage.
 complib/zhpevd(3) -- compute all the eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a complex Hermitian matrix A in packed storage
    ZHPEVD computes all the eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a complex Hermitian matrix A in packed storage. If eigenvectors are desired, it uses a divide and conquer algorithm. The divide and conquer algorithm makes very mild assumptions about floating point arithmetic. It will work on machines with a guard digit in add/subtract, or on those binary machines without guard digits which subtract like the Cray X-MP, Cray Y-MP, Cray C-90, or Cray-2. It could conceivably fail on hexadecimal o...
 complib/zhpevx(3) -- compute selected eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a complex Hermitian matrix A in packed storage
    ZHPEVX computes selected eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a complex Hermitian matrix A in packed storage. Eigenvalues/vectors can be selected by specifying either a range of values or a range of indices for the desired eigenvalues.
 complib/zhpgst(3) -- reduce a complex Hermitian-definite generalized eigenproblem to standard form, using packed storage
    ZHPGST reduces a complex Hermitian-definite generalized eigenproblem to standard form, using packed storage. If ITYPE = 1, the problem is A*x = lambda*B*x, and A is overwritten by inv(U**H)*A*inv(U) or inv(L)*A*inv(L**H) If ITYPE = 2 or 3, the problem is A*B*x = lambda*x or B*A*x = lambda*x, and A is overwritten by U*A*U**H or L**H*A*L. B must have been previously factorized as U**H*U or L*L**H by ZPPTRF....
 complib/zhpgv(3) -- a complex generalized Hermitian-definite eigenproblem, of the form A*x=(lambda)*B*x, A*Bx=(lambda)*x, or B*A*x
    ZHPGV computes all the eigenvalues and, optionally, the eigenvectors of a complex generalized Hermitian-definite eigenproblem, of the form A*x=(lambda)*B*x, A*Bx=(lambda)*x, or B*A*x=(lambda)*x. Here A and B are assumed to be Hermitian, stored in packed format, and B is also positive definite.
 complib/zhprfs(3) -- improve the computed solution to a system of linear equations when the coefficient matrix is Hermitian indefin
    ZHPRFS improves the computed solution to a system of linear equations when the coefficient matrix is Hermitian indefinite and packed, and provides error bounds and backward error estimates for the solution.
 complib/zhpsv(3) -- X = B,
    ZHPSV computes the solution to a complex system of linear equations A * X = B, where A is an N-by-N Hermitian matrix stored in packed format and X and B are N-by-NRHS matrices. The diagonal pivoting method is used to factor A as A = U * D * U**H, if UPLO = 'U', or A = L * D * L**H, if UPLO = 'L', where U (or L) is a product of permutation and unit upper (lower) triangular matrices, D is Hermitian and block diagonal with 1-by-1 and 2-by-2 diagonal blocks. The factored form of A is then used t...
 complib/zhpsvx(3) -- and X and B are N-by-NRHS matrices
    ZHPSVX uses the diagonal pivoting factorization A = U*D*U**H or A = L*D*L**H to compute the solution to a complex system of linear equations A * X = B, where A is an N-by-N Hermitian matrix stored in packed format and X and B are N-by-NRHS matrices. Error bounds on the solution and a condition estimate are also provided.
 complib/zhptrd(3) -- reduce a complex Hermitian matrix A stored in packed form to real symmetric tridiagonal form T by a unitary si
    ZHPTRD reduces a complex Hermitian matrix A stored in packed form to real symmetric tridiagonal form T by a unitary similarity transformation: Q**H * A * Q = T.
 complib/zhptrf(3) -- using the Bunch-Kaufman diagonal pivoting method
    ZHPTRF computes the factorization of a complex Hermitian packed matrix A using the Bunch-Kaufman diagonal pivoting method: A = U*D*U**H or A = L*D*L**H where U (or L) is a product of permutation and unit upper (lower) triangular matrices, and D is Hermitian and block diagonal with 1-by-1 and 2-by-2 diagonal blocks.
 complib/zhptri(3) -- compute the inverse of a complex Hermitian indefinite matrix A in packed storage using the factorization A = U
    ZHPTRI computes the inverse of a complex Hermitian indefinite matrix A in packed storage using the factorization A = U*D*U**H or A = L*D*L**H computed by ZHPTRF.
 complib/zhptrs(3) -- solve a system of linear equations A*X = B with a complex Hermitian matrix A stored in packed format using the
    ZHPTRS solves a system of linear equations A*X = B with a complex Hermitian matrix A stored in packed format using the factorization A = U*D*U**H or A = L*D*L**H computed by ZHPTRF.
 complib/zhsein(3) -- use inverse iteration to find specified right and/or left eigenvectors of a complex upper Hessenberg matrix H
    ZHSEIN uses inverse iteration to find specified right and/or left eigenvectors of a complex upper Hessenberg matrix H. The right eigenvector x and the left eigenvector y of the matrix H corresponding to an eigenvalue w are defined by: H * x = w * x, y**h * H = w * y**h where y**h denotes the conjugate transpose of the vector y.
 complib/zhseqr(3) -- compute the eigenvalues of a complex upper Hessenberg matrix H, and, optionally, the matrices T and Z from the
    ZHSEQR computes the eigenvalues of a complex upper Hessenberg matrix H, and, optionally, the matrices T and Z from the Schur decomposition H = Z T Z**H, where T is an upper triangular matrix (the Schur form), and Z is the unitary matrix of Schur vectors. Optionally Z may be postmultiplied into an input unitary matrix Q, so that this routine can give the Schur factorization of a matrix A which has been reduced to the Hessenberg form H by the unitary matrix Q: A = Q*H*Q**H = (QZ)*T*(QZ)**H....
 complib/zlabrd(3) -- reduce the first NB rows and columns of a complex general m by n matrix A to upper or lower real bidiagonal fo
    ZLABRD reduces the first NB rows and columns of a complex general m by n matrix A to upper or lower real bidiagonal form by a unitary transformation Q' * A * P, and returns the matrices X and Y which are needed to apply the transformation to the unreduced part of A. If m >= n, A is reduced to upper bidiagonal form; if m < n, to lower bidiagonal form. This is an auxiliary routine called by ZGEBRD
 complib/zlacgv(3) -- conjugate a complex vector of length N
    ZLACGV conjugates a complex vector of length N.
 complib/zlacon(3) -- estimate the 1-norm of a square, complex matrix A
    ZLACON estimates the 1-norm of a square, complex matrix A. Reverse communication is used for evaluating matrix-vector products.
 complib/zlacpy(3) -- copie all or part of a two-dimensional matrix A to another matrix B
    ZLACPY copies all or part of a two-dimensional matrix A to another matrix B.
 complib/zlacrm(3) -- perform a very simple matrix-matrix multiplication
    ZLACRM performs a very simple matrix-matrix multiplication: C := A * B, where A is M by N and complex; B is N by N and real; C is M by N and complex.
 complib/zlacrt(3) -- applie a plane rotation, where the cos and sin (C and S) are complex and the vectors CX and CY are complex
    ZLACRT applies a plane rotation, where the cos and sin (C and S) are complex and the vectors CX and CY are complex.
 complib/zladiv(3) -- := X / Y, where X and Y are complex
    ZLADIV := X / Y, where X and Y are complex. The computation of X / Y will not overflow on an intermediary step unless the results overflows.
 complib/zlaed0(3) -- the divide and conquer method, ZLAED0 computes all eigenvalues of a symmetric tridiagonal matrix which is one
    Using the divide and conquer method, ZLAED0 computes all eigenvalues of a symmetric tridiagonal matrix which is one diagonal block of those from reducing a dense or band Hermitian matrix and corresponding eigenvectors of the dense or band matrix.
 complib/zlaed7(3) -- modification by a rank-one symmetric matrix
    ZLAED7 computes the updated eigensystem of a diagonal matrix after modification by a rank-one symmetric matrix. This routine is used only for the eigenproblem which requires all eigenvalues and optionally eigenvectors of a dense or banded Hermitian matrix that has been reduced to tridiagonal form. T = Q(in) ( D(in) + RHO * Z*Z' ) Q'(in) = Q(out) * D(out) * Q'(out) where Z = Q'u, u is a vector of length N with ones in the CUTPNT and CUTPNT + 1 th elements and zeros elsewhere. The eigenvectors...
 complib/zlaed8(3) -- merge the two sets of eigenvalues together into a single sorted set
    ZLAED8 merges the two sets of eigenvalues together into a single sorted set. Then it tries to deflate the size of the problem. There are two ways in which deflation can occur: when two or more eigenvalues are close together or if there is a tiny element in the Z vector. For each such occurrence the order of the related secular equation problem is reduced by one.
 complib/zlaein(3) -- use inverse iteration to find a right or left eigenvector corresponding to the eigenvalue W of a complex upper
    ZLAEIN uses inverse iteration to find a right or left eigenvector corresponding to the eigenvalue W of a complex upper Hessenberg matrix H.
 complib/zlaesy(3) -- compute the eigendecomposition of a 2-by-2 symmetric matrix ( ( A, B );( B, C ) ) provided the norm of the mat
    ZLAESY computes the eigendecomposition of a 2-by-2 symmetric matrix ( ( A, B );( B, C ) ) provided the norm of the matrix of eigenvectors is larger than some threshold value. RT1 is the eigenvalue of larger absolute value, and RT2 of smaller absolute value. If the eigenvectors are computed, then on return ( CS1, SN1 ) is the unit eigenvector for RT1, hence [ CS1 SN1 ] . [ A B ] . [ CS1 -SN1 ] = [ RT1 0 ] [ -SN1 CS1 ] [ B C ] [ SN1 CS1 ] [ 0 RT2 ]...
 complib/zlaev2(3) -- compute the eigendecomposition of a 2-by-2 Hermitian matrix [ A B ] [ CONJG(B) C ]
    ZLAEV2 computes the eigendecomposition of a 2-by-2 Hermitian matrix [ A B ] [ CONJG(B) C ]. On return, RT1 is the eigenvalue of larger absolute value, RT2 is the eigenvalue of smaller absolute value, and (CS1,SN1) is the unit right eigenvector for RT1, giving the decomposition [ CS1 CONJG(SN1) ] [ A B ] [ CS1 -CONJG(SN1) ] = [ RT1 0 ] [- SN1 CS1 ] [ CONJG(B) C ] [ SN1 CS1 ] [ 0 RT2 ].
 complib/zlags2(3) -- compute 2-by-2 unitary matrices U, V and Q, such that if ( UPPER ) then U'*A*Q = U'*( A1 A2 )*Q = ( x 0 ) ( 0
    ZLAGS2 computes 2-by-2 unitary matrices U, V and Q, such that if ( UPPER ) then ( -CONJG(SNU) CSU ) ( -CONJG(SNV) CSV ) Q = ( CSQ SNQ ) ( -CONJG(SNQ) CSQ ) Z' denotes the conjugate transpose of Z. The rows of the transformed A and B are parallel. Moreover, if the input 2-by-2 matrix A is not zero, then the transformed (1,1) entry of A is not zero. If the input matrices A and B are both not zero, then the transformed (2,2) element of B is not zero, except when the first rows of input A and B are...
 complib/zlagtm(3) -- perform a matrix-vector product of the form B := alpha * A * X + beta * B where A is a tridiagonal matrix of o
    ZLAGTM performs a matrix-vector product of the form
 complib/zlahef(3) -- using the Bunch-Kaufman diagonal pivoting method
    ZLAHEF computes a partial factorization of a complex Hermitian matrix A using the Bunch-Kaufman diagonal pivoting method. The partial factorization has the form: A = ( I U12 ) ( A11 0 ) ( I 0 ) if UPLO = 'U', or: ( 0 U22 ) ( 0 D ) ( U12' U22' ) A = ( L11 0 ) ( D 0 ) ( L11' L21' ) if UPLO = 'L' ( L21 I ) ( 0 A22 ) ( 0 I ) where the order of D is at most NB. The actual order is returned in the argument KB, and is either NB or NB-1, or N if N <= NB. Note that U' denotes the conjugate trans...
 complib/zlahqr(3) -- i an auxiliary routine called by ZHSEQR to update the eigenvalues and Schur decomposition already computed by
    ZLAHQR is an auxiliary routine called by ZHSEQR to update the eigenvalues and Schur decomposition already computed by ZHSEQR, by dealing with the Hessenberg submatrix in rows and columns ILO to IHI.
 complib/zlahrd(3) -- matrix A so that elements below the k-th subdiagonal are zero
    ZLAHRD reduces the first NB columns of a complex general n-by-(n-k+1) matrix A so that elements below the k-th subdiagonal are zero. The reduction is performed by a unitary similarity transformation Q' * A * Q. The routine returns the matrices V and T which determine Q as a block reflector I - V*T*V', and also the matrix Y = A * V * T. This is an auxiliary routine called by ZGEHRD.
 complib/zlaic1(3) -- applie one step of incremental condition estimation in its simplest version
    ZLAIC1 applies one step of incremental condition estimation in its simplest version: Let x, twonorm(x) = 1, be an approximate singular vector of an j-by-j lower triangular matrix L, such that twonorm(L*x) = sest Then ZLAIC1 computes sestpr, s, c such that the vector [ s*x ] xhat = [ c ] is an approximate singular vector of [ L 0 ] Lhat = [ w' gamma ] in the sense that twonorm(Lhat*xhat) = sestpr. Depending on JOB, an estimate for the largest or smallest singular value is computed. Note that [s ...
 complib/zlangb(3) -- return the value of the one norm, or the Frobenius norm, or the infinity norm, or the element of largest absol
    ZLANGB returns the value of the one norm, or the Frobenius norm, or the infinity norm, or the element of largest absolute value of an n by n band matrix A, with kl sub-diagonals and ku super-diagonals.
 complib/zlange(3) -- return the value of the one norm, or the Frobenius norm, or the infinity norm, or the element of largest absol
    ZLANGE returns the value of the one norm, or the Frobenius norm, or the infinity norm, or the element of largest absolute value of a complex matrix A.
 complib/zlangt(3) -- return the value of the one norm, or the Frobenius norm, or the infinity norm, or the element of largest absol
    ZLANGT returns the value of the one norm, or the Frobenius norm, or the infinity norm, or the element of largest absolute value of a complex tridiagonal matrix A.
 complib/zlanhb(3) -- return the value of the one norm, or the Frobenius norm, or the infinity norm, or the element of largest absol
    ZLANHB returns the value of the one norm, or the Frobenius norm, or the infinity norm, or the element of largest absolute value of an n by n hermitian band matrix A, with k super-diagonals.
 complib/zlanhe(3) -- return the value of the one norm, or the Frobenius norm, or the infinity norm, or the element of largest absol
    ZLANHE returns the value of the one norm, or the Frobenius norm, or the infinity norm, or the element of largest absolute value of a complex hermitian matrix A.
 complib/zlanhp(3) -- return the value of the one norm, or the Frobenius norm, or the infinity norm, or the element of largest absol
    ZLANHP returns the value of the one norm, or the Frobenius norm, or the infinity norm, or the element of largest absolute value of a complex hermitian matrix A, supplied in packed form.
 complib/zlanhs(3) -- return the value of the one norm, or the Frobenius norm, or the infinity norm, or the element of largest absol
    ZLANHS returns the value of the one norm, or the Frobenius norm, or the infinity norm, or the element of largest absolute value of a Hessenberg matrix A.
 complib/zlanht(3) -- return the value of the one norm, or the Frobenius norm, or the infinity norm, or the element of largest absol
    ZLANHT returns the value of the one norm, or the Frobenius norm, or the infinity norm, or the element of largest absolute value of a complex Hermitian tridiagonal matrix A.
 complib/zlansb(3) -- return the value of the one norm, or the Frobenius norm, or the infinity norm, or the element of largest absol
    ZLANSB returns the value of the one norm, or the Frobenius norm, or the infinity norm, or the element of largest absolute value of an n by n symmetric band matrix A, with k super-diagonals.
 complib/zlansp(3) -- return the value of the one norm, or the Frobenius norm, or the infinity norm, or the element of largest absol
    ZLANSP returns the value of the one norm, or the Frobenius norm, or the infinity norm, or the element of largest absolute value of a complex symmetric matrix A, supplied in packed form.
 complib/zlansy(3) -- return the value of the one norm, or the Frobenius norm, or the infinity norm, or the element of largest absol
    ZLANSY returns the value of the one norm, or the Frobenius norm, or the infinity norm, or the element of largest absolute value of a complex symmetric matrix A.
 complib/zlantb(3) -- return the value of the one norm, or the Frobenius norm, or the infinity norm, or the element of largest absol
    ZLANTB returns the value of the one norm, or the Frobenius norm, or the infinity norm, or the element of largest absolute value of an n by n triangular band matrix A, with ( k + 1 ) diagonals.
 complib/zlantp(3) -- return the value of the one norm, or the Frobenius norm, or the infinity norm, or the element of largest absol
    ZLANTP returns the value of the one norm, or the Frobenius norm, or the infinity norm, or the element of largest absolute value of a triangular matrix A, supplied in packed form.
 complib/zlantr(3) -- return the value of the one norm, or the Frobenius norm, or the infinity norm, or the element of largest absol
    ZLANTR returns the value of the one norm, or the Frobenius norm, or the infinity norm, or the element of largest absolute value of a trapezoidal or triangular matrix A.
 complib/zlapll(3) -- two column vectors X and Y, let A = ( X Y )
    Given two column vectors X and Y, let The subroutine first computes the QR factorization of A = Q*R, and then computes the SVD of the 2-by-2 upper triangular matrix R. The smaller singular value of R is returned in SSMIN, which is used as the measurement of the linear dependency of the vectors X and Y.
 complib/zlapmt(3) -- rearrange the columns of the M by N matrix X as specified by the permutation K(1),K(2),...,K(N) of the integer
    ZLAPMT rearranges the columns of the M by N matrix X as specified by the permutation K(1),K(2),...,K(N) of the integers 1,...,N. If FORWRD = .TRUE., forward permutation: X(*,K(J)) is moved X(*,J) for J = 1,2,...,N. If FORWRD = .FALSE., backward permutation: X(*,J) is moved to X(*,K(J)) for J = 1,2,...,N.
 complib/zlaqgb(3) -- equilibrate a general M by N band matrix A with KL subdiagonals and KU superdiagonals using the row and scalin
    ZLAQGB equilibrates a general M by N band matrix A with KL subdiagonals and KU superdiagonals using the row and scaling factors in the vectors R and C.
 complib/zlaqge(3) -- equilibrate a general M by N matrix A using the row and scaling factors in the vectors R and C
    ZLAQGE equilibrates a general M by N matrix A using the row and scaling factors in the vectors R and C.
 complib/zlaqhb(3) -- equilibrate a symmetric band matrix A using the scaling factors in the vector S
    ZLAQHB equilibrates a symmetric band matrix A using the scaling factors in the vector S.
 complib/zlaqhe(3) -- equilibrate a Hermitian matrix A using the scaling factors in the vector S
    ZLAQHE equilibrates a Hermitian matrix A using the scaling factors in the vector S.
 complib/zlaqhp(3) -- equilibrate a Hermitian matrix A using the scaling factors in the vector S
    ZLAQHP equilibrates a Hermitian matrix A using the scaling factors in the vector S.
 complib/zlaqsb(3) -- equilibrate a symmetric band matrix A using the scaling factors in the vector S
    ZLAQSB equilibrates a symmetric band matrix A using the scaling factors in the vector S.
 complib/zlaqsp(3) -- equilibrate a symmetric matrix A using the scaling factors in the vector S
    ZLAQSP equilibrates a symmetric matrix A using the scaling factors in the vector S.
 complib/zlaqsy(3) -- equilibrate a symmetric matrix A using the scaling factors in the vector S
    ZLAQSY equilibrates a symmetric matrix A using the scaling factors in the vector S.
 complib/zlar2v(3) -- from both sides to a sequence of 2-by-2 complex Hermitian matrices,
    ZLAR2V applies a vector of complex plane rotations with real cosines from both sides to a sequence of 2-by-2 complex Hermitian matrices, defined by the elements of the vectors x, y and z. For i = 1,2,...,n ( x(i) z(i) ) := ( conjg(z(i)) y(i) ) ( c(i) conjg(s(i)) ) ( x(i) z(i) ) ( c(i) -conjg(s(i)) ) ( -s(i) c(i) ) ( conjg(z(i)) y(i) ) ( s(i) c(i) )
 complib/zlarf(3) -- applie a complex elementary reflector H to a complex M-by-N matrix C, from either the left or the right
    ZLARF applies a complex elementary reflector H to a complex M-by-N matrix C, from either the left or the right. H is represented in the form H = I - tau * v * v' where tau is a complex scalar and v is a complex vector. If tau = 0, then H is taken to be the unit matrix. To apply H' (the conjugate transpose of H), supply conjg(tau) instead tau.
 complib/zlarfb(3) -- complex M-by-N matrix C, from either the left or the right
    ZLARFB applies a complex block reflector H or its transpose H' to a complex M-by-N matrix C, from either the left or the right.
 complib/zlarfg(3) -- generate a complex elementary reflector H of order n, such that H' * ( alpha ) = ( beta ), H' * H = I
    ZLARFG generates a complex elementary reflector H of order n, such that ( x ) ( 0 ) where alpha and beta are scalars, with beta real, and x is an (n-1)- element complex vector. H is represented in the form H = I - tau * ( 1 ) * ( 1 v' ) , ( v ) where tau is a complex scalar and v is a complex (n-1)-element vector. Note that H is not hermitian. If the elements of x are all zero and alpha is real, then tau = 0 and H is taken to be the unit matrix. Otherwise 1 <= real(tau) <= 2 and abs(tau-1) <= 1...
 complib/zlarft(3) -- form the triangular factor T of a complex block reflector H of order n, which is defined as a product of k ele
    ZLARFT forms the triangular factor T of a complex block reflector H of order n, which is defined as a product of k elementary reflectors. If DIRECT = 'F', H = H(1) H(2) . . . H(k) and T is upper triangular; If DIRECT = 'B', H = H(k) . . . H(2) H(1) and T is lower triangular. If STOREV = 'C', the vector which defines the elementary reflector H(i) is stored in the i-th column of the array V, and H = I - V * T * V' If STOREV = 'R', the vector which defines the elementary reflector H(i) is ...
 complib/zlarfx(3) -- applie a complex elementary reflector H to a complex m by n matrix C, from either the left or the right
    ZLARFX applies a complex elementary reflector H to a complex m by n matrix C, from either the left or the right. H is represented in the form H = I - tau * v * v' where tau is a complex scalar and v is a complex vector. If tau = 0, then H is taken to be the unit matrix This version uses inline code if H has order < 11.
 complib/zlargv(3) -- generate a vector of complex plane rotations with real cosines, determined by elements of the complex vectors
    ZLARGV generates a vector of complex plane rotations with real cosines, determined by elements of the complex vectors x and y. For i = 1,2,...,n ( c(i) s(i) ) ( x(i) ) = ( a(i) ) ( -conjg(s(i)) c(i) ) ( y(i) ) = ( 0 )
 complib/zlarnv(3) -- return a vector of n random complex numbers from a uniform or normal distribution
    ZLARNV returns a vector of n random complex numbers from a uniform or normal distribution.
 complib/zlartg(3) -- generate a plane rotation so that [ CS SN ] [ F ] [ R ] [ __ ]
    ZLARTG generates a plane rotation so that [ -SN CS ] [ G ] [ 0 ] This is a faster version of the BLAS1 routine ZROTG, except for the following differences: F and G are unchanged on return. If G=0, then CS=1 and SN=0. If F=0 and (G .ne. 0), then CS=0 and SN=1 without doing any floating point operations.
 complib/zlartv(3) -- applie a vector of complex plane rotations with real cosines to elements of the complex vectors x and y
    ZLARTV applies a vector of complex plane rotations with real cosines to elements of the complex vectors x and y. For i = 1,2,...,n ( x(i) ) := ( c(i) s(i) ) ( x(i) ) ( y(i) ) ( -conjg(s(i)) c(i) ) ( y(i) )
 complib/zlascl(3) -- multiplie the M by N complex matrix A by the real scalar CTO/CFROM
    ZLASCL multiplies the M by N complex matrix A by the real scalar CTO/CFROM. This is done without over/underflow as long as the final result CTO*A(I,J)/CFROM does not over/underflow. TYPE specifies that A may be full, upper triangular, lower triangular, upper Hessenberg, or banded.
 complib/zlaset(3) -- initialize a 2-D array A to BETA on the diagonal and ALPHA on the offdiagonals
    ZLASET initializes a 2-D array A to BETA on the diagonal and ALPHA on the offdiagonals.
 complib/zlasr(3) -- where A is an m by n complex matrix and P is an orthogonal matrix,
    ZLASR performs the transformation consisting of a sequence of plane rotations determined by the parameters PIVOT and DIRECT as follows ( z = m when SIDE = 'L' or 'l' and z = n when SIDE = 'R' or 'r' ): When DIRECT = 'F' or 'f' ( Forward sequence ) then P = P( z - 1 )*...*P( 2 )*P( 1 ), and when DIRECT = 'B' or 'b' ( Backward sequence ) then P = P( 1 )*P( 2 )*...*P( z - 1 ), where P( k ) is a plane rotation matrix for the following planes: when PIVOT = 'V' or 'v' ( Variable pi...
 complib/zlassq(3) -- )**2 +...+ x( n )**2 + ( scale**2 )*sumsq,
    ZLASSQ returns the values scl and ssq such that where x( i ) = abs( X( 1 + ( i - 1 )*INCX ) ). The value of sumsq is assumed to be at least unity and the value of ssq will then satisfy 1.0 .le. ssq .le. ( sumsq + 2*n ). scale is assumed to be non-negative and scl returns the value scl = max( scale, abs( real( x( i ) ) ), abs( aimag( x( i ) ) ) ), i scale and sumsq must be supplied in SCALE and SUMSQ respectively. SCALE and SUMSQ are overwritten by scl and ssq respectively. The routine makes only...
 complib/zlaswp(3) -- perform a series of row interchanges on the matrix A
    ZLASWP performs a series of row interchanges on the matrix A. One row interchange is initiated for each of rows K1 through K2 of A.
 complib/zlasyf(3) -- using the Bunch-Kaufman diagonal pivoting method
    ZLASYF computes a partial factorization of a complex symmetric matrix A using the Bunch-Kaufman diagonal pivoting method. The partial factorization has the form: A = ( I U12 ) ( A11 0 ) ( I 0 ) if UPLO = 'U', or: ( 0 U22 ) ( 0 D ) ( U12' U22' ) A = ( L11 0 ) ( D 0 ) ( L11' L21' ) if UPLO = 'L' ( L21 I ) ( 0 A22 ) ( 0 I ) where the order of D is at most NB. The actual order is returned in the argument KB, and is either NB or NB-1, or N if N <= NB. Note that U' denotes the transpose of U....
 complib/zlatbs(3) -- s*b, or A**H * x = s*b,
    ZLATBS solves one of the triangular systems with scaling to prevent overflow, where A is an upper or lower triangular band matrix. Here A' denotes the transpose of A, x and b are n-element vectors, and s is a scaling factor, usually less than or equal to 1, chosen so that the components of x will be less than the overflow threshold. If the unscaled problem will not cause overflow, the Level 2 BLAS routine ZTBSV is called. If the matrix A is singular (A(j,j) = 0 for some j), then s is set to 0 a...
 complib/zlatps(3) -- s*b, or A**H * x = s*b,
    ZLATPS solves one of the triangular systems with scaling to prevent overflow, where A is an upper or lower triangular matrix stored in packed form. Here A**T denotes the transpose of A, A**H denotes the conjugate transpose of A, x and b are n-element vectors, and s is a scaling factor, usually less than or equal to 1, chosen so that the components of x will be less than the overflow threshold. If the unscaled problem will not cause overflow, the Level 2 BLAS routine ZTPSV is called. If the matri...
 complib/zlatrd(3) -- reduce NB rows and columns of a complex Hermitian matrix A to Hermitian tridiagonal form by a unitary similari
    ZLATRD reduces NB rows and columns of a complex Hermitian matrix A to Hermitian tridiagonal form by a unitary similarity transformation Q' * A * Q, and returns the matrices V and W which are needed to apply the transformation to the unreduced part of A. If UPLO = 'U', ZLATRD reduces the last NB rows and columns of a matrix, of which the upper triangle is supplied; if UPLO = 'L', ZLATRD reduces the first NB rows and columns of a matrix, of which the lower triangle is supplied. This is an aux...
 complib/zlatrs(3) -- s*b, or A**H * x = s*b,
    ZLATRS solves one of the triangular systems with scaling to prevent overflow. Here A is an upper or lower triangular matrix, A**T denotes the transpose of A, A**H denotes the conjugate transpose of A, x and b are n-element vectors, and s is a scaling factor, usually less than or equal to 1, chosen so that the components of x will be less than the overflow threshold. If the unscaled problem will not cause overflow, the Level 2 BLAS routine ZTRSV is called. If the matrix A is singular (A(j,j) = 0 ...
 complib/zlatzm(3) -- applie a Householder matrix generated by ZTZRQF to a matrix
    ZLATZM applies a Householder matrix generated by ZTZRQF to a matrix. Let P = I - tau*u*u', u = ( 1 ), ( v ) where v is an (m-1) vector if SIDE = 'L', or a (n-1) vector if SIDE = 'R'. If SIDE equals 'L', let C = [ C1 ] 1 [ C2 ] m-1 n Then C is overwritten by P*C. If SIDE equals 'R', let C = [ C1, C2 ] m 1 n-1 Then C is overwritten by C*P.
 complib/zlauu2(3) -- compute the product U * U' or L' * L, where the triangular factor U or L is stored in the upper or lower trian
    ZLAUU2 computes the product U * U' or L' * L, where the triangular factor U or L is stored in the upper or lower triangular part of the array A. If UPLO = 'U' or 'u' then the upper triangle of the result is stored, overwriting the factor U in A. If UPLO = 'L' or 'l' then the lower triangle of the result is stored, overwriting the factor L in A. This is the unblocked form of the algorithm, calling Level 2 BLAS....
 complib/zlauum(3) -- compute the product U * U' or L' * L, where the triangular factor U or L is stored in the upper or lower trian
    ZLAUUM computes the product U * U' or L' * L, where the triangular factor U or L is stored in the upper or lower triangular part of the array A. If UPLO = 'U' or 'u' then the upper triangle of the result is stored, overwriting the factor U in A. If UPLO = 'L' or 'l' then the lower triangle of the result is stored, overwriting the factor L in A. This is the blocked form of the algorithm, calling Level 3 BLAS....
 complib/zpbcon(3) -- estimate the reciprocal of the condition number (in the 1-norm) of a complex Hermitian positive definite band
    ZPBCON estimates the reciprocal of the condition number (in the 1-norm) of a complex Hermitian positive definite band matrix using the Cholesky factorization A = U**H*U or A = L*L**H computed by ZPBTRF. An estimate is obtained for norm(inv(A)), and the reciprocal of the condition number is computed as RCOND = 1 / (ANORM * norm(inv(A))).
 complib/zpbequ(3) -- compute row and column scalings intended to equilibrate a Hermitian positive definite band matrix A and reduce
    ZPBEQU computes row and column scalings intended to equilibrate a Hermitian positive definite band matrix A and reduce its condition number (with respect to the two-norm). S contains the scale factors, S(i) = 1/sqrt(A(i,i)), chosen so that the scaled matrix B with elements B(i,j) = S(i)*A(i,j)*S(j) has ones on the diagonal. This choice of S puts the condition number of B within a factor N of the smallest possible condition number over all possible diagonal scalings....
 complib/zpbrfs(3) -- when the coefficient matrix is Hermitian positive definite and banded, and provides error bounds and backward
    ZPBRFS improves the computed solution to a system of linear equations when the coefficient matrix is Hermitian positive definite and banded, and provides error bounds and backward error estimates for the solution.
 complib/zpbstf(3) -- compute a split Cholesky factorization of a complex Hermitian positive definite band matrix A
    ZPBSTF computes a split Cholesky factorization of a complex Hermitian positive definite band matrix A. This routine is designed to be used in conjunction with ZHBGST. The factorization has the form A = S**H*S where S is a band matrix of the same bandwidth as A and the following structure: S = ( U ) ( M L ) where U is upper triangular of order m = (n+kd)/2, and L is lower triangular of order n-m.
 complib/zpbsv(3) -- X = B,
    ZPBSV computes the solution to a complex system of linear equations A * X = B, where A is an N-by-N Hermitian positive definite band matrix and X and B are N-by-NRHS matrices. The Cholesky decomposition is used to factor A as A = U**H * U, if UPLO = 'U', or A = L * L**H, if UPLO = 'L', where U is an upper triangular band matrix, and L is a lower triangular band matrix, with the same number of superdiagonals or subdiagonals as A. The factored form of A is then used to solve the system of equa...
 complib/zpbsvx(3) -- compute the solution to a complex system of linear equations A * X = B,
    ZPBSVX uses the Cholesky factorization A = U**H*U or A = L*L**H to compute the solution to a complex system of linear equations A * X = B, where A is an N-by-N Hermitian positive definite band matrix and X and B are N-by-NRHS matrices. Error bounds on the solution and a condition estimate are also provided.
 complib/zpbtf2(3) -- compute the Cholesky factorization of a complex Hermitian positive definite band matrix A
    ZPBTF2 computes the Cholesky factorization of a complex Hermitian positive definite band matrix A. The factorization has the form A = U' * U , if UPLO = 'U', or A = L * L', if UPLO = 'L', where U is an upper triangular matrix, U' is the conjugate transpose of U, and L is lower triangular. This is the unblocked version of the algorithm, calling Level 2 BLAS.
 complib/zpbtrf(3) -- compute the Cholesky factorization of a complex Hermitian positive definite band matrix A
    ZPBTRF computes the Cholesky factorization of a complex Hermitian positive definite band matrix A. The factorization has the form A = U**H * U, if UPLO = 'U', or A = L * L**H, if UPLO = 'L', where U is an upper triangular matrix and L is lower triangular.
 complib/zpbtrs(3) -- solve a system of linear equations A*X = B with a Hermitian positive definite band matrix A using the Cholesky
    ZPBTRS solves a system of linear equations A*X = B with a Hermitian positive definite band matrix A using the Cholesky factorization A = U**H*U or A = L*L**H computed by ZPBTRF.
 complib/zpocon(3) -- estimate the reciprocal of the condition number (in the 1-norm) of a complex Hermitian positive definite matri
    ZPOCON estimates the reciprocal of the condition number (in the 1-norm) of a complex Hermitian positive definite matrix using the Cholesky factorization A = U**H*U or A = L*L**H computed by ZPOTRF. An estimate is obtained for norm(inv(A)), and the reciprocal of the condition number is computed as RCOND = 1 / (ANORM * norm(inv(A))).
 complib/zpoequ(3) -- compute row and column scalings intended to equilibrate a Hermitian positive definite matrix A and reduce its
    ZPOEQU computes row and column scalings intended to equilibrate a Hermitian positive definite matrix A and reduce its condition number (with respect to the two-norm). S contains the scale factors, S(i) = 1/sqrt(A(i,i)), chosen so that the scaled matrix B with elements B(i,j) = S(i)*A(i,j)*S(j) has ones on the diagonal. This choice of S puts the condition number of B within a factor N of the smallest possible condition number over all possible diagonal scalings....
 complib/zporfs(3) -- when the coefficient matrix is Hermitian positive definite,
    ZPORFS improves the computed solution to a system of linear equations when the coefficient matrix is Hermitian positive definite, and provides error bounds and backward error estimates for the solution.
 complib/zposv(3) -- X = B,
    ZPOSV computes the solution to a complex system of linear equations A * X = B, where A is an N-by-N Hermitian positive definite matrix and X and B are N-by-NRHS matrices. The Cholesky decomposition is used to factor A as A = U**H* U, if UPLO = 'U', or A = L * L**H, if UPLO = 'L', where U is an upper triangular matrix and L is a lower triangular matrix. The factored form of A is then used to solve the system of equations A * X = B....
 complib/zposvx(3) -- compute the solution to a complex system of linear equations A * X = B,
    ZPOSVX uses the Cholesky factorization A = U**H*U or A = L*L**H to compute the solution to a complex system of linear equations A * X = B, where A is an N-by-N Hermitian positive definite matrix and X and B are N-by-NRHS matrices. Error bounds on the solution and a condition estimate are also provided.
 complib/zpotf2(3) -- compute the Cholesky factorization of a complex Hermitian positive definite matrix A
    ZPOTF2 computes the Cholesky factorization of a complex Hermitian positive definite matrix A. The factorization has the form A = U' * U , if UPLO = 'U', or A = L * L', if UPLO = 'L', where U is an upper triangular matrix and L is lower triangular. This is the unblocked version of the algorithm, calling Level 2 BLAS.
 complib/zpotrf(3) -- compute the Cholesky factorization of a complex Hermitian positive definite matrix A
    ZPOTRF computes the Cholesky factorization of a complex Hermitian positive definite matrix A. The factorization has the form A = U**H * U, if UPLO = 'U', or A = L * L**H, if UPLO = 'L', where U is an upper triangular matrix and L is lower triangular. This is the block version of the algorithm, calling Level 3 BLAS.
 complib/zpotri(3) -- compute the inverse of a complex Hermitian positive definite matrix A using the Cholesky factorization A = U**
    ZPOTRI computes the inverse of a complex Hermitian positive definite matrix A using the Cholesky factorization A = U**H*U or A = L*L**H computed by ZPOTRF.
 complib/zpotrs(3) -- solve a system of linear equations A*X = B with a Hermitian positive definite matrix A using the Cholesky fact
    ZPOTRS solves a system of linear equations A*X = B with a Hermitian positive definite matrix A using the Cholesky factorization A = U**H*U or A = L*L**H computed by ZPOTRF.
 complib/zppcon(3) -- estimate the reciprocal of the condition number (in the 1-norm) of a complex Hermitian positive definite packe
    ZPPCON estimates the reciprocal of the condition number (in the 1-norm) of a complex Hermitian positive definite packed matrix using the Cholesky factorization A = U**H*U or A = L*L**H computed by ZPPTRF. An estimate is obtained for norm(inv(A)), and the reciprocal of the condition number is computed as RCOND = 1 / (ANORM * norm(inv(A))).
 complib/zppequ(3) -- compute row and column scalings intended to equilibrate a Hermitian positive definite matrix A in packed stora
    ZPPEQU computes row and column scalings intended to equilibrate a Hermitian positive definite matrix A in packed storage and reduce its condition number (with respect to the two-norm). S contains the scale factors, S(i)=1/sqrt(A(i,i)), chosen so that the scaled matrix B with elements B(i,j)=S(i)*A(i,j)*S(j) has ones on the diagonal. This choice of S puts the condition number of B within a factor N of the smallest possible condition number over all possible diagonal scalings....
 complib/zpprfs(3) -- when the coefficient matrix is Hermitian positive definite and packed, and provides error bounds and backward
    ZPPRFS improves the computed solution to a system of linear equations when the coefficient matrix is Hermitian positive definite and packed, and provides error bounds and backward error estimates for the solution.
 complib/zppsv(3) -- X = B,
    ZPPSV computes the solution to a complex system of linear equations A * X = B, where A is an N-by-N Hermitian positive definite matrix stored in packed format and X and B are N-by-NRHS matrices. The Cholesky decomposition is used to factor A as A = U**H* U, if UPLO = 'U', or A = L * L**H, if UPLO = 'L', where U is an upper triangular matrix and L is a lower triangular matrix. The factored form of A is then used to solve the system of equations A * X = B....
 complib/zppsvx(3) -- compute the solution to a complex system of linear equations A * X = B,
    ZPPSVX uses the Cholesky factorization A = U**H*U or A = L*L**H to compute the solution to a complex system of linear equations A * X = B, where A is an N-by-N Hermitian positive definite matrix stored in packed format and X and B are N-by-NRHS matrices. Error bounds on the solution and a condition estimate are also provided.
 complib/zpptrf(3) -- compute the Cholesky factorization of a complex Hermitian positive definite matrix A stored in packed format
    ZPPTRF computes the Cholesky factorization of a complex Hermitian positive definite matrix A stored in packed format. The factorization has the form A = U**H * U, if UPLO = 'U', or A = L * L**H, if UPLO = 'L', where U is an upper triangular matrix and L is lower triangular.
 complib/zpptri(3) -- compute the inverse of a complex Hermitian positive definite matrix A using the Cholesky factorization A = U**
    ZPPTRI computes the inverse of a complex Hermitian positive definite matrix A using the Cholesky factorization A = U**H*U or A = L*L**H computed by ZPPTRF.
 complib/zpptrs(3) -- solve a system of linear equations A*X = B with a Hermitian positive definite matrix A in packed storage using
    ZPPTRS solves a system of linear equations A*X = B with a Hermitian positive definite matrix A in packed storage using the Cholesky factorization A = U**H*U or A = L*L**H computed by ZPPTRF.
 complib/zptcon(3) -- compute the reciprocal of the condition number (in the 1-norm) of a complex Hermitian positive definite tridia
    ZPTCON computes the reciprocal of the condition number (in the 1-norm) of a complex Hermitian positive definite tridiagonal matrix using the factorization A = L*D*L**H or A = U**H*D*U computed by ZPTTRF. Norm(inv(A)) is computed by a direct method, and the reciprocal of the condition number is computed as RCOND = 1 / (ANORM * norm(inv(A))).
 complib/zpteqr(3) -- compute all eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a symmetric positive definite tridiagonal matrix by f
    ZPTEQR computes all eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a symmetric positive definite tridiagonal matrix by first factoring the matrix using DPTTRF and then calling ZBDSQR to compute the singular values of the bidiagonal factor. This routine computes the eigenvalues of the positive definite tridiagonal matrix to high relative accuracy. This means that if the eigenvalues range over many orders of magnitude in size, then the small eigenvalues and corresponding eigenvectors will be compute...
 complib/zptrfs(3) -- improve the computed solution to a system of linear equations when the coefficient matrix is Hermitian positiv
    ZPTRFS improves the computed solution to a system of linear equations when the coefficient matrix is Hermitian positive definite and tridiagonal, and provides error bounds and backward error estimates for the solution.
 complib/zptsv(3) -- and X and B are N-by-NRHS matrices
    ZPTSV computes the solution to a complex system of linear equations A*X = B, where A is an N-by-N Hermitian positive definite tridiagonal matrix, and X and B are N-by-NRHS matrices. A is factored as A = L*D*L**H, and the factored form of A is then used to solve the system of equations.
 complib/zptsvx(3) -- Hermitian positive definite tridiagonal matrix and X and B are N-by-NRHS matrices
    ZPTSVX uses the factorization A = L*D*L**H to compute the solution to a complex system of linear equations A*X = B, where A is an N-by-N Hermitian positive definite tridiagonal matrix and X and B are N-by-NRHS matrices. Error bounds on the solution and a condition estimate are also provided.
 complib/zpttrf(3) -- compute the factorization of a complex Hermitian positive definite tridiagonal matrix A
    ZPTTRF computes the factorization of a complex Hermitian positive definite tridiagonal matrix A. If the subdiagonal elements of A are supplied in the array E, the factorization has the form A = L*D*L**H, where D is diagonal and L is unit lower bidiagonal; if the superdiagonal elements of A are supplied, it has the form A = U**H*D*U, where U is unit upper bidiagonal.
 complib/zpttrs(3) -- solve a system of linear equations A * X = B with a Hermitian positive definite tridiagonal matrix A using the
    ZPTTRS solves a system of linear equations A * X = B with a Hermitian positive definite tridiagonal matrix A using the factorization A = U**H*D*U or A = L*D*L**H computed by ZPTTRF.
 standard/zsource(3) -- selects the source for z-buffering comparisons
    src expects one of two possible values: ZSRC_DEPTH, z-buffering is done by depth comparison (default). ZSRC_COLOR, z-buffering is done by color comparison.
 complib/zspcon(3) -- estimate the reciprocal of the condition number (in the 1-norm) of a complex symmetric packed matrix A using t
    ZSPCON estimates the reciprocal of the condition number (in the 1-norm) of a complex symmetric packed matrix A using the factorization A = U*D*U**T or A = L*D*L**T computed by ZSPTRF. An estimate is obtained for norm(inv(A)), and the reciprocal of the condition number is computed as RCOND = 1 / (ANORM * norm(inv(A))).
 complib/zspr(3) -- + A,
    ZSPR performs the symmetric rank 1 operation where alpha is a complex scalar, x is an n element vector and A is an n by n symmetric matrix, supplied in packed form.
 complib/zsprfs(3) -- improve the computed solution to a system of linear equations when the coefficient matrix is symmetric indefin
    ZSPRFS improves the computed solution to a system of linear equations when the coefficient matrix is symmetric indefinite and packed, and provides error bounds and backward error estimates for the solution.
 complib/zspsv(3) -- X = B,
    ZSPSV computes the solution to a complex system of linear equations A * X = B, where A is an N-by-N symmetric matrix stored in packed format and X and B are N-by-NRHS matrices. The diagonal pivoting method is used to factor A as A = U * D * U**T, if UPLO = 'U', or A = L * D * L**T, if UPLO = 'L', where U (or L) is a product of permutation and unit upper (lower) triangular matrices, D is symmetric and block diagonal with 1-by-1 and 2-by-2 diagonal blocks. The factored form of A is then used t...
 complib/zspsvx(3) -- and X and B are N-by-NRHS matrices
    ZSPSVX uses the diagonal pivoting factorization A = U*D*U**T or A = L*D*L**T to compute the solution to a complex system of linear equations A * X = B, where A is an N-by-N symmetric matrix stored in packed format and X and B are N-by-NRHS matrices. Error bounds on the solution and a condition estimate are also provided.
 complib/zsptrf(3) -- in packed format using the Bunch-Kaufman diagonal pivoting method
    ZSPTRF computes the factorization of a complex symmetric matrix A stored in packed format using the Bunch-Kaufman diagonal pivoting method: A = U*D*U**T or A = L*D*L**T where U (or L) is a product of permutation and unit upper (lower) triangular matrices, and D is symmetric and block diagonal with 1-by-1 and 2-by-2 diagonal blocks.
 complib/zsptri(3) -- compute the inverse of a complex symmetric indefinite matrix A in packed storage using the factorization A = U
    ZSPTRI computes the inverse of a complex symmetric indefinite matrix A in packed storage using the factorization A = U*D*U**T or A = L*D*L**T computed by ZSPTRF.
 complib/zsptrs(3) -- solve a system of linear equations A*X = B with a complex symmetric matrix A stored in packed format using the
    ZSPTRS solves a system of linear equations A*X = B with a complex symmetric matrix A stored in packed format using the factorization A = U*D*U**T or A = L*D*L**T computed by ZSPTRF.
 complib/zsrscl(3) -- multiplie an n-element complex vector x by the real scalar 1/a
    CDRSCL multiplies an n-element complex vector x by the real scalar 1/a. This is done without overflow or underflow as long as the final result x/a does not overflow or underflow.
 complib/zstedc(3) -- compute all eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a symmetric tridiagonal matrix using the divide and c
    ZSTEDC computes all eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a symmetric tridiagonal matrix using the divide and conquer method. The eigenvectors of a full or band complex Hermitian matrix can also be found if ZHETRD or ZHPTRD or ZHBTRD has been used to reduce this matrix to tridiagonal form. This code makes very mild assumptions about floating point arithmetic. It will work on machines with a guard digit in add/subtract, or on those binary machines without guard digits which subtract like t...
 complib/zstein(3) -- compute the eigenvectors of a real symmetric tridiagonal matrix T corresponding to specified eigenvalues, usin
    ZSTEIN computes the eigenvectors of a real symmetric tridiagonal matrix T corresponding to specified eigenvalues, using inverse iteration. The maximum number of iterations allowed for each eigenvector is specified by an internal parameter MAXITS (currently set to 5). Although the eigenvectors are real, they are stored in a complex array, which may be passed to ZUNMTR or ZUPMTR for back transformation to the eigenvectors of a complex Hermitian matrix which was reduced to tridiagonal form....
 complib/zsteqr(3) -- compute all eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a symmetric tridiagonal matrix using the implicit QL
    ZSTEQR computes all eigenvalues and, optionally, eigenvectors of a symmetric tridiagonal matrix using the implicit QL or QR method. The eigenvectors of a full or band complex Hermitian matrix can also be found if ZHETRD or ZHPTRD or ZHBTRD has been used to reduce this matrix to tridiagonal form.
 complib/zsycon(3) -- estimate the reciprocal of the condition number (in the 1-norm) of a complex symmetric matrix A using the fact
    ZSYCON estimates the reciprocal of the condition number (in the 1-norm) of a complex symmetric matrix A using the factorization A = U*D*U**T or A = L*D*L**T computed by ZSYTRF. An estimate is obtained for norm(inv(A)), and the reciprocal of the condition number is computed as RCOND = 1 / (ANORM * norm(inv(A))).
 complib/zsyr(3) -- perform the symmetric rank 1 operation A := alpha*x*( x' ) + A,
    ZSYR performs the symmetric rank 1 operation where alpha is a complex scalar, x is an n element vector and A is an n by n symmetric matrix.
 complib/zsyrfs(3) -- improve the computed solution to a system of linear equations when the coefficient matrix is symmetric indefin
    ZSYRFS improves the computed solution to a system of linear equations when the coefficient matrix is symmetric indefinite, and provides error bounds and backward error estimates for the solution.
 complib/zsysv(3) -- X = B,
    ZSYSV computes the solution to a complex system of linear equations A * X = B, where A is an N-by-N symmetric matrix and X and B are Nby-NRHS matrices. The diagonal pivoting method is used to factor A as A = U * D * U**T, if UPLO = 'U', or A = L * D * L**T, if UPLO = 'L', where U (or L) is a product of permutation and unit upper (lower) triangular matrices, and D is symmetric and block diagonal with 1-by-1 and 2-by-2 diagonal blocks. The factored form of A is then used to solve the system of...
 complib/zsysvx(3) -- to a complex system of linear equations A * X = B,
    ZSYSVX uses the diagonal pivoting factorization to compute the solution to a complex system of linear equations A * X = B, where A is an N-by-N symmetric matrix and X and B are N-by-NRHS matrices. Error bounds on the solution and a condition estimate are also provided.
 complib/zsytf2(3) -- the Bunch-Kaufman diagonal pivoting method
    ZSYTF2 computes the factorization of a complex symmetric matrix A using the Bunch-Kaufman diagonal pivoting method: A = U*D*U' or A = L*D*L' where U (or L) is a product of permutation and unit upper (lower) triangular matrices, U' is the transpose of U, and D is symmetric and block diagonal with 1-by-1 and 2-by-2 diagonal blocks. This is the unblocked version of the algorithm, calling Level 2 BLAS....
 complib/zsytrf(3) -- the Bunch-Kaufman diagonal pivoting method
    ZSYTRF computes the factorization of a complex symmetric matrix A using the Bunch-Kaufman diagonal pivoting method. The form of the factorization is A = U*D*U**T or A = L*D*L**T where U (or L) is a product of permutation and unit upper (lower) triangular matrices, and D is symmetric and block diagonal with with 1- by-1 and 2-by-2 diagonal blocks. This is the blocked version of the algorithm, calling Level 3 BLAS....
 complib/zsytri(3) -- compute the inverse of a complex symmetric indefinite matrix A using the factorization A = U*D*U**T or A = L*D
    ZSYTRI computes the inverse of a complex symmetric indefinite matrix A using the factorization A = U*D*U**T or A = L*D*L**T computed by ZSYTRF.
 complib/zsytrs(3) -- solve a system of linear equations A*X = B with a complex symmetric matrix A using the factorization A = U*D*U
    ZSYTRS solves a system of linear equations A*X = B with a complex symmetric matrix A using the factorization A = U*D*U**T or A = L*D*L**T computed by ZSYTRF.
 complib/ztbcon(3) -- band matrix A, in either the 1-norm or the infinity-norm
    ZTBCON estimates the reciprocal of the condition number of a triangular band matrix A, in either the 1-norm or the infinity-norm. The norm of A is computed and an estimate is obtained for norm(inv(A)), then the reciprocal of the condition number is computed as RCOND = 1 / ( norm(A) * norm(inv(A)) ).
 complib/ztbrfs(3) -- provide error bounds and backward error estimates for the solution to a system of linear equations with a tria
    ZTBRFS provides error bounds and backward error estimates for the solution to a system of linear equations with a triangular band coefficient matrix. The solution matrix X must be computed by ZTBTRS or some other means before entering this routine. ZTBRFS does not do iterative refinement because doing so cannot improve the backward error.
 complib/ztbtrs(3) -- or A**H * X = B,
    ZTBTRS solves a triangular system of the form where A is a triangular band matrix of order N, and B is an N-by-NRHS matrix. A check is made to verify that A is nonsingular.
 complib/ztgevc(3) -- compute some or all of the right and/or left generalized eigenvectors of a pair of complex upper triangular ma
    ZTGEVC computes some or all of the right and/or left generalized eigenvectors of a pair of complex upper triangular matrices (A,B). The right generalized eigenvector x and the left generalized eigenvector y of (A,B) corresponding to a generalized eigenvalue w are defined by: (A - wB) * x = 0 and y**H * (A - wB) = 0 where y**H denotes the conjugate tranpose of y. If an eigenvalue w is determined by zero diagonal elements of both A and B, a unit vector is returned as the corresponding eigenvector....
 complib/ztgsja(3) -- compute the generalized singular value decomposition (GSVD) of two complex upper triangular (or trapezoidal) m
    ZTGSJA computes the generalized singular value decomposition (GSVD) of two complex upper triangular (or trapezoidal) matrices A and B. On entry, it is assumed that matrices A and B have the following forms, which may be obtained by the preprocessing subroutine ZGGSVP from a general M-by-N matrix A and P-by-N matrix B: N-K-L K L A = K ( 0 A12 A13 ) if M-K-L >= 0; L ( 0 0 A23 ) M-K-L ( 0 0 0 ) N-K-L K L A = K ( 0 A12 A13 ) if M-K-L < 0; M-K ( 0 0 A23 ) N-K-L K L B = L ( 0 0 B13 ) P-L ( 0 0 0 ) whe...
 complib/ztpcon(3) -- triangular matrix A, in either the 1-norm or the infinity-norm
    ZTPCON estimates the reciprocal of the condition number of a packed triangular matrix A, in either the 1-norm or the infinity-norm. The norm of A is computed and an estimate is obtained for norm(inv(A)), then the reciprocal of the condition number is computed as RCOND = 1 / ( norm(A) * norm(inv(A)) ).
 complib/ztprfs(3) -- provide error bounds and backward error estimates for the solution to a system of linear equations with a tria
    ZTPRFS provides error bounds and backward error estimates for the solution to a system of linear equations with a triangular packed coefficient matrix. The solution matrix X must be computed by ZTPTRS or some other means before entering this routine. ZTPRFS does not do iterative refinement because doing so cannot improve the backward error.
 complib/ztptri(3) -- compute the inverse of a complex upper or lower triangular matrix A stored in packed format
    ZTPTRI computes the inverse of a complex upper or lower triangular matrix A stored in packed format.
 complib/ztptrs(3) -- or A**H * X = B,
    ZTPTRS solves a triangular system of the form where A is a triangular matrix of order N stored in packed format, and B is an N-by-NRHS matrix. A check is made to verify that A is nonsingular.
 complib/ztrcon(3) -- matrix A, in either the 1-norm or the infinity-norm
    ZTRCON estimates the reciprocal of the condition number of a triangular matrix A, in either the 1-norm or the infinity-norm. The norm of A is computed and an estimate is obtained for norm(inv(A)), then the reciprocal of the condition number is computed as RCOND = 1 / ( norm(A) * norm(inv(A)) ).
 complib/ztrevc(3) -- compute some or all of the right and/or left eigenvectors of a complex upper triangular matrix T
    ZTREVC computes some or all of the right and/or left eigenvectors of a complex upper triangular matrix T. The right eigenvector x and the left eigenvector y of T corresponding to an eigenvalue w are defined by: T*x = w*x, y'*T = w*y' where y' denotes the conjugate transpose of the vector y. If all eigenvectors are requested, the routine may either return the matrices X and/or Y of right or left eigenvectors of T, or the products Q*X and/or Q*Y, where Q is an input unitary matrix. If T was obt...
 complib/ztrexc(3) -- reorder the Schur factorization of a complex matrix A = Q*T*Q**H, so that the diagonal element of T with row i
    ZTREXC reorders the Schur factorization of a complex matrix A = Q*T*Q**H, so that the diagonal element of T with row index IFST is moved to row ILST. The Schur form T is reordered by a unitary similarity transformation Z**H*T*Z, and optionally the matrix Q of Schur vectors is updated by postmultplying it with Z.
 complib/ztrrfs(3) -- provide error bounds and backward error estimates for the solution to a system of linear equations with a tria
    ZTRRFS provides error bounds and backward error estimates for the solution to a system of linear equations with a triangular coefficient matrix. The solution matrix X must be computed by ZTRTRS or some other means before entering this routine. ZTRRFS does not do iterative refinement because doing so cannot improve the backward error.
 complib/ztrsen(3) -- reorder the Schur factorization of a complex matrix A = Q*T*Q**H, so that a selected cluster of eigenvalues ap
    ZTRSEN reorders the Schur factorization of a complex matrix A = Q*T*Q**H, so that a selected cluster of eigenvalues appears in the leading positions on the diagonal of the upper triangular matrix T, and the leading columns of Q form an orthonormal basis of the corresponding right invariant subspace. Optionally the routine computes the reciprocal condition numbers of the cluster of eigenvalues and/or the invariant subspace....
 complib/ztrsna(3) -- estimate reciprocal condition numbers for specified eigenvalues and/or right eigenvectors of a complex upper t
    ZTRSNA estimates reciprocal condition numbers for specified eigenvalues and/or right eigenvectors of a complex upper triangular matrix T (or of any matrix Q*T*Q**H with Q unitary).
 complib/ztrsyl(3) -- solve the complex Sylvester matrix equation
    ZTRSYL solves the complex Sylvester matrix equation: op(A)*X + X*op(B) = scale*C or op(A)*X - X*op(B) = scale*C, where op(A) = A or A**H, and A and B are both upper triangular. A is Mby-M and B is N-by-N; the right hand side C and the solution X are M-byN; and scale is an output scale factor, set <= 1 to avoid overflow in X.
 complib/ztrti2(3) -- compute the inverse of a complex upper or lower triangular matrix
    ZTRTI2 computes the inverse of a complex upper or lower triangular matrix. This is the Level 2 BLAS version of the algorithm.
 complib/ztrtri(3) -- compute the inverse of a complex upper or lower triangular matrix A
    ZTRTRI computes the inverse of a complex upper or lower triangular matrix A. This is the Level 3 BLAS version of the algorithm.
 complib/ztrtrs(3) -- or A**H * X = B,
    ZTRTRS solves a triangular system of the form where A is a triangular matrix of order N, and B is an N-by-NRHS matrix. A check is made to verify that A is nonsingular.
 complib/ztzrqf(3) -- reduce the M-by-N ( M<=N ) complex upper trapezoidal matrix A to upper triangular form by means of unitary tra
    ZTZRQF reduces the M-by-N ( M<=N ) complex upper trapezoidal matrix A to upper triangular form by means of unitary transformations. The upper trapezoidal matrix A is factored as A = ( R 0 ) * Z, where Z is an N-by-N unitary matrix and R is an M-by-M upper triangular matrix.
 complib/zung2l(3) -- generate an m by n complex matrix Q with orthonormal columns,
    ZUNG2L generates an m by n complex matrix Q with orthonormal columns, which is defined as the last n columns of a product of k elementary reflectors of order m Q = H(k) . . . H(2) H(1) as returned by ZGEQLF.
 complib/zung2r(3) -- generate an m by n complex matrix Q with orthonormal columns,
    ZUNG2R generates an m by n complex matrix Q with orthonormal columns, which is defined as the first n columns of a product of k elementary reflectors of order m Q = H(1) H(2) . . . H(k) as returned by ZGEQRF.
 complib/zungbr(3) -- generate one of the complex unitary matrices Q or P**H determined by ZGEBRD when reducing a complex matrix A t
    ZUNGBR generates one of the complex unitary matrices Q or P**H determined by ZGEBRD when reducing a complex matrix A to bidiagonal form: A = Q * B * P**H. Q and P**H are defined as products of elementary reflectors H(i) or G(i) respectively. If VECT = 'Q', A is assumed to have been an M-by-K matrix, and Q is of order M: if m >= k, Q = H(1) H(2) . . . H(k) and ZUNGBR returns the first n columns of Q, where m >= n >= k; if m < k, Q = H(1) H(2) . . . H(m-1) and ZUNGBR returns Q as an M-by-M matri...
 complib/zunghr(3) -- product of IHI-ILO elementary reflectors of order N, as returned by ZGEHRD
    ZUNGHR generates a complex unitary matrix Q which is defined as the product of IHI-ILO elementary reflectors of order N, as returned by ZGEHRD: Q = H(ilo) H(ilo+1) . . . H(ihi-1).
 complib/zungl2(3) -- generate an m-by-n complex matrix Q with orthonormal rows,
    ZUNGL2 generates an m-by-n complex matrix Q with orthonormal rows, which is defined as the first m rows of a product of k elementary reflectors of order n Q = H(k)' . . . H(2)' H(1)' as returned by ZGELQF.
 complib/zunglq(3) -- generate an M-by-N complex matrix Q with orthonormal rows,
    ZUNGLQ generates an M-by-N complex matrix Q with orthonormal rows, which is defined as the first M rows of a product of K elementary reflectors of order N Q = H(k)' . . . H(2)' H(1)' as returned by ZGELQF.
 complib/zungql(3) -- generate an M-by-N complex matrix Q with orthonormal columns,
    ZUNGQL generates an M-by-N complex matrix Q with orthonormal columns, which is defined as the last N columns of a product of K elementary reflectors of order M Q = H(k) . . . H(2) H(1) as returned by ZGEQLF.
 complib/zungqr(3) -- generate an M-by-N complex matrix Q with orthonormal columns,
    ZUNGQR generates an M-by-N complex matrix Q with orthonormal columns, which is defined as the first N columns of a product of K elementary reflectors of order M Q = H(1) H(2) . . . H(k) as returned by ZGEQRF.
 complib/zungr2(3) -- generate an m by n complex matrix Q with orthonormal rows,
    ZUNGR2 generates an m by n complex matrix Q with orthonormal rows, which is defined as the last m rows of a product of k elementary reflectors of order n Q = H(1)' H(2)' . . . H(k)' as returned by ZGERQF.
 complib/zungrq(3) -- generate an M-by-N complex matrix Q with orthonormal rows,
    ZUNGRQ generates an M-by-N complex matrix Q with orthonormal rows, which is defined as the last M rows of a product of K elementary reflectors of order N Q = H(1)' H(2)' . . . H(k)' as returned by ZGERQF.
 complib/zungtr(3) -- product of n-1 elementary reflectors of order N, as returned by ZHETRD
    ZUNGTR generates a complex unitary matrix Q which is defined as the product of n-1 elementary reflectors of order N, as returned by ZHETRD: if UPLO = 'U', Q = H(n-1) . . . H(2) H(1), if UPLO = 'L', Q = H(1) H(2) . . . H(n-1).
 complib/zunm2l(3) -- overwrite the general complex m-by-n matrix C with Q * C if SIDE = 'L' and TRANS = 'N', or Q'* C if SIDE = 'L'
    ZUNM2L overwrites the general complex m-by-n matrix C with where Q is a complex unitary matrix defined as the product of k elementary reflectors Q = H(k) . . . H(2) H(1) as returned by ZGEQLF. Q is of order m if SIDE = 'L' and of order n if SIDE = 'R'.
 complib/zunm2r(3) -- overwrite the general complex m-by-n matrix C with Q * C if SIDE = 'L' and TRANS = 'N', or Q'* C if SIDE = 'L'
    ZUNM2R overwrites the general complex m-by-n matrix C with where Q is a complex unitary matrix defined as the product of k elementary reflectors Q = H(1) H(2) . . . H(k) as returned by ZGEQRF. Q is of order m if SIDE = 'L' and of order n if SIDE = 'R'.
 complib/zunmbr(3) -- VECT = 'Q', ZUNMBR overwrites the general complex M-by-N matrix C with SIDE = 'L' SIDE = 'R' TRANS = 'N'
    If VECT = 'Q', ZUNMBR overwrites the general complex M-by-N matrix C with SIDE = 'L' SIDE = 'R' TRANS = 'N': Q * C C * Q TRANS = 'C': Q**H * C C * Q**H If VECT = 'P', ZUNMBR overwrites the general complex M-by-N matrix C with SIDE = 'L' SIDE = 'R' TRANS = 'N': P * C C * P TRANS = 'C': P**H * C C * P**H Here Q and P**H are the unitary matrices determined by ZGEBRD when reducing a complex matrix A to bidiagonal form: A = Q * B * P**H. Q and P**H are defined as products of eleme...
 complib/zunmhr(3) -- overwrite the general complex M-by-N matrix C with SIDE = 'L' SIDE = 'R' TRANS = 'N'
    ZUNMHR overwrites the general complex M-by-N matrix C with TRANS = 'C': Q**H * C C * Q**H where Q is a complex unitary matrix of order nq, with nq = m if SIDE = 'L' and nq = n if SIDE = 'R'. Q is defined as the product of IHI-ILO elementary reflectors, as returned by ZGEHRD: Q = H(ilo) H(ilo+1) . . . H(ihi-1).
 complib/zunml2(3) -- overwrite the general complex m-by-n matrix C with Q * C if SIDE = 'L' and TRANS = 'N', or Q'* C if SIDE = 'L'
    ZUNML2 overwrites the general complex m-by-n matrix C with where Q is a complex unitary matrix defined as the product of k elementary reflectors Q = H(k)' . . . H(2)' H(1)' as returned by ZGELQF. Q is of order m if SIDE = 'L' and of order n if SIDE = 'R'.
 complib/zunmlq(3) -- overwrite the general complex M-by-N matrix C with SIDE = 'L' SIDE = 'R' TRANS = 'N'
    ZUNMLQ overwrites the general complex M-by-N matrix C with TRANS = 'C': Q**H * C C * Q**H where Q is a complex unitary matrix defined as the product of k elementary reflectors Q = H(k)' . . . H(2)' H(1)' as returned by ZGELQF. Q is of order M if SIDE = 'L' and of order N if SIDE = 'R'.
 complib/zunmql(3) -- overwrite the general complex M-by-N matrix C with SIDE = 'L' SIDE = 'R' TRANS = 'N'
    ZUNMQL overwrites the general complex M-by-N matrix C with TRANS = 'C': Q**H * C C * Q**H where Q is a complex unitary matrix defined as the product of k elementary reflectors Q = H(k) . . . H(2) H(1) as returned by ZGEQLF. Q is of order M if SIDE = 'L' and of order N if SIDE = 'R'.
 complib/zunmqr(3) -- overwrite the general complex M-by-N matrix C with SIDE = 'L' SIDE = 'R' TRANS = 'N'
    ZUNMQR overwrites the general complex M-by-N matrix C with TRANS = 'C': Q**H * C C * Q**H where Q is a complex unitary matrix defined as the product of k elementary reflectors Q = H(1) H(2) . . . H(k) as returned by ZGEQRF. Q is of order M if SIDE = 'L' and of order N if SIDE = 'R'.
 complib/zunmr2(3) -- overwrite the general complex m-by-n matrix C with Q * C if SIDE = 'L' and TRANS = 'N', or Q'* C if SIDE = 'L'
    ZUNMR2 overwrites the general complex m-by-n matrix C with where Q is a complex unitary matrix defined as the product of k elementary reflectors Q = H(1)' H(2)' . . . H(k)' as returned by ZGERQF. Q is of order m if SIDE = 'L' and of order n if SIDE = 'R'.
 complib/zunmrq(3) -- overwrite the general complex M-by-N matrix C with SIDE = 'L' SIDE = 'R' TRANS = 'N'
    ZUNMRQ overwrites the general complex M-by-N matrix C with TRANS = 'C': Q**H * C C * Q**H where Q is a complex unitary matrix defined as the product of k elementary reflectors Q = H(1)' H(2)' . . . H(k)' as returned by ZGERQF. Q is of order M if SIDE = 'L' and of order N if SIDE = 'R'.
 complib/zunmtr(3) -- overwrite the general complex M-by-N matrix C with SIDE = 'L' SIDE = 'R' TRANS = 'N'
    ZUNMTR overwrites the general complex M-by-N matrix C with TRANS = 'C': Q**H * C C * Q**H where Q is a complex unitary matrix of order nq, with nq = m if SIDE = 'L' and nq = n if SIDE = 'R'. Q is defined as the product of nq-1 elementary reflectors, as returned by ZHETRD: if UPLO = 'U', Q = H(nq-1) . . . H(2) H(1); if UPLO = 'L', Q = H(1) H(2) . . . H(nq-1).
 complib/zupgtr(3) -- product of n-1 elementary reflectors H(i) of order n, as returned by ZHPTRD using packed storage
    ZUPGTR generates a complex unitary matrix Q which is defined as the product of n-1 elementary reflectors H(i) of order n, as returned by ZHPTRD using packed storage: if UPLO = 'U', Q = H(n-1) . . . H(2) H(1), if UPLO = 'L', Q = H(1) H(2) . . . H(n-1).
 complib/zupmtr(3) -- overwrite the general complex M-by-N matrix C with SIDE = 'L' SIDE = 'R' TRANS = 'N'
    ZUPMTR overwrites the general complex M-by-N matrix C with TRANS = 'C': Q**H * C C * Q**H where Q is a complex unitary matrix of order nq, with nq = m if SIDE = 'L' and nq = n if SIDE = 'R'. Q is defined as the product of nq-1 elementary reflectors, as returned by ZHPTRD using packed storage: if UPLO = 'U', Q = H(nq-1) . . . H(2) H(1); if UPLO = 'L', Q = H(1) H(2) . . . H(nq-1).
 standard/zwritemask(3) -- specifies a write mask for the z-buffer of the current framebuffer
    mask expects a mask indicating which z-buffer bitplanes are read only and which can be written to. Z-buffer bitplanes that correspond to zeros in the mask are read only. Z-buffer bitplanes that correspond to ones in the mask can be written.
 libelfutil/_leb128_unsigned_decode64(3) -- decode leb128 integers
    These routines decode leb128 numbers into the integers they encode. The leb128 format is a variable-length encoding extensively used in the DWARF debugging information format and is described in the DWARF documentation. The caller must know if the leb128 number data in hand is 32 or 64 bit and if it is signed or unsigned: nothing in the leb128 format makes it possible to determine this from the input data itself. If a data points to a number which fits in 32 bits either the 32bit or 64bit decodi...
 libelfutil/_leb128_unsigned_encode64(3) -- encode leb128 integers
    These routines encode integers into the leb128 format. The leb128 format is a variable-length encoding extensively used in the DWARF debugging information format and is described in the DWARF documentation. The encoded number is placed into buffer and the number of bytes of buffer used to encode the number is returned. Link with the option -lelfutil to link in these routines. The arguments are as follows: number is the input number to be converted to leb128 format. buffer is a buffer provided by...
Page 0 of 0
Copyright © 2004-2005 DeniX Solutions SRL
newsletter delivery service